JP2020032293A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suitably executing a performance.SOLUTION: One performance executed by performance execution means is determined by performance determination means. A performance data group used for executing the one performance by the performance execution means is stored by performance data storage means for each of a plurality of performance types. The performance data group corresponding to the performance type determined by the performance determination means is selected from performance data group storage means by performance data group selection means. A plurality of data for constituting the performance data group selected by the performance data group selection means are set by data setting means so as to be used by the performance execution means in predetermined, specific order. According to a progress situation of a game, order in which the plurality of data are used is varied to order differing from the specific order by order variation means. Accordingly, performances can be executed suitably.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  As a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device is known. In this conventional gaming machine, a symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a big hit game advantageous to the player is given. In addition, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed on the display device in addition to the design, and various types of entertainment effects can be executed. Further, in such conventional gaming machines, there are also those provided with an audio output device such as a speaker, and not only a visual effect but also an auditory effect can be executed, so that the effect of the effect mode can be achieved. We were trying to diversify.

JP 2003-325886 A

  However, there is a possibility that it becomes more difficult to suitably perform the effect as the effect mode is diversified.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably executing an effect.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 performs at least one of a plurality of predetermined effects based on satisfaction of a predetermined execution condition, and the effect execution unit. The effect determining means for determining one effect to be executed from among the plurality of effects, and an effect data group formed of a plurality of data, which is used to execute one effect by the effect executing means, Effect data group storage means stored for each of the plurality of effect types, and effect data group selecting means for selecting an effect data group corresponding to the effect type determined by the effect determining means from the effect data group storage means And the plurality of data constituting the effect data group selected by the effect data group selecting means are used by the effect executing means in a predetermined specific order. Comprises a data setting means for setting, based on the progress status of the game, and a sequence changing means capable of variably in different order from said particular order the sequence in which the plurality of data is used.

  According to a second aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the data setting unit determines that the execution of the effect using the data of the last order in the specific order is completed. Is set so that the data of the first order in the order is used by the effect executing means.

  According to a third aspect of the present invention, there is provided the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, wherein a discriminating means for performing discrimination based on satisfaction of a predetermined discriminating condition, and a discrimination result obtained by discrimination by the discriminating means. Bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the effect execution means executes any of the plurality of effects during the execution of the bonus game. is there.

  According to a fourth aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the third aspect, the effect data group provided for each of the plurality of effect types is a specific effect mode set for each effect type. , And at least the second data different from the first data, and the order changing means changes the second data until the privilege game ends. The order in which the plurality of data is used is changed so that one data is used at least once by the effect executing means.

  According to a fifth aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the fourth aspect, the order varying means uses the first data by the effect executing means in a predetermined specific period of the privilege game. The order in which the plurality of data are used is changed so that the data is in a state of being used.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, an effect executing means for executing any one of a plurality of predetermined effects based on the satisfaction of a predetermined execution condition, and one of the effects executed by the effect executing means. An effect determining means for determining an effect from the plurality of effects, and an effect data group, which is used for executing one effect by the effect executing means, and is composed of a plurality of data, Effect data group storage means stored for each type, effect data group selecting means for selecting an effect data group corresponding to the effect type determined by the effect determining means from the effect data group memory means, and effect data A data setting for setting the plurality of data constituting the effect data group selected by the group selecting means to be used by the effect executing means in a predetermined specific order. And means, in accordance with the progress of the game, and a sequence changing means capable of variably in different order from said particular order the sequence in which the plurality of data is used.

  Thus, there is an effect that the effect can be suitably executed.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine of the first aspect, the data setting means has finished executing the effect using the data of the last order in the specific order. Is set so that the data of the first order in the specific order is used by the effect executing means.

  Thereby, when the execution of one effect is completed by the effect executing means, the effect can be executed again from the beginning of the effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the execution of the effect can be continued even if the execution of the effect using the data in the last order ends.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first or second aspect, a determining means for performing a determination based on the satisfaction of a predetermined determination condition, and a determination by the determining means. A bonus game execution unit that executes a bonus game advantageous to the player based on a specific determination result, wherein the effect execution unit is configured to execute any one of the plurality of effects during execution of the bonus game. Or execute it.

  Thereby, during execution of the bonus game, there is an effect that the effect can be suitably executed.

  According to the gaming machine of the fourth aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the third aspect, the effect data group provided for each of the plurality of effect types is set for each effect type. And at least the first data corresponding to the specific effect mode and the second data different from the first data, and the order changing means terminates the privilege game. The order in which the plurality of data is used is changed so that the first data is used at least once by the effect executing means until the first time.

  Thereby, there is an effect that a specific effect mode can be executed at least once during execution of the bonus game.

  According to the gaming machine of the fifth aspect, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine of the fourth aspect, the order varying means may determine that the first data is transmitted during a predetermined period of time in the privilege game. The order in which the plurality of data is used is changed so that the state is used by the effect executing means.

  As a result, there is an effect that a game can be performed during execution of the privilege game, with the specific period being one of the pleasures.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. (A) is a front perspective view of the right variable winning device with the opening / closing door closed, and (b) is a front perspective view of the right variable winning device with the opening / closing door opened. It is a top view of the right variable winning device in the first embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed typically the area division setting of a display screen, and an effective line setting, and (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A), (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the standby state effect performed in a jackpot standby state. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2A is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a ROM of the main control device according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2B is a block diagram illustrating a first random number table set in the ROM of the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is the figure which showed the regulation content typically. FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically illustrating the contents of a first hit type selection table set in a ROM of the main control device according to the first embodiment, and FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating the main control according to the first embodiment; FIG. 5 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a second random number table set in a ROM of the device. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in a ROM of a main control device according to the first embodiment, and (b) is a specification of a variation pattern table for a big hit in the first embodiment. It is a figure which showed the content typically, (c) is a figure which showed typically the regulation content of the variation pattern (for normal) in 1st Embodiment, (d) is 1st execution. It is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the deviation (probable change) variation pattern table in a form. It is a figure showing typically composition of various counters in a 1st embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a RAM of the main control device according to the first embodiment. FIG. 3A is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment, and FIG. 3B is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment. . FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surface B. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a display data table according to the first embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a transfer data table according to the first embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a drawing list according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change start processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a prefetch process executed by an MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a through gate passage process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit start process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hit-related process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating main processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a V interruption process. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a stop type command process. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a standby state command process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing an opening command process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment, and (b) is a round executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed several command processing. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an ending command process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a back image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating error command processing. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a display setting process executed by the MPU in the display device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a resident image transfer setting process. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the 1st hit type selection table set to ROM of the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the composition of RAM of the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special design fluctuation processing 2 which is executed by MPU in the main control unit in 2nd execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the start-up process 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot start process 2 performed by the MPU in the main control unit in the second embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed jackpot control processing 2 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a hit-related process 2 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the second embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the standby state command process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode in a case where a small win has occurred in the second special symbol lottery during the probability change state in the third embodiment, and (b) is a small display in the third embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode in a hit state. (A) is a figure which showed typically the specification content of the 1st random number table set in ROM of the main control device in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM. 13 is a flowchart illustrating main processing 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the third embodiment. It is the flow chart which showed the small hit control processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 3rd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the hit related command processing 3 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display state of a standby state effect while the left-operation winning port is in a state where a ball can enter in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the fourth embodiment. In an aspect, it is a figure showing an example of a display mode of a stand-by state effect while a right operation winning opening is in a state in which a ball can enter. It is a block diagram showing composition of RAM of a main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the big hit start processing 4 which is executed by MPU in the main control unit in 4th execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the big hit control processing 4 which is executed by MPU in the main control unit in 4th execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the hit related process 4 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of a main control device according to the fifth embodiment. (B) is a first hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 14C is a diagram schematically illustrating the prescribed contents of the period length selection table set in the ROM of the main control device according to the fifth embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed special design change processing 5 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed jackpot control processing 5 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the interval setting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification of 5th Embodiment. It is a top view of the right variable winning device in the sixth embodiment. (A), (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode in case the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect is set as an effect mode during super reach in 6th Embodiment. (A), (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode in case the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect is set as an effect mode during super reach in 6th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing a change over time in a production mode when a special symbol lottery wins in the sixth embodiment and a right-turning expectation degree suggestion production is set in the sixth embodiment; ) Is a diagram schematically showing a temporal change of the effect mode in the sixth embodiment when a special symbol is removed by a lottery and a right-turning expectation degree suggesting effect is set. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the sixth embodiment. is there. It is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the production mode selection table set in ROM of the sound lamp control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed production update processing 6 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 6th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the notification start determination process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed variable display setting processing 6 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed production mode selection processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 6th embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the time-dependent change of the production | presentation mode at the time of a left opportunity big hit in 7th Embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of an opening effect of a left opportunity jackpot in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is an example of a display mode after an opening effect of a left opportunity jackpot is completed. FIG. It is a block diagram showing the composition of RAM of the sound lamp control device in a 7th embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed main processing 7 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 7th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pseudo normal state effect processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the hit related process 7 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the standby state command process 7 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed opening command processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 7th embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 1st control example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during a probable change state in the first control example, and (b) is a display when a music selection menu screen is displayed during a probable change state in the first control example. It is a figure showing an example of an aspect. (A) is a figure showing an example of an initial arrangement of a music selection menu screen displayed when shifting to the music selection mode in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram in the music selection mode in the first control example. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when an operation on an operation button is detected. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in a first control example. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of the audio ramp control device in the first control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device in the first control example. . (A) is a figure which showed typically the specification contents of the item arrangement | positioning storage area set in RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example, (b), The audio | voice ramp control in the 1st control example. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically illustrating the contents of a music selection frequency storage area set in a RAM of the apparatus. FIG. 4 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a sound output device in a first control example. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of the audio output device in the first control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM of the audio output device in the first control example. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically illustrating the contents of a specified audio file storage area set in a ROM of an audio output device in a first control example. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration of a music data group in a first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process 8 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an operation detection process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process 8 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a status command process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the hit related process 8 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the first control example, and (b) is a command executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the first control example. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an interrupt process. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a sound setting process executed by an MPU in the sound output device in the first control example. It is the figure which showed the correspondence of the transition of the jackpot state in the 2nd example of control, and the transition of the audio | voice mode. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a correspondence relationship between a transition of a jackpot state and a transition of a music part when it is determined that the reproduction order is to be rearranged at the rearrangement determination timing 1 set to the jackpot in the second control example. . FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a correspondence relationship between a transition of a jackpot state when the reproduction order is determined to be rearranged and a transition of a music part at a rearrangement determination timing 2 set to a jackpot in a second control example. . It is the figure which showed typically the correspondence of the transition of the big hit state and the transition of the music part when it is determined that the start timing of the ending effect is delayed in the big hit in the second control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the second control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the second control example. . It is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the recombination determination table set in ROM of the sound lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the ending effect selection table set to ROM of the sound lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. FIG. 9 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a sound output device in a second control example. FIG. 9 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a RAM of the audio output device in a second control example. 9 is a flowchart showing a main process 9 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an operation detection process 9 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is the flowchart which showed the ending effect start determination processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is the flowchart which showed the hit related process 9 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is the flowchart which showed the round number command process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the music selection period setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 2nd control example. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an interval command process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is the flowchart which showed the ending command process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the music command process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a main process 9 executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the second control example. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process 9 executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the second control example. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot music related process performed by the MPU in the audio output device in the second control example. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a sound setting process 9 executed by the MPU in the sound output device in the second control example. (A), (b) is a figure showing an example of a music selection menu screen in the third control example. (A), (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode during execution of the big hit in which the pseudo small round effect was set in the third control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the third control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the third control example. . It is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the random music selection table set in ROM of the sound lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. 9 is a flowchart showing an operation detection process 10 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example. It is the flowchart which showed the music determination process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the hit related process 10 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example. It is the flowchart which showed the pseudo small round lottery process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the round number command process 10 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 3rd control example. 9 is a flowchart showing an interval command process 10 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example. It is the flowchart which showed the variable display setting process 10 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and ball entrances 64, 640, 67 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by a game ball flowing down the front of the game board 13. Note that the inner frame 12 guides the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 8) that launches the game ball to the front area of the game board 13 and the game ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A firing rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing game balls is formed in a substantially box shape projecting forward and opening the upper surface, and prize balls, loaned balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the game balls inserted into the upper plate 17 are guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the effect or background displayed on the third symbol display device 81 described later.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach, or the like, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display during the payout of award balls and when an error occurs.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right side illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the game ball is operated in accordance with the operation. Is lent. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which game balls are directly rented to the upper plate 17 from a ball rental device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 is unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion 40 to have a common component configuration. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing game balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface in a central portion thereof. ing. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a game ball into the front of the game board 13 is provided, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a, a push button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the game ball during a pressing operation, and a variable for detecting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by a change in electric resistance. A resistor (not shown) is built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount. A game ball is fired at a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, which changes, and the game ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described configuration is used. However, the configuration is not limited thereto, and the main control device 110 and other control devices may detect a game ball fired by the ball firing unit 112a, or the solenoid of the ball firing unit 112a. May be configured to detect that the player has fired a game ball. Further, the number of detected game balls may be counted and stored until a process such as RAM clear is executed.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. Game balls fall naturally from the bottom opening and are discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “dollar box”) for receiving game balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and a number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, the activated winning opening 660, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first opening 64, the second opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the operating winning opening 660, and the variable display unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. The game board 13 is fixed from the front side with wood screws or the like. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear of the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back of the game board 13. A game area where a game is played is formed by the behavior of the ball. The game area is a front area of the game board 13 which is formed by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70 and is formed in a substantially circular area (a starting port or the like is provided, and the game ball is fired). Is the area in which the water flows down). The game area includes all areas where the game ball that has passed through the return ball preventing member 68 flows before passing through the out port 66 or the winning port.

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided for guiding game balls fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 8) to the upper part of the game board 13. An operation winning port 660 through which game balls can enter is provided at a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the outer rail 62. The operation winning port 660 shifts to a jackpot state (special game state) which is an advantageous state for the player when the game ball enters. More specifically, when it is determined that a special symbol (a first symbol) is a big hit in the lottery, the ball is set to a state where the entry into the activated winning opening 660 is valid (a big hit standby state). It should be noted that, at normal times, even if the game ball enters the activated winning opening 660, the game is not affected at all. In the jackpot waiting state, when the player fires the game ball toward the operation winning opening 660, the game ball enters the operation winning opening (winning), and the big hit is started. As shown in FIG. 2, a rotating member 670a that rotates at a constant rotation speed is provided to the left of the operation winning opening 660 in a front view. The rotating member 670a can be arranged so as to prevent a game ball fired toward the operating winning opening 660 in the direction of the operating winning opening 660 according to its rotational position, and can be arranged so as not to obstruct. Unless the moving member 670a hits the game ball aiming at a timing at which the moving member 670a does not disturb the game ball, the game ball cannot be made to enter the operation winning opening 660 (the big hit can be started). Therefore, when it is determined that a special symbol is determined to be a big hit, a game ball can be fired in consideration of the arrangement of the rotating member 670a, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the operation winning opening 660 is provided at the end of a flow path (operating winning opening flow path) wider than one game ball and narrower than two game balls. The flow path for the operation winning port receives (flows in) a game ball fired at a firing intensity in a predetermined range including at least the maximum momentum (firing intensity) (for example, the firing intensity is in a range of 95% to 100%). It is configured as follows. Therefore, when the special symbol is determined to be a jackpot in the lottery and the jackpot is in a standby state, when aiming at the operation winning opening 660, simply rotating the handle 51 to the maximum movable range is easily performed. A game ball can be made to enter the operation winning opening 660.

  A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61. A game ball fired at a predetermined firing intensity (for example, the firing intensity is in the range of 90% to 95%) hits the return rubber 69, and is bounced back toward the center with reduced momentum. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is provided between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, when a game ball enters one of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, a lottery of a special symbol (first symbol) is performed, and the game ball is normally inserted. When passing through the ball opening 67, a lottery of a normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the special symbol lottery performed for the ball entering the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot, and it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. If it is, the jackpot type is also determined. When the special symbol hits, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed wins a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse, or a predetermined number of game balls win). ) Is released, and the release is repeated a number of times (round number) according to the jackpot type. As a result, a large amount of game balls wins in the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. There are six types of special symbol jackpots, "Big Jackpot A" to "Big Jackpot F". After the special game state is over, as a value added after the jackpot is over, the game according to the result of the jackpot game (Game value) is given to the player. The three types of "big hits A to C" are big hit types that can be determined when a special symbol lottery executed when the game ball enters the first entrance 64 becomes a big hit. And the three types of “big hits D to F” are jackpots that can be determined when a special symbol lottery executed when a game ball enters the second entrance 640 becomes a jackpot. Type. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplicity, the special symbol lottery executed when the game ball enters the first entrance hole 64 is referred to as a first special symbol lottery, and the game ball is designated as a first special symbol lottery. The special symbol lottery executed when the ball enters the second entrance 640 is referred to as a second special symbol lottery.

  When the lottery of the special symbol (first symbol) is performed, the variable display of the special symbol is started on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds to 90 seconds) elapses, the lottery result is obtained. Is stopped and displayed. When a game ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times of entry is determined for each type of entrance. Are retained up to a maximum of four times, and the number of the retained balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display ends on the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 remains, the next special symbol lottery is performed. Then, the variable display according to the lottery is started.

  On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery performed for the passing of the game ball at the normal ball entrance 67, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is hit. Normally, when a symbol comes into contact, the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is changed to the open position for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), so that the second entrance 640 is opened. Be released. It should be noted that the second entrance 640 is normally closed because the electric accessory 640a is arranged at the closed position. Therefore, the ball that has flowed down from above in front view toward the second entrance 640 is impeded (difficult) to enter the second entrance 640 by being blocked by the electric accessory 640a. . On the other hand, in the case of a normal symbol hit, by opening the electric accessory 640a, the ball flowing down toward the second entrance 640 becomes easier to enter the second entrance 640, As a result, the lottery of the second special symbol is easily performed.

  Also, when the lottery of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variation display of the ordinary symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, or the like) elapses, The normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When a game ball passes through the normal entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is increased to the first symbol display device 37. , And also at the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is finished on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the lottery is performed. Be started.

  As described above, six types of special symbols such as “big hit A” to “big hit F” are provided.

  When the "big hit A" is reached, a special game state in which the number of rounds is 8 (8 round big hit) is established. On the other hand, when the "big hit B" or "big hit C" is reached, the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 5 rounds (5 round big hits), and when the "big hit D" is reached, the number of rounds becomes 16 special rounds (16 rounds). When the "big hit E" and the "big hit F" are reached, a special game state of 10 rounds (10 round big hit) is achieved. Furthermore, when the "big hit A", "big hit B", "big hit D", or "big hit E" is reached, the state shifts to the special symbol high probability state (special symbol is being changed) after the end of the big hit. In addition, when the high probability state of the special symbol is given, the hit probability of the ordinary symbol is also increased (the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol is given). The high probability state of the special symbol and the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol continue from the end of the jackpot until the next jackpot. On the other hand, when the "big hit C" or "big hit F" is reached, the time saving state of the ordinary symbol is given after the end of the jackpot, but the high probability state of the special symbol is not given. The time-saving state of the ordinary symbol given after the end of the "big hit C" or the "big hit F" ends when the lottery of the special symbol is executed 100 times.

  Here, the “special symbol high probability state” refers to a state in which the special symbol jackpot probability is increased, a so-called “special symbol high probability state” (special symbol probable state), in other words, the special game state It is a state of the game that is easy to shift to (big hit). On the other hand, the case where the special symbol is not in the high probability state is referred to as the special symbol low probability state, which is a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than the special symbol probability state, that is, the special symbol jackpot probability is normal. Indicates the state (low probability state of special symbol). The “normal symbol time reduction state” (normal symbol high-probability state) refers to a gaming state in which the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is increased, and the gaming ball easily enters the second entrance 640. . On the other hand, when it is not the "normal symbol time reduction state", it is called "normal symbol normal state" (normal symbol low probability state). Indicates that the hit probability is low.

  As described above, in the special symbol jackpot according to the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot differs according to the type of the jackpot. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be common to all jackpot types (for example, all five rounds). Further, in the present embodiment, the “special change state of the special symbol” given after the big hit is configured to be continued until the next big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration in which the “special symbol change state” is continued until the number of special symbol lotteries is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) may be used. In this case, the number of lotteries in the "special symbol change state" and the number of lotteries in the "normal symbol time reduction state" may be made different. In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of lotteries is varied according to the type of jackpot.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power or the like, the pachinko machine 10 is always set to the "low probability state of the special symbol" and the "normal state of the ordinary symbol". And when it becomes any of "big hit A", "big hit B", "big hit D", and "big hit E", it shifts from "low probability state of special symbol" to "probable change state of special symbol" and Then, the state shifts from the “normal state of the ordinary symbol” to the “time reduction state of the ordinary symbol”. In this case, the set "special change state of the special symbol" and the "normal symbol time reduction state" continue until the next big hit. On the other hand, when "big hit C" or "big hit F" is reached, the state shifts to "low probability state of special symbol" and "time saving state of normal symbol". Hereinafter, for the sake of simplicity of explanation, after the end of the jackpot, a “special symbol change state” and a “normal symbol time reduction state” are given to the jackpot (“jackpot A”, “jackpot B”, “jackpot D”, “Big hit E”) is referred to as “probable change big hit”. On the other hand, a big hit (“big hit C” and “big hit F”) to which only the “normal symbol time-saving state” is given 100 times after the end of the big hit is referred to as “normal big hit”.

  A plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a, which are light emitting means, and a seven-segment display 37b are provided on a lower left portion (lower left portion in FIG. 2) of the game board 13 in a front view. A symbol display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs a display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays a game state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a fluctuation display by indicating whether or not a lottery of a special symbol, which is performed in accordance with the ball entry (starting prize) into the first ball entrance 64, is being performed, by a lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) according to the result of the lottery of the special symbol is displayed in a lighting state, or a game entered in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. The number of retained balls, which is the number of game balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls, is indicated by the lighting state.

  If a game ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the entry of the ball is performed. The number of balls is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, each of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is configured to be held up to four times, but the maximum number of holdings is limited to four. However, the number of times may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the LEDs are different, and the various game states of the pachinko machine 10 (the high probability state of the special symbol) Or, during normal working hours, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but also indicates the jackpot type (special symbol corresponding to the jackpot A to F) when the jackpot is a jackpot. (1st symbol) is shown.

  Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning ports 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls when the game balls win. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a game ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start winning), the first symbol display device 37 uses the trigger as a trigger to change and display a special symbol (first symbol). Is executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured by a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right. Columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The corresponding decorative display is performed. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 6A is a diagram schematically illustrating the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 6B is a diagram exemplifying an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of nine types of main symbols numbered "1" to "9". Each main symbol is configured to imitate a number from “1” to “9”. Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers from "1" to "9" on the back symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are: Large numbers are added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) have an attached symbol imitating a character such as a plane, a furoshiki, a helmet, etc. on almost the front of the wooden box. An even number is added to the lower right side of the symbol so that it is small in green and is displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 8) described later is a big hit, a fluctuation display in which the same main symbols are arranged is performed. It is configured so that a big hit occurs after the variable display ends. On the other hand, when the result of the lottery of the special symbol is out of order, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not prepared is performed.

  For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a probable jackpot (one of "big hit A", "big hit B", "big hit D", "big hit E"), any one of "1" to "9" is added. A variable display in which the displayed main symbols are aligned is performed. In addition, in the case of a normal big hit ("big hit C" or "big hit F"), a variable display in which main symbols to which even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added is displayed. That is, the variable display in which the main symbols to which the odd numbers “1, 3, 5, 7, 9” are added is likely to be executed only in the probable big hit. Even in the case of a probability variable jackpot, a variable display in which the main symbols with even numbers are aligned may be performed. It is possible to make the game during the jackpot in expectation of being. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned is performed. In the probability variation jackpot, the rate at which the fluctuation display in which the main symbols with even numbers are aligned is performed is set to, for example, 60%. In addition, when the probable change jackpot is started by the variable display in which the main symbols with even numbers are aligned, the fact that the jackpot has been the probable change jackpot in a predetermined period of the jackpot (for example, during a five round period) is notified. Is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into upper and lower portions, and the lower 2/3 is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed. The upper third is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, center, and right, and three symbol arrays Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in ascending or descending numerical order, and the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from top to bottom with a periodicity to perform variable display. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, a third symbol is displayed in three stages of upper, middle, and lower for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the activated line L1, and in each game, the third symbol is stopped on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. This stop display state is maintained for at least one second. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period (1 second or more), the player can determine whether the combination is the third symbol corresponding to the big hit (the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit). Overlooked or not) can be suppressed. Further, if the combination of the big hit symbols (in the present embodiment, the combination of the same main symbols) is aligned on the activated line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, the big hit is determined, and a standby state effect indicating the standby state of the big hit is displayed. You. Details of the standby state effect will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, by allowing the game ball to enter (win) the operation winning opening 660 during the jackpot waiting state, a jackpot is started, and a big hit movie (opening effect) is displayed.

  In addition, when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed is a combination corresponding to the departure, and there is a reserved ball, after the stop display for one second, the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is started. . When there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest incoming ball in time.

  On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the departure of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for one second in a state where the reserved ball does not exist, the state where the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses or until a new game ball enters the first entrance 64. When a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game was not executed is displayed. In spite of the fact that the player has continuously fired the game ball for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), it is rare that there is no ball entering the first ball entrance 64, and the third symbol is stopped. In many cases, the displayed state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) because the player has quit the game and the pachinko machine 10 does not play the game at all. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed after the stop display of the third symbol, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. I do. Thereby, the player who is trying to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on whether or not the demonstration effect is displayed. On the other hand, if a new game ball enters the first entrance 64 before the predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses, the fluctuation display of the third symbol corresponding to the new entry is displayed. Be executed.

  The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is equally divided in the left-right direction into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3. Among these, the small area Ds1 is the number of retained balls that is the number of game balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the game balls that have entered the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. Are displayed, and the small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying a preview effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the transition to the jackpot is easier than usual. In the central small area Ds2, normally, a predetermined character 710 (a boy with a hachimaki in the present embodiment) performs a predetermined operation, sometimes performs a special operation different from the predetermined operation, or another character A notice effect is performed by appearing.

  On the other hand, when the game ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), The number of entering balls is retained up to a maximum of four times for each type of entrance, and the retained number of balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved ball number symbols. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is reduced. Indicates four balls. When the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball. In addition, in the left half of the small area Ds1, a reserved ball number design indicating the number of retained balls based on the entrance to the first entrance port 64 is displayed, and in the right half of the small area Ds2, The configuration is such that a reserved ball count symbol indicating the number of reserved balls based on the entry into the 2 entrance 640 is displayed. In the example of FIG. 6B, four reserved ball count symbols are displayed in the left half of the small area Ds1, but no reserved ball count symbol is displayed in the right half. This shows a state in which there are four reserved balls of the symbol, but there are no reserved balls of the second special symbol.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although it has comprised so that the ball which enters into the 1st ball entrance 64 and the 2nd ball entrance 640 may be suspended up to four times, respectively, the maximum number of reserved balls is four times. It is not limited, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). In addition, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is changed by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum holding number, and displaying the number of holding balls according to the number of the holding lamps in the lighting state.

  The second symbol display device 83 performs a fluctuation display by indicating by a lighting state whether or not a lottery of a normal symbol, which is performed when a game ball passes through the normal entrance 67, is being executed, As a stop symbol after the end of the change, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, each time a game ball passes through one of the left and right normal entrances 67, a symbol "O" as a normal symbol (second symbol) and a symbol "X" are displayed. Is alternately displayed by alternately lighting the symbols. When the fluctuating display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “」 ”), the pachinko machine 10 causes the electric accessory 640 a attached to the second entrance 640 to move for a predetermined time. The operation state is set (opened), and as a result, the game ball is configured to easily enter the second entrance 640. The number of times the game ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 is retained up to a maximum of four times, and the retained ball number is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and also illuminated by the second symbol retaining lamp 84. You. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that, as in the present embodiment, the variable display of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is performed by switching between turning on and off the plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83, and the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the passage of the game ball at the normal entrance 67, as with the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four, three or less, Alternatively, it may be set to five or more times (for example, eight times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reserved lamp 84 may not be turned on.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 into which a game ball can enter is provided. When a game ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 draws the first special symbol, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37. The first entrance 64 is also one of the winning openings from which five prize balls are paid out when a game ball enters. In addition, the first entrance 64 is such that a game ball flowing down the flow path on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (a game ball hit left) flows down the flow path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. A nail or the like is arranged so that it is easier to enter the ball than a played game ball (game ball hit right).

  On the lower right side in front view of the variable display unit 80, a second entrance 640 into which a game ball can enter is provided. When a game ball enters the second entrance 640, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 draws a second special symbol, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37. Further, the second entrance 640 is also one of the winning openings from which five prize balls are paid out when a game ball enters. As shown in FIG. 2, since the second entrance 640 is provided on the right side of the game board 13, basically, only the game balls flowing down the flow path provided to the right of the variable display device unit 80 are provided. Enters the ball.

  A right variable winning device 65 is disposed in the lower left direction in front view of the second entrance 640, and a horizontally long rectangular specific right winning opening 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. Further, a left variable winning device 650 is disposed in a lower left direction in a front view of the right variable winning device 65. The left variable winning device 650 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the left specific winning opening 650a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. Have. The opening / closing plate is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won. In the closed state of the opening and closing plate, the opening and closing plate and the game board 13 are closed so as to be on the same plane, so that the game ball can pass through the front side of the opening and closing plate. In addition, when the opening / closing plate is tilted to the lower front side, an open state in which the game ball easily wins the left specific winning opening 650a is temporarily formed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so that the big hit is stopped. At the same time, a stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the jackpot determination (acquiring the jackpot right). Then, in the jackpot waiting state which has been shifted due to the determination of the jackpot, the game state is shifted to the special game state in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual by causing the game balls to enter the operation winning opening 660. I do. In this special game state, the right specific winning opening 65a and the left specific winning opening 650a which are normally closed are opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until a predetermined number of game balls are won). You. That is, normally, the opening / closing door 65f1, which closes the right specific winning opening 65a, is opened when the first round of the jackpot (special game state) occurs, and a ball can enter the right specific winning opening 65a. Become. Every time one game ball enters the right specific winning opening 65a, ten prize balls are awarded. In addition, in each of the second and subsequent rounds of the jackpot (special game state), the left specific winning opening 650a is opened and the ball can enter. Similarly to the right specific winning opening 65a, ten prize balls are awarded each time one game ball enters the left specific winning opening 650a.

  The right specific winning opening 65a, the left specific winning opening 650a, and the above-mentioned second ball entrance 640 receive game balls flowing down the right channel of the variable display device unit 80 (right-hit game balls). It is arranged at a position where the ball can be entered (easy entry). In other words, the game balls flowing down the flow path on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 are arranged at positions where ball entry is impossible (ball entry difficult). Therefore, in order for the player to receive the payout of the prize ball during the jackpot (obtain a profit), the player only has to hit the game ball to the right. Here, as shown in FIG. 2, the right variable winning device 65 is disposed in a state of being slightly inclined downward and leftward in a front view. Thereby, when the player makes a right strike with the opening / closing door 65f1 closed and the game ball reaches the upper surface of the right variable prize device 65, the reached game ball is tilted to the right variable prize device 65. The ball can flow down to the lower left direction in a front view, and can enter the out port 66. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a game ball fired by a right strike from staying in the upper portion of the right variable winning device 65 (the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1). As shown in FIG. 2, the left variable winning device 650 is disposed at the lower left of the right variable winning device 65. Therefore, when the left specific winning opening 650a is open, the right variable winning device 65 is opened. The game ball that has flowed down and to the lower left in front view enters the left specific winning opening 650a.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the condition that each round of the jackpot is ended (the opened right specific winning opening 65a or the left specific winning opening 650a is closed again) is set to the jackpot round (opened). (Special winning opening type). Specifically, in the first round (the round in which the right specific winning opening 65a is opened), 30 seconds have elapsed since the opening and closing door 65f1 was opened, or two or more game balls are used as the right specific winning opening. When the player wins (enters the ball) 65a, the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed and the first round is completed. On the other hand, in each of the second and subsequent rounds of the jackpot (a round in which the left specific winning opening 650a is opened), 30 seconds have elapsed since the left specific winning opening 650a was opened, or 10 or more games are played. When the ball has won the left specific winning opening 650a, the left specific winning opening 650a is closed and the round is ended.

  In the right variable winning device 65, a sensor for detecting a game ball entering the right specific winning opening 65a is provided inside the right variable winning device 65. Therefore, there is a time lag from when the game ball wins (enters the ball) to the right specific winning opening 65a until the ball is detected. More specifically, it takes about 0.5 seconds after the game ball enters the right specific winning opening 65a until the number of actually entered balls is counted. That is, it takes about 0.5 seconds from when the number of game balls satisfying the condition for ending the round to the right specific winning opening 65a to when the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed. Therefore, if the game balls can be additionally inserted during the 0.5 second, more prize balls can be obtained than usual (when only the number of the rounds at which the end upper limit is satisfied is won). . In the first embodiment, in one round (a round in which the right specific winning opening 65a is opened), the player intentionally enters the right specific winning opening 65a with a number of game balls equal to or more than the number of round end conditions. It has a configuration that can be made to ball. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplicity, the term “over winning” means that a number of game balls exceeding the upper limit winning number (number of winning balls) specified in each round will win (enter) the specific winning opening 65a. Called.

  Although details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5, in the first embodiment, in order to easily generate an over-winning prize, after the game ball reaches the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1, the opening and closing door is opened. The upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 is configured so that the period until the vehicle passes through the upper surface of the 65f1 is extended. With this configuration, a plurality of game balls can be easily added to reach the upper surface of the door 65f1 while one game ball is flowing down the upper surface of the door 65f1. Therefore, in the jackpot waiting state, at the timing when more game balls are flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1, the game balls are thrown into the operation winning opening 660 to start the big hit (opening the opening / closing door 65f1). This allows all the game balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 to enter the opened right specific winning opening 65a. As described above, the first round of the jackpot ends when two or more winnings (balls) are detected for the specific winning opening 65a. However, if it is possible to start the first round of the jackpot with three or more game balls reaching the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 before the start of the jackpot, the three or more game balls are passed to the right specific winning opening 65a. Winning (ball entry), and more prize balls can be obtained than originally (prize balls for two prizes). Therefore, according to the timing at which the game balls enter the operation winning opening 660, it is possible to provide a game effect that affects the number of prize balls that the player can obtain in the first round of the jackpot. The game in the state can be more enjoyed. In order to allow the game balls to reach the opening / closing door 65f1 during the jackpot waiting state, the game balls do not enter the operation winning opening 660 (the game balls enter the operation winning opening channel (see FIG. 2)). A right-handed shot may be performed at a firing intensity of about (a firing intensity of less than 95%).

  Next, the structure of the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 4A is a front perspective view of the variable winning device 65 with the opening and closing door 65f1 closed, and FIG. 4B is a view of the variable winning device 65 with the opening and closing door 65f1 opened. It is a front perspective view.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, convex portions 65f1a to 65f1c are provided on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 so as to prevent a game ball from flowing down. The game ball flowing down the upper surface of the door 65f1 is prevented from flowing down by the convex portions 65f1a to 65f1c, and flows down on the door 65f1 along the outer periphery of each of the convex portions 65f1a to 65f1c. That is, on the opening / closing door 65f1, a serpentine flow path is formed by the convex portions 65f1a to 65f1c. For this reason, compared with the case where each convex portion 65f1a to 65f1c is not provided (that is, the case where the game ball can linearly flow down the opening / closing door 65f1 from right to left in a front view), the opening / closing door is provided. The period required to completely flow down the upper surface of 65f1 can be lengthened. Thus, while one game ball is flowing down the upper surface of the door 65f1, a plurality of game balls can be easily added to reach the upper surface of the door 65f1. Therefore, in the jackpot waiting state, at the timing when more game balls are flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1, the game balls are thrown into the operation winning opening 660 to start the big hit (opening the opening / closing door 65f1). ), More game balls can be over-winned.

  FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating a state where the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened. As shown in FIG. 4B, the opening / closing door 65 f 1 slides from the front side in the front view to the rear side in the front view, and moves inside the game board 13 through an opening provided in the game board 13. Is stored. As a result, the right specific winning opening 65a is opened. When the right specific winning opening 65a is opened, game balls flowing down from the right direction of the right variable winning device 65 can enter the right specific winning opening 65a. Further, the height of the opening for storing the door 65f1 is sufficiently low with respect to the diameter of the game ball. It is possible to prevent the existing game ball from being stored inside the game board 13 together with the door 65f1. Therefore, when the door 65f1 slides into the game board 13, the game ball on the upper surface of the door 65f1 can be dropped to the specific winning opening 65a.

  Here, in the first embodiment, the period required for one game ball to completely pass through the opening / closing door 65f1 is configured to be about 4 seconds. The firing interval of the game balls (the interval from when one game ball is fired to when the next game ball is fired) is configured to be a minimum of 0.6 seconds. Thus, while one game ball is flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1, about six additional game balls can be fired. Therefore, in the jackpot waiting state, after about seven game balls are continuously fired toward the variable winning device 65, the game balls are made to enter the activated winning opening 660, so that about seven game balls are entered. The first round can be started while the ball is flowing down the upper surface of the door 65f1. That is, the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened, and all the game balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 can be made to win the specific winning opening 65a. As a result, it is possible to obtain more prize balls than originally (prize balls for two prizes), and in the jackpot waiting state, the operation winning prize port with more game balls reaching the opening / closing door 65f1. The player can be devised to enter a game ball at 660. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game in the jackpot waiting state. In this way, in the jackpot waiting state, by allowing the game ball to enter the operation winning opening 660 while the game ball is flowing down the opening / closing door 65f1, a game property in which an over-win can be intentionally generated can be achieved. Can be provided.

  In the first embodiment, by providing the three convex portions 65f1a to 65f1c on the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1, the configuration is such that the game ball bypasses the convex portions 65f1a to 65f1c, and the game ball passes through the opening and closing door 65f1. Although the passage period is configured to be long, it is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to providing the protrusions 65f1a to 65f1c, the material of the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 is made to have a higher coefficient of friction than other parts (the surface of the game board 13 or the inner surface of the variable winning device 65). It may be made of a large material (for example, an elastic body or the like), or may be processed to make the game ball difficult to roll (for example, to provide unevenness on the surface).

  In the first embodiment, the first round is executed when 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of the first round, or when two or more game balls entered the specific winning opening 65a before the 30 seconds elapsed. It was configured to end. In other words, the end condition is set so that if the right-handed game is performed, the upper limit number (two) of the game balls is almost certainly made to enter the specific winning opening 65a and the first round is completed. However, it is not limited to this. For example, even if the player hits the right specific winning opening 65a right after the start of the first round, the first round may be completed in a period in which it is difficult to enter the game ball. . Specifically, for example, 0.5 second elapses after the start of one round, or when ten or more game balls win the specific winning opening 65a before 0.5 second elapses, the first round is performed. May be terminated. In such a configuration, if no game ball is passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 at the timing when the game ball enters the operation winning port 660, no game ball enters the right specific winning port 65a. It is possible to provide a game with a high possibility that the first round will be completed without the ball being played. Therefore, a player who wants to obtain a prize ball in the first round hits the game ball toward the opening / closing door 65f1 before allowing the player to enter the activation winning opening 660 in the jackpot waiting state. It is possible to entertain the game of aiming at the operation winning opening 660 later. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game in the jackpot waiting state.

  FIG. 5 is a top view of the opening / closing door 65f1 as viewed from a vertical upper surface side. As shown in FIG. 5, pass detection sensors 228a to 228f capable of detecting the passage of the game ball are embedded in a zigzag path on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 where the game ball can roll (easily). . These passage detection sensors 228a to 228f are arranged apart from each other by a distance at least exceeding the diameter of the game ball in a path formed on the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1. The known outputs of these passage detection sensors 228a to 228f become H (high) when a game ball is arranged above them, and output L (low) when there is nothing obstructing the above. It is composed of an optical sensor. In the first embodiment, a combination of the outputs of the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f is monitored on the sound lamp control device 113 side. Then, during the jackpot waiting state, it is configured to be able to execute an effect indicating a measure of the number of game balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 according to a combination of outputs of the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f. . That is, an effect indicating the degree of advantage when a game ball is thrown into the operation winning opening 660 can be executed. Thereby, by allowing the game balls to enter the operation winning opening 660 at a timing suggested that more game balls are flowing down on the opening / closing door 65f1 in accordance with the effect content, a larger number of game balls are provided. A game ball can be easily over-winned. Therefore, the player can easily aim for the over prize. Details of the standby state effect that is performed during the jackpot standby state will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIGS. 7A and 7B are diagrams showing a display state during a standby state effect executed in the jackpot standby state. As shown in FIG. 7A, in the jackpot standby state, a display area HR1 in which the character "Big hit is determined!" Is displayed on the upper side of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when viewed from the front. The display contents of the display area HR1 allow the player to easily recognize that the jackpot has been determined (the jackpot right has been obtained). Further, below the display area HR1, a combination (final stop symbol) of the third symbol that is finally stopped and displayed (fixed display) in the variable display effect that has been executed before the jackpot standby state is displayed. . By displaying the final stop symbol even during the jackpot waiting state, the player can easily confirm at any time whether the current jackpot is a probable jackpot or a normal jackpot.

  On the right side in front view of the final stop symbol, a chance meter CM which is vertically long and divided vertically into six small areas is displayed. Each of the areas constituting the chance meter CM is configured to be variable between a light-off appearance and a light-on appearance, and is activated according to the number of light-on appearance small areas. It is configured to indicate the degree of advantage when a game ball is inserted into the mouth 660. More specifically, the number of small areas is determined in order (priority) from the lower small area according to the number of sensors whose outputs are H (high) among the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f. The light emission appearance (lighting mode) is set. That is, in the chance meter CM, game balls of the number of light-emitting appearance (lighting mode) small areas are passing through at least the upper surface of the door 65f1 (when the door 65f1 is opened). It is possible to win the right specific winning opening 65a). Hereinafter, for the sake of simplicity of description, in the chance meter CM, the light-emitting appearance small area is referred to as “gauge”, and the number of light-emitting appearance small areas is referred to as “gauge number”. Changing the appearance of the light emission will be referred to as “gauge is accumulated”.

  Below the final stop symbol, meter charge when aiming for "GO!" ! The display area HR <b> 2 is displayed in which a character “”, a character “Aim at the upper right at the same timing!”, And an image suggesting that the player will aim at the activation winning opening 660 are displayed. According to the display content of the display area HR2, the player aims at the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (see FIG. 2) with the character "GO!" It can be easily understood that the number of gauges of the displayed chance meter CM can be increased. As described above, in the chance meter CM, the number of gauges varies in accordance with the detection contents of the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f provided on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. By launching a game ball at a launching intensity (firing speed) enough to enter the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the game ball reaches the variable prize device 65 disposed downstream thereof. Can be done. Therefore, by continuously firing game balls in the direction in which the normal entrance (through gate) 67 is disposed, the game balls continuously reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65. I do. In this state, a game ball is fired at the operation winning opening 660 in accordance with the display content of the display area HR2 (that is, with a firing intensity of 95% to 100%), so that a big hit is started and the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened. You. As a result, a game ball flowing down the opening / closing door 65f1 can be made to win (enter a ball) substantially at the right specific winning opening 65a. As described above, the rotating member 670a that performs a rotating operation at a constant rotating speed is provided on the left side of the operation winning opening 660 in a front view. Since the turning member 670a can prevent the game ball from entering the operation winning opening 660 according to the turning position, the turning member 670a turns the player not only for the gauge number of the chance meter CM but also for the player. A game ball can be fired at a firing timing that also takes into account the rotational position of the member 670a. Therefore, the player's interest in the game in the jackpot waiting state can be further improved.

  FIG. 7B is a diagram showing a state where three gauges of the chance meter CM are stored. As shown in FIG. 7B, when the game ball is passing above the three sensors of the passage detection sensors 228c to 228e, the outputs of these three sensors become H (high). The sound lamp control device 113 detects the number of sensors outputting H and reflects the number in the mode of the chance meter CM. In the example of FIG. 7B, since the outputs of the three sensors (passage detection sensors 228c to 228e) are H, it is displayed in a state where three gauges of the chance meter CM are accumulated. As described above, the number of game balls passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 is detected by the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f, and a guide of the number of game balls passing is detected according to the detection result. With this configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the timing at which the player should aim at the operation winning opening 660. Therefore, even a player who has little experience in playing the game with the pachinko machine 10 can easily intuitively understand the timing of aiming at the operation winning opening 660. Thereby, even the player who plays the game for the first time can easily play the game, so that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  In the first embodiment, in the jackpot waiting state, the guide of the number of game balls passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 is indicated by the gauge number of the chance meter CM, so that the game balls are moved to the operation winning opening 660. Although the configuration suggests the degree of advantage when the ball is entered, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the jackpot advantage degree is indicated by the gauge number of the chance meter CM. Specifically, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot type is indicated by the number of gauges of the chance meter CM, thereby indicating to the player the degree of advantage when a game ball is inserted into the activated winning opening 660. Further, for example, the number of rounds of the jackpot may be determined indefinitely when the jackpot is determined, and the number of rounds of the jackpot may be randomly selected at a timing when the jackpot is passed through the operation winning opening 660. The number of gauges indicates the number of rounds determined by a lottery executed when a game ball is thrown into the activated winning opening 660, thereby indicating that a game ball is thrown into the activated winning opening 660. It is good also as composition which suggests a degree of advantage to a player.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. At the lower right corner of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided. The certificate stamp or the like stuck on the sticking space K1 can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14.

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A game ball that does not win any of the winning ports is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out port 66. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is peeled to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102 or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out game balls by a predetermined electric configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 8). Have. The game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially supplied to the tank 130, and the required number of game balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). ing. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 8). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The main control device 110 executes major processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of a display result on the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 12) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, a counter and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used to perform a jackpot lottery, a display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a lottery of a display result of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. Used in.

  For setting the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a first random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a first hit type counter C2 used for the selection of the jackpot symbol are set. A stop type counter C3 used to select a stop type, a change type counter CS1 used to select a change pattern, and a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set an initial value of the first random number counter C1. Are used. In addition, the random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbols (the second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value every time the value is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 21), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 30). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a composed of four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The values of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the ball timing. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b including four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas). , The respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored. An execution area 203c is provided in the RAM 203, and stores the values of a first random number counter C1, a first hit type counter C2, and a stop type selection counter C3, which are to be subjected to the lottery. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203d including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and in each of these areas, a game ball is provided. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored at the timing of passing through the normal entrance (through gate) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399). It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 30).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment). Is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b.

  As described above, the value of the random number that is a special symbol big hit is set by the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 9B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the first random number counter is set. If the value of C1 matches the value of the random number that becomes the big hit set by the first hit random number table, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. The first random number table 202a is used for a low probability of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and for a high probability of a special symbol having a large jackpot than the low probability. The number of random hits included in each of the two types is set differently (see FIG. 9B). In this way, by making the number of random numbers that are big hits different, the probability of big hits is changed between a low probability of a special symbol and a high probability of a special symbol.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol hits, and adds one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and when a game ball enters the first entrance 64, The value is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (the execution area 203c when the special symbol lottery is not being executed). On the other hand, when the game ball has entered the second entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (the execution area 203c when the special symbol lottery is not being executed). Is stored.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area 203c is not a random number that is a big hit of a special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 is used. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed when the special symbol comes off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area 203c is a random number that is a special symbol big hit, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is as follows. It will be a special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit indicates the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. It becomes a display mode.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In the first random number counter C1, when the special symbol has a low probability, there are two random numbers that are the big hits of the special symbol, and the random number value “0, 1” is the first random number for the low probability. It is stored in a table (see 202a1 in FIG. 9B). As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 400 out of the total number of random numbers, and thus the total probability of the special symbol is 2/100. In addition, the random number value (counter value) which is a big hit is common to the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 20 random numbers that are the big hits of the special symbol, and the values “0 to 19” are stored in the first random number table for the high probability. (See 202a2 in FIG. 9B). As described above, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers is 400 out of 400, and the total number of jackpot random numbers is 20, so the probability of the special symbol jackpot is “1/20”.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in a range of 0 to 99. Then, as shown in FIG. 10A, a jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol, and the jackpot type when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 4” is “big hit A” ( 8 rounds jackpot). When the value is “5 to 64”, the jackpot type is “big hit B” (five round probability change jackpot), and when the value is “65 to 99”, the jackpot type is “big hit C”. (5 rounds regular jackpot).

  On the other hand, if the lottery of the second special symbol results in a big hit, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 4”, the big hit type is “big hit D” (16 rounds probability change big hit). When the value is “5 to 64”, the jackpot type is “big jackpot E” (10 rounds probability variable jackpot), and when the value is “65 to 99”, the jackpot type is “big jackpot F”. (10 rounds regular jackpot).

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that six types of hits (big hits A to F) are determined by the type of the special symbol and the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. Have been.

  The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. "Reach out of front and rear" (e.g., 98, 99), and "reach other than front and rear departure" (e.g., in a range of 90 to 97) in which the final stop symbol stops at positions other than the front and rear of the reach symbol after reaching. Three stop (effect) patterns of "completely out of range" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where no reach occurs are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment). When a game ball enters the first entrance 64, the value is stored in the RAM 203. Is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a (if the special symbol lottery is not being executed, the execution area 203c). When a game ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (the execution area 203c when the special symbol lottery is not being executed). You.

  The random number value for determining the special symbol stop type from the value of the stop type selection counter C3 (random number value) is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for the high probability case and a special symbol for the low probability case. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed according to whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high-probability state or the special symbol low-probability state.

  For example, in the high-probability state, the jackpot is likely to occur, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary. Is selected, and it becomes easier to select “completely off”. In this table, the “reach out of front and rear” is narrowed to 98, 99 and the “reach other than front and rear out” is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select “reach out of front and back” or “reach other than front and rear out”. In the low probability state, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is as narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the time for the game ball to enter the first entrance 64. The time table is selected, and it is difficult to select “completely out of place”.

  In the stop type selection table, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than out of front and rear” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than out of front and rear out” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low-probability state, since a lot of reach displays with a long rendering time can be performed, the ball entry time of the game ball into the first entrance 64 can be secured, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is continued. It is easier to do. Also in the latter table, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “out-of-reach reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough display mode such as a so-called normal reach and a super reach is determined by the variation type counter CS1. The determination of the display mode is, specifically, the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the fine symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. You. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 30) described below is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. Note that a variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 11A) storing a random value for determining one symbol variation time from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random value) is stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is provided in.

  Here, the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 11A, the variation pattern table 202d is a table for selecting a variation pattern based on a lottery of the first special symbol, and is a large hit variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 11B). At least a (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 11C) and a (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 11D) are defined.

  First, with reference to FIG. 11B, a description will be given of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. FIG. 11B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the big hit variation pattern table 202d1. The big hit variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the selected variation pattern is specified when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit. Various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are defined as the jackpot fluctuation patterns. In the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1, each variation pattern is associated with each value of the variation type counter CS1.

  Specifically, as the determination value of the value of the variation type counter CS1, a range of “0 to 50” is associated with a variation pattern of various normal reach (30 seconds), and a range of “51 to 179” is various super reach. A variation pattern of (60 seconds) is associated, and a variation pattern of various special reach (90 seconds) is associated with a range of “180 to 198”. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when selecting a variation pattern in which the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, determines the variation pattern in which the determination value corresponding to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 is set. It is selected from the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1.

  FIG. 11C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2. The outlier (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the special symbol lottery result is out of order in the special symbol low probability state. . If the special symbol lottery result is off, as described above, it is determined whether the stop type is completely off (non-reach) or out of reach (reach common) from a stop type selection table (not shown) as described above. It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, for example, in the low probability state of the special symbol, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete out is set, and if it is in the range of “80 to 99”, out of reach is reached. (Reach out of front and back, reach other than front and back out).

  Here, when the variation pattern type is completely off, one of a short deviation (7 seconds) with a relatively short fluctuation time and a long deviation (10 seconds) with a relatively long fluctuation time is set. "0-98" is set as the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for a short deviation (7 seconds), and "99-198" for a long deviation (10 seconds).

  For the outreach, various normal reach (30 seconds) are out of range when the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 149”, and out of super reach in the range of “150 to 197”. (60 seconds), but various special reach (90 seconds) are set in “198”.

  As described above, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 determines the stop type when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order in the normal game state, and obtains the fluctuation obtained from the out-of-office (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2. Based on the value of the type counter CS1, a variation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2.

  FIG. 11D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probable change) variation pattern table 202d3. The deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the lottery of the special symbol is lost in the special symbol variation state. In the deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3, the value of the variation type counter CS1 that is set is different from that of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 described above.

  As described above, when the game state is the probable change game state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89” by the stop type selection table (not shown), complete departure is determined. , "90-99", the out-of-reach (reach out of front and back, reach other than out of front and back) is determined.

  As described above, when the game state is the certain-variable game state than the normal game state, the probability of reaching when the game is off is set to be lower. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation time of the deviation from becoming longer at the time of the probability change and the period until the jackpot becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the game is prolonged in the probable change game state in which the big hit is likely to occur, and the player feels bored.

  Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. The second random number counter C4 is configured as, for example, a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt processing, and is acquired when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the through gate 67. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203d.

  Then, the value of the random number which is usually a hit of the symbol is set by the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 10B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set. Is equal to the value of the random number that is a win set by the second random number table, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol. In addition, the second random number table is used for a low probability of a normal symbol (a period in which the symbol is in a normal state) and a high probability of a normal symbol being hit than the low probability (a symbol of a normal symbol). And the number of jackpot random numbers included therein are set differently (see FIG. 10B). In this manner, by making the number of winning random numbers different, the winning probability is changed between a low probability of the ordinary symbol and a high probability of the ordinary symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 10B, at the time of the low probability of the ordinary symbol, there are 24 random numbers which are the hits of the ordinary symbol, and the values are "5 to 28". As described above, at the time of the low probability of the ordinary symbol, the total number of the random numbers is 240 out of the total number of the random numbers, and the total number of the random number of the jackpot is 24, so the probability of the jackpot of the special symbol is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the normal symbol, when the game ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained and the second symbol display device is obtained. At 83, the normal symbol change display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning is achieved, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (the second symbol) is displayed. As a symbol, a symbol “○” is illuminated and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the electric accessory 640a is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time” when the ordinary symbol hits, The time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when the ordinary symbol has a high probability, there are 200 random numbers which are the jackpot of the ordinary symbol, and the range is "5 to 204". These random numbers are stored in a second random number table for high probability. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random number values to be a big hit is 200 out of a total of 240 random number values, so that the probability of a special symbol to be a big hit is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol high-probability state and the game ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained, and the second symbol display device is displayed. At 83, the normal symbol change display is executed for 3 seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol. In this case, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, a symbol “O” is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol), and the electric accessory 640a is opened “1 second × 2 times”. Is done. In this way, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the time of the variable display becomes very short, such as “30 seconds → 3 seconds”, compared to the low probability of the normal symbol, and the opening period of the electric accessory 640a is further reduced. Since it is extremely long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the state is such that a game ball easily enters the second entrance 640. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, the electric accessory 64a is opened “1 second × 2 times” when the ordinary symbol hits, but the opening time and The number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 21). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 30).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 determines the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes, in addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. And the like, and a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (see FIG. 30), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 29). Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. , The NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 28) as a power failure processing is immediately executed.

  Next, the specific contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9A is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the present embodiment. The ROM 202 of the main control device 110 stores at least a first random number table 202a, a first random type selection table 202b, a second random number table 202c, and a variation pattern selection table 202d as a part of the fixed value data. ing.

  The first random number table 202a (see FIG. 9B) is a data table in which the correspondence between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the lottery result is defined. Specifically, in the low probability state of the special symbol, “0, 1” is defined as the range of the determination value determined to be a big hit (see 202a1 in FIG. 9B), and the high probability state of the special symbol (probable change). In the (state), “0 to 19” is defined as a range of the determination value determined to be a big hit (see 202a2 in FIG. 9B). When the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on the winning start matches one of the determination values corresponding to the big hit defined in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 9B). Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 10A) is a data table in which the determination value for determining the big hit type is stored for each special symbol type, and is determined by the first hit type counter C2. A value is defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the winning start is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, The big hit type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 10A, “big hit A” is defined in association with the first special symbol in a range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 4”. (See 202b1 in FIG. 10A). The "big hit A" is a big hit in which the number of rounds is eight, and after the big hit is completed, the "special change state of the special symbol" and the "time saving state of the normal symbol" which are continued until the next big hit are given. . Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are five counter values that are "big hit A", so "big hit A" is determined when a big hit occurs in the first special symbol lottery. Is 5% (5/100). Since the "big hit A" has the largest number of rounds among the big hits of the first special symbol, and the advantageous "special change state of the special symbol" and the "time saving state of the ordinary symbol" which are advantageous after the end of the big hit, are given. , Is the most advantageous jackpot type among the jackpots of the first special symbol.

  For the first special symbol, "big hit B" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "5 to 64" (see 202b2 in FIG. 10A). . The "big hit B" is a big hit in which the number of rounds is 5 rounds, and after the big hit is completed, the "special change state of the special symbol" and the "time saving state of the normal symbol" which are continued until the next big hit are given. . Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the counter value of "big hit B" is 60, so "big hit B" is determined when a big hit occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol. Is 60% (60/100). Although the number of rounds is small in the “big hit B”, similar to the “big hit A”, advantageous “special change state of special symbol” and “normal time saving state of normal symbol” are given after the end of the big hit. It is a type of jackpot that is relatively advantageous for people.

  For the first special symbol, "big hit C" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "65 to 99" (see 202b3 in FIG. 10A). . The "big hit C" is a big hit in which the number of rounds is 5 and a "normal symbol time-saving state" which is continued after the big hit is completed until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the counter value of "big hit C" is 35, so if a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, "big hit C" is determined. Is 35% (35/100). The "big hit C" has a small number of rounds, and the gaming state after the big hit is also disadvantageous compared to the "big hit A" and the "big hit B", so that the big hit type is disadvantageous for the player.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 10 (a), with respect to the second special symbol, the "big hit D" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 4". (See 202b4 in FIG. 10A). The "big hit D" is a big hit in which the number of rounds is 16 rounds, and after the big hit is completed, the "special change state of the special symbol" and the "time saving state of the normal symbol" which continue until the next big hit are given. . Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are five counter values that are "big hit D", so "big hit D" is determined when a big hit occurs in the second special symbol lottery. Is 5% (5/100). The "big hit D" has the largest number of rounds and also has an advantageous gaming state after the end of the big hit, so that it is the most advantageous big hit type for the player.

  For the second special symbol, “big hit E” is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “5 to 64” (see 202b5 in FIG. 10A). . The "big hit E" is a big hit in which the number of rounds is 10 rounds, and after the big hit is completed, the "special change state of the special symbol" which continues until the next big hit and the "time saving state of the normal symbol" are given. . Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the counter value of "big hit E" is 60, so "big hit E" is determined when a big hit occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol. Is 60% (60/100). Although the "big hit E" has a smaller number of rounds than the "big hit D", the gaming state after the end of the big hit is as advantageous as the "big hit A", "big hit B", and "big hit D". Is set, and this is a kind of jackpot type that is advantageous to the player.

  For the second special symbol, “big hit F” is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “65 to 99” (see 202b6 in FIG. 10A). . The “big hit F” is a big hit in which the number of rounds is 10 and a “normal symbol time-saving state” that continues until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times after the big hit is completed. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the counter value of "big hit F" is 35, so if a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit F" is determined. Is 35% (35/100). Although the number of rounds of the "big hit F" is larger than the number of rounds of the first special symbol ("big hit A" to "big hit C"), the game state after the end of the big hit is disadvantageous, and thus the player is disadvantageous. Jackpot type.

  In this way, if the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the type of jackpot is that the number of rounds is larger than that of the lottery of the first special symbol. Is advantageous for the player. The ratio of the probability jackpot and the normal jackpot is the same in both the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol (65% in the probability variable jackpot and 35% in the regular jackpot).

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 10B) is a data table in which the hit determination value of the ordinary symbol is defined (stored). Specifically, in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, “5 to 28” is defined as the determination value that is the hit of the ordinary symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 10B). In addition, in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, “5 to 204” is defined as the determination value to be the hit of the ordinary symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 10B). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, refer to the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained based on the game ball passing through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 and the second random number table 202c. Then, it is determined whether or not it is a normal symbol hit.

  The fluctuation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 11) is a data table in which the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the fluctuation pattern is defined for each display mode. Since the details of the variation pattern table 202d are as described above in the description of the variation type counter CS1, a detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

  Next, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing a configuration of RAM 203 of main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 13, the RAM 203 includes a first special symbol retaining ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol retaining ball storage area 203b, an execution area 203c, a normal symbol retaining ball storing area 203d, and a first special symbol retaining ball number counter. 203e, a second special symbol holding ball number counter 203f, a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g, a probable change flag 203h, a time reduction counter 203i, an incoming ball waiting flag 203j, a big hit start flag 203k, a big hit flag 203m, and other memory areas 203z. At least have.

  The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area), and each of these areas has a first random number counter C1 and a first hit type. Each value of the counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the game ball wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding). Of the vacant areas from the first area to the reserved fourth area, the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in an area having a smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are changed to the execution area 203c. (See FIG. 12), and a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is made based on each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area 203c, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process in which the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) is packed into the reserved area having the smaller area number (the reserved first area to the reserved third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for holding areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) in which winning data is stored.

  The second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b has four holding areas, like the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. In the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, each counter value obtained based on the winning start to the second entrance 640 is stored. The method of storing the counter value and the like are the same as those in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, and thus a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The execution area 203c is a storage area in which the values of the counters C1 to C3 used for executing the special symbol lottery are stored. The value of each of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area 203c is compared with the first random number table 202a, the first type selection table 202b, and the like, and a lottery of a special symbol is executed.

  The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203d has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). Each of these areas stores a second random number counter C4. More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the game ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to holding area). Among the vacant areas of the (fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control device 110, when a lottery for a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203d is shifted to the execution area ( Is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for a normal symbol is made based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that it is the same as the case of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. Then, a shift process is performed to pack the winning data stored in the other reserved areas into the reserved area having the smaller area number. The data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning). This is a counter for counting the number of retained balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed by the symbol display device 81 up to four times. The first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e has an initial value set to zero, and each time a game ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of changing display-holding balls increases, the maximum value increases. It is incremented by 1 up to 4 (see S404 in FIG. 24). On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by one each time a new special symbol change display is executed (see S210 in FIG. 22).

  The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times N1 of the variable display in the first special symbol is changed) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball number command (S211 in FIG. 22, FIG. 24). See S405). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is changed.

  Each time the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is changed, the sound ramp control device 113 displays the variable display retained in the main control device 110 by the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value of the number of retained balls can be obtained. As a result, the number of balls for variable display managed by the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the actual variable display reserved for main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number of balls is deviated, the deviation can be corrected by the next received ball number command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and displays the reserved display number for notifying the display control device 114 every time the reserved ball number changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball count symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball count notified by the display reserved ball count command.

  The second special symbol holding ball number counter 203f is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the second entrance 640 (start winning). This is a counter for counting the number of retained balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed by the symbol display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the second special symbol holding ball counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a game ball enters the second entrance 640 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value increases. It is incremented by 1 up to 4 (see S410 in FIG. 24). On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by one each time a new special symbol change display is executed (see S205 in FIG. 22). The value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is also notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball number command, similarly to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is configured to display the number of retained balls of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passing of the game ball at the ordinary entrance (through gate) 67. This is a counter for counting the number of times of waiting (up to four times). The initial value of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203g is set to zero, and each time a game ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases, one is added to the maximum value of 4. (See S704 in FIG. 27). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is decremented by one each time a new variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is executed (see S605 in FIG. 26).

  When the game ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained if the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203g (the number of times M of the variable display in the ordinary symbol is retained) is less than 4. Then, the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203d (S705 in FIG. 27). On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203g is 4, nothing is newly stored in the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203d (S703 in FIG. 27). No).

  The probable change flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change state of the special symbol. If the probable change flag 203h is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change state of the special symbol. If the flag 203h is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol low probability state. In addition, as described above, during the special symbol change state, the normal symbol is reduced in time. Therefore, when the probability change flag 203h is on, it indicates that the special symbol is in the probability variation state and the normal symbol is in the time saving state.

  The probability variable flag 203h is set to an initial value of OFF, and when a probability variation jackpot (any one of “big hit A”, “big hit B”, “big hit D”, and “big hit E”) is reached, It is set to ON at the time of termination (see S1215 in FIG. 32). The probability change flag 203h is reset to off when the big hit game is started (see S219 in FIG. 22).

  The probability change flag 203h is referred to in the special symbol change start process to determine whether or not the gaming state is the probability change state (see S302 in FIG. 23). Specifically, when the special symbol change start process (FIG. 23, S213) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol change start process (S213 in FIG. 23), the probable change flag 203h is referred to. A special symbol lottery is held. On the other hand, if the probability change flag 203h is off, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the first probability random number table 202a for low probability (see 202a1 in FIG. 9B).

  The probability change flag 203h is also referred to in the normal symbol change process to determine whether or not the gaming state is a time saving state (S608, S614, S620 in FIG. 26). Specifically, the probable change flag 203h and the time reduction counter 203i described later are referred to in the normal symbol fluctuation process, and if the probable change flag 203h is on or the value of the time reduction counter 203i is 1 or more, It is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state, and a normal symbol lottery is performed based on the second random number table for high probability 202c (see 202c2 in FIG. 10B) (see S609 in FIG. 26). . On the other hand, if the probable change flag 203h is off and the value of the time reduction counter 203i is 0, it is determined that the symbol is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, and the second random number table 202c for the low probability state (FIG. 10 ( The lottery of the ordinary symbols is performed based on 202c1 of b)) (see S610 of FIG. 26). Further, in the ordinary symbol variation process, the probable variation flag 203h is also referred to when determining the variation time of the ordinary symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when the ordinary symbol is hit (S614 in FIG. 26). See S620).

  The time reduction counter 203i is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the time reduction counter 203i is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the counter 203i during time saving is 0 and the probability change flag 203h is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of a normal symbol. The initial value of the time reduction counter 203i is set to zero, and a special symbol is drawn in the main controller 110, and every time a normal jackpot is reached, the value is set to 100 at the end of the normal jackpot. (See S1214 in FIG. 32). In addition, regardless of the jackpot type, when a jackpot is determined by a special symbol lottery, the value is set to 0 while setting the start of the jackpot (see S219 in FIG. 22).

  When a lottery for a normal symbol is performed, the value of the time reduction counter 203i and the state of the probability change flag 203h are referred to, and if the value of the time reduction counter 203i is 1 or more, or the probability change flag 203h is on. For example, it is usually determined that the symbol is during the working hours. In this case, a lottery of a normal symbol is performed based on the second random number table for the high probability (see S609 in FIG. 26). On the other hand, if the value of the time reduction counter 203i is 0 and the probability change flag 203h is off, it is determined that the symbol is in the normal state, and based on the second random number table for low probability, the symbol is determined. Is performed (see S610 in FIG. 26).

  The entering ball waiting flag 203j is a flag indicating whether or not a jackpot waiting state in which the start of the jackpot is waited until the game ball enters the activated winning opening 660. If the incoming ball waiting flag 203j is on, it means that the game is in the jackpot waiting state, and if it is off, it means that the game is not in the jackpot waiting state. The ball waiting flag 203j becomes a big hit by a special symbol lottery, and is set to ON when the change time of the change pattern corresponding to the big hit elapses (see S220 in FIG. 22). In addition, the entering ball waiting flag 203j is set to off when a gaming ball enters the activated winning opening 660 in the jackpot waiting state (see S1104 in FIG. 31). While the ball entry waiting flag 203j is ON, the ball entry into the activated winning opening 660 is treated as valid (a big hit is started when a ball entry is detected).

  The jackpot start flag 203k is a flag indicating whether or not to start a jackpot. If the big hit start flag 203k is on, it means that it is time to start a big hit (the game ball enters the activated winning opening 660 and the big hit standby state ends). If it is off, the big hit is started. It is not the timing to start. The jackpot start flag 203k is set to ON when a game ball enters the activated winning opening 660 during the jackpot standby state (see S1103 in FIG. 31). The jackpot start flag 203k is set to off when the start of the jackpot is set (see S1203 in FIG. 32).

  The big hit flag 203m is a flag indicating whether or not a big hit (special game state) is in progress. If the big hit flag 203m is on, it means that a big hit is being made, and if it is off, it means that there is no big hit. The big hit flag 203m becomes a big hit due to the lottery of the special symbol, and the big hit (special game state) is started and set to ON (see S1203 in FIG. 32). Also, it is set to off at the end of the big hit (special game state) (see S1217 in FIG. 32). In the special symbol change process (see FIG. 22), the big hit flag 203m is referred to determine whether or not a big hit is being made (see S201 in FIG. 22).

  The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

  As described above, the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 is provided with various counters and flags.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 including an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a right specific winning opening 65a, and an opening / closing door for closing or opening the left specific winning opening 650a. A solenoid 209 including a large-opening solenoid for opening and closing the 65f1 and a solenoid for driving the electric accessory, a rotating body motor 670c for rotating the rotating member 670a are connected, and the MPU 201 Various commands and control signals are transmitted to these via the output port 205.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch (122 in FIG. 3) circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Various processes are executed based on signals output from various switches 208 and a RAM erasure signal SG2 output from a RAM erasure switch (122 in FIG. 3) circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 28) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a such that when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to launch a game ball, the ball launch unit 112a has a launching strength of the game ball according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. is there. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the game ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the handle 51, and a game ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights in a lamp display device (lights 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and performs a fluctuation display effect ( The display control device 114 controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the variable display. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The sound ramp control device 113 monitors the outputs of the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f, and determines the approximate number of game balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 from the number of sensors whose outputs are H (high). It is configured to be able to grasp. Then, in the jackpot waiting state, the mode (gauge amount) of the chance meter CM to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed in accordance with the number of game balls grasped according to the number of sensors. This allows the player to see the amount of prize balls (the number of game balls entering when the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened) obtained when the player enters the game balls into the operation winning opening 660. Can be easily understood. Therefore, during the jackpot waiting state, the right-handed shot is performed with a firing intensity (a firing intensity of less than 95%) that does not reach the activated winning opening 660 more actively, and more game balls reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. It can be made to try. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game in the jackpot waiting state.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors an input from the frame button 22 and, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super reach. The sound output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content at the time, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and displays an error command including the type of the error. Transmit to device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  Next, details of the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 14A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. The ROM 222 has at least a fluctuation pattern selection table 222a.

  The variation pattern selection table 222a is based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110, and shows more detailed variation from the rough variation content (variation time, variation type (reach, deviation, etc.)) indicated by the variation pattern command. Used to determine content. As a result, various variations can be determined. Here, one variation mode among a plurality of types is determined by lottery with respect to the rough variation content instructed by main controller 110.

  Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14B is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. In the RAM 223, a winning information storage area 223a, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a variation start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, and a variation time counter 223f. , A standby state effect flag 223g, a level counter 223h, a game state storage area 223i, and another memory area 223z.

  The winning information storage area 223a has a storage area composed of four areas (first area to fourth area) for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In addition, it has one execution area. Winning information is stored in each area. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 detects a start winning, each of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the starting winning. From the value, various information (acceptance, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted (estimated) by the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is obtained. Is notified from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 by a winning information command.

  When the prize information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various information (acceptance, stop type, fluctuation pattern) notified by the prize information command as prize information, and the prize information is used as the prize information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in ascending order of the area numbers (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first to fourth areas). Is done. That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in an area having a smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the first area.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is a counter that counts up to four times the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol held in the main controller 110, and the second special symbol. The symbol holding ball number counter 223c is a counter that counts the number of holding balls corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol up to four times.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and stores the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 203e and the second special symbol reservation ball number stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. The value of the counter 203f cannot be obtained. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the retained ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and performs the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter. At 223c, the number of reserved balls is managed for each special symbol type.

  More specifically, the main controller 110 adds the number of balls to be displayed in the variable display due to the entry to the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, or a special symbol in the main controller 110. When the fluctuation display is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e or the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f after addition or subtraction is retained. The ball number command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  When receiving the reserved ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110, the sound ramp control device 113 determines the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203e of the main control device 110 or the second special symbol from the reserved ball count command. The value of the reserved ball number counter 203f is acquired and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (see S4308 in FIG. 36). As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. Therefore, the values can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f of the main control device 110.

  The values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball count command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball count indicated by the command in the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball count counter 223c. At the same time, in order to notify the display control device 114 of the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c after storage, the display reserved ball number command is sent to the display control device 114. Send to.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball count command, the value of the reserved ball count indicated by the command, that is, the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 and the second special ball count value Drawing of an image is controlled so that the number of symbols of the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the first special symbol retaining ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 223c are the first special symbol retaining ball number counter 203e and the second special symbol retaining ball number counter of the main controller 110. The value is changed in synchronization with 203f. Accordingly, the number of the reserved ball count symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also the value of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203e and the second special symbol reserved ball count counter 203f of the main controller 110. Can be changed while synchronizing with. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of the reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

  The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S4302 in FIG. 36), and turned off when the fluctuation display is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S4502 in FIG. 38). When the variation start flag 223d is turned on, a display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S4305 in FIG. 36), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S4507 in FIG. 38). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type (big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command.

  The fluctuation time counter 223f is a counter that counts the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the special symbol. When a fluctuation pattern command is received from main controller 110, the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern notified by the fluctuation pattern command is set in fluctuation time counter 223f.

  The standby state effect flag 223g is a flag indicating whether or not the standby state effect (see FIGS. 7A and 7B) is being executed. If the standby state effect flag 223g is on, it means that the standby state effect is being executed, and if it is off, it means that the standby state effect is not being executed. The standby state effect flag 223g is set to ON when the standby state command indicating that the jackpot standby state has been entered is received from the main control device 110 and the start of the standby state effect is set (FIG. 37). S4403). In addition, the standby state effect flag 223g is set to OFF when an opening command indicating the start of a jackpot is received from the main control device 110 (see S4406 in FIG. 37).

  The level counter 223h is a counter that indicates the gauge number (level) of the chance meter CM displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the standby state effect (see FIGS. 7A and 7B). The value of the level counter 223h is updated in conjunction with the number of sensors whose outputs are H (high) among the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f (see S4204 in FIG. 35). That is, the number of sensors whose output is H (high) is set as the counter value.

  The gaming state storage area 223i is a storage area for storing data corresponding to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The game state storage area 223i is updated each time a state command output from the main control device 110 is output each time the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed (see S4310 in FIG. 36). Note that the gaming state storage area 223i is formed of, for example, a 1-byte storage area, and is configured so that the gaming state can be specified by the state of the lower two bits. More specifically, for example, the least significant bit indicates whether the symbol is in the time saving state of a normal symbol, and the second least significant bit indicates whether the symbol is in a probable change state of the special symbol. Therefore, in the “low probability state of the special symbol” and the “normal state of the ordinary symbol”, the lower 2 bits are “00B”, and in the “low probability state of the special symbol” and the “time reduction state of the ordinary symbol”, Two bits are "01B", and in the "special symbol change state" and the "normal symbol time saving state", the lower two bits are "11B". The MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 can grasp the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10 on the audio ramp control device 113 side based on the data stored in the gaming status storage area 223i.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113.

  The RAM 223 further includes a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed, an elapse timer for measuring the production time, and the like. are doing. The command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 36) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process performs The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, displays a variation (variation) of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Direction) and a continuous announcement effect. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each of the NMI terminals of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 28).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model having a different special lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and a different number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce the cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to perform a system reset from the power supply unit 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231 a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided in a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. Instead, the character data is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a that can achieve a large capacity with a small area. Thereby, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in general, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is reduced particularly when random access is performed. For example, in a case where data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages is read, high-speed reading of data on the second and subsequent pages is possible, but an address is specified for reading data of the first page. It takes a long time from when the data is output. In addition, when data that is not continuous is read, a large amount of time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporarily storing various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at a high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to be described later to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240. The image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, The data is transferred to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as the images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. As described above, the control program and the fixed value data are provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on an address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory And outputs it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) occur during data writing, and a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes the data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs the data address translation of

  The ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, based on the erroneous data, Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, the bad data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b, and access to the bad data block is avoided. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even when the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of controlling access to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b operates for one page including data corresponding to the specified address (for example, 2 kilobytes). Is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or the NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. I do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one bank of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Accordingly, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or specifies the data from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is stored in the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the response in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first stores the program after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. After the system reset is released, the MPU 231 first executes the boot program. Thus, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, in a range of the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes)) are stored from the instructions. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set in accordance with the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and specifies the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is specified on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds one to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set from the NOR-type ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. , And reads the instruction code at the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234c and outputs it to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing the entire control program in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released from the NOR type ROM 234d in the boot program. Is stored for the following reason. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a requires a large amount of time from when an address is specified to when data is output in reading data of the first page, which is unique to the NAND flash memory. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a great amount of time from the reading to the setting to the buffer RAM 234c. Spend a lot of time waiting to receive the code. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions of the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. When the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  Now, the boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program is stored in a program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, one page capacity of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, and sets the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the setting, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is used. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 stores the instruction pointer 231a in the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined position in the program storage area 233a. The address is set.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, so that a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 include the remaining boot programs in the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The program is programmed so as to include the instruction pointer 231a with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thus, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Execute the remaining boot program included in the control program.

  In the remaining boot programs, all of the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. More specifically, an initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 39) executed after the boot process by the boot program (see S6001 in FIG. 39) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading a control program from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored, and for the remaining boot programs, Even when the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Can be.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 20) transmitted from the MPU 231 to be described later, and selects one of a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs this one-frame image drawing process and one-frame image display process for one frame of image display time on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment). In parallel.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects the V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 41B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing processing of the image for the next one frame, and executes the processing of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that a new image drawing is started during the image drawing, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in a frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in accordance with a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of an image is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, image data necessary for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory generally facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but has a lower read speed than other ROMs (such as a mask ROM and an EEPROM). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to be. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thereby, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data to be used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. The time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Particularly, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 are resident. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to perform drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image. It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of, and the time required for reading out the image data can be omitted. it can.

  Further, since the image data is also stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a constituted by a 132 kilobyte SRAM which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The image data transfer instruction issued by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating to which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and the beginning of the transfer destination (the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a in accordance with the various information of the transfer instruction, and temporarily stores the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction to the storage source end address is transferred.

  As a result, image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing processing. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

  Further, the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237. It is possible to easily determine a period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and to simplify the processing.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. The power-on main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. 235e, an error message image area 235f, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d.

  The power-on main image area 235a stores a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on to when all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. An area for storing corresponding data. The power-on fluctuation image area 235b indicates that the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance is provided. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on fluctuation image that displays a result of a lottery performed in the main control device 110 by a fluctuation effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 39).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 shows the power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the display control device 114 is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  The display controller 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a first and uses the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display control unit 114 receives the display change pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control unit 113 based on the change pattern command from the main control unit 110 which is the change start instruction command, the display control unit 114 starts the process shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 16 (c), on the display screen of the main image at power-on, a power-on fluctuation image of a symbol “○” is located at the lower right position toward the screen, and as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, a power-on variation image of an “X” symbol is alternately and repeatedly displayed during the variation period. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 are used to determine the lottery performed by the main control device 110. The result is judged, and when it is “special symbol jackpot”, the image shown in FIG. 16 (b) is displayed for a certain period after the fluctuation effect is stopped. The image shown is displayed for a certain period after the fluctuation effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs the main image to be drawn at power-on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall can check the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. In addition, the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the remaining images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are displayed. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary to wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped. Can be.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed for the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In addition, when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player starts the game, and a ball is detected at the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. In this case, the power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 16 (b) and (c) alternate. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  Also, at the stage when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When a ball is detected at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the main time image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variable effect is displayed on the third symbol. It can be displayed on the device 81 immediately.

  Returning to FIG. 15, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 17, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images will be described. FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram for explaining four types of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each of the back images. FIG. 17B shows a back surface A corresponding to the “sand beach stage”, and FIG. 17B shows a back surface B corresponding to the “deep sea stage”.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the character ROM 234 prepares an image that is longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the rear image corresponding to each of the rear surfaces A and B. The image controller 237 draws the image such that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

  The images prepared on each of the rear surfaces A and B (hereinafter, referred to as “scroll images”) are configured such that the rear images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and are images between the position c and the position d. Is displayed as a display area on the third symbol display device 81, and then an image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The back image is scrolled and displayed with a proper connection.

  When the change of the back type is determined and the stage is changed to the “sand beach stage” or the “deep sea stage”, the MPU 231 sets a position between the first position a and the position a ′ of the corresponding back image as an initial position of the display area. Then, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, as time passes, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the region reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display region is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

  Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 17A, the back surface A corresponding to the sandy beach stage which is the initial stage has the entire range of the back surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the positions a to d are the back surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often performed without changing the stage while the initial stage, "Sandy Beach Stage", is displayed. Therefore, the image data of the back surface A corresponding to the "Sandy Beach Stage" that is frequently displayed is displayed. By making them all resident in the back image area 235c, the number of times of data access to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 17B, the back surface B corresponding to the “deep sea stage” has only a part of the back surface, that is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b is resident. It is stored in the back image area 235c of the video RAM 235.

  Here, in order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data for all the rear images is resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from the position a to the position a '(or the range from FIG. 17A to FIG. 17B). ) And the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. 17A and 17B) is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, if the stage change is determined by the lottery at the start of the change, the character ROM 234 may be stored on the back of the resident video RAM 235. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial position of the back surface B can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, it is possible to display while changing the scrolling display or color over time. In addition, since only the image data corresponding to the image in the partial range is stored for the back surface B, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  After the image at the initial position is displayed, the rear surface B scrolls the range from position a to position b from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 during the operation. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from the position a to the position b using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b ′ to the position d is scrolled. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  On the rear surface B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the rear image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 15) of the normal video RAM 236. Thus, the rear image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the rear image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the rear image can be displayed reliably.

  On the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to the image corresponding to the image between the position b ′ and the position b. Data is stored redundantly. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scroll-displayed with a smooth connection to the third symbol display device 81. ing.

  Further, when the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so as to display the image between the position c and the position d as a display area on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data of the normal video RAM 236, The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed as a display area on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data of the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. I do. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c so as to flow leftward in a smooth connection.

  Returning to FIG. 15, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned nine types of main symbols (see FIG. 6 (b)) with numbers "1" to "9", which are the third symbols, are resident. You. Thus, when performing a fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 every time. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, A fluctuating effect can be started quickly. Therefore, even though the first symbol display device 37 starts the variable effect on the first symbol entrance device 64 or the second entrance port 640, the third symbol display device is started. In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the fluctuation effect is not immediately started.

  Also, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the main symbol without numbers “1” to “9” is also resident. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next fluctuation effect associated with the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one fluctuation effect. Can be Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Accordingly, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbol without a number from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "Youth" and "Women" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is resident in the character symbol area 235e. Accordingly, when changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but displays the character in the resident video RAM 235. By reading image data resident in the symbol area 235e in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the character pattern can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of the vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Also, when the occurrence of another error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to, when receiving the error command, display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error, from the viewpoint of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player from the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 determines the error message in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data necessary for drawing the subsequent image data among the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236. Then, it instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data specified by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. Thus, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing the image for one frame into the frame buffer. While the image is being developed, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame that has been previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. Then, by transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process of displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 simultaneously develops one frame of the image drawn in one frame buffer while developing the image. The image for one frame that has been developed first is read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame for displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81 are different from each other. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234 and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Be composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data determination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads out the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 , It is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table that describes display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in a second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after a system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from character ROM 234 to work RAM 233, and stored in data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114. By using 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, an opening effect A display data table corresponding to a round effect, an ending effect, and a demonstration effect is prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when the fluctuation effect is started, if the stop type of the fluctuation effect is out of range, a stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the fluctuation effect is one of the big hits A to F. In any case, the stop symbols indicating the respective jackpot types are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in the variable effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will be shifted to the special game state from now on, and the right specific winning opening 65a and the left specific winning opening 650a which are normally closed will be repeatedly opened. And the round effect is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special game state.

  Note that, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning prize is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one variable effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbol without numbers “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person related to the hall can recognize that the game is not performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. If there are 32 variation effect patterns to be set as the variation effect display data table for the variation effect, one table is prepared for each variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

  Here, the display data table will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is defined as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  In the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency, and the like are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, for drawing a sprite on the third symbol display device 81 is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying a sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 at which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying an enlargement factor for a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is enlarged and displayed in a size larger than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite is displayed. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for specifying a color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to a specified sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), And one light image For each sprite, drawing information for each sprite such as an effect that expresses insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters is defined. Note that one or more pieces of information on effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type is to display either back A or B corresponding to the stage (one of “sand beach stage” or “deep sea stage”) selected by the player, or a back different from back A or B. Information for specifying whether to display an image is described. In addition, in the case of specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A and B is to be displayed, the back type also includes information for specifying which back image is to be displayed.

  If it is specified by the back type that any of the back A or B is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back A and B as a drawing target, Further, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified that a back image different from the back surfaces A and B is to be displayed, the back image to be displayed is specified based on the back type.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back type is defined as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. Instead, the back type and the range of May be defined as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third symbol display device 81).

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and drawing of an image based on the display data table according to the rear type (or the third symbol display device 81). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. This is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating an address at which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of the information indicating the elapsed time.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers given to the respective third symbols. Rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and the offset information from the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is described in the symbol offset information from the start of the variation until a predetermined time has elapsed. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set in accordance with the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Provide information. Thus, the variable effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since each 3rd symbol is given a unique number, a variation symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect and a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110 are displayed in the 3rd symbol. , And the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols, whereby the third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

  In the symbol offset information, the predetermined time in which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed. It is set to be the time displayed. While the third symbol is being displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the stop effect of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the number of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made aware of the interruption of the continuity of the number. be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the head address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 18) of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of the process is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time the rendering process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and based on the rendering content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, An image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 20) described later is created. By transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is issued. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order specified in the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, and the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and the like. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

  Here, when a program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as in a conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. A large load is placed on the processing of starting and executing a complicated and enormous program, which may limit the processing capability of the display control device 114 and limit the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, a variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each of the rendering modes, a display data table buffer corresponding to the rendering mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display content cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the presentation mode. As described above, the display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, the display data table buffer is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and the drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, the resident one of the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table. The transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

  Note that if all image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thus, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and is transfer data information of image data of a sprite to be transferred at a time indicated by the address (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”). (Corresponding to addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 19). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (address “0002H” in FIG. 19 corresponds).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 where the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  Note that, as in the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address “0000H” of the transfer data table, and the last address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 19, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list described later (see FIG. 20) is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite at which the transfer is to be started at that time is obtained, and the transfer list is created in the drawing list in which the transfer data information is created. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 19, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, since null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the transfer data table is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays the display data in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110 or the like. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236. As described above, the transfer start timing can be instructed, so that even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c determines whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIGS. 16A to 16C on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. Is set to ON in the main processing (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 231 (see S6005 in FIG. 39). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image other than the power-on image. It is set to off (see S7705 in FIG. 51B).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 41B), and When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 41B) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 41B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 41 (b) (see S6309). On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 42 to 47) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 48 to 50) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S7601 in FIG. 51A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 51B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 52) for transferring image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. This is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, increments the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 20) described below, which describes the contents of an image drawing instruction for the image, is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, sends an image to the image controller 237 frame by frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 20) described below that describes the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e stores a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. The data is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the content by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f to the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. If this is the case (that is, if no Null data is described), the transfer data information is stored in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 20) that describes the contents of an image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw a predetermined sprite in accordance with the display data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. Is to be specified. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 at the same time that the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 41 (b) ), The pointer update process (see S7305 in FIG. 48) is performed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, 20 (see FIG. 20), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Accordingly, various effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing the image can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g stores an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. 237 is an area for storing a drawing list instructed by 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 20, a back image used for one frame image, ..., effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number design 1, reserved ball number design 2, ..., error) For each sprite such as a pattern, detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored. The image controller 237 obtains image data of the sprite from a memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to a scaling process according to a magnification ratio, a rotation process according to a rotation angle, and a translucent process according to a translucent value. Subject to alpha blending information, perform synthesis processing with other sprites, perform color tone correction processing according to color information, and perform filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to filter specification information. Then, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the rendered image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the rendering target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, Based on an image and a warning image notifying that an error has occurred, detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, in the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and the address of the data of the sprite (display object) correspond to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the content of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Also, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged from the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image of one frame, and obtains detailed drawing information for each sprite. (Detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, first, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described, and then, the third design (design 1, design 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes the drawing processing of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  Further, when the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transmits the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes the transfer data information, the image controller 237 reads the image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. The time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (see FIG. 41B Each time the display setting process of ()) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7307 of FIG. 48). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processings to be performed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i indicates that, for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is any.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “OFF” indicating that the storage states for all sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 231. Is In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprite to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprite is set to “off”.

  The MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite in which image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the transfer target sprite. It is determined whether or not the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7813 in FIG. 52). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S7814 in FIG. 52). The image controller 237 causes the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, since the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a “drawing target buffer”) that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). If the rendering target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the rendering target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is designated. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7902 in FIG. 53).

  Thus, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the rendered image information which has already been developed from a frame buffer different from the rendering target buffer in parallel with the rendering process, and sends the read image information to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated at the same time that the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done by Accordingly, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and the display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process (see S6306 in FIG. 41B) is executed.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

<Control process of main controller in first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process started upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer started periodically (at an interval of 2 ms in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process will be described, and then a start process will be described. And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switches are read (S101). That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (399 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (239 in this embodiment), the value is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are maximized (in this embodiment, When they reach 399, 99, 99, 239, respectively, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). A start winning process is executed in accordance with the winning (start winning) in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S105). The details of the special symbol change process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process accompanying the passing of the game ball in the through gate 67 is performed. Execute (S107). The details of the ordinary symbol change process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27. After the execution of the through gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a and fires the ball on condition that the hitting switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process for determining ON / OFF of the data. When the launch of the game ball is on, the main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the game ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (S104). This special symbol change process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and the special symbol (first symbol) change display performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device are performed. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed at 81.

  In the special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether the current time is in a jackpot waiting state or a special symbol jackpot (S201). Specifically, it is determined whether any of the incoming ball waiting flag 203j and the big hit flag 203m is on. If the result of determination is that the player is in the jackpot waiting state or the special symbol jackpot (S201: Yes), the present process ends.

  In the processing of S201, when it is determined that neither the jackpot standby state nor the special symbol jackpot is present (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202). If the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (S202: No), the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of times N2 of the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol) is changed. It is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S204). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the executed second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1001) of a later-described main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223c.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of S206, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. The data is shifted, and the process proceeds to S213.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S204: No), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (first The number of times the variable display is held based on the special symbol lottery N1) is acquired (S208), and it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S209). .

  In the process of S209, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S209: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S209 that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (that is, it is 1 or more) (S209: Yes), the first special symbol reserved ball number is set. The value (N1) of the counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S210), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S211). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1001) of a later-described main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223b.

  After setting the reserved ball count command by the processing of S211, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted by the same method as the processing of S207 (S212), and the processing proceeds to S213. Transition. In the process of S213 executed after the process of S207 or S212, a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S213), and this process is ended. The details of the special symbol change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), the change time counter for measuring the change time is updated (S214), and the updated change time counter is updated. It is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed based on the value (S215). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and the fluctuation time is determined. If has not elapsed (S215: No), the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S216), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S215, if the fluctuating time of the fluctuating display being executed has elapsed (S215: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S217). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol change start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol change start process (S213) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1. If the special symbol is a big hit, the special symbol is set according to the value of the first hit type counter C2. Any of the jackpots A to F is determined.

  In the present embodiment, when the big hit A occurs, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, when the big hit B is turned on, the red LED is turned on. When the jackpot D is turned on, the blue LED and the green LED are turned on. In this case, the blue LED, the red LED, and the green LED are turned on. If it is off, the blue LED and the red LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next change display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the change stops.

  After the process of S217 is completed, when the variation display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the special symbol variation start process (the current lottery result) is: It is determined whether it is a special symbol jackpot (S218). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S218: Yes), the probability change flag 203h is set to OFF, and the value of the time reduction counter 203i is reset to 0 (S219). Then, the entry standby flag 203j is set to ON, and a standby state command indicating the start of the jackpot standby state is set (S220), and the process shifts to S223. The standby state command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 30) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the standby state command, the sound lamp control device 113 issues a display standby state command for starting a standby state effect (see FIGS. 7A and 7B) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. This is set as a command to be output to the display control device 114. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, a standby state effect is started.

  On the other hand, in the process of S218, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S218: No), the value of the time reduction counter 203i is a value larger than 0 (that is, whether the symbol is in the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol). ) Is determined (S221), and when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203i is greater than 0 (S221: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203i is decremented by 1 (S222), and the process proceeds to S223. I do. On the other hand, in the process of S221, when it is determined that the value of the during-hours counter 203i is 0 (S221: No), the process of S222 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S223. Although illustration is omitted, when the value of the time saving counter 203i after the subtraction becomes 0 in the process of S222, the gaming state is changed from the time saving state of the ordinary symbol to the normal state of the ordinary symbol. Is set. The state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 30) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the status command, the sound ramp control device 113 acquires the game status included in the status command. Thereby, the state grasped by the sound lamp control device 113 can be made to coincide with the actual state of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the process of S223, a stop command indicating a stop type is set, and the process ends. The stop command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output in the external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 30) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the state command, the sound lamp control device 113 sets a stop symbol of the third symbol based on the stop type indicated by the stop command.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the special symbol change start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start process (S213). The special symbol change start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 22) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and includes the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and Based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a lottery (judgement) of “special symbol jackpot” or “special symbol loss” is performed, and the first symbol is determined. This is a process for determining an effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) of the fluctuation effect performed by the display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol change start process, first, the respective values of the first random number counter C1, first type counter C2, and stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area 203c are acquired (S301).

  Next, the probable change flag 203h is read, and it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change state of the special symbol (S302). In the process of S302, if the probable change flag 203h is on, it is determined that the special symbol is in the probable change state, and if the probable change flag 203h is off, it is determined that the special symbol is in the low probability state (not the probable change state). In the process of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol change state (S302: Yes), the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 and the special symbol for high probability are used. Based on the jackpot random number table, a lottery result of whether or not a special symbol is a jackpot is obtained (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with a first random number table for high probability (see 202a2 in FIG. 9B). As described above, 20 random numbers of “0 to 19” are set as the random numbers for the special symbol jackpot, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value of these wins. If so, it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot. When the special symbol lottery result is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol change state (the special symbol is in the low probability state) (S302: No), the first random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301. And a lottery result as to whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is acquired based on the value of and the first random number table for low probability (see 202a1 in FIG. 9B) (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with a special symbol big random number table for low probability. If the value of the first hit random number counter C1 matches the random number value (ie, “0, 1”) that is a hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. When the special symbol lottery result is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

  Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305), and when it is determined that the special symbol jackpot (S305: Yes), Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode at the time of the big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 10A) to determine what the big hit type is. I do. As described above, in the case of a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 4", it is determined that the jackpot is the jackpot A (8 rounds, the variable jackpot). It is determined that if it is in the range of "5 to 64", it is a jackpot B (5 rounds of probability change jackpot), and if it is in the range of "65 to 99", it is a jackpot C (5 rounds regular jackpot). The determination is made (see FIG. 10A). On the other hand, when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 4”, it is determined that the jackpot is the jackpot D (16 rounds, the variable jackpot), If it is in the range of "5 to 64", it is determined to be a jackpot E (10 rounds normal jackpot), and if it is in the range of "65 to 99", it is determined to be a jackpot F (10 rounds normal jackpot) ( FIG. 10A).

  In the process of S306, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined big hit type (big hit A to F). In order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit type on the third symbol display device 81, the big hit types (big hits A to F) are set as the stop types.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the big hit symbol until it stops. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 11A), and the variation pattern (corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1) is compared. Fluctuating time).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S305 that the special symbol has been removed (S305: No), a display mode at the time of removal is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the third symbol display is performed based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area 203c. The type of stop to be displayed in the device 81 is set to reach out of front / rear, reach other than front / rear out, or completely out of reach.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probable change state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the high probability stop type selection table. Then, the stop type is set. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete departure is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", reach other than departure before and after is set, and "98" , 99 ”, the out-of-order reach is set. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. I do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete departure is set, and if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “80 to 97”, reach other than departure is set. , 99 ”, the out-of-order reach is set.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of departure is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S307, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern table 202d, and the variation pattern (variation) corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is compared. Time).

  When the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is completed, next, a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern determined in the processing of S307 or S309 is set (S310). Next, a counter value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the current fluctuation pattern is set in the fluctuation time counter (S311). Then, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S306 or S308 is set (S312). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and are transmitted to the audio ramp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (see FIG. 30). When the processing of S312 ends, the process returns to the special symbol change processing (see FIG. 22).

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and determines whether or not there is a win (start win) in the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640. This is a process for executing a hold process of the values indicated by the various counters when a winning start is made.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. When it is determined that the game ball has won the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol is retained) is acquired. (S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203e is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  Then, whether the gaming ball has won the first entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if the gaming ball has won the first entrance 64, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e. If the value (N1) is not less than 4 (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the first special The value (N1) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball count command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1001) of a later-described main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223b.

  After setting the pending ball number command in the processing of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, first collision type counter C2, and fluctuation type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing are stored in the RAM 203. The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is stored in the first of the empty holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area) (S406), and the process proceeds to S407. In the process of S406, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  In the processing of S407, it is determined whether or not the gaming ball has won (starts winning) the second entrance 640 (S407). In this process, similarly to the process of S401, the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has won the second entrance 640 (S407: Yes), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times the variable display is retained in the special symbol N2) is acquired. (S408), it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S409).

  Then, whether or not there is a prize in the second entrance 640 (S407: No), or even if there is a prize in the second entrance 640, the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is changed. If it is determined that it is not less than 4 (that is, it is 4) (S409: No), the process proceeds to S413. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the second entrance 640 (S407: Yes) and the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S409: Yes), the second special One is added to the value (N2) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203f (S410). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f changed by the calculation is set (S411).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1001) of a later-described main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223c.

  After setting the pending ball number command by the processing of S411, the values of the first random number counter C1, first collision type counter C2, and fluctuation type counter CS1 updated in the processing of S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above are It is stored in the first area of the free reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (S412), and the process proceeds to S413. In the process of S412, similarly to the process of S406, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  In the process of S413, a pre-read process for pre-reading the success or failure is performed from various counter values acquired based on the winning start (S413), and this process ends. Details of the prefetching process will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the prefetching process (S413). In this pre-reading process (S413), first, it is determined whether or not a new ball entry to the first entry port 64 or the second entry port 640 has been detected in the current start winning process (see FIG. 24). (S501), if a new ball has not been detected (S501: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S501 that a new incoming ball has been detected (S501: Yes), then the number of reserved balls corresponding to the detected incoming ball is the upper limit value (ie, 4). It is determined whether or not the value is the upper limit (S502: Yes), and the process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S502, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is less than the upper limit value (S502: No), it is determined whether or not the timing of starting the variable display based on the incoming ball is a special symbol change state. Is determined (S503). In the process of S503, it is determined whether or not the game state is the probable change state according to the current game state and the result of the look-ahead of the reserved ball retained before the current ball entry. Specifically, if the jackpot is not included in the reserved ball, the current game state matches the timing of starting the fluctuation display based on the ball detected this time, so that the current game state is in a probable state. Is determined. In addition, when a jackpot is included in the reserved ball, the gaming state may be changed according to the type of the jackpot. Specifically, when the probability jackpot is suspended, the state shifts to the probability change state after the jackpot, and when the normal jackpot is suspended, the state transitions to the normal state after the jackpot. Taking these factors into consideration, it is determined whether or not the start timing of the variable display based on the ball that has been detected this time is in the positive change state.

  In the process of S503, when it is determined that the start of the variation based on the currently detected ball entry is the special symbol change state (S503: Yes), the type of the entrance that detected the ball entry and the high probability Based on the first random number table (see 202a2 in FIG. 9B), the lottery result based on the current ball entry is acquired (S504), and the process proceeds to S506. On the other hand, when it is determined that the start of the change is the low probability state of the special symbol (S503: No), the type of the entrance that has detected the entrance and the first random number table for the low probability state (FIG. 9) Based on (b) 202a1), a lottery result based on the current ball entry is acquired (S505), and the process proceeds to S506.

  In the processing of S506 executed after the processing of S504 or S505, a winning information command is set based on the type of the entrance that has detected the current ball entry and the lottery result obtained in the processing of S504 or S505. (S506), this process ends. The winning information command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 30) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the winning information command, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the type of the entrance notified by the winning information command and the lottery result in the winning information storage area 223a.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the ordinary symbol change process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol change processing (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and is performed by the second symbol display device 83 to display the variation of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) and the second entrance. This is a process for controlling the opening time and the like of the electric accessory 640a attached to the 640.

  In the ordinary symbol variation process (S106), first, it is determined whether or not the current moment is a winning of an ordinary symbol (second symbol) (S601). As the hit during the normal symbol (the second symbol), the control for opening and closing the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is performed while the display indicating the hit is made on the second symbol display device 83. In the middle of being included. If the result of the determination is that a normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is not hitting a normal symbol (second symbol) (S601: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (S602: No), the value of the ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203g (the number M of suspended display of the ordinary symbol in the ordinary symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203g is larger than 0 (S604). If the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203g is 0 (S604: S604). No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203g is not 0 (S604: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203g (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203d is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203d to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the ordinary symbol holding sphere storage area 203d is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in a time saving state (S608). As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, if the probable change flag 203h is on or the value of the time-saving medium counter 203i is 1 or more, it is determined that the time-saving state of the ordinary symbol is present. If the probable change flag 203h is off and the value of the time reduction counter 203i is 0, it is determined that the symbol is in the normal state.

  In the process of S608, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S608: Yes), the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S607 and the random number per normal symbol table for high probability On the basis of the result, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol is won is acquired (S609). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if the value is in the range of “0 to 4,205 to 239”, It is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (see 202c2 in FIG. 10B).

  In the process of S608, when it is determined that the time saving state of the ordinary symbol is not present (S608: No), the process proceeds to S610. In the process of S610, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S607 is Based on the random number table per common symbol for probability time, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol is won is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if the value is in the range of 0 to 4, 29 to 239 ”, It is determined that the symbol has been removed (see 202c1 in FIG. 10B).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S609 or S610 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S611). The display mode of the hit is set (S612). In the process of S612, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, a symbol "O" is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol), and the process proceeds to S614. . On the other hand, in the process of S611, when it is determined that it is not a hit of a normal symbol (it is a deviation of a normal symbol) (S611: No), a display mode at the time of deviation is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, it is set so that the symbol “x” is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol), and the process proceeds to S614. .

  In the processing of S614 executed after the processing of S612 or S613, it is determined whether or not the symbol is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol (whether the probability change flag 203h is on or the counter 203i during the time saving is 1 or more) (S614). If the symbol is in the time saving state (S614: Yes), the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S615), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time reduction state (that is, the probable change flag 203h is off and the value of the counter 203i during the time reduction is 0) (S614: No), the second symbol display device 83 The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display is set to 30 seconds (S616), and this processing ends.

  In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. Is determined (S617). Note that the fluctuation time here is a time set in advance by the processing of S615 or S616 before the fluctuation display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  In the processing of S617, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S617: No), the present processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S617, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S617: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S618). In the process of S618, the lottery of the normal symbol is a hit, and if the display mode is set by the process of S612, the symbol “○” as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lighting). Display). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S613, the “X” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S618, when the second symbol display updating process (see S1008) of the main process (see FIG. 30) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. After ending, the stopped symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S612 or S613.

  Next, when the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (the current lottery result) is a hit of the ordinary symbol. Is determined (S619). If the result of this lottery is a normal symbol hit (S619: Yes), then, whether the normal symbol is in the time reduction state (ie, whether the probability change flag 203h is on or the time reduction medium counter 203i is 1 or more) Is determined (S620), and if it is not during the time-saving state (S620: No), the opening time and the number of times of opening of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 are set to “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. After setting (S621), the process proceeds to S623. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S620 that the time of the ordinary symbol is reduced (S620: Yes), the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 are set to “1 second × "2 times" (S622), and the process proceeds to S623.

  In the processing of S623, the opening time and the opening / closing control start of the number of times of opening determined in the processing of S621 or S622 are set (S623), and this processing ends. When the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set to be started by the processing of S623, when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1006) of the main process (see FIG. 30) is executed next, the electric accessory 640a is opened. The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S621 or S622 end. On the other hand, in the process of S619, if the current lottery result is out of the ordinary symbol (S619: No), each process of S620 to S623 is skipped, and this process ends.

  Next, a through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 21), and it is determined whether or not the game ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, and the passage of the game ball is determined. If there is, this is a process for acquiring the value indicated by the second random number counter C4 and suspending it.

  In the through gate passage process, first, it is determined whether or not a game ball has passed the normal entrance 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the game ball at the normal entrance 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g (the number of times M of the variable display is held in the normal symbol) is acquired (S702). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203g is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  Whether the game ball has not passed through the normal entrance 67 (S701: No), or even if the game ball has passed through the normal entrance 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is 4 If it is not less than (S703: No), this processing is ended. On the other hand, if the game ball passes through the normal entrance 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203g is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number The value (M) of the counter 203g is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt processing is stored in the first one of the free reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203. (S705), and the process ends. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing (S801). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner by the payout and departure control device 111, and the power-off information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, a description will be given of a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (one second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) become operable. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S915. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905). If not, the RAM 203 is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off was not completed normally, the process also shifts to S915 in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also proceeds to S915 in such a case. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S1015 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S915, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S915). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game balls. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S916, S917).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed at the time of the start-up processing, the RAM initialization processing (S916, S917) is executed. Similarly, the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S916, S917) is executed also when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization processing (S916, S917), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S916), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S917). After the processing of S917 ends, the process moves to S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal (S904: Yes), S907: Yes), while keeping the data backed up in the RAM 203, the power-off occurrence information is cleared (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power cutoff is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 enters a state in which the payout control of the game balls can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the processing of S910, the effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. After the process of S910 is completed, the probability change flag 203h, the time reduction counter 203i, the incoming ball waiting flag 203j, and the big hit flag 203m are read out (S911), and the read probability variation flag 203h, the time reduction counter 203i, and the incoming ball waiting flag are read. 203j, a status command for notifying the gaming status indicated by the big hit flag 203m is set (S912). After the process of S912 is completed, the start of driving of the rotating body motor 670c is set (S913), an interrupt is permitted (S914), and the process proceeds to a main process described later. The setting for driving the rotating body motor 670c set in the process of S913 is not changed until the power is turned off. As a result, while the power is supplied to the gaming machine, the rotating member 670a can be continuously rotated at a constant speed. Therefore, in the jackpot waiting state, the player places the game ball at a timing at which the rotational position of the rotating member 670a is arranged so as not to hinder the flow (flying) of the game ball toward the operation winning opening 660 with respect to the player. Since it can be fired, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of firing the game ball with good timing. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the first embodiment, the rotating member 670a is configured to continue rotating at a constant speed while the game machine is powered on. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the jackpot standby state, the rotation position of the rotating member 670a may be configured to be variable between an arrangement that prevents the ball from entering the operation winning opening 660 and an arrangement that does not, for example, during the jackpot standby state. Only the rotation member 670a may be rotated at a constant speed, and the operation may be stopped in other states.

  In the first embodiment, the rotation speed of the rotating member 670a is configured to be constant. However, the rotation speed is not limited to this, and the rotation speed and the rotation direction are randomly or regularly changed. The configuration may be variable. By configuring in this manner, the difficulty level of causing the game ball to enter the operation winning opening 660 becomes higher. Therefore, when the game ball enters the operation winning opening 660 as intended, the player is more likely to enter. I can please you.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1008 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter updating process of S1011 and S1012 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), output data such as commands stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each of the sub-side control devices (peripheral devices). An external output process to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process in S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21) is determined. Send a prize ball command. In addition, a command for the number of retained balls set in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 22) and the start winning process (see FIG. 24) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Also, the winning information command set in the starting winning process is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, when the game state is changed, a state command for notifying the change of the game state is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a game ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormal signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, in the jackpot waiting state, the incoming ball to the activated winning opening 660 is monitored. If a ball is detected in the activated winning opening 660, a jackpot start process for starting a jackpot is executed (S1004). Details of the jackpot start process (S1004) will be described later with reference to FIG. When the process of S1004 is completed, the jackpot control for executing the jackpot effect and opening or closing the right specific winning opening 65a and the left specific winning opening 650a of the variable winning device 65 when the special symbol is in the jackpot state. The processing is executed (S1005). In the jackpot control process, the right specific winning opening 65a (opening / closing door 65f1) or the left specific winning opening 650a is opened for each round of the jackpot, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time has elapsed or whether a predetermined number of game balls have been won. I do. When any of these conditions is satisfied, the right specific winning opening 65a (opening / closing door 65f1) or the left specific winning opening 650a is closed. Here, in the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1005) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process. Details of the jackpot control process (S1005) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1005 ends, next, an electric auditors product opening / closing process for controlling the opening and closing of the electric auditors product 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is executed (S1006). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S623 in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 26), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S621 or the processing of S622 in the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 26) are completed.

  Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1007). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23), the variation display according to the variation pattern is performed by the first symbol display. Beginning at device 37. In the present embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED.If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And the red LED is turned on.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds. However, if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by one each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display updating process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23) is finished, the first symbol display device is updated. The variable display executed in 37 is ended, and the stopped symbol (first symbol) is displayed in the first symbol display in the display mode set by the process of S306 or the process of S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23). A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1008). In the second symbol display updating process, when the variation time of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is set by the process of S615 or the process of S616 of the ordinary symbol variation start process (see FIG. 26), the second symbol display device 83 is set. Starts the variable display. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the symbol “O” and the symbol “X” as the ordinary symbol (second symbol) are alternately lit. In the second symbol display updating process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S618 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 26), the process is executed by the second symbol display device 83. Is stopped, and the stopped symbol (the second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S612 or the process of S613 of the ordinary symbol variation start process (see FIG. 26). (Lit display).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009). If power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 sends a power failure signal. SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main process (S1010). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1010: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time (4 milliseconds) has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (S1010: No), until the predetermined time, that is, until the next main processing execution timing. Within the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1011 and S1012).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and are cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment). Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the update of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is executed by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1012).

  Here, the execution time of each processing of S1001 to S1008 changes according to the state of the game, so the remaining time until the next execution timing of the main processing is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4), and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In addition, in the process of S1009, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 28 has been executed, the processing at the time of power-off after S1013 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1013), and a power-off command indicating that the power is turned off is sent to another control device (a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113). (S1014). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1015), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1016), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  Note that the process of S1009 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1008 or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1011 and S1012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. The processing can be started from the processing of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the initialization process (see S901 in FIG. 29). By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1001. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without erroneous operation or runaway of main controller 110.

  Next, the details of the jackpot start process (S1004) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The jackpot start process (S1004) is, as described above, a process for monitoring the entry into the activated winning opening 660 and starting the jackpot when the entry is detected.

  In the big hit start process (see FIG. 31), first, it is determined whether or not the incoming ball waiting flag 203j is on (S1101). If it is determined that the incoming ball waiting flag 203j is off (S1101: No), Since this means that the current state is not the jackpot waiting state, this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1101 that the incoming ball waiting flag 203j is ON (S1101: Yes), it means that the current state is the jackpot waiting state. It is determined whether an incoming ball has been detected (S1102). In the process of S1102, when it is determined that the ball entry to the activated winning opening 660 has not been detected (S1102: No), the present process is terminated as it is not the start timing of the big hit. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1102 that a ball has been detected in the activated winning opening 660 (S1102: Yes), a jackpot start is set and the jackpot start flag 203k is turned on (S1103). ). Then, by setting the entry waiting flag 203j to off, the jackpot waiting state is ended (S1104), and the present processing is ended.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1005) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1005). The jackpot control process (S1005) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30). When the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot and a right specific winning opening are performed. This is a process for opening or closing the 65a and the left specific winning opening 650a.

  In the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start flag 203k is turned on (that is, whether the jackpot start is set) (S1201). In the process of S1201, when it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203k is ON (S1201: Yes), an opening command for notifying the start of the jackpot opening period is set (S1202). The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201, in the audio ramp control. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114. When a display opening command is received by the display control device 114, an opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. In the first embodiment, one round is started with almost no time lag after the opening period is set to 0.1 second and the entry of the game ball into the activated winning opening 660 is detected (the opening and closing door 65f1 is opened). Configuration). With this configuration, a game ball flowing down the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 can be made to enter the almost right specific winning opening 65a when the ball enters the activated winning opening 660. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the timing at which the player enters the game ball into the operation winning opening 660. After the processing of S1202, the big hit flag 203m is set to ON, and the big hit start flag 203k is set to OFF (S1203), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1201 that the big hit flag 203j is off (S1201: No), it is determined whether the big hit flag 203m is on (a special symbol big hit) (S1204). . In the process of S1204, if it is determined that the big hit flag 203m is off (not a special symbol big hit) (S1204: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1204, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203m is ON (S1204: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1205), and the start timing of the new round is determined. If it is (S1205: Yes), the opening of the specific winning opening corresponding to the number of rounds is set (S1206). More specifically, if this time is the start timing of the first round, the right specific winning opening 65a is set to the open state by opening the opening / closing door 65f1, and if not the first round, the left specific winning opening 650a is set. Set to open. When the processing of S1206 is completed, a round number command indicating a newly started round number is set (S1207), and the processing ends. The round number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used as an audio lamp in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When receiving the round number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1205, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1205: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (the right specific winning opening 65a or the left specific winning opening 650a) is satisfied. A determination is made (S1208). Specifically, if the current round period is one round, a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the right specific winning opening 65a, or a game is performed after opening the right specific winning opening 65a. When it is detected that two or more balls have won the right specific winning opening 65a, it is determined that the closing condition has been established. If the current time is a round period other than the first round, a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the left specific winning opening 650a, or after opening the left specific winning opening 650a. When it is detected that 10 or more game balls have won the left specific winning opening 650a, it is determined that the closing condition has been established.

  In the process of S1208, when it is determined that the closing condition of the specific winning opening (the right specific winning opening 65a or the left specific winning opening 650a) is satisfied (S1208: Yes), the specific winning opening set to the open state. The closing of the right specific winning opening 65a or the left specific winning opening 650a is set (S1209), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1208, when it is determined that the closing condition of the specific winning opening is not satisfied (S1208: No), it is determined whether it is the ending effect start timing (S1210). Specifically, when all rounds in the special game state in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual are completed, it is determined that it is time to start an ending effect.

  In the process of S1210, when it is determined that it is the timing to start the ending effect (S1210: Yes), the ending command is set (S1211), and the process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201, in the sound ramp control. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, an ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1210, if it is determined that it is not the timing to start the ending effect (S1210: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1212), and it is determined that it is not the timing to end the ending effect. If this has been done (S1212: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S1212, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1212: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a certain-variable jackpot (any of jackpots A, B, D, and E). It is determined (S1213).

  In the process of S1213, if it is determined that the jackpot is not a probability variable jackpot (ie, it is a normal jackpot) (S1213: No), 100 is overwritten on the value of the time reduction counter 203i, so that 100 times of the normal symbol after the jackpot is completed. It is set so that the time reduction period is given (S1214), and the process shifts to S1216. On the other hand, in the processing of S1213, when it is determined that the current jackpot is a probability change jackpot (S1213: Yes), the probability change flag 203h is turned on so that the probability change state of the special symbol is given after the end of the jackpot. Is set (S1215), and the process proceeds to S1216.

  In the processing of S1214 or the processing of S1216 executed after the processing of S1215, in the gaming state after the jackpot has been completed (special symbol change state and normal symbol time saving state, special symbol low probability state, special symbol low probability state, In addition, a status command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of whether the symbol is in a time saving state of a normal symbol) is set (S1216), the end of the big hit is set (S1217), and this processing is ended.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process started when the power is turned on, and a main process executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 33, a start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is ON, the current startup processing is caused by a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”), and the power-off processing in S4117 (see FIG. 34). ) Are determined to be started during execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 34, when receiving the power-off command from main controller 110 (see S4114 in FIG. 34), sound lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S4117. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S4117 is being performed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is OFF (S4002: No), this startup processing is started after the power supply is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure, and the power-off processing in S4117 is performed. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4003).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

  If the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off. ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the flow shifts to S4004. On the other hand, this startup process is started after an instantaneous power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process in S4117 is completed, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Is started, the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the process proceeds to S4008. .

  In the process of S4002, if the power-off process flag is on (S4002: Yes), the current startup process is performed after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off process of S4117, This is started by resetting the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, since control cannot be continued, the process proceeds to S4004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S4004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004), and it is determined whether or not each storage area of the RAM 223 is normal (S4005). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and read out for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of "55h", "0AAh", and "00h" after "0FFh". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  In the processing of S4005, if it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written to the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set ( (S4006), the process proceeds to S4008. By confirming the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S4005, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. . The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound may be output from the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. It may be.

  In the processing of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process is performed in S4117 (see S4117 in FIG. 34). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S4117 is executed, the process of S4008 in the state where the power-off flag is turned on is that the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after the occurrence of the power failure and in a state where the execution of the power-off process in S4117 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the audio ramp control device 113 (S4009), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010). The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

  After the processing of S4010, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 analyzes the notification contents of the state command set in the start-up processing (see FIG. 29) (S4011), and according to the analysis result, the gaming state storage area 223i. Is updated (S4012). Thereby, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately grasped from the time of power-on. After the processing in S4012, the interrupt permission is set (S4013), and the processing shifts to the main processing.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of step S4008 is reached in a state where the power-off flag is turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely shut off, for example, so that the process of steps S4004 to S4006 is performed via the process of S4008. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 has been reset only due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), the process of S4009, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the processes of S4010 to S4013 are executed, and the process proceeds to the main process.

  It should be noted that the reason why the clearing process in S4009 is skipped is that when the process proceeds from S4004 to S4006 via S4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S4004. If the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, thereby saving the sound lamp control device 113. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main processing was started or since the previous processing of S4101 was executed (S4101). If not (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S4112 without performing the processes in S4102 to S4111. In the process of S4101, it is determined whether or not 1 ms has elapsed. The process in S4102 to S4111 is mainly a process related to display (effect), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination processing in S4112 and the variable display setting processing in S4113 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S4112 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of a command transmitted from the main control device 110. By executing the process of S4113 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is Based on the above, it is possible to make settings relating to the variable effect without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S4103 to S4113 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S4102). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S4108 described later (S4103), and thereafter, the power-on notification processing is executed (S4104). The power-on notification processing is to provide notification that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is In addition, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S4105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S4105, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, a held number display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 has not been played by the player for a predetermined period of time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display updating process, a process of lighting a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is performed.

  After that, a frame button input monitoring / production process is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring / production process, an input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the production effect is monitored, and a case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is taken. This is a process for setting to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  When the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the fluctuation effect is not executed or during a high-speed fluctuation period, a process of changing the stage is performed, and a rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change in the rear image change command, the display controller 114 converts the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 into an image corresponding to the stage. Is performed. Also, when the notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, the frame button 22 is pressed to display the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation, or the frame button 22 is pressed during the reach effect to display the expectation of the jackpot. The effect may be changed to a holding effect, or the frame button 22 may be a decision button for selecting one of the plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the processing of S4107 is omitted.

  Upon completion of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing, lamp editing processing is executed (S4108), and then sound editing / output processing is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  When the process of S4109 ends, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S4110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management processing, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S4108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing in S4109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S4110 ends, next, an effect update process is executed (S4111), and the process proceeds to S4112. In the effect update process (S4111), the effect of the effect in the standby state executed in the jackpot standby state (the number of gauges in the chance meter CM (see FIGS. 7A and 7B)) is determined by the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f. Is performed in accordance with the detection result of. Details of the effect update processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S4112, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S4112). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. Then, after the command determination processing, the variable display setting processing is executed (S4113). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing in S4113 ends, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4114). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. In the process of S4114, if it is determined that the power-off occurrence information is stored (S4114: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are set to ON (S4116), and the power-off is performed. The processing is executed (S4117). After the execution of the power-off processing, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S4118), and thereafter, the processing is in an infinite loop. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. Further, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is also deleted.

  On the other hand, if the power-off information is not stored in the process of S4114 (S4114: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4115), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4115: No), the process returns to S4101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4115: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call the store clerk of the hall or the like and request the repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 has been destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the effect update process (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described in detail. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this effect update process (S4111). This effect update process (S4111) is a process for updating the effect mode in the standby effect as described above.

  In the effect update process (see FIG. 35), first, it is determined whether or not the standby state effect flag 223g is on (S4201). If it is determined that the standby state effect flag 223g is off (S4201: No), the current standby state effect is executed. Since it is not in the middle (there is no possibility of updating the effect mode), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4201 that the standby state effect flag 223g is on (S4201: Yes), the number of sensors whose output is H (high) among the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f is counted ( Counting) (S4202).

  When the process of S4202 ends, it is determined whether or not the count value (count value) obtained by the process of S4202 matches the counter value of the level counter 223h (S4203). As described above, the level counter 223h is a counter that indicates the number of gauges of the chance meter CM displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The gauge number of the chance meter CM is changed in conjunction with the number of sensors whose output is H (high) among the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f. Therefore, when it is determined in the process of S4203 that the count value of the level counter 223h is different from the count value in the process of S4202 (S4203: No), the number of game balls on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 has changed. This means that the display mode of the chance meter CM is different from the number of sensors whose output is H (high), so that the count value (count value) in the process of S4202 is overwritten by the value of the level counter 223g. Update (S4204). Then, the mode of the chance meter CM is updated to the mode of the gauge number corresponding to the value of the level counter 223g updated in the process of S4204 (S4205), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4203, when it is determined that the count value (count value) obtained by the process of S4202 matches the value of the level counter 223g (S4203: Yes), the current passage detection sensors 228a to 228f are determined. Since the output and the gauge number of the chance meter CM match, and it is not necessary to update the display mode of the chance meter CM (the effect mode of the standby state effect), each process of S4204 and S4205 is skipped and the process is skipped. This processing ends.

  By executing the effect update process (see FIG. 35), the mode of the chance meter CM can be updated in accordance with the number of game balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. Therefore, by referring to the mode of the chance meter CM, it is possible to cause the player to play a game while aiming for the game ball to enter the operation winning opening 660 while the number of gauges is larger. That is, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the timing at which the player should aim at the operation winning opening 660. Therefore, even a player who has little experience in playing the game with the pachinko machine 10 can easily intuitively understand the timing of aiming at the operation winning opening 660. Thereby, even the player who plays the game for the first time can easily play the game, so that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  In the first embodiment, during execution of the standby state effect, each time the effect update process (see FIG. 35) is executed, the output state of the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f and the output of the chance meter CM by the process of S4203. Although it is configured to determine whether there is any discrepancy with the gauge number (whether the mode of the chance meter CM should be updated), the frequency of updating the mode of the chance meter CM may be reduced. Specifically, for example, the configuration may be such that the process of S4203 is executed only once every 0.5 seconds during the execution of the standby state effect. With this configuration, the processing load on the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

  Next, the command determination process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S4112). This command determination processing (S4112) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. It is processing for.

  In the command determination process, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from main controller 110. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (S4301). In the process of S4301, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S4301: Yes), the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S4302), and the variation pattern type is determined from the received variation pattern command. Is extracted (S4303), and this process ends. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variation display setting process (see FIG. 38) is executed. It is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display controller 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4301 that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S4301: No), then it is determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4304). When the stop type command is received (S4304: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4305), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S4306). The process ends. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 38) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4304 that the stop type command has not been received (S4304: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball count command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4307). . Then, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has been received (S4307: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball number command, that is, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110 is provided. (The number of times N1 of the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol) or the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times N2 of the variable display based on the second special symbol is retained) is extracted. Is stored in the first special symbol retaining ball number counter 223b or the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 (S4308). In the process of S4308, a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball count counter 223c is set. . After the processing of S4308 ends, this processing ends.

  Here, the reserved ball number command is sent to the main controller 110 when a game ball wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, or when a special symbol is drawn. Is transmitted from the first special symbol holding ball counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 by the processing of S4308 each time a start winning is detected or every time a special symbol is drawn. The value of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 223c can be adjusted to the value of the first special symbol retaining ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110 and the value of the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 203f. Accordingly, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the first special symbol holding ball number counter of the main control device 110 by the influence of noise or the like. 203e and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 and the second The value of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 223c can be corrected to match the value of the first special symbol retaining ball number counter 203e and the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 203f of the main controller 110. When the process of S4308 is executed, the display reserved ball for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. Several commands are set. As a result, the display control device 114 displays the number-of-reserved-balls symbol corresponding to the number of retained balls on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S4307, if it is determined that the pending ball number command has not been received (S4307: No), then it is determined whether or not a status command has been received from main controller 110 (S4309). If it is determined that the status command has been received (S4309: Yes), the data in the gaming status storage area 223i is updated according to the received command (S4310). That is, based on the information according to the game state notified by the state command, when the certain symbol change state and the normal symbol time-saving state are notified, the lower two bits of the game state storage area 223i are set to “11B”. When the low probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the ordinary symbol are notified, the lower 2 bits of the gaming state storage area 223i are set to “01B”, and the low probability state of the special symbol and When the normal state of the normal symbol is notified, the lower two bits of the gaming state storage area 223i are set to "00B". Thereby, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the sound lamp control device 113 can easily grasp the change.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4309 that the status command has not been received (S4309: No), then it is determined whether or not a winning information command has been received (S4311). In the processing of S4311, if it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S4311: Yes), the information notified by the received winning information command (the type of the entrance where a new starting winning is detected, and the lottery result are displayed). Is stored in the storage area corresponding to the winning information storage area 223a (S4312), and the process ends.

  In the process of S4311, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S4311: No), then, a command related to winning (any one of a standby state command, an opening command, a round number command, and an ending command) is transmitted. It is determined whether or not it has been received (S4313). If it is determined that the command related to the hit has been received (S4313: Yes), a hit-related process for executing control corresponding to the type of the command related to the hit is executed (S4314). The process ends. Details of the hit-related processing (S4314) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4313, when it is determined that the command related to the jackpot has not been received (S4313: No), a process according to another command is executed (S4315), and this process ends. In the process of S4315, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the other command is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is executed. Is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the hit-related processing (S4314) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the hit-related processing (S4314).

  In the hit-related process, first, it is determined whether a standby state command has been received (S4401), and if a standby state command has been received (S4401: Yes), a display standby state for starting a standby state effect. A command is set (S4402). The display standby state command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When receiving the display standby state command, the display control device 114 starts a standby state effect for notifying the third symbol display device 81 of the jackpot standby state. When the process in S4402 ends, the standby state effect flag 223g is set to ON to indicate that the standby state effect is being executed (S4403), and the present process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4401, if it is determined that the standby state command has not been received (S4401: No), it is next determined whether an opening command has been received (S4404) and the opening command has been received. If (S4404: Yes), a display opening command for starting the opening effect is set (S4405), and the end of the standby state effect is set by turning off the standby state effect flag 223g (S4406). The process ends. The display opening command set in the process of S4405 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 221. , To the display control device 114. When receiving the opening command for display, the display control device 114 starts an opening effect for notifying the start of the jackpot in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4404 that the opening command has not been received (S4404: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4407). When it is determined that the round number command has been received (S4407: Yes), the number of rounds is extracted from the received round number command, and a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is set (S4408). ). The display round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect. After the process in S4408, the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4407 that the number-of-rounds command has not been received (S4407: No), then it is determined whether an ending command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4409). If it is determined that the ending command has been received (S4409: Yes), a display ending command for starting an ending effect is set (S4410), and the process ends. The display opening command set in the process of S4410 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 221. , To the display control device 114. Upon receiving the opening command for display, the display control device 114 starts an ending effect for notifying the end of the jackpot in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4409, when it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S4409: No), the process ends as it is. By executing the hit-related processing (see FIG. 37), appropriate control can be executed according to various commands related to the hit.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S4113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S4113). This variable display setting process (S4113) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. A variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S4501). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S4501: No), it means that the variation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, and the process proceeds to S4506. Transition. On the other hand, in the process of S4501, if it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is on (S4501: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned off (S4502), and then S4303 of the command determination process (see FIG. 36). In the processing of (1), the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S4503).

  Then, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the acquired variation pattern type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S4504). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S4505), and the process proceeds to S4506. In the process of S4505, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a toward the execution area is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area, and so on.

  In the process of S4506, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is ON (S4506). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S4506: No), the stop type command is not received from the main control device 110, so that the variable display is performed. The setting process (see FIG. 38) ends, and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S4506: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is set to off (S4507), and then the process of S4306 of the command determination process (see FIG. 36) , The stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S4508). Next, a display stop type command is set based on the stop type acquired in the process of S4508 (S4509), and this process ends. The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command and controls the third symbol display device 81 to perform the stop display of the third symbol in the stop type indicated by the display stop type command. Is done.

<Regarding the control processing of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly classified into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interruption processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and a one-frame processing performed by the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed simultaneously, the command reception processing is executed with priority. Thus, the V interrupt processing can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the main processing. The main process is to execute an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  The activation of the main processing is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the power is supplied from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” by the hardware configuration, and , The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When detecting that the address designated to the bus line 240 is “0000H”, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main processing by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting execution of the processing corresponding to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great deal of time is required from the reading to the setting to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program, which are to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, are stored in the NOR flash memory 234d. Is a memory from which data can be read at a high speed, and when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the first ROM of the NOR flash memory 234d. The boot program stored in the program storage area 234d1 can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, a boot process executed by a boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is set to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Start

  Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine but stored in the third symbol display device 81. The image data to be displayed is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the reading speed of the NAND flash memory 234a is low especially when random access is performed. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot processing, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table The processing of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operation of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, after the system reset is released, a boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c is set. Then, of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of the control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

  Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute a process for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S6102, the instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs not yet transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S6103). Specifically, the control program and a part of the fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. The data is transferred to the storage area 233b.

  After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 39) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power-up initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 39) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot process is completed.

  By executing the boot process (S6001) in this manner, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high readout speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect unit.

  On the other hand, the entire boot program is not stored in the NOR flash memory 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored. Even when the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR flash memory 234d having an extremely small capacity, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 40, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although the configuration is not limited to this, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S6102. It may be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and furthermore, sets the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer. 231a may be executed. Then, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  The boot program transferred by the process of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently transfers the part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount. Processing for setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S6101. After repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S6102, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. By using the boot program, the data can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed first by the MPU 231 at the time of system reset release is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. As a result, the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a becomes unnecessary, and the number of times of transferring the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started more quickly.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, the initialization process is performed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and an initial value is set for each flag. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after performing the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, first, an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thus, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can check whether or not an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, information of the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 transmits the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 to the main address at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving the transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the end of the transfer in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. You may write it. The MPU 231 reads out the information in the register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects that the image controller 237 has written the transfer end information, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. You may do so.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S6003, the power-on fluctuation image Is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to the image data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). The transfer instruction includes a start address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, a data size of the image data, information of a transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, and the image controller reads the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transmission instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the processing of S6004, the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 51A) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to perform the transfer is executed (see S7602 in FIG. 51A).

  Also, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It is kept on until it ends. Thereby, in the meantime, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 41 (b)), the simple command such that the power-on image (power-on main image or power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 16 is drawn. A determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 41B) and a simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 41B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a as the character ROM 234, all image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third video RAM 235. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall operates at the time of turning on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player stays in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on, the power-on main image is displayed in the third symbol. Since the player starts the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball (start winning prize) in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, and the start instruction of the variable effect is issued. When the main control unit 110 receives the display fluctuation pattern command via the audio lamp control unit 113, that is, when the display fluctuation pattern command is received, the power-on fluctuation image is immediately displayed during the fluctuation effect period, and the simple fluctuation is performed. You can make a production. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Is constituted by a NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, and it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on also becomes long. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Immediately after, for example, while the main image is being displayed at the time of power-on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing in S6005, interruption permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interruption permission is set by the processing of S6006, the command interruption processing and the V interruption processing are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interruption signal.

  Next, a command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41A is a flowchart showing the command interruption processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interruption process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are read out by a command determination processing or a simple command determination processing of a V interrupt processing described later, and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41B, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 41B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of the V interrupt processing is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal generated every 20 milliseconds in the image controller 237 when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed, and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that a new image drawing is started during the image drawing, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in a frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in accordance with a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then, details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 41B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. A command determination process (S6302) is executed to display the image on the display device 81, and then a display setting process (S6303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S6302), the contents of the command from the audio ramp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interruption process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the display data table for demonstration or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds at which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main controller 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the type of fluctuation effect and the type of stop selected by the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image according to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S6303), an image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) and the like. Specify the contents of In addition, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in accordance with a processing situation or the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is formed based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). The type of sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, when the rear image change command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is transmitted to the image controller 237. Is set to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing processing, the type of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting processing (S6305) are used. 20. The drawing list shown in FIG. 20 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list (S6306). The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an update process of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A to F, reach out of front and rear, reach other than front and rear out, reach out completely) is supported. The stop type table to be executed is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the flow shifts to the process of S6304.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 42 to 47, details of the above-described command determination processing (S6302), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 42, first, it is determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401). If there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command determination processing ends, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402). The type of each unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S6403).

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), a variation pattern command process is executed (S6405), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the variation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 43A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing (S6405). The fluctuation pattern command processing (S6405) executes processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the fluctuation in the main controller 110 is always made at least several seconds apart, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, part of the command changes due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is incorrectly displayed. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of step S6501, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is prepared for such a case. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, and there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, in fact, the fluctuation display data table longer than the set display data table is set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 returns to the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. You can keep watching the fluctuations of the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing the variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6504, the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501 is updated while updating the pointer 233f. , The drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 is specified. At the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S6502. The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the variable ROM display data table, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 from the normal video R. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect specified in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S6503, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S6404, when it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a display stop type command (S6406: Yes), stop type command processing is performed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. The stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (any of jackpots A to F, reach out of front and rear, reach other than front and rear out, complete out) indicated by the stop type command for display. Is determined (S6601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 41B) is executed. The stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on 81 is finally set (S6602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned on. (S6603), and returns to the command determination process.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602. In the above-described task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S6603, and the specified stop is determined. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information obtained by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  In addition, since the main control device 110 always determines the start of the change at a distance of several seconds or more, the main control device 110 does not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is erroneously stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S6601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, the stop type is assumed to be completely out of order and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. Thereby, a stop symbol corresponding to complete departure is set by the processing of S6602.

  If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if it is actually "missing the special symbol". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, and the player misunderstands that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol big hit", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection is set, and in fact, if the “special symbol jackpot” is reached, the stop of the complete disconnection is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Even if a symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "special symbol jackpot", so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 42, the description will be continued. In the process of S6406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display standby command among unprocessed commands (S6408). If there is a display standby state command (S6408: Yes), a standby state command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the standby state command processing (S6409) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the standby state command processing. This standby state command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the standby state command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the standby state command processing, first, the display data table for standby state effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Thereafter, the transfer data table corresponding to the standby state effect display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set standby state effect display data table. (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S6705), the standby state command ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 42, the description will be continued. In the process of S6408, if it is determined that there is no standby command (S6408: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6410), and the display opening is performed. If there is a command (S6410: Yes), an opening command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the opening command processing (S6411) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 45A is a flowchart showing an opening command process. The opening command process executes a process corresponding to the opening command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the opening command processing, first, an opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6801). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6802), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S6803). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6804). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S6805), the opening command ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 42, the description will be continued. In the process of S6410, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether there is a display round number command among unprocessed commands (S6412), and the display is performed. If there is a round number command for use (S6412: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the round number command processing (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. The round number command process executes a process corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S6901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6902).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, the time data representing the presentation time is set in the time counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6904). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S6905), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 42, the description will be continued. In the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not an unprocessed command includes a display ending command (S6414). If there is an ending command for use (S6414: Yes), ending command processing is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the ending command processing (S6415) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. The ending command process executes a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the ending command process, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read. It is set in the buffer 233d (S7001). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7002).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing in S7001, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S7003), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7003). S7004). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S7005), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 42, the description will be continued. In the process of S6414, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6414: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6416). If there is a change command (S6416: Yes), a back image change command process is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S6417) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47A is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. The rear image change command process executes a process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the rear image change command processing, first, the rear image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S7603) of the rear image change associated with the reception of the rear image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). . Then, among the bits of the back image discrimination flag provided for each back image type (back A, B), the bit corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is set to ON, and other bits are set. The bit corresponding to the rear image type is set to off (S7102), the rear image change command process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set in the process of S7101 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is identified from the rear image determination flag set in the process of S7102. .

  In the task processing (S6304), if it is specified to display either the back A or B according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set in S7102 From the RAM, the type of the rear image to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and the RAM storing the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image is stored. The type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for less than 20 milliseconds, the player does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, there should be no case where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the effects of noise or the like, and another command erroneously changes the rear image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7102, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, one arbitrary back image change command may be extracted, and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S6416, when it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S6416: No), it is then determined whether or not there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S6418). If (S6418: Yes), an error command process is executed (S6419), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S6419) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47B is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process executes a process corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7201). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S7202). The process ends, and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process (S6303), when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7201, the type of error that occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S7202, and the error is determined. The process is executed so that a warning image corresponding to the type is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S7202, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a person related to the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence state of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S6418, when it is determined that there is no error command (S6418: No), a process corresponding to another unprocessed command is executed (S6420), and the process returns to S6401.

  In the processing of S6401 executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes) ), And execute the processing of S6402 to S6420 again. Until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, the processing of S6401 to S6420 is repeatedly executed. If it is determined in the processing of S6401 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is performed. The process ends.

  The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 41B) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary for displaying the image at power-on, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. After extracting and executing the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 43 (a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 43 (b)) which are the processing corresponding to each command, A process for discarding the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 43A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on fluctuation image is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S6501. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image which are set and necessary in this case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, a process of writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, details of the above-described display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 48, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7301). If the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7301: No) ), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and the processing of S7302 to S7304 is skipped, and the flow shifts to the processing of S7305. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7301: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination process, the new command flag is set to off (S7302), and then S7303 to S7304. The processing corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S7303, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S7303). If the error occurrence flag is on (S7303: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S7304).

  Here, the warning image setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all error determinations for which ON is set are performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S7401).

  In the task processing (S6304), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and the like are specified for each sprite. Various parameters required for drawing are determined.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S7401, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S7304) or in the process of S7303, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7303: No), the process proceeds to S7305.

  In S7305, a pointer update process is performed (S7305). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to be set.

  In this pointer update processing, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7501). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in principle so that it is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt processing is executed. As described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the value stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer updating process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S7501, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is determined whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S7502). As a result, if it is End information (S7502: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7503). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S7503: Yes), the display data table is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S7504), and the flow shifts to the process of S7507.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7503 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S7503: No), the display data table is in the standby state effect display data table. Is determined (S7505), and if the display data table is for a standby state effect (S7505: Yes), the display time is set to the effect time of the standby state effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. The corresponding time data is set in the time counter 233h (S7506), and the flow shifts to the process of S7507.

  In the process of S7507, the pointer 233f is set to 1 for initialization (S7507), the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. Thus, in the display setting process, the drawing content can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7505 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the standby state effect display data table (S7505: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by one. (S7508), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. Accordingly, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address immediately before the End information is described. Is always developed, so that the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7502, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7502: No), the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 48, the description will be continued. After the pointer update processing, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing is acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7306). In the task processing (S6304), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S7306, together with the previously expanded warning image and the like. Various parameters required for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined.

  Next, the value of the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7307), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7308). Then, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S7308: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S7308: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the confirmed display flag is on. (S7309).

  As a result, if the confirmed display flag is OFF (S7309: No), the effect of the confirmed display has not been performed yet, and it is the timing to perform the effect of the confirmed display. First, the confirmed display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S7310), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7311). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the confirmed display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7312), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7313). Then, after the confirmed display flag indicating that the confirmed display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7314), the contents of the stopped symbol determination flag are directly copied to the previous stopped symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7315), and returns to the V interrupt processing.

  Thus, in the case where the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the confirmed display data table, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Compared with the case where the display contents are changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, so that no great load is applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The previously stopped symbol discrimination flag set by the process of S7315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before. In the variable display data table, the change based on the data table is not changed. Until a predetermined time elapses from the start, symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S6304), the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set in S7315 until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, and A third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stopped symbol. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S7309, if the confirmed display flag is on (S7309: Yes), it is determined whether the demonstration display flag is on (S7316). If the demonstration display flag is off (S7316: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the finalized display effect, and a certain time has elapsed since the end of the finalized display effect. Thereafter, processing for displaying the demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

  First, the display data table for demonstration is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7317), and the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7318). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7320), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7321), and the process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , The content of the drawing can be set.

  In the process of S7316, if the demonstration display flag is on (S7316: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect ends, and this means that the demonstration effect has ended, and the display setting process ends as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, as described above, various settings are performed by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process so that the demonstration effect is started again. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the same processing as the display setting processing is also performed in the simple display setting processing (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 41B). However, in the simple display setting process, after the production time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on fluctuation image ends, a predetermined time, one of the power-on fluctuation images according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command. A process of setting a display data table defining that the image is stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 51A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7601: Yes), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S7602), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S7601, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S7601: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. The data has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7603), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7602), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S7602).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been issued to the image controller 237 (S7701). If the transfer instruction has been transmitted (S7701: Yes) ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S7702). In the process of step S7702, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S7702 (S7702: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7702: Yes), the flow shifts to the process of S7703. Also, as a result of the process of S7701, if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7701: No), the process proceeds to S7703.

  In the process of S7703, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7703). A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the resident object image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7704), and the process ends.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer data described in the drawing list. The resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the data information. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the transfer is performed here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the read image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores the image data in the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. At the specified address of the resident video RAM 235. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the processing in S7703, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S7703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7705), and this processing ends. Thus, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 41B), the command is not used in the simple command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 41B) and the simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 41B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 42 to 47) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 48 to 50) are executed, the drawing of the normal image is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 52) (see S7601: No in FIG. 51A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all the resident operations to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be retained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 during power-on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. Can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. After the display is determined by, for example, the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed at an arbitrary timing by the player can be performed. In addition, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S7603), which is one process of the transfer setting process (see FIG. 51A, S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S7603).

  In the normal image transfer setting process, first, the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e is updated by the pointer update process (S7305) of the previously executed display setting process (see S6303 in FIG. 48). The information described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is acquired (S7801). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7802). If the obtained information is transfer data information (S7802: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data is determined from the transfer data information. (The storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( (S7803) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S7804), and the flow shifts to the processing of S7805.

  If the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S7802: No) in step S7802, the process skips steps S7803 and S7804 and shifts to step S7805. In the process of S7805, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S7805), and the transfer instruction is set. If the transfer has been performed (S7805: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S7806).

  In the process of S7806, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237 and receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S7806 (S7806: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7806: Yes), the process proceeds to S7807. Also, as a result of the processing in S7805, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer processing is completed (S7805: No), the processing shifts to S7807.

  In the process of S7807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7807). If the transfer start flag is on (S7807: Yes), there is image data to be transferred. Is turned off (S7808), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S7803 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the process proceeds to S7813. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7807: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S7809). If the back image change flag is not on but off (S7809: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S7809: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S7810), the back image provided for each back image type is set. Among the determination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S7811). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state, and the transfer destination (normal) The start address of the video RAM 236) is obtained (S7812), and the process moves to S7813.

  In the process of S7813, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7813). The determination in the process of S7813 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite set as the transfer target image data is read out from the storage image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video data. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is “off”, it is determined that the image data of the transfer target sprite is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  As a result of the processing in S7813, if the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7813: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S7813, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7813: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S7814). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing in S7814, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S7815), and the normal image transfer setting processing ends. As described above, the storage image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite in the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is performed by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, a process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and as a result, the process is indicated by the display stop type command. When it is determined that the stop type information is the jackpot stop type, image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. If the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the back image of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the back image is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process, and sends the image data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be.

  Here, by the time the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, and thus, the predetermined data is specified in accordance with the display data table. When rendering a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is necessary for rendering the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, details of the above-described drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this drawing processing.

  In the drawing processing, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information A drawing list (see FIG. 20) is generated from the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S6305) (S7901). That is, in the process of S7901, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of the various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304). The parameters required for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprite to be arranged on the rear side from the sprite to be arranged on the front side in the image of one frame, and details of the sprites are arranged in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement. The drawing list is generated by describing the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as detailed drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the leading address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7902). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information indicating that the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b is expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and expands the images by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  When the drawing list includes transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) is extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address is sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information, and stores the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to This allows the third symbol display device 81 to display the image developed in the frame buffer. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are simultaneously performed in parallel. be able to.

  After the processing of S7902, the drawing processing updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j (S7903). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to “1” when the value is “0” and by setting it to “0” when it is “1”. Done. Accordingly, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 41B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 ms after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the minute is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately designating, one frame of image display processing can be performed continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while one frame of image rendering processing is performed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the opening and closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 in which a prize ball is paid out when a game ball enters during a big hit is closed, and the right specific winning opening 65a is closed. In a state where it is impossible to enter the game ball, the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 is configured such that the game ball can flow down. And the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 is configured so that the number of game balls exceeding the number of entering balls (that is, two) as the end condition of the first round can simultaneously flow down. In other words, between the time when one game ball reaches the upper surface of the door 65f1 and the time when it passes over the upper surface of the door 65f1, It is configured so that a larger number of game balls can reach the upper surface of the door 65f1. Thereby, at the timing when the first round is started (when the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened), as the number of game balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 increases, the game balls flowing down on the opening / closing door 65f1 are increased. By entering the ball from the opened door 65f1 to the right specific winning opening 65a, more prize balls can be obtained. Therefore, at the start timing of the first round of the jackpot, the player can play the game by paying attention to the number of the game balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1, thereby improving the interest of the player at the start of the first round. Can be done.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when a jackpot is won by a special symbol lottery, a jackpot is started when a game ball enters the activated winning opening 660. Thus, by adjusting the timing at which the game ball is fired toward the operation winning opening 660, the player can adjust the timing at which the first round of the jackpot is started, which is more advantageous for the player. It is possible to realize a game property in which the game balls enter the operation winning opening 660 aiming at the timing (that is, the timing at which more game balls pass through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1). Therefore, the amount of prize balls (privileges) that can be obtained by the player during the predetermined period of the jackpot (until the end of one round) can be varied according to the skill of the player (the timing of aiming at the operation winning opening 660). The timing at which game balls enter the activated winning opening 660 can be made more serious. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

  Furthermore, in the first embodiment, in the jackpot waiting state between the time when the jackpot is determined and the time when the jackpot is started, the player may receive the game ball when the player enters the activated winning opening 660. It is configured such that an indication of the benefit (number of prize balls) that can be provided is suggested to the player by a presentation mode (the number of gauges of the chance meter CM). With this configuration, it is possible to more easily understand the timing at which the operation winning opening 660 should be aimed. Therefore, even a player who has little experience in playing a game with the pachinko machine 10 can realize easy-to-understand gaming properties, and can provide a gaming machine that is hardly shunned by the player. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment has a configuration in which three convex portions 65f1a to 65f1c are provided on the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 so that the game balls bypass the convex portions 65f1a to 65f1c. Although the passage period for passing through 65f1 is configured to be long, the invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to providing the convex portions 65f1a to 65f1c, the material of the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 is made to have a higher coefficient of friction than other portions (the surface of the game board 13 or the inner surface of the right variable winning device 65, etc.). May be made of a material having a large size (for example, an elastic body), or may be processed so that the game ball does not easily roll (for example, irregularities may be provided on the surface).

  In the first embodiment, the first round occurs when 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of the first round, or when two or more game balls entered the right specific winning opening 65a before the 30 seconds elapsed. Was terminated. In other words, the end condition is set so that if the right-handed game is performed, the upper limit number (two) of game balls is almost certainly made to enter the right specific winning opening 65a and the first round is completed. , But is not limited to this. For example, even if the player hits the right specific winning opening 65a right after the start of the first round, the first round may be completed in a period in which it is difficult to enter the game ball. . Specifically, for example, when 0.5 second has elapsed since the start of one round, or when 10 or more game balls have won the right specific winning opening 65a before 0.5 second has elapsed, one round is performed. The eye may be closed. In such a configuration, if no game ball is passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 at the timing when the game ball enters the operation winning port 660, no game ball enters the right specific winning port 65a. It is possible to provide a game with a high possibility that the first round will be completed without the ball being played. Therefore, a player who wants to obtain a prize ball in the first round hits the game ball toward the opening / closing door 65f1 before allowing the player to enter the activation winning opening 660 in the jackpot waiting state. It is possible to entertain the game of aiming at the operation winning opening 660 later. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game in the jackpot waiting state.

  In the first embodiment, in the jackpot waiting state, the guide of the number of game balls passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 is indicated by the gauge number of the chance meter CM, so that the game balls enter the operation winning opening 660. Although the configuration suggests the degree of advantage in the case of a ball, it is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the jackpot advantage degree is indicated by the gauge number of the chance meter CM. Specifically, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot type is indicated by the number of gauges of the chance meter CM, thereby indicating to the player the degree of advantage when a game ball is inserted into the activated winning opening 660. Further, for example, the number of rounds of the jackpot may be determined indefinitely when the jackpot is determined, and the number of rounds of the jackpot may be randomly selected at a timing when the jackpot is passed through the operation winning opening 660. The number of gauges indicates the number of rounds determined by a lottery executed when a game ball is thrown into the activated winning opening 660, thereby indicating that a game ball is thrown into the activated winning opening 660. It is good also as composition which suggests a degree of advantage to a player.

  In the first embodiment, the rotating member 670a is continuously rotated at a constant speed while the power is supplied to the gaming machine. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the jackpot standby state, the rotation position of the rotating member 670a may be configured to be variable between an arrangement that prevents the ball from entering the operation winning opening 660 and an arrangement that does not, for example, during the jackpot standby state. Only the rotation member 670a may be rotated at a constant speed, and the operation may be stopped in other states.

  In the first embodiment, the rotation speed of the rotating member 670a is configured to be constant. However, the rotation speed is not limited to this, and the rotation speed and the rotation direction can be changed randomly or regularly. It may be configured. By configuring in this manner, the difficulty level of causing the game ball to enter the operation winning opening 660 becomes higher. Therefore, when the game ball enters the operation winning opening 660 as intended, the player is more likely to enter. I can please you.

  In the first embodiment, a configuration in which the degree of advantage (the number of prize balls that can be acquired in the first round) is suggested when a jackpot is started by the standby state effect is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to the degree of advantage when the jackpot is started, an effect that indicates the advantage of the jackpot itself may be executed by a standby state effect. Specifically, for example, the game state after the big hit (whether or not the big change is a big hit) or an effect indicating the number of rounds may be executed. In addition, when an effect indicating the degree of advantage of the jackpot itself is executed, the effect need not be executed during the jackpot waiting state. For example, at the time of stop display of the third symbol, the type of the third symbol may indicate the degree of advantage of the jackpot itself during execution. In addition, the advantage degree of the jackpot itself may be suggested in an opening period, a round period, an ending period, and the like.

  In the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 of a type in which a big hit is won by a special symbol lottery and a big hit is started when a game ball enters the activated winning opening 660 has been described as an example. May be applied to the pachinko machine 10. For example, the present invention may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 in which a big hit is started when a game ball enters a specific area of the game board 13. That is, a pachinko machine 10 of a type not equipped with a function for performing a special symbol lottery itself (a so-called two-type) or a function for performing a special symbol lottery is provided, but the special symbol lottery result is Irrespective of this, the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine 10 of a type in which a big hit is started when a game ball enters a specific area (a so-called one-type and two-type mixed type). With this configuration, it is possible to vary the degree of advantage in the first round of the jackpot according to the number of game balls on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 at the time when the game balls enter the specific area.

<Second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, when a special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the game machine shifts to a jackpot waiting state, and during the jackpot waiting state, the game ball enters the activated winning opening 660. In the event that the jackpot is started. Further, the operation winning opening 660 is provided only at one place on the upper right side of the game board 13. In other words, in the jackpot waiting state, the jackpot is started, regardless of the jackpot type, unless the game ball is fired toward the upper right side of the game board 13 and the game ball is thrown into the operation winning opening 660. Was not configured.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the operation winning prize opening (right operation prize opening 661 and the left operation prize opening 662) on the upper right side and the lower left side of the gaming board 13 that trigger the start of the jackpot, respectively. And the winning prize opening that triggers the start of the jackpot differs according to the jackpot type. In addition, the left operation winning port 662 is configured such that, when the jackpot is in a standby state, a game ball enters almost automatically in a relatively short time (about 0.5 seconds). In other words, in the case of the jackpot type in which the left operation winning port 662 is a trigger for the start of the jackpot, the first round of the jackpot is started before the game ball reaches the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. . In other words, a jackpot type is provided in which the player cannot aim for an over-prize in the first round. As a result, it is possible to provide a jackpot type that can aim for an over-prize and a jackpot type that cannot aim for an over-prize. A difference can be provided.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in configuration in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 in the main control device 110 is different. , The configuration of the RAM 203 is partially changed, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the control executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed. The processing is partially changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the following. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 54, a right operation winning opening 661 through which a game ball can enter is provided on the upper right side of the game board 13 in a front view, instead of the operation winning opening 660 in the first embodiment. The right operation winning opening 661 is an operation winning that triggers the start of six types of jackpots A2, B2, D2, and F2 to H2 among the eight types of jackpots (jackpots A2 to H2) in the second embodiment. Mouth. The right operation winning opening 661 is used only when the jackpot is in the jackpot waiting state which is shifted when one of the above six types of jackpots (jackpots A2, B2, D2, F2 to H2) is obtained by a special symbol lottery. It is configured to be determined to be valid.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 54, a left-operation winning port 662 through which a game ball can enter is provided on the lower left side in front view of the first entrance port 64. The left operation winning opening 662 is an operation winning opening that triggers the start of two types of jackpots of the jackpots C2 and E2 among the eight jackpots (jackpots A2 to H2) in the second embodiment. That is, in the jackpot waiting state, which shifts when one of the jackpots C2 and E2 occurs in the special symbol lottery, the entry of the game ball is determined to be valid. As shown in FIG. 54, a storage device 675 is provided above the left operation winning opening 662 in a front view. This storage device 675 is configured to be able to store only one game ball that has flowed down from above vertically. The storage device 675 can receive and store the game balls that have entered the storage device 675 at the lower end of the flow path configured to have a width that allows one game ball to flow down (to prevent the game balls from flowing down). A variable storage valve 675a is provided between a possible closed position and an open position for discharging the game balls directly below the storage device 675 without obstructing the flow of the game balls into the storage device 675. I have.

  The storage valve 675a of the storage device 675 is changed to the open position when the jackpot standby state is set, and is changed to the closed position at the end of the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 54, since the left-operation winning port 662 is provided immediately below the storage device 675, when a gaming ball is stored in the storage device 675 and the jackpot standby state is reached, the storage valve 675a is activated. As a result of the release, the stored game balls flow down, and as a result, immediately after the jackpot waiting state (after about 0.5 seconds), the game balls enter the left operation winning opening 662. Here, at normal times (low probability state of special symbol and normal state of normal symbol), it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second entrance 640 (the electric accessory 640a is unlikely to be opened). Playing a game by aiming at the first entrance 64 by left-handing is the game method with the least loss for the player. When a game ball is fired aiming at the first ball entrance 64, the game ball also flows down toward the storage device 675 disposed on the lower left side of the first ball entrance 64. Thus, in a normal state, the game balls are almost stored in the storage device 675 before the big hit occurs. Therefore, when the jackpot is one of the jackpots C2 and E2 at the normal time, the jackpot is started almost immediately after the jackpot is in the standby state. For this reason, when the big hits are C2 and E2, the period of the big hit standby state is too short, and it is almost impossible to reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 during the big hit standby state. You will not be able to aim. For this reason, the possibility that the number of winnings in the first round of the jackpot is extremely low (two pieces) is extremely high, and as a result, the number of winning balls that can be obtained is disadvantageous compared to the other first round of the jackpot. Become.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, in the case of the jackpot types (jackpots A2, B2, D2, F2 to H2) in which the right operation winning opening 661 triggers the start of the jackpot, the first round is performed in the same manner as in the first embodiment. While it is possible to play a game with the gaming property of acquiring more prize balls for an over prize, on the other hand, in the big hit type (big hit C2, E2) in which the left-hand winning prize port 662 triggers the start of the big prize, over prize is almost completed. The jackpot was started shortly after aiming for. This makes it possible to make a difference in the degree of advantage in the first round of the jackpot according to the jackpot type, so that when a jackpot occurs, the player can be noticed by the jackpot type. Therefore, the interest of the player can be further improved. In the following, for the sake of simplicity, the jackpot type that is started upon entry of the ball into the right operation winning opening 661 is referred to as “right opportunity big hit” and is entered into the left operation winning opening 662. The jackpot type that is started with the ball as a trigger is referred to as “left trigger jackpot”.

<Electrical Configuration in Second Embodiment>
Next, the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The ROM 202 according to the second embodiment differs from the ROM 202 according to the first embodiment only in that the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b are partially changed. , Are the same as the first embodiment described above. Therefore, as the description of the ROM 202 in the second embodiment, only the details of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described.

  FIG. 55 is a diagram showing the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b specified in the ROM 202 according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 55, in the first hit type selection table 202b in the second embodiment, five types of big hit types (big hits A2 to E2) that can be determined in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol. And three types of jackpots (jackpots F2 to H2) that can be determined when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery.

  As the big hit of the first special symbol, “big hit A2” is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “0 to 4” (see 202b1 in FIG. 55). Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are five counter values that are "big hit A2", so "big hit A2" is determined when a big hit occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol. Is 5% (5/100). The "big hit A2" has eight rounds like the "big hit A" in the first embodiment, and a "special symbol change state" and a "normal pattern time saving state" are given after the end of the big hit. Jackpot type. The “big hit A2” is a type of right trigger big hit that is started when a ball is entered into the right operation winning port 661. For this reason, if it is possible to allow the game balls to enter the right-operation winning opening 660 in a state where more game balls reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 during the jackpot waiting state, the normal (one round is started) Prize balls can be obtained more than when the game ball is hit right), and the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the first round is likely to be more advantageous than in the case of a left trigger jackpot.

  As the big hit of the first special symbol, “big hit B2” is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “5 to 14” (see 202b2 in FIG. 55). Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are ten counter values that are "big hits B2". Therefore, if a big hit occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hits B2" is determined. Is 10% (10/100). The "big hit B2" has five rounds like the "big hit B" in the first embodiment, and a "special change state of a special symbol" and a "time saving state of a normal symbol" are given after the end of the big hit. Jackpot type. The "big hit B2" is a type of right trigger big hit that is started when a ball is entered into the right operation winning opening 661, like the "big hit A2". For this reason, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the first round is likely to be advantageous as compared with the left-hand-hit jackpot.

  As the big hit of the first special symbol, “big hit C2” is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “15 to 64” (see 202b3 in FIG. 55). Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the counter value of “big hit C2” is 50, so “big hit C2” is determined when a big hit occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol. Is 50% (50/100). The "big hit C2" has five rounds like the "big hit B" in the first embodiment, and a "special change state of a special symbol" and a "time saving state of a normal symbol" are given after the end of the big hit. Jackpot type. The “big hit C2” is a type of a left trigger big hit that is started when a ball is entered into the left operation winning port 662. For this reason, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the first round is likely to be disadvantageous compared to the right opportunity big hit.

  As the big hit of the first special symbol, “big hit D2” is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “65 to 74” (see 202b4 in FIG. 55). Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are ten counter values that are "big hit D2", so "big hit D2" is determined when a big hit occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol. Is 10% (10/100). The "big hit D2" has five rounds like the "big hit C" in the first embodiment, and a "low probability state of special symbol" and a "time saving state of ordinary symbol" are given after the end of the big hit. Jackpot type. The “big hit D2” is a type of right opportunity big hit that is started when a ball is entered into the right operation winning opening 661. For this reason, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the first round is likely to be advantageous as compared with the left-hand-hit jackpot.

  As the big hit of the first special symbol, “big hit E2” is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “75 to 99” (see 202b5 in FIG. 55). Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are 25 counter values that are "big hit E2", so "big hit E2" is determined when a big hit occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol. Is 25% (25/100). The "big hit E2" has five rounds like the "big hit C" in the first embodiment, and a "low probability state of special symbol" and a "time saving state of ordinary symbol" are given after the end of the big hit. The type of jackpot to be performed. The “big hit E2” is a type of a left trigger big hit that is started when the ball enters the left operation winning port 662. For this reason, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the first round is likely to be disadvantageous compared to the right opportunity big hit.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, a right chance jackpot (any of jackpots A2, B2, and D2) is obtained at a rate of 25%, and a rate of 75% To be a left-handed jackpot (either the jackpot C2 or E2). That is, it is possible to play the game with the gaming property of aiming at the right operation winning opening 661 in a timely manner after more game balls reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 during the jackpot waiting state. It is 25% of the case where the jackpot is won by lottery. Most (75%) are jackpots in which the jackpot starts immediately (in about 0.5 seconds) after the jackpot is in the standby state. Can make you more pleased.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 55, the jackpot of the second special symbol is constituted only by the right opportunity jackpot. Therefore, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, the big hit is always started when the game ball enters the right operation winning opening 661. With such a configuration, the lottery of the second special symbol is basically executed during the “normal time saving state of the ordinary symbol”, and the player continuously hits the game ball by right-handing. This is because it is during firing, and it is highly possible that no game balls are stored in the storage device 675 at the start of the jackpot waiting state. In other words, even if the left-hit jackpot is provided in the jackpot of the second special symbol, there is a high possibility that the jackpot cannot be started immediately after the jackpot standby state. Only the right opportunity jackpot is provided. As a result, the type of jackpot can be reduced, so that the storage capacity of the storage area for storing data for each type of jackpot can be reduced.

  The big hits (big hits F2 to H2) of the second special symbol in the second embodiment are the big hits (big hits D to F) of the second special symbol in the first embodiment, the number of rounds and the game state after the big hit, respectively. Exactly the same. Therefore, the detailed description is omitted.

  In the second embodiment, when the big hit of the second special symbol is made, the big hit is always made a right trigger big hit. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Even in the case of a second special symbol jackpot, a left trigger jackpot may be configured at a predetermined ratio (for example, 10%). As described above, when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the possibility that game balls are stored in the storage device 675 is low. In this case, the game ball does not immediately enter the left operation winning opening 662. Therefore, in the event of a left-hand-operated jackpot, it is possible to provide a game property that measures the timing at which game balls enter the left operation winning opening 662. That is, it is possible to vary the operation winning opening to be aimed during the jackpot waiting state depending on whether the jackpot is a right opportunity jackpot or a left opportunity jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the variation of the game during the jackpot waiting state.

  Next, the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. 56, the RAM 203 in the second embodiment differs from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the above-described first embodiment (see FIG. 13) in that a start opportunity storage area 203n is added. I have. The other configuration is the same as that of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The start opportunity storage area 203n is a storage area for storing data indicating the type of the activated winning opening that serves as a jackpot start opportunity. More specifically, when “01H” is stored as data in the start opportunity storage area 203n, the start opportunity of the jackpot is the right operation winning opening 661 (the current jackpot is the right opportunity jackpot). This means that when "02H" is stored, the start of the jackpot is the left operation winning opening 662 (the current jackpot is the left trigger jackpot). In the start opportunity storage area 203n, the initial value is set to “00H”, and a jackpot is won by a special symbol lottery, and when shifting to the jackpot waiting state, data according to the current jackpot type is overwritten ( (See S232 in FIG. 57). During the jackpot waiting state, the system monitors the activation winning opening corresponding to the data stored in the start opportunity storage area 203n for the activation winning opening, and detects the entrance to the monitored activation winning opening. It is configured to set the start of a jackpot (see S1113 and S1114 in FIG. 59). Thereby, according to the jackpot type, it is possible to start the jackpot triggered by the ball entry into the different operation winning opening. Therefore, when the right opportunity is a big hit, the same timing as in the first embodiment is activated with the same timing. While it is possible to realize the gaming ability aiming at the winning opening, it is possible to realize the gaming ability in which the jackpot is started without aiming at the activated winning opening in the case of the left-hand opportunity jackpot. Therefore, the playability in the jackpot waiting state can be diversified.

<Regarding the control processing of the main control device in the second embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the special symbol variation process 2 (S111) will be described with reference to FIG. This special symbol variation process 2 (S111) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment, and is similar to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22). This is a process for setting display on the symbol display device 37 and setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 57) in the second embodiment, the processes in S201 to S23 are performed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment. The same processing is performed.

  In the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 57) in the second embodiment, when the process of S220 is completed, the opening of the storage valve 675a is set (S231). By opening the storage valve 675a, when a game ball is stored in the storage device 675, the game ball can be made to enter the left-operation winning port 662 immediately after the start of the jackpot waiting state. Thereby, in the case of a left opportunity big hit, the big hit can be started soon after the game ball reaches the upper surface of the open door 65f1.

  When the process of S231 is completed, the data stored in the start opportunity storage area 203n is updated to the data according to the current jackpot type (S232), and the process proceeds to S223. In the process of S232, if the current jackpot is a right opportunity jackpot (any of the jackpots A2, B2, D2, F2 and H2), “01H” is stored as data, and the left opportunity jackpot (the jackpot C2, E2 In any case, “02H” is stored as data.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 58, start-up processing 2 in the second embodiment will be described. The start-up process 2 is a process executed in place of the start-up process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment, and is a process started when the power is turned on.

  In the start-up process 2 (see FIG. 58) in the second embodiment, the respective processes in S901 to S914 are the same as the respective processes in S901 to S914 in the start-up process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment. The processing is executed.

  In the start-up process 2 (see FIG. 58) in the second embodiment, when the process of S911 ends, it is next determined whether one of the incoming ball waiting flag 203j and the big hit flag 203m is on ( If it is determined that any of the flags is ON (S921: Yes), it means that the storage state of the storage device 675 should be released (during the jackpot standby state or the jackpot). Therefore, the storage valve 675a is set to be opened (S922), and the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S921 that both the incoming ball waiting flag 203j and the big hit flag 203m are off (S921: No), the period during which the storage device 675 should be set to the storage state (Normal game), the storage valve 675a is set to be closed (S923), and the process proceeds to S912.

  Next, the jackpot start process 2 (S1021) in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The jackpot start process 2 (S1021) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) instead of the jackpot start process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment, and is an operation corresponding to the jackpot type. This is a process for monitoring the incoming ball to the winning opening (right operating winning opening 661 or left operating winning opening 662), and starts a big hit when the incoming ball to the operating winning opening is detected.

  Of the big hit start processing 2 (see FIG. 59) in the second embodiment, in each of S1101, S1103, and S1104, S1101, S1103, and S1104 of the big hit start processing (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as the above processing is executed.

  In the big hit start process 2 (see FIG. 59) according to the second embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1101 that the incoming ball waiting flag 203j is ON (that is, the big hit standby state) (S1101: Yes) Then, the data in the start opportunity storage area 203n is read (S1111), and it is determined whether or not the read data is the data indicating the right operation winning opening 661 (that is, “01H”) (S1112). In the process of S1112, when it is determined that the data (that is, “01H”) corresponding to the right operation winning opening 661 is stored (S1112: Yes), then, a ball entering the right operating winning opening 661 is detected. It is determined whether it has been performed (S1113), and if a ball has not been detected (S1113: No), this processing ends as it is in order to continue the jackpot waiting state. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1113 that a ball has been detected in the right operation winning opening 661 (S1113: Yes), the processing shifts to S1103 to end the jackpot waiting state and start the jackpot. I do.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1112, when it is determined that the data stored in the start opportunity storage area 203n is the data indicating the left operation winning opening 662 (that is, “02H”) (S1112: No). It is determined whether a ball has been detected in the left-operation winning port 662 (S1114). If a ball has not been detected in the left-operation winning port 662 (S1114: No), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1114 that a ball has been detected in the left-operation winning opening 662 (S1114: Yes), the processing proceeds to S1103 to end the jackpot waiting state and start the jackpot. I do.

  By executing the jackpot start process 2 (see FIG. 59), the type of the activated winning opening that is a jackpot trigger is switched according to the jackpot type (whether the right jackpot or the left jackpot). Can be. Therefore, in the case of a right opportunity big hit, the profitability (the number of prize balls) that can be enjoyed by the player in one round of the big hit according to the timing of aiming at the right operation winning opening 661 is changed, and the big hit waiting state. It is possible to switch between game modes in which the game method does not affect the profit (the number of prize balls).

  Next, the jackpot control process 2 (S1022) in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The jackpot control process 2 (S1022) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment, and is a jackpot control process (see FIG. 32). As in the case of (1), this is a process for executing a jackpot effect and opening or closing the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65.

  In the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 60) in the second embodiment, the processes in S1201 to S1217 are the same as the respective processes in S1201 to S1217 in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment. The processing is executed. In the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 60) in the second embodiment, after the process of S1214 or S1215 is completed, the closing of the storage valve 675a of the storage device 675 is set (S1221), and the process is performed. The process moves to S1216. Thus, the period during which the storage state of the storage device 675 is released can be limited to the jackpot waiting state and the jackpot.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the hit-related process 2 (S4321) in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The hit-related process 2 (S4321) is a process executed in place of the hit-related process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment, and is similar to the hit-related process (see FIG. 37). This is a process for executing control corresponding to the type.

  Of the hit-related processes (see FIG. 61) in the second embodiment, S4401 and S4404-S4410 in the hit-related processes (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment respectively correspond to S4401 and S4404-S4410 in the first embodiment. The same processing as each processing is executed. In the hit-related process 2 (see FIG. 61) in the second embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4401 that there is a standby command among the commands received from the main controller 110 (S4401: Yes), A standby state command process for determining the content of the standby state effect is executed according to the received standby state command (S4421), and this process ends. Details of the standby state command processing (S4421) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the standby state command processing (S4421). In the standby state command processing (S4421), first, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a right opportunity jackpot (S4601). Similarly, a display standby state command for executing the standby state effect (see FIG. 7) is set (S4602), the standby state effect flag 223g is set to ON (S4603), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4601, if it is determined that the current jackpot is not a right opportunity jackpot (a left opportunity jackpot) (S4601: No), instead of executing the standby state effect, a fixed display is performed in the variable display effect. A standby state command for display for executing a standby state effect in a mode in which the third symbol is continuously displayed as determined (extended display is extended) is set (S4604), and this processing ends. In the case of a left-hand-hit jackpot, the standby state effect in which the confirmation display of the third symbol is simply extended is that the jackpot-waiting state when the left-hand hit is a very short period (about 0.5 seconds) And the jackpot starts. Therefore, when the left-hand-hit jackpot is executed, the standby state effect (see FIG. 7) similar to the right-hit jackpot is executed. Since the jackpot is started, there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable with the displayed content or confuse the player. Thus, in the second embodiment, in the jackpot standby state set based on the left-hand-operated jackpot, the jackpot is started in the display mode (fixed display of the third symbol) at the end of the variable display effect. Up to that point. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player feel as if the big hit has just started after the variable display has ended, so that the player may feel uncomfortable or confuse the player. This can be prevented (suppressed).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, two types of operation winning ports are provided on the upper right side and the lower left side of the game board 13, and the start timing of the jackpot according to the jackpot type. The winning prize opening is different. The right operation winning port 661 provided on the upper right side of the game board 13 is provided at a position where the player can enter the ball when the game ball is fired by right-handing, while provided at the lower left side of the game board 13. The left-operation winning port 662 is provided at a position where the player can enter the ball when the game ball is shot leftward. In addition, a storage device 675 that can store only one game ball is disposed above the left operation winning opening 662, and a game state in which a left hit is performed (a low probability state of a special symbol, and In the normal state of the normal symbol), when the player plays the game of aiming at the first entrance 64 and firing a game ball, the storage device 675 is almost turned to the jackpot of the first special symbol. On the other hand, the game balls are configured to be stored. Since the storage state of the storage device 675 is released when the jackpot enters the jackpot waiting state, the jackpot type (left trigger jackpot) started when the ball enters the left operation winning opening 662 is triggered. In this case, the game balls stored in the storage device 675 flow down and enter the left-operation winning opening 662, so that the jackpot is started immediately after the jackpot waiting state. Thereby, in the first round of the jackpot, there is a high possibility that the jackpot is started in a state in which the gaming ball has not reached the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. The number of obtained prize balls becomes almost the same every time. On the other hand, when the right opportunity big hit occurs, the jackpot does not start unless the game ball is fired aiming at the right operation winning opening 661. Therefore, similarly to the first embodiment, the game ball enters the right operating winning opening 661. In accordance with the timing at which the game is made, it is possible to realize a game property in which the number of prize balls obtained by the player in the first round of the jackpot can be made different. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the jackpot waiting state and the gaming properties in the first round of the jackpot can be made different depending on whether the jackpot is the left jackpot or the right jackpot. Attention can be given to playing games.

  In the second embodiment, the winning prize opening that triggers the start of the jackpot is made different according to the type of the jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in all the jackpot types, the jackpot is configured to start when a game ball enters either the left or right operating winning port, and the jackpot type in which the storage valve 675a is opened and the jackpot type are not opened. A configuration in which a jackpot type is provided may be adopted. In other words, in the case of a left-hit jackpot, the storage valve 675a is opened from the start of the jackpot standby state to the end of the jackpot, while in the case of a right-hit jackpot, the jackpot standby state is started. The storage valve 675a may be kept closed from the end of the game until the jackpot ends. With this configuration, in the case of a left-hand-operated jackpot, immediately after the jackpot is confirmed and displayed, the storage ball 675a is released and the stored game ball enters the left-operation winning port 662 (winning). Therefore, similar to the above-described second embodiment, the big hit can be started immediately before the gaming balls are stored on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 (in about 0.5 seconds after the big hit standby state). On the other hand, when the right-hit is a jackpot, the storage valve 675a is not opened, so that even if the jackpot is confirmed and displayed, the possibility that the game ball immediately enters the left-operation winning port 662 is reduced. Therefore, the possibility that the jackpot is started immediately after the jackpot determination display is reduced, so that the launch speed (the launch intensity) of the game ball is made different as in the above-described first and second embodiments. Thus, when the game balls reach the right operation winning opening 661 in a state where the game balls have reached (up) the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1, the number of winnings that is the end condition of the first round (that is, the winning number) It is possible to provide an epoch-making playability in which more than two game balls can win the right specific winning opening 65a. As a result, similar to the second embodiment, in accordance with the jackpot type, the first round finishes with a predetermined winning number, and the number of pieces exceeding the predetermined winning number depends on the skill of the player. Since it is possible to switch between game characteristics in which a game ball can be won, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the player in the game.

  In the second embodiment, two operation winning ports (a right operating winning port 661 and a left operating winning port 662) are provided, and the operating winning port that is a trigger for starting a big hit is made different depending on the big hit type. . That is, after the combination of the third symbols indicating the jackpot (ie, the double-eye pattern) is definitely displayed, the game ball enters the left-operation winning opening 662 where there is a high possibility that the game ball will immediately enter (prize). After the combination of the jackpot type started by doing so and the third symbol indicating the jackpot is confirmed and displayed, the game ball is inserted into the right operation winning opening 661 that is unlikely to enter the game ball unless the player aims at it. The jackpot type that is started by entering a ball (winning) is provided. On the other hand, only the right operation winning opening 661 is provided, and even if the game ball does not enter (win) the right operating winning opening 661 (that is, the combination of the third symbols indicating the big hit is definitely displayed. It is also possible to provide a jackpot type that is started (for example) and a jackpot type that does not start a jackpot unless a game ball does not enter (win) the right operation winning port 661. With this configuration, it is not necessary to provide the left-operation winning port 662 and the storage device 670, so that the number of components of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Therefore, the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In the second embodiment, the ease with which the game ball enters the first entrance 64 is constant irrespective of the state of the storage device 675, but the ease with which the game ball enters the first entrance 64. It may be configured to vary the degree according to the state of the storage device 675 (whether or not game balls are stored). Specifically, for example, the storage device 675 is configured to be provided on the upper left side of the first ball entrance 64, and when a game ball is stored in the storage device 675, the storage of the stored game ball is performed. The height of the storage device 675 is set so that the upper surface partly protrudes from the upper surface of the storage device 675. Then, when the game ball fired by the left strike collides with the game ball stored in the storage device 675, the ball is easily flipped in the direction in which the first ball entrance 64 is arranged. The position of the storage device 675 is set. With this configuration, when game balls are stored in the storage device 675, the game balls can easily enter the first entrance 64, so that the lottery of the first special symbol is easily executed. Become. That is, it is more advantageous for the player to store the game balls in the storage device 675, so that the player can positively store the game balls in the normal state. Therefore, the jackpot waiting state can be started in a state where the game balls are stored in the storage device 675 more reliably, and when the left trigger is a big hit, the game balls stored in the storage device 675 are immediately removed. The ball can be made to enter the left operation winning opening 662 to start a left-hand-hit jackpot.

  In the second embodiment, the period from when the jackpot is in the standby state until the jackpot is started is changed by switching the operation winning prize opening which is the trigger of the jackpot according to the jackpot type. It is not limited to. For example, the winning opening itself may be deleted (that is, the jackpot is started without going through the jackpot waiting state), and the opening period may be simply changed according to the jackpot type. With such a configuration, in the case of a jackpot having a long opening, a larger number of game balls can reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 by performing a right-hand during the opening, while in a jackpot having a short opening period. Since it is difficult for the game ball to reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1, the degree of advantage in the first round can be changed according to the type of big hit without using the operation winning opening.

  In the second embodiment, the configuration is such that the operation winning prize opening which is a trigger of the jackpot is switched according to the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the jackpot waiting state, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is started regardless of which of the operation winning ports the game ball enters. And it is good also as a structure which changes the degree of advantage of a jackpot according to the classification of the winning operation winning opening. More specifically, for example, it is easier for the number of rounds of the jackpot to be increased when the jackpot is started by winning in the right operation winning port 661 than when the jackpot is started by winning the left activated winning port 662. The configuration may be as follows. With such a configuration, if a game ball can be immediately awarded (entered) to the right operation winning opening 661 when the jackpot is in a standby state, an advantageous result for the player is obtained. It is predicted from the execution of the variable display whether or not the game ball is in the process of being displayed, and immediately after the jackpot standby state (for about 0.5 seconds until the game ball enters the left-operation winning opening 662), the game ball is The game can be played by devising so as to enter the right operation winning opening 661. Further, in this case, instead of switching the degree of advantage in accordance with the type of the activated winning opening, the configuration may be such that the game property is switched. Specifically, for example, when a big hit is started by entering the left-hand winning prize port 662, the jackpot of 10 rounds is always started, while the big-hit jackpot 661 is entered. When the ball is hit and the jackpot is started, either the four rounds or the sixteenth round jackpot may be selected by lottery. With this configuration, it is possible to switch between the gaming ability in which the jackpot of 10 rounds is provided stably and the unstable (high gambling) gaming ability in which the number of rounds can be increased or decreased. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the second embodiment, the jackpot is started when the game ball enters the activated winning prize port corresponding to the jackpot type after the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, but is not limited thereto. Not something. For example, the winning prize mouth is not included in the configuration, and a jackpot (so-called one kind) which is started immediately when a jackpot is won by a special symbol lottery, and a game ball is provided in a specific area provided on the game board 13. The right variable winning device 65 of the present embodiment is applied to a pachinko machine 10 (a so-called one-type and two-type mixer) of a type having a big hit (so-called two-type) that is started when a ball is entered. However, the same operation can be realized. In other words, in the case of one type, a big hit is started immediately before the game ball is fired toward the right variable winning device 65, so that it is not possible to aim for an over-winning prize, but a specific area can enter. In the case where the game ball is in a proper state (a state where two hits can be aimed at), the game ball is first fired on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1, and then the game ball is fired aiming at a specific area, whereby the over-winning is intentionally performed. Can be generated.

<Third embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, when a special symbol is won by lottery and the jackpot is shifted to a jackpot waiting state, the pachinko machine 10 passes over the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 at the timing when the game ball enters the activated winning opening 660. The configuration is such that the more game balls in the middle, the more advantageous to the player (the larger the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the first round).

  On the other hand, in the third embodiment, even in the case other than the case of the jackpot, a scene is provided in which the degree of advantage of the player is changed according to the number of game balls passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. More specifically, a lottery result (small hit) in which the right specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined period (for example, 0.2 seconds) is provided in a part of the case where the lottery of the special symbol is missed. . With this, as the number of game balls passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 at the timing when the small hitting starts, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the small hitting increases, the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 is displayed every time the small hitting occurs. Attention can be given to playing games.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment is different in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 in the main control device 110 is different. , The configuration of the RAM 203 is partially changed, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the control executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed. The point is that the processing has been partially changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the following. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 63, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the third embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 63, in the third embodiment, the normal entrance (through gate) 67 and the second entrance 640 are provided in the flow path provided on the left side of the variable display unit 80. Configuration. In addition, this allows the game ball to be launched into the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the first entrance 64, and the second entrance 640 by firing the game ball leftward. Can be ball. For this reason, it is possible to cause the player to play a game by left-handing regardless of the gaming state during the jackpot waiting state and other than during the jackpot. When a big hit or a small hit occurs, a game ball is fired on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 by right-handing, so that more game balls are opened at the timing when the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened and the right specific winning opening 65a. Can be entertained.

  In the third embodiment, when a lottery of the second special symbol is lost, a small hit occurs and the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened for a predetermined period (0.2 seconds). In the pattern lottery, small wins are not won. With such a configuration, it is possible to further increase the degree of advantage while the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol is set. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the time saving state of the normal symbol.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 64, a display effect performed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 64 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in a case where a small win has occurred in the second special symbol lottery in the probability variable state (special symbol variation state and normal symbol time saving state). is there. In the present embodiment, when a small hit occurs, the third symbol display device 81 sets “3”, “4”, and “1” as a combination (so-called “chance eye”) of the third symbol indicating the small hit. A combination of the third symbols with numbers is displayed. FIG. 64 (a) shows a moment when a small hit occurs and all the symbol columns are stopped and displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 64 (a), in the probable change state, an image urging the player to make a left-hand shot is displayed in the small area Ds3 until the symbol combination corresponding to the small hit is confirmed and displayed. Thereby, in the certain change state, it is possible to make the player hit the left aiming at the second entrance 640 provided on the left side of the game board 13.

  FIG. 64B is a diagram showing a display mode during the small hit determination display. During the small hit determination display, a balloon is displayed in the small area Ds3 in the third symbol display device 81, in which the characters "From the right!" And a graphic of a rightward arrow are displayed. By performing a right-handed operation according to the displayed contents, the game ball can reach the upper surface of the door 65f1. Therefore, when the opening period of the small hits is started, the game ball arranged on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 can enter the right specific winning opening 65a. The small hit determination display (see FIG. 64B) continues to be displayed from the elapse of the fluctuation period of the variable display corresponding to the small hit until the end of the small hit. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplicity, the image (see FIG. 64B) that is displayed during the small hit and prompts the user to right-hand is referred to as a “right-hand notification image”.

  Note that the small hit in the third embodiment has a configuration in which an opening period of 4 seconds is set. That is, the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened for a predetermined period (0.2 seconds) four seconds after the start of the display of the right-handed notification image (see FIG. 64B) on the display screen. I have. Thereby, by allowing more game balls to reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 during the opening period of 4 seconds, the opening period of the small hit becomes an opening period. A ball can be made to enter the right specific winning opening 65a.

  Further, as described above, the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 is configured so that the game ball can pass in about 4 seconds. That is, the game ball that has reached the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 for substantially the same period as the small hit opening period. Therefore, when right-handed is started after the right-handed notification image (see FIG. 64B) is displayed, the game ball may pass over the upper surface of the door 65f1 before the opening period elapses. Can be suppressed. Also, as the right hit of the game ball is started earlier after the small hit is confirmed and displayed, more game balls can reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. In the normal symbol time reduction state) and the time reduction state (special symbol low-probability state and normal symbol time reduction state), a game can be played by paying more attention to the display contents of the third symbol display device 81. it can.

<Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment>
Next, the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The ROM 202 according to the third embodiment differs from the ROM 202 according to the first embodiment only in that the content of the first random number table 202a is partially changed. This is the same as the first embodiment described above. Therefore, as the description of the ROM 202 in the third embodiment, only the details of the first random number table 202a will be described.

  FIG. 65 (a) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the first random number table 202a according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 65 (a), the first random number table 202a in the third embodiment stores a random number value (counter value) determined to be a small hit in addition to a random number value (counter value) determined to be a big hit. ) Is specified.

  More specifically, regardless of whether the special symbol is in the low probability state or the special symbol high probability state, the value of the first random number counter C1 is set to “360” for the lottery of the second special symbol. A small hit is defined in association with the range of “-399” (see 202a2 and 202a4 in FIG. 65A). On the other hand, no value of the first random number counter C1 corresponding to the small hit is associated with the lottery of the first special symbol (see 202a2 and 202a4 in FIG. 65A). For this reason, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, there is no possibility of a small hit, but when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the small hit is generated with a probability of 1/10 (40/400). Becomes Therefore, in the probable change state or the time saving state, the game ball is likely to easily enter the second entrance 640 by increasing the probability of hitting the symbol, and the small prize ball is obtained with a relatively high probability. Is obtained, so that the game state becomes extremely advantageous for the player. Further, a great difference can be provided in the degree of advantage of the player depending on whether or not to play the game at the specific winning opening 65a when the small hit occurs. That is, in the present embodiment, after the small hit is notified, a large number (about six) of the game balls reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 by right-handing the game balls during the opening period of 4 seconds. be able to. In other words, at the point in time when the small hitting opening period is started, about six game balls can be in a state of passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. Each time one game ball wins the specific winning opening 65a, 10 prize balls are awarded. Therefore, a right strike is displayed in accordance with the right strike notification displayed in the small area Ds3 (see FIG. 64 (b)). By doing so, approximately 60 prize balls can be obtained each time a small hit occurs. Therefore, in the case of a small hit, the degree of advantage between the probable change state and the time saving state can be greatly changed depending on whether or not right-handing is performed according to the display content (right-handed notification image) of the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the player can play the game by paying attention to the display content of the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65B is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 according to the third embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 according to the first embodiment (see FIG. 13) in that a small hit flag 203p is added. The other configuration is the same as that of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The small hitting flag 203p is a flag indicating whether or not a small hit is made, and if on, it means that the small hit is being made. On the other hand, if it is off, it means that it is not during the small hit. Here, “small hit” indicates a period from the start of the small hit opening period to the end of the small hit ending period. The small hit flag 203p is set to ON at the start of the small hit opening period (see S1303 in FIG. 67), and is set to OFF at the end of the small hit (see S1311 in FIG. 67).

<Control Process of Main Control Device in Third Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. First, the main process 3 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The main process 3 is a process executed in place of the main process (see FIG. 30) in the first embodiment, and is a process for performing main control of a game, like the main process (see FIG. 30). is there.

  Of the main processing 3 (see FIG. 66) in the third embodiment, in S1001 to S1005 and S1006 to S1016, S1001 to S1005 and S1006 of the main processing (see FIG. 30) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as the processing from S1016 to S1016 is executed. In the main process 3 (see FIG. 66) in the third embodiment, when the process of S1005 is completed, a small hit control process for controlling the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a during the execution of the small hit is next performed. (S1021), and the process proceeds to S1006. Details of the small hit control process (S1021) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the small hit control process (S1021). In this small hit control process (S1021), it is first determined whether or not it is a small hit start timing (S1301). In the process of S1301, the variation pattern is executed based on the determination of the special symbol lottery result as a small hit in the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23), and the variation pattern corresponding to the small hit ends. When the timing comes, it is determined that the timing is a small hit start timing.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1301 that it is the start timing of the small hit (S1301: Yes), a small hit opening command indicating the start of the small hit opening period is set (S1302), and the small hit flag 203p is set. This is set to ON (S1303), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1301 that it is not the timing of starting the small hit (S1301: No), then it is determined whether the small hit flag 203p is ON (that is, whether the small hit is in progress). (S1304), when it is determined that the small hitting flag 203p is off (S1304: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the small hitting flag 203p is ON (S1304: Yes), it is next determined whether or not it is time to open the right specific winning opening 65a (S1305). That is, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the opening period (3 seconds).

  In the processing of S1305, when it is determined that it is the opening timing of the right specific winning opening 65a (S1305: Yes), the opening of the right specific winning opening 65a is set (S1306), and this processing ends. By setting the opening of the right specific winning opening 65a by the processing of S1306, the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened, and the game ball passing the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 wins (enters) the right specific winning opening 65a. . As a result, as more game balls reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1, the player can acquire a larger amount of prize balls. Therefore, during the opening period of the small hits, more game balls can be fired by the player, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  In the process of S1305, when it is determined that the timing is not the opening timing of the right specific winning opening 65a (that is, it is not the end timing of the opening period) (S1305: No), then, the closing condition of the right specific winning opening 65a is satisfied. It is determined whether or not (S1307). In the third embodiment, it is determined that the closing condition has been satisfied when 0.2 seconds have elapsed since the right specific winning opening 65a was opened or when two game balls were won.

  In the process of S1307, when it is determined that the closing condition of the right specific winning opening 65a is satisfied (S1307: Yes), the closing of the right specific winning opening 65a is set (S1308), indicating the start of the small hit ending period. The small-hit ending command is set (S1309), and the process ends. The small ending period is set to a period (for example, 0.5 seconds) sufficient to discharge all the game balls that have entered the right specific winning opening 65a.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1307, when it is determined that the timing is not the timing at which the closing condition of the right specific winning opening 65a is satisfied (S1307: No), then, it is the timing of the end of the small hit (that is, the timing of the ending period end) Is determined (S1310), and when it is determined that it is the timing of the end of the small hit (S1310: Yes), the end of the small hit is set by turning off the small hit flag 203p (S1311). ), End this processing. In addition, in the process of S1310, if it is determined that the timing is not the end timing of the small hit (S1310: No), the process ends as it is.

  By executing this small hit control process (see FIG. 66), the opening / closing operation of the same right specific winning opening 65a can be realized in each small hit.

<Regarding the control processing of the sound lamp control device in the third embodiment>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the hit-related process 3 (S4331) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the third embodiment. The hit-related process 3 (S4331) in the third embodiment is a process executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 36) instead of the hit-related process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. Similar to the hit-related process (see FIG. 37), this is a process for executing control corresponding to the type of a command related to a hit.

  Of the hit-related processes 3 (see FIG. 68) in the third embodiment, the processes in S4401 to S4410 are the same as the processes in S4401 to S4410 in the hit-related processes (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment, respectively. The processing is executed.

  In the hit-related process 3 (see FIG. 68) in the third embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4409 that the ending command has not been received (S4409: No), the main control device 110 It is determined whether the small hit opening command has been received (S4431). If it is determined that the small hit opening command has been received (S4431: Yes), a right-handed notification image (see FIG. 64B) is displayed. A display command for this is set in the display control device 114 (S4432), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4431 that the small hit opening command has not been received (S4431: No), then it is determined whether a small hit ending command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4433). ), When it is determined that the small hit ending command has been received (S4433: Yes), a display for canceling the right-handed notification image and returning to a normal left-handed notification image (see FIG. 64A). A command for setting is set (S4434), and the process ends. By releasing the right strike notification image at the start of the small hit ending period instead of the small hit end timing, the right specific winning opening 65a is closed, and the game ball can enter the right specific winning opening 65a. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from continuously showing and launching the game ball by right-handing despite the lack of sex. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being damaged. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4433 that the small hit ending command has not been received (S4433: No), the process ends.

  By the processing of S4431 to S4434 in the hit-related processing 3 (see FIG. 68) in the third embodiment, the display of the right strike notification image is set from the start of the small hit opening period to the end of the small hit. can do. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to make a right-hand before the small hit opening period is started (during the opening period of 4 seconds). A plurality of game balls can reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 at the start of the winning opening period. Therefore, a plurality of game balls can be made to enter the specific winning opening 65a, even though the opening period of the small hit is itself short (maximum 0.2 seconds), so that the game is performed according to the right-hit notification image. In this case, the degree of advantage can be increased. This allows the player to more seriously check the display contents of the third symbol display device 81, thereby improving the willingness of the player to participate in the game.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the lottery result (the small hit) in which the right specific winning opening 65a is opened for a maximum of 0.2 seconds in a part of the case where the special symbol is lost by the lottery. ) Is provided. When the small hit occurs, the right specific winning opening 65a is opened for 0.2 seconds after the opening period of 4 seconds is set. Therefore, by continuously firing game balls toward the upper surface of the door 65f1 during the four-second opening period, a plurality of game balls pass through the upper surface of the door 65f1 at the start of the opening period. Therefore, the plurality of game balls can be made to enter the opened right specific winning opening 65a. In addition, in the case where a small win has occurred in a special symbol lottery, a right-hit notification image is displayed from the start of the small win opening period to the end of the open period. With such a configuration, by right-handing only while the right-handed notification image is displayed in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81, a plurality of game balls can be easily set to 0. 0 in each small hit. It is possible to win the right specific winning opening 65a during the opening period of 2 seconds. Therefore, the player can play the game by paying more attention to the display content of the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, in the third embodiment, the right-handed player is advantageous only in the case of a big hit or a small hit, and the game is played by a left-handed shot in a normal state. With this configuration, it is possible to frequently switch between right-handed and left-handed during a time-saving state or a probable change state, so that the player can enjoy switching the direction in which the game ball is fired. You can make it. Also, if the right-handed is informed, it is a chance to obtain a prize ball, so that the player can be pleased when the right-handed is informed.

  Note that, in the third embodiment, in the case of a small hit during normal times, the effect of informing right-handing is executed, and in other cases, the effect of informing left-handing is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. is not. For example, when a small hit occurs, the opening period is set immediately (for example, 0.1 seconds after the end of the fluctuation). That is, it is configured such that it is difficult to enter the game ball during the opening period of the small hit if the right hit is not started during the execution of the variable display. Then, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which an effect indicating the degree of expectation to be a small hit is executed during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. Specifically, for example, during the execution of the variation display of the third symbol, the character “10%”, the character “30%”, and the character “60%” are displayed in the small area Ds3. , "100%" may be selected and displayed. When selecting, the character to be displayed may be determined with a selection probability according to the result of the lottery of the second special symbol. More specifically, the character “100%” is selected only in the case of a small hit, but is configured so that the probability of selection is lower than other characters. The character "10%" is more difficult to select than "30%" or "60%" when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, and is most likely to be selected when it is off. The configuration is as follows. In addition, the character “30%” is configured so that the probability of being selected in the case of a small hit is higher than “10%” and lower than “60%”, while it is selected in the case of a miss. It is configured so that the probability of being performed is lower than “10%” and higher than “60%”. The character “60%” is configured so that the probability of being selected in the case of a small hit is higher than “30%”, while the probability of being selected in the case of a departure is smaller than “30%”. It is configured to be low. By configuring in this way, most of the characters displayed when the small hit is "30%" or "60%" that can be displayed even in the case of a small hit. It is possible to make the player predict whether or not a small hit will occur. Then, a player who predicts a small hit can fire a game ball toward the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 by right-handing during execution of the variable display (before the small hit is started). With this, if a small hit is made as predicted by the player, the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened and a prize ball can be obtained. It is possible to make the player more seriously predict whether or not a small hit has occurred. In addition, when the character "100%" is displayed, a small hit is always made, so that the player can make a right-handed operation while the variable display is being executed with confidence. Therefore, the player's interest in the game in the probable change state and the time reduction state can be further improved.

  In the third embodiment, as the small hit type, only the small hit with the opening period of 4 seconds is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration in which a plurality of types having different opening periods may be provided. Specifically, for example, a configuration may be provided in which a type having an opening period of 1 second, a type of 2 seconds, a type of 4 seconds, and a type of 8 seconds are provided. With this configuration, when the opening period is short (1 second or 2 seconds) and the type of small hit is made, if the right hit is performed after the small hit opening period is started, the small hit is made. Since the number of game balls reaching the opening / closing door 65f1 before the opening period of the game starts is reduced, the number of prize balls tends to be smaller than that of the small hit type in which the opening period is 4 seconds. On the other hand, if the opening period is a type of small hit that is longer (8 seconds) than the time required for the game ball to pass over the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1, the right after the small hit opening period starts. If the player continues to hit, the game ball fired in the first half of the opening period will pass through the opening / closing door 65f1 before the start of the opening period. Therefore, since a useless ball is easily generated, the number of possessed balls tends to decrease more than the small hit type in which the opening period is 4 seconds. As a result, the degree of advantage of the player is changed depending on the type of the small hit, and when the small hit is notified (the right-hit notification image is displayed), the player makes a right-hand while hoping for an advantageous small hit. Can be done.

  In the third embodiment, a right-hit notification image is displayed when a small hit occurs. However, displaying a right-hit notification image is not limited to a small hit. For example, the right-handed notification image may be diverted to the display during the execution of the jackpot (for example, the display of the opening period). With such a configuration, it is not necessary to prepare different effects for the big hit and the small hit, and the number of data in the display data table can be reduced.

  In the third embodiment, it is configured that there is a possibility of winning a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the second special symbol lottery, when the first special symbol lottery is executed, a small hit may be won with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/50 probability). With such a configuration, in the low probability state of the special symbol that is the most disadvantageous for the player and in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, it is possible to obtain a certain number of balls in a small hit when a small hit occurs. In addition, the game can be prevented from being monotonous. Therefore, even if the most disadvantageous state continues for a long time (so-called addiction occurs), it is possible for the player to hardly get bored with the game. In this case, the ratio of displaying the right-handed notification image (the occurrence rate of right-handed navigation) when the small hit is won may be changed according to the number of consecutive misses. That is, right-handed navigating hardly occurs even when a small hit occurs until a specific number of times or a loss occurs without a big hit in the first special symbol lottery. The configuration may be such that the probability of occurrence is high (for example, 50%). This makes it difficult for the number of possessed balls to decrease when the number of times exceeds a specific number, so that the player can continue the game for a longer time. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  In the third embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the big hit is started when the game ball enters the activated winning opening 660, but the activated winning opening 660 is deleted and the small winning is eliminated. Only when it becomes, an over prize may be generated.

  In the third embodiment, the jackpot is started when the jackpot is won by the special symbol lottery. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively or additionally, a big hit may be started when a game ball enters a specific area inside the right variable winning device 65. That is, during the opening period of the right specific winning opening 65a based on the winning of the small hit, the game ball enters the right specific winning opening 65a, so that the game ball enters the specific area and the big hit. May be started. With this configuration, the merit of entering the right specific winning opening 65a at a small hit can be further increased, so that the game can be played by paying attention to whether or not the right-handed navigation occurs. . In this case, it may be configured such that the small hit is won even in the lottery of the first special symbol, and the occurrence rate of the right-handed navigation when the small hit is made for each gaming state is variable. In other words, a configuration may be adopted in which the navigation occurrence rate is reduced in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, and the navigation occurrence rate is increased in the normal symbol time reduction state. With this configuration, it is possible to further increase the degree of advantage of the normal symbol in the time saving state. Conversely, the navigation probability may be higher in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol. As a result, in addition to the case of winning a special design lottery, in addition to the case of small hits, there is a chance to win a big hit by entering a specific area even if it is a small hit, so there is a situation that the big hit will not be won for a long time Can be difficult. Therefore, the player can continue the game for a longer time. Furthermore, in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, when the number of times the lottery is lost in the special symbol lottery becomes a specific number or more, the occurrence rate of the right-handed navigation in the case of a small hit may be increased. . With such a configuration, when the number of times exceeds a specific number, it is possible to form a situation where it is easier to win a jackpot than before the number of times exceeds (a game ball can easily enter a specific area). Can be configured to be less likely to occur. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment, a jackpot is started by allowing the game ball to enter the operation winning opening 660 while the game ball is passing over the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1, thereby starting the big hit. Of the game ball passing through the upper surface of the right specific winning opening 65a. In other words, in the case of the jackpot waiting state, the first round advantageous degree (the right specific winning opening 65a in the first round) is changed according to the timing of starting the jackpot (making the ball enter the activated winning opening 660). (The number of game balls to be entered) is varied.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, the gaming property in which the degree of advantage in the first round (the number of prize balls that can be obtained) varies according to the timing of starting the big hit, the timing of starting the big hit, and one round It is configured such that the player can select a game property that is not related to the degree of eye advantage (the number of prize balls that can be acquired). More specifically, in the fourth embodiment, depending on the selection of the player in the jackpot waiting state, the right specific winning opening 65a of the right variable winning device 65 is opened in the first round of the jackpot, or the left variable winning device is set. The configuration is such that whether to open the left specific winning opening 650a of 650 is variable. This allows the player to select a desired game property, thereby providing a game property suited to the taste of each player.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the configuration in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed. The condition that the specific winning opening 650a is determined to be closed is “when 30 seconds have elapsed or four or more game balls have won”, and the configuration of the RAM 203 in the main control device 110 is partially changed. That the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed; that the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed; And that the configuration of the ROM 202 in the main control device 110 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the following. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 69, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the fourth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 69, in the fourth embodiment, a sorting device 680 is provided on the upper right side of the gaming board 13 in a front view in place of the operation winning opening 660 in the first embodiment. Inside the sorting device 680, there are provided two operation winning ports (a right operating winning port 681 and a left operating winning port 682) into which game balls can enter. As with the operation winning opening 660 in the first embodiment, it is determined that the entering of the game ball is valid only during the jackpot waiting state in each of these two operating winning openings. In the jackpot waiting state, when a game ball enters the right operation winning opening 681, a jackpot in which the right specific winning opening 65a is opened in one round of the jackpot is started, and the game ball enters the left operating winning opening 682. When the ball has entered, a big hit in which the left specific winning opening 650a is opened in one round of the big hit is started.

  In addition, a distribution member for distributing a game ball that has entered the distribution device 680 to one of the operation winning prize ports is provided above the two operation prize ports (right operation prize port 681 and left operation prize port 682). 683 are provided. The distribution member 683 is configured to be rotatable about a shaft 683a as a rotation axis. The distribution member 683 is tilted to the right (every two seconds) according to the elapsed time (see the solid line in FIG. 69) and tilted to the left. It is changed alternately with the arrangement (see the broken line in FIG. 69). When the distribution member 683 is tilted rightward, the upper part of the right operation winning opening 681 is closed by the distribution member 683 and the upper part of the left operation winning opening 682 is opened. For this reason, a game ball that has entered the sorting device 680 while the sorting member 683 is tilted to the right is inclined by the sorting member 683 from the upper right direction in front view to the lower left direction in front view. The ball flows down in the lower left direction and enters the left operation winning opening 682.

  When a game ball enters the left-operation winning port 682 in the jackpot waiting state, a jackpot in which the left specific winning port 650a is opened in all rounds of the jackpot is started. The left variable winning device 650 is different from the right variable winning device 65 in that while the left specific winning opening 650a is closed, the game ball is kept at a position where the game ball can enter the left specific winning opening 650a. It is configured to make it impossible. Therefore, in the first round of the jackpot, the number of game balls entered is unlikely to vary, and almost the same number of prize balls can be stably paid out each time. Therefore, a player or the like who is not confident in the game of launching the game ball at the same time can select the big hit at which the left specific winning opening 650a is opened.

  As described above, the jackpot that is started when a game ball enters the left activated winning opening 682 is 30 seconds after the start of each round, or the gaming ball is inserted into the left specific winning opening 650a. The round ends when more than one ball is entered. Therefore, in the first round of the jackpot (left opportunity jackpot) started when the game ball enters the left operation winning port 682, almost four game balls enter the left specific winning port 650a and the jackpot ends. I do.

  On the other hand, when the distribution member 683 is arranged to be inclined leftward, the upper part of the right operation winning opening 681 is opened and the upper part of the left operation winning opening 682 is closed by the distribution member 683. For this reason, a game ball that has entered the sorting device 680 while the sorting member 683 is tilted to the left is inclined from the upper left in front view to the lower right in front view formed by the sorting member 683. , And flows down to the lower right, and enters the right operating winning opening 681. When a game ball enters the right activated winning opening 681, the right specific winning opening 65a is opened in the first round of the jackpot, and the left specific winning opening 650a is opened in the second and subsequent rounds. Jackpot) is started. The first round of the right opportunity jackpot ends when 30 seconds elapse after the right specific winning opening 65a is opened, or when two or more game balls enter the right specific winning opening 65a. However, as described above, the winning number in the right specific winning opening 65a is approximately two to six in accordance with the number of game balls passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 at the time of opening the right specific winning opening 65a. Move up and down in range. Therefore, when a game ball enters the right-operation winning opening 681 in the jackpot waiting state, the number of prize balls that can be acquired is changed according to the timing of the entry of the game ball.

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, since the arrangement of the distribution member 683 is switched every two seconds in the jackpot waiting state, the arrangement of the distribution member 683 is checked for the player, and the player has the desired game performance. By entering a game ball at a timing when it becomes possible to enter the operation winning opening corresponding to the above, it is possible to provide a game property that matches the taste of each player.

  Between the right operating winning opening 681 and the left operating winning opening 682, if a game ball that has entered the sorting device 680 does not enter any of the operating winning openings, the game ball is sorted. An out port for discharging to the outside of the 680 is provided. By providing the out port, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a problem such as ball clogging inside the sorting device 680.

  Next, a display effect in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 70A and 70B are diagrams illustrating an example of a display mode during a standby state effect performed in the jackpot standby state according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 70 (a) shows a display mode while the sorting member 683 is tilted rightward in the jackpot waiting state.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (a), in the jackpot waiting state in the fourth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, a display area in which the character "Big hit is determined!" HR1 and a combination (final stop symbol) of the third symbol that is finally stopped and displayed (fixed display) in the variable display effect that was executed before the jackpot standby state is displayed. Also, as shown in FIG. 70A, while the sorting member 683 is tilted to the right, the display area HR2 formed on the display screen is displayed as "If you hit now, a safe mode !?" , And the characters “You can stably obtain a prize ball!” And the direction in which the game ball that has entered the sorting device 680 flows down (the direction in which the left-operation winning port 682 is arranged). Is displayed. Unlike the first embodiment, the chance meter CM is not displayed, and the right side of the display screen is empty. With these display contents, it is possible to make the player recognize that when the game ball is fired toward the sorting device 680, there is a high possibility that the game ball will enter the left-operation winning port 682. In other words, regardless of the timing at which game balls enter the left-operation winning opening 682, a gaming jackpot in which five game balls can stably enter the left specific winning opening 650a in the first round. Is started.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (b), while the sorting member 683 is tilted to the left, as in the first embodiment, the character “Big hit!” Is displayed at the top of the display screen when viewed from the front. The displayed display area HR1 and a combination (final stop symbol) of the third symbol finally stopped and displayed (fixed display) in the variable display effect that was executed before the jackpot waiting state is displayed. In addition, a chance meter CM is displayed on the right side of the display screen as in the first embodiment. Then, in the display area HR2 formed on the display screen, the characters "hit now and unstable mode !?" and the characters "If you are lucky, you will get a large amount! If you are unlucky, ..." And an image indicating the direction in which the game ball that has entered the sorting device 680 flows down (the direction in which the right-hand winning port 681 is arranged). Based on these display contents, it is possible to make the game balls recognize that when the game balls are fired toward the sorting device 680, there is a high possibility that the game balls will enter the right operation winning opening 681. That is, the number of game balls reaching the opening / closing door 65f1 is determined from the number of gauges of the chance meter CM, and the game balls are made to enter the right operation winning opening 681 with good timing (at a timing when the number of gauges is larger). By doing so, it is possible to recognize that a gaming jackpot in which more prize balls can be obtained is started.

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, in the jackpot waiting state, the type of the operation winning prize port to be entered when a game ball is fired aiming at the sorting device 680 and the outline of the jackpot started by entering (game ) Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. With such a configuration, it is possible to allow the player to select a jackpot of a playability that matches his / her taste. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of switching gaming characteristics according to the preference of each player.

<Electrical Configuration in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 according to the fourth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 according to the first embodiment (see FIG. 13) in that a specific winning opening type storage area 203q, a distribution state storage area 203r, and a distribution state timer 203s are provided. And that they have been added. The other configuration is the same as that of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The specific winning opening type storage area 203q is a storage area for storing data indicating the type of the specific winning opening to be opened in the first round of the jackpot. Specifically, when “01H” is stored in the specific winning opening type storage area 203q, the right specific winning opening 65a is opened in the first round of the jackpot, and the left specific winning opening 650a is opened in the second and subsequent rounds. It means that the jackpot type is open. On the other hand, when “02H” is stored, it means that the jackpot type is such that the left specific winning opening 650a is opened in each round of the jackpot. In the specific winning opening type storage area 203q, the initial value is set to “00H”, and “01H” is stored when a game ball enters the right-hand operating winning opening 681 in the jackpot waiting state, “02H” is stored when a game ball enters the left operation winning opening 682 (see S1131, S1133 in FIG. 72). When the start condition of the first round of the jackpot is satisfied, the type of the specific winning opening to be opened is determined based on the data in the specific winning opening type storage area 203q (S1232 in FIG. 73).

  The distribution state storage area 203r is a storage area in which data indicating the direction of the distribution member 683 is stored. Specifically, when “00H” is stored in the distribution state storage area 203r, the distribution member 683 is tilted to the left (a state in which a game ball can enter the right operation winning opening 681). If “01H” is stored, the sorting member 683 is tilted to the right (a state in which game balls can enter the left-operation winning port 682). Means The data in the distribution state storage area 203r is updated to data corresponding to the switched arrangement each time the arrangement of the distribution member 683 is switched in the jackpot waiting state (see S1125 and S1127 in FIG. 72). Note that the initial arrangement of the sorting member 683 is in a state of being tilted to the left. At the same time, the initial value of the distribution state storage area 203r also becomes “00H”. In the jackpot waiting state, every time the data in the distribution state storage area 203r is updated, a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the arrangement of the distribution member 683 corresponding to the updated data (the distribution state command). ) Is set. Based on this distribution state command, it is determined that the arrangement of the distribution member 683 has been switched, and the display state of the standby state effect is updated to a display form corresponding to the arrangement after the switching.

  The distribution state timer 203s is a timer for counting the remaining time until the state of the distribution member 683 is switched. In the distribution state timer 203s, the timer value is reset to “0” each time the state of the distribution member 683 is switched in the jackpot waiting state, and the timer value is incremented by 1 each time a large jackpot start process 4 (see FIG. 72) described later is executed. (S1121 in FIG. 72). That is, it is updated at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the main processing. Then, when the timer value becomes 500 or more, the state of the sorting member 683 is switched (see SS1124 and S1126 in FIG. 72).

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. First, the jackpot start process 4 (S1041) in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The jackpot start process 4 (S1041) is a process executed in place of the jackpot start process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment, and is an operation winning opening (right operating winning opening 681 and left operating winning opening 682). This is a process for starting a jackpot corresponding to the type of the activated winning opening when the entering of the activated winning opening is monitored and the entering of the activated winning opening is detected.

  Among the jackpot start processes 4 (see FIG. 72) in the fourth embodiment, in the respective processes of S1101, S1103, and S1104, S1101, S1103, and S1104 of the jackpot start process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as the above processing is executed.

  In the big hit start process 4 (see FIG. 72) in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1101 that the incoming ball waiting flag 203j is turned on (that is, in the big hit standby state) (S1101: Yes) Then, 1 is added to the value of the distribution state timer 203s (S1121), and it is determined whether the timer value after the addition is 500 or more (S1122). In the processing of S1122, if it is determined that the timer value of the distribution state timer 203s after the addition is 500 or more (S1122: Yes), it means that it is time to switch the state of the distribution member 683, and thus the distribution is performed. Each process of S1123 to S1129 for switching the state of the member 683 is executed.

  Specifically, it is determined whether the data stored in the distribution state storage area 203r is “00H” (whether the distribution member 683 is tilted to the left) (S1123). In the process of S1123, when it is determined that “00H” is stored (S1123: Yes), the sorting member 683 in a state of being tilted to the left is changed to a state of being tilted to the right (S1124), and the sorting state is set. “01H” is stored in the storage area 203r (S1125), and the process shifts to S1128.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1123, when it is determined that the data stored in the distribution state storage area 203r is “01H” (S1123: No), the distribution member 683 that is tilted to the right is tilted to the left. The state is changed to (S1126), "00H" is stored in the distribution state storage area 203r (S1127), and the process proceeds to S1128.

  In the processing of S1128 executed after the processing of S1125 or S1127, a distribution state command indicating the arrangement of the switching member 683 after the switching is set (S1128), and the value of the distribution state timer 203s is reset to 0 ( (S1129), the process proceeds to S1130.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1122, when it is determined that the value of the distribution state timer 203s after the update is less than 500 (S1122: No), it means that it is not the timing to switch the state of the distribution member 683. Therefore, the processes in S1123 to S1129 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S1130. In the processing of S1130, it is determined whether or not a ball has been detected in the right-operation winning port 681 (S1130). If it is determined that a ball has been detected (S1130: Yes), the specific winning port type storage area 203q is determined. Then, "01H" which is data indicating the right specific winning opening 650a is stored (S1131), and the process shifts to S1103. Thus, it is possible to set the start of the jackpot in which the right specific winning opening 65a is opened in the first round of the jackpot.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1130 that a ball has not been detected in the right activated winning opening 681 (S1130: No), then it is determined whether a ball has been detected in the left activated winning opening 682. (S1132). If it is determined in the processing of S1132 that a ball has been detected in the left-operation winning port 682 (S1132: Yes), the data "02H" indicating the left specific winning port 650a for the specific winning port type storage area 203q. Is stored (S1133), and the process proceeds to S1103. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1132 that a ball has not been detected in the left operation winning opening 682 (S1132: No), it means that it is not the end timing of the jackpot waiting state, The process ends.

  In the big hit start process 4 (S1041) in the fourth embodiment, when the process of S1104 ends, the distribution state timer 203s is reset to 0 (S1134), and the process ends. In the process of S1134, by resetting the distribution state timer 203s at the end of the jackpot waiting state, the timer value can be updated from the reset state of the distribution state timer 203s in the next jackpot waiting state. .

  Next, a jackpot control process 4 (S1042) in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 4 (S1042). The jackpot control process 4 (S1042) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment, and is a jackpot control process (see FIG. 32). As in the case of ()), this is a process for controlling the opening / closing operation of the right specific winning opening 65a and the left specific winning opening 650a.

  Among the jackpot control processes 4 (see FIG. 73) in the fourth embodiment, in the processes of S1201 to S1205 and S1207 to S1217, S1201 to S1205 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment, respectively. Also, the same processes as those in S1207 to S1217 are executed. In the jackpot control process 4 (see FIG. 73) according to the fourth embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S1205 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1205: Yes), the round started this time is one round. Is determined (S1231).

  If it is determined in the process of S1231 that the round is one round (S1231: Yes), the opening of the specific winning opening corresponding to the data stored in the specific winning opening type storage area 203q is set (S1232). To S1207. More specifically, if the data stored in the specific winning opening type storage area 203q is “01H”, the opening of the right specific winning opening 65a is set, and the stored data is “02H”. If there is, the opening of the left specific winning opening 650a is set.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1231, if it is determined that the round to be started this time is not the first round (S1232: No), the opening of the left specific winning opening 650a is set (S1233), and the process proceeds to S1207. I do.

  By executing the jackpot control process 4 (see FIG. 73), in the first round of the jackpot, the specific winning port corresponding to the type of the activated winning port that the player has passed (selected) in the jackpot standby state is opened. Can be done. Therefore, in the first round of the jackpot, it is possible to provide a gaming property according to the type of the activated winning opening selected by the player.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the hit-related process 4 (S4341) in the fourth embodiment. The hit-related process 4 (S4341) is a process executed in place of the hit-related process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment, and is similar to the hit-related process (see FIG. 37). This is a process for executing control corresponding to the type.

  Of the hit-related processes 4 (see FIG. 74) in the fourth embodiment, the respective processes of S4401 to S4410 are the same as the respective processes of S4401 to S4410 of the hit-related processes (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. The processing is executed. In the hit-related process 4 (see FIG. 74) in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4409 that the ending command is not included in the command received from the main control device 110 (S4409: No) Then, it is determined whether or not the distribution state command is included (S4441).

  In the process of S4441, if it is determined that the distribution status command is included in the command received from the main control device 110 (S4441: Yes), the command corresponds to the distribution status indicated by the received distribution status command. A display command for updating to the standby state effect mode is set (S4442), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4441, if it is determined that the distribution status command is not included in the command received from the main control device 110 (S4441: No), the process ends as it is.

  By the hit-related processing 4 (see FIG. 74), each time the state of the sorting member 683 switches, a display mode (see FIGS. 70 (a) and (b)) corresponding to the state after the switching can be set. Therefore, when the jackpot is in the standby state, the player simply checks the display content of the third symbol display device 81, and the current state of the sorting device 680 is changed when the player enters the game ball. It is possible to easily determine whether or not a state in which the jackpot of the gaming property that matches the taste is started.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, two types of specific prize ports (a right specific prize port 65a and a left specific prize port 650a) that allow a game ball to enter when a big hit occurs are provided. It is configured to be provided. More specifically, the right specific winning opening 65a has a relatively long game ball at a position (upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1) where the right specific winning opening 65a can be entered when the right specific winning opening 65a is opened while it is closed. While it is configured to be able to stay for a time, the left specific winning opening 650a keeps the game ball at a position where the game ball can enter the left specific winning opening 650a while being closed. It is configured to be impossible to keep. In addition, in the fourth embodiment, two types of operation winning openings (right operation winning opening 681 and left operating winning opening 682) are provided to start a jackpot, and the operation winning opening for entering a ball in the jackpot waiting state is provided. Is made to be selected by the user. If a game ball enters the right activated winning opening 681, a right opportunity big win in which the right specific winning opening 65 a is opened in each round of the jackpot starts, and if a gaming ball enters the left activated winning opening 682. , A left trigger jackpot in which the left specific winning opening 650a is opened in each round of the jackpot. Accordingly, the number of game balls passing through the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 at the timing when the game balls enter the right operation winning opening 681 greatly affects the number of game balls that can be obtained in the first round. , The player can select a game that does not affect the number of acquired prize balls in the state of the jackpot waiting state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game characteristic according to the taste of each player.

  In the fourth embodiment, if a left-hit jackpot occurs, it is impossible to keep the game ball at a position where the player can enter the left specific winning opening 650a in the jackpot waiting state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration in which a predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls can stay at a position where the game ball can enter the left specific winning opening 650a within a range smaller than the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 may be employed. With such a configuration, even when the player selects the left-operation winning port 682, it is possible to provide a gaming property in which the degree of advantage varies according to the timing at which the game ball is entered.

  In the fourth embodiment, the right specific winning opening 65a is opened in all rounds of the jackpot when a right opportunity big hit occurs, while the left specific winning opening 650a is opened in all rounds when a left opportunity big hit occurs. , But is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the specific winning opening corresponding to the activated winning opening is opened only in the first round, and a common specific winning opening is opened in the second and subsequent rounds. Even with such a configuration, the playability in the first round can be switched according to the type of the activated winning opening in which the game ball has entered.

  In the fourth embodiment, which one of the right opportunity jackpot and the left opportunity jackpot is started is made different depending on the type of the activated winning opening that has entered the ball. That is, although the type of the specific winning opening to be opened at the jackpot is made different depending on the type of the activated winning opening, the type made different depending on the type of the operating winning opening is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is varied according to the type of the activated winning opening. More specifically, for example, when a game ball enters the right operation winning opening 681, the number of rounds is 16 or 4 rounds, and the jackpot is drawn in half, while the left operating winning opening 682 is selected. When the game ball enters, the jackpot of 10 rounds may always be selected. In addition, when a game ball enters a specific area during a big hit, a gaming machine (so-called V certain machine) to which a certain change state is given after the big hit enters the specific area according to the type of the operation winning opening. It is good also as a structure which changes a sphere. More specifically, for example, when a game ball enters the right operation winning opening 681, the ball entry rate to the specific area is a lottery with a jackpot of 20% and a jackpot of 100%. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the left operation winning opening 682, a big hit with a ball entry rate of 60% in a specific area may be selected.

<Fifth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described first embodiment, the degree of advantage when the big hit is started (the number of award balls that can be obtained in the first round) according to the number of game balls fired toward the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 in the big hit standby state. Was variable.

  On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, when the variable display corresponding to the jackpot ends, the jackpot is started without going through the jackpot standby state. By changing the jackpot opening period and interval period according to the jackpot type, the number of game balls that can reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 during the opening period or the interval period is changed, and for each jackpot type. The degree of advantage is varied.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the configuration in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the end of each round of the jackpot. The conditions are unified to "when 30 seconds have elapsed or two or more game balls have won", the configuration of the ROM 202 in the main control device 110 has been partially changed, and The point is that the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of 110 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first section. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 75, the gaming board 13 in the fifth embodiment has the operational winning opening 660 provided on the upper right side in front view of the gaming board 13 (see FIG. 2) in the first embodiment deleted. . For this reason, in the fifth embodiment, when the variable display corresponding to the jackpot ends, the jackpot opening period starts immediately (without going through the jackpot waiting state).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 75, in the fifth embodiment, the left variable winning device 650a is deleted. For this reason, in the fifth embodiment, in all rounds of the jackpot, 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of the round, or a right specific winning opening that is closed by entering two or more game balls. 65a is opened.

<Electrical Configuration of Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76A is a block diagram showing a configuration of the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 76A, the ROM 202 according to the fifth embodiment differs from the RM 202 according to the first embodiment in that a period length selection table 202e is added and a first hit type selection table is provided. The difference is that the specified content of 202b is partially changed. The other configuration is the same as that of the ROM 202 in the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The period length selection table 202e is a data table that defines a jackpot opening period and an interval period for each jackpot type. When the start timing of the jackpot opening period and the start timing of the interval period come, the opening period and the interval period according to the jackpot type are set by referring to the period amount selection table 202e. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 70 (c), the period length selection table 202e has two types of opening periods: a relatively long period (5 seconds) and a relatively short period (1 second). Is stipulated. Similarly, two types of interval periods are defined: a relatively long period (3 seconds) and a relatively short period (0.5 seconds). With these, a closed period (opening period) from the start of the jackpot to the start of the first round, a large jackpot having a long closed period (interval period) between the second and subsequent rounds, and a short jackpot are provided. be able to.

  Next, a first hit type selection table 202b in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first hit type selection table 202b. As shown in FIG. 76 (b), in the first hit type selection table 202b in the fifth embodiment, five big hit types from "big hit A5" to "big hit E5" are set as the big hit types of the first special symbol. There are three types of jackpots defined as “big hit F5” to “big hit H5” as the jackpot types of the second special symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 76 (b), as the big hit of the first special symbol, “big hit A5” is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “0 to 4”. (See 202b1 in FIG. 76). Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are five counter values that are "big hit A5", so "big hit A5" is determined when a big hit occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol. Is 5% (5/100). The "big hit A2" has eight rounds like the "big hit A" in the first embodiment, and a "special symbol change state" and a "normal pattern time saving state" are given after the end of the big hit. Jackpot type. The “big hit A5” is one of the big hit types in which a relatively long period is set as the opening period and the ending period. As described above, in the fifth embodiment, in all rounds of the jackpot, 30 seconds have elapsed, or two or more game balls have entered the right specific winning opening 65a, so that the right specific winning opening 65a has been set. Is closed and the round ends. For this reason, if the opening period and the interval period are long, more game balls can reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 during the closing period, so that more game balls are opened and closed at the start of the next round. It can be in a state of being on the door 65f1. That is, when a new round is started and the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened, more game balls can be dropped from the opening / closing door 65f1 to enter the right specific winning opening 65a. This increases the possibility that the number of game balls exceeding the upper limit of the number of ball entry (two) specified in each round will enter the right specific winning opening 65a (exceed an over-prize). It becomes more advantageous in terms of the number of award balls. On the other hand, if the opening period and the interval period are short, it becomes difficult for the game balls to reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 during these closing periods. Therefore, in each round of the jackpot, the upper limit (specified) number (ie, (2) game balls are likely to enter and the round is likely to end (the probability of winning over is reduced). In other words, it tends to be disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls. In the following description, a jackpot in which the opening period and the interval period are long (a jackpot in which prize balls to be acquired in each round are likely to be increased) is referred to as “long interval jackpot”, and a jackpot in which the opening period and the interval period are short (each A jackpot in which the prize balls obtained in a round are unlikely to increase is referred to as a "short interval jackpot".

  As the big hit of the first special symbol, “big hit B5” is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “5 to 14” (see 202b2 in FIG. 76). Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the counter value of "big hit B2" is 10, so if a big hit occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit B5" is determined. Is 10% (10/100). The “big hit B5” has five rounds, like the “big hit B” in the first embodiment, and is given a “special change state of a special symbol” and a “time saving state of a normal symbol” after the end of the big hit. Jackpot type. The “big hit B5” is a kind of long interval big hit like the “big hit A5”. For this reason, the number of prize balls acquired in each round is likely to be larger than that in the case of the short interval jackpot.

  As the big hit of the first special symbol, “big hit C5” is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “15 to 64” (see 202b3 in FIG. 76). Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the counter value of "big hit C2" is 50, so if a big hit occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit C5" is determined. Is 50% (50/100). The "big hit C5" has five rounds like the "big hit B" in the first embodiment, and a "special symbol change state" and a "normal symbol time saving state" are given after the end of the big hit. Jackpot type. This "big hit C5" is a kind of short interval big hit. For this reason, the number of prize balls to be acquired in each round is less likely to be increased than in the long interval jackpot.

  As the big hit of the first special symbol, “big hit D5” is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “65 to 74” (see 202b4 in FIG. 76). Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are ten counter values that are "big hit D5", so if a big hit occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit D5" is determined. Is 10% (10/100). The "big hit D5" has five rounds like the "big hit C" in the first embodiment, and a "low probability state of a special symbol" and a "time saving state of a normal symbol" are given after the end of the big hit. Jackpot type. The “big hit D5” is a kind of long interval big hit. For this reason, the number of prize balls acquired in each round is likely to be larger than that in the case of the short interval jackpot.

  As the big hit of the first special symbol, “big hit E5” is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “75 to 99” (see 202b5 in FIG. 76). Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the counter value of "big hit E5" is 25, so if a big hit occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit E5" is determined. Is 25% (25/100). The "big hit E5" has five rounds like the "big hit C" in the first embodiment, and a "low probability state of a special symbol" and a "time saving state of a normal symbol" are given after the end of the big hit. The type of jackpot to be performed. This "big hit E5" is a kind of short interval big hit. For this reason, the number of prize balls to be acquired in each round is less likely to be increased than in the long interval jackpot.

  As the big hit of the second special symbol, “big hit F5” is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “0 to 4” (see 202b6 in FIG. 76). . Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are five counter values that are "big hit F5", so if a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit F5" is determined. Is 5% (5/100). The "big hit F5" has 16 rounds like the "big hit D" in the first embodiment, and after the big hit is completed, the "special symbol change state" and the "normal symbol time saving state" are given. Jackpot type. The “big hit F5” is a kind of long interval big hit. For this reason, the number of prize balls acquired in each round is likely to be larger than that in the case of the short interval jackpot.

  As the big hit of the second special symbol, "big hit G5" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "5 to 64" (see 202b7 in FIG. 76). Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the counter value of "big hit G5" is 60, so "big hit G5" is determined when a big hit occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol. Is 60% (60/100). The "big hit G5" has 10 rounds, like the "big hit E" in the first embodiment, and is given a "special change state of a special symbol" and a "time saving state of a normal symbol" after the end of the big hit. Jackpot type. The "big hit G5" is a kind of long interval big hit. For this reason, the number of prize balls acquired in each round is likely to be larger than that in the case of the short interval jackpot.

  As the big hit of the second special symbol, "big hit H5" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "65 to 99" (see 202b8 in FIG. 76). Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the counter value of "big hit H5" is 35, so "big hit H5" is determined when a big hit occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol. Is 35% (35/100). The "big hit H5" has 10 rounds like the "big hit D" in the first embodiment, and a "low probability state of special symbol" and a "time saving state of ordinary symbol" are given after the end of the big hit. The type of jackpot to be performed. The "big hit H5" is a kind of long interval big hit. For this reason, the number of prize balls acquired in each round is likely to be larger than that in the case of the short interval jackpot.

  As described above, the fifth embodiment has a configuration in which the long interval jackpot and the short interval jackpot are provided. In the long interval jackpot, since the closing period of the right specific winning opening 65a between rounds is long, more game balls can reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 by right-handing during the long closing period. Therefore, by closing the closing period and starting a new round, it is possible to cause the game balls passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 to enter the right specific winning opening 65a. Can be acquired. On the other hand, in the short interval jackpot, the period from when the right specific winning opening 65a is closed to when the right specific winning opening 65a is next opened is short, and in most cases, the game ball reaches the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 during the closing period. Since it is not possible, the possibility of over-winning in the next round is reduced. Therefore, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in each round is likely to be smaller than the long interval jackpot. Therefore, according to the fifth embodiment, separately from the number of rounds and the game state after the jackpot, the possibility of over-winning varies depending on the jackpot type, so that the degree of advantage for each jackpot can be changed. A game can be played by paying attention to the type.

  Next, the details of the period length selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 (c) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the period length selection table 202e. As shown in FIG. 76 (c), in the period length selection table 202e, the length of a period to be set as an opening period and an interval period is defined for each type of jackpot.

  Specifically, for the jackpot type of "jackpot A5", "jackpot B5", "jackpot D5", "jackpot F5" to "jackpot H5" (long interval jackpot), "5 seconds" is set as the opening period. In addition to being defined in association with each other, “3 seconds” is defined in association with the interval period (see 202e1 in FIG. 76 (c)). For the jackpot types “big jackpot C5” and “big jackpot E5” (short interval jackpot), “1 second” is defined in association with the opening period, and “0.5 seconds” as the interval period. Are defined in association with each other (see 202e2 in FIG. 76 (c)). By selecting the opening period and the interval period with reference to these rules, each closed period (opening period and interval period) becomes relatively long in the long interval jackpot. A relatively large amount can reach the upper surface of the door 65f1. On the other hand, in the short interval jackpot, each closed period is set to a short length such that whether one game ball reaches the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 even if the player hits right after the closing period starts. In each round of the jackpot, over-winning is unlikely to occur. Therefore, by setting the closing period with reference to the period length selection table 202e, it is possible to vary the possibility of occurrence of an over-winning prize according to the jackpot type. Therefore, a game can be played by paying attention to the jackpot type.

<Control Process of Main Control Device in Fifth Embodiment>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the special symbol variation process 5 (S121) in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This special symbol variation process 5 (S121) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21) instead of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment. Similar to (see FIG. 22), this is processing for setting display on the first symbol display device 37 and setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 77) in the fifth embodiment, in each of the processes S202 to S219 and S222 to S224, the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment is performed in each of S202 to S219. The same processes as those of S219 and S222 to S224 are executed.

  Also, when the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 77) in the fifth embodiment is started, it is determined whether or not a big hit is being made (S241), and if it is a big hit (S241: Yes), The process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S241 that the game is not in a big hit (S241: No), the process proceeds to S202.

  In the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 77) in the fifth embodiment, when the process of S219 ends, the big hit start flag 203k is set to ON (S242), and the process proceeds to S224.

  Next, the jackpot control process 5 (S1052) in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The jackpot control process 5 (S1052) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment, and opens and closes the right specific winning opening 65a. This is a process for controlling the operation.

  Of the jackpot control process 5 (see FIG. 78), in each of steps S1201, S1203 to S1209, and S1210 to S1217, S1201, S1203 to S1209, and S1201 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processes as those in S1210 to S1217 are executed.

  In the big hit control process 5 (see FIG. 78) in the fifth embodiment, if it is determined that the big hit start flag 203k is ON in the process of S1201 (S1201: Yes), the period length selection table 202e (FIG. 76) (See (c)) (S1241), an opening period having a length corresponding to the current jackpot type is specified from the read period length selection table 202e, and an opening command indicating the specified period is set (S1242). . In the process of S1242, an opening command indicating an opening period of 5 seconds is set for a long interval big hit, and an opening command indicating a 1 second opening period is set for a short interval big hit. Upon completion of the process in S1242, the process proceeds to S1203.

  In the big hit control process 5 (see FIG. 78) in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined that the closing condition of the right specific winning opening 65a is satisfied in the process of S1208 (S1208: Yes), the big hit type is determined. An interval setting process for setting an interval period is executed (S1243), and this process ends. Details of the interval setting process (S1243) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the interval setting process (S1243). In the interval setting process (S1243), first, it is determined whether the closing condition that has been satisfied this time is closing at the end of the last round (S1401). : Yes), there is no need to set an interval period, and thus this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1401 that the closing condition associated with the end of the round other than the last round is satisfied (S1401: No), the period length selection table 202e is read (S1402), and the current jackpot type is determined. The length of the interval period to be performed is selected (specified) from the read period length selection table 202e (S1403). Then, the start of the interval period of the length specified in the processing of S1403 is set (S1404), and this processing ends.

  By executing the interval setting process (see FIG. 79), the length of the interval period can be varied depending on whether the hit is a long hit or a short hit. Accordingly, in the long interval jackpot, a large number of game balls can reach the upper surface of the closed door 65f1 at each interval period, and thus a large number of game balls reach the right specific winning opening 65a at the start of the next round. Can be over won. On the other hand, when a short interval jackpot occurs, an extremely short period (0.5 seconds) is set as the interval period. It will be difficult. Therefore, over-winning is unlikely to occur in each round, and the number of prize balls that can be obtained in each round is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play a game in expectation of selecting the long interval jackpot as the jackpot type.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, a jackpot opening period and a long interval jackpot having a relatively long interval period and a jackpot opening period and a short interval jackpot having a relatively short interval period are provided. It has a configuration. If a long interval jackpot has been reached, the closing period (opening period) between the notification of the jackpot and the start of the first round, and the next round starting after one round ends In the closing period (interval period) before the above, a large amount of prize balls can reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 by performing right-handing. Therefore, when the closing period elapses and the right specific winning opening 65a is opened, the game balls on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 can be made to enter the right specific winning opening 65a at a stretch. The rate of occurrence of over winning can be increased. On the other hand, in the case of the short interval jackpot, even if the player hits right during the closing period, the closing period is too short and the next round is started without the game ball reaching the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 almost. . Therefore, over-winning is unlikely to occur, which is more disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls than a long-range jackpot. With these, in addition to the number of jackpot rounds and the game state after the end of the jackpot, the probability of occurrence of over-winning can be varied according to the jackpot type, so that the difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type is increased. be able to. Therefore, in the case of a big hit, a game can be played by paying attention to the big hit type.

  Note that, in the fifth embodiment, only two types are provided: a long interval jackpot in which all closed periods are long and a short interval jackpot in which all closed periods are short. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A configuration in which more types are provided may be employed. Specifically, for example, in addition to the long interval jackpot and the short interval jackpot, a long interval (for example, 3 seconds) is set as a closing period until a predetermined round (for example, the third round) of the jackpot, and the subsequent rounds In the jackpot type, a short interval (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set, and conversely, a short interval (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set as a closing period until a predetermined round (for example, the third round). In a subsequent round, a jackpot type in which a long interval (for example, 3 seconds) is set may be provided. Further, for example, a configuration in which a big hit type in which short intervals and long intervals are alternately repeated may be provided. By configuring in this way, even if the opening period is a short interval, the player is told that a big hit that becomes a long interval after a predetermined round has passed or a big hit where the short interval and the long interval are alternately repeated is given to the player. Can be expected. In addition, when the opening period is a long interval, it can be expected to be a jackpot in which a long interval is set in all the closing periods. Thereby, it is possible to give the player a pleasure of predicting the jackpot type.

  In the fifth embodiment, when a long interval big hit occurs, both the opening period and the interval period are set to a long interval, and when a short interval big hit occurs, both the opening period and the interval period are short. The interval was used, but it is not limited to this. For example, one may be a period of a common length, and only the length of the other period may be different depending on the jackpot type. Thereby, control can be simplified, so that the processing load on MPU 201 of main controller 110 can be reduced.

  In the fifth embodiment, the length of the opening period and the length of the interval period are made different according to the type of jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively or additionally, at least one of the opening period and the interval period may be made different depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Specifically, for example, in the low probability state of the special symbol disadvantageous to the player and in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, a short opening period (for example, 1 second) and an interval period (for example, 0.5 seconds) On the other hand, a long opening period (for example, 5 seconds) and an interval period (for example, 3 seconds) are set in the gaming state (probable change state, time saving state) in which the time saving state of the ordinary symbol is set. A configuration in which a jackpot type is provided may be adopted. As a result, it is possible to further improve the advantage degree of the probable change state and the time saving state that are advantageous to the player. Conversely, a configuration in which a long closing period is set in a gaming state disadvantageous to the player, and a short closing period is set in an advantageous gaming state. Thereby, when a big hit is made in a disadvantageous state for the player, more prize balls can be obtained, so that it is possible to suppress quitting the game in a disadvantageous state. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. Further, the control for changing the length of the closing period according to the game state or the jackpot type does not necessarily need to be combined with the right variable winning device 65 in the present embodiment. The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine 10 provided with only a variable winning device (for example, the left variable winning device 650 in each of the above embodiments) having a structure in which an over-win can not be intentionally generated. Thereby, the closing period can be changed according to the situation (the type of the winning jackpot, the gaming state at the time of the winning, etc.), so that the effect performed in the closing period can be made different. Therefore, the production mode can be diversified.

<Modification of Fifth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 80, a modified example of the above-described fifth embodiment will be described. In the above-described fifth embodiment, one variable winning device 65 is used, The technique of providing a jackpot type that is difficult to win has been described. On the other hand, in the present modification, a technique for using two types of variable prize apparatuses (lower variable prize apparatus 65 and upper variable prize apparatus 650) to change the possibility of occurrence of an over prize without changing the closing period. explain.

  FIG. 80 is a view showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to a modification of the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 80, in this modification, a lower variable winning device 65 having the same structure as the right variable winning device 65 in each of the above embodiments is arranged at the same position as the right variable winning device 65 in each of the above embodiments. Have been. Above the lower variable winning device 65, a variable winning device 650 having the same structure as the left variable winning device 650 in the first to fourth embodiments is disposed. In this modified example, according to the jackpot type, the jackpot type (alternative jackpot) in which the upper specific winning port 650a of the upper variable winning device 650 and the lower specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 are alternately opened for each round. ) And a jackpot type (one-side jackpot) in which the lower specific winning opening 65a is opened in each round of the jackpot. In addition, each closed period (opening period, interval period) is set to the same period as the short interval big hit in the fifth embodiment described above. In the case of such a configuration, the operation of one big hit is the same as that of the short-interval big hit in the above-described fifth embodiment, so that there is almost no over-winning, which is disadvantageous in the number of prize balls.

  On the other hand, in the case of an alternating jackpot, if a right-handed hit is made in a round in which the upper specific winning opening 650a is open, some game balls pass through the right side of the upper specific winning opening 650a (the upper specific winning opening). It may flow downward (without winning the opening 650a) and reach the upper surface of the door 65f1. That is, at the start of the next round (the round in which the lower specific winning opening 65a is opened), there is a possibility that one or more game balls are arranged on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. As a result, as the number of game balls reaching the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 increases, the rate of occurrence of over-winning in the next round (the round in which the lower specific winning opening 65a is opened) increases. Therefore, in the case of an alternate jackpot, the player is allowed to play the game by devising the firing intensity so as to easily pass through the right side of the upper specific winning opening 650a and reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. Can be. That is, during the maximum 30 seconds during which the upper specific winning opening 650a is open, more game balls reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1, and then the upper specific winning opening 650a has more than the upper limit number (two) of games. A game can be played with the aim of letting the ball enter. As a result, in the case of an alternating jackpot, the prize balls that can be obtained differ according to the player's playing method, so that a player who is confident in technology can play the game with the pachinko machine 10 positively. Can be done. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

<Sixth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described fifth embodiment, the opening period and the ending period (the length of the closing period) are made different depending on the type of the jackpot, so that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the right variable winning device 65 is reached in each closing period. The number of game balls that can be varied is configured to be different. Thereby, at the start of each round, the game ball passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 (ie, when the right specific winning opening 65a is opened, it is arranged at a position guided to the inside of the right specific winning opening 65a. (The number of game balls in the game). In a long interval jackpot in which a closing period of a length that allows more than two game balls to reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 is set, a game ball is continuously fired toward the opening / closing door 65f1 during the closing period. By simply continuing, it is possible to cause all the game balls passing on the open / close door 65f1 at the start of the next round to win the opened right specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, in each round of the jackpot which is completed by winning two or more game balls, the number of game balls exceeding the specified number (two) is thrown in simply by right-handing continuously during the closing period. be able to. On the other hand, in a short interval big hit where a closing period of a length that allows only two or less game balls to reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 is set, the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 is passed at the start of each round of the big hit. The number of game balls inside is reduced to substantially two or less. As a result, in each round of the jackpot, almost only the specified number (two) of game balls enter and the round ends. With these, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in each round of the jackpot can be made different according to the jackpot type, so that the difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type can be further increased.

  On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, the length of the opening period is fixed at 0.5 seconds regardless of the type of big hit. In other words, even if the player hits right after the start of the opening period, the opening period ends before the game ball reaches the opening / closing door 65f1, and the right specific winning opening 65a is opened. Then, based on the suggestion during the execution of the fluctuation display effect, whether it is better to fire the game ball during the fluctuation display (whether the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened in a state where a plurality of game balls reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1) Is determined by the player. In other words, during the execution of the variable display, it is possible to execute an effect that informs the player of the possibility of being advantageous when right-handed. This allows the player to predict whether it is better to make a right-hand from the contents of the effect, and if it is determined that it is better to make a right-hand, the right You can start beating. Therefore, when the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened as predicted, it is possible to give the player a sense of happiness that the over-winning prize has been generated on his own.

  The pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment in the configuration in that the arrangement and the number of the passage detection sensors 228 provided in the right variable winning device 65 are changed. The configuration of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main control device 110 is partially changed; the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the audio ramp control device 113 is partially changed; The control processing executed by the MPU 221 is partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the fifth section. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the arrangement of the passage detection sensor 228 provided in the right variable winning device 65 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a top view of the right variable winning device 65 according to the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 81, the right variable winning device 65 in the sixth embodiment is located on the entrance side (right side in front view) and the exit side (left side in front view) of the flow path provided on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. , And pass detection sensors 228g1 and 228g2 capable of detecting the passage of the game balls are provided. The passage detection sensor 228g1 can detect a game ball flowing into a flow path provided on the upper surface of the door 65f1. Further, the passage detection sensor 228g2 can detect a game ball that has completely passed through the flow path provided on the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 and has been discharged to the left side of the opening and closing door 65f1. In the sixth embodiment, the number of game balls flowing into the flow path provided on the upper surface of the door 65f1 (the number of game balls detected by the passage detection sensor 228g1) and the number of game balls provided on the upper surface of the door 65f1 By calculating the difference from the number of game balls discharged from the flow path (the number of game balls detected by the passage detection sensor 228g2), the number of game balls passing through the upper surface of the door 65f1 is calculated. , So that it can be grasped more accurately.

  As shown in FIG. 81, in the right variable winning device 65 in the sixth embodiment, the flow of the game ball is prevented (the period required for the game ball to decelerate and pass the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1). In addition to the convex portions 65f1a to 65f1c on the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1, convex portions 65f1d and 65f1e capable of preventing the flow of game balls are provided on the left and right sides of the opening and closing door 65f1. ing. The convex portion 65f1d allows the game ball flowing down from the right side of the right variable winning device 65 to flow into the flow path on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 from the front side of the upper surface of the right variable winning device 65 in front view. Further, by the convex portion 65f1e, when discharging from the flow path provided on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1, the discharging position can be limited to the near side in front view of the right variable winning device 65. The flow paths through which the game balls on the entrance side (right side in front view) and the exit side (left side in front view) of the flow path on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 can pass (the range not blocked by the convex portions 65f1d and 65f1e) are provided. The width is such that only one game ball can pass (the width of 1.5 game balls), and pass detection sensors 228g1 and 228g2 are disposed at the center thereof. Passage detection provided on one entrance side and one exit side is achieved by narrowing the flow path on the entrance side and the exit side (the width of 1.5 game balls) as compared with the above embodiments. By the sensors 228g1 and 228g2, a game ball flowing into the flow path on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 and a game ball flowing out of the flow path can be detected more reliably. Therefore, the number of game balls passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 can be grasped more accurately.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84, a description will be given of a right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect that may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the execution of the variable display effect in the sixth embodiment. Do. This right-handed expectation suggestion effect is an effect that may be executed as a part of the fluctuation display effect that evolves into super reach or special reach, and when a game ball is fired toward the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. This is a production to suggest the degree of expectation of whether or not it is advantageous to the player. That is, when more game balls reach the flow path on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 during the fluctuation display, the right specific winning opening 65a is opened to indicate the degree of expectation of whether or not an over-winning will occur. It is a production.

  FIG. 82A is a diagram illustrating a display mode during super reach in which a right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect is set. As described above, in the sixth embodiment, a right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect is executed in a part of the case where the game has developed into a super reach effect or a special reach effect. In this right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 82 (a), an image of an adventurer character holding a sword and a shield and an enemy monster glaring is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Displayed on the display screen. In addition, a display area HR4 in which the character “Defeat the enemy!” Is displayed on the upper side of the display screen, and a third symbol that is changing in the reach state is reduced and displayed on the right side of the display area HR4. Is done. With these display contents, it is possible to make the player understand that if the adventurer can defeat the enemy monster, it will be a big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 82A, the torso of the monster has a cross-shaped cross. Further, a decoration imitating a scratch on the torso of the monster is provided on the front side of the right variable winning device 65 in the sixth embodiment in a front view. Thereby, it is possible to give the player an impression that the wound of the monster is related to the right variable winning device 65. In addition, although the details will be described later, in the sixth embodiment, an effect is performed in which the adventurer performs an attack aiming at the wound of the monster. In accordance with this, as a player participation type effect, an effect of firing a game ball aiming at the right variable winning device 65 provided with a decoration imitating a scar of a monster is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 82 (b), in the right-handed expected degree suggestion effect, after the image in which the adventurer and the monster glare is displayed, the upper part of the abdomen of the monster is zoomed up and displayed, and the image of the monster is displayed. A display area HR5 displaying a physical strength gauge LG indicating the remaining physical strength of the monster is formed on the right side of. With these display contents, the remaining physical strength of the monster can be visually and easily understood by the player.

  On the left side of the monster, an image of an arrow pointing to the wound of the monster is displayed, and in the display area HR4, a character saying “Aim for the wound!” And an image imitating the scratch are displayed. Is displayed. Further, the vicinity of the decorative part simulating a flaw in the right variable winning device 65 emits a color in accordance with the degree of expectation of the present effect. It is suggested to the player that the game contents are fired by aiming at the right variable winning device 65 provided with a decoration imitating a scratch by the effect contents, thereby possibly causing an over-winning. Can be.

  The right variable winning device 65 according to the sixth embodiment incorporates light emitting diodes (LEDs) of a plurality of kinds of luminescent colors in order to emit light in the vicinity of a decorative part imitating a flaw. That is, a white LED, a blue LED, a green LED, and a red LED are built in. Although details will be described later, in the sixth embodiment, white light emission color has the lowest expectation, blue has higher expectation than white, green has higher expectation than blue, and red has the highest expectation. Is configured to be higher. Thereby, it becomes advantageous when the game ball is fired on the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 using the emission color of the right variable winning device 65 as a clue (whether the right specific winning opening 65a is opened and an over winning occurs). I can make you guess. Therefore, it is possible to play the game by paying more attention to the content of the right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect.

  FIG. 83 (a) shows a display mode in a case where the player fires a game ball aiming at the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 by right-handing in a right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect. As shown in FIG. 83 (a), after the display content (see FIG. 82 (b)) suggesting that an attack should be made aiming at a monster's wound in the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect, the game ball is displayed. Each time passes through the passage detection sensor 228g1, an effect is executed in which the adventurer attacks the wound of the monster, thereby reducing the monster's physical strength gauge LG by one gauge. By performing the effect of reducing this gauge, it is possible to make the player think that it is easier to beat the monster if right-handed, so that the game ball can be positively right-handed . Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect.

  In the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect according to the sixth embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the gauge number of the physical strength gauge LG can be reduced to 0, while the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order. In such a case, the configuration is such that only the remaining one gauge is reduced (the number of gauges does not become zero). This allows the player who wants to know the result of the special symbol lottery before the third symbol is stopped and displayed to more positively fire the game ball toward the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. Can be. Thereby, the player's willingness to participate in the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect can be further improved.

  FIG. 83 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the time of stoppage of fluctuation in a case where a fluctuation display in which a special symbol lottery results in a jackpot and a right-turning expectation degree suggestion effect is set and executed. As shown in FIG. 83 (b), when the big hit is notified, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the display area HR3 in a state where the same numerals are aligned. In addition to this, an effect is performed in which the monster falls down due to the attack of the adventurer and the gauge number of the physical strength gauge is reduced to zero. In addition, the word “WIN” is displayed in the display area HR4. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the big hit has occurred.

  Further, these display contents are continuously displayed during the opening period. As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the opening period is configured to be as short as 0.5 second. Therefore, by performing the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect until the opening period, the effect is prevented from becoming unnatural by performing the effect for only 0.5 seconds. At the end of the opening period, the right specific winning opening 65a is opened. Therefore, when the player makes a right-hand during the execution of the right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect and the game ball reaches the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. Enters the right specific winning opening 65a in which the game ball is opened.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 84, a temporal change in the display mode before and after the variable display effect in which the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect is set in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 84 (a) is a diagram showing a temporal change of a display mode when a right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect is executed in a variable display effect in a case where a jackpot has been won in a special symbol lottery. FIG. 84 (a) illustrates an example in which a super reach having a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is selected as a fluctuation type. As shown in FIG. 84 (a), when the variable display corresponding to the big hit is started, first, the normal variable display is started, and the variable display of the third symbol constituting each symbol row is started. Then, when 10 seconds have elapsed since the start of the fluctuation display of the third symbol, a reach state occurs. That is, the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed in the third symbol with the same number, and only the middle symbol row Z2 is variably displayed.

  When 20 seconds elapse after the occurrence of the reach state, the game develops into a super reach and a right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect (see FIG. 82 (a)) is started. Then, if 26 seconds have elapsed since the start of the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect (that is, when the remaining time is 4 seconds until the end of the change), the character "Aim for a wound !!" is displayed in the display area HR4. (See FIG. 82 (b)). In this effect, as described above, the emission color of the right variable winning device 65 indicates a degree of expectation as to whether or not it is advantageous when right-handed. Shooting about 7 game balls by right-handing for 4.5 seconds, the remaining 4 seconds before the fluctuation time ends and 0.5 seconds of the jackpot opening period Therefore, at the start of one round, about seven game balls can be entered almost simultaneously. In the following description, the effect of notifying the degree of expectation as to whether or not it is advantageous when right-handing is performed by the emission color of the right variable winning device 65 (the character "Aim at the scratch!" Is displayed as an “expectation degree notification effect”.

  Actually, in most cases, firing is started after confirming the emission color and judging whether or not the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened. The number decreases. If a game ball is fired in the off state, all the game balls fired are wasted (almost all game balls are ejected from the out port 66). This is because if a game is performed by the game method to be performed, the game is spoiled. Therefore, each time an effect (expected degree notification effect) in which the character "Aim for a wound!" Is displayed for the player, it is accurately determined whether or not the right specific winning opening 65a is opened. If it is determined that the game will be released, it is possible to promptly start a right-handed game and make the player play the game. Accordingly, the player's willingness to participate in the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect can be improved, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  After 0.5 seconds of the opening period of the jackpot, the first round of the jackpot is started, the right specific winning opening 65a is opened, and an effect indicating that the jackpot has been started (an effect equivalent to an opening effect). Is executed over a round period of one round and an interval period after one round is completed. Then, when the second round of the jackpot is started, a jackpot effect in a normal mode is executed. Compared to the case where the opening effect is performed during 0.5 seconds of the actual opening period, by configuring the effect corresponding to the opening effect over the period until the second round of the jackpot starts Then, it can be notified by the effect that the jackpot has been started for a sufficiently long time. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more surely recognize that the big hit has started.

  FIG. 84 (b) is a diagram showing the temporal change of the display mode when the fluctuation type of super-reach out of 60.5 seconds is determined as the fluctuation pattern and the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect is set. is there. As shown in FIG. 84 (b), the temporal change of the effect mode in the case of the departure is exactly the same as the case of the big hit at least until the expectation degree notification effect occurs. On the other hand, as described above, the selectivity of the luminescent color of the decorative portion of the right variable winning device 65 is different from that in the case of the big hit. Therefore, when the expected degree notification effect occurs, it is determined whether to start right-handing depending on whether the luminous color selected at the jackpot is a high luminous color or the luminous color selected at the outside is a high luminous color. The player can be judged.

  As shown in FIG. 84 (b), when 60 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, it is notified that the monster could not be defeated by the attack of the adventurer, and the combination of the third symbol corresponding to the departure is stopped. A message is displayed to inform the user of the disconnection. Thereby, the player can easily understand that the result of the lottery of the special symbol is out of this time. The notification of the detachment (stop display of the combination of the third symbols corresponding to the detachment) continues for 0.5 seconds. In the case of a big hit, the fluctuation time is longer by 0.5 seconds in the case of the deviation, as described above, the right-handed expectation degree is indicated by using the 0.5-second opening period of the big hit as described above. This is for performing the effect. In other words, even in the case of departure, by setting the same effect time as in the case of the big hit, the effect mode up to the lapse of 60 seconds at which the final result is notified can be shared. Therefore, the effect can be executed using the common data, so that it is possible to reduce the amount of data for executing the right-handed expectation degree indicating effect.

  As described above, in the sixth embodiment, when the right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect is set, the effect having the same aspect except for the selectivity of the luminescent color of the decorative portion of the right variable winning device 65 ends, and the effect ends. Continue until 0.5 seconds ago. This allows the player to determine whether it is better to make a right-handed shot based on the emission color of the right variable winning device 65.

  As described above, in the sixth embodiment, each time a game ball passes the passage detection sensor 228g1 after the occurrence of the expected degree notification effect, the gauge number of the physical strength gauge LG indicating the physical strength of the monster is increased by one. It is displayed decreasing. Then, when a big hit occurs (the right specific winning opening 65a is opened), the physical strength gauge LG decreases to 0, and when it is off, the physical strength gauge LG decreases only to 1. Therefore, if the player keeps right-handing, it may be possible to quickly detect whether or not a big hit will occur. Since the initial value of the gauge of the physical strength gauge LG is 5, by making five game balls reach the passage detection sensor 228g1, it is possible to detect whether or not it is a big hit. That is, if the number of gauges decreases to 0, it can be determined that there is a jackpot, while if the number of gauges does not decrease from 1, it can be determined that the number is out of range. However, it takes at least three seconds to fire five game balls. It takes about one second for the launched game ball to reach the passage detection sensor 228g1. Therefore, even if the game balls are fired after confirming the emission color of the right variable winning device 65, it becomes difficult to pass five game balls through the passage detection sensor 228g1. For this reason, it is possible to cause a player who wants to detect the jackpot as soon as possible to fire the game ball before the expected degree notification effect is generated. In other words, depending on the taste of each player, it is possible to determine whether or not a big hit is achieved as soon as possible, and to determine whether or not to make a right hit by estimating whether or not a big hit is from the emission color of the right variable winning device 65. The player can select the game property to be determined. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game characteristic adapted to the taste of each player, and it is possible to further enhance the interest of the player in the game.

  In the sixth embodiment, when the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect is set in the variable display effect corresponding to the jackpot, when five or more game balls pass through the passage detection sensor 228g1, the physical strength gauge LG Is always reduced to 0, but is not limited to this. For example, in the case of a big hit, the gauge number of the physical strength gauge LG can be reduced to 0 at a predetermined rate (for example, a rate of 50%), and in other cases, it is reduced only until the gauge number becomes 1. May be configured. With such a configuration, even if the number of gauges decreases only to 1, the expectation of the jackpot can be maintained.

<Electrical Configuration in Sixth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86, the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 according to the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 85A is a block diagram showing a configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. 85A, the ROM 222 in the sixth embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the fifth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. The difference is that 222b is added. The other configuration is the same as that of the above-described fifth embodiment, and thus the detailed description is omitted.

  The effect mode selection table 222b is a data table that is referred to when selecting an effect mode to be executed in the variable display effect. The effect mode selection table 222b defines a plurality of effect modes including the above-described right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect, and determines a mode corresponding to a value of an effect lottery counter 223j described later at the start of the variable display effect. Is done. Details of the effect mode selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 86 is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the effect mode selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 86, the effect mode selection table 222b defines, for each change type, an effect mode that can be selected and a range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223j in association with each other. Specifically, for the fluctuation type “hit special reach”, the normal effect is defined as the effect type in association with the value range of the effect lottery counter 223j “0 to 39” (222b1 in FIG. 86). reference). The normal effect is a general term for an effect mode in which it becomes difficult to understand whether or not it is advantageous when right-handed is performed until immediately before the fluctuation stop. More specifically, in the case of a jackpot and in the case of a jackpot, it is determined whether or not a jackpot is determined from the staging mode, except for whether or not a third symbol with the same number is provided at the end of the change. Is an effect of an aspect in which it becomes difficult. When this normal effect is executed, it cannot be determined whether or not a big hit has occurred until the stop of the third symbol. Therefore, even if the player senses a big hit and starts right-handing, the first round is started before more than two game balls reach the upper surface of the door 65f1. Therefore, when the normal effect is selected, it is difficult to make an over prize in the first round.

  Of the 100 possible values of “0-99” that can be taken by the value of the effect lottery counter 223j, the counter value associated with “normal effect” is 40, so when the variation type of the winning special reach is determined In addition, the ratio at which the normal effect is determined as the effect mode is 40% (40/100).

  On the other hand, for the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223j “40 to 99”, a right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect is defined as an effect mode (see 222b2 to 222b5 in FIG. 86). Of these, a right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect in which an expectation notification effect of an aspect in which “white” is set as the emission color of the right variable winning device 65 is defined in a range of “40 to 49”. (Refer to 222b2 in FIG. 86), the mode in which “blue” is set as the emission color is defined in association with the range of “50 to 74” (see 222b3 in FIG. 86), and the range of “75 to 90” Is associated with a mode in which “green” is set as the emission color (see 222 b 4 in FIG. 86), and an aspect in which “red” is set as the emission color in the range of “90 to 99”. It is defined in association (see 222b5 in FIG. 86).

  Of the 100 possible values of the effect lottery counter 223j, the counter values whose emission colors are associated with “white”, “blue”, “green”, and “red” are 10, 25, respectively. Since there are fifteen and ten, the proportions at which the respective emission colors are determined are 10% (10/100), 25% (25/100), 15% (15/100), and 10% (10/100), respectively. is there.

  Further, for the variation type “winning super reach”, the normal effect is defined as the effect type in association with the value range of the effect lottery counter 223j “0 to 74” (see 222b6 in FIG. 86). Of the 100 possible values of the effect lottery counter 223j, the counter value associated with “normal effect” is 75, so if the fluctuation type of the winning super reach is determined, the effect mode is usually The rate at which the effect is determined is 75% (75/100).

  On the other hand, for the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223j of “75 to 99”, a right-handing expectation degree suggesting effect is defined in association with the effect mode (see 222b7 and 222b8 in FIG. 86). Among them, “white” is defined as the emission color of the right variable prize device 65 in the expectation notification effect in the range of “75 to 94” (see 222 b 7 in FIG. 86), and “95 to 99” A mode in which “red” is set as the emission color is defined in association with the range (see 222b8 in FIG. 86). Out of the 100 possible values of the effect lottery counter 223j, the emission colors are determined to be “white” and “red”, respectively, and the counter values are respectively 20 and 5, so each emission color is determined. The proportions are 20% (20/100) and 5% (5/100), respectively.

  In addition, for the variation type “out of special reach”, the normal effect is defined as the effect type in association with the value range of the effect lottery counter 223j “0 to 89” (see 222b9 in FIG. 86). Of the 100 possible values of the effect lottery counter 223j, the counter value associated with the "normal effect" is 90, so if the variation type of the out-of-special reach is determined, the effect mode is normally The effect is determined at a rate of 90% (90/100).

  On the other hand, for the value range of the effect lottery counter 223j of “90 to 99”, a right-turning expectation degree suggesting effect is defined in association with the effect mode (see 222b10 to 222b12 in FIG. 86). Of these, “white” is defined as the emission color of the right variable winning device 65 in the expectation notification effect in the range of “90 to 96” (see 222b10 in FIG. 86), and “97, 98” A mode in which “blue” is set as the emission color is defined in association with the range (see 222b11 in FIG. 86), and a mode in which “green” is set as the emission color corresponds to “99”. (See 222b12 in FIG. 86). Of the 100 possible values of the effect lottery counter 223j, there are seven, two, and one counter values associated with the emission colors of "white", "blue", and "green", respectively. The ratio at which each emission color is determined is 7% (7/100), 2% (2/100), and 1% (1/100), respectively.

  That is, when the hit special reach is compared with the off-special reach, the hit special reach has a higher rate of selecting the right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect (the rate of selecting the normal effect is lower). Therefore, when the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the jackpot. In addition, in the hit special reach, the determination ratio of the “white” and “blue” emission colors in the case where the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect is determined is lower than that in the off-special reach, while the “green” The emission color determination ratio is increased. Also, only in the case of the hit special reach, the emission color of “red” may be determined. Therefore, when the emission color becomes “green”, it is possible to make the player think that right-handing is more likely to be advantageous. In addition, when it becomes “red”, the player can be notified that the right specific winning opening 65a is opened.

  Further, for the variation type “out of super reach”, the normal effect is defined as the effect type in association with the value range of the effect lottery counter 223j “0 to 94” (see 222b13 in FIG. 86). Of the 100 possible values of the effect lottery counter 223j, the counter value associated with the “normal effect” is 95, so when the variation type of the out-of-reach super reach is determined, the effect mode is usually The rate at which the effect is determined is 95% (95/100).

  On the other hand, for the value range of the effect lottery counter 223j of “95 to 99”, an expectation notification effect corresponding to the emission color of “white” is defined in association with the effect mode (222b14 in FIG. 86). reference). Of the 100 possible values of the effect lottery counter 223j, there are five counter values that are associated with the expected degree notification effect in which the luminescent color is “white”, so the expected value notification in which the luminescent color is “white” is provided. The rate at which the effect is determined is 5% (5/100).

  That is, when the hit superreach is compared with the out-of-range superreach, the hit superreach has a higher rate of selecting the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect (the rate of selecting the normal effect is lower). Therefore, when the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the jackpot. Further, in the hit superreach, the determination ratio of the “white” emission color in the case where the right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect is determined is lower than in the off-superreach. Also, only in the case of the hit special reach, the emission color of “red” may be determined. Therefore, when the emission color becomes “white”, it is possible to make the player guess whether right-handing is advantageous or not. In addition, when it becomes “red”, the player can be notified that the right specific winning opening 65a is opened.

  In addition, the fluctuation types other than the "Variation Special Reach", "Variation Super Reach", "Missing Special Reach", and "Missing Super Reach" ")," Normal effect "is defined in association with all possible value ranges of the effect lottery counter 223j (see 222b15 in FIG. 86). Therefore, when the variation type is “hit normal reach”, “outside normal reach”, “outside long”, or “outside short”, the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect is not executed.

  As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the ratio of determining the right-handed expectation suggestion effect and the ratio of selecting each emission color in the expectation notification effect in the right-handed expectation effect effect are determined according to the variation type. And make them different. This allows the player to determine whether it is better to perform right-handing based on the emission color of the right variable winning device 65 when the expected degree notification effect is executed. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, a configuration of the RAM 223 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 85 (b), the RAM 223 in the sixth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 14 (b)) in that an effect lottery counter 223j, a passing number counter 223k 223m, a physical strength gauge counter 223n, a notification standby flag 223p, and a notification type storage area 223q.

  The effect lottery counter 223j is a counter used to select the mode of the variable display effect from the above-described effect mode selection table 222b (see FIG. 86), and the value is updated in the range of “0 to 99”. At the start of the change, the effect mode corresponding to the value of the effect lottery counter 223j is selected from the effect mode selection table 222b.

  The passing number counter 223k is a counter for counting the number of game balls passing on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. The value of the passing number counter 223k is set to 1 each time the passing of the game ball is detected (the output becomes H) by the passing detecting sensor 228g1 provided on the upstream side among the passing detecting sensors 228g1 and 228g2. Is incremented by one. That is, one is added each time a game ball flows into the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. Further, the value of the passing number counter 223k is incremented by 1 each time the passing of the game ball is detected (the output becomes H) by the passing detection sensor 228g2 provided on the downstream side. That is, each time a game ball flows out of the flow path on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1, it is decremented by one.

  The notification effect flag 223m indicates whether or not an effect information notification effect (an effect for notifying the degree of expectation as to whether it is advantageous when right-handed by the emission color of the right variable prize device 65) is being performed. Is a flag that indicates If the notification effect flag 223m is on, it indicates that the expectation information effect is being executed. If it is off, it indicates that the expectation information effect is not being executed. The notification effect flag 223m is turned on when the start of the expectation notification effect is set (see S4708 in FIG. 88), and is set off when the big hit is started.

  The physical strength gauge counter 223n is a counter that indicates the number of physical strength gauges LG displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the execution of the expected degree notification effect. As the counter value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n, a value obtained by subtracting the value of the passing number counter 223k from the maximum value of the physical strength gauge number “5” is set as an initial value at the start of the expected degree notification effect (FIG. 88). S4706). Thus, if the game ball is hit right before the expectation notification effect is started, and a plurality of game balls are passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 at the start of the expectation notification effect, the expected During the execution of the degree notification effect, it is possible to shorten the period required until the number of gauges of the physical strength gauge counter LG is completely reduced. Therefore, it is possible for a player who wants to know whether or not a jackpot is to be obtained as soon as possible to hit the game ball right before the expectation degree notification effect is started. When the value of the passing number counter 223k is 4 or more at the start of the expected degree notification effect, the value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n is uniformly set to 1 regardless of the value of the passing number counter 223k (FIG. 88). S4705). That is, even in the case of the big hit, the gauge number of the physical strength gauge LG does not become 0 immediately after the start of the expected degree notification effect. Therefore, it is possible to make the player determine whether it is better to start right-handing based on the emission color of the right variable winning device 65 as a clue. The physical strength gauge counter 223n detects the passage of the game ball by the upstream passage detection sensor 228g1 until the lower limit value set for each special symbol lottery result (0 for a big hit, 1 for a loss). Each time it is performed, the value is updated by subtracting 1 (see S4217 in FIG. 87).

  The notification standby flag 223p is a flag indicating whether or not the variable display effect in which the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect is set is being executed and the start timing of the expectation degree notification effect has not been reached. This notification waiting flag 223p is set to ON when execution of the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect is determined (see S4805 in FIG. 90), and is set to OFF when start of the expectation degree notification effect is set. (See S4708 in FIG. 88).

  The notification type storage area 223q is a storage area for storing data indicating the type of the expectation notification effect (the light emission color of the right variable winning device 65) executed in the right-handed expectation effect suggestion effect. When the type of the expected degree notification effect is determined with reference to the effect mode selection table 222b at the start of the change, data corresponding to the determined type is stored in the notification type storage area 223q (FIG. 90). See S4804). Note that the notification type storage area 223q is formed of, for example, a 1-byte storage area. If “01H” is stored, the notification type storage area 223q indicates an expectation notification effect in which the emission color “white” is set, and “02H” is stored. If it is set, the expected color notification effect in which the luminescent color “blue” is set is indicated. If “03H” is stored, the expected color information effect in which the luminescent color “green” is set, and “04H” is stored. If so, an emission degree notification effect in which the emission color “red” is set is shown. On the other hand, when “00H” is stored, it indicates that the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect is not set.

<Control Processing of Voice Lamp Control Device in Sixth Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the effect update processing 6 (S4121) in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This effect update process 6 (S4121) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 34) instead of the effect update process (see FIG. 35), and is for updating the effect mode according to the game situation. This is the process.

  In the effect update processing 6 (see FIG. 87), first, the output of the passage detection sensor 228g1 arranged on the upstream side of the upper surface of the right variable winning device 65 (the inlet side of the flow path on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1) is set to H. (S4211), and if it is determined that the output is H (S4211: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the passing number counter 223k and updated (S4212). Next, it is determined whether the notification effect flag 223m is on (S4213). If it is determined that the notification effect flag 223m is on (S4213: Yes), the state of the physical strength gauge LG is updated. After performing the processing for performing the processing (S4214 to S4218), the processing proceeds to S4219. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S4211 that the output of the passage detection sensor 228g1 is L (S4211: No), and when it is determined that the notification effect flag 223m is off in the processing of S4213 (S4213: No). Since there is no possibility of changing the display mode of the physical strength gauge LG, the processing of S4214 to S4218 for updating the mode of the physical strength gauge LG is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4219.

  Here, a process for updating the state of the physical strength gauge LG will be described in detail. In the processing for updating the physical strength gauge LG, first, it is determined whether or not the current special symbol lottery is a big hit (S4214). If it is determined that the current special symbol lottery result is a big hit ( S4214: Yes) Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n is 1 or more (S4215). That is, it is determined whether or not the gauge number of the physical strength gauge LG has reached the lower limit (0) of the hit, and if the value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n is 1 or more (the gauge number has not reached the lower limit). When it is determined (S4215: Yes), the value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n is updated by subtracting 1 from the value (S4217), and the display mode of the physical strength gauge LG is changed to the gauge number corresponding to the updated value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n. (S4218), and the process moves to S4219. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4215 that the value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n is 0 (the gauge number has reached the lower limit) (S4215: No), it is not necessary to update the display mode of the physical strength gauge LG. , S4217, and S4218 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S4219.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S4214, when it is determined that the current lottery result of the special symbol is out of place (not a big hit) (S4214: No), the value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n is 2 or more. It is determined whether or not this is the case (S4216). In other words, it is determined whether or not the lower limit value (1) of the number of physical strength gauges LG in the case of deviation is reached (S4216), and the value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n is 2 or more (the number of gauges has reached the lower limit value). If it is determined that there is no (S4216: Yes), each processing of S4217 and S4218 for updating the value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n and the display mode of the physical strength gauge LG is executed, and the processing shifts to S4219. . On the other hand, in the process of S4216, when it is determined that the value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n is 1 (the lower limit of the number of gauges in the case of deviation) (S4216: No), the display mode of the physical strength gauge LG is updated. Since there is no need, each process of S4217 and S4218 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4219.

  In the processing of S4219, it is determined whether or not the output of the passage detection sensor 228g2 provided on the downstream side of the upper surface of the right variable winning device 65 (the outlet side of the flow path on the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1) is H (high). (S4219), if it is determined that the output is H (the game ball has passed) (S4219: Yes), the value of the passing number counter 223k is decremented by 1 and updated (S4220), and the process proceeds to S4221. Transition. On the other hand, in the process of S4219, when it is determined that the output of the passage detection sensor 228g2 is L (the passage of the game ball is not detected) (S4219: No), the process of S4220 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4221. Move to.

  In the process of S4221, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the expectation notification effect, and when the start timing is reached, a notification start determination process for executing the expectation notification effect is performed (S4221), and the present process is performed. To end. Details of the notification start determination processing (S4221) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the above-described notification start determination processing (S4221). In the notification start determination process (S4221), first, it is determined whether the notification standby flag 223p is on (S4701). If it is determined that the notification standby flag 223p is off (S4701: No), the right-turn expectation degree suggestion effect is executed. It is not in the middle, or the right-handed expectation suggestion effect is being executed, but it means that the expectation information effect has already been started, and there is no possibility of starting the execution of the expectation information effect. This processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4701, when it is determined that the notification standby flag 223p is on (S4701: Yes), it is then determined whether it is the start timing of the expectation notification effect (S4702), and the expectation notification effect is started. If it is determined that it is not the start timing (S4702: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4702 that the start timing of the expected degree notification effect has come (S4702: Yes), the value of the passing number counter 223k is read (S4703), and the read counter value is 4 or more. It is determined whether or not this is the case (S4704).

  In the process of S4704, when it is determined that the value of the passing number counter 223k is 4 or more, 1 is set to the value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n (S4705), and the process proceeds to S4707. On the other hand, in the process of S4704, when it is determined that the value of the passing number counter 223k is less than 4, the value obtained by subtracting the value of the passing number counter 223k from the maximum value of the gauge number of 5 is the value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n. (S4706), and the process moves to S4707. As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the initial value of the number of physical strength gauges LG at the start of the expected degree notification effect is set to the value of the passing number counter 223k (the number of game balls passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1). ). With this, for the player who wants to know whether or not the jackpot will be hit as soon as possible, right-handed more game balls are provided on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 before the expectation notification effect is started. You can make them think you want to reach them.

  In the processing of S4707, the start of the expected degree notification effect is set in a manner according to the data stored in the notification type storage area 223q and the value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n set in the processing of S4705 or S4706. (S4707). Specifically, the right variable winning device 65 is caused to emit light with a light emission color corresponding to the data stored in the notification type storage area 223q, and the gauge number corresponding to the counter value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n is determined by the physical strength gauge LG. Set as display mode. Next, the notification standby flag 223p is set to off, and the notification effect flag 223m is set to on (S4708), and the process ends.

  By executing the notification start determination process (see FIG. 88), it is possible to accurately execute the expected degree notification effect of the mode selected from the effect mode selection table 222b.

  Next, the variable display setting process 6 (S4122) in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This variable display setting process 6 (S4122) is a process executed in place of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 38). In the variable display setting processing 6 (S4122) in the sixth embodiment, in each of the processing of S4501 to S4509, the same processing as each of the processing of S4501 to S4509 in the variable display setting processing (see FIG. 38) is executed. .

  Further, in the variation display setting process 6 (see FIG. 89) in the sixth embodiment, when the process of S4503 is completed, the production mode of the mode corresponding to the variation pattern (variation type) extracted in the process of S4503 is selected. An effect mode selection process for determining from the table 222b is executed (S4511), and the process shifts to S4504. Details of the effect mode selection process (S4511) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the rendering mode selection process (S4511). In the effect mode selection process (S4511), first, the effect mode selection table 222b and the value of the effect lottery counter 223j are read (S4801), and the main control device 110 is read from the read effect mode selection table 222b by a variation pattern command. An effect mode corresponding to the variation type notified from and the value of the effect lottery counter 223j is specified (S4802).

  Next, it is determined whether the specified presentation mode is a presentation mode corresponding to the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect (S4803). : No), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4803, when a mode accompanied by a right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect is specified, data corresponding to the current effect mode (light emission color of the right variable winning device 65) is stored in the notification type storage area 223q. Then, the notification standby flag 223p is set to ON (S4805), and the process ends.

  By executing the effect mode selection process (see FIG. 89), it is possible to select the effect mode of the expected degree notification effect from the effect mode selection table 222b at a rate corresponding to the variation type. Is executed, it can be inferred from the emission color of the right variable winning device 65 whether or not it is advantageous to perform right-handing, and the player can determine whether to start right-handing.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment has a configuration in which 0.5 seconds is set as the jackpot opening period regardless of the jackpot type. That is, as long as the game balls are not fired toward the right variable winning device 65 before the jackpot is started, at the start of the first round of the jackpot, the number of the game balls exceeding the specified number (two) is increased. The configuration is such that it is impossible to make the passage on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 pass through. Then, in a part of the variable display effect for notifying the jackpot and a part of the variable display effect for notifying the departure, an expected degree notification effect for notifying the expected degree of opening the right specific winning opening 65a. Is configured to be executable. This allows the player to determine whether or not to start right-handing during the execution of the variable display effect (prior to the notification of the special symbol lottery result) from the content of the expected degree notification effect. If a right-handed start is started during the execution of the fluctuation display and the right specific winning opening 65a is opened as intended by the player, an over-winning can be generated, so that the player can be satisfied. In addition, if the right specific winning opening 65a is kept closed as intended by the player without performing the right-handing during the execution of the fluctuation display (if the special winning pattern is removed by lottery of special symbols), the right useless This gives a sense of relief that the player has avoided hitting and consuming the ball. On the other hand, when a result contrary to the player's aim is obtained (when the right specific winning opening 65a is not opened after right-handed, and when the right specific winning opening 65a is opened without right-handed). ), It is possible to give a sense of purpose that the next expectation degree information production will want to predict whether right-handing is better. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Further, in the sixth embodiment, the opening period is made common regardless of the type of the jackpot, and the control of the sound lamp control device 113 informs the player whether it is better to make a right-hand during the execution of the variable display. By making a configuration to make a determination, the degree of advantage in the first round (the number of gaming balls that win the right specific winning opening 65a) differs for each big hit. Thus, unlike the above-described fifth embodiment, the main controller 110 does not need to provide the period length selection table 202e (see FIG. 76 (c)) that defines the correspondence between the jackpot type and the closing period. , The capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced. Also, the control processing for selecting the opening period is simply processing for setting a common period, so that the processing load on the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 needs to perform main control related to the game, such as a jackpot lottery and a change display of the first symbol, so that various main controls can be performed by reducing the processing load. It can be executed reliably.

  Note that, in the sixth embodiment, as the expected degree notification effect, the expected degree of whether or not it is more advantageous to perform right-handing based on the emission color of the right variable winning device 65 is described. It is not something that can be done. Alternatively or additionally, the degree of expectation may be indicated by, for example, changing the color or aspect of the monster displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or the degree of expectation may be determined depending on the content of the attack by the adventurer. May be notified. Further, instead of or in addition to the emission color of the right variable winning device 65 and the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, the configuration may be such that the degree of expectation is notified by changing the music and the sound effect.

  In the sixth embodiment, the opening periods of all jackpot types are unified to 0.5 seconds, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, similarly to the above-described fifth embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the opening period is changed according to the type of jackpot, and a part of a case where the opening period becomes a short jackpot (and a case where the jackpot is removed by a special symbol lottery). Thus, the configuration may be such that the expected degree notification effect is executed during the execution of the variable display. Thereby, when the jackpot type becomes a long one during the opening period, it is possible to make a right-handed operation with a sense of security after the jackpot is notified. In addition, when the expected degree notification effect is executed, the player determines whether it is better to start right-handing during the execution of the variable display based on the notification content (the emission color of the right variable winning device 65). It is possible to provide a playability.

  In the sixth embodiment, in the expectation degree informing effect, a decoration that imitates a flaw is given to the right variable winning device 65, and then a display that prompts the user to aim for the flaw is performed on the third symbol display device 81. Although the configuration has been indirectly suggested to the player as right-handed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the expectation degree notification effect, it may be configured to clearly notify right-handed. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily understand that there is a possibility that performing a right-hand operation on the player may be advantageous (over-winning may occur).

  In the sixth embodiment, the right-handed operation is performed during the execution of the variable display by executing the expected-information notification effect of notifying the expected degree of whether or not it is advantageous to the player when the right-hand operation is performed. Although it is configured to judge whether or not it is better, the expected degree informing effect is not necessarily limited to the right variable prize device 65 (a plurality of games at a position where a prize is possible when the right specific prize port 65a is opened) in the present embodiment. It does not need to be combined with a variable winning device having a structure capable of holding a ball. For example, the expected degree notification effect is applied to a pachinko machine 10 provided with only a variable winning device capable of winning only a game ball launched after being opened, such as a left variable winning device 650. Is also good. In other words, the expectation degree notification effect may be configured to be executed simply as an effect of notifying the degree of expectation as to whether or not a big hit will occur after the end of the change.

  In the sixth embodiment, the expected degree notification effect is configured to be executable even when the special symbol lottery is lost. May be executed. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the timing of starting the expectation notification effect is varied. That is, in the sixth embodiment, the expectation degree notification effect is generated four seconds before the end of the fluctuation time. However, for example, the lottery is performed four seconds before, two seconds before, or one second before the lottery. It is good also as composition which an expectation degree information production produces. Further, in this case, for example, as the number of continuous variable displays corresponding to the departure increases, the rate of occurrence of the expected degree notification effect four or two seconds ago may be increased. In other words, as the number of consecutive misses increases, a right hit may be executed for a longer period of time during execution of the variable display, when a right hit expectation degree suggestion effect is selected. . With this configuration, the more times the variable display has been executed since the previous jackpot, the greater the number of prize balls in the first round when the jackpot is won. Then, the player can be made to think that the game is to be continued until the jackpot is reached. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. Further, for example, a configuration may be provided in which a device capable of measuring the time, such as RTC (Real-Time-Clock), is provided, and the timing at which the expected degree notification effect is likely to occur differs depending on the time zone. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player feel that he / she wants to play a game in a time zone where the expected degree notification effect is likely to occur 4 seconds or 2 seconds before the end of the fluctuation.

<Seventh embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described second embodiment, the operation winning prize opening (right operation prize opening 661 and the left operation prize opening 662) that triggers the start of the big hit is provided on the upper right side and the lower left side of the game board 13, respectively, according to the big hit type. Therefore, the winning prize opening that triggers the start of the jackpot is different. Further, when the jackpot is in the jackpot waiting state, the game ball enters the left operation winning port 662 almost automatically in a relatively short time (about 0.5 second). In other words, when the left operation winning port 662 becomes a left opportunity jackpot that triggers the start of the jackpot, the first round of the jackpot is started before the game ball reaches the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. On the other hand, when the right operation winning opening 661 becomes a right opportunity jackpot which triggers the start of the jackpot, a plurality of game balls reach the flow path on the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 during the jackpot waiting state, and then the right It was configured such that a player could aim for an over prize by causing a game ball to enter the activated prize port 661.

  On the other hand, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, even if the player wins the left-hand-hit jackpot, the game ball goes to the left-operation winning opening 662 unless the player makes a left-hand hit after the jackpot is in the jackpot waiting state. It is configured so that there is no possibility of entering the ball. Then, in the jackpot waiting state, the third symbol display device 81 performs an effect as if it were a normal gaming state. In other words, during the jackpot waiting state, the third symbol fluctuating display effect or the like is executed in a simulated manner, and it is as if the player has not shifted to the jackpot waiting state (whether or not the player is in the normal gaming state). It is configured so that left-handing can be continued by making a mistake. In other words, in the event of a left-hand-hit jackpot, by performing an effect that is difficult for the player to recognize that the player has entered the jackpot waiting state, the player can keep left-handed, and As soon as the player is conscious of trying to reach the game ball, the game ball is made to enter the left operation winning opening 662. Thus, in the case of a left opportunity big hit, the big hit can be started after the number of game balls exceeding the specified number (the upper limit number of the first round is two) reaches the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1. On the other hand, when it is difficult to hit the right opportunity big hit, the game ball is easily entered into the right operation winning opening 661 at the timing when more game balls reach the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1. Over winning can be generated. Therefore, similarly to the above-described second embodiment, the degree of advantage (the number of prize balls that can be obtained) in the first round can be made different between the left-hand-hit jackpot and the right-hand-hit jackpot. Can be done.

  The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment is different from the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed. The configuration of the RAM 223 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations and various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the second section. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 91, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment is different from the game board 13 in the second embodiment (see FIG. 54) in that the storage device 675 is omitted. ing. When the storage device 675 is deleted and the player wins the left-hand-hit jackpot and enters the jackpot-standby state, the game ball immediately enters the left-operation winning port 662 as in the above-described second embodiment. I will not do it. In other words, even in the case of a left-hit big hit, the big hit is not started unless the gaming ball is made to enter the operation winning opening 662 by left-handing in the big hit standby state. In the seventh embodiment, when a left-hand-operated jackpot occurs, the third symbol of the out-of-combination is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the normal game state is maintained even after shifting to the jackpot waiting state. In the same way as described above, the variable display is executed. Thereby, it is configured that it is difficult for the player to recognize that the jackpot is in the jackpot standby state, and the game ball enters the left activated winning opening 662 by continuing left hitting even after entering the jackpot standby state. It is configured as follows. Therefore, similar to the second embodiment, it is possible to generate an over prize at a right opportunity jackpot and to generate an over prize at the left opportunity jackpot. Can be provided. In addition, of the game balls fired by the left hit, the ratio of the game balls winning the left activated winning opening 662 is configured to be higher than the ratio of the game balls entering the first ball opening 64. . Thus, when the jackpot is in a jackpot waiting state with a left trigger jackpot, a game ball can be made to enter (win) the left-operation winning port 662 in a shorter period of time. Although illustration is omitted, the control processing for opening and closing the storage valve 675a of the storage device 675 is also deleted due to the deletion of the storage device 675.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 92, a description will be given of a temporal change in the effect mode from the start of the variable display to the start of the big hit in the case of a left opportunity big hit. FIG. 92 is a diagram exemplifying a case in which a change display effect corresponding to a left trigger jackpot (super-reach with a change time of 60 seconds) is executed in a state where two balls are reserved at the start of the change. . As shown in FIG. 92, when the change display corresponding to the left-hand-hit big hit is executed, it is simulated that the change has ended at the end of the change. That is, in the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a disengaged combination. At this time, the first symbol display device 37 stops and displays the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit. However, the third symbol display device 81 is larger than the first symbol display device 37 and is arranged at a position that is easy to see. Accordingly, since most players do not notice that the first symbol display device 37 has a winning stop symbol, a special symbol is displayed to the player who has confirmed the display content of the third symbol display device 81. It can be made to think that the lottery result has come off (it has not shifted to the jackpot waiting state).

  As shown in FIG. 92, when the variable display corresponding to the left opportunity big hit ends, the big hit standby state is started, and the pseudo symbol display is started on the third symbol display device 81. In other words, the fluctuating display corresponding to the two reserved balls held during the execution of the fluctuating display corresponding to the left trigger jackpot is simulated. In the pseudo fluctuation display, a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is set, and a stop symbol corresponding to complete departure is stopped and displayed at the end of the fluctuation. In order to execute the pseudo variable display, the display control device 114 prepares a display data table for the pseudo variable display. Further, when the pseudo fluctuation display is executed in the jackpot waiting state, the number of the retained ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also artificially reduced. As a result, it is possible to make the player feel as if the number of reserved balls is decreasing every two seconds, so that additional game balls are entered into the first entrance 64 and a lottery of a special symbol is executed. You can make them think. When the pseudo fluctuation display ends and there are no pseudo holding balls, a pseudo fluctuation stop state is set. This pseudo fluctuation stop state has exactly the same display mode as when the number of reserved balls has become 0 in the normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that the special symbol lottery will not be executed unless the player enters the game ball into the first entrance hole 64, so that the player can more positively perform the left hit. .

  Note that, in the present embodiment, similarly to the above-described second embodiment, only the first special symbol lottery is selected to win the left trigger jackpot. In other words, the situation of winning the left-hand-hit big hit is limited to a gaming state (a low probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol) in which a game is aimed at the first entrance 64. In this way, in the case of a pseudo fluctuation display effect or a pseudo fluctuation stop state, the direction in which the player fires the game ball in order to continue the game (to perform a special symbol lottery) is determined by the game board. 13 to the left. Therefore, in the simulated normal state, a player who attempts to continue the game can more reliably enter the game ball into the left-operation winning opening 662.

  In the jackpot waiting state, when the player continues to make a left hit, when a game ball enters the left-operation winning opening 662, an effect (blackout effect) in a special mode is executed. Although details will be described later, by executing the blackout effect that does not occur during the normal gaming state, the player can immediately understand that the jackpot is in the standby state and the jackpot is started. be able to. This blackout effect is executed for 0.1 second during the opening period, and after the effect ends, a normal jackpot effect is started.

  Note that if no winning in the left-hand operation winning opening 662 is detected even after three seconds have elapsed in the pseudo fluctuation stop state, the pseudo fluctuation stop state is ended and a standby state effect is produced (FIG. 7). See). The configuration in which the pseudo fluctuation stop state is ended in three seconds is that when the player decides to quit the game at the timing when the fluctuation stop state is reached, before the player leaves the platform, In fact, this is to make the player aware that the game is in the jackpot waiting state. That is, this is to prevent the player from leaving the seat in a state where the big hit has been determined, and to prevent another player from starting the game from the big hit standby state. This can prevent the player from quitting the game without noticing, despite having won the jackpot, and causing the player to be dissatisfied with the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 93, a description will be given of an effect state during a left opportunity big hit in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 93 (a) is a diagram showing a blackout effect performed in the opening period of the left momentary jackpot. As described above, in the seventh embodiment, when the player has won the jackpot at the left opportunity and transitioned to the jackpot standby state, the pseudo variation display and the pseudo variation stop state effect are executed, whereby the jackpot standby is performed. This makes it difficult for the player to recognize the state. During the execution of these simulated effects, the game ball wins to the left-operation winning opening 662, and when the big hit is started, the opening period is extremely short (0.1 second). There is no period for notifying the big hit by the effect such as stopping and displaying with. Therefore, in the seventh embodiment, the player can understand at a glance that a special effect has been performed, and the blackout effect shown in FIG. It is configured to execute. That is, when the game ball wins to the left operation winning opening 662 and the opening period of the left trigger jackpot is reached, the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81 suddenly darkens (blacks out). It is configured to be executed. The appearance of the pseudo fluctuation display or pseudo fluctuation stop state production that had been executed up to that point is a very different appearance, so that the player can instantly understand that the special production was performed. it can.

  After the blackout effect ends, the effect shown in FIG. 93 (b) indicating that the big hit has started is executed. That is, in the main display area Dm, the character “Big hit!” Is displayed, and the three symbols with the same number are stopped and displayed in a state where they are aligned. Further, in the small area Ds1, a display indicating the number of rounds (character "1 round") and a display indicating the number of paid out prize balls (character "0000 GET") are displayed. In addition, in the small area Ds3, a character “RIGHT RIGHT !!” and a figure of a right-pointing arrow for firing a game ball toward the right specific winning opening 65a are displayed. These display contents allow the player to immediately understand that the jackpot has already been started.

<Electrical Configuration in Seventh Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 according to the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 94 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 94, the RAM 223 of the seventh embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 of the second embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 14B) in that , A pseudo normal state flag 223s, a pseudo fluctuation state timer 223t, and a pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223u.

  The pseudo reserved ball number counter 223r is a counter that indicates the number of pseudo variable display reservations after winning in the left-hand-side big hit and entering the jackpot waiting state. In the jackpot waiting state, the pseudo fluctuation display is repeatedly executed while the value of the pseudo reserved ball number counter 223r is 1 or more (see S4907 in FIG. 96), and the value of the pseudo reserved ball number counter 223r becomes 0. When the pseudo fluctuation display ends in the state, a pseudo fluctuation stop state is set (see S4906 in FIG. 96). The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are set in the pseudo reserved ball number counter 223r at the time of transition to the jackpot waiting state corresponding to the left trigger jackpot. See S4614 in FIG. 98). That is, the pseudo reserved ball number counter 223r includes at least a counter for counting the number of reserved balls of the pseudo first special symbol and a counter for counting the reserved ball number of the pseudo second special symbol. Have been. Further, the value of the pseudo reserved ball number counter 223r is decremented by one each time the start of pseudo variable display is set (see S4908 in FIG. 96).

  The pseudo normal state flag 223s is set in the jackpot waiting state, in which an effect (pseudo normal state effect) is being performed in a manner as if it were a normal gaming state (when a left-hit jackpot is won). Is a big hit standby state). When the pseudo normal state flag 223s is on, it indicates that the pseudo normal state effect is being executed, and when it is off, it indicates that the pseudo normal state effect is not being executed. This pseudo normal state flag 223s is set to ON when the jackpot is won at the left opportunity and the jackpot waiting state is started (see S4617 in FIG. 98). On the other hand, the pseudo normal state flag 223s indicates that the pseudo normal state effect has been completed (when the game ball enters the left-operation winning opening 662 and the game shifts to the jackpot opening period, or when the pseudo fluctuation stop state is set). It is set to OFF when the standby state effect is started for three seconds (see S4912 in FIG. 96 and S4617 in FIG. 98).

  The pseudo fluctuation timer 223t is a timer that measures the fluctuation time of the pseudo fluctuation display. The timer value corresponding to 2 seconds (that is, 2000) is set to the pseudo fluctuation timer 223t every time the start of the pseudo fluctuation display is set (see S4907 in FIG. 96). It is determined whether or not the pseudo fluctuation display is being executed based on whether the value of the pseudo fluctuation timer 223t is 0 or not.

  The pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223u is a timer that measures the duration of the pseudo fluctuation stop state. A timer value corresponding to 3 seconds (that is, 3000) is set in the pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223u at the timing when the pseudo fluctuation stop state is set (see S4906 in FIG. 96). When the pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223u becomes 0, it means that three seconds have elapsed since the start of the pseudo fluctuation stop state, so that the start of the standby state effect is set. By setting the pseudo fluctuation stop state to end in three seconds, even if the player wants to quit the game, the jackpot wait state was set before the player left the table. This can make the player aware of this. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game without noticing, despite having won the jackpot at the left opportunity, and causing the player to be dissatisfied with the game.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the seventh embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, with reference to FIG. 95, main processing 7 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. The main process 7 is a process executed in place of the main process (see FIG. 34) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment).

  Of the main processing 7 (see FIG. 95) in the seventh embodiment, in each processing of S4101 to S4118, the same processing as the processing of each of S4101 to S4118 of the main processing (see FIG. 34) in the second embodiment is respectively performed. Be executed. Further, in the main process 7 (see FIG. 95) in the seventh embodiment, after the effect update process (S4111) is completed, the pseudo process for setting the effect mode while the pseudo normal state is set is performed. A normal state effect process is performed (S4311), and the process proceeds to S4112. Details of the pseudo normal state effect processing (S4131) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the above-described pseudo normal state effect processing (S4131). In the pseudo normal state effect processing (S 4131), first, it is determined whether the pseudo normal state flag 223 s is on (S 4901). If it is determined that the pseudo normal state flag 223 s is off (S 4901: No), This means that the pseudo normal game state is not set (the state is not the jackpot waiting state based on the left trigger jackpot), and thus this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4901 that the pseudo normal state flag 223s is ON (S4901: Yes), it is next determined whether or not a pseudo variable display effect is being executed (S4902). . More specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer 223t during pseudo fluctuation is 1 or more. In the process of S4902, when it is determined that the pseudo fluctuation display effect is being executed (the value of the pseudo fluctuation timer 223t is 1 or more) (S4902: Yes), the value of the pseudo fluctuation timer 223t is set to 1 It is updated by subtraction (S4903), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timer 223t during pseudo fluctuation after subtraction has become 0 (S4904). That is, it is determined whether the fluctuation time of the pseudo fluctuation display has ended.

  In the process of S4904, if it is determined that the value of the pseudo-fluctuation timer 223t is not 0 (S4904: No), the process is directly terminated to continue the pseudo-fluctuation display. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the pseudo-changing timer 223t has become 0 (S4904: Yes), then the value of the pseudo-reserved ball count counter 223r is 0 (the pseudo-corresponding pseudo-ball corresponding to the first special symbol). It is determined whether both the number of reserved balls and the number of pseudo reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol are 0) (S4905), and when it is determined that the value of the pseudo reserved ball number counter 223r is 0, (S4905: Yes), since pseudo fluctuation display cannot be started, the value of the pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223u is set to 3000 in order to shift to the pseudo fluctuation stop state (S4906), and this processing is performed. To end. Note that the pseudo normal state effect processing (see FIG. 96) is a processing executed every millisecond in the main processing 7 (see FIG. 95), so that 3000 is set as the timer value of the pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223u. By setting, the timer value becomes 0 after 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds). Thus, it is possible to accurately measure three seconds after the pseudo fluctuation stop state.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4905 that the value of the pseudo reserved ball number counter 223r is not 0 (S4905: No), the start of pseudo fluctuation display is newly set, and the pseudo fluctuation timer is set. The value of 223t is set to 2000 (timer value corresponding to 2 seconds) (S4907). Next, the value of the pseudo reserved ball number counter 223r is decremented by one, and the display mode is updated to a display mode corresponding to the pseudo reserved ball number after the subtraction (S4908), and this processing ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S4902 that the pseudo fluctuation display is not being executed (S4902: No), it means that the current state is the pseudo fluctuation stop state, and thus the pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223u. Is subtracted by 1 (S4909), and it is determined whether the value of the pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223u after the subtraction has become 0 (S4910). In the process of S4910, if it is determined that the value of the pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223u is not 0 (it is a value of 1 or more) (S4910: No), in order to continue the pseudo fluctuation stop state, This processing ends as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4910, when it is determined that the value of the pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223u after the subtraction has become 0 (S4910: Yes), the standby state effect is set by setting the display standby state command (FIG. 7). (See S4911). Next, the standby state effect flag 223g is set to ON, and the pseudo normal state flag 223s is set to OFF (S4912), and the process ends.

  By executing the pseudo normal state effect processing (see FIG. 96), it is as if the normal gaming state has continued for the player in the jackpot waiting state which has been shifted based on winning at the left opportunity jackpot. The effect of the aspect reminiscent of can be performed. This allows the player to continue left-handing when the game machine enters the jackpot waiting state with a left-hand opportunity, so that the player can immediately reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 with the left-hand opportunity. The first round of the jackpot can be started.

  In the seventh embodiment, the pseudo variable display is configured to be executed by the number of the retained balls at the start of the jackpot waiting state (at the end of the change) at the start of the jackpot waiting state. In this case, when a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected, the number of pseudo reserved balls corresponding to the ball entry is not increased. This is because, as described above, the game board 13 is configured such that when the player hits left, the game ball easily enters the left-operation winning port 662 rather than the first ball entry port 64. If the player hits the ball continuously during the jackpot waiting state, there is a very high possibility that the game ball will not enter the left activated winning opening 662 and will continuously enter the first entrance 64 without winning. Because it is low. Therefore, the processing for increasing the pseudo reserved ball count can be omitted, and the processing load on the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced. Further, if the processing for increasing the number of reserved balls is also performed, if the main controller 110 detects a ball entering the first entrance port 64 during the jackpot waiting state, the number of reserved balls is already determined. Has reached the upper limit, the sound lamp control device 113 must be notified of the entry. When the number of reserved balls reaches the upper limit, the game shifts to the jackpot waiting state, and if a ball entry to the first entrance 64 is detected after the pseudo variable display effect has been executed at least once, the pseudo This is because it is necessary to increase the number of reserved balls. Therefore, the number of commands to be output in main controller 110 increases, and the processing load on main controller 110 also increases. On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, the number of pseudo reserved balls is not increased, so that there is no need to increase the number of commands in the main controller 110, and the processing load on the main controller 110 is reduced. be able to. Further, if the player luckily enters the first ball entrance 64 first and recognizes that the number of retained balls does not increase, the player is informed that the player has actually entered the jackpot waiting state. Can understand. Therefore, the player who has fortunately detected the jackpot standby state is allowed to reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 and then play the game by devising to enter the left operation winning opening 662. Can be. This allows the player to make a more positive left-handing to determine whether the player is in the normal game state or the jackpot waiting state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the hit-related process 7 (S4341) in the seventh embodiment will be described. The hit-related process 7 (S4341) is a process executed in place of the hit-related process 2 (see FIG. 61) in the second embodiment, and is similar to the hit-related process 2 (see FIG. 61). This is a process for performing control according to the command when a command to be performed is received.

  Of the hit-related processing 7 (see FIG. 97) in the seventh embodiment, S4401, S4404, and S4407 to S4410 respectively perform S4401 and S4404 of the hit-related processing 2 (see FIG. 61) in the second embodiment. , And S4407 to S4410 are executed. In the hit-related processing 7 (see FIG. 97) in the seventh embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S4401 that the standby state command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4401: Yes), the standby state command processing is performed. Instead of (see FIG. 62), a standby state command process 7 is executed (S4441), and this process ends. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 98, this standby state command processing 7 (S4441) is processing for setting an effect mode according to the big hit type as the big hit standby state.

  In the hit-related process 7 (see FIG. 97) in the seventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4404 that an opening command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4404: Yes), a big hit is started. An opening command process for executing an opening effect in a mode according to the situation is executed (S4442), and this process ends. Details of the opening command processing (S4442) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the standby state command processing 7 (S4441) will be described in detail. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the standby state command processing 7 (S4441). In this standby state command processing 7 (S4441), in each processing of S4601 to S4603, the same processing as each processing of S4601 to S4603 of the standby state command processing (see FIG. 62) in the second embodiment is executed. .

  In the standby state command process 7 (see FIG. 98) in the seventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4601 that the current jackpot is not a right-hand-side jackpot (a left-hand-side jackpot) (S4601: No) ), The values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are read (S4611), and it is determined whether or not each of the read counter values is 0 (S4612). .

  In the processing of S4612, when it is determined that the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are both 0 (S4612: Yes), the reserved symbol number of the special symbol is increased. Since the start of the pseudo fluctuation display causes the player to feel uncomfortable, the pseudo fluctuation stop state is set. That is, 3000 (timer value corresponding to 3 seconds) is set as the value of the pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223u (S4613), and the process shifts to S4617.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4612 that at least one of the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is not 0 (S4612: No), the reading is performed. The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are stored as the value of the pseudo reserved ball number counter 223r (S4614), and the start of the pseudo variation display is set. Then, 2000 (timer value corresponding to 2 seconds) is set as the value of the pseudo-changing timer 223t (S4615). Then, the value of the pseudo reserved ball number counter 223r is decremented by one and updated, and at the same time, the reserved ball number symbol is reduced by one and displayed (S4616), and the process proceeds to S4617. In the processing of S4617, the pseudo normal state flag 223s is set to ON (S4617), and this processing ends.

  By executing the standby state command processing 7 (see FIG. 98), in the jackpot waiting state of the left trigger big hit, an effect as if the normal gaming state is continued can be executed in a pseudo manner. In the case of a right opportunity jackpot, a standby state effect can be executed. In this way, when a left-hand-hit jackpot occurs, the player can continue left-handing without noticing that the player has entered the jackpot waiting state, so that the game ball reaches the upper surface of the door 65f1. Shortly after, a winning operation can be started by winning the left operation winning opening 662. On the other hand, in the case of the right opportunity big hit, the player can easily understand that the big hit standby state has been set. (The number of gaming balls that can enter the right specific winning opening 65a) can be provided. Therefore, the pleasure of firing the game ball with good timing can be given to the player.

  Next, the details of the above-described opening command processing (S4442) will be described with reference to FIG. In this opening command processing (S4442), first, it is determined whether the pseudo normal state flag 223s is on (S5001). In the processing of S5001, when it is determined that the pseudo normal state flag 223s is ON (S5001: Yes), the left-hand winning port is displayed while the pseudo fluctuation display effect or the pseudo fluctuation stop state is displayed. Since this means that the ball has entered 662 and the jackpot opening period has started, a display opening command corresponding to the blackout effect (see FIG. 93A) is set (S5002).

  Next, the value of the pseudo pending ball number counter 223r, the value of the pseudo fluctuation timer 223t, and the value of the pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223u are all reset to 0 (S5003), and the pseudo normal state flag 223s is set to off. (S5004), and ends this process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5001 that the pseudo normal state flag 223s is off (S5001: No), a display opening command corresponding to the normal opening effect is set (S5005), and the standby state effect flag 223g is set. Is set to off (S5006), and this process ends.

  By executing the opening command process (see FIG. 99), in a jackpot waiting state in which the winning has been won at the left trigger jackpot and the game has shifted to the jackpot, the opening period is started when the game ball wins to the left activated winning opening 662. Suddenly, a blackout effect in which the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81 darkens (blacks out) can be executed. That is, it can be set to a mode that is significantly different from the pseudo fluctuation display or the pseudo fluctuation stop state effect that has been executed until then. This makes it possible for the player to instantly understand that the special effect has been executed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, a position where a part of the game ball fired aiming at the first ball entrance 64 can enter the left side is a left trigger which is a start trigger of a left trigger jackpot. The operation winning opening 662 is arranged. Then, in the case of a left-hand-operated jackpot, an effect is displayed in which the third symbol of the combination of the missed symbols is stopped and displayed as the effect of the third symbol display device 81 during the change display of the special symbol. Furthermore, in the jackpot waiting state which shifts after the end of the fluctuation, the effect is performed in a manner as if the normal gaming state is continuing. That is, even during the jackpot waiting state, a pseudo normal state effect such as a pseudo-variable display effect is executed, and the player is erroneously recognized as in a normal game state and left-handed to be continued. Is configured to be possible. This allows the player to continue left-handing when the player is in the jackpot-waiting state after winning at the left-hand opportunity jackpot (suppressing the player from right-handing). The game ball can be entered into the left-operation winning opening 662 immediately before the player is conscious of reaching the upper surface of the game ball. Therefore, in the case of a left trigger jackpot, it is difficult to start the jackpot after the number of game balls exceeding the specified number (the upper limit number of the first round is two) reaches the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1. On the other hand, in the case of a right-hit jackpot, the game ball is easily entered into the right operation winning opening 661 at the timing when more game balls reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1, so that the ball can easily be over. A prize can be generated. Therefore, the degree of advantage (the number of prize balls that can be obtained) in the first round can be made different between the left-hand hit jackpot and the right-hand hit jackpot, so that a game can be played by paying attention to the big hit type.

  In the seventh embodiment, the pseudo normal state effect is always executed when the jackpot is in the jackpot waiting state with the left trigger jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a left opportunity big hit occurs, it may be configured to determine by lottery whether to execute the pseudo normal state effect or the standby state effect.

  In the seventh embodiment, the pseudo variable display is configured to be executed for the number of retained balls held at the start of the jackpot waiting state (at the end of the change), and the pseudo change display is performed after the big hit standby state is entered. The configuration is such that, when a ball entering the one entrance 64 is detected, the number of pseudo reserved balls corresponding to the ball entry is not increased, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, each time a start winning is detected, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of reserved balls is increased in a pseudo manner. This makes it more difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the pseudo normal state effect is being performed.

  In the seventh embodiment, the execution start timing of the expected degree notification effect is fixed for each variation type. That is, in the case of a hit or out-of-reach special reach, the execution of the expectation notification effect is started at the time when 86 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, and in the case of a hit or out-of-reach super reach, the timing at which 56 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation. Although it was configured to start the execution of the expected degree notification effect, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even with the same variation type, the execution start timing of the expected degree notification effect may be changed by lottery or the like.

  In the seventh embodiment, as a pseudo-variable display, a special effect for two seconds different from the normal effect is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a fluctuating display effect of the same fluctuating time and display mode as in a normal fluctuating display is executed in a pseudo manner. More specifically, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the variable display that has been executed immediately before the jackpot waiting state is repeated is repeated. With this configuration, the data of the variable display used immediately before can be diverted as it is, so that the processing load when executing the pseudo variable display can be reduced.

  In the seventh embodiment, when the state shifts to the jackpot waiting state with a left-hand hit, a pseudo-variable display is performed a number of times corresponding to the number of held balls at that time, and then a pseudo stop display state is set. Although it was configured to shift, it is not limited to this. For example, when shifting to the jackpot waiting state, it may be configured to immediately shift to the stop display state regardless of the number of reserved balls. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of reserved balls is changed to zero when the state shifts to the jackpot waiting state or during the variable display. With this configuration, it is possible to give the player an impression as if there are no pending balls in the case of shifting to the jackpot waiting state, so that a special symbol lottery is started from the start of the jackpot waiting state. Can be performed by the player to perform left-handed.

  In the seventh embodiment, when the pseudo variable display is executed, the variable display is executed using the same large three-symbol image as the normal variable display. However, the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, a design different from the normal third design may be prepared as a special design for pseudo-variable display.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example applicable to the pachinko machine 10 in each of the above embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 to 117. In the first control example, the player selects a music (sound effect) to be output (reproduced) during a predetermined period during a normal game (for example, a period in which a probable change state is set) as part of an entertaining effect. It is configured to be possible. More specifically, when an operation on the operation button 230 provided on the front frame 14 is detected during a predetermined period (a period during which the probable change state is set), the third symbol display device 81 selects a song (selection). ) A list of possible songs (tune selection menu screen) is displayed. Then, while the music selection menu screen is displayed, the player selects an arbitrary music (voice effect) and performs a determination operation (an operation of pressing the center button CB of the operation button 230) to thereby select the music (the selected music). The output (reproduction) of the sound effect is started. Note that, in the first control example, at the timing when the predetermined period is started (transition to the probable change state), first, one piece of music (production style) is randomly selected and played. The reproduction of the music selected at random is continued until the reproduction of the music selected by the player is started or until the certain change state (predetermined period) ends. Thereby, the music can be reproduced from the transition to the probable change state until the music is selected by the player (while the music is not selected), which is advantageous for the player. The player's satisfaction with the probable change can be increased.

  In the first control example, the initial arrangement of the music selection menu screen is selected by the player in the game up to that point regardless of the type of the music (producing mode) randomly selected at the start of the probable change state. The configuration is such that the more frequently (the more frequently) the music, the easier to select a menu position. Here, the “menu position that is easy to select” means a menu position in which the number of operations performed on the operation buttons 230 before selecting a music piece is small (can be selected with three or less operations). I do.

  First, the appearance of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. As shown in FIG. 100, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first control example, an operation button 230 is provided on the left side in the front view with respect to the ball lending operation unit 40. The operation buttons 230 include an upper button UB arranged on the upper side in front view, a lower button DB arranged on the lower side in front view, a right button RB arranged on the right side in front view, and a left button LB arranged on the left side in front view. , And a center button CB arranged at the center of the operation button 230. Although details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 101 and 102, the operation button 230 is set in advance in the pachinko machine 10 during the period in which the probable change state is set and displayed on the music selection menu screen as described above. It is provided to allow the player to select an arbitrary song from a plurality of songs (26 songs A to Z).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 101 and FIG. 102, a display mode in the probable change state in the first control example will be described. FIG. 101 (a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the probable change state. As shown in FIG. 101 (a), in the probable change state, a music area for displaying information of the music being reproduced is displayed on the left side of the main display area Dm in front view (left side of the variably displayed third symbol). An MR is formed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 101 (a), the character "Music A" indicating the music currently being played back (outputting) (Music A in the example of FIG. 101 (a)) and "button operation" Is displayed on the music area MR. These display contents allow the player to easily understand what the currently playing music is. By operating the operation button 230, the player can easily understand that any music can be selected.

  FIG. 101 (b) shows a state where the player has operated the operation button 230 while the image shown in FIG. 101 (a) is being displayed (one of the buttons UB, DB, RB, LB, CB is pressed). FIG. 14 is a diagram showing display contents that are switched in the case of (YES). FIG. 101 (b) illustrates a case where the display content (display mode) is switched based on (in conjunction with) the player pressing down button DB. As shown in FIG. 101 (b), when the operation button 230 is operated (pressed), a plurality of horizontally long rectangular display areas to which the title (music name) of the music is attached are provided inside the music area MR. Is displayed. Also, below the plurality of display areas, the characters "select with the up and down buttons" and the character "determine with the center button" are displayed. By operating the operation buttons 230 based on these display contents (music selection menu screen), it is possible for the player to easily understand that any music can be selected and reproduced. Hereinafter, for simplification of description, a state in which the music selection menu screen is displayed (a state in which an arbitrary music can be selected in accordance with the operation content of the operation button 230) is referred to as a “music selection mode”. The display contents in the music selection mode will be described in more detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 102 (a) is a diagram showing an arrangement of each item (an image indicating a music type (music name)) on a music selection menu screen displayed first when the mode is shifted to the music selection mode. As shown in FIG. 102 (a), on the music selection menu screen, at least five display areas in which different items (images indicating the types of music) are arranged (a number of displays smaller than the total number of music, 26 music). Area) is displayed. When the center button CB is pressed while the music selection menu screen is displayed, the reproduction of the item (song) arranged in the display area displayed at the center among the five display areas is determined.

  Of the five display areas displayed on the music selection menu screen, the upper two display areas show the types of music that the player has frequently selected in the probable change state so far (the music that the player frequently selects). Corresponding items PA1 and PA2 (images indicating music Y and music Z) are arranged. It should be noted that the item PA1 (the image indicating the music piece Z) that is arranged relatively close to the center display area is the item P2 (the music piece Y indicating the music piece Y) that is relatively far from the center display area. The selection frequency of the player is higher than that of the image).

  In the item RA1 (image indicating the music A) displayed at the center of the music selection menu screen, an item indicating a music selected at random (the music reproduced first after shifting to the probable change state) is arranged. Then, below the center, two items are displayed side by side in a predetermined order (in the first control example, in alphabetical order) based on the music selected first. That is, based on the item RA1 (song A) displayed at the center, items RA2 and RA3 of "song B" and "song C" in alphabetical order are displayed side by side below the item RA1. In the following description, for the sake of simplicity, in the first arrangement on the music selection menu screen, two items PA1 and PA2 displayed above the center item RA1 (the frequency of selection by the player so far is high). The display area in which the items are arranged is referred to as a “history area”. Further, a display area in which three items displayed below the history area are displayed (a display area in which randomly selected items are arranged) is referred to as a “random selection area”. In addition, a display area in which items to be reproduced when the player presses the center button CB is referred to as a “music selection area”.

  As shown in FIG. 102 (a), the item PA1 arranged in the music selection area (the center of the music selection menu screen) is displayed in a lit state, and the other items PA1, PA2, RA2, and RA3 are turned off. Is displayed. As a result, when the center button CB is pressed, an item displayed in a mode (an illuminated appearance mode) different from other items (image indicating the type of music) is determined as the music to be reproduced this time. This can be made easier for the player to understand. In addition, an upper image UG of a substantially upward triangle shape is displayed above the music selection area and to the right of the item PA1, and a downward substantially triangle shape is displayed below the music selection area and to the right of the item RA2. The lower image DG of the shape is displayed. When the upper button UB is pressed based on these display contents, the display contents (songs) displayed in the music selection area are displayed one level higher than the current state (in the example of FIG. 102A, When the down button DB is pressed, the display content (song) displayed in the music selection area is displayed one level lower than the current state when the down button DB is pressed. It is possible for the player to intuitively understand that the content can be shifted to the content (in the example of FIG. 102A, the image indicating the music B).

  FIG. 102 (b) shows an example of a display mode when the player presses (operates) the upper button UB of the operation buttons 230 while the music selection menu screen shown in FIG. 101 (a) is displayed. FIG. As shown in FIG. 102 (b), when the player presses the upper button UB, all display contents are moved downward by one display area in a visual display mode in conjunction with the press. Variable. As a result, the item PA1 (song Z), which is located immediately above the music selection area in FIG. 102 (a), is changed to the appearance display mode moved to the music selection area in conjunction with the depression of the upper button UB. Is done. The item PA1 that has been moved to the music selection area is set to a lighted appearance, and the other items are set to a lighted off appearance. In addition, an item PA3 indicating “song X” is displayed one upper side of the item PA2. In the item PA3, the item (the song X in the example of FIG. 102B) next to the item PA2 (the song Y) is displayed as the number of times the player has selected so far. Further, as each item is shifted downward by one display area, the upper image, which is the image corresponding to the upper button UB, has a lit appearance. As a result, the arrangement of the items on the music selection menu screen is changed in conjunction with the pressing of the up button UB (the item PA1 arranged one immediately above the music selection area could be moved to the music selection area. ) Can be easily understood by the player.

  When the upper button UB is pressed a plurality of times, the item is shifted downward according to the number of times the button UB is pressed. For example, in the arrangement of the music selection menu screen shown in FIG. 102 (a), when the player presses the upper button DB three times, each item is shifted downward by three display areas, An item PA3 (an image indicating music X) is arranged in the music selection area. Note that the menu items are arranged in a loop, and all the songs can be sequentially shifted to the song selection area by continuously pressing the upper button. When the upper button UB is further pressed while the item corresponding to the last song is arranged in the song selection area, the item indicating the first song (song A in the example of FIG. 102A). Returns to the music selection area.

  Although illustration is omitted, when the player operates (presses) the lower button DB, an operation opposite to that performed when the upper button UB is pressed is performed. That is, by shifting each item display area upward by one by one, the items arranged in the display area immediately below the music selection area at the time of operation are moved to the music selection area in the appearance of the appearance. Variable. For example, when the lower button DB is pressed in the arrangement shown in FIG. 102 (a), the item RA2 is changed to a visual display mode in which the item RA2 is moved to the music selection area in conjunction with the pressing. In addition, the appearance is set so that the lower image DG corresponding to the lower button DB is turned on. Accordingly, even when the player presses the down button DB, the player can easily understand that the item has been shifted in conjunction with the press.

  In the first control example, in the initial arrangement of the music selection menu screen, three items (items PA1 to PA3) are arranged above the music selection area in descending order of the number of times the player has selected. I have. That is, an item (song) with a high selection frequency of the player is arranged at a position where the number of presses of the upper button UB can be selected (shifted to the music selection area) within a range of three or less. This is because it is considered that the higher the frequency of the item selected so far, the higher the possibility that the player will select the item even in the current probable state. In deciding the initial arrangement of the music selection menu screen, items corresponding to randomly selected items (music) are arranged in the music selection area, and other items are simply determined based on the items arranged in the music selection area. If the music pieces are arranged in alphabetical order (predetermined order), it may be difficult for the player to select a favorite music piece. That is, when the item (song) that the player wants to select and the randomly selected item (song) are separated in order, the number of operations on the operation button 230 for shifting the item that the player wants to select to the song selection area And the player may feel annoying. Further, as a method of making it difficult to feel annoyance, a method of setting an item to be initially arranged in the music selection area in the case of a probable change state to an item frequently selected by the player may be considered. According to the method, the player is satisfied with the music reproduced (output) first in the probable change state in the first place, and the possibility of not changing the music (not displaying the music selection menu screen) is increased. As the opportunity for the player to display the music selection menu screen decreases, the opportunity to know the type of another music set in the pachinko machine 10 also decreases. For this reason, the possibility that the player intends to select another music is reduced. Therefore, even if a large number of music pieces are set to be selectable for the pachinko machine 10, most of the music pieces may not be selected and may be wasted.

  Further, as a method of making it easy for the player to select a favorite music, all the items are displayed collectively on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (the items are arranged in a matrix), so that any music ( It is also conceivable to make it possible to understand at a glance where the items are located. However, in this method, the display area for displaying the items (the area of the music selection menu screen) becomes large, and the display area for displaying other display contents (the third symbol, the number of retained balls symbol, etc.) is displayed. May become too narrow.

  On the other hand, in the first control example, the items displayed on the music selection menu screen so that the player has a high possibility of selecting items (items frequently selected in the game up to now). The initial arrangement of is set. More specifically, an image showing three items (songs) that the player has frequently selected (the number of selections is high) in the game so far is selected with a small number of operations (the number of times the operation button 230 is pressed). It is configured to be arranged at a position where it is possible (display area for three upper parts of the music selection area). With such a configuration, regardless of which item (image indicating the song name) is first placed in the song selection area of the song selection menu screen, it can be selected with a small number of operations (operations within three times). Items that are frequently selected by the player can be arranged at positions. Therefore, in each probable state, the item that the player has repeatedly selected so far (that is, the item that the player is likely to select even in the probable state this time) can be selected with little effort. This can make it difficult for the player to feel troublesome when selecting music (items). If the number of items (played songs) selected at least once is less than three (that is, the number of items frequently selected by the player is less than three), the item selected at least once is selected. Only (less than three items) are arranged in the history area, and the other items are arranged in a predetermined order (music alphabetical order) based on the items arranged in the music selection area. For this reason, when the player has not selected a piece of music even once, such as immediately after turning on the power to the pachinko machine 10, the items determined to be arranged in the music selection area by random lottery are simply determined. As a reference, all items are arranged in a predetermined order (the alphabetical order of music).

  In the first control example, after shifting to the probable change state, an image indicating the music name of one music piece selected at random is arranged in the music selection area on the music selection menu screen displayed first, and the music selection is performed. The history area is arranged above the area. With this configuration, at least immediately after the transition to the probable change state, the randomly selected music can be reproduced, so that the player can be given an opportunity to listen to music other than the music that is frequently selected. . Therefore, a plurality of music pieces set in the pachinko machine 10 can be reproduced without waste. In addition, while listening to a song selected at random, the player may like the song and want to play it even in a probable state after the next time. Therefore, since the number of music pieces that the player likes can be increased, the interest of the game in the probable change state can be improved. Further, by continuing to select only the same music, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the game from becoming monotonous.

  Further, in the first control example, the number of items (images indicating music names) to be displayed on the music selection menu screen is limited to five (the number is less than 26, which is the total number of music pieces). By changing the type of the items displayed on the music selection menu screen according to the content, all the items set in the pachinko machine 10 can be selected. With this configuration, the display area of the music selection menu screen can be reduced as compared with a case where all items are displayed collectively. Accordingly, display contents other than the music selection menu screen, such as the third symbol and the number of retained balls symbol, can be displayed with a larger display area.

  In the first control example, display areas corresponding to music pieces (items) having a high frequency (number of times) selected by the player in the game up to now are arranged in the three display areas above the music selection area. Although the remaining display areas are arranged in a predetermined order (alphabet order) based on one randomly selected display area, the present invention is not limited to this. The number of items having a high frequency (number of times) selected by the player in the game so far may be set to be less than three or more.

  In the first control example, in the initial arrangement of the music selection menu screen, as an item to be arranged in the history area, an item frequently selected by the player in the game up to now is arranged, but the present invention is limited to this. is not. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which items selected by the player in the probable change state set before the current probable change state are arranged in the history area in the order in which the selected timings are newer (closer). With this configuration, it is possible to arrange images (items) indicating music pieces that are likely to be selected by a player who has a tendency to continuously select favorite music pieces in the history area. The convenience of the person can be improved.

  In the first control example, the music selection menu screen is not displayed unless the operation button 230 is operated after the probable change state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The screen may be displayed. With such a configuration, the trouble of a player who wants to select a music can be reduced, so that the convenience of the player can be improved.

  In the first control example, the first item displayed in the music selection area is selected by random lottery. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which, as the first item displayed in the music selection area on the music selection menu screen, the item selected by the player last in the probability change state set before the current probability change state.

  In the first control example, up to three items are selected with a relatively small number of operations in the initial arrangement on the music selection menu screen (shifted to the music selection area) in the initial arrangement on the music selection menu screen in the order of the number of times the player has selected in the game so far. Although it was configured to be arranged at a position where it is possible, the present invention is not limited to this. It suffices if the player can easily understand where the music that is likely to be selected by the player (the music whose frequency has been selected so far) is located on the music selection menu screen. The arrangement may be such that it is displayed somewhere in the music area MR. With such a configuration, for example, even when the number of items to be displayed in the music area MR is increased beyond five, items that are highly likely to be selected by the player are displayed from the beginning. Can be kept. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to select an item, so that the convenience for the player can be improved.

  In the first control example, the display mode is different between the item displayed in the music selection area and the item displayed in the other display area. In addition to this, the player makes a selection. The display mode may be varied depending on whether or not the music has a high possibility (items arranged in the history area in the initial arrangement of the music selection menu screen). With this configuration, the player can more easily find items that are highly likely to be selected by the player, so that the convenience of the player can be improved.

<Electrical Configuration in First Control Example>
Next, an electrical configuration in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 103 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in each of the above embodiments is such that the operation button 230 is electrically connected to the input / output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113. (See FIG. 8). Further, the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations are the same as those of the above-described embodiments, and thus the details thereof are omitted. In the following description of the first control example, the first embodiment will be described as a comparison target, focusing on differences from the first embodiment.

  When any of the buttons (UB, DB, RB, LB, CB) constituting the operation button 230 is pressed (operated), an ON signal (a signal whose output is H) is sent to a signal line corresponding to the operated button. ) Is output. The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the output from the operation button 230, and when the output of the signal corresponding to any of the buttons is H, performs control according to the type of the button. Specifically, for example, when it is detected that the output of the signal corresponding to any one of the buttons has become H in a state in which the music selection menu screen is not displayed in the probable change state, the music selection menu screen is displayed. Perform control. Further, when it is detected that the output of the signal corresponding to the up button UB has become H while the music selection menu screen is displayed, each item on the music selection menu screen is shifted downward by one. Control.

  Next, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104A is a block diagram showing a configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example. As shown in FIG. 104A, the ROM 222 in the first control example is different from the ROM 222 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 14A) in that an item order storage area 222aa is added. Is different. Other configurations are the same as those of the above-described first embodiment, and thus the details thereof are omitted.

  The item order storage area 222aa is a data table in which the order of items on the music selection menu screen is defined, and is referred to when setting the initial arrangement of the music selection menu screen. More specifically, when shifting to the probable change state, the initial arrangement of the music selection menu screen is determined. When the initial arrangement is determined, first, three items (songs) to be arranged in the history area are determined, and then one item to be arranged in the music selection area is selected from among other items not arranged in the history area. It is determined randomly (for example, by lottery using random numbers). Then, based on the items arranged in the music selection area, the arrangement of other items (items not arranged in any of the music selection area and the history area) is arranged in the arrangement order specified in the item order storage area 222aa. Set. As described above, in the first control example, the item order storage area 222aa is set so that the items are arranged in alphabetical order of music.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104B is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 104B, the RAM 223 in the first control example is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 14B) in that the item arrangement storage area 223aa and the menu position pointer 223ab are provided. And a music selection number storage area 223ac, a music selection permission flag 223ad, and a menu display flag 223ae. Other configurations are the same as those of the above-described first embodiment, and thus the details thereof are omitted.

  The item arrangement storage area 223aa is a storage area for storing the arrangement of each item (an image indicating the type of each music) on the music selection menu screen. When the state shifts to the probable change state, the initial arrangement of each item is set in the item arrangement storage area 223aa (see S5204, S5208, and S5212 in FIG. 113). The music selection menu screen is displayed with the arrangement set in the arrangement storage area 223aa. Details of the item arrangement storage area 223aa will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 105 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the item arrangement storage area 223aa. In FIG. 105 (a), it is set that “Song N”, “Song O”, and “Song P” are arranged in the history area, and “Song A” is arranged in the music selection area. 2 illustrates the contents of the item arrangement storage area 223aa. As shown in FIG. 105 (a), in the item arrangement storage area 223aa, data indicating a menu item is stored in association with each value ("00H" to "19H") that the menu position pointer 223ab can take. Storage area is provided. In the example of FIG. 105A, data corresponding to the menu item “Song A” is stored in the storage area corresponding to the value “00H” of the menu position pointer 223ab, and the value “01H” of the menu position pointer 223ab is stored. The data corresponding to the menu item "Song B" is stored in the storage area corresponding to. Thereafter, data is stored in alphabetical order of the music pieces up to the value “0BH” of the menu position pointer 223ab. In the storage area corresponding to “0CH” next to “0BH”, data corresponding to “song Q” is stored. That is, it is possible to prevent data corresponding to “Song N”, “Song O”, and “Song P” already stored in the history area from being redundantly stored in the random selection area.

  From the storage area corresponding to the value “0CH” of the menu position pointer 223ab to the storage area corresponding to “16H”, the data is stored in the alphabetical order of the music pieces as in the range of “00H” to “0BH”. . Further, the range of the menu position pointer 223ab from “17H” to “19H” corresponds to the history area, and in the example of FIG. 105A, “Song N”, “Song O”, and “Song O” P "is stored. The storage area corresponding to the value “19H” of the menu position pointer 223ab stores the data corresponding to the music with the highest selection frequency, and the storage area corresponding to the value “18H” is selected secondly. The data corresponding to the song with the highest frequency is stored, and the data corresponding to the song with the third highest frequency of selection is stored in the storage area corresponding to “17H”.

  In the first control example, when the music selection menu screen is displayed, the data stored in the item arrangement storage area 223aa (the relationship between the value of the menu position pointer 223ab and the menu item) and the menu position pointer 223ab are displayed. The current value is compared with the current value, and the menu item stored in the storage area corresponding to the current value of the menu position pointer 223ab is arranged in the music selection area. In addition, the menu items stored in the storage areas corresponding to two values before and after the value of the menu position pointer 223ab are arranged above and below the music selection area, respectively. For example, in the example of FIG. 105A, if the value of the menu position pointer 223ab is “19H”, an item indicating “Song P” is displayed in the song selection area. Further, “Song O” stored in the storage area corresponding to the value one above (ie, “18H”) above the value “19H” of the menu position pointer 223ab is located above the song selection area. Is done. Similarly, “song N” corresponding to the value “17H” of the menu position pointer 223ab is arranged two upper sides of the song selection area. Conversely, below the music selection area, an item corresponding to a value one lower than the value “19H” of the menu position pointer 223ab is arranged. Here, in the present control example, the next value of “19H”, which is the maximum value of the menu position pointer 223ab, is set to be determined to be “00H” (similarly, the value of “00H” which is the minimum value is “00H”). The next (one lower) value is determined to be “19H”. Therefore, the storage areas corresponding to “00H” and “01H” are respectively located one lower side and two lower sides of the music selection area. "Music A" and "Music B" are stored.

  Returning to FIG. 104 (b), the description will be continued. The menu position pointer 223ab is a pointer used to determine a range of items to be displayed on the music selection menu screen in the above-described item arrangement storage area 223aa. As described above, when displaying the music selection menu screen, the data stored in the five storage areas is read out centering on the storage area corresponding to the value of the menu position pointer 223ab, and the five items corresponding to each data are read out. Is arranged on the music selection menu screen. The initial value of the menu position pointer 223ab is set to “00H”, and the value is decremented by one each time a press on the upper button UB is detected during the display of the music selection menu screen. In addition, when the pressing of the upper button UB is detected in the state of “00H”, the value is updated to the maximum value “19H”. Further, each time a press on the down button DB is detected while the music selection menu screen is being displayed, the value is incremented by one. Note that, when the pressing of the lower button UB is detected in a state where the value is the maximum value “19H”, the value is updated to the minimum value “00H” (see S5110 in FIG. 111). Further, the value of the menu position pointer 223ab is reset to the initial value “00H” every time a big hit occurs (see S4452 in FIG. 114). The probability change state always shifts after the end of the jackpot, so that the value of the menu position pointer 223ab is always set to “00H” at the start of the probability change state by resetting to the initial value when the jackpot is reached. be able to.

  The music selection frequency storage area 223ac is a storage area for storing the number of times each music (item) is selected. When setting the arrangement of the menu items in the item arrangement storage area 223aa, the music selection number storage area 223ac is referred to and the value of the menu position pointer 223ab is set to “19H” in descending order of the selected music. , "18H", and "17H" are stored in storage areas (that is, history areas). Details of the music selection frequency storage area 223ac will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 105 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the music selection count storage area 223ac. As shown in FIG. 105 (b), the music selection frequency storage area 223ac is configured to be able to store the type of music and the number of times of selection (music selection) so far in association with each other. For example, in the example of FIG. 105 (b), 0 times is stored in association with “Song A” as the number of selections, 1 time is stored as the number of selections with B, and On the other hand, 0 is stored in association with the number of selections. Similarly, the number of selections is stored in association with other music types. Each time the player decides to play one music by pressing the center button CB while the music selection menu screen is displayed, the music selection count storage area 223ac stores the number of selections corresponding to the determined music. Is updated by adding 1 (see S5108 in FIG. 111). Since the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is not backed up, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, all data indicating the number of times of selection of each music is cleared.

  Returning to FIG. 104 (b), the description will be continued. The music selection permission flag 223ad is a flag indicating whether or not the music can be selected by the player. If the music selection permission flag 223ad is on, it indicates that any music can be selected, and if it is off, it indicates that music cannot be selected. The music selection permission flag 223ad has an initial value set to off, and is set to on when notified by a state command output from the main control device 110 that the state has shifted to the probable change state (see FIG. 113). See S5213). In addition, each time an opening command indicating the start of a jackpot is received, it is reset to off (see S4451 in FIG. 114). While the music selection permission flag 223ad is on, it is determined that the music selection period is possible, and pressing of the operation button 230 is treated as valid.

  The menu display flag 223ae is a flag indicating whether or not the music selection menu screen (see FIG. 102A) is displayed. If the menu display flag 223ae is on, it indicates that the music selection menu screen is being displayed, and if it is off, it indicates that the music selection menu screen is not being displayed. The menu display flag 223ae has an initial value set to off, and is set to on when the display of the music selection menu screen is set (see S5105 in FIG. 111). Further, when a press on the center button CB is detected while the music selection menu screen is displayed, the music selection menu screen is closed and the menu display flag 223ae is set to off (see S5109 in FIG. 111). Also, when an opening command indicating the start of a jackpot is received, the opening is reset (see S4451 in FIG. 114). While the menu display flag 223ae is on, each time a press on the up button UB or the down button DB is detected, each item on the music selection menu screen is shifted in the corresponding direction. By detecting pressing of the center button CB, the reproduction of the items arranged in the music selection area is set, and the music selection menu screen is closed.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 106 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the audio output device 226. As shown in FIG. 106, the audio output device 226 is connected to be able to receive data output from the audio lamp control device 113.

  As shown in FIG. 106, the audio output device 226 has an MPU 301 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 301 includes a ROM 302 storing various control programs executed by the MPU 301 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 302. A certain RAM 303 is built in.

  The MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 is electrically connected to the input port 305 and the audio synthesis unit 306. When a command specifying audio data is received from the audio ramp control device 113 to the audio output device 226, the command is input to the MPU 301 via the input port 305 and the bus line 304. The audio data specified by the audio ramp control device 113 is read from the ROM 302 and output to the channel of the audio synthesis unit 306 corresponding to the audio type. For example, audio data corresponding to a song is output to CN1, audio data corresponding to a sound effect is output to CN2, and audio data corresponding to a warning sound is output to CN3.

  The voice synthesis unit 306 is configured by a known voice synthesis LSI that synthesizes voice data input to each channel and outputs the synthesized voice data to the amplifier unit 307. The synthesized voice data is amplified by the amplifier unit 307 and input to the speaker unit 308. Accordingly, various sounds specified by the sound lamp control device 113 can be output from the speaker unit 308.

  Next, the configuration of the ROM 302 provided in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 107A, the ROM 302 has at least an audio file storage area 302a.

  The audio file storage area 302a is a storage area in which audio files (audio data) used to output music, sound effects, and the like are stored. In the probable change state, an audio file for reproducing a music piece (music piece A to music piece Z) that can be selected by the player is also stored in the audio file storage area 302a. When the output of various audio data is instructed by the audio ramp control device 113, an audio file corresponding to the effect is read from the audio file storage area 302a and output to a corresponding channel of the audio synthesis unit 306.

  Details of the audio file storage area 302a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the audio file storage area 302a. As shown in FIG. 108, in the audio file storage area 302a, a music data group (a music A data group 302a1 to a music Z data group 302a26) composed of a plurality of data used for reproducing each music. In addition, all audio files (audio data) that can be reproduced by the audio output device 226, such as data used to output each sound effect (for example, data 302a27 for sound effect A), are stored.

  As described above, the audio files (song A data group 302a1 to song Z data group 302a26) corresponding to each of the songs (song A to song Z) that can be reproduced during the probable change state are each composed of a plurality of data. Have been. The configuration of the music data groups 302a1 to 302a26 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 109 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a music data group. As shown in FIG. 109, the music data group is composed of a plurality of pieces of data in units (parts) of the music. More specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 109, for example, intro data corresponding to the prelude (so-called intro) portion of the music and A-melody 1 corresponding to the first melody (so-called A-melody portion) of the music Data, B melody 1 data corresponding to the second (next to A melody) melody (so-called B melody part), and rust 1 corresponding to the most exciting part (so-called rust part) in the music. Data, interlude data corresponding to the interlude portion of the song, A melody 2 data corresponding to the second A melody portion of the song, and B melody 2 data corresponding to the second B melody portion of the song. , And data for chorus 2 corresponding to the second chorus portion of the music, and outro data corresponding to the outro portion of the music. By reproducing (outputting) these part-unit audio data in an order determined for each music, one music is reproduced. With such a configuration, audio data can be diverted when a part of a music piece is used in another effect or the like (for example, when a chorus portion of a predetermined music piece is reproduced during a variable display effect). . In other words, since it is not necessary to separately store the audio data of one music piece and the audio data of a part of the music piece, the storage capacity of the audio file storage area 302a can be reduced. In addition, data corresponding to a pointer value of a music pointer 303b described later set in the RAM 303 and a reproduction time when each data is reproduced are defined in association with each data constituting the music data group. ing. In the first control example, the music is played back in the order of the value of the music pointer 303b. That is, when the reproduction time of the music data being reproduced has elapsed, the value of the music pointer 303b is updated by 1, and the music data corresponding to the updated pointer value is reproduced. Thereby, each music data can be reproduced in the same order every time.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 303 provided in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 107B is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the RAM 303. As shown in FIG. 107 (b), the RAM 303 is provided with at least a music data group storage area 303a, a music pointer 303b, a maximum value storage area 303c, and a music timer 303d.

  The music data group storage area 303a is a storage area for storing an audio file (music data group) corresponding to the music to be reproduced during the probable change state. During the probable change state, one music piece is played by playing back the music piece data group stored in the music piece data group storage area 303a in the order of the value of the music pointer 303b. . In the music data group storage area 303a, a command (voice lottery music command) output from the sound lamp control device 113 to instruct reproduction of the music determined by lottery at the start of the probable change state, or a game. When a command (audio selection music command) output to instruct reproduction of the music selected by the user is received, a music data group corresponding to the music specified by the command is read from the audio file storage area 302a. It is output and stored (see S9205 and S9210 in FIG. 116).

  In the first control example, when the reproduction of the music is started based on the music data group stored in the music data group storage area 303a, the reproduction position is made different depending on how the music was determined. And Specifically, when starting the reproduction of the music determined by the lottery at the start of the probable change state, the reproduction is started from the climax part (the reproduction of the climax 1 data is set), while the player selects it. When the reproduction of the determined music is started, the reproduction is started from the beginning (intro part) of the music (the reproduction of the intro data is set). For the music selected by the player, it is highly likely that the player wants to listen carefully from the beginning of the music, whereas for the music selected at random, if the player does not like it at all, the player This is because the music may be changed immediately. Therefore, for a song selected at random, by starting playback from the chorus part, which is the most exciting part of the song, at least let the player listen to the most characteristic part of the song, A decision can be made as to whether to change. As a result, the goodness (characteristics) of the randomly selected music can be transmitted (understood) to the player as much as possible, so that the player's favorite music can be easily increased (the randomly selected music). To make it easier to find new songs you like). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the probable change state.

  The music pointer 303b is a pointer for indicating which data in the music data group stored in the music data group storage area 303a is being reproduced. The value of the music pointer 303b is set to “00H” when the reproduction of the music selected by the player is instructed (the music is notified by the selected music command for voice) (see S9206 in FIG. 116). ). Accordingly, reproduction of intro data corresponding to the pointer value “00H” is set. On the other hand, when the reproduction of the music selected at random at the start of the probable change state is instructed (the music is notified by the audio lottery music command), the value corresponding to the rust 1 portion is set (FIG. 116). See S9211). The value of the music pointer 303b is updated by one each time the reproduction of one music data set in the music data group storage area 303a ends. Further, in a state where the value of the music pointer 303b is the maximum value set for each music type (in this first control example, the pointer value corresponding to one immediately before the outro portion), the pointer is further changed. When the value is updated, the value is updated to “01H”.

  Here, when the reproduction is completed up to one immediately before the outro portion, the value of the music pointer 303b is updated to “01H” corresponding to the A melody 1 portion without reproducing the outro portion and the intro portion. This is to make it difficult for the player to recognize a break in the music when the music is repeatedly reproduced. If the music is repeatedly reproduced by reproducing the music from the intro part after the music is reproduced up to the outro part, the player can easily recognize the break of the music. In this case, there is a possibility that the user may be worried about the breaks in the music and may not be able to concentrate on the game during the probable change state. On the other hand, in the present control example, when the music is repeatedly played, the music is looped with a more natural connection because the outro part and the intro part of the music are skipped and the music returns to the A melody 1 part. it can. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to notice a break in the music, so that the player can concentrate on the game in the probable change state.

  The maximum value storage area 303c is a storage area for temporarily storing the maximum value of the music pointer 303b. As described above, in the first control example, the A melody 1 portion and the portion immediately before the outro portion are repeatedly reproduced. However, the pointer value corresponding to the portion immediately before the outro portion is: May vary by song. Depending on the music, the C melody may be set next to the B melody, a plurality of types of chorus may be set, or the interlude may not be set, which is different from the data configuration shown in FIG. 109. There are cases. Therefore, when the music data group is stored in the music data group storage area 303a and the reproduction of the music is set, the music value pointer 303b corresponding to the music to be reproduced is stored in the maximum value storage area 303c. Is set in advance (see S9207 and S9212 in FIG. 116). Each time the reproduction of one music data set in the music data group storage area 303a ends, the value of the music pointer 303b is compared with the maximum value stored in the maximum value storage area 303c. , It is possible to determine whether or not the reproduction up to the part immediately before the outro part has been completed (whether or not the music pointer 303b should be returned to “01H”). As a result, even if the data configuration differs for each music piece, the intro part and the outro part can be reliably skipped and loop-reproduced.

  The music timer 303d is a timer for measuring the reproduction time of the music data being reproduced. The timer value corresponding to the reproduction time of the music data is set in the music timer 303d every time the reproduction of the new music data is set. The reproduction time of each music data is defined in the music data group storage area 303a in association with the type of the music data. During the reproduction of the music, it is determined whether or not the reproduction time has elapsed based on the value of the music timer 303d. Although not shown, the music timer 303d is updated periodically (for example, every 1 millisecond).

<Control processing of voice lamp control device in first control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the main processing 8 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first control example.

  Of the main processing 8 (see FIG. 110) in the first control example, in the processing of S4101 to S4111 and S4113 to S4118, S4101 to S4111 and S4113 of the main processing (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as the processing from S4118 to S4118 is executed. Further, in the main processing 8 (see FIG. 110) in the first control example, after the effect update processing in S4111 is completed, the operation (pressing) on the operation button 230 is monitored, and the operation is detected. An operation detection process for executing control is executed (S4141), and the process proceeds to S4142. Details of this operation detection processing (S4141) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the process of S4141 is completed, or if it is determined in the process of S4101 that 1 millisecond has not elapsed from the previous process (S4101: No), the command determination process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 36, the command determination process 8 is executed (S4142), and the process proceeds to S4113. Details of the command determination processing 8 (S4142) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 111, details of the above-described operation detection processing (S4141) will be described. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the operation detection processing (S4141). In the operation detection process (S4141), first, it is determined whether an operation (press) on the operation button 230 has been detected (S5101). In the process of S5101, the output of the signal line connected to each of the operation buttons 230 is detected, and if any output is H, it is determined that the operation on the operation button 230 has been detected.

  In the process of S5101, if it is determined that the operation on the operation button 230 has not been detected (that is, the output of the signals corresponding to all the buttons is L) (S5101: No), the process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the operation on the operation button 230 has been detected (that is, the output of the signal corresponding to any one of the buttons is H) (S5101: Yes), then the music selection permission flag 223ad is on. If the music selection permission flag 223ad is off (S5102: No), it means that the music cannot be selected, and the operation on the operation button 230 is invalidated. This processing ends as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5102, when it is determined that the music selection permission flag 223ad is on (S5102: Yes), it is determined whether the menu display flag 223ae is on (S5103). In the process of S5103, when it is determined that the menu display flag 223ae is off (S5103: No), the display of the music selection menu screen is set (S5104), and the menu display flag 223ae is set on (S5105). This processing ends. According to these processes, when the music selection menu screen is not displayed in the probable change state, the music selection menu screen can be displayed regardless of the type of the pressed button.

  On the other hand, if the menu display flag 223ae is determined to be on in the process of S5103 (S5103: Yes), different control is executed according to the type of button operated (pressed) by the player. More specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the operation detected in S5101 is an operation on the center button CB (S5106). If it is determined that the operation detected this time is an operation on the center button CB. (S5106: Yes) sets the audio selection music command for notifying the audio output device 226 of the reproduction of the music corresponding to the current value of the menu position pointer 223ab (S5107).

  When the processing of S5107 is completed, then, one is added to the number of music selections of the music set to be reproduced (selected) by the processing of S5107, and updated in each of the storage areas set in the music selection number storage area 223ac. Then, the music selection menu screen is closed, and the menu display flag 223ae is set to off (S5109), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5106 that an operation on the center button CB has not been detected (S5106: No), the value of the menu position pointer 223ab is updated according to the type of the button whose operation has been detected (S5110). ). In the process of S5110, when the press of the upper button UB is detected, 1 is subtracted from the value of the menu position pointer 223ab, and when the press of the lower button DB is detected, the menu position pointer 223ab is detected. Is added to the value of. Note that, when the depression of the upper button UB is detected in a state where the menu position pointer 223ab is “00H”, the pointer value is updated to the maximum value “19H”. Further, when the depression of the down button DB is detected in a state where the menu position pointer 223ab is at the maximum value “19H”, the pointer value is updated to “00H”.

  When the processing of S5110 ends, the display mode of the music selection menu screen is updated according to the value of the menu position pointer 223ab updated by the processing of S5110 (S5111), and this processing ends. In the process of S5111, the item (image indicating the type of music) corresponding to the value of the menu position pointer 223ab is arranged in the music selection area, and the item (music) corresponding to the two values before and after the current value of the menu position pointer 223ab is set. Are displayed above and below the music selection area.

  By executing the operation detection processing (see FIG. 111), the update of the music selection menu screen and the determination of the music according to the operation content (the type of the button whose press is detected) of the operation button 230 can be performed as desired by the player. Can be performed.

  Next, the command determination process 8 (S4142) of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIG. This command determination process 8 (S4142) is a process executed in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment, as described above.

  In the command determination process 8 (see FIG. 112), in each of the processes of S4301 to S4309, S4311 to S4313, and S4315, S4301 to S4309, S4311 to S4313 of the command determination process (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment, respectively. , And S4315 are executed. In the command determination process 8 (see FIG. 112) in the first control example, when it is determined that the status command has been received in the process of S4309 (S4309: Yes), the command is notified by the received status command. A state command process for executing control according to the game state is executed (S4351), and this process ends. Details of this state command processing (S4351) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the command determination process 8 (see FIG. 112) in the first control example, when it is determined in the process of S4313 that a hit-related command has been received (S4313: Yes), the hit-related process in the first embodiment is performed. Instead of (see FIG. 37), the hit-related process 8 is executed (S4352), and this process ends. The details of the hit-related process 8 (S4352) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, details of the above-described state command processing (S4351) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing this status command processing (S4351). This state command processing (S4351) is processing for performing control according to the gaming state notified by the state command, as described above.

  In this state command processing (see FIG. 113), first, the data in the game state storage area 223i is updated according to the game state notified by the state command received from the main control device 110 (S5201). That is, based on the information according to the game state notified by the state command, when the certain symbol change state and the normal symbol time-saving state are notified, the lower two bits of the game state storage area 223i are set to “11B”. When the low probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the ordinary symbol are notified, the lower 2 bits of the gaming state storage area 223i are set to “01B”, and the low probability state of the special symbol and When the normal state of the normal symbol is notified, the lower two bits of the gaming state storage area 223i are set to "00B". Thereby, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the sound lamp control device 113 can easily grasp the change.

  When the process of S5201 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the status command indicates a transition to a probable change state (a probable change state of a special symbol and a time saving state of a normal symbol) (S5202), and a transition to the probable change state is made. If it is determined that the status command is not a status command indicating No. (S5202: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5202 that the status command indicating the transition to the probable change status has been received (S5202: Yes), then the reproduction count is determined from the music selection count storage area 223ac (see FIG. 105 (b)). Up to three data are read in the descending order (S5203). If the number of songs selected by the player is less than three after the power is turned on, only the selected songs (that is, data of less than three) are read. If no music has been selected once after power-on (that is, the number of music selections corresponding to all music types in the music selection number storage area 223ac is 0), data is read out in the process of S5203. Never.

  When the processing of S5203 is completed, up to three data read in the processing of S5203 are stored in the history area (storage area corresponding to the values “17H” to “19H” of the menu position pointer 223ab) in the item arrangement storage area 223aa. The item (song) to be stored in the song selection area on the song selection menu screen is determined by lottery (S5205). Next, it is determined whether the item determined by the lottery in the process of S5205 is an item (song) already stored in the history area (S5206), and if the item is already stored in the history area (S5206: Yes). Then, in order to prevent the same item (song) from being arranged in the song selection area and the history area in duplicate, the process returns to the process of S5205 and the lottery is performed again.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5206, if it is determined that the item (song) determined by the lottery in the process of S5205 is not an item already stored in the history area (S5206: No), the item determined by the lottery in the process of S5205 is determined. An audio lottery music command for notifying the reproduction of the corresponding music is set (S5207). The audio lottery song command set here is output to the audio output device 226 by the command output process (S4102) of the main process 8 (see FIG. 110). When the audio output device 226 receives the audio lottery music command, the audio output device 226 sets the music specified by the command to be reproduced from the chorus 1 portion. Here, the reason why the music selected by random lottery is reproduced from the chorus 1 portion is that if the player does not like it at all, the player may change the music immediately. Therefore, for a song selected at random, by starting playback from the chorus part, which is the most exciting part of the song, at least let the player listen to the most characteristic part of the song, A decision can be made as to whether to change. As a result, the goodness of the randomly selected music can be transmitted to the player as much as possible, so that it is easy to increase the favorite music of the player (the music that is newly liked from the randomly selected music) Can be easily found). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the probable change state.

  When the processing in S5207 is completed, the item determined by the lottery in the processing in S5205 is stored in the storage area corresponding to the value “00H” of the menu position pointer 223ab in the item arrangement storage area 223aa (S5208), and is stored immediately before. The item in the order to be arranged following the selected item is specified with reference to the arrangement order (that is, the alphabetical order of music pieces) specified in the item order storage area 222aa (S5209). Then, it is determined whether the item (song) specified in the processing of S5209 is data (item) stored in the storage area corresponding to the value “00H” of the menu position pointer 223ab in the item arrangement storage area 223aa (S5210). If it is determined that an item other than the item stored in the storage area corresponding to the value “00H” of the menu position pointer 223ab in the item arrangement storage area 223aa has been specified (S5210: No), it is already stored in the history area. It is determined whether the item has been specified (S5211).

  In the process of S5211, if it is determined that the data not stored in the history area has been identified in the process of S5209 (S5211: No), the item identified in the process of S5209 is replaced with the process of S5208 or the previous process of S5212. Is stored in the storage area next to the storage area stored in (S5212), and the process returns to S5209. On the other hand, in the process of S5211, if it is determined that the item specified in the process of S5209 is already stored in the history area (S5211: Yes), the specified item is stored in the item arrangement storage area 223aa. Instead, the process returns to S5209 without skipping the process of S5212. The migration is performed in the process of S5209, in which the items stored in the storage area corresponding to “00H” are specified in the order specified in the item order storage area 222aa until the item stored in the storage area corresponding to “00H” is specified. The processing of S5212 stored in the item arrangement storage area 223aa is repeated.

  In the process of S5210, when it is determined that the item specified by the process of S5209 is an item stored in the storage area corresponding to the value “00H” of the menu position pointer 223ab in the item arrangement storage area 223aa (S5210: Yes), which means that the item is stored in the storage area corresponding to all of the values “00H” to “19H” of the menu position pointer 223ab in the item arrangement storage area 223aa, and has returned to “00H” after making a round. , S5209 to S5212, end the processing loop, and shift the processing to S5213. In the processing of S5213, the music selection permission flag 223ad is set to ON (S5213), and this processing ends.

  By executing this state command processing (see FIG. 113), the initial arrangement of the configuration of the music selection menu screen can be set. In addition, up to three items (music pieces) can be arranged in the history area on the music selection menu screen in descending order of the number of times selected by the player. That is, for the upper three arrangements of the music selection area, it is possible to arrange an item having a large number of selections by the player in the past game (an item having a high possibility of being selected by the player). Therefore, in each probable state, the item that the player has repeatedly selected so far (that is, the item that the player is likely to select even in the probable state this time) can be selected with little effort. This can make it difficult for the player to feel troublesome when selecting music (items).

  Also, each time the state changes, the music to be played first can be determined by random lottery. Thereby, at least immediately after the transition to the probable change state, the music selected at random can be reproduced, so that the player can be given an opportunity to listen to music other than the music frequently selected. Therefore, a plurality of music pieces set in the pachinko machine 10 can be reproduced without waste. In addition, while listening to a song selected at random, the player may like the song and want to play it even in a probable state after the next time. Therefore, since the number of music pieces that the player likes can be increased, the interest of the game in the probable change state can be improved. Further, by continuing to select only the same music, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the game from becoming monotonous.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 114, the details of the hit-related process 8 (S4352) will be described. FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the hit-related process 8 (S4352). Of the hit-related processes 8 (S4352) in the first control example, in each of the processes of S4401 to S4410, the same processes as the hit-related processes (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment are respectively executed.

  In the hit-related process 8 (see FIG. 114) in the first control example, when the process of S4406 ends, both the music selection permission flag 223ad and the menu display flag 223ae are reset to off (S4451), and the menu position is set. The value of the pointer 223ab is reset to “00H” (S4452), and this processing ends. By executing each process of S4451 and S4452, the flag and the pointer related to the music selection menu screen can be reset every time the opening command is received (that is, every time a big hit is won).

  In the first control example, the flag and the pointer related to the music selection menu screen are reset every time a jackpot is won. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that the reset process is executed only when a jackpot is won in the probability change state. Further, the configuration may be such that the reset process is executed at the start of the probable change state.

<Control processing of audio output device in first control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the main process executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 115A is a flowchart showing the contents of the main processing.

  When the main process of the audio output device 226 is executed, first, a command determination process for performing a process according to a command received from the audio lamp control device 113 is executed (S9001). Details of this command determination processing (S9001) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the processing of S9001, the audio setting processing for setting the reproduction of the audio data and the switching of the data is executed (S9002). Details of the audio setting process (S9002) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S9002 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 303 (S9003). If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S9003 (S9003: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S9005), and the power-off processing is executed (S9006). After the execution of the power-off processing, the power-off processing-in-progress flag is turned off (S9007), and thereafter, the processing is in an infinite loop.

  On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S9003 (S9003: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 303 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 303 (S9004), and the RAM 303 is destroyed. If not (S9004: No), the process returns to S9001, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 303 has been destroyed (S9004: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing.

  Next, a command interruption process executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 115 (b) is a flowchart showing the contents of the command interruption processing.

  This command interruption process (see FIG. 115B) is a process executed each time a command is received from the audio ramp control device 113.

  In this command interruption processing, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in a command buffer area provided in the RAM 303 (S9101), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are read out by a command determination processing described later, and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, the command determination process (S9001), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 115A), executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. In this command determination process (S9001), control is performed according to the types of various commands received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination processing (S9001).

  In the command determination process (see FIG. 116), first, it is determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S9201). If there is no unprocessed new command (S9201: No), the command determination process is performed. And returns to the main processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S9201: Yes), a new command flag indicating that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S9202), and then the new command flag stored in the command buffer area is set. The command type is analyzed for all the commands in the processing (S9203).

  First, it is determined whether or not the unprocessed command includes an audio selection music command for notifying a music selected by the player by operating the operation button 230 (S9204). When it is determined that there is a music command (S9204: Yes), an audio file (music data group) corresponding to the music notified by the command is read from the audio file storage area 302a of the ROM 302, and the read music file is read. The data group is stored in the music data group storage area 303a (S9205). Next, “00H” is set as the value of the music pointer 303b, and a timer value corresponding to the reproduction time of the intro data is set in the music timer 303d (S9206). As a result, the music selected by the player operating the operation button 230 can be played back from the beginning, so that the music selected by the player can be carefully read (complete from the beginning of the music) to the player. ) I can listen.

  When the processing of S9206 is completed, the maximum value of the music pointer 303b corresponding to the music data group stored in the music data group storage area 303a this time is stored in the maximum value storage area 303c (S9207). The data reproduction is set (S9208), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S9204, if it is determined that the command received from the audio ramp control device 113 does not include the selected music command for audio (S9204: No), then the command is received from the audio ramp control device 113. It is determined whether or not there is a voice lottery music command for notifying the music selected at random based on the fact that the command has changed to the probable change state (S9209). In the process of S9209, if it is determined that there is an audio lottery music command (S9209: Yes), the audio file (music data group) corresponding to the music indicated by the received audio lottery music command is stored in the audio file storage area 302a. Then, the read music data group is stored in the music data group storage area 303a (S9210).

  When the process of S9210 ends, next, a pointer value corresponding to the rust 1 portion is set to the value of the music pointer 303b, and a timer value corresponding to the reproduction time of the rust 1 data is stored in the music timer 303d. It is set (S9211). Then, the maximum value of the music pointer 303b corresponding to the music data group stored in the music data group storage area 303a this time is stored in the maximum value storage area 303c (S9212), and the reproduction of the chorus 1 data is set. (S9213), and terminates this process.

  On the other hand, in the process of S9209, if it is determined that the selected music command for audio has not been received from the audio ramp control device 113 (S9209: No), the process responds to other commands received from the audio ramp control device 113. The process is executed (S9214), and the process returns to S9201. In the process of S9214, if the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 is, for example, a command instructing reproduction of a sound effect, the reproduction of the type of sound effect specified by the command is set. If the command is a command for instructing reproduction of a warning sound, reproduction of a warning sound of a type specified by the command is set.

  Next, the details of the audio setting processing (S9002) executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in the main processing (see FIG. 115A) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the voice setting process (S9002).

  In the audio setting process (see FIG. 117), first, it is determined whether or not the music in the probable change state is being reproduced (S9301). : No), meaning that a single sound effect, a warning sound, or the like is being reproduced, or that no sound has been output, and there is no possibility of switching to another sound data during the reproduction of the sound. This processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S9301, if it is determined that the music in the probable change state is being played (S9301: Yes), it is next determined whether or not it is the end timing of the music data being played (S9302). In other words, it is determined whether or not the value of the music timer 303d has become 0, and when it is determined that the timing of the reproduction of the music data has not come (that is, the value of the music timer 303d has not become 0) (S9302: No), this process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S9302, when it is determined that the end timing of the music data being reproduced has come (that is, the value of the music timer 303d has become 0) (S9302: Yes), In the data group storage area 303a, a process for setting reproduction of the music data next to the music data whose reproduction has been completed this time is executed. Specifically, the data stored in the maximum value storage area 303c (the maximum value corresponding to the music data group currently being reproduced) is compared with the current value of the music pointer 303b (S9303). ), It is determined whether or not the value of the music pointer 303b matches the maximum value (data stored in the maximum value storage area 303c) corresponding to the current music data group (S9304).

  In the process of S9304, when it is determined that the value of the music pointer 303b does not match the maximum value corresponding to the current music data group (S9304: No), 1 is added to the value of the music pointer 303b. Then, the process is updated (S9305), and the process proceeds to S9307. On the other hand, in the process of S9304, when it is determined that the value of the music pointer 303b matches the maximum value corresponding to the current music data group (S9304: Yes), the value of the music pointer 303b is changed to “ 01H ”(S9306), and the process moves to S9307. By updating the value of the music pointer 303b to “01H” by the process of S9306, loop reproduction can be performed by returning to the A melody 1 portion of the set music. That is, the loop reproduction can be performed by skipping the intro part and the outro part.

  Here, if the music is played in a loop, if the music is played back to the outro portion and then played back from the intro portion, the loop is played back, so that the player can easily recognize a break in the music. Would. In this case, there is a possibility that the player may be worried about a break in the music, and the player may not be able to concentrate on the game during the probable change state. On the other hand, in the first control example, when the music is repeatedly played, the music is looped with a more natural connection because the outro part and the intro part of the music are skipped and the music returns to the A melody 1 part. be able to. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to notice a break in the music, so that the player can concentrate on the game in the probable change state.

  In the processing of S9307 executed after the processing of S9305 or S9306 ends, one music data corresponding to the updated value of the music pointer 303b is read from the music data group storage area 303a (S9307). Then, the reproduction of the read music data is set (S9308), and the process ends.

  By executing the audio setting process (see FIG. 117), the loop playback can be performed while skipping the intro portion and the outro portion of the set music in the probable change state.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first control example, the player's operation is performed on the third symbol display device 81 during the predetermined period during the normal game (for example, the period during which the probable change state is set). A configuration is provided in which a music selection menu screen is displayed in which the display mode (items displayed in the appearance mode illuminated in the music selection area) is changed in conjunction with the operation on the button 230. When the center button 230 is pressed, the music (voice effect) corresponding to the display mode of the music selection menu screen (the item displayed in the music selection area) is reproduced (executed). In addition, after a predetermined period, the configuration of the music selection menu screen displayed first is changed based on the type of music (the type of sound effect) selected by the player so far (at least last time). I have.

  More specifically, when the state shifts to the probable change state, first, one song (one sound effect type) is randomly selected from a plurality of songs (songs A to Z) and arranged in the song selection area. The item is determined, and playback of the selected music is started. In addition, during the probable change state, the player operates the operation button 230 so that the player can select an arbitrary music (arbitrary effect). At the time of transition to the probable change state, one song is randomly selected and played, so that the song can be played until the player selects the song (while the song is not selected). Since the reproduction can be performed, the player's satisfaction with the probable change state that is advantageous to the player can be further increased. In addition, as an initial arrangement of a screen for selecting music by operating the operation button 230 (music selection menu screen), there is a possibility that a player may select a music regardless of the type of music randomly selected at the start of the probable change state. (A music that has been frequently selected by a player in a game up to now) is arranged at a position that can be selected with a small number of operations (the number of operations within three) on the operation button 230. I have. Here, if the initial arrangement of the music selection menu screen is determined, randomly selected items (songs) are arranged in the music selection area, and the other items are simply determined with reference to the items arranged in the music selection area. With a configuration in which the music pieces are arranged in alphabetical order (predetermined order), it may be difficult for the player to select a favorite music piece. In other words, if the item (song) the player wants to select and the item (song) selected at random are separated in order, the item to be selected (image indicating the type of the song to be selected) is shifted to the song selection area. There is a possibility that the number of operations on the operation button 230 for causing the player to increase the number of times, which may cause the player to feel troublesome. Also, as a method of making it difficult to feel annoying, it is also conceivable to set an item to be initially arranged in the music selection area in the case of a probable change state as an item frequently selected by the player. According to the method, the player is satisfied with the music reproduced (output) first in the probable change state in the first place, and the possibility of not changing the music (not displaying the music selection menu screen) is increased. The fewer opportunities for the player to display the music selection menu, the fewer opportunities to know the type of music set in the pachinko machine 10. For this reason, the possibility that the player intends to select another music is reduced. Therefore, even if a large number of music pieces are set to be selectable for the pachinko machine 10, most of the music pieces may not be selected and may be wasted. Therefore, it is less likely that the player will consider selecting another song. Even if a large number of songs are set to be selectable for the pachinko machine 10, most of them are selected. Can be wasted.

  On the other hand, in the first control example, the initial arrangement of the music selection menu screen is set so that the item that is likely to be selected by the player (the item that has been frequently selected in the game so far) is easily selected. are doing. More specifically, it is possible to select three items (songs) that the player has frequently selected (the number of selections is high) in the game so far with a small number of operations (the number of times the operation button 230 is pressed). It is configured to be arranged at the position (display area for three upper parts of the music selection area). With this configuration, even if the first item (image indicating the type of music) arranged in the music selection area of the music selection menu screen becomes an item corresponding to any music, a small number of operations (up button Items that are frequently selected by the player can be arranged at positions that can be selected when the number of times the UB is pressed is within three times. Therefore, in each probable state, the item that the player has repeatedly selected so far (that is, the item that the player is likely to select even in the probable state this time) can be selected with little effort. This can make it difficult for the player to feel troublesome when selecting music (items).

  In the first control example, the playback position (execution start position) of the music (sound effect) is made variable in accordance with the setting of the playback of the music (sound effect). More specifically, the music selected by the player operating the operation button 230 starts playback from the beginning of the music (that is, the intro part) (from the second start position). On the other hand, at the start of the probable change state, the music determined (selected) by random lottery is configured to start playing from the chorus 1 portion of the music (from the second start position). As a result, the music selected by the player on his / her own will can be played in a complete form from the beginning of the music. On the other hand, the reason why the music selected by the random lottery is reproduced from the chorus 1 portion is that if the player does not like it at all, the player may change the music immediately. Therefore, for a song selected at random, by starting playback from the chorus part, which is the most exciting part of the song, at least let the player listen to the most characteristic part of the song, A decision can be made as to whether to change. As a result, the goodness of the randomly selected music can be transmitted to the player as much as possible, so that it is easy to increase the favorite music of the player (the music that is newly liked from the randomly selected music) Can be easily found). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the probable change state.

  In the first control example, the number of items displayed on the music selection menu screen is limited to five (a number smaller than the total number of items), and the operation buttons 230 are operated to change the items displayed on the music selection menu screen. By doing so, all items can be selected in conjunction with the operation of the player. Here, on the music selection menu screen, as a method of making it easy for a player to select a favorite music, all items are displayed collectively on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (items are arranged in a matrix). In this way, a method of making it possible to understand at a glance which music (item) is arranged at which position is also conceivable. However, in this method, the display area (the area of the music selection menu screen) for displaying each item becomes large, and the display for displaying other display contents (the third symbol, the number of retained balls symbol, etc.) is performed. The area may be too narrow. On the other hand, in the first control example, the number of items displayed on the music selection menu screen is limited to five (a number smaller than the total number of items). With this configuration, the display area of the music selection menu screen can be reduced as compared with a case where all items are displayed collectively. Accordingly, display contents other than the music selection menu screen, such as the third symbol and the number of retained balls symbol, can be displayed with a larger display area.

  In the first control example, for the music determined by random lottery at the start of the probable change state, the reproduction from the chorus 1 portion is set, and the operation is performed on the operation button 230 during the probable change state. Although the composition has been configured to be reproduced from the intro part, the composition is not limited to this. Conversely, for a song determined by random lottery, playback from the intro portion is set, while a song voluntarily selected by the player operating the operation button 230 is played from the chorus 1 portion. It is good also as a structure which does. Most of the players who voluntarily select a song want to listen to the chorus portion of the selected song, so by playing the voluntarily selected song from the chorus portion, it is possible to meet the player's request. It can be granted instantly. Also, by playing the music whose reproduction is determined by random lottery at the start (transition) of the probable change state from the intro part, the player can calmly select the music. More specifically, the intro part of the music generally has a relatively calm melody, whereas the chorus part of the music generally has a relatively intense melody. Therefore, by setting the reproduction from the intro part, it is possible to set so that a relatively calm melody flows first. Therefore, while the relatively calm melody is playing, the player can select the music in a calm mood. In addition, it is not always necessary to make the reproduction position different depending on how the reproduction is set. For example, regardless of the circumstances, the playback may be started from the chorus 1 part (that is, from the most exciting part of the music), or the playback may be started from the intro part. With this configuration, it is possible to omit the control of determining the details and changing the reproduction position, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  In the first control example, the history area is arranged above the music selection area on the music selection menu screen. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set to an arbitrary arrangement. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a history area is arranged below the music selection area. That is, a configuration may be adopted in which three items (songs) frequently selected by the player in the game so far are arranged below the music selection area.

  In the first control example, an area in which items with a large number of times (high frequency) selected by the player are arranged is provided as the history area, but the configuration of the history area is not limited to this. For example, in place of or in addition to the configuration of the first control example, an area in which items that are unlikely to be selected by the player based on the past tendency of the player are placed as the second history area, A configuration may be provided in a range where it is difficult for the user to select (the number of operations on the operation button 230 for selecting a song is relatively large). More specifically, for example, in a state where a randomly selected song is being played, if the song is changed to another song before the predetermined period elapses (for example, within 5 seconds), The music is set as an item that is unlikely to be selected by the player from the next time on, in a range that is relatively difficult for the player to select (for example, a range that cannot be selected without performing at least 10 operations or more). It is good also as a structure to make it. The fact that the music has been changed within the predetermined time period means that the music that the player does not want to listen to has been played, and that the player may have changed the music in a hurry. The possibility that the user does not want to listen (the possibility that the music is immediately changed when the music is reproduced) increases. That is, there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable by being reproduced. Therefore, by arranging music changed at a relatively early stage (within a predetermined period) during reproduction in the second history area, it is possible to eliminate the possibility of being selected at random lottery in the next and subsequent probable changes. At the same time, it is relatively easy to select other items (items that are more likely to be selected by the player than items arranged in the second history area) (can be selected with a relatively small number of operations). ) Position. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the music reproduced at the start of the probable change state will cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  In the first control example, the number of selections of each music piece after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 is counted for each music piece, and three items (music pieces) are arranged in the history area in descending order of the number of times. However, the method of estimating music pieces that are likely to be selected by the player is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the tendency of music selection for each player can be stored in an external server owned by the manufacturer that developed the pachinko machine 10. More specifically, the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 can display URL information for connecting to an external server in a format (for example, a two-dimensional barcode format) readable by a portable terminal. Constitute. The URL information is read by the mobile terminal, the external server is accessed from the mobile terminal, and the ID and the password registered in advance or newly registered this time are input, and the personal data (pachinko) of the player are input. The number of jackpots won by the machine 10 and the number of special symbol lotteries can be checked. In this item, the history and the number of times of the selected music are also set. Then, when the game using the pachinko machine 10 is started while logging in to the server, the selection history stored in the server is reflected on the pachinko machine 10, and the items to be stored in the selection area based on the selection history are determined. The configuration may be determined. As a method of reflecting the data of the server on the pachinko machine 10, for example, the data set in the server is converted into a password (encoded) and displayed on the portable terminal of the player, and the password is operated on the portable terminal. The pachinko machine 10 can be input by the user. That is, on the pachinko machine 10 side, the correspondence between the password and the history is specified in advance, and when the password is input, the history (the number of selections for each music) corresponding to the password is stored in the music selection frequency storage area 223ac. May be set in advance. With this configuration, it is possible to display a music selection menu screen in accordance with the tendency of each player, and thus provide the pachinko machine 10 that allows the player to more easily select his or her favorite music. be able to.

  In the first control example, the initial arrangement of the items on the music selection menu screen is varied according to the type and the number of music pieces selected by the player (the selection history of the player). It is not limited. When performing a player participation type effect, such as an effect prompting an operation on a predetermined operation button, the initial mode of the effect may be varied according to the player's participation status. For example, for a player who tends to participate actively, control is performed so that a production mode that prompts a greater number of operations is easily selected, while a player who participates in a production less frequently is selected. Alternatively, a configuration may be made in which control is performed so that an effect mode that prompts an operation with a relatively small number of operations is easily selected. Further, for example, in the case of a player who participates in the effect at a low frequency, it may be configured such that an effect in which an advantageous result for the player is notified by pressing the button with a high degree of expectation is easily executed. With this configuration, a player with a low participation frequency is more likely to want to participate in the press-down effect, so that an appropriate mode can be set according to the tendency of the player. Further, in this case, instead of determining the presentation mode according to the player's participation status (history), the presentation mode such as the number of operations may be randomly determined by lottery. With this configuration, it is not necessary to memorize the player's participation status, so that control can be simplified.

  In the first control example, when the player decides one music piece from the music selection menu screen, the playback is started from the head of the music piece regardless of the situation. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in a case where the remaining time until the end of the probable change state is short (for example, a case where a big hit is started when the currently-executing fluctuation display ends), the reproduction may be started from the rust portion.

  In the first control example, for a song randomly selected at the start of the probable change state, reproduction is started from the chorus portion of the song, while for a song selected by the player from the song selection menu screen, the song is selected from the beginning of the song. Although the playback is configured to be performed, the control for changing the playback position of the music (the type of music data to be used first) in accordance with the circumstances in which the playback of the music is determined is not limited to this. For example, when setting the playback of a song based on the start of the first round of the jackpot as the song to be played during the jackpot, the playback is started from the beginning (intro part) of the song, while the ending of the jackpot is performed. When the reproduction of the music is set based on the start of the period, the reproduction may be started from the outro portion of the music.

  In the first control example, the reproduction position of the music (sound production) is determined according to how the type of the music (sound production) was determined (whether the selection was made by random lottery or the player voluntarily selected). Although the effect execution position) is configured to be variable, this control is not limited to sound effects. For example, the present control may be applied to a display effect performed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, the circumstances in which the type of the effect is determined are not limited to those exemplified in the first control example (whether selected by random lottery or selected voluntarily by the player). For example, when the execution of a specific effect is determined under the condition that the variable display corresponding to the departure is being executed, the specific effect is configured to be executed from the beginning, while the variable display corresponding to the jackpot is performed. When the execution of a specific effect is determined under the situation that the is being executed, the execution may be started from the middle of the specific effect. With this configuration, it is possible to play a game while paying more attention to the contents of the effect.

  In the first control example, the initial arrangement of the music selection menu screen is changed according to the history of selection of music by the player (the number of times each music is selected). Although the control is arranged at a position that can be selected by the number of times, this control is not limited to the case of selecting a music piece. For example, a game composed of items corresponding to the volume of the sound output from the sound output device 226, items corresponding to the brightness of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, items corresponding to the game history, and the like. The menu screen is configured to be displayed by operating the operation button 230. Then, according to the history of the items selected by the player in the past, the items that are more likely to be selected by the player may be arranged at positions that can be selected with a smaller number of operations.

  In the first control example, the music selection menu screen is not displayed unless the operation button 230 is operated after the probable change state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The screen may be displayed. With such a configuration, the trouble of a player who wants to select a music can be reduced, so that the convenience of the player can be improved.

  In the first control example, the first item displayed in the music selection area is selected by random lottery. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which, as the first item displayed in the music selection area on the music selection menu screen, the item selected by the player last in the probability change state set before the current probability change state.

  In the first control example, up to three items are selected with a relatively small number of operations in the initial arrangement on the music selection menu screen (shifted to the music selection area) in the initial arrangement on the music selection menu screen in the order of the number of times the player has selected in the game so far. Although it was configured to be arranged at a position where it is possible, the present invention is not limited to this. It suffices if the player can easily understand where the music that is likely to be selected by the player (the music whose frequency has been selected so far) is located on the music selection menu screen. The arrangement may be such that it is displayed somewhere in the music area MR. With such a configuration, for example, even when the number of items to be displayed in the music area MR is increased beyond five, items that are highly likely to be selected by the player are displayed from the beginning. Can be kept. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to select an item, so that the convenience for the player can be improved.

  In the first control example, the display mode is different between the item displayed in the music selection area and the item displayed in the other display area. In addition to this, the player makes a selection. The display mode may be varied depending on whether or not the music has a high possibility (items arranged in the history area in the initial arrangement of the music selection menu screen). With this configuration, the player can more easily find items that are highly likely to be selected by the player, so that the convenience of the player can be improved.

  In the first control example, when the music determined by random lottery is reproduced at the start of the probable change state, the reproduction is started from the rust part which is the most characteristic part of the music. The playback position is not limited, and may be any playback position where the player's attention can be easily directed (the player can easily think of listening to a randomly selected music piece). For example, a piece of music that is partially used for another effect (for example, a variable display effect or the like) (for example, a song that starts playing from the A melody portion as back music of the effect at the start of the super reach reach effect). With regard to, the configuration may be such that music playback is started from the same playback start position as the playback start position set in the effect. With such a configuration, the reproduction can be started from the reproduction position that has been reproduced during the normal game (that is, the reproduction position relatively familiar to the player). Therefore, by playing from a melody that can be played during a normal game (a melody that is likely to have already been heard by the player), it is possible to draw the player's attention. Can be made.

  In the first control example, the music selection menu screen is configured to be displayed in the probable change state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that a song selection menu screen can be displayed during a jackpot, or may be displayed during a time saving state. Further, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, super reach effect) is selected as the effect mode during the execution of the fluctuation display, the music selection menu screen is displayed during the execution of the specific effect mode, and the fluctuation mode is displayed. A configuration may be made so that the player can freely select a music piece during execution of the display.

<Second control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 to 139. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above, at the start of the probable change state, the configuration is such that the reproduction of the music (voice effect) selected at random is started, and by operating the operation button 230, an arbitrary music ( Audio production). In addition, for a song selected at random, reproduction is started from the chorus part (the most exciting part in the song) of the song, whereas for a song voluntarily selected by the player, the beginning of the song (intro part) The playback was started from the beginning.

  On the other hand, in the second control example, the music (the type of the sound effect) during the jackpot is configured to be selectable by the player. The playback order of the music data is dynamically changed in accordance with the progress of the jackpot so that the rust portion is played as much as possible before the end of the final round. That is, at a predetermined timing during the execution of the jackpot (for example, at the start of the interval period immediately before the last round or at the start of the last round), the type (A melody 1, B melody 1, rust 1 and the like are discriminated, and when a part far from the rust portion is reproduced, the reproduction order of each music data constituting the music data group is rearranged, and the next reproduction is performed. The part is changed so that it is a part close to the rust part. By this means, by the end of the jackpot, the player can more reliably hear the chorus portion, which is the most exciting (most characteristic) portion of the music.

  Also, in the second control example, at the end of the final round of the jackpot, if the climax part (specific range) is being reproduced, the start timing of the ending effect is delayed so that the climax part is reproduced longer. It is configured to continue. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the climax part (most characteristic) of the music that is most exciting (most characteristic) from being forcibly terminated by the end of the jackpot. As a result, the rust portion can be more enjoyed for the player, so that the player's interest in the game during the jackpot can be improved.

  The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example is different from that of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in that the configuration of the audio output device 226 is partially changed. The configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 is partially changed, the configuration of the RAM 303 of the audio output device 226 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 is partially changed. This is a point that has been changed, and that the control processing executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 has been partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, an audio output device 226 Other processes executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example are the same as those in the first control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the jackpot configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 118, when the jackpot opening period is started, music dedicated to the opening period (opening music) is reproduced. When the opening period ends and the first round starts, a period during which music can be selected (song selection period) is set. In the music selection period, a music area MR (see FIGS. 101 (a) and 101 (b)) is formed on the left side of the third symbol display device 81, similarly to the probability change state in the first control example. The display contents for the music area MR are the same as those in the above-described first control example, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the second control example, even if the player selects the music by displaying the music selection menu screen (see FIG. 101B) during the music selection period, the reproduction is not immediately started (the reproduction is delayed). The playback of the music is set at the timing when the first round is completed. Also, during the first round in which the music selection period is set, music dedicated to the music selection period (music for selection) is reproduced. With such a configuration, during the round period of one round, the playback start timing of the music can be set whether the player has immediately selected the music or has selected the music immediately before the end of the round. Since it is possible to make them the same, it is possible to allow the user to carefully select the desired music during the music selection period. The initial arrangement of the items on the music selection menu screen is set by the same control as in the above-described first control example. That is, in the music selection area, music (items) selected by random lottery are arranged, and in the upper three display areas of the music selection area, the music (items) having a large number of selections by the player in the game up to now is displayed. ) Is placed.

  As shown in FIG. 118, when the round period ends and the interval period starts, the music selected by the player (if the player does not select a music on the music selection menu screen, the lottery at the start of the big hit is performed). , The reproduction of the music arranged in the music selection area) is started. The reproduction of the music continues at least until the final round of the jackpot ends. Then, when the final round ends and the ending period starts, the ending effect is basically started and the ending effect music is reproduced. As described above, when the chorus portion is being reproduced at the end timing of the final round, the reproduction of the chorus portion of the music is continued for a longer time by delaying the start timing of the ending effect. Since the climax part of the music that is the most exciting part can be heard by the player for a longer time, the interest in the game during the jackpot can be improved.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 118, in the big hit in the second control example, there are two reordering determination timings for determining whether to rearrange the reproduction order of the music data group (the interval period immediately before the last round in the big hit). At the start of the game and at the beginning of the last round of jackpots). At these reordering determination timings, based on the music reproduction position (the type of the currently reproduced music data), whether to rearrange the music data to be reproduced next (whether to change from the normal reproduction order) Is determined. In this determination, if it is determined that the music is to be rearranged, the number of parts (the number of music data to be reproduced) until the next chorus is reproduced is reduced (for the music currently set to be reproduced). The playback order of the music data is rearranged so that the playback of the chorus part is set next to the data group). As a result, the time until the next rust is reproduced can be shortened, so that the rust portion can be reproduced more reliably until the big hit ends. Note that whether or not the music data is of a type that is determined to be rearranged in the music reproduction order is set (defined) in a rearrangement determination table 222bb (see FIG. 123) described later.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 119 and 120, a description will be given of a specific example in the case where the reproduction order of music pieces is changed. FIG. 119 shows the change of the jackpot state when the reordering determination timing 1 (at the start of the interval period immediately before the last round) is determined during the reproduction of the music A, and the reproduction order is determined to be rearranged. An example of a correspondence relationship with a transition is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 119, during one round of the jackpot, a song selection song dedicated to the song selection period is reproduced as a song. If the music piece A is selected by the player during this time, the reproduction of the music piece A is started from the beginning (that is, from the intro portion of the music piece A) when one round of the jackpot is completed. Thereafter, in the order of arrangement of the music data group corresponding to the music A (the order of the value of the music pointer 303b associated with each data), from the A melody 1 part to the part immediately before the outro part Is played back in a loop.

  When the reordering determination timing 1 is reached while the loop reproduction is continued, it is determined whether or not the reproduction order of the music data is to be reconfigured. FIG. 119 illustrates a case where the A melody 1 portion is being reproduced at the time of the change determination timing 1. As shown in the middle part of FIG. 119 (transition of music before recomposition), if the A melody 1 part is being reproduced at the recomposition determination timing 1, the B melody 1 part is not reproduced until the final round of the jackpot. The last round is likely to end during playback. In other words, there is a high possibility that the reproduction of the music A will end before the player reaches the chorus 1 part, which is the part (the part) most likely to be heard by the player. Therefore, in this case, when the reordering determination timing 1 is reached, the replay order of the music data group is reordered, and the replay order is set so that the chorus 1 portion is easily reproduced by the end of the final round.

  More specifically, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 119 (transition of music after rearrangement), when the reproduction of the A melody 1 portion that was being reproduced at the time when the rearrangement is determined ends, the original (see FIG. 119) The control is performed such that the B melody 1 portion, which is the order of the transition before the rearrangement shown in the middle row, is skipped and the rust 1 portion is reproduced. More specifically, the pointer value of the music pointer 303b is updated to a value corresponding to the climax part 1 (data for climax 1) of the music A, and the reproduction of the climax data is set. In this way, in the final round, the climax part of the song, which is the most exciting part, can be made to be heard by the player. Can be.

  After the playback order is changed and the playback of the climax 1 is set, the playback is continued in the order of the value of the music pointer 303b. That is, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 119, if the jackpot end timing is not reached during the reproduction of the rust 1 portion, the interlude portion (interlude data) is reproduced as usual.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 120, a specific example will be described in which it is determined that the music playback order is to be rearranged at the rearrangement determination timing 2 (that is, the start timing of the last round of the jackpot). In the example of FIG. 120, the B melody 1 portion is being reproduced at the time of the rearrangement determination timing 1, and the reproduction of the B melody 1 portion is completed before the rearrangement determination timing 2 is reached, and the rust 1 portion is reproduced. It illustrates a case where a transition is made to reproduction.

  In the example of FIG. 120, at the rearrangement determination timing 1, the B melody 1 part is being reproduced, and the next part to be reproduced is the rust 1 part. There is a high possibility that one part will be in a reproduced state. Therefore, at the rearrangement determination timing 1, the rearrangement of the reproduction order is avoided. In the example of FIG. 120, at the rearrangement determination timing 2, the rust 1 portion is being reproduced. In this case, as shown in the middle part of FIG. 120, if the reproduction is continued without changing the reproduction order, the reproduction of the rust 1 part ends in the middle of the final round, and the next part of the rust 1 part is performed for a relatively long period. Is reproduced. Since the interlude portion has a relatively gentle melody, the interlude portion may be played for a long time in the final round, which may impair the player's interest in the jackpot game. Therefore, if the rust 1 portion is already being reproduced at the reordering determination timing 2, the music is reproduced in the order of reproduction, and as shown in the lower part of FIG. 120, after the rust 1 portion is reproduced, the rust 2 portion (the rust 1 portion) is reproduced. Set so that the next chorus is played. With such a configuration, in the final round of the jackpot, the climax part, which is the most exciting part of the music, can be continuously reproduced for a longer period. Therefore, the player's interest in the game in the final round of the jackpot can be improved.

  As described above, in the second control example, at a predetermined timing in the jackpot (at the start of the interval period immediately before the last round and at the start of the last round), the progress of the music (the current playback position in the music) is changed. Accordingly, a determination is made as to whether or not the playback order of the music should be changed. Then, in the final round of the jackpot, if the rust portion is not reproduced at all or the reproduction time may be shortened, the rust portion (the rust 1 portion, the rust 2 portion, etc.) is reproduced longer during the final round. Thus, the playback order of the music data is rearranged (at least the music data to be reproduced next is changed from a predetermined order (order of the value of the music pointer 303b)). In other words, the playback order of the music data is dynamically changed based on the progress status of the jackpot and the playback position of the music so that the chorus portion is played longer during a predetermined period (final round) of the jackpot. The configuration is such that With such a configuration, in the final round of the jackpot, the player can hear the climax portion of the music that is most prominent for a longer time. Therefore, the player can have a greater sense of excitement immediately before the end of the jackpot, thereby increasing the motivation of the player for the game.

  If the number of rounds is a jackpot with a relatively small number of rounds (eg, five rounds of jackpot B), there is a possibility that all rounds will end without reaching the rust portion in the first place. In particular, if the player ends the jackpot without listening to the rust portion (the rust 1 portion, the rust 2 portion, etc.) despite the fact that the player is displaying the song selection menu screen and playing the song that he voluntarily selected, There is a possibility that the player will be greatly discouraged. This is because when the player voluntarily selects a song, it is highly likely that he / she is looking forward to listening to the chorus portion of the selected song. On the other hand, in the second control example, the rust portion can be reproduced at least once before the final round of the jackpot ends. Therefore, the player who has selected the music can be satisfied.

  Here, as a method for reproducing the chorus portion in the final round of the jackpot, a method of setting reproduction of the music data corresponding to the chorus portion at the start of the final round regardless of the progress of the music may be considered. . However, according to this method, there is a possibility that the connection of the music may become unnatural before and after the start of the final round (that is, before and after switching to the reproduction of the rust portion). That is, there is a high possibility that the reproduction of the rust portion is suddenly started in the middle of another part. Therefore, according to this method, the player may have a sense of incongruity with the music being played, and may suspect that the pachinko machine 10 is out of order. That is, it is doubtful whether the pachinko machine 10 is operating normally, and there is a possibility that the player may have anxiety about the game. On the other hand, in the second control example, the playback order of the music data is rearranged (variable) in units of parts (units of melody (tune)). The music can be reproduced with a small voice mode. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game during the jackpot with ease.

  In the second control example, at the start of the interval period immediately before the last round in the jackpot, and at the start of the last round, a determination is made as to whether or not to change the reproduction order of the music data. It is not limited to this. The number of times and timing for determining whether to rearrange the reproduction order can be arbitrarily determined.

  Further, in the second control example, the playback order of the music data is rearranged so that the chorus portion is reproduced longer during the last round. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the chorus portion is reproduced. The round can be set arbitrarily.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 121, a description will be given of the correspondence between the transition of the jackpot state and the transition of the music part when the start timing of the ending effect is delayed. FIG. 121 is a diagram exemplifying a case where the reproduction of the music data is rearranged, and as a result, the chorus 2 part is being reproduced at the end of the final round.

  The top row of FIG. 121 shows the transition of the state at the jackpot, the second row from the top shows the transition of the music when it is assumed that the start of the ending effect has not been delayed, and the second row from the bottom shows the rust portion. Shows the transition of the music when the start timing of the ending effect is delayed in order to play back longer, and the lowermost portion shows the transition of the effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the big hit. I have.

  As shown in the second diagram from the top in FIG. 121, if the delay control of the ending effect is not performed, the reproduction of the music is stopped during the reproduction of the chorus 2 portion, and the music for the ending is reproduced. In this case, even though the player has listened to the most exciting part, it may give the impression that a different melody has started suddenly, and the player may be dissatisfied. Therefore, in the second control example, when the rust portion (the rust 1 portion, the rust 2 portion, and the like) is being reproduced at the end timing of the final round of the jackpot, a diagram shown in the second row from the bottom in FIG. 121 is shown. As described above, the timing at which the ending music is reproduced is delayed, and the rust portion is continuously reproduced for a longer time. Along with this, the effect mode displayed during the big hit is continued as it is. In other words, even though the ending period has actually started, the effect is as if the big hit has continued from the end of the final round until a predetermined period (for example, a maximum of 4 seconds) has elapsed. The mode (display mode, audio mode) is set.

  With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the music is terminated during the reproduction of the rust portion, and to increase the climax portion of the tune, which is longer than the climax part of the music, before the ending effect of the jackpot starts. The part can be heard by the player. Therefore, it is possible to give a greater satisfaction to the player who has selected the music.

<Electrical configuration in second control example>
Next, an electrical configuration in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 122A is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the ROM 222 according to the second embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 122 (a), the configuration of the ROM 222 in the second control example is different from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the above-described first control example (see FIG. 104 (a)) in the music data group type storage area. 222ba, a rearrangement determination table 222bb, and an ending effect selection table 222bc are added.

  The music data group type storage area 222ba is a data table that stores the configuration of a music data group corresponding to each music. In the music data group type storage area 222ba, at least information indicating a reproduction order and a reproduction time of each music data constituting the music data group is defined for each music type. In the above-described first control example, the type of the music to be reproduced and the circumstances in which the music is determined (whether the music is selected by random lottery or the music selected by the player) in the sound lamp control device 113. ) Is notified to the audio output device 226, and thereafter, the music output data is loop-reproduced in the audio output device 226 in a predetermined order. That is, it is not necessary for the sound lamp control device 113 to grasp the progress of the music being reproduced. On the other hand, in the second control example, the reproduction order of the music data is changed according to the progress status of the jackpot and the music reproduction position (the type of the music data being reproduced), and the ending effect start timing It is necessary to execute the delay control. For this reason, it is necessary for the audio lamp control device 113 to also know the playback position of the music (the type of music data currently being reproduced) and the like. Therefore, in the second control example, the configuration is such that the music data group storage area 222ba is defined, and the configuration of the music data group set in the audio output device 226 and the music data being used (reproduced). The type of data, the type of music data to be reproduced next, and the like can be grasped.

  The rearrangement determination table 222bb is a data table that is referred to to determine whether or not the reproduction order of the music data is rearranged when one of the rearrangement determination timings 1 and 2 at the jackpot. The rearrangement determination table 222bb includes, in accordance with the type of the music data currently set to be reproduced, a determination result as to whether or not to rearrange the music data, and the music data to be set next to be reproduced when the rearrangement is determined. The type is specified. Details of the rearrangement determination table 222bb will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 123 is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the rearrangement determination table 222bb. As shown in FIG. 123, the rearrangement determination table 222bb includes, for each music type, the type of the music data that is being reproduced at the time of the rearrangement determination timing and the determination result (the reproduction order is Whether or not it is determined to be rearranged) is defined in association with each other.

  More specifically, for example, for the A melody 1 portion of the music A, “OK” is defined in association with the discrimination result, and the type of the music data to be reproduced next is “Rust”. "1" is defined in association with this. For this reason, if the reordering determination timing comes during the reproduction of the A melody 1 part, the rust 1 part is reproduced after the reproduction of the A melody 1 part is completed (the reproduction of the B melody 1 part is skipped). Thus, the reproduction order of the music data is rearranged. In addition, “impossible” is defined in association with the B melody 1 as a determination result. For this reason, even if the reordering determination timing is reached during the reproduction of the B melody portion, the reproduction order of the music data cannot be changed. Therefore, after the reproduction of the B melody 1 part is completed, the rust 1 part is reproduced as usual.

  Similarly, as shown in FIG. 123, “OK” is associated with the chorus 1 portion, the interlude portion, and the A melody 2 portion of the music A as the determination result, and As the type of the music data to be reproduced, “rust 2” is associated and defined. For this reason, in the case where the rearrangement determination timing is reached during the reproduction of the chorus 1 portion, the interlude portion, or the A melody 2 portion, after the reproduction of the chorus 1 portion, the interlude portion, or the A melody 2 portion is completed, the chorus 2 is completed. The reproduction order of the music data is rearranged so that the part is reproduced. In addition, “impossible” is defined in association with the B melody 2 portion of the music A as the determination result. Therefore, after the reproduction of the B melody 2 portion is completed, the rust 2 portion is reproduced as usual. Furthermore, “OK” is associated and defined as the determination result for the rust 2 portion in the music A, and “Rust 1” is associated and defined as the type of music data to be reproduced next. Have been. For this reason, if the reordering determination timing is reached while the climax part 2 is being reproduced, the reproduction order of the music data is rearranged so that the climax part 2 is reproduced after the reproduction of the climax part 2 ends.

  Similarly, with respect to the music B and thereafter, the combination determination is performed in a state where a relatively distant reproduction position (a reproduction position where one or more parts are separated) is being reproduced with respect to the climax part set in the music a plurality of times. When the timing comes, the data of the rearrangement determination table 222bb is defined so that the latest rust portion is reproduced after the currently reproduced part ends. With this configuration, the rust portion can be more reliably reproduced in the final round, so that the most exciting portion of the music can be reproduced and then the big hit can be ended. Therefore, the player's interest in the jackpot game can be improved.

  Returning to FIG. 122 (a), the description will be continued. The ending effect selection table 222bc is a data table that defines an ending effect mode for each timing when the ending effect is started. As described above, in the second control example, when the end timing of the last round is reached during the reproduction of the rust portion (the rust 1 portion, the rust 2 portion, and the like), the reproduction of the rust portion is continued, and the ending effect. The start is delayed. Here, even if the start timing of the ending effect is delayed, the ending effect execution period is shortened by the delay because the jackpot ending period is constant. In the second control example, a plurality of ending effects that can be selected in accordance with the ending effect execution period are defined in the ending effect selection table 222bc. Details of the ending effect selection table 222bc will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 124 is a diagram showing the stipulated contents of the ending effect selection table 222bc. As shown in FIG. 124, in the ending effect selection table 222bc, the selection is made for each range of the remaining time (the value of the remaining reproduction time timer 223bb) until the end of the rust portion reproduction at the end of the final round of the jackpot. The type of the ending effect to be performed is defined in association with each other. The timer value corresponding to the reproduction time of the data is set in the remaining reproduction time timer 223bb at the timing when the reproduction of the music data is set, and the value is periodically decremented by one (every millisecond). It is configured to be.

  As shown in FIG. 124, for the range where the value (T) of the remaining reproduction time timer 223bb is 1000 or less (that is, the remaining reproduction time of the rust portion at the end of the last round is 1 second or less), the normal An ending effect (normal ending) of the mode is defined in association with the ending effect. This normal ending effect has an effect time of 4 seconds. That is, the period from the start of the ending period to the end of the ending effect (the sum of the remaining playback time of the rust portion and the normal ending effect period) is longer than 4 seconds and not more than 5 seconds. Is set to On the other hand, the jackpot ending period is set to 5 seconds. In other words, between the end of the normal ending effect and the end of the ending period, a maximum of about 1 second is provided. In the present control example, during the ending effect, an image (result image) for notifying the number of prize balls acquired by the player during the big hit is displayed, and a difference from the end of the ending effect to the end of the ending period is displayed. During the period, the result image is continuously displayed as a still image. This can prevent (suppress) the player from having the impression that the effect has been interrupted during the period from the end of the ending effect to the actual end of the ending period. .

  The value (T) of the remaining playback time timer 223bb is greater than 1000 and less than or equal to 2000 (that is, the remaining playback time of the rust portion at the end of the final round is greater than 1 second and less than or equal to 2 seconds). On the other hand, as the type of the ending effect, a shortened ending 1 in which the effect time is 3 seconds is defined in association with the ending effect. That is, the sum of the remaining reproduction time of the rust portion and the effect time of the ending effect is set to be longer than 4 seconds and equal to or less than 5 seconds. Therefore, also in this case, the period from the end of the ending effect to the actual end of the ending period can be set to 1 second or less. Therefore, the period during which the result image is continuously displayed as a still image can be shortened, so that it is possible to prevent a player from feeling uncomfortable with the display content of the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, the value (T) of the remaining reproduction time timer 223bb is larger than 2000 and equal to or less than 3000 (that is, the remaining reproduction time of the rust portion at the end of the last round is longer than 2 seconds and equal to or less than 3 seconds). For the range, a shortened ending 2 in which the production time is 2 seconds is associated and defined as the type of the ending production. That is, similarly to the case where the normal ending or the shortened ending 1 is set, the sum of the remaining playback time of the rust portion and the rendering time of the ending effect is longer than 4 seconds and not more than 5 seconds. Is set. For the range in which the value (T) of the remaining reproduction time timer 223bb is larger than 3000, the shortening ending 3 in which the rendering time is 1 second is defined as the type of the ending rendering. Here, in the second control example, in order to secure the ending effect production time, the start timing of the ending effect is not delayed by more than 4 seconds. That is, if the chorus portion continues to be reproduced even after 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the ending period, the reproduction of the music (big hit effect) is terminated and the ending effect is executed. Therefore, when the shortened ending 3 is set, the reproduction time of the rust portion can be limited to between 3 seconds and 4 seconds. Therefore, as in the case where the normal ending and the shortened endings 1 and 2 are set, the sum of the playback time of the rust portion and the production time of the ending effect is set to be longer than 4 seconds and 5 seconds or less. Is set.

  As described above, in the second control example, at the time when the end timing of the last round is reached, if the climax part is being reproduced, the start timing of the ending effect is delayed. Then, according to the length of the period from the start of the ending period to the end of the reproduction of the rust portion (or the termination of the reproduction), the mode of the ending effect is changed, and the remaining time of the rust portion is set. Regardless of this, the ending effect can be ended before the ending period ends. With this configuration, it is possible to allow the player to listen to the chorus portion, which is the most exciting portion of the music, for a longer time, and to execute an ending effect without a sense of incongruity.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 122B is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 122 (b), the configuration of the RAM 223 in the second control example is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example (see FIG. 104 (b)) by the reproduction data type storage area 223ba and the remaining The difference is that a playback time timer 223bb, an ending delay flag 223bc, a music type storage area 223bd, an ending type storage area 223be, and a delay period timer 223bf are added. The other configuration is the same as that of the RAM 223 in the above-described first control example, and a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.

  The reproduction data type storage area 223ba is a storage area for storing data indicating the type of music data being reproduced by the audio output device 226. During the song playback period at the jackpot, the playback position of the song is specified based on the data stored in the playback data type storage area 223ba, and the playback order of the song data is changed when the combination determination timing comes. It can be determined whether or not to rearrange. Each time a music command is received from the audio output device 226, the reproduction data type storage area 223ba is updated to a value corresponding to music data of the type indicated by the command (see S5701 in FIG. 135). Here, in the sound output device 226, when the reproduction time of one music data ends and the reproduction of the next music data is set, the audio output device 226 sets the type of the music data to be set to the sound lamp control device. This is a command for notifying 113. With the music command, the type of the music data reproduced by the audio output device 113 can be accurately grasped on the audio lamp control device 113 side.

  The remaining playback time timer 223bb is a timer for measuring the remaining playback time of the music data. The remaining playback time timer 223bb is updated periodically (for example, every 1 millisecond). If the climax part is being reproduced at the end timing of the jackpot final round, the remaining reproduction time of the climax part is specified with reference to the timer value of the remaining reproduction time timer 223bb. The effect type of the ending effect is determined according to the remaining playback time and the contents of the ending effect selection table 222bc described above (see S5603 in FIG. 134).

  The ending delay flag 223bc is a flag indicating whether or not it is a period during which the execution start of the ending effect is delayed. If the ending delay flag 223bc is on, it indicates a period (ending delay period) from when the delay of the start of the ending effect is determined to when the ending effect is started. On the other hand, if the ending delay flag 223bc is off, it indicates that the ending is not in the ending delay period. The ending delay flag 223bc is set to ON when the chorus portion is being reproduced at the time when the ending command is received (S5605 in FIG. 134). In addition, when the ending delay period has elapsed and the start of the ending effect is set, the setting is turned off (see S5306 in FIG. 129).

  The music type storage area 223bd is a storage area for storing data corresponding to the type of music selected by the player during the music selection period set in the first round of the jackpot. In the music type storage area 223bd, data corresponding to one music (item) determined by random lottery at the start of the music selection period (that is, the first round of the jackpot) is stored (S5221 in FIG. 132). reference). When a music is selected by the player during the music selection period, data corresponding to the selected music is overwritten (see S5121 in FIG. 128). At the end of the music selection period (the first round of the jackpot), a voice selection music command for notifying the reproduction of the music corresponding to the data stored in the music type storage area 223bd is set (S5507 in FIG. 133). reference).

  The ending type storage area 223be stores the ending effect type determined according to the ending effect selection table 222bc and the timer value of the remaining playback time timer 223bb when the ending effect start timing is delayed. This is a storage area for storing during the period. The ending portion is stored in the ending type storage area 223be at the time when the ending command is received, and when the delay of the start of the ending effect is determined and the effect type of the ending effect is determined, the determination is made. The data corresponding to the rendered effect type is stored (see S5604 in FIG. 134). When the ending delay period has elapsed, the start of the ending effect corresponding to the data stored in the ending type storage area 223be is set (see S5305 in FIG. 129).

  The delay period timer 223bf is a timer for measuring an elapsed time (length of the ending delay period) after the start delay of the ending effect is determined. The delay period timer 223bf is updated periodically (for example, every 1 millisecond) during the ending delay period. If it is determined based on the value of the delay period timer 223bf that the length of the ending delay period has reached 4 seconds before the reproduction of the rust portion ends, the ending delay period is terminated. An ending effect is started (see S5303 in FIG. 129).

  Next, the configuration of the audio output device 226 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 125 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the audio output device 226 in the second control example. As shown in FIG. 125, the configuration of the audio output device 226 in the second control example is different from the configuration of the audio output device 226 in the first control example (see FIG. 106) in that an input / output port is used instead of the input port 305. The present embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that a 311 is provided, a bus line 312 is provided in place of the bus line 304, and the configuration of the RAM 303 is partially changed.

  The reason why the input / output port 311 and the bus line 312 are changed is that a command can be output from the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 to the audio ramp control device 113. That is, the input / output port 311 and the bus line 312 are configured to be able to communicate in both directions, that is, the direction from the sound lamp control device 113 to the MPU 301 and the direction from the MPU 301 to the sound lamp control device 113.

  Next, a configuration of the RAM 303 of the audio output device 226 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 126 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 303. As shown in FIG. 126, the RAM 303 in the second control example is different from the configuration of the RAM 303 in the first control example (see FIG. 107B) in that a rearrangement waiting flag 303e and a rearrangement type storage area 303f are added. It is different in that it is. Other configurations are the same as those in the first control example described above, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The rearrangement waiting flag 303e is a flag indicating a period from when the voice lamp controller 113 notifies the user of the change of the reproduction order of the music data to when the rearrangement of the order is actually set. The type storage area 303f is a storage area for storing data corresponding to the type notified from the audio lamp control device 113 as the type of music data to be set for reproduction first after rearrangement of the reproduction order. . When a voice recombination command for notifying the rearrangement of the reproduction order of the music data is received from the audio ramp control device 113, the data corresponding to the type of the music data notified by the command is stored in the rearrangement type storage area 303f. And the rearrangement waiting flag 303e is set to ON (see S9402 and S9403 in FIG. 138). If the reproduction time of the music data being reproduced elapses while the rearrangement waiting flag 303e is on, the music data corresponding to the data stored in the rearrangement type storage area 303f is the next music data to be reproduced. This is set (see S9313 in FIG. 139).

<Regarding control processing of voice lamp control device in second control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 to 135. First, the main process 9 executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. The main process 9 is a process executed in place of the main process 8 (see FIG. 110) in the first control example.

  Of the main processing 9 (see FIG. 127) in the second control example, in the processing of S4101 to S4111 and S4113 to S4118, respectively, S4101 to S4111 of the main processing 8 (see FIG. 110) in the first control example, and The same processes as those in S4113 to S4118 are executed.

  In the main process 9 (see FIG. 127) in the second control example, when the effect update process in S4111 ends, the operation detection process 9 is executed instead of the operation detection process (see FIG. 111) in the first control example. (S4151). In the operation detection process 9 (S4151), similarly to the operation detection process (see FIG. 111) in the first control example, the operation (press) of the operation button 230 is monitored, and the control corresponding to the detection of the operation is performed. This is the process to be executed. This operation detection processing 9 (S4151) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the operation detection process 9 (S4151) is completed, an ending effect for determining whether or not to start the ending effect in a period (ending delay period) while the delay of the start of the ending effect is set is next. A start determination process is performed (S4152). Details of the ending effect start determination processing (S4152) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the ending effect start determination process (S4152) is completed, a command determination process 9 is executed instead of the command determination process 8 (see FIG. 112) in the first control example (S4153), and the process proceeds to S4113. In this command determination process 9 (S4153), a hit-related process 9 (S4361) is executed instead of the hit-related process 8 (see FIG. 114) in the command determination process 8 (see FIG. 112) in the first control example. Since they are the same except for the point described above, their illustration is omitted.

  Next, the details of the above-described operation detection processing 9 (S4151) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the operation detection process 9 (S4151) in the second control example. As described above, this operation detection process 9 (S4151) is a process executed in place of the operation detection process (see FIG. 111) in the first control example. This is a process for monitoring an operation (pressing) on the button 230 and executing control corresponding to the detection of the operation.

  Of the operation detection processing 9 (see FIG. 128) in the second control example, in steps S5101 to S5106 and S5109 to S5111, the processings S5101 to S5106 in the operation detection processing (see FIG. 111) in the first control example are respectively performed. And the same processing as the processing of each of S5109 to S5111 is executed. In the operation detection process 9 in the second control example, if it is determined in the process of S5106 that an operation on the center button CB has been detected (S5106: Yes), the music corresponding to the current value of the menu position pointer 223ab is determined. Data indicating (currently arranged in the music selection area of the music selection menu screen) is stored in the music type storage area 223bd (S5121), and the process proceeds to S5109.

  By this operation detection processing 9 (see FIG. 128), the arrangement of items on the music selection menu screen can be changed according to the operation contents of the player's operation buttons 230, and a decision operation by the player during the music selection period. When (the operation of pressing the center button CB while the music selection menu screen is displayed) is set, the music (music) arranged in the music selection area is set to be loop-reproduced during the music reproduction period. be able to.

  Next, the details of the above-described ending effect start determination processing (S4152) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 129. The ending effect start determination process (S4152) is a process for determining whether to start an ending effect during the ending delay period, as described above.

  In the ending effect start determination process (see FIG. 129), first, it is determined whether the ending delay flag 223bc is on (S5301). If it is determined that the ending delay flag 223bc is off (S5301: No), the ending is performed. This means that it is not a delay period, and there is no possibility to set the start of the ending effect, so this processing ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5301 that the ending delay flag 223bc is on (S5301: Yes), it means that the ending delay period is in effect, and the ending effect is started after the ending delay period ends. A process is performed to determine whether or not it is not.

  Specifically, first, it is determined whether the value of the remaining reproduction time timer 223bb is 0 (S5302). In the process of S5302, if it is determined that the value of the remaining playback time timer 223bb is not 0 (that is, it is 1 or more) (S5302: No), it means that the playback of the chorus portion of the music has not been completed. Therefore, it is determined whether the value of the delay period timer 223bf is 4000 or more (S5303). That is, it is determined whether four seconds or more have elapsed since the start of the ending effect was delayed. In the process of S5303, when it is determined that the value of the delay period timer 223bf is not equal to or greater than 4000 (less than 4000) (S5303: No), the ending delay period is continued (the reproduction of the chorus portion of the music is continued). Therefore, the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5303, when it is determined that the value of the delay period timer 223bf is 4000 or more (S5303: Yes), the processes of S5304 to S5306 for setting the start of the ending effect are executed. Also, in the process of S5302, when it is determined that the value of the remaining playback time timer 223bb is 0 (that is, the playback time of the rust portion has ended) (S5302: Yes), the process proceeds to S5304, and the ending effect is produced. Set the start of

  In the processing of S5304, the effect type (one of normal ending and shortened ending 1 to 3) of the ending effect corresponding to the data stored in the ending type storage area 223be is specified (S5304), and the specified effect type is determined. A display ending command and a voice ending command for executing an ending effect are set (S5305). Then, by setting the ending delay flag 223bc to off, the end of the ending delay period is set (S5306), and this processing ends.

  By this ending effect start determination processing (see FIG. 129), while the ending delay period is set, the reproduction status of the music (whether or not the reproduction of the chorus portion has ended) and the length of the ending delay period are determined. Then, the ending production start can be set at an appropriate timing.

  Next, the details of the hit-related process 9 (S4361) will be described with reference to FIG. The hit-related process 9 (S4361) is a process executed in place of the hit-related process 8 (see FIG. 114) in the first control example, and is the same as the hit-related process 8 (see FIG. 114). This is a process for executing control corresponding to the type of the command related to the hit received from 110.

  Among the hit-related processes 9 (S4361), the processes of S4401 to S4407 and S4409 are the same as the processes of S4401 to S4407 and S4409 of the hit-related process 8 (see FIG. 114) in the first control example, respectively. The processing is executed. In the hit-related process 9 (S4361) in the second control example, when it is determined in the process of S4407 that the command received from the main control device 110 includes the round number command (S4407: Yes) ), A round number command process for performing control according to the round number indicated by the round number command is executed (S4461), and this process ends. Details of the round number command processing (S4461) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the hit-related process 9 (see FIG. 130) in the second control example, when it is determined in the process of S4407 that the command received from the main control device 110 does not include the round number command ( (S4407: No) Next, it is determined whether or not an interval command indicating the start of the interval period has been received from the main control device 110 (S4462). In the process of S4462, when it is determined that an interval command has been received (S4462: Yes), an interval command process for performing control in accordance with the type of interval (what round interval is) is executed ( (S4463), this process ends. Details of this interval command processing (S4463) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S4462, if it is determined that the interval command is not included in the command received from main controller 110 (S4462: No), the process proceeds to S4409.

  In the hit-related process 9 (see FIG. 130) in the second control example, when it is determined in the process of S4409 that the ending command is included in the command received from the main control device 110 (S4409: Yes), an ending command process for determining whether or not to delay the start of the ending effect according to the reproduction state of the music is executed (S4464), and this process ends. The details of the ending command process (S4464) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4409, when it is determined that the ending command is not included in the command received from the main control device 110 (S4409: No), then, the music command output from the voice control device 226 is received. It is determined whether the music command is received (S4465). If it is determined that the music command is received (S4465: Yes), the reproduction data type storage area 223ba and the reproduction time are set according to the type of the music data indicated by the music command. Music command processing for updating the timer 223bb is executed (S4466), and this processing ends. Details of the music command processing (S4466) will be described later with reference to FIG. 135. If it is determined in the processing of S4465 that the music command has not been received (S4465: No), the present processing is terminated.

  Next, the details of the round number command processing (S4461) will be described with reference to FIG. In the round number command processing (S4461), first, a display round number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the round number indicated by the round number command is set (S5401), and then the round indicated by the round number command is set. It is determined whether the number is the round number corresponding to the last round in the current jackpot (S5402).

  In the process of S5402, when it is determined that the round to be started this time is the last round (S5402: Yes), it is determined that the reordering determination timing 2 (the timing for determining whether or not the reordering of the music pieces is to be reordered) has come. This means that the respective processes of S5403 to S5405 for determining whether to change the reproduction order are executed. Specifically, the contents of the rearrangement determination table 222bb are compared with the data stored in the reproduction data type storage area 223ba (S5403), and the type of the music data currently being reproduced (the part being reproduced) is determined. Then, it is determined whether or not the playback order is of a type to be rearranged (S5404).

  In the process of S5404, when it is determined that the type of the music data being reproduced is the type in which the reproduction order should be rearranged (S5404: Yes), the result of the rearrangement of the reproduction order (for the currently reproduced music An audio rearrangement command for notifying of the type of music data to be set for reproduction next to the data is set (S5405), and the process ends. The voice rearrangement command set here is output to the voice output device 226 in the command output process of the main process 9 (see S4102 in FIG. 127). When the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 receives the audio rearrangement command, the MPU 301 stores data indicating the rearrangement result (the type of audio data to be reproduced next) notified by the command in the rearrangement type storage area 303f. Then, when the reproduction period of the currently reproduced music data has elapsed, reproduction of the rearranged music data is started. This makes it possible to more reliably reproduce the climax portion of the song that is the most exciting before the final round ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5404 that the data reproduction order is not the type to be rearranged (S5404: No), the rust portion is reproduced before the end of the final round, even if the reproduction order is not rearranged. Since there is a high possibility, the process of S5405 is skipped, and the process ends.

  In the process of S5402, if it is determined that the number of rounds notified by the round number command is not the last round (S5402: No), then it is determined whether the notified number of rounds is the first round. It is determined (S5406). In the process of S5406, when it is determined that the notified number of rounds is the first round (S5406: Yes), a music selection period setting process for setting the start of the music selection period is executed (S5407), and this process is performed. To end. Details of the music selection period setting processing (S5407) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S5406, when it is determined that the notification is not of the first round (S5406: No), the process of S5407 is skipped, and the process ends.

  Next, details of the above-described music selection period setting processing (S5407) will be described with reference to FIG. This music selection period setting processing is for determining an initial arrangement of a music selection menu screen in order to set a music selection period in which a player can select a music (a music selection menu screen can be displayed). This is the process. That is, the processing corresponds to the state command processing (see FIG. 113) in the first control example. Since the music selection period setting process (S5407) and the status command process (see FIG. 113) in the first control example have many common points in the processing content, the process is different from the status command process (see FIG. 113) in the first control example. The description will focus on the differences.

  In the respective processes of S5203 to S5206 and S5208 to S5213 in the music selection period setting process (see FIG. 132), the respective processes of S5203 to S5206 and S5208 to S5213 of the status command process (see FIG. 113) in the first control example are respectively performed. Is executed.

  In the song selection period setting process (see FIG. 132) in the second control example, when the process of S5208 ends, the data corresponding to the item (song) determined by the random lottery in the process of S5205 is then assigned to the song type. The data is stored in the storage area 223bd (S5221), and the process shifts to S5209. As described above, in the second control example, at the start of the music selection period (that is, the first round of the jackpot), the music determined by the random lottery is not played, but the music dedicated to the music selection period is played. Since the configuration is adopted, the process of immediately reproducing the music determined by the lottery (the process of S5207) as in the status command process in the first control example is not performed.

  In the music selection period setting process (see FIG. 132) in the second control example, in the process of S5210, the music is already stored in the storage area corresponding to the value “00H” of the menu position pointer 223ab in the item arrangement storage area 223aa. Is determined again (S5210: Yes), an audio command for instructing (notifying) the audio output device 226 to reproduce the music for the music selection period is set (S5222). The processing shifts to S5213.

  Next, the details of the above-described interval command processing (S4463) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing this interval command processing (S4463). In the interval command processing (S4463), first, a display interval command for setting an interval effect in a mode according to the finished round is set (S5501). It is determined whether or not the command indicates the interval immediately before the round (S5502).

  In the processing of S5502, when it is determined that the command is the command indicating the interval immediately before the last round (S5502: Yes), the reordering determination timing 1 (the timing for determining whether or not to reorder the reproduction order of the music) has come. Therefore, each processing of S5503 to S5505 for determining whether or not the reproduction order of the music data is rearranged is executed. More specifically, the contents of the rearrangement determination table 222bb are compared with the data stored in the reproduction data type storage area 223ba (S5503), and the type of the music data currently being reproduced (the part being reproduced) is determined. Then, it is determined whether or not the playback order is of a type to be rearranged (S5504).

  In the process of S5504, if it is determined that the type of the music data being reproduced is the type in which the reproduction order should be re-arranged (S5504: Yes), the result of the rearrangement of the reproduction order (for the currently reproduced music An audio rearrangement command for notifying the type of music data to be set to be reproduced next to the data is set (S5505), and the process ends. The voice rearrangement command set here is output to the voice output device 226 in the command output process of the main process 9 (see S4102 in FIG. 127). When the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 receives the audio rearrangement command, the MPU 301 stores data indicating the rearrangement result (the type of audio data to be reproduced next) notified by the command in the rearrangement type storage area 303f. Then, when the reproduction period of the currently reproduced music data has elapsed, reproduction of the rearranged music data is started. This makes it possible to more reliably reproduce the climax portion of the song that is the most exciting before the final round ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5504 that the data reproduction order is not the type to be rearranged (S5504: No), the rust portion is reproduced by the time the final round ends without rearranging the reproduction order. Since the possibility is high, the process of S5505 is skipped, and the present process is terminated as it is.

  If it is determined in the processing of S5502 that the current interval command is not the command indicating the interval immediately before the last round (S5502: No), then the command indicating the interval set after the end of one round is used. It is determined whether there is (S5506). In the process of S5506, when it is determined that the command indicates the interval after the end of one round (S5506: Yes), the instruction to reproduce the music corresponding to the data stored in the music type storage area 223bd (notification). A music selection command for audio to be performed is set (S5507), and 1 is added to the data corresponding to the music selection frequency of the music set to be reproduced this time among the data in the music selection frequency storage area 223ac (S5508). Then, non-display of the music selection menu screen is set, and both the menu display flag 223ae and the music selection permission flag 223ad are set to off (S5509), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5506, if it is determined that the current interval command is not a command indicating the interval after the end of the first round (S5506: No), the processes of S5507 to S5509 are skipped, and This processing ends as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 134, the details of the above-mentioned ending command processing (S4464) will be described. The ending command process (S4264) is a process for determining whether or not to delay the start of the ending effect according to the music reproduction status, as described above.

  In the ending command process (see FIG. 134), first, data stored in the reproduction data type storage area 223ba (that is, data corresponding to the type of music data currently being reproduced) is read (S5601) and read. It is determined whether the data is data corresponding to the rust part (that is, whether the rust part is being reproduced) (S5602). In the process of S5602, when it is determined that the data corresponding to the rust portion has been read (S5602: Yes), the respective processes of S5603 to S5605 for delaying the start of the ending effect and making the reproduction time of the rust portion longer. Execute Specifically, from the ending effect selection table 222bc (see FIG. 124), the effect type of the ending effect corresponding to the range to which the value of the remaining playback time timer 223bb belongs is selected (S5603).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 124, when the value of the remaining playback time timer 223bb is within the range of 1000 or less (that is, the remaining playback time of the rust portion at the end of the last round is 1 second or less) As the type of the ending production, the normal ending with the production time of 4 seconds is selected, and the value of the remaining reproduction time timer 223bb is larger than 1000 and equal to or smaller than 2000 (that is, the remaining reproduction of the rust portion at the end of the final round). If the time is longer than 1 second and is within 2 seconds), a shortened ending 1 in which the rendering time is 3 seconds is selected as the ending rendering type, and the value of the remaining playback time timer 223bb is greater than 2000. And 3000 or less (that is, the remaining playback time of the rust portion at the end of the final round is longer than 2 seconds and 3 seconds If it is in the range of (lower), as the type of the ending effect, the shortened ending 2 in which the effect time is 2 seconds is selected, and the value of the remaining reproduction time timer 223bb is larger than 3000 (that is, the rust portion at the end of the last round). If the remaining reproduction time is longer than 3 seconds), a shortened ending 3 in which the production time is 1 second is selected as the ending production type (see FIG. 124).

  When the processing of S5603 is completed, data corresponding to the ending effect selected in the processing of S5603 is stored in the ending type storage area 223be (S5604), and the ending delay flag 223bc is set to ON (S5605). The process ends.

  By executing each of the processes of S5603 to S5605, the start timing of the ending effect can be delayed, and the type of the ending effect to be executed after the ending delay period is set in advance in the ending type storage area 223be. Can be. Accordingly, an ending effect of an appropriate effect time (effect mode) is set according to the length of the period from the start of the ending period to the end of the reproduction of the rust portion (or the termination of the reproduction). be able to. In addition, the climax part, which is the most exciting part in the music, can be heard by the player for a longer time.

  In the processing of S5602, if it is determined that the data read from the reproduction data type storage area 223ba is data corresponding to a part other than the rust part (S5602: No), there is no need to delay the start timing of the ending effect. Then, a display ending command corresponding to the normal ending effect is set (S5606), and an audio ending command indicating a music corresponding to the normal ending effect is set (S5607), and the process ends. Thus, when a part other than the chorus portion is being reproduced at the start of the ending period (at the end of the last round), a normal ending effect can be performed simultaneously with the start of the ending period.

  Next, the music command processing (S4466) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 135. In the music command processing (S4466), first, data indicating the type of music data (music data set to be reproduced in the audio output device 226) indicated by the music command output from the audio output device 226 is set to the reproduction data type. It is stored in the storage area 223ba (S5701). Then, the timer value corresponding to the notified music data type is set in the remaining playback time timer 223bb (S5702), and the process ends.

  By executing the music command processing (S4466), the type of the music data (the part being reproduced) and the reproduction time being reproduced by the audio output device 226 can be easily grasped on the audio lamp control device 113 side. be able to.

<Control processing of audio output device in second control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 139. First, with reference to FIG. 136, a description will be given of a main process 9 executed in the second control example in place of the main process (see FIG. 115A) in the first control example. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the main processing 9.

  Of the main processing 9 (see FIG. 136) in the second control example, the processing of 9003 to S9007 is the same as the processing of S9003 to S9007 of the main processing (see FIG. 115A) in the first control example. The processing is executed. In the main process 9 (see FIG. 136) in the second control example, when the process is started, first, various commands to the sound lamp control device 113 set by the processes of S9012 and S9013 are sent to the sound controller. A command output process for transmitting to the lamp control device 113 is executed (S9011).

  Next, a command determination process 9 is executed instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 116) in the first control example (S9012). This command determination process 9 (S9012) is a process for executing control according to the type of various commands received from the sound lamp control device 113, similarly to the command determination process (see FIG. 116) in the first control example. is there. Details of the command determination process 9 (S9012) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S9012 ends, the voice setting process 9 is executed instead of the voice setting process (see FIG. 117) in the first control example (S9013), and the process proceeds to S9003. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 139, this audio setting processing 9 (S9013) is similar to the audio setting processing (see FIG. 117) in the first control example, in which reproduction of audio data such as music data is performed. And a process for setting switching of music data.

  Next, the details of the above-described command determination processing 9 (S9012) will be described with reference to FIG. This command determination process 9 (S9012) is a process executed in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 116) in the first control example, as described above.

  In the command determination processing 9 (see FIG. 137) in the second control example, the processing in S9201 to SS9214 is the same as the processing in S9201 to SS9214 in the command determination processing (see FIG. 116) in the first control example. The processing is executed. In the command determination process 9 (see FIG. 137) in the second control example, in the process of S9209, it is determined that the command received from the sound ramp control device 113 does not include the lottery music command for sound. In this case (S9209: No), it is then determined whether or not the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 includes a command related to the song that is hitting the jackpot (S9221).

  If it is determined in the process of S9221 that a command related to the song being hit is included (S9221: Yes), a jackpot song-related process for executing control according to the command type is executed ( (S9222), this process ends. Details of the jackpot song-related processing (S9222) will be described later with reference to FIG. Also, in the process of S9221, if it is determined that the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 does not include a command related to the song being hit (S9221: No), the process proceeds to S9214. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 138, details of the above-described jackpot song-related processing (S9222) will be described. In the jackpot song-related processing (S9222), first, it is determined whether or not a command received from the sound ramp control device 113 includes a sound changing command (S9401), and the sound changing command is included. If it is determined (S9401: Yes), the data of the rearrangement type storage area 303f is updated in accordance with the rearrangement content notified by the command (the type of music data to be set to be reproduced next) (S9402). Next, by setting the rearrangement waiting flag 303e to ON, it is shown that the music data to be reproduced next to the music data currently being reproduced is rearranged (variable from the reproduction order of the value order of the music pointer 303b). (S9403), this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S9401, if it is determined that the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 does not include the sound rearrangement command (S9401: No), then the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. It is determined whether the command includes an audio ending command (S9404).

  In the process of S9404, if it is determined that the audio ending command is included (S9404: Yes), the reproduction of the music currently being reproduced is terminated (S9405), and the ending of the type notified by the audio ending command is performed. The reproduction of the music for use is set (S9406), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S9404, when it is determined that the command received from the audio ramp control device 113 does not include the ending command for audio (S9404: No), the process ends as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 139, details of the above-described audio setting process 9 (S9013) will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the audio setting process 9 (S9013). As described above, the voice setting process 9 (S9013) is a process executed in place of the voice setting process (see FIG. 117) in the first control example.

  Of the sound setting processing 9 (see FIG. 139) in the second control example, the processing in S9302 to S9308 is the same as the processing in S9302 to S9308 in the sound setting processing (see FIG. 117) in the first control example, respectively. The processing is executed. When the audio setting process 9 (see FIG. 139) in the second control example is started, first, it is determined whether or not a song (any one of the songs A to Z) that is being hit is being played. (S9311), if the hit song is being reproduced (S9311: Yes), the process proceeds to S9302. On the other hand, in the process of S9311, when it is determined that the song with the big hit is not being reproduced (S9311: No), the process ends as it is.

  In the audio setting process 9 (see FIG. 139) in the second control example, when it is determined in the process of S9302 that it is the end timing of the reproduction of the music data being reproduced (S9302: Yes), then the rearrangement is performed. It is determined whether the standby flag 303e is on (S9312). In the process of S9312, when it is determined that the rearrangement waiting flag 303e is ON (S9312: Yes), the reproduction order different from the reproduction order predetermined for each music (the order specified by the audio lamp control device 113). ), It is necessary to set the reproduction of the music data, so that the value corresponding to the data stored in the rearrangement type storage area 303f is updated by overwriting the value of the music pointer 303b (S9313), and the processing is performed. To S9307. Thereby, reproduction of the music data after the rearrangement can be set.

  On the other hand, in the process of S9312, when it is determined that the rearrangement waiting flag 303e is off (S9312: No), the process proceeds to S9303, and the reproduction in the order of the value of the music pointer 303b is set.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example is configured so that the player can select a song that is in a big hit. Then, until the final round is completed, the reproduction order of the music data is dynamically rearranged in accordance with the progress of the jackpot so that the rust portion is reproduced as much as possible. That is, at a predetermined timing during the execution of the jackpot (for example, at the start of the interval period immediately before the last round or at the start of the last round), the type (A melody 1, B melody 1, rust 1 and the like are discriminated, and when a part far from the rust portion is reproduced, the reproduction order of each music data constituting the music data group is rearranged, and the next reproduction is performed. The part is changed so that it is a part close to the rust part. This allows the player to more reliably hear the rust portion, which is the most exciting portion of the music, by the end of the jackpot.

  Here, as a method for reproducing the chorus portion in the final round of the jackpot, a method of setting reproduction of the music data corresponding to the chorus portion at the start of the final round regardless of the progress of the music may be considered. . However, according to this method, there is a possibility that the connection of the music may become unnatural before and after the start of the final round (that is, before and after switching to the reproduction of the rust portion). That is, there is a high possibility that the reproduction of the rust portion is suddenly started in the middle of another part. Therefore, according to this method, the player may have a sense of incongruity with the music being played, and may suspect that the pachinko machine 10 is out of order. That is, it is doubtful whether the pachinko machine 10 is operating normally, and there is a possibility that the player may have anxiety about the game. On the other hand, in the second control example, the playback order of the music data is rearranged (variable) in units of parts (units of melody (tune)). The music can be reproduced with a small voice mode. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game during the jackpot with ease.

  Further, in the second control example, at the end of the final round of the jackpot, if the climax part (the climax 1, the climax 2, etc.) is being reproduced, the start timing of the ending effect is delayed so that the climax part is extended. Is configured to be continued. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the climax part of the music that is most prominent from being forcibly terminated by the end of the jackpot as much as possible. As a result, the rust portion can be more enjoyed for the player, so that the player's interest in the game during the jackpot can be improved.

  Note that, in the second control example, when the chorus portion ends in the middle of the final round of the jackpot, the music is reproduced in the order of the music data without changing the reproduction order. It is not something that can be done. For example, when the reproduction of the chorus portion is completed in the last round, the reproduction order of the music data may be changed again so that the chorus portion is repeatedly reproduced. In this case, the configuration may be such that the music data whose reproduction has been completed is reproduced again, or a climax part different from the climax part whose reproduction has been completed is reproduced (for example, when the reproduction of the climax part 1 is completed, Subsequently, the reproduction of the rust 2 part is set, and when the reproduction of the rust 2 part is completed, the reproduction of the rust 1 part is set). With this configuration, the climax part of the music that is longer and most prominent in the final round can be reproduced for a longer time, so that the player's interest in the final round can be further improved. In addition, instead of simply playing back the rust portion, the end timing of the rust portion in the case where the playback of the rust portion is repeated is predicted in advance from the progress status of the last round, etc., and falls within the round period of the last round. The configuration may be such that the rust portion is repeated only when the prediction result that the possibility is high is obtained. With such a configuration, the ending period is started immediately after the repetition of the climax portion is set, and it is possible to prevent the reproduction of the climax portion from being discontinued due to insufficient listening of the climax portion.

  In the second control example, at the start of the interval period immediately before the last round in the jackpot and at the start of the last round, it is configured to determine whether or not the reproduction order of the music data is to be rearranged. It is not limited. The number of times and timing for determining whether to rearrange the reproduction order can be arbitrarily determined.

  In the second control example, the reproduction order of the music data is rearranged so that the chorus portion is reproduced longer during the final round. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It can be set arbitrarily.

  In the second control example, the reordering of the reproduction order of the music data is performed on a part-by-part basis. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The reordering may be performed on an arbitrary unit. By performing the rearrangement in units smaller than the part units, the rearrangement can be set more finely. Further, the configuration of the music data group can be simplified by adopting a configuration that is rearranged in a unit coarser than a part.

  In the second control example, when the rearrangement of the music data is determined, the parts in the order different from the original reproduction order are reproduced after the reproduction time of the part being reproduced (the music data) elapses. But it is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that, when the rearrangement is determined, the music data after the rearrangement is immediately reproduced. With this configuration, it is necessary to provide the audio output device 226 with a configuration for retaining the type of the music data after rearrangement (ie, the rearrangement type storage area 303f) until the rearrangement timing. Since the storage capacity is lost, the storage capacity can be reduced. Further, more simply, at the start of the final round of the jackpot, the reproduction of the chorus portion may be started regardless of the reproduction position of the music. With this configuration, the processing can be further simplified, so that the processing load on the audio ramp control device 113 and the audio output device 226 can be reduced.

  In the second control example, the configuration in which the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 determines whether or not the music data can be rearranged is not limited to this. The MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 may perform the configuration. In this case, the audio lamp control device 113 may be configured to notify the audio output device 226 only of the timing of determining the re-arrangement. Then, the rearrangement determination table 222bb provided in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 is transferred to the audio output device 226, and the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the audio output device 226 that the timing of the rearrangement determination has come. Based on this, the configuration may be such that the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 determines whether or not the reproduction order of the music data is rearranged.

  In the second control example, the playback order of the music data can be changed according to the progress of the jackpot game and the playback position of the music. The method for increasing the possibility of being performed is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that the playback speed of the music is varied according to the progress of the game and the playback position of the music. That is, for example, if the current playback position and the climax part are far (at least two parts apart) at the rearrangement determination timing 1, the music is played at a higher speed than normal until the climax part is reproduced (for example, (1.5 times speed), and in the case of closeness (less than one part), the music may be played back at a lower speed than normal (for example, 0.5 times speed) until the rust portion is played. Good.

  In the second control example, both the progress status of the jackpot and the progress status of the music are determined to determine whether the reproduction order of the music data is changed (rearranged) or not. It is also possible to determine only whether or not to start the reproduction of the music data corresponding to the specific part (the chorus portion) by determining only the progress status of the music piece (whether or not the start timing of the last round has come). This control is not limited to the last round. For example, in the pachinko machine 10 configured to play one music in a loop during a big hit and play the outro portion of the music as an ending effect sound during the ending period, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the first round of the big hit. However, at the start timing of the first round, the data corresponding to the intro portion may be reproduced (reproduced from the beginning of the music) regardless of the state of the music. It is also possible to determine whether or not it is the start timing of the ending period, and if it is the start timing of the ending period, the data to be reproduced may be changed to the data for the music corresponding to the outro portion regardless of the state of the music. By configuring in this way, the ending production music can be set as the music of the outro part corresponding to the music that was playing during the big hit, so the music played during the big hit and during the ending production is unified A feeling can be given. This control can also be applied to a case where a song dedicated to ending is provided. That is, in the jackpot, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the ending period, and if it is the start timing of the ending period, the reproduction of the music data corresponding to the music for the ending effect is performed regardless of the music situation. It may be configured to start.

  In the second control example, at the start timing of the ending period, the progress status (reproduction position) of the music is determined, and when the specific reproduction range (the chorus portion) is being reproduced, the start of the ending effect is delayed. Thus, the specific playback range is configured to be able to be played back for a longer time. However, the control can be applied not only at the start of the ending period. If a condition for playing another song is satisfied while the song is being played, this can be applied.For example, a configuration is adopted in which the song is loop-played during the above-described probable change state, and the end timing of the probable change state In such a case, if the rust portion is being played back, the start of the effect indicating that the probable change state has ended may be delayed so that the rust portion is played back longer. In addition, a known timing device such as an RTC (Real Time Clock) is included in the configuration, and when the time measured by the timing device reaches a predetermined time, a specific effect different from normal (so-called island-linked effect) can be executed. In a gaming machine with various specifications, the control in the second control example may be applied at the start of the island-linked effect. Specifically, when the climax part (specific reproduction range) of the music is being reproduced at the start timing of the specific production, the climax part (specific reproduction range) is delayed by delaying the start timing of the specific production. A longer playback configuration may be used. The target to which this control can be applied is not limited to an effect accompanied by a sound (an effect of reproducing music). The present invention can also be applied to a display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, for example, when the time counted by the timepiece reaches a predetermined time during the execution of the fluctuation display, the start of the island-linked production is performed in accordance with the progress status of the fluctuation production being performed (producing mode). May be determined to determine whether or not to delay. Specifically, for example, during the execution of the super-reach effect with a relatively high jackpot expectation degree, the island-linked effect is suppressed (delayed) until the super-reach effect ends. Good. With this configuration, the result of the variable display effect can be appropriately notified to the player. In addition, for example, as a variable display effect or an effect during a jackpot, an effect that prompts the user to operate a predetermined operation button is executed, and an operation is detected or a press that switches to a different effect mode when the operation validity period elapses. You may apply to the game machine which can perform an effect. That is, during the operation valid period, even if an operation on the operation button is detected, the switching of the effect mode is delayed until the effect during the operation valid period ends (the effect mode is switched until the operation valid period ends). May be varied).

  In the second control example, if the climax portion is being reproduced at the start of the ending period, the ending effect start timing is delayed to reproduce the climax portion longer, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the climax part is being reproduced at the start timing of the ending period, the climax part may be reproduced while the display mode for the ending effect is started as the display mode. With this configuration, it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of display modes according to the remaining ending period as the ending effect, so that the number of display data tables for executing the ending effect can be reduced. Can be. Therefore, the storage capacity of the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  In the second control example, when the chorus portion is being reproduced at the start of the ending period, the start of the ending effect is delayed for a maximum of 4 seconds, and after the delay period has elapsed, the ending effect ends within the remaining ending period. Although the ending effect having a length of the ending effect is performed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the ending effect started after the delay period has elapsed may have the same content (normal ending effect) as the ending effect started without delay. That is, the length until the ending period ends may be extended according to the delay period. With this configuration, it is not necessary to provide a plurality of types having different effect periods as the effect mode of the ending effect, so that the number of display data tables for executing the ending effect can be reduced. Therefore, the storage capacity of the display control device 114 can be reduced. Further, instead of extending the ending period, only the ending effect may be continued even after the ending period ends. In this case, a configuration in which the variable display based on the retained balls retained at the end of the big hit is executed in a mode that is less noticeable than the ending effect (for example, reduced to the lower right of the third symbol display device 81). It may be. Also in the case of such a configuration, the number of display data tables for executing the ending effect can be reduced, so that the storage capacity of the display control device 114 can be reduced.

<Third control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachinko machine 10 in the above-described second control example is configured so that the player can select an arbitrary music (speech mode) as the music (sound effect type) to be reproduced (executed) during the big hit. Then, at a predetermined timing in the jackpot, it is determined whether or not to switch the playback position of the music (reorder the playback order of the music data) so as to increase the possibility of the rust portion being played in the final round of the jackpot. Was executed.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third control example, a menu item “random song selection” in which a song (sound production mode) is randomly selected on the song selection menu screen is added, and “random song selection” is performed by the player. In this case, the music to be reproduced after the first round (music selection period) is determined by a predetermined lottery. In the “random song selection”, a song (voice effect) that is not displayed as an item on the song selection menu screen can be determined. More specifically, when “random song selection” is determined in the probability change jackpot, “song a” is added to “song A” to “song Z” displayed on the song selection menu screen by lottery. The music to be played during the jackpot is determined. As a result, it is possible to select “random music selection” in expectation of determining “music a” that cannot be normally heard.

  In the third control example, as one type of effect performed during the jackpot, the number of rounds of the jackpot for a predetermined period (for example, until the fifth round or the tenth round is completed) from the start of the jackpot. Is reported less than the original number of rounds, and after a predetermined period has elapsed, an effect of notifying the original number of rounds can be selected. By configuring such an effect that the number of rounds is pseudo-reported less than the original number of rounds (pseudo-small round production), a relatively small number of rounds is reported at the start of the jackpot (ie, In the case where five rounds are announced in one special symbol jackpot or ten rounds are announced in the second special symbol jackpot, see FIG. 10 (a)). Expecting that a number (8 rounds or 16 rounds) will be announced, a game can be played until a predetermined period elapses. Accordingly, in the third control example, even in the pseudo final round during the execution of the pseudo small round effect, the rust portion is reproduced by rearranging the music reproduction order in the same manner as the original final round. It is configured so that: As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to discriminate a pseudo final round or an original final round from a part of the music reproduced during the pseudo final round. Thus, until the pseudo small round effect ends (until the predetermined period elapses), it is possible to keep the expectation that a larger number of rounds will be notified.

  The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example is different from the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example in that the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed. Also, the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, an audio output device 226 Are executed in the same manner as in the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the second control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the configuration of a music selection menu screen in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 140 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the music area MR when the music selection menu screen is displayed first after the jackpot music selection period starts. As shown in FIG. 140 (a), a plurality of display areas (items RA1 to RA3, PA1 and PA2) in which a music name that can be selected by the player are displayed are arranged on the music selection menu screen in the third control example. In addition to the display area, a display area in which an item OA of “random music selection” is displayed is displayed on the right side in front view of the plurality of images displaying the music titles. The item “OA” of “random song selection” is an item in which one song is randomly selected by lottery from the songs (songs A to Z and song a) set in the pachinko machine 10.

  The item OA of “random song selection” is set to a turned-off appearance (similar to the items arranged in the display area other than the song selection area) when the song selection menu screen is first displayed. Further, a right image RG having a substantially triangular shape facing right is displayed between the plurality of images displaying the song titles and the item OA. Based on these display contents, the player can easily understand that "random music selection" can be selected by pressing (operating) the right button RB of the operation buttons 230.

  FIG. 140 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode of the music area MR when the player operates (presses) the right button RB while the music selection menu screen is displayed. As shown in FIG. 140 (b), when the player presses the right button RB (detects that the output of the signal corresponding to the right button RB has become H), the item RA1 ( The image in which the character “Music A” is displayed) is switched to the turned-off appearance mode, and the item OA is turned to the turned-on appearance mode. That is, the appearance of the item PA1 and the appearance of the item OA arranged in the music selection area are switched. In addition, the right image RG has a light-emitting appearance. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that "random music selection" has been determined when the center button CB is pressed.

  When “random music selection” is determined, the most significant bit of the menu position pointer 223ab composed of 1 byte (8 bits) is set to ON (1). As described above, in the first control example and the second control example, when determining the initial layout of the menu, the menu position pointer 223ab is set to the value range “00H” (00000000B) to “19H” (00011001B). "Song A" to "Song Z" are associated one by one, and the correspondence is stored in the item arrangement storage area 223aa. In other words, the lower 5 bits of the menu position pointer 223ab can specify an item arranged in the music selection area, and the upper 3 bits are empty bits. In the third control example, one of the empty bits (for example, the most significant bit) is defined as a bit corresponding to “random music selection”. With this configuration, even if “random song selection” is selected, the item (song) arranged in the song selection area immediately before “random song selection” is selected is replaced by the menu position pointer 223ab. Can be easily determined from the lower 5 bits of That is, even if the player presses the right button RB to select “random music selection” and then presses the left button LB again, the state immediately before selecting “random music selection” (display mode of the music selection menu screen) ). Further, when the center button CB is pressed by the player while the music selection menu screen is displayed (the menu display flag 223ae is on), “random” can be easily performed simply by checking the state of the most significant bit. It is possible to identify whether or not “music selection” has been determined.

  Although details will be described later, in the third control example, the player selects “random music selection” (an operation on the center button CB is detected in a state where the item OA is in the appearance of being lit). In this case, if a specific condition is satisfied (for example, if the jackpot being executed is a probable jackpot), a special song that is not displayed as an item in the song selection menu screen (cannot be selected by the player) In other words, one song is determined by lottery from a plurality of songs (song A to song Z and song a) including (song a). This allows a player who wants to listen to a special music to positively select “random music selection”.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 141 (a) and (b), a jackpot in which the above-described pseudo small round effect (an effect that makes it appear as if the round number is smaller than the actual round number corresponding to the jackpot type) is set. An example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 will be described. In FIGS. 141 (a) and (b), when the number of rounds is won as the jackpot A of eight rounds, and the number of rounds smaller than the actual number (five rounds) is notified due to the setting of the pseudo small round effect. Will be described as an example.

  FIG. 141 (a) is a diagram showing a display mode of a pseudo final round display mode (fifth round) during execution of the pseudo small round effect. As shown in FIG. 141 (a), in the third control example, during the big hit, the progress status of the big hit (the current round number, the maximum round number, and the small round area Ds1 in the third symbol display device 81) is displayed. Is displayed (a character “5/5 round”). In addition, below the character indicating the progress status of the jackpot, a character indicating the prize ball acquisition status (a comparison between the number of prize balls paid up to now and the maximum number of prize balls paid out in the current jackpot). (That is, the characters “500/500 GET”) are displayed. FIG. 141 (a) shows a point in time when it is detected that a specified number (10) of game balls have entered the left specific winning opening 650 in the pseudo final round (5th round). (When the number of paid out prize balls reaches 500), the display of the number of prize balls in the small area Ds1 is updated from “490/500 GET” to “500/500 GET”. The moment it was done.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 141A, an image imitating a treasure chest is displayed in the main display area Dm. This suggests that the player is in a state where he can obtain a large amount of prize balls (profits). Further, in the music area MR, an image is displayed which shows the music name of the music currently selected and played by the player during the music selection period. FIG. 141 (a) illustrates a case where the player selects “Song Z” during the song selection period, and an item (image) with the character “Song Z” is added to the song area MR. Is displayed.

  FIG. 141 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode immediately after the pseudo final round is completed (that is, immediately after the display mode of FIG. 141 (a)) in the jackpot in which the pseudo small round effect is set. It is. When the pseudo final round in the pseudo small round production ends, a production to notify the original number of rounds is executed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 141 (b), the character displayed in the small area Ds1 is updated to a character indicating the original maximum round number and the original maximum prize ball number. That is, the character “5/5 round” displayed on the upper side of the small area Ds1 is updated to the character “5/8 round”, and the character “500 / round” displayed on the lower side of the small area Ds1 is displayed. The character “500 GET” is updated to the character “500/800 GET”. In addition, an effect is performed in which the boy character 710 displayed in the small area Ds2 emits the words “Yamada!”. According to these effect modes, the player can easily recognize that the jackpot does not end in 5 rounds but continues up to 8 rounds (the pseudo small round effect was executed). Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that more prize balls can be obtained, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player. Hereinafter, for simplicity of description, an effect that is performed based on the end of the pseudo final round in the pseudo small round and that informs that the big hit will continue without being ended (see FIG. 141 (b)) This is referred to as “continuous production”.

  Although the details will be described later, in the third control example, as in the second control example, the predetermined round during the jackpot is increased so that the possibility that the rust portion of the music is reproduced in the final round of the jackpot is increased. At the timing (at the start of the interval immediately before the last round and at the start of the last round), it is configured to determine whether or not the reproduction order of the music data is to be changed. In addition, in the third control example, even in the pseudo final round during the execution of the pseudo small round effect, there is a possibility that the chorus portion is reproduced by rearranging the music reproduction order, as in the original final round. It is configured to control to be higher. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to discriminate a pseudo final round or an original final round from a part of the music reproduced during the pseudo final round. Thus, until the pseudo small round effect ends (until the predetermined period elapses), it is possible to keep the expectation that a larger number of rounds will be notified.

<Electrical Configuration in Third Control Example>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 142A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. 142A, the ROM 222 in the third embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the second control example (see FIG. 122A) in that a random music selection table 222ca and a pseudo small round lottery table 222cb. Other configurations are the same as those of the above-described second control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The random music selection table 222ca is a data table that is referred to in order to determine one music when the player selects “random music selection”. Details of the random music selection table 222ca will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 143 is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the random music selection table 222ca. As shown in FIG. 143, in the random music selection table 222ca, the correspondence between the music type and the value of the music lottery counter 223ca indicates the situation (the type of the winning jackpot and the jackpot) at the time of executing the lottery. (Symbol type). Here, the music lottery counter 223ca is provided to select one music from the random music selection table 222ca, and is a random number counter whose value is updated in a range of “0 to 259”.

  As shown in FIG. 143, in the variation pattern effect, the third symbol with an odd number is notified in an effect mode (that is, an effect mode selected at a rate of 40% only in the case of a probable big hit). In the case of a probability change jackpot (odd symbol notification probability change jackpot), the value of the song lottery counter 223ca is in the range of “0 to 8” (the range of nine pieces of the music lottery counter 223ca) and “Song A”. Are defined in association with each other (see 222ca1 in FIG. 143). In addition, “Song B” is defined in association with the range of the song lottery counter 223ca of “9 to 17” (see 222ca2 in FIG. 143), and the value of the song lottery counter 223ca is “18 to 26”. “Music C” is defined in association with the range (see 222ca3 in FIG. 143). Although illustration is omitted, each of the song types “Song D” to “Song Z” is defined in association with the range of nine values of the song lottery counter 223ca. Of the 260 values that can be taken by the song lottery counter 223ca, nine song lottery counters 223ca are defined in association with each of the song types “Song A” to “Song Z”. In the case where the odd symbol notification is a probability change jackpot and “random song selection” is selected during the song selection period, the ratio of “song A” to “song Z” to be determined is about 3.5% (9/260), respectively. ).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 143, in a situation where the probability of change of the probability of change symbol notification is a jackpot, a special song not displayed on the song selection menu screen is displayed for the value of the song lottery counter 223ca in the range of “234 to 259”. "Song a" is defined in association with each other. Of the 260 values that can be taken by the song lottery counter 223ca, the value associated with “song a” is 26 of “234 to 259”. When “random music selection” is selected by the user, the ratio (probability) at which “music a” is determined is 10% (26/260) (see 222ca27 in FIG. 143).

  On the other hand, in the variation pattern effect, the effect mode in which the third symbols to which even numbers are attached is selected (that is, it is selected at a rate of 60% in the case of the probability change jackpot, while it is 100% in the case of the normal jackpot) 143, the value of the music lottery counter 223ca is in the range of “0 to 6” (music lottery), as shown in FIG. 143. “Song A” is defined in association with the range of seven counters 223ca (see 222ca1 in FIG. 143). Also, “Song B” is defined in association with the range of the song lottery counter 223ca of “7 to 13” (see 222ca2 in FIG. 143), and the value of the song lottery counter 223ca is “14 to 20”. “Music C” is defined in association with the range (see 222ca3 in FIG. 143). Although illustration is omitted, the song types “Song D” to “Song Z” are defined in association with a range of seven values of the song lottery counter 223ca. Of the 260 values that the song lottery counter 223ca can take, the values of the seven song lottery counters 223ca are defined in association with each of the song types “Song A” to “Song Z”. When the "random song selection" is selected during the song selection period, the ratio of "Song A" to "Song Z" determined is approximately 2.7% (7/260). ).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 143, in a situation in which the even number symbol notification has a probability of a large change, a special song not displayed on the song selection menu screen is displayed for the value of the song lottery counter 223ca in the range of “182 to 259”. "Song a" is defined in association with each other. Of the 260 values that can be taken by the song lottery counter 223ca, the value associated with “song a” is 78 of “182 to 259”. When "random music selection" is selected by the user, the ratio (probability) at which "song a" is determined is 30% (78/260) (see 222ca27 in FIG. 143). In other words, the probability of the "song a" being selected when "random music selection" is selected is higher in the odd-variable jackpot of the even symbol notification than in the odd-variable jackpot of the odd symbol notification. Therefore, when the player who wants to listen to (reproduce) “song a” performs the variable display in which the third symbols with even numbers are aligned and is notified of the jackpot, the player is more positive. "Random song selection" can be selected.

  As shown in FIG. 143, for the normal jackpot, “Song A” corresponds to the range of the song lottery counter 223ca of “0 to 9” (the range of 10 values of the song lottery counter 223ca). Stipulated (see 222ca1 in FIG. 143). Also, “Song B” is defined in association with the range of the song lottery counter 223ca of “10 to 19” (see 222ca2 in FIG. 143), and the value of the song lottery counter 223ca is “20 to 29”. “Song C” is defined in association with the range (see 222ca3 in FIG. 143). Although illustration is omitted, the song types “Song D” to “Song Z” are defined in association with the range of ten values of the song lottery counter 223ca. Of the 260 values that can be taken by the song lottery counter 223ca, ten song lottery counters 223ca are defined in association with each of the song types "Song A" to "Song Z". In the case where "Random Song Selection" is selected during the song selection period, the rate at which "Song A" to "Song Z" is determined is about 3.8% (10/260), respectively. On the other hand, in the case of a normal jackpot, the value of the song lottery counter 223ca is not associated with the special song “song a” (see 222ca27 in FIG. 143). That is, in the case of a normal jackpot, there is no possibility that “song a” is determined (reproduced) even if “random song selection” is selected. In other words, when “random song selection” is selected and “song a” is reproduced, the probability change jackpot is determined. Therefore, in particular, when the variable display (variable effect) in which the third symbols with the even numbers are aligned makes a jackpot (when it is unknown whether it is a probability variable jackpot or a normal jackpot), even a little A player who wants to know whether or not to shift to the probable change state early (ie, before confirming the result of the effect that informs whether or not to transit to the probable change state) is proactively given a “random music selection”. "Can be selected. Also, when “song a” is reproduced as expected by the player, the player can be pleased. Further, even when “song a” is not reproduced, it is possible to keep giving a sense of expectation to the probable change state until an effect to notify whether or not to shift to the probable change state during the jackpot is executed. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 142 (a), the description will be continued. The pseudo small round lottery table 222cb is a data table that is referred to to determine (lottery) whether or not to execute a pseudo small round effect. The lottery to determine whether to execute the pseudo small round effect using the pseudo small round lottery table 222cb is executed when the opening command corresponding to the jackpot A or the jackpot D is received (see S5833 in FIG. 147). . Although illustration is omitted, the pseudo small round lottery table 222cb is set so that the execution of the pseudo small round effect is determined at a rate of 50% when the jackpot A or the jackpot D is obtained.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 142 (b). FIG. 142B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 142 (b), the RAM 223 in the third control example is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the above-described second control example (see FIG. 122 (b)) in that the music lottery counter 223ca and the big hit status storage The difference is that an area 223cb and a pseudo final R storage area 223cc are added.

  The music lottery counter 223ca is a counter used to select (determine) one music piece from the above-mentioned random music selection table 222ca, and its value is updated in the range of “0 to 259”. When "random music selection" is determined by the player during the music selection period, the music corresponding to the value of the music lottery counter 223ca is selected from the random music selection table 222ca.

  The jackpot situation storage area 223cb is a storage area in which data corresponding to the type of the jackpot and the symbols arranged in the variable effect executed when the jackpot is won is stored. The big hit situation storage area 223cb is formed of, for example, a 1-byte storage area, and if "01H" is stored as data, it indicates that the odd symbol information is a positive change big hit. Also, if "02H" is stored, it indicates that the odd symbol information is a jackpot, and if "03H" is stored, it is that the even symbol information is a normal jackpot. On the other hand, if “00H” is stored, it indicates that the jackpot has not been won. In the jackpot situation storage area 223cb, when the execution of the variable effect for notifying the jackpot is set, the type of the jackpot that has been won and the type of the symbol that notifies the jackpot (the third symbol with an odd number) are aligned. Or the third symbol to which even numbers are attached), and the corresponding data is stored (see S4522 in FIG. 150). When the player selects (determines) “random music selection” during the music selection period, the contents of the random music selection table 222ca corresponding to the data stored in the jackpot situation storage area 223cb and the music lottery counter 223ca Are compared with each other to determine one piece of music to be played during the jackpot.

  The pseudo final R storage area 223 cc is a storage area for storing data indicating a pseudo final round when a pseudo small round effect is determined. In the pseudo final R storage area 223 cc, when the round is a large jackpot (jackpot A) and a pseudo small round effect is determined, five rounds (that is, a relatively large number of rounds among the jackpots of the first special symbol) are provided. While the data corresponding to the small jackpots B and C rounds is set (see S5836 in FIG. 147), if the pseudo-small round effect is determined as 16 rounds jackpot (jackpot D), 10 rounds are set. Data (that is, the number of rounds of the jackpots E and F having a relatively small number of rounds among the jackpots of the second special symbol) is set (see S5837 in FIG. 147). In a jackpot, at the start of a new interval period or the start of a new round, it is the start timing of the interval period immediately before the pseudo final round according to the data stored in the pseudo final R storage area 223cc. And whether it is the pseudo final round start timing. That is, it is determined whether or not it is the music composition change determination timing.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the third control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 144 to 150. First, the details of the operation detection processing 10 (S4161) in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. This operation detection process 10 (S4161) is a process that is executed instead of the operation detection process 9 (see FIG. 128) in the second control example. This is a process for monitoring an operation (pressing) on the button 230 and executing control according to the operation content when the operation is detected.

  Of the operation detection processing 10 (see FIG. 144) in the third control example, in the processing of S5101 to S5106, S5109, and S5110, S5101 to S5106 of the operation detection processing 9 (see FIG. 128) in the second control example, respectively. , S5109, and S5110 are executed. In the operation detection process 10 (see FIG. 144) in the third control example, when it is determined in the process of S5106 that an operation (pressing) on the center button CB has been detected (S5106: Yes), the selected item A music determination process for determining the music to be played after the end of the music selection period according to the type is performed (S5121), and the process ends. Details of the music determination processing (S5121) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing details of the above-described music determination processing (S5121). In this music determination processing (S5121), it is first determined whether or not a random music selection has been determined by the player (whether the most significant bit of the menu position pointer 223ab is on (1)) (S5801). If it is determined in the processing of S5801 that an item other than the random music selection has been determined (the most significant bit of the menu position pointer 223ab is off (0) when the pressing of the center button CB is detected) (S5801: No) ), The data indicating the music corresponding to the value of the lower 5 bits of the menu position pointer 223ab is specified from the item arrangement storage area 223aa, stored in the music type storage area 223bd (S5802), and the process proceeds to S5806.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5801 that the random music selection has been determined (the most significant bit of the menu position pointer 223ab is ON (1)) (S5801: Yes), the random music selection table 222ca (see FIG. 143). Is read out (S5803), and the value of the music lottery counter 223ca is compared with the specified content corresponding to the data stored in the jackpot situation storage area 223cb in the read-out table and the value of the music lottery counter 223ca. Is determined (S5804). Then, the data corresponding to the music determined in the processing of S5804 is stored in the music type storage area 223bd (S5805), and the processing shifts to S5806.

  In the processing of S5806 performed after the processing of S5802 or S5805, the music selection menu screen is closed, the menu display flag 223ae is set to off (S5806), and this processing ends. By executing the music determination process (see FIG. 145), when a random music selection is determined, one music can be randomly selected from a plurality of music.

  As described above, when random song selection is determined, a song that is not displayed as an item on the song selection menu screen (that is, “song a”) may be determined. This “song a” may be determined only in the case of a probability change jackpot, and may be determined in the case of a probability change jackpot in the even-numbered symbol notification (if it is unknown whether it is a probability change jackpot or a normal jackpot) ) Is determined at a higher rate than when the odd symbol notification has a probability of being a jackpot (when it is determined that the symbol is a variable jackpot). With this configuration, in the event of an even symbol information jackpot, the probability is changed to the probability change state as soon as possible (that is, before confirming the result of the effect of notifying whether or not to shift to the probability change state). A player who wants to know whether or not to shift can positively select “random music selection”. Also, when “song a” is reproduced as expected by the player, the player can be pleased. Further, even when “song a” is not reproduced, it is possible to keep giving a sense of expectation to the probable change state until an effect to notify whether or not to shift to the probable change state during the jackpot is executed. it can.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 146, details of the hit-related processing 10 (S4371) in the third control example will be described. The hit-related process 10 (S 4371) is a process executed in place of the hit-related process 9 (see FIG. 130) in the second control example. Of the hit-related processing 10 (S 4371) in the third control example, in each of the processing of S 4401 to S 4404, S 4406, S 4407, S 4409, S 4462, and S 4464 to S 4466, the hit-related processing 9 in the second control example (FIG. 130) The same processes as those of S4401 to S4404, S4406, S4407, S4409, S4462, and S4464 to S4466 of the same are executed.

  In the hit-related process 10 (see FIG. 146) in the third control example, when it is determined in the process of S4404 that the opening command is included in the command received from the main control device 110 (S4404: Yes) Then, a pseudo small round lottery process for performing a lottery (judgment) as to whether or not to execute a pseudo small round effect, which is an effect to make it appear as if the number of rounds is smaller than the original number of rounds, is executed (S4471). ) And the process moves to S4406. Details of the pseudo small round lottery process (S4471) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the hit-related process 10 (see FIG. 146) in the third control example, when it is determined in the process of S4407 that the command received from the main control device 110 includes the round number command (S4407). : Yes) Then, instead of the round number command process (see FIG. 131) in the second control example, a round number command process 10 is executed (S4472), and this process ends. Details of the round number command processing 10 (S4472) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the hit-related process 10 (see FIG. 146) in the third control example, when it is determined in the process of S4462 that the command received from the main control device 110 includes an interval command (S4462: Yes) Then, instead of the interval command processing (see FIG. 133) in the second control example, an interval command processing 10 is executed (S4473), and this processing ends. Details of this interval command processing 10 (S4473) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 147, the details of the pseudo small round lottery process (S4471), which is one of the hit-related processes 10 (see FIG. 146) in the third control example, will be described. The pseudo small round lottery process (S4471) is a process for selecting whether or not to set the execution of the pseudo small round effect as described above.

  In the pseudo small round lottery process (see FIG. 147), first, the type of the jackpot notified of the start of the opening period by the current opening command is the jackpot A (the number of rounds among the jackpots of the first special symbol, which is relatively large, is 8). It is determined whether it is one of the jackpot (round jackpot) and the jackpot D (16 jackpots with a relatively large number of rounds among the jackpots of the second special symbol) (S5831). In the processing of S5831, if it is determined that the current jackpot is neither the jackpot A nor the jackpot D (S5831: No), the current jackpot is a jackpot B, C (a relatively large jackpot of the first special symbol). It means any one of five rounds with a small number of rounds, and E and F (10 rounds with a relatively small number of rounds of the second special symbol). Therefore, in this case, since the original number of rounds is small and there is no possibility of executing the pseudo small round effect, each process of S5832 to S5837 for randomly selecting (determining) whether or not to execute the pseudo small round effect is skipped. Then, the process proceeds to S5838.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5831, if it is determined that the current jackpot is either the jackpot A or the jackpot D (S5831: Yes), it is determined whether or not the pseudo small round effect can be executed by lottery (determination). S5832 to S5837 are executed. Specifically, the pseudo small round lottery table 222cb is read out (S5832), and the execution of the pseudo small round effect is determined (determined) (S5833). In addition, as described above, the pseudo small round lottery table 222cb is set so that the result of the lottery corresponding to the execution of the pseudo small round effect is 50%.

  When the processing of S5833 ends, it is then determined whether or not the lottery (judgment) result of the processing of S5833 is a lottery result corresponding to the execution of the pseudo small round effect (S5834). If it is determined that the result is not the corresponding lottery result (S5834: No), each process of S5835 to S5837 for setting execution of the pseudo small round effect is skipped, and the process proceeds to S5838.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5834 that the result is a lottery result corresponding to the execution of the pseudo small round effect (S5834: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the current big hit is the big hit A (S5835). . In the process of S5835, if it is determined that the current jackpot is the jackpot A (eight round jackpot of the first special symbol) (S5835: Yes), the current jackpot is determined to be the number of rounds in the jackpot of the first special symbol. Is stored in the pseudo final R storage area 223cc to store the value (data) corresponding to 5 rounds (S5836), and the process proceeds to S5838. I do.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5835 that the current jackpot is not the jackpot A (that is, the jackpot D) (S5835: No), the current jackpot is determined as one of the jackpots of the second special symbol. A value (data) corresponding to 10 rounds is stored in the pseudo final R storage area 223 cc in order to make it appear as if the number of rounds is a relatively small jackpot (10 rounds jackpot) (S5837), and the process proceeds to S5838. Transition.

  In the process of S5838, a display opening command corresponding to the opening effect to be executed is set, and the process ends. By executing the pseudo small round lottery process, when a relatively small number of rounds is announced at the start of the big hit (that is, when five rounds are notified in the first special symbol big hit, or in the case of the second special symbol, Even if 10 rounds are announced at the jackpot), it is possible to perform the game during the jackpot in expectation that a larger number of rounds will be announced (the pseudo small round effect is being executed). it can. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, referring to FIG. 148, this is one of the hit-related processes 10 (see FIG. 146) in the third control example, and is replaced with the round number command process (see FIG. 131) in the second control example. The details of the executed round number command processing 10 (S4472) will be described. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the round number command processing 10 (S4472).

  Of the round number command processing 10 (see FIG. 148) in the third control example, each processing of S5401 to S5407 includes the round number command processing (see FIG. 131) of each processing of S5401 to S5407 in the second control example. The same processing is performed. Further, in the round number command processing 10 in the third control example, when the processing of S5401 ends, the round notified by the current round number command is the pseudo round set in the pseudo final R storage area 223cc. It is determined whether the current round matches the final round (S5411). If it is determined that the current round is a pseudo final round (S5411: Yes), the process proceeds to S5403 and the reproduction order of the music data type is determined. It is determined whether or not to rearrange. On the other hand, in the process of S5411, if it is determined that the current round is not the pseudo final round (S5411: No), the process proceeds to S5402.

  By executing the round number command processing 10 (see FIG. 148), at the start of the pseudo final round when the pseudo small round effect is executed (at the start of 5 rounds at the jackpot A and at 10 at the jackpot D) At the start of the round), the rearrangement of the reproduction order of the music data is determined in the same manner as in the original final round, so that the possibility that the chorus portion of the music is reproduced during the pseudo final round is increased. Can be configured. That is, since the audio mode in the pseudo final round and the audio usage in the original final round can be made equal, the pseudo final round or the original final round is determined from the audio mode of the music. This can be prevented (suppressed) from being detected by the player before the continuous effect (see FIG. 141 (b)) is executed. Therefore, when the pseudo small round effect is set, whether the continuous effect is executed until the start timing of the continuous effect (see FIG. 141 (b)) (that is, the end timing of the pseudo final round), Since it can be difficult to identify whether the big hit ends as it is, it is possible to increase the player's expectation during the pseudo final round.

  Next, referring to FIG. 149, this is one of the hit-related processing 10 (see FIG. 146) in the third control example, and is executed instead of the interval command processing (see FIG. 133) in the second control example. The details of the executed interval number command processing 10 (S4473) will be described. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the interval number command processing 10 (S4473).

  Of the interval command processing 10 (see FIG. 149) in the third control example, each processing of S5501 to S5509 is the same as each processing of S5501 to S5509 of the interval command processing (see FIG. 133) in the second control example, respectively. The processing is executed. In the interval command processing 10 (see FIG. 149) in the third control example, when the processing of S5501 ends, the interval period notified by the current interval command is changed to the pseudo last round (pseudo last R storage area). It is determined whether or not it is an interval period set immediately before (a round set to 223 cc) (S5511). If it is determined that the current interval period is an interval period immediately before a pseudo final round (S5511). : Yes), the process moves to S5503, and it is determined whether or not the reproduction order of the music data type is rearranged. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5511 that the current round is not the pseudo final round (S5511: No), the process proceeds to S5502.

  By executing the process of S5511, at the start of the interval period immediately before the pseudo final round in the case where the pseudo small round effect is being executed, similarly to the start of the interval period immediately before the original final round. In addition, it is possible to determine the rearrangement of the reproduction order of the music data so as to increase the possibility that the chorus portion of the music is reproduced during the pseudo final round. That is, since the audio mode in the pseudo final round and the audio usage in the original final round can be made equal, the pseudo final round or the original final round is determined from the audio mode of the music. This can be prevented (suppressed) from being detected by the player before the continuous effect (see FIG. 141 (b)) is executed. Therefore, when the pseudo small round effect is set, whether the continuous effect is executed until the start timing of the continuous effect (see FIG. 141 (b)) (that is, the end timing of the pseudo final round), Since it can be difficult to identify whether the big hit ends as it is, it is possible to increase the player's expectation during the pseudo final round.

  In the interval command process 10 (see FIG. 149) in the third control example, in the process of S5506, the interval period notified by the current interval command is not the interval period after the end of the first round of the jackpot. If it is determined (S5506: No), then it is determined whether or not the current interval is an interval period after the pseudo last round (the round set in the pseudo final R storage area 223cc) is completed (S5506: No). S5512). If it is determined in the processing of S5512 that the interval period is after the pseudo last round is completed (S5512: Yes), execution of the continuous effect (see FIG. 141 (b)) is set (S5513). Then, the data stored in the pseudo final R storage area 223cc is reset (S5514), and this processing ends.

  Next, the details of the variable display setting process 10 (S4162) in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 10 (S4162). The variable display setting process 10 (S4162) in the third control example is similar to the variable display setting process (see FIG. 38) in the second control example (and the first embodiment), and is a variable effect on the third symbol display device 81. Is a process for generating and setting a display variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

  In the variable display setting process 10 (see FIG. 150) in the third control example (see FIG. 150), in each of the processes of S4501 to S4509, S4501 of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 38) in the second control example (the first embodiment) is performed. To S4509 are executed. Further, in the variation display setting process 10 (see FIG. 150) in the third control example, when the process of S4504 is completed, next, it is determined whether or not the current variation pattern is a variation pattern for reporting a jackpot. (S4521), when it is determined that the variation pattern is for notifying the jackpot (S4521: Yes), the type of the jackpot and the type of the third symbol (odd symbol or even symbol) aligned in the variation pattern set this time are determined. Is stored in the jackpot situation storage area 223cb (S4522), and the process moves to S4505. In the process of S4522, "01H" is stored in the jackpot situation storage area 223cb when the odd symbol notification is a probability change jackpot, and "02H" is stored when the odd symbol notification is a probability change hit. If it is a normal jackpot of the even symbol notification, “03H” is stored.

  The data stored in the jackpot situation storage area 223cb by the processing of S4522 is referred to when the player selects (determines) “random song selection” during the song selection period, and the jackpot situation storage area 223cb of the random song selection table 222ca. Is compared with the music lottery counter 223ca to determine one music to be played during the big hit.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4521 that the variation pattern set this time is not the variation pattern corresponding to the jackpot (that is, the variation pattern corresponding to the deviation) (S4521: No), the process of S4522 is skipped. Then, the process shifts to S4505.

  As described above, in the third control example, when “random music selection” is determined by the player on the music selection menu screen, the music to be played back after the end of the first round (music selection period) is randomly selected. It is configured to be determined. Further, when the “random song selection” is determined, if a specific condition is satisfied (that is, if the current jackpot is a probable change jackpot), a special song that is not displayed as an item on the song selection menu screen (ie, , “Song a”) can be selected. As a result, it is possible to select “random music selection” in expectation of determining “music a” that cannot be normally heard. In particular, when a variable display (fluctuating effect) in which the third symbol with an even number is attached becomes a big hit (when it is not clear whether it is a probability variable hit or a normal big hit), In other words, before confirming the result of the effect that informs whether or not to shift to the probable change state, a “random music selection” is actively performed for a player who wants to know whether or not to transit to the probable change state. Can be selected. Furthermore, the rate at which “song a” is determined by lottery is configured so that the odd-numbered jackpot of the even-numbered symbol notification is higher than that of the odd-numbered symbol notification. This makes it possible to more positively select “random music selection” when the jackpot of the even symbol notification is won. By increasing the possibility that “random song selection” is determined by the player, a plurality of songs (songs A to Z) set in the pachinko machine 10 can be reproduced evenly. This allows a plurality of songs to be heard without waste.

  In the third control example, as one type of effect performed during the jackpot, the number of rounds of the jackpot for a predetermined period (for example, until the fifth round or the tenth round is completed) from the start of the jackpot. Is reported to be less than the original number of rounds, and after a predetermined period elapses, a pseudo small round effect for notifying the original number of rounds can be selected. By configuring this pseudo small round effect to be executable, if a relatively small number of rounds is announced at the start of a jackpot, after a predetermined period has elapsed, a larger number of rounds (8 rounds or 16 rounds) Is expected to be notified, a game can be played until a predetermined period elapses. Accordingly, in the third control example, even in the pseudo final round during the execution of the pseudo small round effect, the rust portion is reproduced by rearranging the music reproduction order in the same manner as the original final round. It is configured so that: As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to discriminate a pseudo final round or an original final round from a part of the music reproduced during the pseudo final round. Thus, until the pseudo small round effect ends (until the predetermined period elapses), it is possible to keep the expectation that a larger number of rounds will be notified.

  In the third control example, when the player decides on “random song selection” only in the case of the probability change jackpot, the configuration is such that “song a” may be reproduced, and the odd symbol information notification probability change jackpot. The probability that the "song a" is selected is higher in the probability of winning the even symbol information than in the case of the even symbol notification, but when the "random song selection" is determined, the rate at which each song is determined is , Can be arbitrarily determined. Specifically, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which “song a” is determined with a low probability (for example, a rate of 0.1%) even when a normal jackpot is hit. That is, the rate at which "song a" is selected is higher when "random song selection" is selected during the execution of the probability change jackpot than when "random song selection" is selected during the normal jackpot execution. You may comprise. With this configuration, even if “song a” is reproduced, the probability change jackpot is not fixed, so that the game can be performed with a sense of tension until the probability change state is notified. . Further, the rate at which the “song a” is determined may be configured such that the odd-numbered symbol notification has a higher probability of being changed than the even-numbered symbol notification has.

  In the third control example, among the entertainment effects executed during the jackpot (predetermined period), the effect mode (the type of music to be played) of the entertainment effect by sound is determined by the content of the operation performed on the operation button 230 by the player ( Although the configuration is determined according to the selection result on the music selection menu screen), the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the effect of the display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the predetermined period is changed according to the player's selection result (operation content on the operation button 230). More specifically, when a specific effect execution condition is satisfied, a plurality of items corresponding to a plurality of effect modes (corresponding to the items corresponding to each of “Song A” to “Song Z” in the third control example) ) And an item for which the effect mode is selected at random (corresponding to an item corresponding to “random music selection” in the third control example) are configured to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, the effect mode of the effect to be executed is determined according to the item selected by operating the operation button 230 by the player. That is, when the item corresponding to the effect mode is selected, the effect is performed in the effect mode corresponding to the selected item, while when the item selected at random is selected, the effect is selected at a predetermined timing. A configuration in which one effect mode is determined from a plurality of possible effect modes may be adopted. By configuring in this way, the player selects a gaming ability that selects a desired presentation mode of the player and a game mode that allows the user to randomly select the presentation mode and focus on which of the presentation modes is selected. Can be done. Further, in this case, similarly to the third control example, a special effect that can be determined only when the player selects an item for which the effect mode is selected at random (in the special music in the third control example). A display effect corresponding to a certain “song a” may be set. With this configuration, it is possible to visually determine whether or not a special effect has been performed. Therefore, whether or not a special effect is performed (that is, whether or not to shift to the positive change state after the jackpot) is determined. You can make it easier to understand.

  In the third control example, the special song “song a” can be selected only when the player selects “random song selection” on the song selection menu screen. However, the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, when the probability change jackpot is determined (that is, when the odd symbol notification is a probability change jackpot, and the player is already convinced that the probability change jackpot is, the “song a” is displayed on the music selection menu screen. May be displayed. With such a configuration, in a situation where the probable change state is determined, a player who wants to listen to “music a” is more likely to select another music than “random music selection”. ", But an item" music a "can be selected. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved. Also, in this case, a predetermined ratio of “song a” to the song selection menu screen displayed in the probability change jackpot of the even symbol notification (a situation in which the player cannot know whether or not to be in the probability change state). May be displayed. With such a configuration, the method of early detecting whether or not a probable change state is detected (variation (whether or not “music a” is included in the item, and “random music selection”) (Whether or not “song a” is reproduced) can be provided, so that the interest of the player can be further improved during the song selection period of the jackpot of the even symbol notification.

  In the third control example, the special song “song a” can be selected only when the player selects “random song selection” on the song selection menu screen. However, the player does not necessarily select the song. It does not need to be configured so that it can be performed. For example, the configuration may be such that the operation button 230 is abolished and the music played during the execution of the jackpot is randomly selected each time by referring to the random music selection table 222ca. That is, when the probability change state is reached after the end of the jackpot, “song a” can be reproduced. However, when the probability is low after the end of the jackpot, “song a” is not likely to be reproduced. You may. Even in the case of such a configuration, in the event of a big hit of the even number symbol notification, it is possible to play a game during the big hit by paying attention to whether or not “song a” is reproduced. Further, the present invention is not limited to the case where “song a” is used to indicate whether or not the music piece is in the probable change state. During a predetermined period of time during the game, the state after the predetermined period elapses becomes an advantageous state for the player (for example, a big hit, a time saving state, a small hit RUSH, a slot BIG BONUS, an ART, an AT, or the like). It is determined whether or not the music is in a disadvantageous state, and if it is in an advantageous state, a special song can be played.On the other hand, if it is in an unfavorable state, a special song is played. What is necessary is just to comprise so that there is no possibility of being performed.

  In the third control example, the music that can be selected when "random music selection" is selected is made different depending on whether or not the jackpot is a probability change jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that the music that can be selected when “random music selection” is selected differs depending on whether or not the pseudo small round production is being performed. Specifically, when the “random song selection” is determined during the execution of the pseudo small round effect, one song is selected from a plurality of songs including “song a”, and the pseudo small round effect is executed. In the case where there is no song, one song may be selected from a plurality of songs excluding “song a”.

  In the third control example, the control when setting a song with a big hit has been described as an example. However, this control is not limited to the big hit. If the state becomes relatively advantageous for the player after the end of the predetermined music reproduction period, a special music (that is, “music a”) can be selected when “random music selection” is selected. On the other hand, if the state becomes relatively disadvantageous after the end of the reproduction period, at least a special song (that is, “song a”) is excluded (that is, “song A” to “song Z”). Any situation can be used as long as it can be configured to select one piece of music from. For example, similarly to the first control example, a configuration used for control for selecting a music piece in the probable change state may be adopted. In this case, if "Random tune selection" is selected in a state where the jackpot is included in the holding ball, a special song can be selected, while the jackpot is included in the holding ball. If not, a configuration may be adopted in which one music piece is selected from among the special music pieces excluded. In addition, the music selection menu screen can be displayed during the execution of the variable display effect, and when "random music selection" is selected (determined) during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the jackpot, a special On the other hand, if "random music selection" is selected (determined) during execution of the variable display corresponding to the departure, one music is selected from among those excluding special music. It may be configured.

  In the third control example, when "random music selection" is selected, the probable change state is determined when "music a" is selected. However, when the player selects items other than "random music selection" on the music selection menu screen, In the case where is selected, there may be provided a case where the probability change state is determined at a predetermined rate. Specifically, for example, when the player selects one piece of music during the execution of the probability change jackpot, the reproduction position of the music piece is reproduced from a reproduction position different from the normal position with a predetermined probability (for example, a rust portion). , Or from the second song, etc.). Alternatively, or in addition, at a predetermined probability, a song different from the selected song (for example, “song a”) is played, the tone of the song is changed from normal, and the version is changed from normal. The configuration may be different. With this configuration, it is possible to meet the desire of a player who has both the idea of selecting his or her favorite music piece and the idea of early detection of whether or not the music is in a probable state. Further, in this case, the configuration may be such that the music selected by the player is reproduced in an audio mode different from normal only when the same music is continuously selected for a predetermined number of jackpots.

  In the third control example, the music selected during the music selection period is reproduced from the beginning (intro part) when the first round of the jackpot ends, regardless of the number of rounds of the jackpot. It is not limited. For example, for a jackpot with a large number of rounds (for example, an 8-round jackpot or a 16-round jackpot), while the reproduction is started from the beginning of the music, a jackpot with a small number of rounds (for example, 5 rounds) and a pseudo small round effect are produced. May be configured to start playback from the chorus part of the music. With such a configuration, even if the jackpot type has a small number of rounds, the player can more reliably hear the chorus portion of the music at one jackpot. Also, in this case, if the pseudo-small round effect is set, it may be determined by lottery whether to start the reproduction from the chorus part of the music or to start the reproduction from the intro part of the music. More specifically, for example, when a pseudo small round effect is set, the reproduction is started from the chorus part of the music at a rate of 90%, and the reproduction is started from the head part of the music at a rate of 10%. Is also good. With this configuration, if the reproduction is started from the beginning of the song even though a small number of rounds (for example, five rounds) is notified, a pseudo small round effect is executed at that time. Therefore, the player can be satisfied with the fact that the number of rounds is a jackpot before confirming the continuous production.

  In the above-described second and third control examples, in the music selection period (first round), the music dedicated to the music selection period is played, and from the end of the first round, the music selected by the player is played. , But is not limited to this. For example, each time the player operates (presses) the upper button UB or the lower button DB on the music selection menu screen (every time the item that changes to a lighted appearance display mode is switched), a rust of an item newly arranged in the music selection area is displayed. It may be configured to reproduce a part. With this configuration, it is possible to determine the music to be played during the jackpot, taking into account not only the title of the music (music name) but also the sound characteristic of the most characteristic rust portion of the music. Music can be more easily selected. Also, in this case, if the current jackpot is a jackpot with a small number of rounds (for example, five round jackpots), the music is played as it is from the continuation of the playback position when the player pressed down and selected the center button CB. May be continued. With this configuration, music can be more effectively reproduced using the remaining period of the jackpot with a small number of rounds.

  In each of the above control examples, a configuration in which a player can select an effect mode (a type of music to be reproduced) of a sound effect among entertainment effects performed during a predetermined period (during a probable change state or during a jackpot). But it is not limited to this. For example, an arrangement may be made in which it is possible to select an effect mode of a display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In each of the above control examples, a configuration is adopted in which a music data group is provided for each type of music to be reproduced, and each piece of data constituting the music data group is reproduced in a predetermined order to reproduce one music. , But is not limited to this. A configuration in which only one piece of data capable of reproducing one piece of music from the start to the end as many as the number of pieces of music may be provided. In this case, the playback position may be configured to have a data structure in a format that can be identified, and the playback position may be changed at least in part units. With such a configuration, as in the above-described first control example, the reproduction of the music can be started from a different reproduction position in accordance with the history of the selection of the music. Further, as in the above-described second control example, the reproduction position can be changed so that the possibility that the rust portion is reproduced during the round period of the final round of the jackpot is increased.

  In each of the above control examples, only items to be arranged in the music selection area are determined by random lottery, and other items (items to be arranged at menu positions other than the history area) are determined in advance based on the items arranged in the music selection area. Although the arrangement is made in the specified order (alphabetical order), the arrangement is not limited to this. For example, other items may be determined by random lottery.

  In each of the above control examples, in the initial arrangement of the music selection menu screen, items with a high selection frequency of the player are arranged in a range that can be selected with a small number of operations, and one item selected by random lottery in the music selection area is selected. Although the arrangement is made such that the other items are arranged in a predetermined order based on the items arranged in the music selection area, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that the player can freely customize the arrangement of items on the music selection menu screen by operating the operation buttons 230 or the like. With such a configuration, the music piece that the player wants to select can be previously arranged at a selectable position within a range where the number of operations is small, so that the convenience for the player can be improved.

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is easily inferred that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. You can do it.

  For example, in the above-described first to fourth embodiments and the seventh embodiment, one or a plurality of operation winning prize openings which are a start of a jackpot when a game ball enters are provided. However, the start of the jackpot is It is not limited to this. For example, a configuration in which an operating means such as a switch is provided in a range that can be reached by a player, and a specific jackpot is started when a specific operation is performed on the operating means after a jackpot has been won by a special symbol lottery. It may be. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily start the jackpot, so that despite having fired a game ball aiming at the activated winning opening, did not enter the activated winning opening and discouraged the player, etc. Can be prevented.

  In each of the above embodiments, in the case of a big hit or a small hit, the right variable winning device 65 is provided as a configuration for providing a prize ball by allowing a game ball to enter, but is not limited thereto. Not something. For example, a configuration may be used for a gaming machine of a type in which a big hit is started when a gaming ball enters a specific area inside the right variable winning device 65 (so-called two types and one type and two types). With such a configuration, as the number of the game balls passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 increases, the number of the game balls entering the right specific winning opening 65a increases, so that the game balls enter the specific area. You can make it seem easy. Therefore, the player can determine the degree of expectation to be a big hit from the number of game balls on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1.

  In the above-described first to fourth embodiments and the seventh embodiment, two types of specific winning ports (right specific winning port 65a and left specific winning port 650a) having different closing conditions are provided, and depending on the number of rounds and the like. Although the type of the specific winning opening to be opened is switched, the present invention is not limited to this. Only the right specific winning opening 65a may be provided, and the closing condition (maximum winning number) may be switched by determining the number of rounds. With such a configuration, the left variable winning device 650 can be eliminated, so that the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by reducing the number of components.

  In the above-described first to fourth embodiments and the seventh embodiment, the operation winning prize hole (the operation prize opening 660 in the first to third embodiments, In the fourth embodiment, it is configured such that the game ball can always enter the right operation winning opening 661 and the left operation winning opening 662), and it is determined that entering the operation winning opening only during the jackpot waiting state is valid. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in a state other than the jackpot waiting state, the ball may not be physically allowed to enter the activated winning opening. Specifically, for example, the electric winning combination that can close the flow path for the operation winning opening is provided, and only when the game ball enters the operating winning opening after entering the jackpot waiting state, the electric winning combination is formed. It is good also as composition which opens an object. Also in the case of such a configuration, the jackpot can be started based on the detection of a ball entering the activated winning opening in the jackpot waiting state.

  In the above-described embodiments, the sound lamp control device 113 controls the start timing and the update process of the effect mode such as the standby state effect and the right-turning expectation effect suggestive effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, the main control device 110 and the display control device 114 may be configured to perform control relating to the effect mode. As a result, the processing load on the sound lamp control device 114 can be reduced. In this case, the passage detection sensor 228 may be electrically connected to the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Thereby, even if the control relating to the production mode is ported to another control device, the update of the mode of the chance meter CM, the update of the mode of the physical strength gauge LG, and the like can be executed accurately.

  In the first to fourth embodiments and the seventh embodiment, the passage detection sensor 228 for detecting the number of game balls passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 during the execution of the standby state effect is provided. Although the mode of the chance meter CM is changed according to the detection result, the player is made to grasp the number of game balls on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a known photographing means (for example, a video camera or the like) for photographing the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 is provided, and at least a part of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is photographed during the jackpot waiting state. It may be configured to display an image or video taken by the means. This allows the player to more accurately grasp the situation on the upper surface of the door 65f1.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, by forming a zigzag flow path in which the advancing direction of the game ball can be changed a plurality of times on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1, when the game ball is continuously struck to the right, a big hit of 1 Although the number of game balls exceeding the upper limit winning number in the round is configured to be able to flow simultaneously on the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1, it is not limited to this. For example, instead of forming a serpentine flow path on the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1, the width of the opening and closing door 65f1 (and the right specific winning opening 65a) may be simply increased to allow the game ball to pass over the opening and closing door 65f1. By increasing the distance, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of game balls exceeding the upper limit winning number in the first round can simultaneously flow down. In this case, the number of gaming balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 at the same time when the right-handed player keeps hitting continuously may not be configured to exceed the upper limit winning number in the first round. For example, the width (path length) of the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 may be configured to be longer than the length obtained by multiplying the diameter of the game ball by the upper limit winning number in the first round. With this configuration, for example, when a ball is clogged or the like and the game ball on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 cannot flow down below the game board 13, the first round on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 by right-handing. Only the game balls equal to or more than the upper limit number are reached in advance, and in the case of the next big hit, the game balls equal to or larger than the upper limit number can be simultaneously entered in the first round. It should be noted that a shield member or the like for preventing a game ball reaching the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 from flowing down below the game board 13 in a normal state may be provided. That is, the game ball that has reached the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 may be configured to stop on the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 until a big hit occurs. In such a configuration, it is possible to easily make an over-prize in the next big hit only by hitting the game ball right before the big hit.

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a game ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine which has a special winning state having a special area such as a V zone and has a special game state in which a special game state is required to win a game ball. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as areache, sparrow ball, slot machine, so-called game machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating an operation lever in a state where a symbol is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and a symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows: "a display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one ". In this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative game media. As an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of game balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, a symbol change starts due to an operation of an operation lever, for example, due to an operation of a stop button, or By the elapse of the predetermined time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and a player is generated. , A large amount of game balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only gaming balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so that the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is present. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of the barrel medal and the gaming ball and the restriction on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  Each of the above-described embodiments and each control example may be configured by combining all or a part thereof. For example, the configuration of the passage detection sensor 228 of the right variable winning device 65 in the sixth embodiment may be applied to another embodiment. For example, when applied to the first embodiment, the gauge number of the chance meter CM during execution of the standby state effect can be accurately linked to the number of game balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. More specifically, the passage number counter 223k in the sixth embodiment is also provided in the RAM 223 in the first embodiment, and the value of the passage number counter 223k is updated in the same manner as in the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 87). See S4211, S4212, S4219, and S4220). Then, during the execution of the standby state effect, each time the value of the passing number counter 223k is updated, the mode of the chance meter CM is updated so that the gauge number corresponds to the updated counter value. Thereby, the mode of the chance meter CM can be set to a mode according to the situation of the actual upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. In other embodiments, the configuration of the sixth embodiment can be diverted by a similar method.

  Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Characteristic A group> (a configuration that easily causes over-winning)
A specific area in which a game ball can enter, a privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering the specific area, a specific flow path in which the game ball can flow, The first position where the game ball flowing down at least the predetermined section of the flow path is more easily guided to the specific area than passing the predetermined section, and passes through the predetermined section than is guided to the specific area. A variable means that can be changed to a second position that is easy to operate, an operation means that can be operated by a player, and a game ball that moves to the specific flow path when the operation content of the operation means becomes the first operation content. A game ball is fired at a first firing speed that makes it easier to reach, and a second firing that is different from the first firing speed is performed when a second operation that differs from the first operation is performed. A launching means capable of launching a game ball at a speed, and Determining means for determining whether a specific condition that is more easily satisfied when the game ball is fired at the second firing speed by the firing means than when the game ball is fired at the first firing speed; Variable control means for controlling the variable means to change from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied by the means. Gaming machine A1.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a hit state when a result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball to a starting winning opening is a hit. Some of such gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types having different numbers of rounds, and some of them aim to improve the interest in winning by making different game values obtainable (for example, And Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the game value that can be acquired is almost constant for each hit type, and thus it is like an operation for obtaining the game value according to the hit type, and the game during the hit state is performed. Was sometimes monotonous. That is, there is a problem that it is difficult to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, some conventional gaming machines allow a player to determine the start timing of a winning state when a winning is won, but the game value that can be obtained during the winning is almost constant for each winning type. Since this is the same as other conventional gaming machines, it has been difficult to improve the interest of the player in the game during the hit state.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, a predetermined privilege is provided by the privilege provision means based on the fact that the game ball has entered a specific area where the game ball can enter. A first position at which game balls flowing down at least a predetermined section of the specific flow path in which the game balls can flow are more easily guided to a specific area than passing through the predetermined section; and a predetermined section than being guided to the specific area. The variable means is configured to be variably set to a second position where it is easy to pass through. When the operation content of the operation means operable by the player becomes the first operation content, the launch means launches the game ball at the first launch speed at which the game ball easily reaches the specific flow path. . On the other hand, when the second operation content is different from the first operation content, a game ball is fired by the firing means at a second firing speed different from the first firing speed. When the shooting ball is fired at the second firing speed by the firing device, the determination device determines whether a specific condition that is more easily satisfied than when the game ball is fired at the first firing speed is satisfied. Based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied, the variable control unit controls the variable unit to change from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period.

  Thereby, the operating means can be operated in expectation of the specific condition being satisfied while the game ball is passing through the predetermined section, and thus there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A1, the variable control means may change the variable means from the first position to the second position based on a first number of game balls having entered the specific area. The predetermined section is configured to have a path length that allows a second number of game balls larger than the first number to flow at the same time in a state where the variable means is changed to the second position. Gaming machine A2, characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1. That is, based on the first number of game balls having entered the specific area, the variable control means controls the variable means to change from the first position to the second position. The predetermined section is configured with a path length that allows a second number of game balls, which is larger than the first number, to flow simultaneously at a time when the variable means is changed to the second position.

  This allows the operating means to be operated by devising the specific condition to be satisfied after the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section exceeds the first number, thereby allowing the player to enjoy the game. There is an effect that can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A2, the launching means is capable of launching a game ball at a time interval equal to or longer than a predetermined interval, and in the predetermined section, the game ball is continuously fired at the predetermined interval in the second direction. In this state, the second number of game balls reach the predetermined section after one game ball reaches the predetermined section and before the game ball passes through the predetermined section. A gaming machine A3 characterized by allowing game balls to pass through the game machine A3.

  According to the gaming machine A3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A2. That is, the launching means is configured to be able to launch the game balls at time intervals longer than a predetermined interval. The predetermined section is a state in which game balls are continuously fired at predetermined intervals in the second direction, from when one game ball reaches the predetermined section until the game ball passes through the predetermined section. During this period, the game balls are configured to pass so that the second number of game balls can reach the predetermined section.

  As a result, there is an effect that a player who wants to increase the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section to a number exceeding the first number can fire game balls continuously at predetermined intervals.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the variable means is configured to be able to guide all game balls flowing down the predetermined section to the specific area when the variable is changed to the first position. A gaming machine A4, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, when the first position is changed, all the gaming balls flowing down the predetermined section are guided to the specific area. Since the number of game balls passing through a predetermined section is confirmed, the number of game balls guided to a specific area when a specific condition is satisfied can be known. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily understand the degree of advantage when the specific condition is satisfied.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the game machine includes a ball-entering unit into which a game ball can enter, and the discriminating unit determines that the specific condition is satisfied when the game ball enters the ball-entering unit. A gaming machine A5 characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, when the game ball enters the ball entry means capable of entering the game ball, the specific condition is satisfied by the determination means. Therefore, by firing the game ball aiming at the ball entry means, there is an effect that the specific condition can be easily established at the timing desired by the player.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, a gaming machine A6 including a deceleration means for reducing a flowing speed of a gaming ball flowing down the predetermined section.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the falling speed of the gaming ball flowing down the predetermined section is reduced by the speed reduction means, so that the gaming ball is directed toward the specific flow path. When fired continuously, the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section can be increased. Therefore, there is an effect that more game balls can be guided to the specific area when the specific condition is satisfied.

  Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, a display unit capable of displaying an effect mode, and an advantage determination unit that determines an advantage degree when the specific condition is satisfied until the specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine A7 comprising: a suggestion effect execution unit that executes a suggestion effect indicating the degree of advantage determined by the advantage determination unit on the display unit.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the degree of advantage in the case where the specific condition is satisfied is determined by the advantage determination means until the specific condition is satisfied. The suggestion effect indicating the degree of advantage determined by the determination unit is executed on the display unit by the suggestion effect execution unit. By checking the suggestion effect displayed on the display unit, the degree of advantage when the specific condition is satisfied is confirmed. There is an effect that can be understood more easily.

  In the gaming machine A7, the advantage determination means determines the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section, and the suggestion effect execution means determines the number of game balls determined by the advantage determination means. A gaming machine A8 that performs a suggested effect as the suggested effect.

  According to the gaming machine A8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A7. That is, the number of gaming balls passing through the predetermined section is determined by the advantage determining means. An effect indicating the number of game balls determined by the advantage determining means is executed as a suggestion effect by the suggestion effect execution means.

  Thereby, by confirming the suggested effect, there is an effect that the player can easily know the number of game balls entering the specific area when the specific condition is satisfied.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, a specific lottery result is obtained by a ball-entering means capable of entering a game ball, a lottery means for executing a lottery based on establishment of a lottery condition, and a lottery by the lottery means. And valid state setting means for setting a valid state in which the entering ball is valid for the entering ball means, based on which, the discriminating means determines whether or not the game ball enters the entering ball means during the valid state. When the ball is entered, it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied, and the variable control means is configured to determine that the specific condition is satisfied by the determination means. A gaming machine A9 for executing a variable game in which a predetermined number of times is changed from a position to the first position.

  According to the gaming machine A9, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines A1 to A8. That is, the lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and based on the specific lottery result obtained by the lottery by the lottery means, the entry of the ball into the ball entry means capable of entering the game ball is enabled. Is set by the effective state setting means. When the ball enters the ball entry means during the valid state, the discrimination means determines that the specific condition is satisfied. A variable game in which the variable means is changed a predetermined number of times from the second position to the first position is executed by the variable control means based on the determination means determining that the specific condition is satisfied.

  Thereby, there is an effect that a game can be played in expectation of a specific lottery result by the lottery means.

  In the gaming machine A9, a plurality of game machines including at least a first operation position at which a game ball easily enters the ball entry means and a second operation position at which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the first operation position. A gaming machine A10 comprising: an operation means operable at an operation position; and an operation control means for operating the operation position of the operation means to a corresponding operation position according to an elapsed time.

  According to the gaming machine A10, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A9. That is, the operation is performed in a plurality of operation positions including at least a first operation position in which the game ball easily enters the ball entry means and a second operation position in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the first operation position. The means is operable. The operation position of the operation means is moved to an operation position corresponding to the elapsed time by the operation control means.

  Accordingly, in order to satisfy the specific condition, it is necessary to fire the game ball toward the ball entry means aiming at a timing at which the operation position of the operation means becomes the first operation position. There is an effect that it is possible to give the player a pleasure to be made.

<Feature B group> (providing big hits that can aim for over-winning and big hits that cannot be aimed at)
A variable ball-in means which can be changed between a first state in which game balls can enter and a second state in which game balls are more difficult to enter than in the first state, and game balls into the variable ball-in means. A bonus granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the entry of a ball, a discriminating means for executing a discrimination based on the satisfaction of a discriminating condition, and a A variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable ball entry means is changed a predetermined number of times from the second state to the first state; an operation means operable by a player; Condition determining means for determining whether a specific condition that is likely to be satisfied when a specific operation is performed is satisfied, and the type of the variable game executed by the variable game execution means is determined by the determination by the determining means. After a certain judgment result, A first variable game in which the variable game is started when the specific condition is determined to be satisfied by the condition determining means, and a second variable game in which the variable game is started regardless of whether the specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine B1 comprising: a game; and a type determining unit that determines one type from among a plurality of types including at least a game.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a hit state when a result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball to a starting winning opening is a hit. Some of such gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types in which the number of open times (number of rounds) of a large open opening to which a prize ball is awarded when a game ball is won is different, and a game that can be obtained. There is a method of increasing the value of interest by making the value different (for example, Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

  Also, in such conventional gaming machines, even if the number of rounds is the same, by changing the opening pattern of the large opening in each round, the number of game balls that can be won in each round is changed, Some have different degrees of advantage.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the number of prize balls that can be acquired is almost constant for each hit type, so that it is like an operation for obtaining a game value according to the hit type, and during the hit state, In some cases, the game became monotonous. In addition, since it is necessary to change the control according to the hit type during the hit state, there is a problem that the processing load during the hit state increases.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the variable ball-in means is changed between a first state in which game balls can enter and a second state in which game balls are more difficult to enter than in the first state. Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the variable ball-in means, a predetermined privilege is provided by the privilege-providing means. The discriminating means executes the discrimination based on the satisfaction of the discriminating condition, and the variable ball-in means changes the predetermined number of times from the second state to the first state based on the specific discrimination result obtained by the discriminating means. The variable game to be performed is executed by the variable game execution means. The condition determination unit determines whether a specific condition that is easily satisfied when a specific operation is performed on the operation unit that can be operated by the player is satisfied. As a type of the variable game executed by the variable game execution means, after a specific judgment result is obtained by the judgment by the judgment means, the variable game is started when the condition judgment means judges that the specific condition is satisfied. The type determining means determines one type from a plurality of types including at least a first variable game and a second variable game in which the variable game is started regardless of whether a specific condition is satisfied.

  Thus, there is an effect that the timing at which the variable game is started can be changed according to the type of the variable game.

  In the gaming machine B1, a launching means capable of launching a game ball in a direction corresponding to an operation on the operating means, and a first means disposed at a position where a game ball fired in a first direction by the launching means can enter the ball. Ball entry means, second ball entry means arranged at a position at which game balls fired in a second direction different from the first direction can enter, and game balls enter the second ball entry means Ball entry discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the ball has been hit, wherein the condition discriminating means discriminates that the specific condition has been satisfied when a game ball has entered the first ball entry means, The second variable game is based on a determination that a game ball has entered the second ball entry means by the entry ball discrimination means after the specific discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means. Gaming machine B2, characterized in that the gaming machine B2 is started.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B1, a game ball is fired by the firing means in a direction corresponding to the operation of the operating means, and the game ball fired in the first direction by the firing means enters the ball. The first ball entry means is arranged at a possible position. The second ball entry means is arranged at a position where a game ball fired in a second direction different from the first direction can enter the ball. Whether the game ball has entered the second ball entry means is determined by the ball entry determination means. When a game ball enters the first ball entry device, the condition determination device determines that the specific condition is satisfied. After a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination unit, the second variable game is started based on the determination that the game ball has entered the second ball entry unit by the ball entry determination unit.

  Thus, since the ball entry means serving as the start condition differs depending on the type of the variable game, the game ball can be fired in a different direction according to the type of the variable game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to give the player a pleasure of changing the direction in which the game ball is fired.

  In the gaming machine B2, a third ball entry means provided at a position where game balls fired in the second direction can enter, and a first flow path through which game balls fired in the second direction can flow down A variable means capable of holding a first position at which at least one game ball flowing into the first flow path can be held, and a second position at which game balls are less likely to be held than the first position; Switching means for switching the variable means from the first position to the second position based on a specific result of the determination by the determination means, wherein the determination means comprises The second ball entry means is disposed at a position where the game ball passing through the first flow path can enter the ball, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the means. A gaming machine B3, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine B3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B2. That is, the third ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball fired in the second direction can enter. A first position at which at least one game ball that has flowed into the first flow path through which the game ball fired in the second direction can flow, and a second position at which the game ball is less likely to be held than the first position The variable means is changed to the position. The variable means is switched from the first position to the second position by the switching means based on a specific result of the determination by the determination means. A determination is performed by the determination unit based on the fact that the game ball has entered the third ball entry unit. The second ball entry means is arranged at a position where game balls having passed through the first flow path can enter the ball.

  Accordingly, to execute the determination by the determination means, it is necessary to fire the game ball in the second direction, so that the game ball is caused to flow into the first flow path until a specific determination result is obtained. Can be. Therefore, when the second variable game is determined by the type determination means, the game ball held in the first flow path can be immediately made to enter the second ball entry means. Therefore, when the second variable game is determined, there is an effect that the second variable game can be started without the player firing the game ball.

  In the gaming machine B3, the second ball entry means may include a game ball fired in the first direction during a period until a game ball flowing down the first flow path enters the second ball entry means. Is disposed at a position shorter than a period until the ball enters the variable ball-in means.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B3, the period until the game ball flowing down the first flow path enters the second ball entry means is a game ball fired in the first direction. Since the second ball entry means is arranged at a position shorter than the period until the ball enters the variable ball entry means, if the second variable game is determined, the variable game is started immediately. There is an effect that can be.

  In any of the gaming machines B2 to B4, a specific flow path through which a game ball fired in the first direction can flow is provided, and the first state is a game ball flowing down at least a predetermined section in the specific flow path. However, it is a state where it is easier to be guided to the variable ball entry means than passing through the predetermined section, and the second state is that a game ball flowing down the predetermined section is guided to the variable ball entry means. The gaming machine B5 is characterized by being in a state where it is easier to pass through the predetermined section than to go through the predetermined section.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines B2 to B4, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the first state, a game ball flowing down at least a predetermined section of the specific flow path in which the game ball fired in the first direction can flow is guided to the variable ball-in means rather than passing the predetermined section. On the other hand, in the second state, game balls flowing down the predetermined section are more likely to pass through the predetermined section than are guided to the variable milk ball means.

  With this, as the number of the game balls passing through the predetermined section at the time of entering the first ball entry means is increased, more game balls can be guided to the variable entry means. There is an effect that it is possible to provide a game property of launching a game ball in a direction.

  In the gaming machine B5, the variable game execution means is configured to provide a first number of games to the variable ball entry means when at least first the variable ball entry means is changed to the first state in one of the variable games. And controlling the variable ball entry means to be changed to the second position based on the fact that the ball has entered the ball. In the predetermined section, the variable ball entry means is changed to the second position. The gaming machine B6, wherein a second length of the game balls greater than the first number is configured to have a path length that can simultaneously flow in the closed state.

  According to the gaming machine B6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B5. That is, in at least the first state in which the variable ball entry means is changed to the first state in one variable game, based on the fact that the first number of game balls have entered the variable ball entry means, the variable ball entry means Is controlled by the variable game execution means so as to change to the second position. The predetermined section is configured with a path length that allows a second number of game balls, which is larger than the first number, to simultaneously flow down in a state where the variable ball entry means is changed to the second position.

  This allows the operating means to be operated by devising the specific condition to be satisfied after the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section exceeds the first number, thereby allowing the player to enjoy the game. There is an effect that can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B6, the launching means can launch game balls at a time interval equal to or longer than a predetermined interval, and in the predetermined section, game balls are continuously fired at the predetermined interval in the second direction. In this state, the second number of game balls reach the predetermined section after one game ball reaches the predetermined section and before the game ball passes through the predetermined section. A gaming machine B7 characterized by allowing a game ball to pass through as possible.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine B6, the launching means is configured to be able to launch the game balls at a predetermined time interval or more. In a state in which game balls are continuously fired at predetermined intervals in the second direction, a period from when one game ball reaches a predetermined section to when the game ball passes through the predetermined section, The predetermined section is configured such that the game balls pass so that two game balls can reach the predetermined section.

  As a result, there is an effect that a player who wants to increase the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section to a number exceeding the first number can fire game balls continuously at predetermined intervals.

  In any of the gaming machines B5 to B7, a gaming machine B8 is provided with a speed-reducing means for reducing a flowing speed of a gaming ball flowing down the predetermined section.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B5 to B7, the falling speed of the gaming ball flowing down the predetermined section is reduced by the speed reduction means, so that the gaming ball is directed toward the specific flow path. When fired continuously, the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section can be increased. Therefore, when a game ball enters the first ball entry means, the number of game balls guided to the variable ball entry means can be increased.

  Any one of the gaming machines B5 to B8, a display means capable of displaying an effect mode, a number discriminating means for discriminating the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section, and a game ball discriminated by the number discriminating means. A gaming machine B9 comprising: a suggestion effect execution unit that executes a suggestion effect indicating the number of items on the display unit.

  According to the gaming machine B9, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines B5 to B8. That is, the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section is determined by the number determination means, and a suggestion effect indicating the number of game balls determined by the number determination means is executed on the display means by the suggestion effect execution means. .

  Thus, the effect that the player can easily know the number of game balls guided to the variable ball entry means when the game ball enters the first ball entry means by confirming the suggested effect. There is.

  In the gaming machine B9, during the execution of the suggestion effect, it is determined at predetermined intervals whether or not the number of game balls suggested by the suggestion effect is different from the number of game balls determined by the number determination means. The difference discriminating means for discriminating, and the difference discriminating means determines that the number of game balls suggested by the suggested effect is different from the number of game balls discriminated by the number discriminating means. A game machine B10 comprising: a suggestion effect update unit that updates the mode of the suggestion effect based on the number of game balls determined by the number determination unit based on the number of game balls.

  According to the gaming machine B10, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B9. That is, during the execution of the suggestion effect, it is determined by the difference determination device at predetermined intervals whether or not the number of game balls suggested by the suggestion performance is different from the number of game balls determined by the number determination device. You. Based on the difference discriminating means, based on the fact that the number of game balls suggested by the suggested effect and the number of game balls determined by the number discriminating means are different, the mode of the suggested effect is The suggestion effect updating means updates the number of game balls determined by the number determining means to a mode suggesting the number of game balls.

  Thus, the mode of the suggested effect can be updated at predetermined intervals corresponding to the number determined by the number determining means, so that when the ball is entered into the first entering means, it is guided to the variable entering means. This has the effect that the player can more easily know the number of game balls played.

  In the gaming machine B2, a third ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball fired in the second direction can enter the ball, and the determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball being entered, and an effect mode. Display means capable of displaying, the display means, a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect based on the execution of the determination by the determination means, and the specific effect execution by the specific effect execution means As the effect mode, when the specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination unit, and the first variable game is determined by the type determination unit, the first mode is determined, and the determination is performed by the determination unit. If the result of the discrimination is different from the result of the specific discrimination and the discrimination by the discriminating means, the specific discrimination result is obtained, and the second variable game is determined by the type determining means. Gaming machine B11 that if it is, and said the first aspect in which and a demonstration mode determining means capable of determining a different second aspect.

  According to the gaming machine B11, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B2. That is, a third ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball fired in the second direction can enter the ball, the discriminating condition being satisfied based on the game ball having entered. The specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means based on the execution of the determination by the determination means in the display means capable of displaying the effect mode. As an effect mode of the specific effect executed by the specific effect execution means, the first mode is determined by the effect mode determining means when the determination by the determining means results in a specific determination and the first variable game is determined by the type determining means. Is determined. On the other hand, when the discrimination by the discriminator results in a different discrimination result from the specific discrimination result, and when the discrimination by the discriminator results in a specific discrimination and the second variable game is determined by the type determination means. The second aspect different from the first aspect is determined by the rendering mode determining means as the rendering mode of the specific rendering.

  Thereby, when the second variable game is determined, it is possible to make the player feel as if the specific determination result has not been obtained. Therefore, even after the specific effect of the second aspect is executed, the game ball can be continuously fired in the second direction in order to perform the determination by the determination means, so that it is noticed that the specific determination result is obtained. The game ball can be made to enter the second entering means before the game ball is entered. Therefore, since the player can have an impression as if the second variable game was suddenly started, there is an effect that the player can be surprised and delighted.

  In the gaming machine B11, the specific effect of the second mode executed based on the result of the specific determination being determined by the determination means and the second variable game being determined by the type determination means is provided. A pseudo specific effect capable of executing a pseudo specific effect of a mode that is difficult to distinguish from the specific mode of the second mode during a period from the end to a time when a game ball enters the second ball entry means. A gaming machine B12 comprising execution means.

  According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B11, the determination by the determining means results in a specific determination, and the second determination is performed based on the second variable game being determined by the type determining means. During the period from the end of the specific effect of the mode to the time when the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the pseudo specific effect of the mode that is difficult to distinguish from the specific effect of the second mode executes the pseudo specific effect. Since the second variable game is determined by the type determining means, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to be aware of a specific determination result.

  In the gaming machine B12, based on that a game ball has entered the ball entry means, based on the acquisition means for acquiring the discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means, the discrimination information acquired by the acquisition means, Discrimination information storage means capable of storing a predetermined number of information as an upper limit, erasing means for erasing the discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means from the discrimination information storage means, An information count image display means for displaying on the display means an information count image indicating the information count of the discrimination information, and the discrimination by the discrimination means results in the specific discrimination; A period from the end of the specific effect of the second aspect, which is executed based on the determination of the variable game, until a game ball enters the second ball entry means. Oite, the pseudo each time specific effect is executed, the information number of images, a game machine B13 number information is characterized by comprising an image updating means for updating the image corresponding to the number of one less information.

  According to the gaming machine B13, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B12. That is, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry means, the acquisition information to be used for the determination by the determination means is acquired by the acquisition means. The discrimination information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the discrimination information storage means with a predetermined number of information as an upper limit. The discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means is deleted from the discrimination information storage means by the deletion means. An information number image indicating the number of pieces of discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means is displayed on the display means by the information number image display means. After the specific effect is obtained by the determination by the determination means and the specific effect of the second aspect executed based on the determination of the second variable game by the type determination means is completed, the flow proceeds to the second ball entry means. Each time the pseudo specific effect is executed during the period until the game ball enters the game, the information count image is updated by the image update means to an image corresponding to the information count of which the information count is one less.

  This allows the image updating means to update the information count image, thereby making the player feel as if the number of pieces of discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means is decreasing. Therefore, when the second variable game is determined by the type determining means, the player who wishes to execute the determination by the determining means without interruption is kept in the second state even after a specific determination result is obtained. There is an effect that firing can be continued in the direction.

<Feature C>
A specific area in which a game ball can enter, a privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering the specific area, a specific flow path in which the game ball can flow, The first position where the game ball flowing down at least the predetermined section of the flow path is more easily guided to the specific area than passing the predetermined section, and passes through the predetermined section than is guided to the specific area. A variable means that can be changed to a second position that facilitates the determination, a determination means that performs a determination based on satisfaction of a determination condition, and the variable means based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means. Is a variable game executing means for executing a variable game that is variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time, and when the specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determining means, the variable means Possible to first position Gaming machine C1, characterized in that it comprises a specific effect execution unit capable of executing the specific effect before being.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, a symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a winning game advantageous to the player is given. In addition, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed on the display device in addition to the design, and a variety of entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, JP-A-2003-325886). Gazette).

  Also, among the conventional gaming machines, an effect displayed on the display device is capable of executing an effect indicating a degree of expectation as to whether or not an advantageous hit game is given to the player thereafter. Some are being done.

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not it is advantageous to the player when the effect indicating the degree of expectation is started, so that the content of the effect itself is the degree of the player's advantage. Does not affect Therefore, there is a problem in that it is difficult for the player to play the game while paying attention to the display device.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, a predetermined privilege is provided by the privilege provision means based on the fact that the game ball has entered a specific area where the game ball can enter. A first position at which game balls flowing down at least a predetermined section of the specific flow path in which the game balls can flow are more easily guided to a specific area than passing through the predetermined section; and a predetermined section than being guided to the specific area. The variable means is changed to a second position at which the vehicle easily passes through. The determination is performed by the determination unit based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, and the variable unit is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination unit. The variable game is executed by the variable game execution means. When a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination unit, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution unit before the variable unit is changed to the first position.

  Thus, by confirming whether or not the specific effect has been executed, it is possible to determine whether or not the position is changed to the first position.

  In the gaming machine C1, the specific effect execution means includes, as the specific effect, an effect indicating a firing timing at which the variable means may be changed to the first position while the game ball passes through the predetermined section. A gaming machine C2 characterized by executing the following.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C1, as a specific effect, an effect suggesting a firing timing at which the variable means may be changed to the first position while the game ball is passing through the predetermined section. Is executed by the specific effect execution means, so that it is possible to pay more attention to the specific effect.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the predetermined period is a period from when a game ball is fired in a direction in which the specific flow path is arranged to when the fired game ball reaches the specific flow path. A gaming machine C3 characterized by being shorter than the period.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1 or C2, a predetermined period of time after the game ball is fired in the direction in which the specific flow path is arranged, the emitted game ball is placed in the specific flow path. Since it is configured to be shorter than the period until the game reaches, it is possible to make it difficult to obtain a predetermined privilege unless the game ball is fired when the specific effect is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play a game while paying attention to whether or not the specific effect is executed.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, based on a result of the determination by the determination means being a second determination result different from the specific determination result, the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position. A second variable game execution means for executing a second variable game that is changed a specific number of times, and a period during which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position in the second variable game, A gaming machine C4, which is likely to be longer than the predetermined period.

  According to the gaming machine C4, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C1 to C3. That is, the second variable game in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position by a specific number of times based on the second determination result different from the specific determination result being determined by the determination means is the second variable game. It is executed by two variable game execution means. The period during which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position in the second variable game is configured to be longer than a predetermined period.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the game can be performed in expectation of the second variable game being executed.

  In the gaming machine C4, dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of identification information indicating a result of the determination by the determination means, and dynamic display execution of the identification information by the dynamic display execution means as a type of the variable game. A first variable game in which the period from the completion of the dynamic display to the change of the variable means to the first position is set to the first period, and the variable game after the dynamic display of the identification information is completed. A second variable game in which a period until the means is changed to the first position is set to a second period shorter than the first period, and at least one type of variable game is determined. Type determination means, and the suggestion effect execution means is provided after the dynamic display of the identification information is completed by the dynamic display execution means and before the variable means is changed to the first position. To perform the suggestion effect Game machine C5 characterized by Rukoto.

  According to the gaming machine C5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C4. That is, the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination means is executed by the dynamic display execution means. A first variable game in which the period from the end of the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display execution unit to the time when the variable unit is changed to the first position is set as a first period, A second variable game in which a period from the end of the dynamic display of the identification information until the variable means is changed to the first position is set to a second period shorter than the first period. Is determined by the type determining means. The suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution unit after the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display execution unit is completed and before the variable unit is changed to the first position.

  In this way, the one in which the first variable game is determined allows more game balls to reach the predetermined section than the second variable game, so that the game is expected with the expectation that the first variable game is determined. There is an effect that it can be performed.

  In the gaming machine C5, the first period is a period from when a game ball is fired in the direction in which the specific flow path is arranged to when the fired game ball reaches the specific flow path. The second period is a period from when the game ball is fired in the direction in which the specific flow path is arranged, to when the fired game ball reaches the specific flow path. A gaming machine C6, wherein the period is shorter than the period.

  According to the gaming machine C6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C5. That is, after the game ball is fired in the direction in which the specific flow path is arranged, the first period is constituted by a period longer than the period until the fired game ball reaches the specific flow path. Have been. On the other hand, the second period is constituted by a period shorter than the period from when the game ball is fired in the direction in which the specific flow path is arranged to when the fired game ball reaches the specific flow path. Have been.

  This makes it difficult to cause the game ball to reach the specific flow path when the second variable game is established, so that it is possible to more strongly expect that the first variable game is determined. There is.

  In the gaming machine C1, dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of identification information indicating a result of the determination by the determination means, and performing the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result. A first type determination that determines one specific effect from among a plurality of types including at least a first effect and a second effect different from the first effect as the type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means. Means for executing the specific effect during the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information based on the result of the discrimination determined by the determination means being different from the specific determination result. Means, and a second type for determining one specific effect from among a plurality of types including at least the first effect and the second effect as the type of the specific effect executed by the second specific effect executing means. Decision And wherein the first effect is such that the ratio determined by the first type determining means is higher than the ratio determined by the second type determining means, and the second effect is The gaming machine C7, wherein the ratio determined by the first type determining unit is lower than the ratio determined by the second type determining unit.

  According to the gaming machine C7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C1. That is, the dynamic display execution means executes dynamic display of the identification information indicating the result of the judgment by the judgment means. The type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means during the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result includes at least a first effect and a second effect different from the first effect. One specific effect from the plurality is determined by the first type determining means. The specific effect is executed by the second specific effect executing means during the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information, based on the determination result different from the specific judgment result by the judgment means. As the type of the specific effect executed by the second specific effect executing means, one specific effect is determined by the second type determining means from among a plurality of types including at least the first effect and the second effect. The first effect is configured such that the ratio determined by the first type determining unit is higher than the ratio determined by the second type determining unit. On the other hand, the second effect is configured such that the ratio determined by the second type determining unit is higher than the ratio determined by the second type determining unit.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the degree of expectation that the variable game is executed can be changed according to the content of the specific effect.

  In the gaming machine C7, during the period from when the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result ends to when the variable means is changed to the first position, the specific flow path is arranged. Is shorter than the period from when the game ball is fired in the direction in which the game ball is fired reaches the specific flow path, and in the predetermined period, the specific flow path is A gaming machine C8, wherein a period of time from when the game ball is fired in the direction in which the game ball is arranged to when the fired game ball reaches the specific flow path is shorter.

  According to the gaming machine C8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C7. That is, during the period from the end of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result to the time when the variable means is changed to the first position, the game ball is moved in the direction in which the specific flow path is arranged. It is configured to be shorter than the period from when the game ball is fired to when the game ball reaches the specific channel. The predetermined period is configured to be shorter than a period from when a game ball is fired in the direction in which the specific flow path is arranged to when the fired game ball reaches the specific flow path. I have.

  Thereby, the game ball cannot reach the predetermined section unless the game ball is fired toward the specific channel during the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information, so that a specific determination result is obtained from the content of the specific effect. This has the effect of making it possible to more seriously predict whether or not this is the case.

  In the gaming machine C7 or C8, the first type determining means is configured to be able to determine a third effect different from the first effect and the second effect at a predetermined ratio, and The gaming machine C9, wherein the determining means is configured to be unable to determine the third effect.

  According to the gaming machine C9, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C7 or C8. That is, a third effect different from both the first effect and the second effect is determined by the first type determining means at a predetermined ratio. The second type determining means is configured to be unable to determine the third effect.

  With this, when the third effect is executed, it is determined that the specific determination result has been obtained at that time, so that there is an effect that the player can be pleased.

<Characteristic D group> (variable the length of the closing period during the jackpot to vary the likelihood of over-winning)
A specific area in which a game ball can enter, a privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering the specific area, a specific flow path in which the game ball can flow, The first position where the game ball flowing down at least the predetermined section of the flow path is more easily guided to the specific area than passing the predetermined section, and passes through the predetermined section than is guided to the specific area. A variable means that can be changed to a second position that facilitates the determination, a determination means that performs a determination based on satisfaction of a determination condition, and the variable means based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination means. A variable game execution means for executing a variable game that is changed from the second position to the first position by a predetermined number of times; a first control; a variable means for controlling the variable means during execution of the variable game; Is the first And a second control in which the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section at the timing changed to the second control is more likely to be larger than the first control. And a determining means.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a hit state when a result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball to a starting winning opening is a hit. Some of such gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types in which the number of open times (number of rounds) of a large open opening to which a prize ball is awarded when a game ball is won is different, and a game that can be obtained. There is a method of increasing the value of interest by making the value different (for example, Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

  Also, in such conventional gaming machines, even if the number of rounds is the same, by changing the opening pattern of the large opening in each round, the number of game balls that can be won in each round is changed, Some have different degrees of advantage.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the number of prize balls that can be acquired is almost constant for each hit type, so that it is like an operation for obtaining a game value according to the hit type, and during the hit state, In some cases, the game became monotonous. That is, there is a problem that it is difficult to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, a predetermined privilege is provided by the privilege providing means based on the fact that the game ball has entered a specific area where the game ball can enter. A first position at which game balls flowing down at least a predetermined section of the specific flow path through which the game balls can flow are more easily guided to the specific flow path than passing through the predetermined section; The variable means is changed to the second position where the vehicle easily passes through the section. The determination is performed by the determination unit based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, and the variable unit is changed from the second position to the first position by a predetermined number of times based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination unit. The variable game is executed by the variable game execution means. As a control method of the variable means during execution of the variable game, a first control and a second control in which the number of game balls passing through a predetermined section at a timing when the variable means is changed to the first position are more likely to be larger than the first control. The control method determining means determines one control method from among a plurality of control methods including at least the following.

  Accordingly, when a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination unit, the game can be performed in expectation that the variable unit will be controlled by the second control. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine D1, the second control is performed when at least one of a plurality of periods during which the variable means is changed to the second position in one of the variable games is controlled by the first control. A gaming machine D2 characterized in that it is controlled to be longer.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1, the second control is that at least one of a plurality of periods in which the variable means is changed to the second position in one variable game is the first position. Since the second control is configured to be longer than the case where the control is performed by the control, the second control can make the game balls reach the predetermined section more. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed with a stronger expectation that the variable means is controlled by the second control.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, there is provided dynamic display executing means for executing dynamic display of identification information indicating a result of the discrimination by the discriminating means, wherein the first control is performed by the identification information indicating the specific discrimination result. Is controlled so that the period from the end of the dynamic display to the time when the variable means is changed to the first position is the first period, and the second control is the specific determination. And controlling the period from the end of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the result until the variable unit is changed to the first position to be a second period longer than the first period. A gaming machine D3, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the dynamic display execution means executes dynamic display of the identification information indicating the result of the judgment by the judgment means. In the first control, the period from when the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result ends to when the variable means is changed to the first position is controlled to be the first period. In the second control, the period from when the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result ends to when the variable unit is changed to the first position is a second period longer than the first period. Is controlled.

  Thereby, when the game balls continue to be fired toward the specific flow path after the dynamic display of the identification information ends, the second control can cause more game balls to reach the predetermined section. Therefore, there is an effect that more game balls can enter the specific area when the variable means is changed to the first position.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, based on the fact that at least a first number of game balls have entered the specific area while the variable means is being changed to the first position, the variable means Has variable control means for controlling the variable section to be changed to the second position, and the predetermined section has a second number larger than the first number in a state where the variable section is changed to the second position. A gaming machine D4 characterized in that the gaming balls are configured to have a path length that can simultaneously flow down.

  According to the gaming machine D4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3. That is, while the variable means is being changed to the first position, the variable means is changed to the second position by the variable control means based on the fact that at least the first number of game balls have entered the specific area. Is controlled as follows. The predetermined section is configured with a path length that allows at least a second number of game balls greater than the first number to flow simultaneously in a state where the variable means is changed to the second position.

  Thereby, it is possible to cause a player to play a game in expectation that the variable means is changed to the first position after the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section exceeds the first number. is there.

  The gaming machine D4 includes operating means operable by a player, and launching means capable of firing game balls into the game area at a time interval equal to or longer than a predetermined interval at a firing speed according to the operation content of the operating means. In the state where the game balls are continuously fired at the predetermined interval in the second direction in the predetermined section, after one game ball reaches the predetermined section, the game ball is The gaming machine D5, wherein the game balls D5 pass the game balls so that the second number of game balls can reach the predetermined section before passing through the predetermined section.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D4, the launching means sends the game balls to the game area at a time interval equal to or longer than a predetermined interval at a firing speed according to the operation content of the operating means operable by the player. Fired by The predetermined section is a state in which game balls are continuously fired at predetermined intervals in the second direction, from when one game ball reaches the predetermined section until the game ball passes through the predetermined section. During the period, the game balls are passed so that the second number of the game balls can reach the predetermined section.

  As a result, there is an effect that a player who wants to increase the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section to a number exceeding the first number can fire game balls continuously at predetermined intervals.

  In the gaming machine D5, the second control is such that at least one of a plurality of periods in which the variable means is changed to the second position in one of the variable games is fired by the firing means. And controlling the at least the first number or more of the game balls to be in a period that allows the game ball to reach the predetermined section. The gaming machine D6, wherein the length of time is such that it is difficult to make the number of game balls fired to reach the predetermined section equal to or more than the first number.

  According to the gaming machine D6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D5. That is, in the second control, at least one specific period, which is at least one of the plurality of periods in which the variable means is changed to the second position in one variable game, has at least a first number or more fired by the firing means. The length is controlled so that the game ball can reach the predetermined section. In the first control, the specific period is controlled such that it is difficult for the game balls fired by the firing means to reach the predetermined section in the first number or more.

  Thereby, when the variable means is controlled by the second control, there is an effect that the first number or more game balls can enter the specific area by continuously firing the game balls during the specific period. .

  A gaming machine D7 comprising a speed reducing means for reducing the velocity of a gaming ball flowing down the predetermined section in any one of the gaming machines D1 to D6.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machines D1 to D6, the speed of the game balls flowing down the predetermined section is reduced by the speed reduction means, so that the game balls are continuously directed toward the specific flow path. When fired, the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section can be increased. Therefore, there is an effect that more game balls can be guided to the specific area when the variable means is changed to the first position.

  In the gaming machine D7, the deceleration means is constituted by a serpentine flow path.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine D7, since the deceleration means is formed by the serpentine flow path, the direction in which the gaming ball flows down in a predetermined section can be changed a plurality of times. Therefore, there is an effect that the speed of the game ball can be more reliably reduced.

  In the gaming machine D7, the deceleration means makes the dynamic frictional force between the gaming ball and the predetermined section higher than other portions in the specific flow path.

  According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D7, the dynamic friction force between the gaming ball and the predetermined section is made higher than the other portion in the specific flow path by the speed reduction means, so that the game ball flows down in the predetermined section. There is an effect that the speed can be more reliably reduced.

<Feature E group> (Direction indicating the degree of advantage when the jackpot is started)
Display means capable of displaying an effect mode, determination means for performing a determination based on the satisfaction of a determination condition, and, based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied after a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination means. A bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player; and a case where the execution of the bonus game is started for a predetermined period from when the specific determination result is obtained until the specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine E1 comprising: a suggestion effect execution unit that executes a suggestion effect indicating a degree of advantage to a player on the display unit.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, a symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a winning game advantageous to the player is given. In addition, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed on the display device in addition to the design, and a variety of entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, JP-A-2003-325886). Gazette).

  Also, among the conventional gaming machines, an effect displayed on the display device is capable of executing an effect indicating a degree of expectation as to whether or not an advantageous hit game is given to the player thereafter. Some are being done.

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not it is advantageous to the player when the effect indicating the degree of expectation is started, so that the content of the effect itself is the degree of the player's advantage. Does not affect Therefore, there is a problem in that it is difficult for the player to play the game while paying attention to the display device.

  According to the gaming machine E1, the effect mode is displayed on the display means. The determination is performed by the determination means based on the satisfaction of the determination condition. After a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination unit, a bonus game advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution unit based on the satisfaction of the specific condition. In a predetermined period from when a specific determination result is obtained to when a specific condition is satisfied, a suggestion effect that suggests to the player the degree of advantage when the execution of the bonus game is started is displayed by the suggestion effect execution means. Executed in

  Thereby, there is an effect that the game can be performed while paying attention to the suggested effect.

  In the gaming machine E1, an operating means operable by the player, a firing means capable of firing a game ball at a firing speed according to the operation content of the operating means, and a game ball fired by the firing means can enter. Game machine E2, wherein the specific condition is satisfied when a game ball enters the ball entry means.

  According to the gaming machine E2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E1. That is, a game ball is fired by the firing means at a firing speed corresponding to the operation content of the operation means that can be operated by the player. The specific condition is satisfied when the game ball enters the ball entry device into which the game ball launched by the launch device can enter.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the timing of firing the game ball can be adjusted according to the content suggested by the suggested effect.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, a specific area in which a game ball can enter, a privilege providing means for giving a predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering the specific area, and a game ball capable of flowing down A specific flow path, a first position at which a game ball flowing down at least a predetermined section in the specific flow path is more easily guided to the specific area than passing through the predetermined section, Variable means that can also be changed to a second position that makes it easier to pass through the predetermined section. The privilege game execution means sets the variable means to the second position based on the satisfaction of the specific condition. A game machine E3 characterized in that the predetermined position is varied from the predetermined position to the first position.

  According to the gaming machine E3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1 or E2. That is, based on the fact that the game ball has entered a specific area where the game ball can enter, a predetermined benefit is provided by the benefit providing means. A first position at which game balls flowing down at least a predetermined section of the specific flow path through which the game balls can flow are more easily guided to the specific flow path than passing through the predetermined section; The variable means is changed to the second position where the vehicle easily passes through the section. The variable means is changed from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times by the privilege game execution means based on the satisfaction of the specific condition.

  As a result, there is an effect that the game can be played while paying attention to the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section at the timing when the specific condition is satisfied.

  In the gaming machine E3, during the execution of the privilege game, the variable means is changed to the first position, and then based on the fact that a first number of game balls have entered the specific area, A variable control unit that controls the variable position to change from the first position to the second position, wherein the predetermined section is larger than the first number in a state where the variable unit is changed to the second position. A gaming machine E4 characterized in that the second number of gaming balls has a path length that can simultaneously flow down.

  According to the gaming machine E4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E3. That is, during execution of the bonus game, the variable means is changed from the first position to the second position based on the fact that the variable means has been changed to the first position and the first number of game balls have entered the specific area. And is controlled by the variable control means. The predetermined section is configured with a path length that allows a second number of game balls larger than the first number to flow down in a state where the variable means is changed to the second position.

  This makes it possible to expect that the specific condition is satisfied after the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section exceeds the first number, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved. This has the effect.

  The gaming machine E4, comprising: operating means operable by a player; and firing means capable of firing game balls at a predetermined time interval or more at a firing speed according to the operation content of the operating means, wherein the predetermined section In a state where the game balls are continuously fired at the predetermined interval toward the specific flow path, after one game ball reaches the predetermined section, the game ball A gaming machine E5 wherein the game balls are passed so that the second number of the game balls can reach the predetermined section before passing.

  According to the gaming machine E5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E4. That is, a game ball is fired at a time interval equal to or longer than a predetermined interval by the firing means at a firing speed corresponding to the operation content of the operation means operable by the player. The predetermined section is a state in which game balls are continuously fired at predetermined intervals toward a specific flow path, and after one game ball reaches the predetermined section, the game ball passes through the predetermined section. In the meantime, the game balls are caused to flow down so that the second number of game balls can reach the predetermined section.

  As a result, there is an effect that a player who wants to increase the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section to a number exceeding the first number can fire game balls continuously at predetermined intervals.

  In any of the gaming machines E3 to E5, the game machine further includes a number discriminating means for discriminating the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section, and the suggestion effect executing means determines the number of game balls discriminated by the number discriminating means. A gaming machine E6 that performs a suggested effect as the suggested effect.

  According to the gaming machine E6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines E3 to E5. That is, the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section is determined by the number determining means. An effect indicating the number of game balls determined by the number determination means is executed as a suggestion effect by the suggestion effect execution means.

  This allows the player to easily understand the number of game balls guided to the specific area when the specific condition is satisfied, depending on the content of the suggestion effect, so that while the larger number is suggested, There is an effect that a game can be played with expectation that the condition is satisfied.

  In the gaming machine E6, during the execution of the suggestion effect, at predetermined time intervals, an effect mode updating means for updating the effect mode of the suggestion effect according to the number of game balls determined by the number determination means, and the effect When updating the production mode of the suggested effect by the mode updating means, it is determined whether the number of game balls suggested by the suggested effect matches the number of game balls determined by the number determining means. Coincidence determination means for each period, and the number of game balls suggested by the suggestion effect is determined by the coincidence determination means to be equal to the number of game balls determined by the number determination means. A gaming machine E7 comprising: update avoidance means for avoiding updating of the effect mode by the effect mode updating means when the effect mode is updated.

  According to the gaming machine E7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E6. In other words, during the execution of the suggestion effect, the effect mode of the suggestion effect is updated by the effect mode updating means in accordance with the number of game balls determined by the number determination means at predetermined time intervals. When the effect mode of the suggested effect is updated by the effect mode updating means, it is determined whether the number of game balls suggested by the suggestion effect matches the number of game balls determined by the number determining means. The determination is made at predetermined intervals by the means. When the coincidence determination means determines that the number of game balls suggested by the suggestion effect matches the number of game balls determined by the number determination means, the effect update mode is updated by the effect update means. Is avoided by the update avoiding means.

  This can reduce the frequency at which the presentation mode is updated, so that the processing load required for updating the presentation mode can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine E6 or E7, in the predetermined section, a plurality of passage detection units capable of detecting the passage of a game ball are arranged at a plurality of locations, and the number discrimination unit includes the plurality of passage detection units. A game machine E8 characterized in that, among the above, the number of the passage detecting means for detecting the passage of the game ball is determined as the number of the game balls passing through the predetermined section.

  According to the gaming machine E8, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine E6 or E7. That is, a plurality of passage detection means capable of detecting the passage of the game ball are arranged at a plurality of locations in a predetermined section. The number of the passage detecting means detecting the passage of the game ball among the plurality of passage detecting means is determined by the number determining means as the number of the game balls passing through the predetermined section.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section can be accurately determined.

<Feature F>
Ball entry means arranged at a position where a game ball fired in the first direction can enter the ball, discrimination means for executing a discrimination based on that the game ball has entered the ball entry means, and the discrimination Advantageous state setting means for setting an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player when a game ball is fired in a second direction different from the first direction based on a specific determination result obtained by the means. Display means capable of displaying identification information; dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of the identification information indicating a result of the judgment by the judgment means on the display means; A specific effect capable of executing a specific effect indicating a degree of expectation as to whether or not an advantageous game state occurs when a game ball is fired in the second direction while the dynamic display of information is being performed. Execution means. Game machine F1.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, a symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a winning game advantageous to the player is given. In addition, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed on the display device in addition to the design, and a variety of entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, JP-A-2003-325886). Gazette).

  Also, among the conventional gaming machines, an effect displayed on the display device is capable of executing an effect indicating a degree of expectation as to whether or not an advantageous hit game is given to the player thereafter. Some are being done.

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not it is advantageous to the player when the effect indicating the degree of expectation is started, so that the content of the effect itself is the degree of the player's advantage. Does not affect Therefore, there is a problem in that it is difficult for the player to play the game while paying attention to the display device.

  According to the gaming machine F1, discrimination is executed by the discriminating means based on the fact that the game ball has been launched into the ball entry means arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction can enter the ball. . Based on the specific determination result obtained by the determination unit, when the game ball is fired in the second direction different from the first direction, the advantageous state that is advantageous to the player is determined by the advantageous state setting unit. Is set. The dynamic display of the identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination means is executed by the display means by the dynamic display execution means. While the dynamic display execution means is performing the dynamic display of the identification information, a specific effect indicating the degree of expectation as to whether or not an advantageous game state occurs when the game ball is fired in the second direction. Is executed by the specific effect execution means.

  This allows the player to determine whether it is better to fire the game ball in the second direction based on the suggestion content of the specific effect, so that the player can play the game by paying attention to the specific effect. There is.

  In the gaming machine F1, the advantageous state is such that, in a specific period during the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result, the firing of the gaming ball in the second direction is started, After the dynamic display of the identification information indicating a specific determination result is completed, it is easier for the player to start firing the game ball in the second direction than before, and the specific effect execution means includes: When performing the specific effect during execution of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result, the specific effect is to be performed in an effect period including at least a part of the specific period. A gaming machine F2 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine F2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F1. In other words, in the advantageous state, it is better to start firing game balls in the second direction during a specific period during execution of dynamic display of identification information indicating a specific determination result. It becomes more advantageous to the player than to start firing game balls in the second direction after the dynamic display of information ends. When the specific effect is executed during the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution unit during an effect period including at least a part of the specific period.

  This allows the player to determine whether or not to start firing game balls in the second direction during the effect period of the specific effect from the suggestion contents of the specific effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed with more attention given to the suggestion contents of the specific effect.

  In the gaming machine F2, the advantageous state is characterized in that, in the specific period, it is easier for the player to start firing the game ball in the second direction earlier, which becomes more advantageous for the player. Gaming machine F3.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine F2, in the advantageous state, it is easier for the player to start firing the game ball in the second direction earlier during the specific period. Therefore, when the specific effect is executed, it is possible to remind the player to determine whether to fire the game ball in the second direction as soon as possible. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can make the player feel more nervous during the execution of the specific effect.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect execution means is determined when the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result is executed. A first specific effect in which the ratio is higher, and a second specific effect in which the ratio determined when dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result is being performed is lower than the first specific effect. A game machine F4 comprising: an effect type determining unit that determines one type from among a plurality of types including at least one.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, when the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result is executed as the type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means. A first specific effect in which the determined ratio is higher, and a second specific effect in which the ratio determined when dynamic display of identification information indicating a specific determination result is being executed is lower than the first specific effect. Is determined by the effect type determining means from among a plurality of types including at least, and it is determined from the effect type of the specific effect whether or not the identification information is a dynamic display of identification information indicating a specific determination result. The player can be guessed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game by paying attention to the type of the specific effect.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, a special area in which a game ball can enter, a privilege providing means for giving a predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering the specific area, A specific flow path provided at a position into which a game ball fired in the direction can flow, and a game ball flowing down at least a predetermined section of the specific flow path is located in the specific area rather than passing through the predetermined section. A variable portion that can be changed to a first position where the vehicle is easily guided and a second position where the vehicle easily passes through the predetermined section than the vehicle is guided to the specific area, wherein the advantageous state setting device includes the advantageous state setting device. As a state, the control unit performs one or more times of performing control to change the variable unit from the second position to the first position until a specific condition is satisfied. Game ball in the second direction It is more preferable to start firing than to start firing game balls in the second direction after the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result is completed, before the specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine F5 wherein the number of gaming balls guided to the specific area is likely to increase.

  According to the gaming machine F5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines F1 to F4. That is, based on the fact that the game ball has entered a specific area where the game ball can enter, a predetermined benefit is provided by the benefit providing means. A first configuration in which game balls flowing down at least a predetermined section of a specific flow path provided at a position into which game balls fired in the second direction can flow are more easily guided to a specific area than passing through the predetermined section. The variable means is changed to a position and a second position at which the vehicle easily passes through a predetermined section rather than being guided to a specific area. As the advantageous state, control for varying the variable means from the second position to the first position until a specific condition is satisfied is executed one or more times by the advantageous state setting means. In the advantageous state, it is better to start launching the game ball in the second direction during the specific period, and then launch the game ball in the second direction after the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result ends. , The number of game balls guided to the specific area before the specific condition is satisfied is likely to increase.

  This allows a player who wants to obtain more predetermined benefits to more seriously determine whether or not to start firing game balls in the second direction based on the suggestion of the specific effect. effective.

  In the gaming machine F5, the specific condition is satisfied when the number of gaming balls entering the specific area after the variable means is changed to the first position becomes the first number, The predetermined section is configured to have a path length at which a second number of game balls larger than the first number can flow at least simultaneously in a state where the variable means is changed to the second position. A gaming machine F6 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine F6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F5. That is, the specific condition is satisfied when the number of game balls entering the specific area after the variable means is changed to the first position reaches the first number. The predetermined section is configured with a path length that allows a second number of game balls greater than the second number to flow at least simultaneously in a state where the variable means is changed to the second position.

  Thereby, it is possible to cause a player to play a game while expecting the predetermined section to be changed to the first position in a state where the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section exceeds the first number. There is.

  In the gaming machine F6, a launching means capable of launching a game ball at a time interval equal to or longer than a predetermined interval is provided. , So that the second number of game balls can reach the predetermined section after one game ball reaches the predetermined section and before the game ball passes through the predetermined section. A gaming machine F7 characterized by passing game balls.

  According to the gaming machine F7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F6. That is, game balls are fired by the firing means at time intervals longer than a predetermined interval. The predetermined section is a game in which a second number of game balls can reach the predetermined section after one game ball reaches the predetermined section and before the game ball passes through the predetermined section. The sphere is configured to pass.

  This allows the player, who has determined that the identification information is a dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result from the suggestion content of the specific effect, to launch the game ball in the second direction at a predetermined interval that is the shortest interval. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine F7, the specific period is configured to have a length that allows at least the second number of game balls to be fired when the game balls are continuously fired at the predetermined interval in the second direction. A gaming machine F8, characterized in that it is a game machine F8.

  According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F7, at least a second number of gaming balls can be fired when the game balls are continuously fired at predetermined intervals in the second direction in the second period. Because it is configured with a period of an appropriate length, by firing game balls in the second direction during a specific period, there is a possibility that the second number of game balls can reach a predetermined section. Thus, it is possible to more seriously determine whether or not to fire the game ball in the second direction.

  In the gaming machine F7 or F8, as the advantageous state set by the advantageous state setting means, a first advantageous state, and after the state shifts from the first advantageous state to the advantageous state, the variable means moves to the second position. A gaming machine F9 comprising state determining means for determining one state from among a plurality of states including at least a second advantageous state having a long period until being changed.

  According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F7 or F8, the first advantageous state is set as the advantageous state set by the advantageous state setting means, and the state is shifted to the more advantageous state than the first advantageous state. One state is determined by the state determination means from among a plurality of states including at least a second advantageous state in which a period until the variable means is changed to the second position is long.

  Thus, in the second advantageous state, the number of game balls that can be fired before the variable means is changed to the second position increases, so that more game balls are easily guided to the specific area. Therefore, there is an effect that a game can be played in expectation of the second advantageous state being determined.

  In the gaming machine F9, the first advantageous state is continuous at the predetermined interval in the second direction as a period from a transition to the advantageous state to a time when the variable means is changed to the second position. A gaming machine F10 characterized in that when a game ball is fired, a period of time is set in which the number of game balls exceeding the first number cannot be fired.

  According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F9, in the first advantageous state, the period from the transition to the advantageous state to the time when the variable means is changed to the second position, in the twenty-third direction. When the game balls are successively fired with a predetermined sense, a period of time in which the number of game balls exceeding the first number cannot be fired is set, so that the first advantageous state is determined. In this case, there is an effect that a player who wants to obtain more predetermined benefits can fire a game ball in the second direction during a specific period.

<Feature G Group> (Let the player select a jackpot that can aim for over-winning and a jackpot that cannot aim for over-winning)
A first area through which a game ball can pass, a second area different from the first area, first detection means capable of detecting the passage of a game ball to the first area, and a game to the second area A second detecting means capable of detecting the passage of a ball, a determining means for performing a determination based on the satisfaction of a determining condition, and a first determining means after a specific determination result is obtained by the determining means; Or a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the second detection means. A predetermined privilege is provided based on a first specific area, a second specific area different from the first specific area, and a game ball entering the first specific area or the second specific area. Privilege granting means, a specific flow path through which the game ball can flow, and the specific flow The first position where the game ball flowing down at least the predetermined section in the first specific area is more likely to be guided to the first specific area than passing the predetermined section, and the predetermined area than the first specific area is guided to the first specific area. A first variable means that can be changed to a second position at which the game ball can easily pass, a third position at which the game ball can enter the second specific area, and the entry of the game ball more than the third position. A second variable means that can be changed to a fourth position that becomes difficult, and a type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, after the specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination means, When the passing of the game ball is detected by the first detecting means, the first variable means determines a first privilege game to be changed from the second position to the first position by a predetermined number of times, and When the passage of the game ball is detected by the detection means The game machine and the second varying means is characterized by comprising: a type determination means for determining a second award game that is a predetermined number of times the variable to the third position from the fourth position G1.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a hit state when a result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball to a starting winning opening is a hit. Some of such gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types in which the number of open times (number of rounds) of a large open opening to which a prize ball is awarded when a game ball is won is different, and a game that can be obtained. There is a method of increasing the value of interest by making the value different (for example, Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

  In addition, in such conventional gaming machines, a winning state is not started only when a lottery result is won, and when one of a plurality of operating winning holes provided on the gaming board is won, the winning state is changed. Some are getting started. In this conventional gaming machine, different types of hit games are started in accordance with the type of the winning opening that a player has won.

  However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, when the hit type is determined, the amount of game value obtained during the hit is a substantially constant amount according to the hit type. In some cases, the game during the hit state becomes monotonous. That is, there is a problem that it is difficult to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, a first specific area in which a game ball can enter and a second specific area different from the first specific area are provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first specific area or the second specific area, a predetermined privilege is provided by the privilege providing means. The first position where the game ball flowing down at least the predetermined section in the specific flow path in which the game ball can flow is more easily guided to the first specific area than passing through the predetermined section, is guided to the first specific area. The first variable means is configured to be variable at a second position at which the vehicle easily passes through a predetermined section. The second variable means is configured to be variable between a third position at which a game ball can enter the second specific area and a fourth position at which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the third position. ing. As a type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, after the specific detection result is obtained by the determination by the determination means, when the passing of the game ball is detected by the first detection means, the first variable means is turned on. The first privilege game that is changed from the second position to the first position by a predetermined number of times is determined by the type determining means. On the other hand, when the passing of the game ball is detected by the second detection means, the second privilege game in which the second variable means is changed a predetermined number of times from the fourth position to the third position is determined by the type determination means. You.

  Thereby, the type of the privilege game can be made different depending on whether the game ball passes through the first area or the game ball passes through the second area, so that the area where the game ball passes can be noticed. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine G1, there are provided passing means through which a game ball can pass, and sorting means capable of sorting a game ball passing through the passing means to one of the first area and the second area. A gaming machine G2.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G1, the game ball that has passed through the passing means through which the game ball can pass is sorted by the sorting means into either the first area or the second area. Therefore, the type of the bonus game is changed according to the area allocated by the distribution means. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played while paying attention to the area to be sorted.

  In the gaming machine G2, the state of the distributing means is changed to the first area between at least a specific result of the discrimination by the discriminating means and before the execution of the bonus game is started. A gaming machine G3 comprising: a distribution state switching unit that switches at a predetermined cycle between a first distribution state in which game balls are distributed and a second distribution state in which game balls are distributed to the second area.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G2, the state of the sorting means is changed at least between the time when a specific determination result is obtained by the determination means and the execution of the bonus game is started. The state switching means switches between the first distribution state in which the game balls are distributed to the first area and the second distribution state in which the game balls are distributed to the second area at a predetermined cycle. By confirming the distribution state of the game and passing through the passage means, there is an effect that the type of the privilege game desired by the player can be determined.

  In the gaming machine G3, the game machine G3 is provided with display means capable of displaying an effect mode, and effect execution means for executing, on the display means, a distribution state suggestion effect indicating the distribution state of the distribution means. Gaming machine G4.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G3, a distribution state suggestion effect indicating the distribution state of the distribution unit is executed by the effect execution unit on the display unit. Only with this, there is an effect that the timing at which the player's favorite privilege game is determined can be easily recognized.

  In the gaming machine G4, the effect execution means performs a first distribution state suggestion effect indicating the first distribution state based on the switching to the first distribution state by the distribution state switching means. A first suggestion effect execution means for executing, and a second distribution state suggestion effect for suggesting the second distribution state based on being switched to the second distribution state by the distribution state switching means. Wherein the gaming machine further comprises: advantage determination means for determining a degree of advantage when the game ball passes through the first area, wherein the first suggestion effect execution means comprises: A gaming machine G5 capable of indicating the degree of advantage determined by the advantage determination means in the first distribution state suggestion effect.

  According to the gaming machine G5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G4. That is, in the effect execution means, based on the switching to the first distribution state by the distribution state switching means, a first distribution state suggestion effect suggesting the first distribution state by the first suggestion effect execution means. On the other hand, based on being switched to the second distribution state, a second distribution state suggestion effect that indicates the second distribution state is executed. The advantage degree when the game ball passes through the first area is determined by the advantage determination means. In the first distribution state suggestion effect, the degree of advantage determined by the advantage determination unit is suggested by the first suggestion effect execution unit.

  Thus, there is an effect that the timing of passing through the first region can be measured according to the degree of advantage suggested in the first suggestion effect.

  In the gaming machine G5, the advantage determination means determines the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section, and the first suggestion effect execution means determines the number of game balls determined by the advantage determination means. A gaming machine G6, wherein an effect indicating the number can be indicated in the first distribution state indicating effect.

  According to the gaming machine G6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G5. That is, the number of gaming balls passing through the predetermined section is determined by the advantage determining means. An effect suggesting the number of game balls determined by the advantage determination means is suggested by the first suggestion effect execution means in the first distribution state suggestion effect.

  Thus, by confirming the first suggestion effect, there is an effect that the number of game balls guided to the first specific region when passing through the first region can be easily understood.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G6, the privilege game executing means may include a game which enters the first specific area after the first variable means is first changed to the first position in the first privilege game. The first variable means is changed to the second position based on the number of the balls being equal to or more than the first number. In the predetermined section, the first variable means is changed to the second position. A gaming machine G7 characterized in that, in the state, a second number of game balls larger than the first number has a path length that can simultaneously flow down.

  According to the gaming machine G7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines G1 to G6. That is, in the first privilege game, based on that the first variable means is first changed to the first position and then the number of game balls which have entered the first specific area becomes equal to or more than the first number, It is changed to the second position by the bonus game execution means. The predetermined section is configured with a path length that allows a second number of game balls, which is larger than the first number, to flow simultaneously at a time when the first variable means is changed to the second position.

  This allows the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section to be greater than the first number before the game balls can be fired by devising to pass through the first area. There is an effect that the interest can be improved.

  In the gaming machine G7, the award game execution means may include a game ball that has entered the second specific area after the second variable means is first changed to the third position in the second award game. A gaming machine for changing the second variable means to the fourth position on the basis of a third number or more that is greater than one and less than the second number. G8.

  According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G7, in the second privilege game, the game ball that first enters the second specific area after the second variable means is changed to the third position is changed to the first ball. Since the second variable means is changed to the fourth position by the privilege game executing means based on the third number being larger than the number and being smaller than the second number, the second area is passed through the second area. Thus, a third number of game balls greater than the first number can be stably entered into the second specific area. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed with confidence during the execution of the second privilege game.

<Characteristic H group> (rearrange the order of the selection menu according to the history operated by the player)
Display means capable of displaying an image, operation means operable by a player, and an interlocking image whose mode is changed in accordance with the operation content of the operation means on the display means based on the satisfaction of the first condition A linked image display unit to be displayed, and based on the second condition being satisfied in a state where the linked image is displayed by the linked image display unit, according to a mode of the linked image displayed on the display unit. One of a plurality of modes is determined as a mode of the linked image to be displayed first by the linked image display unit when the first condition is satisfied. And a mode determining means.

  Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are known gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, a symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a big hit game advantageous to the player is given. Some of such conventional gaming machines are provided with a sound output device such as a speaker, so that not only a visual effect but also an auditory effect can be executed to change the mode of the effect. By diversifying, interest was improved (for example, JP-A-2003-325886).

  However, further diversification of production is required.

  Some of such conventional gaming machines are configured to be able to reproduce music as a kind of auditory effect during a predetermined period during a normal game, and the music reproduced during the predetermined period is Some types are configured so that a player can select the type.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, as the number of music pieces set in the gaming machine becomes more diversified, it becomes more difficult for the player to search for a favorite music piece from a list of music pieces that can be selected. There was a problem that would.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, based on the establishment of the first condition, the linked image in which the mode is changed in accordance with the operation content of the operating means operable by the player is displayed on the display means by the linked image display means. Is displayed. Based on the second condition being satisfied while the linked image is being displayed by the linked image display means, an effect of a type corresponding to the mode of the linked image displayed on the display means is executed by the effect executing means. . One of a plurality of aspects is determined by the aspect determining means as the aspect of the linked image displayed first by the linked image display means when the first condition is satisfied.

  Thus, when the first condition is satisfied, the mode of the linked image that is displayed first can be diversified, so that there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine H2 of the gaming machine H1, wherein the aspect determining means determines one aspect at least according to a type of the effect previously executed by the effect executing means.

  According to the gaming machine H2, since one aspect is determined by the aspect determining means by the aspect determining means at least according to the type of the effect previously executed by the effect executing means, the aspect of the linked image can be diversified. This has the effect.

  In the gaming machine H1 or H2, there is provided audio data reproducing means capable of reproducing audio data, and audio output means for outputting audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the audio data reproducing means, and may be set as the linked image. The plurality of aspects are configured by images of aspects showing different music pieces, and the effect executing means uses, as the effect, audio data of music pieces corresponding to the aspect of the linked image as the audio data reproducing means. A game machine H3 characterized by being reproduced.

  According to the gaming machine H3, the following effects are exerted in addition to the effects exerted by the gaming machines H1 and H2. That is, a sound corresponding to the sound data whose sound data is reproduced by the sound data reproducing means is output by the sound output means. The plurality of modes that can be set as the linked image are configured by images of modes showing different music pieces. The sound data of the music piece corresponding to the linked image mode is reproduced by the sound data reproducing means as the effect by the effect executing means.

  Thereby, a visual effect and an auditory effect can be combined, and thus there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the aspect determining means may determine that one of the effect-corresponding images is a specific one of a plurality of effect-corresponding images indicating information corresponding to the type of effect as the aspect of the linked image. Determining an aspect displayed in an aspect, wherein the interlocked image display means displays an effect displayed in the specific aspect in a predetermined order each time the operation content of the operation means becomes the first operation content. The effect image is made variable, and the effect execution means sets an effect of a type corresponding to the information shown in the effect effect image displayed in the specific mode, and the second condition is satisfied. A game machine H4 that is executed based on the following.

  According to the gaming machine H4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines H1 to H3. In other words, as a mode of the linked image, a mode in which one effect corresponding image is displayed in a specific mode among a plurality of effect corresponding images indicating information corresponding to the type of effect is determined by the mode determining means. Each time the operation content on the operation means becomes the first operation content, the effect corresponding image displayed in a specific mode is changed in a predetermined order by the linked image display means. The effect of the type corresponding to the information shown in the effect corresponding image displayed in the specific mode is executed by the effect executing means based on the satisfaction of the second condition.

  This allows the player to easily understand the type of the effect performed by the effect executing means simply by checking the information shown in the effect corresponding image displayed in a specific mode. There is an effect that the operation means can be operated so that the effect corresponding image corresponding to the effect of the user's favorite type is displayed in a specific mode.

  In the gaming machine H4, the aspect determination means may include one of the effect corresponding images to be displayed in a specific mode, and the effect corresponding to the specific mode changed when the operation of the first operation content is repeated. A gaming machine H5 for determining at least the order of images.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H4, one effect-corresponding image to be displayed in a specific mode, and an effect changed to a specific mode when the operation of the first operation content is repeated. Since the order of the corresponding images is determined at least by the mode determining means, it is possible to determine in advance the order of the effect corresponding images that can be changed to a specific mode. Therefore, when the operation means is actually operated, the effect corresponding image to be displayed in a specific mode can be specified earlier.

  In the gaming machine H5, counting means for counting the number of executions of the effect performed by the effect executing means for each type of effect is provided, and the mode determining means determines the number of executions counted by the counting means in advance. The order of the effect-corresponding images corresponding to the type of effect that satisfies the number of times satisfying the specific condition is determined to be the order that can be changed to the specific mode by the operation of the first operation content that is equal to or less than the specific number of times. A gaming machine H6, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine H6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine H5. That is, the number of executions of the effect performed by the effect executing means is counted by the counting means for each effect type. The first operation content in which the order of the effect-corresponding images corresponding to the effect of the type in which the number of executions counted by the counting means satisfies the predetermined specific condition is equal to or less than the specific number of times by the mode determining means Is determined in an order that can be changed to a specific mode.

  Thereby, the effect of the type of the number of executions satisfying the specific condition can be changed to a specific mode with the number of operations equal to or less than the specific number of times. Can be. Therefore, there is an effect that the convenience of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine H6, the mode determining means may change the order of the effect corresponding images corresponding to the first number of effects in descending order of the number of executions counted by the counting means, to the first operation of the specific number or less. A gaming machine H7 characterized in that the order is determined to be changed to the specific mode by operating the content.

  According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H6, the order of the effect-corresponding images corresponding to each of the first number of effects in descending order of the number of executions counted by the counting means is determined by the mode determining means. Since the order of change to the specific mode is determined by the operation of the following first operation content, the number of changes to the specific mode has been relatively large so far, and the player has also changed to the specific mode this time. The effect-corresponding image that is highly likely to be desired can be changed to a specific mode with a small number of operations. Therefore, there is an effect that the convenience of the player can be further improved.

  In the gaming machine H7, the mode determining unit changes the order of the effect-corresponding images corresponding to each of the first number of effects to the specific mode as the number of executions counted by the counting unit increases. A gaming machine H8 characterized in that the number of operations of the first operation content is determined so as to be reduced.

  According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H7, the order of the effect-corresponding images corresponding to each of the first number of effects can be changed to a specific mode as the number of executions counted by the counting means increases. Since the mode determining means determines the number of operations of the first operation content until the operation is performed, the effect corresponding image which is more likely to be changed by the player to the specific mode is determined. Since it is possible to change to a specific mode with a smaller number of operations, there is an effect that the convenience for the player can be further improved.

  In any of the gaming machines H6 to H8, if the operation of the first operation content is executed within a predetermined period after the first condition is satisfied, the first operation is performed after the first condition is satisfied. The order of the effect-corresponding images displayed in a specific mode in the displayed linked image is determined at least by the mode determining unit at least next time by a second mode or more of the first mode operation. A gaming machine H9 comprising setting means for setting so as to be determined in an order that can be changed.

  According to the gaming machine H9, in any of the gaming machines H6 to H8, when the operation of the first operation content is performed within a predetermined period after the first condition is satisfied, the first condition is satisfied. The order of the effect-corresponding images displayed in the specific mode in the linked image displayed first from the first is determined by at least the second number of operations of the first operation content at least by the next mode determining means. Are set by the setting means so as to be determined in the order in which the values are changed. Regarding the effect corresponding image changed from the specific mode within the predetermined period, next time, even when the linked image is displayed, it is considered that there is a low possibility that the player wants to change to the specific mode, By setting such an effect-corresponding image in an order in which it is changed to a specific mode by a relatively large number of operation times equal to or more than the second number of times, it is highly likely that a player wants to change to a specific mode. The images can be set in an order that can be changed to a specific mode with a relatively small number of operations. Therefore, there is an effect that the convenience of the player can be further improved.

  The gaming machine H10 according to any one of the gaming machines H1 to H9, wherein the second condition is satisfied when an operation content of the operation means becomes a specific operation content.

  According to the gaming machine H10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H9, the second condition is satisfied when the operation content for the operation means is a specific operation content, so that the player On the other hand, by performing an operation with a specific operation content, it is possible to execute an effect of a type corresponding to the mode of the linked image displayed at that time. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can select a desired effect of the player himself.

<Characteristic I group> (variable playback position of music according to how music was determined)
Based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition, an effect executing means for executing any one of a plurality of predetermined effects, and an effect to be executed by the effect executing means, based on establishment of a first condition, A first selecting means for selecting one of the effects from the plurality of effects; and an effect to be executed by the effect executing means, based on establishment of a second condition different from the first condition. A second selecting means for selecting one of the effects from the first effect, a first start position set for each of the plurality of effects, and a second start position different from the first start position. The first start position is set as a start position of the effect selected by the first selecting means among the plurality of start positions including at least the second start position of the effect selected by the second selecting means. Starting position Characterized in that it and a start position setting means for setting a game machine I1.

  Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are known gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, a symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a big hit game advantageous to the player is given. Some of such conventional gaming machines are provided with a sound output device such as a speaker, so that not only a visual effect but also an auditory effect can be executed to change the mode of the effect. By diversifying, interest was improved (for example, JP-A-2003-325886).

  Also, among such conventional gaming machines, one music is randomly selected from a plurality of music preset in the gaming machine as a kind of auditory effect during a predetermined period during a normal game. Some can be played back. In addition, there is a configuration in which a player can select a type of music to be reproduced within the predetermined period in addition to reproducing a music selected at random in the predetermined period.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, the player may change to a favorite music of the player without listening to the music selected at random for a predetermined period of time, and may be set in the gaming machine. There was a problem that most of the songs that were played might not be played at all.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, one of a plurality of predetermined effects is executed by the effect executing means based on the establishment of the predetermined execution condition, and the effect to be executed by the effect executing means is performed. Based on the establishment of the first condition, one effect is selected from the plurality of effects by the first selecting means. On the other hand, based on the establishment of the second condition different from the first condition, one effect is selected from the plurality of effects by the second selecting unit as the effect to be executed by the effect execution unit. Among a plurality of start positions including at least a first start position set for each of the plurality of effects and a second start position different from the first start position, the first selection means The first start position is set by the start position setting means as the start position of the selected effect. On the other hand, the second start position is set by the start position setting unit as the start position of the effect selected by the second selection unit.

  Thus, the effect can be started from a different start position depending on whether the effect is selected by the first selecting means or the effect selected by the second selecting means. There is an effect that can be improved.

  In the gaming machine I1, operation means operable by a player, operation detection means for detecting an operation on the operation means, and selection period setting for setting a selection period for selecting an effect executed by the effect execution means Means, and wherein the first selection means selects an effect in an aspect according to the operation content on the operation means detected by the operation detection means during the selection period, and wherein the second selection means The gaming machine I2, wherein the means selects one effect from the plurality of effects based on the setting of the selection period by the selection period setting means.

  According to the gaming machine I2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I1. That is, the operation on the operation means operable by the player is detected by the operation detection means. A selection period for selecting an effect to be executed by the effect executing means is set by the selection period setting means. The effect of the mode according to the operation content on the operation means detected by the operation detection means during the selection period is selected by the first selection means. Based on the selection period selected by the selection period setting means, one effect is selected from the plurality of effects by the second selection means.

  With this, the start position of the effect can be made different depending on whether or not the effect is selected by the player performing an operation on the operation means, so that there is an effect that the effect mode can be diversified.

  In the gaming machine I1 or I2, there is provided a sound data reproducing means capable of reproducing sound data, and a sound output means for outputting sound corresponding to the sound data reproduced by the sound data reproducing means, wherein the effect executing means is A gaming machine I3 wherein the sound data reproducing means reproduces sound data corresponding to any one of a plurality of different music pieces as the effect.

  According to the gaming machine I3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I1 or I2. That is, the audio data is reproduced by the audio data reproducing means, and the audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the audio data reproducing means is output by the audio output means. The audio data corresponding to any one of the plurality of different music pieces is reproduced by the audio data reproducing means as an effect by the effect executing means.

  This makes it possible to change the reproduction start position of the music according to whether the music is selected by the first selection means or the music selected by the second selection means. There is an effect that can be improved.

  In the gaming machine I3, the audio data is constituted by a data group that becomes one music piece by reproducing a plurality of data in a predetermined specific order, and the start position setting means includes: When music is selected by the first selecting means, setting is made such that reproduction is started from the first data among the plurality of data constituting the data group corresponding to the selected music, and A gaming machine I4 characterized in that, when a music piece is selected by the selection means, reproduction is started from second data different from the first data.

  According to the gaming machine I4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I3. That is, the audio data is composed of a data group that becomes one music piece by reproducing a plurality of data in a predetermined specific order. When a music piece is selected by the first selection means, the start position setting means sets the start of reproduction from the first data among a plurality of data constituting a data group corresponding to the selected music piece. You. On the other hand, when a music piece is selected by the second selection means, the start position setting means sets the reproduction to be started from the second data different from the first data.

  Thereby, the reproduction start position of the music can be made different only by selecting one data corresponding to the type of the selecting means from the data group as the data to start reproduction, so that the reproduction start position is set. There is an effect that the processing load at the time can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine I4, operation means operable by a player, operation detection means for detecting an operation on the operation means, and selection period setting for setting a selection period for selecting a music piece executed by the effect execution means Means, and wherein the first selection means selects one music piece according to the operation content on the operation means detected by the operation detection means during the selection period, and the second selection means Means for selecting one music piece from the plurality of music pieces based on that the selection time period is selected by the selection time period setting means, and wherein the first data is in the specific order A gaming machine I5 characterized in that the data is set in the first order.

  According to the gaming machine I5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I4. That is, the operation on the operation means operable by the player is detected by the operation detection means. A selection period for selecting a music piece to be executed by the effect execution unit is set by the selection period setting unit. One piece of music corresponding to the operation content on the operation means detected by the operation detection means during the selection period is selected by the first selection means. Based on the selection period being selected by the selection period setting means, one music piece is selected from the plurality of music pieces by the second selection means. The first data is composed of data set in the first order in a specific order.

  With this, for the music selected by the player operating the operation means, the reproduction can be started from the beginning of the music, so that the player voluntarily listens to the music selected voluntarily from the beginning. it can. Therefore, there is an effect that a greater satisfaction can be given to the player who has listened to the music.

  The gaming machine I6 according to the gaming machine I5, wherein the second selecting means randomly selects one music piece from the plurality of music pieces.

  According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine I5, one music piece is randomly selected by the second selecting means from a plurality of music pieces, so that the music piece set in the gaming machine is reproduced without waste. There is an effect that can be made.

  The gaming machine I7 according to the gaming machine I5 or I6, wherein the second data is constituted by data including at least the most characteristic melody in the music.

  According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I5 or I6, since the second data is constituted by data including at least the most characteristic melody in the music, the selection period is started. In addition, there is an effect that the player can determine whether or not to play another music by operating the operation means after listening to at least the most characteristic melody of the music selected by the second selecting means.

  In the gaming machine I3, the audio data is composed of one piece of data that becomes one piece of music when reproduced, and the plurality of start positions correspond to the sound data corresponding to each piece of music. A gaming machine I8 comprising a plurality of preset reproduction positions.

  According to the gaming machine I8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I3. That is, the audio data is composed of one piece of data that becomes one piece of music when reproduced. The plurality of start positions are constituted by a plurality of reproduction positions set in advance for audio data corresponding to each music piece.

  This has the effect that the audio data can be in the simplest form.

<Characteristic J group> (Data of the music being played is rearranged according to the progress of the game)
Based on establishment of a predetermined execution condition, an effect executing means for executing any of a plurality of predetermined effects and one effect to be executed by the effect executing means are determined from the plurality of effects. Effect determination means, and effect data group storage means, which is used for executing one effect by the effect execution means, and stores effect data groups composed of a plurality of data for each of the plurality of effect types. Effect data group selecting means for selecting an effect data group corresponding to the type of effect determined by the effect determining means from the effect data group storing means, and the effect data group selected by the effect data group selecting means Data setting means for setting the plurality of data constituting the data to be used by the effect execution means in a predetermined specific order; and The gaming machine is characterized in that it comprises a sequence changing means capable of variably in different order from said particular order the sequence in which the plurality of data is used J1.

  Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are known gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, a symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a big hit game advantageous to the player is given. Some of such conventional gaming machines are provided with a sound output device such as a speaker, so that not only a visual effect but also an auditory effect can be executed to change the mode of the effect. By diversifying, interest was improved (for example, JP-A-2003-325886).

  Some of such conventional gaming machines are configured to be able to reproduce music as a kind of auditory effect during a predetermined period during a normal game.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, there is a possibility that the predetermined period of time ends before the part of the chorus part, which is the most characteristic part of the music, is reproduced, and the reproduction of the music is ended. there were. For this reason, there was a problem that a player who could not listen to the rust portion may be dissatisfied.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J1, one of a plurality of predetermined effects is executed by the effect executing means based on the establishment of the predetermined execution condition. One effect to be executed by the effect executing means is determined from the plurality of effects by the effect determining means. An effect data group, which is used for executing one effect by the effect executing means and is composed of a plurality of data, is stored by the effect data storage means for each of a plurality of effect types. An effect data group corresponding to the type of effect determined by the effect determining means is selected from the effect data group storage means by the effect data group selecting means. A plurality of data constituting the effect data group selected by the effect data group selecting means are set by the data setting means so as to be used by the effect executing means in a predetermined specific order. In accordance with the progress of the game, the order in which the plurality of data is used is changed to a different order from the specific order by the order changing means.

  Thus, there is an effect that the effect can be suitably executed.

  In the gaming machine J1, the data setting means may determine that the data in the first order in the specific order is based on the completion of the performance using the data in the last order in the specific order. A gaming machine J2, which is set so as to be used by a gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1, the data of the first order in the specific order is rendered based on the completion of the effect using the data of the last order in the specific order. Since the setting is performed by the data setting unit so as to be used by the execution unit, when the execution of one effect is completed by the effect execution unit, the effect can be executed again from the beginning of the effect. Therefore, even if the performance using the data in the last order is completed, it is possible to prevent the period of no performance from being effected, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

  In the gaming machine J1 or J2, a discriminating means for executing a discrimination based on the satisfaction of a predetermined discriminating condition, and executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a specific discrimination result obtained by discrimination by the discriminating means. A gaming machine J3, wherein the effect executing means executes one of the plurality of effects during the execution of the bonus game.

  According to the gaming machine J3, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine J1 or J2. That is, the discrimination is performed by the discriminating means based on the satisfaction of the predetermined discriminating condition, and the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means based on the specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discriminating means. Is done. During the execution of the bonus game, one of the plurality of effects is executed by the effect executing means.

  Thereby, during execution of the bonus game, there is an effect that the effect can be suitably executed.

  In the gaming machine J3, the effect data group provided for each of the plurality of effect types includes first data corresponding to a specific effect mode set for each effect type, and first data thereof. And the second data is different from the first data, and the order changing means uses the first data at least once by the effect executing means until the bonus game ends. Thus, the gaming machine J4 is characterized in that the order in which the plurality of data is used is varied.

  According to the gaming machine J4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine J3. That is, the effect data group provided for each of the plurality of effect types includes first data corresponding to a specific effect mode set for each effect type, and a second data different from the first data. And at least data. The order in which the plurality of data are used is changed by the order changing means so that the first data is used at least once by the effect executing means until the bonus game ends.

  Thereby, there is an effect that a specific effect mode can be executed at least once during execution of the bonus game.

  In the gaming machine J4, the order varying means may be configured to store the plurality of data in such a manner that the first data is used by the effect executing means in a predetermined specific period of the privilege game. A gaming machine J5 wherein the order of use is variable.

  According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J4, a plurality of data are set so that the first data is used by the effect executing means in a predetermined specific period in the bonus game. Since the order in which are used is changed by the order changing means, there is an effect that a game during execution of the privilege game can be performed as one of the pleasures of being in a specific period.

  In any of the gaming machines J1 to J5, there is provided audio data reproduction means capable of reproducing audio data, and audio output means capable of outputting audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the audio data reproduction means, The effect executing means is for causing the audio data reproducing means to reproduce any one of a plurality of predetermined songs, and the effect data group includes a plurality of sounds for reproducing one music. A gaming machine J6 comprising data.

  According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines J1 to J5, audio data is reproduced by the audio data reproducing means, and a sound corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the audio data reproducing means is outputted. Output by means. One of a plurality of predetermined music pieces is reproduced by the sound data reproducing means by the effect executing means. The effect data group is composed of a plurality of audio data for reproducing one music piece.

  Accordingly, an auditory effect by playing the music can be performed, and thus there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine J6, the effect data group is composed of audio data in units of parts constituting one music piece.

  According to the gaming machine J7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J6, the effect data group is composed of audio data in units of parts constituting one music, so that the plurality of data are used by the variable order means. Even if the order is changed, there is an effect that it is possible to make the transition of the voice mode with less discomfort.

  In the gaming machine J7, a discriminating means for executing a discrimination based on satisfaction of a predetermined discriminating condition, and a privilege for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on a specific discrimination result obtained by discrimination by the discriminating means. Game execution means, wherein the effect execution means reproduces any of the plurality of music pieces to the audio data reproduction means during execution of the privilege game, and the type of the plurality of music pieces The effect data group provided for each music piece includes first data for playing a specific part set for each music type, and second data for playing a part different from the specific part. Wherein the first data is used by the effect executing means at least once before the end of the privilege game. As such, the gaming machine wherein the one in which a plurality of data varying the order used J8.

  According to the gaming machine J8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine J7. That is, the discrimination is executed by the discriminating means based on the satisfaction of the predetermined discriminating condition, and based on the specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discriminating means, a bonus game advantageous to the player is provided by the bonus game executing means. Be executed. During execution of the bonus game, any one of the plurality of music pieces is reproduced by the effect data executing means on the sound data reproducing means. The effect data group provided for each of a plurality of music types is composed of first data for reproducing a specific part set for each music type, and for reproducing a part different from the specific part. At least the second data. The order in which the plurality of data are used is changed by the order changing means so that the first data is used at least once by the effect executing means until the bonus game ends.

  This allows the specific part to be reproduced at least once before the bonus game ends, so that the player who has enjoyed listening to the music while enjoying the specific part can be satisfied. .

  In the gaming machine J8, an operation means operable by a player is provided, and the effect deciding means decides one music piece from the plurality of music pieces according to an operation content on the operation means. Gaming machine J9.

  According to the gaming machine J9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J8, one music piece is determined by the effect determination means from a plurality of music pieces in accordance with the operation contents of the operation means operable by the player. There is an effect that a specific part of a music piece which the player voluntarily selects can be reproduced at least once before the end of the bonus game.

<Characteristic K group> (When the reproduction of the music is ended, the reproduction is performed up to the reproduction position of the break and then the reproduction is ended.)
First effect execution means for executing a first effect based on establishment of a predetermined execution condition, and a first condition predetermined while the first effect is being executed by the first effect execution means. Is established, the progress status determining means for determining the progress status of the first performance being executed by the performance performing means, and the progress status determined by the progress status determining means are predetermined. A second effect executing means for executing a second effect different from the first effect when the second condition is satisfied, and wherein the progress status determined by the progress status determining means is the second condition. A gaming machine K1 comprising: a suppression unit that suppresses execution of the second effect by the second effect execution unit when the condition is not satisfied.

  Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are known gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, a symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a big hit game advantageous to the player is given. Some of such conventional gaming machines are provided with a sound output device such as a speaker, so that not only a visual effect but also an auditory effect can be executed to change the mode of the effect. By diversifying, interest was improved (for example, JP-A-2003-325886).

  Some of such conventional gaming machines are configured to be able to reproduce music as a kind of auditory effect during a predetermined period during a normal game.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, there is a possibility that the predetermined period ends during the reproduction of the rust part, which is the most characteristic part of the music, and the rust part is cut off halfway. . For this reason, there was a problem that a player who could not sufficiently listen to the rust portion may be dissatisfied.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, the first effect is executed by the first effect execution means based on the establishment of the predetermined execution condition, and the first effect is executed by the first effect execution means. The progress state of the first effect executed by the effect executing means is determined by the progress state determining means based on the fact that the first condition predetermined in the meantime is satisfied. When the progress status determined by the progress status determination means satisfies a predetermined second condition, a second performance different from the first performance is executed by the second performance execution means. When the progress status determined by the progress status determination means does not satisfy the second condition, the execution of the second effect by the second effect execution means is suppressed by the suppression means.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the first effect can be suitably executed.

  In the gaming machine K1, the gaming machine K2 is characterized in that the suppression means suppresses at least the execution of the second effect until the progress condition satisfies the second condition.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K1, the execution of at least the second effect until the progress condition satisfies the second condition is suppressed by the suppressing means. There is an effect that it can be more suitably executed.

  In the gaming machine K2, based on the fact that the period during which the execution of the second effect is suppressed by the suppression means is equal to or longer than a predetermined first period, whether the progress satisfies the second condition. A game machine K3 comprising execution control means for controlling the second effect execution means to start execution of the second effect regardless of whether or not the second effect is executed.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K2, based on the fact that the period during which the execution of the second effect is suppressed by the suppressing means is equal to or longer than the predetermined first period, the progress status is changed. Regardless of whether or not the second condition is satisfied, the second production means controls the execution of the second production by the execution control means so that the execution of the second production is suppressed. Has an effect that the period for executing the second effect can be suppressed from being excessively short due to excessively long time.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, a variable ball-in means that can be changed to a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state, Discriminating means for executing a discrimination based on the satisfaction of a discriminating condition; and determining that the variable ball-in means has changed from the second state to the first state based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discriminating means. A variable game execution unit that executes a variable game that is variable in number of times, wherein the first effect execution unit executes the first effect based on the start of the variable game, The second effect execution means executes the second effect in a period from when the last change to the first state in one of the variable games is completed to when a predetermined second period elapses. A gaming machine K4 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine K4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines K1 to K3. That is, the variable ball-in means is configured to be variable between a first state in which game balls can enter and a second state in which game balls are more difficult to enter than in the first state. The discrimination is executed by the discriminating means based on the satisfaction of the discriminating condition, and the variable ball-in means is changed from the second state to the first state a predetermined number of times based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discriminating means. The variable game is executed by the variable game execution means. The first effect is executed by the first effect executing means based on the start of the variable game. The second effect is executed by the second effect executing means in a period between the end of the change to the last first state in the one variable game and the elapse of the predetermined second period.

  Thereby, the effect that the first effect performed while the variable to the first state is being performed the predetermined number of times can be suppressed from being interrupted halfway by the start of the second effect. is there.

  In the gaming machine K4, the first effect is configured to include at least a specific effect period in which a specific effect mode is executed in the effect period, and the suppression unit determines the progress state determination. A gaming machine K5 for suppressing execution of the second effect by the second effect execution means when it is determined by the means that the specific effect period is present.

  According to the gaming machine K5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine K4. That is, the effect period of the first effect includes at least the specific effect period in which the specific effect mode is executed. When the progress state determination means determines that it is the specific effect period, the execution of the second effect by the second effect execution means is suppressed by the suppression means.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the specific effect mode can be executed for a longer time.

  In the gaming machine K4 or K5, based on the period determined by the suppression unit and a period determined by the period determination unit to suppress the execution of the second effect, the second effect is determined based on the period determined by the period determination unit. A gaming machine K6, comprising: a second production mode selection unit that selects one production mode that ends before the second period elapses from a plurality of executable production modes.

  According to the gaming machine K6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine K4 or K5. That is, the period in which the execution of the second effect is suppressed by the suppression unit is determined by the period determination unit. Based on the period determined by the period determining means, one of the plurality of performance modes executable as the second performance is terminated by the second performance mode selection means until the second period elapses. Selected by.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the second effect can be surely ended before the second period elapses.

  In any of the gaming machines K1 to K6, there is provided audio data reproduction means capable of reproducing audio data, and audio output means capable of outputting audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the audio data reproduction means, The first effect execution means executes the first effect by causing a predetermined music to be reproduced by the audio data reproducing means, and the suppressing means includes a means for executing the predetermined music by the progress status determination means. A game machine K7 for suppressing execution of the second effect by the second effect execution means when it is determined that a specific reproduction range is being reproduced.

  According to the gaming machine K7, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines K1 to K6. That is, audio data is reproduced by the audio data reproducing means, and a sound corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the audio data reproducing means is output by the audio output means. The first effect is executed by the first effect executing means by causing the audio data reproducing means to reproduce the predetermined music. When the progress state determination means determines that the specific reproduction range of the predetermined music piece is being reproduced, the execution of the second effect by the second effect execution means is suppressed by the suppression means.

  As a result, the second effect is executed during the reproduction of the specific reproduction range of the music, and the termination of the reproduction of the specific reproduction range can be suppressed, so that the player who wants to listen to the specific reproduction range is satisfied. There is an effect that can be made.

  In the gaming machine K7, an operation means operable by a player is provided, and the first effect execution means selects one music piece corresponding to the operation content of the operation means from a plurality of predetermined music pieces. A gaming machine K8 characterized by being reproduced by an audio data reproducing means.

  According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K7, one musical piece corresponding to the operation content of the operating means operable by the player is executed in the first effect from a plurality of predetermined musical pieces. Since the audio data is reproduced by the audio data reproducing means by the means, the specific reproduction range of the music piece which the player voluntarily selected can be reproduced for a longer time. Therefore, there is an effect that a greater satisfaction can be given to the player who has selected the music.

  The gaming machine K9, wherein in the gaming machine K7 or K8, the specific reproduction range includes at least a part of a rust portion in a music piece.

  According to the gaming machine K9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K7 or K8, since the specific reproduction range is configured to include at least a part of the rust portion in the music, the music is generally the most exciting part in the music. A certain rust portion can be played for a longer time. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be satisfied.

<Characteristic L group> (Providing music that can be selected only by random selection)
Based on the establishment of the predetermined execution condition, an effect executing means for executing any of a plurality of predetermined effects, and an effect to be executed by the effect executing means, a predetermined specific condition is satisfied. The first condition is selected as an effect to be executed by the effect executing means, based on the fact that the execution condition is satisfied in a state in which the one effect is selected from the plurality of effects. And a second selection unit capable of selecting one of the plurality of effects, excluding at least a specific effect, based on the execution condition being satisfied in a state where the execution condition is not satisfied. Gaming machine L1.

  Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are known gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, a symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a big hit game advantageous to the player is given. Some of such conventional gaming machines are provided with a sound output device such as a speaker, so that not only a visual effect but also an auditory effect can be executed to change the mode of the effect. By diversifying, interest was improved (for example, JP-A-2003-325886).

  Some of such conventional gaming machines allow a player to select one song from among a plurality of songs set in advance in the gaming machine during a predetermined period during a normal game, and the player selects the song. There is a music composition that is configured to be able to reproduce a music that has been played as a kind of auditory production. Some of the options that can be selected by the player include, in addition to the item indicating the name of the music to be reproduced, an item indicating that the music is determined at random. It has a configuration that can meet the maximum requirements.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, there is little merit that the music is determined at random, so that most players select their favorite music, and the selection frequency of the item whose music is determined at random is low. There was a problem that it became low.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, any one of a plurality of predetermined effects is executed by the effect executing means based on the establishment of the predetermined execution condition. As an effect to be executed by the effect executing means, one effect is selected from a plurality of effects by the first selecting means based on the fact that the execution condition is satisfied in a state where the predetermined specific condition is satisfied. . On the other hand, as an effect to be executed by the effect executing means, based on the execution condition being satisfied in a state where the specific condition is not satisfied, the second selecting means selects from among a plurality of effects at least a specific effect is excluded. 1 effect is selected.

  Thereby, it is possible to vary whether or not a specific effect is executed according to whether or not the specific condition is satisfied, so that attention can be paid to whether or not the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine L1, a display means capable of displaying an image, an operation means operable by a player, and an interlocking image in which a mode is changed in accordance with the operation content of the operation means based on establishment of a predetermined display condition And an interlocking image displaying means for displaying the interlocking image in a specific mode on the display means as the specific condition. Based on the establishment, one effect is selected from the plurality of effects, and the second selecting means displays the linked image in a mode different from the specific mode on the display means. A gaming machine L2 for selecting an effect corresponding to the mode of the linked image based on the fact that the execution condition is satisfied in a state in which the game machine L2 is in the game state.

  According to the gaming machine L2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine L1. That is, based on the establishment of the predetermined display condition, a linked image whose mode is changed in conjunction with the operation content of the operation means is displayed on the display means by the linked image display means. As the specific condition, one of the plurality of effects is selected by the first selecting unit based on the fact that the execution condition is satisfied in a state where the linked image in a specific mode is displayed on the display unit. The effect corresponding to the mode of the linked image is selected by the second selecting unit based on the execution condition being satisfied while the linked image in a mode different from the specific mode is displayed on the display unit.

  This allows the player to select whether the first selection means selects an effect or the second selection means to select an effect by operating the operation means. There is an effect that the player can select the effect selection method.

  The gaming machine L2 includes audio data reproducing means capable of reproducing audio data, and audio output means capable of outputting audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the audio data reproducing means, and is set as the linked image. The plurality of modes to be obtained are constituted by images of modes showing different songs, and the second selecting means selects a song corresponding to the mode of the linked image. Gaming machine L3.

  According to the gaming machine L3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine L1 or L2. That is, the audio data is reproduced by the audio data reproducing means, and the audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the audio data reproducing means is output by the audio output means. The plurality of modes that can be set as the linked image are configured by images of modes showing different music pieces. The music corresponding to the mode of the linked image is selected by the second selecting means.

  Thereby, by operating the operation means and selecting the linked image of the mode indicating the favorite music, the music desired by the player can be reproduced. There is an effect that it can be provided.

  In any of the gaming machines L1 to L3, a discriminating means for executing a discrimination based on the satisfaction of the discriminating condition, and an advantage advantageous to the player based on the fact that the discriminating means makes the first discrimination result Advantage setting means for setting a gaming state, wherein the effect execution means executes any of the plurality of effects based on the execution of the determination by the determination means, When the first determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination unit, the one selection unit selects one of the effects from the plurality of effects, and determines the first determination result by the determination by the determination unit. A game machine L4 wherein, when a different second determination result is obtained, at least one effect is selected from among the plurality of effects excluding at least a specific effect.

  According to the gaming machine L4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines L1 to L3. That is, the discrimination is executed by the discriminating means based on the satisfaction of the discriminating condition, and based on the result of the discrimination by the discriminating means being the first discrimination result, the profitable gaming state advantageous to the player is set by the advantageous setting means. Is done. One of the plurality of effects is executed by the effect executing means based on the execution of the judgment by the judging means. When the first determination result is obtained by the determination means, one effect is selected from the plurality of effects by the first selection means, while the first determination result differs from the first determination result by the determination means. When the second determination result is obtained, one of the plurality of effects excluding at least a specific effect is selected by the first selecting unit.

  Thereby, when a specific effect is selected by the first selecting means, it is possible to make the player recognize that the advantageous game state is set, so that attention is paid to the type of the effect selected by the first selecting means. There is an effect that can be made.

  In the gaming machine L4, there is provided notification effect execution means for executing an information effect for notifying whether or not the advantageous game state is set, and the execution condition is satisfied at least before the notification effect is executed. A gaming machine L5.

  According to the gaming machine L5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine L4. That is, a notification effect for notifying whether or not the gaming state is set is executed by the notification effect execution means. The execution condition is satisfied at least before the notification effect is executed.

  With this, if the specific effect is selected by the first selecting means, it is determined that the advantageous game state is set before confirming the notification effect, so that it is quickly determined whether or not the advantageous game state is set. There is an effect that a player who wants to know can play a game expecting that the effect is selected by the first selecting means.

  In the gaming machine L5, when the first determination result or the second determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination unit, a bonus game execution unit that executes a bonus game advantageous to the player; And a disadvantage setting means for setting a disadvantageous game state which is more disadvantageous than the advantageous game state as a game state after the privilege game executed based on the result of the determination. The means is for setting the advantageous gaming state as a gaming state after the award game executed based on the result of the first determination is completed, and the effect executing means is A gaming machine L6 for performing an effect during execution of a game.

  According to the gaming machine L6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine L5. That is, when the first determination result or the second determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination unit, the bonus game execution unit executes a bonus game advantageous to the player. As a game state after the bonus game executed based on the second determination result being completed, a disadvantage game state which is more disadvantageous than the advantageous game state is set by the disadvantage setting means. The advantageous setting state is set by the advantageous setting means as the gaming state after the privilege game executed based on the first determination result is completed. An effect is executed by the effect executing means during execution of the bonus game.

  As a result, when a specific effect is executed, it is advantageous for the player that the privilege game is executed, and further, the gaming state after the privilege game ends is changed to the advantageous gaming state. Is also determined, so that the player can have a greater sense of satisfaction.

  In the gaming machine L6, there is provided display means capable of displaying identification information, and dynamic display execution means executing dynamic display of identification information indicating a result of the determination by the determination means on the display means. As a dynamic display mode of the identification information executed based on the result of the first determination in the determination, a first mode in which the first identification information is stopped and displayed, and a second mode in which the first identification information is stopped and displayed. A first mode determining means for determining one of a second mode and a mode in which information is stopped and displayed; and the identification information to be executed based on the second determination result obtained by the determination by the determining means. A gaming machine L7, comprising: a second mode determining means for determining the first mode as a dynamic display mode.

  According to the gaming machine L7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine L6. That is, the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means is executed by the display means by the dynamic display execution means. As a dynamic display mode of the identification information executed based on the first determination result obtained by the determination unit, a first mode in which the first identification information is stopped and displayed, and a second mode in which the first identification information is stopped and displayed. Either the second mode of the mode in which the identification information is stopped and displayed is determined by the first mode determining means. The first mode is determined by the second mode determining unit as the mode of the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the second determination result obtained by the determining unit.

  Accordingly, when the dynamic display of the identification information is performed in the first mode, it is difficult for the player to determine whether the result is the first determination result or the second determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that a game can be played by paying attention to whether or not a specific effect is selected by the first selecting means.

  In the gaming machine L7, the first selection means determines the first determination result by the determination by the determination means, and performs the determination by the determination means rather than performing the dynamic display of the identification information in the second mode. The first determination result is obtained, and when the dynamic display of the identification information is executed in the first mode, the ratio of selecting the specific effect is configured to be higher. A gaming machine L8 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine L8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L7, the first determination result is obtained by the determination by the determining unit, and the determination by the determining unit is more effective than the dynamic display of the identification information is performed in the second mode. In the case where the first determination result is obtained and the dynamic display of the identification information is executed in the first mode, the ratio of selection of the specific effect by the first selecting means is higher. When the dynamic display of is performed, there is an effect that the game can be performed with a stronger expectation that the specific effect is selected by the first selecting means.

  A1 to A10, B1 to B13, C1 to C9, D1 to D9, E1 to E8, F1 to F10, G1 to G8, H1 to H10, I1 to I8, J1 to J9, K1 to K9, L1 to L8 In any one of the above embodiments, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in response to operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided in an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is a case where the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable the ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

  A1 to A10, B1 to B13, C1 to C9, D1 to D9, E1 to E8, F1 to F10, G1 to G8, H1 to H10, I1 to I8, J1 to J9, K1 to K9, L1 to L8 The gaming machine Z2, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information is provided, which is used to operate a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  A1 to A10, B1 to B13, C1 to C9, D1 to D9, E1 to E8, F1 to F10, G1 to G8, H1 to H10, I1 to I8, J1 to J9, K1 to K9, L1 to L8 In any one of the above embodiments, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
302a Voice file storage area (production data group storage means)
S305 determination means S1103 bonus game execution means S5107 part of the effect determination means S5207 part of the effect determination means S9205, S9210 effect data group selection means, data setting means S9208, S9213 part of the effect execution means S9308 part of the effect execution means S9402 Order changing means

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

As a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device is known. In this conventional gaming machine, a symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a big hit game advantageous to the player is given. In addition, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed on the display device in addition to the design, and a variety of entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game . Further, some of such conventional gaming machines are provided with an audio output device such as a speaker, so that not only a visual effect but also an auditory effect can be executed so that various modes of the effect can be achieved. By doing so, the aim was to improve the interest .

JP 2003-325886 A

However, there is a demand for further improvement in interest .

The present invention has been made to solve the above illustrated problem or the like, and aims to provide a game machine capable Rukoto improves interest in the game of the player.

In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 has a display unit capable of displaying an image, an operation unit operable by a player, and an effect based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition. At least one effect type image is displayed on the display unit, the effect type image group being configured of at least a plurality of effect type images indicating the type, wherein one of the effect type images among the plurality of effect type images is displayed in a predetermined specific display mode. Image group display means to be displayed, and the effect type image displayed in the specific display mode based on a predetermined operation performed on the operation means while the effect type image group is displayed Variable means for changing the effect type, an order determining means for determining the order in which the effect type images displayed in the specific display mode are changed by the image variable means based on establishment of the first condition, and the effect type Effect executing means for executing an effect of a type indicated by the effect type image displayed in the specific display mode, based on a predetermined second condition being satisfied while the image group is displayed. After the satisfaction of the first condition, the effect type image displayed in the specific display mode in the effect type image group displayed first is a specific number of times in which the number of executions by the effect execution means is predetermined. Setting means capable of setting one effect type image indicating an effect type of less than one, wherein the order determining means displays the effect type image group displayed first after the first condition is satisfied. Performing the first operation content on the operation means in the state in which the effect is performed by the effect execution means, the effect indicating the type of the effect being less than a predetermined number of times. Another image is displayed in the specific display mode, and by performing an operation of the second operation content different from the operation of the first operation content on the operation means, the number of times of execution by the effect execution means is reduced. that is determinable configure the order to be displayed by said rendering genre images indicating the type of the effect of the above specific number the particular display mode.

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, display means capable of displaying an image, operation means operable by a player, and a plurality of indications indicating the type of effect based on the satisfaction of a predetermined first condition. An image group display unit configured to display, on the display unit, an effect type image group that is at least configured by an effect type image, and wherein the effect type image of one of the plurality of effect type images is displayed in a predetermined specific display mode. And an image variable that varies the effect type image displayed in the specific display mode based on a predetermined operation performed on the operation unit while the effect type image group is displayed. Means, an order determining means for determining an order in which the effect type images displayed in the specific display mode are changed by the image changing means based on satisfaction of the first condition, and the effect type image group are displayed. Effect executing means for executing an effect of a type indicated by the effect type image displayed in the specific display mode, based on a predetermined second condition being satisfied while the first condition is satisfied. After the establishment of, the effect type image displayed in the specific display mode in the effect type image group displayed first, the number of executions by the effect execution means is less than a predetermined number of predetermined effect type Setting means that can be set to one of the effect type images shown, wherein the order determining means displays the effect type image group displayed first after the first condition is satisfied, By performing an operation of the first operation content on the operation means, the effect type image indicating the type of effect in which the number of times of execution by the effect executing means is less than a predetermined number of times is determined by the identification. It is displayed in a display mode, and by performing an operation of the second operation content different from the operation of the first operation content on the operation means, the number of executions by the effect execution means is equal to or more than the specific number of times. the presentation type image indicating a type is that is determinable configure the order to be displayed in the particular display mode.

Thus, there is an effect that it is Rukoto improves interest in the game of the player.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. (A) is a front perspective view of the right variable winning device with the opening / closing door closed, and (b) is a front perspective view of the right variable winning device with the opening / closing door opened. It is a top view of the right variable winning device in the first embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed typically the area division setting of a display screen, and an effective line setting, and (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A), (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the standby state effect performed in a jackpot standby state. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2A is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a ROM of the main control device according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2B is a block diagram illustrating a first random number table set in the ROM of the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is the figure which showed the regulation content typically. FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically illustrating the contents of a first hit type selection table set in a ROM of the main control device according to the first embodiment, and FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating the main control according to the first embodiment; FIG. 5 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a second random number table set in a ROM of the device. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in a ROM of a main control device according to the first embodiment, and (b) is a specification of a variation pattern table for a big hit in the first embodiment. It is a figure which showed the content typically, (c) is a figure which showed typically the regulation content of the variation pattern (for normal) in 1st Embodiment, (d) is 1st execution. It is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the deviation (probable change) variation pattern table in a form. It is a figure showing typically composition of various counters in a 1st embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a RAM of the main control device according to the first embodiment. FIG. 3A is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment, and FIG. 3B is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment. . FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surface B. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a display data table according to the first embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a transfer data table according to the first embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a drawing list according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change start processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a prefetch process executed by an MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a through gate passage process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit start process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hit-related process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating main processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a V interruption process. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a stop type command process. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a standby state command process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing an opening command process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment, and (b) is a round executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed several command processing. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an ending command process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a back image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating error command processing. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a display setting process executed by the MPU in the display device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a resident image transfer setting process. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the 1st hit type selection table set to ROM of the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the composition of RAM of the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special design fluctuation processing 2 which is executed by MPU in the main control unit in 2nd execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the start-up process 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot start process 2 performed by the MPU in the main control unit in the second embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed jackpot control processing 2 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a hit-related process 2 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the second embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the standby state command process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode in a case where a small win has occurred in the second special symbol lottery during the probability change state in the third embodiment, and (b) is a small display in the third embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode in a hit state. (A) is a figure which showed typically the specification content of the 1st random number table set in ROM of the main control device in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM. 13 is a flowchart illustrating main processing 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the third embodiment. It is the flow chart which showed the small hit control processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 3rd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the hit related command processing 3 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display state of a standby state effect while the left-operation winning port is in a state where a ball can enter in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the fourth embodiment. In an aspect, it is a figure showing an example of a display mode of a stand-by state effect while a right operation winning opening is in a state in which a ball can enter. It is a block diagram showing composition of RAM of a main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the big hit start processing 4 which is executed by MPU in the main control unit in 4th execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the big hit control processing 4 which is executed by MPU in the main control unit in 4th execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the hit related process 4 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of a main control device according to the fifth embodiment. (B) is a first hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 14C is a diagram schematically illustrating the prescribed contents of the period length selection table set in the ROM of the main control device according to the fifth embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed special design change processing 5 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed jackpot control processing 5 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the interval setting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification of 5th Embodiment. It is a top view of the right variable winning device in the sixth embodiment. (A), (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode in case the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect is set as an effect mode during super reach in 6th Embodiment. (A), (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode in case the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect is set as an effect mode during super reach in 6th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing a change over time in a production mode when a special symbol lottery wins in the sixth embodiment and a right-turning expectation degree suggestion production is set in the sixth embodiment; ) Is a diagram schematically showing a temporal change of the effect mode in the sixth embodiment when a special symbol is removed by a lottery and a right-turning expectation degree suggesting effect is set. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the sixth embodiment. is there. It is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the production mode selection table set in ROM of the sound lamp control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed production update processing 6 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 6th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the notification start determination process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed variable display setting processing 6 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed production mode selection processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 6th embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the time-dependent change of the production | presentation mode at the time of a left opportunity big hit in 7th Embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of an opening effect of a left opportunity jackpot in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is an example of a display mode after an opening effect of a left opportunity jackpot is completed. FIG. It is a block diagram showing the composition of RAM of the sound lamp control device in a 7th embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed main processing 7 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 7th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pseudo normal state effect processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the hit related process 7 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the standby state command process 7 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed opening command processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 7th embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 1st control example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during a probable change state in the first control example, and (b) is a display when a music selection menu screen is displayed during a probable change state in the first control example. It is a figure showing an example of an aspect. (A) is a figure showing an example of an initial arrangement of a music selection menu screen displayed when shifting to the music selection mode in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram in the music selection mode in the first control example. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when an operation on an operation button is detected. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in a first control example. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of the audio ramp control device in the first control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device in the first control example. . (A) is a figure which showed typically the specification contents of the item arrangement | positioning storage area set in RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example, (b), The audio | voice ramp control in the 1st control example. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically illustrating the contents of a music selection frequency storage area set in a RAM of the apparatus. FIG. 4 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a sound output device in a first control example. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of the audio output device in the first control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM of the audio output device in the first control example. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically illustrating the contents of a specified audio file storage area set in a ROM of an audio output device in a first control example. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration of a music data group in a first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process 8 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an operation detection process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process 8 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a status command process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the hit related process 8 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the first control example, and (b) is a command executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the first control example. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an interrupt process. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the first control example. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a sound setting process executed by an MPU in the sound output device in the first control example. It is the figure which showed the correspondence of the transition of the jackpot state in the 2nd example of control, and the transition of the audio | voice mode. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a correspondence relationship between a transition of a jackpot state and a transition of a music part when it is determined that the reproduction order is to be rearranged at the rearrangement determination timing 1 set to the jackpot in the second control example. . FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a correspondence relationship between a transition of a jackpot state when the reproduction order is determined to be rearranged and a transition of a music part at a rearrangement determination timing 2 set to a jackpot in a second control example. . It is the figure which showed typically the correspondence of the transition of the big hit state and the transition of the music part when it is determined that the start timing of the ending effect is delayed in the big hit in the second control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the second control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the second control example. . It is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the recombination determination table set in ROM of the sound lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the ending effect selection table set to ROM of the sound lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. FIG. 9 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a sound output device in a second control example. FIG. 9 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a RAM of the audio output device in a second control example. 9 is a flowchart showing a main process 9 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an operation detection process 9 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is the flowchart which showed the ending effect start determination processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is the flowchart which showed the hit related process 9 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is the flowchart which showed the round number command process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the music selection period setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 2nd control example. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an interval command process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example. It is the flowchart which showed the ending command process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the music command process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a main process 9 executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the second control example. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process 9 executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the second control example. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot music related process performed by the MPU in the audio output device in the second control example. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a sound setting process 9 executed by the MPU in the sound output device in the second control example. (A), (b) is a figure showing an example of a music selection menu screen in the third control example. (A), (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode during execution of the big hit in which the pseudo small round effect was set in the third control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the third control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the third control example. . It is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the random music selection table set in ROM of the sound lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. 9 is a flowchart showing an operation detection process 10 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example. It is the flowchart which showed the music determination process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the hit related process 10 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example. It is the flowchart which showed the pseudo small round lottery process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the round number command process 10 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 3rd control example. 9 is a flowchart showing an interval command process 10 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example. It is the flowchart which showed the variable display setting process 10 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and ball entrances 64, 640, 67 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by a game ball flowing down the front of the game board 13. Note that the inner frame 12 guides the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 8) that launches the game ball to the front area of the game board 13 and the game ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A firing rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing game balls is formed in a substantially box shape projecting forward and opening the upper surface, and prize balls, loaned balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the game balls inserted into the upper plate 17 are guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the effect or background displayed on the third symbol display device 81 described later.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach, or the like, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display during the payout of award balls and when an error occurs.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right side illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the game ball is operated in accordance with the operation. Is lent. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which game balls are directly rented to the upper plate 17 from a ball rental device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 is unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion 40 to have a common component configuration. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing game balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface in a central portion thereof. ing. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a game ball into the front of the game board 13 is provided, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a, a push button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the game ball during a pressing operation, and a variable for detecting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by a change in electric resistance. A resistor (not shown) is built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount. A game ball is fired at a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, which changes, and the game ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described configuration is used. However, the configuration is not limited thereto, and the main control device 110 and other control devices may detect a game ball fired by the ball firing unit 112a, or the solenoid of the ball firing unit 112a. May be configured to detect that the player has fired a game ball. Further, the number of detected game balls may be counted and stored until a process such as RAM clear is executed.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. Game balls fall naturally from the bottom opening and are discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “dollar box”) for receiving game balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and a number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, the activated winning opening 660, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first opening 64, the second opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the operating winning opening 660, and the variable display unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. The game board 13 is fixed from the front side with wood screws or the like. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear of the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back of the game board 13. A game area where a game is played is formed by the behavior of the ball. The game area is a front area of the game board 13 which is formed by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70 and is formed in a substantially circular area (a starting port or the like is provided, and the game ball is fired). Is the area in which the water flows down). The game area includes all areas where the game ball that has passed through the return ball preventing member 68 flows before passing through the out port 66 or the winning port.

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided for guiding game balls fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 8) to the upper part of the game board 13. An operation winning port 660 through which game balls can enter is provided at a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the outer rail 62. The operation winning port 660 shifts to a jackpot state (special game state) which is an advantageous state for the player when the game ball enters. More specifically, when it is determined that a special symbol (a first symbol) is a big hit in the lottery, the ball is set to a state where the entry into the activated winning opening 660 is valid (a big hit standby state). It should be noted that, at normal times, even if the game ball enters the activated winning opening 660, the game is not affected at all. In the jackpot waiting state, when the player fires the game ball toward the operation winning opening 660, the game ball enters the operation winning opening (winning), and the big hit is started. As shown in FIG. 2, a rotating member 670a that rotates at a constant rotation speed is provided to the left of the operation winning opening 660 in a front view. The rotating member 670a can be arranged so as to prevent a game ball fired toward the operating winning opening 660 in the direction of the operating winning opening 660 according to its rotational position, and can be arranged so as not to obstruct. Unless the moving member 670a hits the game ball aiming at a timing at which the moving member 670a does not disturb the game ball, the game ball cannot be made to enter the operation winning opening 660 (the big hit can be started). Therefore, when it is determined that a special symbol is determined to be a big hit, a game ball can be fired in consideration of the arrangement of the rotating member 670a, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the operation winning opening 660 is provided at the end of a flow path (operating winning opening flow path) wider than one game ball and narrower than two game balls. The flow path for the operation winning port receives (flows in) a game ball fired at a firing intensity in a predetermined range including at least the maximum momentum (firing intensity) (for example, the firing intensity is in a range of 95% to 100%). It is configured as follows. Therefore, when the special symbol is determined to be a jackpot in the lottery and the jackpot is in a standby state, when aiming at the operation winning opening 660, simply rotating the handle 51 to the maximum movable range is easily performed. A game ball can be made to enter the operation winning opening 660.

  A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61. A game ball fired at a predetermined firing intensity (for example, the firing intensity is in the range of 90% to 95%) hits the return rubber 69, and is bounced back toward the center with reduced momentum. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is provided between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, when a game ball enters one of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, a lottery of a special symbol (first symbol) is performed, and the game ball is normally inserted. When passing through the ball opening 67, a lottery of a normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the special symbol lottery performed for the ball entering the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot, and it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. If it is, the jackpot type is also determined. When the special symbol hits, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed wins a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse, or a predetermined number of game balls win). ) Is released, and the release is repeated a number of times (round number) according to the jackpot type. As a result, a large amount of game balls wins in the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. There are six types of special symbol jackpots, "Big Jackpot A" to "Big Jackpot F". After the special game state is over, as a value added after the jackpot is over, the game according to the result of the jackpot game (Game value) is given to the player. The three types of "big hits A to C" are big hit types that can be determined when a special symbol lottery executed when the game ball enters the first entrance 64 becomes a big hit. And the three types of “big hits D to F” are jackpots that can be determined when a special symbol lottery executed when a game ball enters the second entrance 640 becomes a jackpot. Type. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplicity, the special symbol lottery executed when the game ball enters the first entrance hole 64 is referred to as a first special symbol lottery, and the game ball is designated as a first special symbol lottery. The special symbol lottery executed when the ball enters the second entrance 640 is referred to as a second special symbol lottery.

  When the lottery of the special symbol (first symbol) is performed, the variable display of the special symbol is started on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds to 90 seconds) elapses, the lottery result is obtained. Is stopped and displayed. When a game ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times of entry is determined for each type of entrance. Are retained up to a maximum of four times, and the number of the retained balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display ends on the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 remains, the next special symbol lottery is performed. Then, the variable display according to the lottery is started.

  On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery performed for the passing of the game ball at the normal ball entrance 67, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is hit. Normally, when a symbol comes into contact, the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is changed to the open position for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), so that the second entrance 640 is opened. Be released. It should be noted that the second entrance 640 is normally closed because the electric accessory 640a is arranged at the closed position. Therefore, the ball that has flowed down from above in front view toward the second entrance 640 is impeded (difficult) to enter the second entrance 640 by being blocked by the electric accessory 640a. . On the other hand, in the case of a normal symbol hit, by opening the electric accessory 640a, the ball flowing down toward the second entrance 640 becomes easier to enter the second entrance 640, As a result, the lottery of the second special symbol is easily performed.

  Also, when the lottery of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variation display of the ordinary symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, or the like) elapses, The normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When a game ball passes through the normal entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is increased to the first symbol display device 37. , And also at the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is finished on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the lottery is performed. Be started.

  As described above, six types of special symbols such as “big hit A” to “big hit F” are provided.

  When the "big hit A" is reached, a special game state in which the number of rounds is 8 (8 round big hit) is established. On the other hand, when the "big hit B" or "big hit C" is reached, the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 5 rounds (5 round big hits), and when the "big hit D" is reached, the number of rounds becomes 16 special rounds (16 rounds). When the "big hit E" and the "big hit F" are reached, a special game state of 10 rounds (10 round big hit) is achieved. Furthermore, when the "big hit A", "big hit B", "big hit D", or "big hit E" is reached, the state shifts to the special symbol high probability state (special symbol is being changed) after the end of the big hit. In addition, when the high probability state of the special symbol is given, the hit probability of the ordinary symbol is also increased (the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol is given). The high probability state of the special symbol and the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol continue from the end of the jackpot until the next jackpot. On the other hand, when the "big hit C" or "big hit F" is reached, the time saving state of the ordinary symbol is given after the end of the jackpot, but the high probability state of the special symbol is not given. The time-saving state of the ordinary symbol given after the end of the "big hit C" or the "big hit F" ends when the lottery of the special symbol is executed 100 times.

  Here, the “special symbol high probability state” refers to a state in which the special symbol jackpot probability is increased, a so-called “special symbol high probability state” (special symbol probable state), in other words, the special game state It is a state of the game that is easy to shift to (big hit). On the other hand, the case where the special symbol is not in the high probability state is referred to as the special symbol low probability state, which is a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than the special symbol probability state, that is, the special symbol jackpot probability is normal. Indicates the state (low probability state of special symbol). The “normal symbol time reduction state” (normal symbol high-probability state) refers to a gaming state in which the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is increased, and the gaming ball easily enters the second entrance 640. . On the other hand, when it is not the "normal symbol time reduction state", it is called "normal symbol normal state" (normal symbol low probability state). Indicates that the hit probability is low.

  As described above, in the special symbol jackpot according to the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot differs according to the type of the jackpot. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be common to all jackpot types (for example, all five rounds). Further, in the present embodiment, the “special change state of the special symbol” given after the big hit is configured to be continued until the next big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration in which the “special symbol change state” is continued until the number of special symbol lotteries is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) may be used. In this case, the number of lotteries in the "special symbol change state" and the number of lotteries in the "normal symbol time reduction state" may be made different. In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of lotteries is varied according to the type of jackpot.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power or the like, the pachinko machine 10 is always set to the "low probability state of the special symbol" and the "normal state of the ordinary symbol". And when it becomes any of "big hit A", "big hit B", "big hit D", and "big hit E", it shifts from "low probability state of special symbol" to "probable change state of special symbol" and Then, the state shifts from the “normal state of the ordinary symbol” to the “time reduction state of the ordinary symbol”. In this case, the set "special change state of the special symbol" and the "normal symbol time reduction state" continue until the next big hit. On the other hand, when "big hit C" or "big hit F" is reached, the state shifts to "low probability state of special symbol" and "time saving state of normal symbol". Hereinafter, for the sake of simplicity of explanation, after the end of the jackpot, a “special symbol change state” and a “normal symbol time reduction state” are given to the jackpot (“jackpot A”, “jackpot B”, “jackpot D”, “Big hit E”) is referred to as “probable change big hit”. On the other hand, a big hit (“big hit C” and “big hit F”) to which only the “normal symbol time-saving state” is given 100 times after the end of the big hit is referred to as “normal big hit”.

  A plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a, which are light emitting means, and a seven-segment display 37b are provided on a lower left portion (lower left portion in FIG. 2) of the game board 13 in a front view. A symbol display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs a display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays a game state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a fluctuation display by indicating whether or not a lottery of a special symbol, which is performed in accordance with the ball entry (starting prize) into the first ball entrance 64, is being performed, by a lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) according to the result of the lottery of the special symbol is displayed in a lighting state, or a game entered in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. The number of retained balls, which is the number of game balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls, is indicated by the lighting state.

  If a game ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the entry of the ball is performed. The number of balls is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, each of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is configured to be held up to four times, but the maximum number of holdings is limited to four. However, the number of times may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the LEDs are different, and the various game states of the pachinko machine 10 (the high probability state of the special symbol) Or, during normal working hours, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but also indicates the jackpot type (special symbol corresponding to the jackpot A to F) when the jackpot is a jackpot. (1st symbol) is shown.

  Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning ports 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls when the game balls win. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a game ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start winning), the first symbol display device 37 uses the trigger as a trigger to change and display a special symbol (first symbol). Is executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured by a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right. Columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The corresponding decorative display is performed. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 6A is a diagram schematically illustrating the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 6B is a diagram exemplifying an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of nine types of main symbols numbered "1" to "9". Each main symbol is configured to imitate a number from “1” to “9”. Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers from "1" to "9" on the back symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are: Large numbers are added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) have an attached symbol imitating a character such as a plane, a furoshiki, a helmet, etc. on almost the front of the wooden box. An even number is added to the lower right side of the symbol so that it is small in green and is displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 8) described later is a big hit, a fluctuation display in which the same main symbols are arranged is performed. It is configured so that a big hit occurs after the variable display ends. On the other hand, when the result of the lottery of the special symbol is out of order, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not prepared is performed.

  For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a probable jackpot (one of "big hit A", "big hit B", "big hit D", "big hit E"), any one of "1" to "9" is added. A variable display in which the displayed main symbols are aligned is performed. In addition, in the case of a normal big hit ("big hit C" or "big hit F"), a variable display in which main symbols to which even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added is displayed. That is, the variable display in which the main symbols to which the odd numbers “1, 3, 5, 7, 9” are added is likely to be executed only in the probable big hit. Even in the case of a probability variable jackpot, a variable display in which the main symbols with even numbers are aligned may be performed. It is possible to make the game during the jackpot in expectation of being. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned is performed. In the probability variation jackpot, the rate at which the fluctuation display in which the main symbols with even numbers are aligned is performed is set to, for example, 60%. In addition, when the probable change jackpot is started by the variable display in which the main symbols with even numbers are aligned, the fact that the jackpot has been the probable change jackpot in a predetermined period of the jackpot (for example, during a five round period) is notified. Is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into upper and lower portions, and the lower 2/3 is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed. The upper third is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, center, and right, and three symbol arrays Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in ascending or descending numerical order, and the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from top to bottom with a periodicity to perform variable display. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, a third symbol is displayed in three stages of upper, middle, and lower for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the activated line L1, and in each game, the third symbol is stopped on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. This stop display state is maintained for at least one second. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period (1 second or more), the player can determine whether the combination is the third symbol corresponding to the big hit (the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit). Overlooked or not) can be suppressed. Further, if the combination of the big hit symbols (in the present embodiment, the combination of the same main symbols) is aligned on the activated line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, the big hit is determined, and a standby state effect indicating the standby state of the big hit is displayed. You. Details of the standby state effect will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, by allowing the game ball to enter (win) the operation winning opening 660 during the jackpot waiting state, a jackpot is started, and a big hit movie (opening effect) is displayed.

  In addition, when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed is a combination corresponding to the departure, and there is a reserved ball, after the stop display for one second, the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is started. . When there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest incoming ball in time.

  On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the departure of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for one second in a state where the reserved ball does not exist, the state where the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses or until a new game ball enters the first entrance 64. When a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game was not executed is displayed. In spite of the fact that the player has continuously fired the game ball for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), it is rare that there is no ball entering the first ball entrance 64, and the third symbol is stopped. In many cases, the displayed state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) because the player has quit the game and the pachinko machine 10 does not play the game at all. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed after the stop display of the third symbol, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. I do. Thereby, the player who is trying to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on whether or not the demonstration effect is displayed. On the other hand, if a new game ball enters the first entrance 64 before the predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses, the fluctuation display of the third symbol corresponding to the new entry is displayed. Be executed.

  The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is equally divided in the left-right direction into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3. Among these, the small area Ds1 is the number of retained balls that is the number of game balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the game balls that have entered the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. Are displayed, and the small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying a preview effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the transition to the jackpot is easier than usual. In the central small area Ds2, normally, a predetermined character 710 (a boy with a hachimaki in the present embodiment) performs a predetermined operation, sometimes performs a special operation different from the predetermined operation, or another character A notice effect is performed by appearing.

  On the other hand, when the game ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), The number of entering balls is retained up to a maximum of four times for each type of entrance, and the retained number of balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved ball number symbols. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is reduced. Indicates four balls. When the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball. In addition, in the left half of the small area Ds1, a reserved ball number design indicating the number of retained balls based on the entrance to the first entrance port 64 is displayed, and in the right half of the small area Ds2, The configuration is such that a reserved ball count symbol indicating the number of reserved balls based on the entry into the 2 entrance 640 is displayed. In the example of FIG. 6B, four reserved ball count symbols are displayed in the left half of the small area Ds1, but no reserved ball count symbol is displayed in the right half. This shows a state in which there are four reserved balls of the symbol, but there are no reserved balls of the second special symbol.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although it has comprised so that the ball which enters into the 1st ball entrance 64 and the 2nd ball entrance 640 may be suspended up to four times, respectively, the maximum number of reserved balls is four times. It is not limited, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). In addition, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is changed by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum holding number, and displaying the number of holding balls according to the number of the holding lamps in the lighting state.

  The second symbol display device 83 performs a fluctuation display by indicating by a lighting state whether or not a lottery of a normal symbol, which is performed when a game ball passes through the normal entrance 67, is being executed, As a stop symbol after the end of the change, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, each time a game ball passes through one of the left and right normal entrances 67, a symbol "O" as a normal symbol (second symbol) and a symbol "X" are displayed. Is alternately displayed by alternately lighting the symbols. When the fluctuating display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “」 ”), the pachinko machine 10 causes the electric accessory 640 a attached to the second entrance 640 to move for a predetermined time. The operation state is set (opened), and as a result, the game ball is configured to easily enter the second entrance 640. The number of times the game ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 is retained up to a maximum of four times, and the retained ball number is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and also illuminated by the second symbol retaining lamp 84. You. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that, as in the present embodiment, the variable display of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is performed by switching between turning on and off the plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83, and the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the passage of the game ball at the normal entrance 67, as with the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four, three or less, Alternatively, it may be set to five or more times (for example, eight times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reserved lamp 84 may not be turned on.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 into which a game ball can enter is provided. When a game ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 draws the first special symbol, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37. The first entrance 64 is also one of the winning openings from which five prize balls are paid out when a game ball enters. In addition, the first entrance 64 is such that a game ball flowing down the flow path on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (a game ball hit left) flows down the flow path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. A nail or the like is arranged so that it is easier to enter the ball than a played game ball (game ball hit right).

  On the lower right side in front view of the variable display unit 80, a second entrance 640 into which a game ball can enter is provided. When a game ball enters the second entrance 640, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 draws a second special symbol, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37. Further, the second entrance 640 is also one of the winning openings from which five prize balls are paid out when a game ball enters. As shown in FIG. 2, since the second entrance 640 is provided on the right side of the game board 13, basically, only the game balls flowing down the flow path provided to the right of the variable display device unit 80 are provided. Enters the ball.

  A right variable winning device 65 is disposed in the lower left direction in front view of the second entrance 640, and a horizontally long rectangular specific right winning opening 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. Further, a left variable winning device 650 is disposed in a lower left direction in a front view of the right variable winning device 65. The left variable winning device 650 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the left specific winning opening 650a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. Have. The opening / closing plate is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won. In the closed state of the opening and closing plate, the opening and closing plate and the game board 13 are closed so as to be on the same plane, so that the game ball can pass through the front side of the opening and closing plate. In addition, when the opening / closing plate is tilted to the lower front side, an open state in which the game ball easily wins the left specific winning opening 650a is temporarily formed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so that the big hit is stopped. At the same time, a stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the jackpot determination (acquiring the jackpot right). Then, in the jackpot waiting state which has been shifted due to the determination of the jackpot, the game state is shifted to the special game state in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual by causing the game balls to enter the operation winning opening 660. I do. In this special game state, the right specific winning opening 65a and the left specific winning opening 650a which are normally closed are opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until a predetermined number of game balls are won). You. That is, normally, the opening / closing door 65f1, which closes the right specific winning opening 65a, is opened when the first round of the jackpot (special game state) occurs, and a ball can enter the right specific winning opening 65a. Become. Every time one game ball enters the right specific winning opening 65a, ten prize balls are awarded. In addition, in each of the second and subsequent rounds of the jackpot (special game state), the left specific winning opening 650a is opened and the ball can enter. Similarly to the right specific winning opening 65a, ten prize balls are awarded each time one game ball enters the left specific winning opening 650a.

  The right specific winning opening 65a, the left specific winning opening 650a, and the above-mentioned second ball entrance 640 receive game balls flowing down the right channel of the variable display device unit 80 (right-hit game balls). It is arranged at a position where the ball can be entered (easy entry). In other words, the game balls flowing down the flow path on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 are arranged at positions where ball entry is impossible (ball entry difficult). Therefore, in order for the player to receive the payout of the prize ball during the jackpot (obtain a profit), the player only has to hit the game ball to the right. Here, as shown in FIG. 2, the right variable winning device 65 is disposed in a state of being slightly inclined downward and leftward in a front view. Thereby, when the player makes a right strike with the opening / closing door 65f1 closed and the game ball reaches the upper surface of the right variable prize device 65, the reached game ball is tilted to the right variable prize device 65. The ball can flow down to the lower left direction in a front view, and can enter the out port 66. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a game ball fired by a right strike from staying in the upper portion of the right variable winning device 65 (the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1). As shown in FIG. 2, the left variable winning device 650 is disposed at the lower left of the right variable winning device 65. Therefore, when the left specific winning opening 650a is open, the right variable winning device 65 is opened. The game ball that has flowed down and to the lower left in front view enters the left specific winning opening 650a.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the condition that each round of the jackpot is ended (the opened right specific winning opening 65a or the left specific winning opening 650a is closed again) is set to the jackpot round (opened). (Special winning opening type). Specifically, in the first round (the round in which the right specific winning opening 65a is opened), 30 seconds have elapsed since the opening and closing door 65f1 was opened, or two or more game balls are used as the right specific winning opening. When the player wins (enters the ball) 65a, the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed and the first round is completed. On the other hand, in each of the second and subsequent rounds of the jackpot (a round in which the left specific winning opening 650a is opened), 30 seconds have elapsed since the left specific winning opening 650a was opened, or 10 or more games are played. When the ball has won the left specific winning opening 650a, the left specific winning opening 650a is closed and the round is ended.

  In the right variable winning device 65, a sensor for detecting a game ball entering the right specific winning opening 65a is provided inside the right variable winning device 65. Therefore, there is a time lag from when the game ball wins (enters the ball) to the right specific winning opening 65a until the ball is detected. More specifically, it takes about 0.5 seconds after the game ball enters the right specific winning opening 65a until the number of actually entered balls is counted. That is, it takes about 0.5 seconds from when the number of game balls satisfying the condition for ending the round to the right specific winning opening 65a to when the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed. Therefore, if the game balls can be additionally inserted during the 0.5 second, more prize balls can be obtained than usual (when only the number of the rounds at which the end upper limit is satisfied is won). . In the first embodiment, in one round (a round in which the right specific winning opening 65a is opened), the player intentionally enters the right specific winning opening 65a with a number of game balls equal to or more than the number of round end conditions. It has a configuration that can be made to ball. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplicity, the term “over winning” means that a number of game balls exceeding the upper limit winning number (number of winning balls) specified in each round will win (enter) the specific winning opening 65a. Called.

  Although details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5, in the first embodiment, in order to easily generate an over-winning prize, after the game ball reaches the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1, the opening and closing door is opened. The upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 is configured so that the period until the vehicle passes through the upper surface of the 65f1 is extended. With this configuration, a plurality of game balls can be easily added to reach the upper surface of the door 65f1 while one game ball is flowing down the upper surface of the door 65f1. Therefore, in the jackpot waiting state, at the timing when more game balls are flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1, the game balls are thrown into the operation winning opening 660 to start the big hit (opening the opening / closing door 65f1). This allows all the game balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 to enter the opened right specific winning opening 65a. As described above, the first round of the jackpot ends when two or more winnings (balls) are detected for the specific winning opening 65a. However, if it is possible to start the first round of the jackpot with three or more game balls reaching the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 before the start of the jackpot, the three or more game balls are passed to the right specific winning opening 65a. Winning (ball entry), and more prize balls can be obtained than originally (prize balls for two prizes). Therefore, according to the timing at which the game balls enter the operation winning opening 660, it is possible to provide a game effect that affects the number of prize balls that the player can obtain in the first round of the jackpot. The game in the state can be more enjoyed. In order to allow the game balls to reach the opening / closing door 65f1 during the jackpot waiting state, the game balls do not enter the operation winning opening 660 (the game balls enter the operation winning opening channel (see FIG. 2)). A right-handed shot may be performed at a firing intensity of about (a firing intensity of less than 95%).

  Next, the structure of the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 4A is a front perspective view of the variable winning device 65 with the opening and closing door 65f1 closed, and FIG. 4B is a view of the variable winning device 65 with the opening and closing door 65f1 opened. It is a front perspective view.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, convex portions 65f1a to 65f1c are provided on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 so as to prevent a game ball from flowing down. The game ball flowing down the upper surface of the door 65f1 is prevented from flowing down by the convex portions 65f1a to 65f1c, and flows down on the door 65f1 along the outer periphery of each of the convex portions 65f1a to 65f1c. That is, on the opening / closing door 65f1, a serpentine flow path is formed by the convex portions 65f1a to 65f1c. For this reason, compared with the case where each convex portion 65f1a to 65f1c is not provided (that is, the case where the game ball can linearly flow down the opening / closing door 65f1 from right to left in a front view), the opening / closing door is provided. The period required to completely flow down the upper surface of 65f1 can be lengthened. Thus, while one game ball is flowing down the upper surface of the door 65f1, a plurality of game balls can be easily added to reach the upper surface of the door 65f1. Therefore, in the jackpot waiting state, at the timing when more game balls are flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1, the game balls are thrown into the operation winning opening 660 to start the big hit (opening the opening / closing door 65f1). ), More game balls can be over-winned.

  FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating a state where the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened. As shown in FIG. 4B, the opening / closing door 65 f 1 slides from the front side in the front view to the rear side in the front view, and moves inside the game board 13 through an opening provided in the game board 13. Is stored. As a result, the right specific winning opening 65a is opened. When the right specific winning opening 65a is opened, game balls flowing down from the right direction of the right variable winning device 65 can enter the right specific winning opening 65a. Further, the height of the opening for storing the door 65f1 is sufficiently low with respect to the diameter of the game ball. It is possible to prevent the existing game ball from being stored inside the game board 13 together with the door 65f1. Therefore, when the door 65f1 slides into the game board 13, the game ball on the upper surface of the door 65f1 can be dropped to the specific winning opening 65a.

  Here, in the first embodiment, the period required for one game ball to completely pass through the opening / closing door 65f1 is configured to be about 4 seconds. The firing interval of the game balls (the interval from when one game ball is fired to when the next game ball is fired) is configured to be a minimum of 0.6 seconds. Thus, while one game ball is flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1, about six additional game balls can be fired. Therefore, in the jackpot waiting state, after about seven game balls are continuously fired toward the variable winning device 65, the game balls are made to enter the activated winning opening 660, so that about seven game balls are entered. The first round can be started while the ball is flowing down the upper surface of the door 65f1. That is, the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened, and all the game balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 can be made to win the specific winning opening 65a. As a result, it is possible to obtain more prize balls than originally (prize balls for two prizes), and in the jackpot waiting state, the operation winning prize port with more game balls reaching the opening / closing door 65f1. The player can be devised to enter a game ball at 660. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game in the jackpot waiting state. In this way, in the jackpot waiting state, by allowing the game ball to enter the operation winning opening 660 while the game ball is flowing down the opening / closing door 65f1, a game property in which an over-win can be intentionally generated can be achieved. Can be provided.

  In the first embodiment, by providing the three convex portions 65f1a to 65f1c on the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1, the configuration is such that the game ball bypasses the convex portions 65f1a to 65f1c, and the game ball passes through the opening and closing door 65f1. Although the passage period is configured to be long, it is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to providing the protrusions 65f1a to 65f1c, the material of the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 is made to have a higher coefficient of friction than other parts (the surface of the game board 13 or the inner surface of the variable winning device 65). It may be made of a large material (for example, an elastic body or the like), or may be processed to make the game ball difficult to roll (for example, to provide unevenness on the surface).

  In the first embodiment, the first round is executed when 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of the first round, or when two or more game balls entered the specific winning opening 65a before the 30 seconds elapsed. It was configured to end. In other words, the end condition is set so that if the right-handed game is performed, the upper limit number (two) of the game balls is almost certainly made to enter the specific winning opening 65a and the first round is completed. However, it is not limited to this. For example, even if the player hits the right specific winning opening 65a right after the start of the first round, the first round may be completed in a period in which it is difficult to enter the game ball. . Specifically, for example, 0.5 second elapses after the start of one round, or when ten or more game balls win the specific winning opening 65a before 0.5 second elapses, the first round is performed. May be terminated. In such a configuration, if no game ball is passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 at the timing when the game ball enters the operation winning port 660, no game ball enters the right specific winning port 65a. It is possible to provide a game with a high possibility that the first round will be completed without the ball being played. Therefore, a player who wants to obtain a prize ball in the first round hits the game ball toward the opening / closing door 65f1 before allowing the player to enter the activation winning opening 660 in the jackpot waiting state. It is possible to entertain the game of aiming at the operation winning opening 660 later. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game in the jackpot waiting state.

  FIG. 5 is a top view of the opening / closing door 65f1 as viewed from a vertical upper surface side. As shown in FIG. 5, pass detection sensors 228a to 228f capable of detecting the passage of the game ball are embedded in a zigzag path on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 where the game ball can roll (easily). . These passage detection sensors 228a to 228f are arranged apart from each other by a distance at least exceeding the diameter of the game ball in a path formed on the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1. The known outputs of these passage detection sensors 228a to 228f become H (high) when a game ball is arranged above them, and output L (low) when there is nothing obstructing the above. It is composed of an optical sensor. In the first embodiment, a combination of the outputs of the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f is monitored on the sound lamp control device 113 side. Then, during the jackpot waiting state, it is configured to be able to execute an effect indicating a measure of the number of game balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 according to a combination of outputs of the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f. . That is, an effect indicating the degree of advantage when a game ball is thrown into the operation winning opening 660 can be executed. Thereby, by allowing the game balls to enter the operation winning opening 660 at a timing suggested that more game balls are flowing down on the opening / closing door 65f1 in accordance with the effect content, a larger number of game balls are provided. A game ball can be easily over-winned. Therefore, the player can easily aim for the over prize. Details of the standby state effect that is performed during the jackpot standby state will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIGS. 7A and 7B are diagrams showing a display state during a standby state effect executed in the jackpot standby state. As shown in FIG. 7A, in the jackpot standby state, a display area HR1 in which the character "Big hit is determined!" Is displayed on the upper side of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when viewed from the front. The display contents of the display area HR1 allow the player to easily recognize that the jackpot has been determined (the jackpot right has been obtained). Further, below the display area HR1, a combination (final stop symbol) of the third symbol that is finally stopped and displayed (fixed display) in the variable display effect that has been executed before the jackpot standby state is displayed. . By displaying the final stop symbol even during the jackpot waiting state, the player can easily confirm at any time whether the current jackpot is a probable jackpot or a normal jackpot.

  On the right side in front view of the final stop symbol, a chance meter CM which is vertically long and divided vertically into six small areas is displayed. Each of the areas constituting the chance meter CM is configured to be variable between a light-off appearance and a light-on appearance, and is activated according to the number of light-on appearance small areas. It is configured to indicate the degree of advantage when a game ball is inserted into the mouth 660. More specifically, the number of small areas is determined in order (priority) from the lower small area according to the number of sensors whose outputs are H (high) among the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f. The light emission appearance (lighting mode) is set. That is, in the chance meter CM, game balls of the number of light-emitting appearance (lighting mode) small areas are passing through at least the upper surface of the door 65f1 (when the door 65f1 is opened). It is possible to win the right specific winning opening 65a). Hereinafter, for the sake of simplicity of description, in the chance meter CM, the light-emitting appearance small area is referred to as “gauge”, and the number of light-emitting appearance small areas is referred to as “gauge number”. Changing the appearance of the light emission will be referred to as “gauge is accumulated”.

  Below the final stop symbol, meter charge when aiming for "GO!" ! The display area HR <b> 2 is displayed in which a character “”, a character “Aim at the upper right at the same timing!”, And an image suggesting that the player will aim at the activation winning opening 660 are displayed. According to the display content of the display area HR2, the player aims at the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (see FIG. 2) with the character "GO!" It can be easily understood that the number of gauges of the displayed chance meter CM can be increased. As described above, in the chance meter CM, the number of gauges varies in accordance with the detection contents of the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f provided on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. By launching a game ball at a launching intensity (firing speed) enough to enter the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the game ball reaches the variable prize device 65 disposed downstream thereof. Can be done. Therefore, by continuously firing game balls in the direction in which the normal entrance (through gate) 67 is disposed, the game balls continuously reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65. I do. In this state, a game ball is fired at the operation winning opening 660 in accordance with the display content of the display area HR2 (that is, with a firing intensity of 95% to 100%), so that a big hit is started and the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened. You. As a result, a game ball flowing down the opening / closing door 65f1 can be made to win (enter a ball) substantially at the right specific winning opening 65a. As described above, the rotating member 670a that performs a rotating operation at a constant rotating speed is provided on the left side of the operation winning opening 660 in a front view. Since the turning member 670a can prevent the game ball from entering the operation winning opening 660 according to the turning position, the turning member 670a turns the player not only for the gauge number of the chance meter CM but also for the player. A game ball can be fired at a firing timing that also takes into account the rotational position of the member 670a. Therefore, the player's interest in the game in the jackpot waiting state can be further improved.

  FIG. 7B is a diagram showing a state where three gauges of the chance meter CM are stored. As shown in FIG. 7B, when the game ball is passing above the three sensors of the passage detection sensors 228c to 228e, the outputs of these three sensors become H (high). The sound lamp control device 113 detects the number of sensors outputting H and reflects the number in the mode of the chance meter CM. In the example of FIG. 7B, since the outputs of the three sensors (passage detection sensors 228c to 228e) are H, it is displayed in a state where three gauges of the chance meter CM are accumulated. As described above, the number of game balls passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 is detected by the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f, and a guide of the number of game balls passing is detected according to the detection result. With this configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the timing at which the player should aim at the operation winning opening 660. Therefore, even a player who has little experience in playing the game with the pachinko machine 10 can easily intuitively understand the timing of aiming at the operation winning opening 660. Thereby, even the player who plays the game for the first time can easily play the game, so that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  In the first embodiment, in the jackpot waiting state, the guide of the number of game balls passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 is indicated by the gauge number of the chance meter CM, so that the game balls are moved to the operation winning opening 660. Although the configuration suggests the degree of advantage when the ball is entered, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the jackpot advantage degree is indicated by the gauge number of the chance meter CM. Specifically, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot type is indicated by the number of gauges of the chance meter CM, thereby indicating to the player the degree of advantage when a game ball is inserted into the activated winning opening 660. Further, for example, the number of rounds of the jackpot may be determined indefinitely when the jackpot is determined, and the number of rounds of the jackpot may be randomly selected at a timing when the jackpot is passed through the operation winning opening 660. The number of gauges indicates the number of rounds determined by a lottery executed when a game ball is thrown into the activated winning opening 660, thereby indicating that a game ball is thrown into the activated winning opening 660. It is good also as composition which suggests a degree of advantage to a player.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. At the lower right corner of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided. The certificate stamp or the like stuck on the sticking space K1 can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14.

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A game ball that does not win any of the winning ports is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out port 66. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is peeled to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102 or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out game balls by a predetermined electric configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 8). Have. The game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially supplied to the tank 130, and the required number of game balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). ing. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 8). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The main control device 110 executes major processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of a display result on the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 12) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, a counter and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used to perform a jackpot lottery, a display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a lottery of a display result of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. Used in.

  For setting the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a first random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a first hit type counter C2 used for the selection of the jackpot symbol are set. A stop type counter C3 used to select a stop type, a change type counter CS1 used to select a change pattern, and a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set an initial value of the first random number counter C1. Are used. In addition, the random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbols (the second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value every time the value is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 21), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 30). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a composed of four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The values of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the ball timing. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b including four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas). , The respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored. An execution area 203c is provided in the RAM 203, and stores the values of a first random number counter C1, a first hit type counter C2, and a stop type selection counter C3, which are to be subjected to the lottery. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203d including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and in each of these areas, a game ball is provided. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored at the timing of passing through the normal entrance (through gate) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399). It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 30).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment). Is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b.

  As described above, the value of the random number that is a special symbol big hit is set by the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 9B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the first random number counter is set. If the value of C1 matches the value of the random number that becomes the big hit set by the first hit random number table, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. The first random number table 202a is used for a low probability of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and for a high probability of a special symbol having a large jackpot than the low probability. The number of random hits included in each of the two types is set differently (see FIG. 9B). In this way, by making the number of random numbers that are big hits different, the probability of big hits is changed between a low probability of a special symbol and a high probability of a special symbol.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol hits, and adds one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and when a game ball enters the first entrance 64, The value is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (the execution area 203c when the special symbol lottery is not being executed). On the other hand, when the game ball has entered the second entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (the execution area 203c when the special symbol lottery is not being executed). Is stored.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area 203c is not a random number that is a big hit of a special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 is used. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed when the special symbol comes off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area 203c is a random number that is a special symbol big hit, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is as follows. It will be a special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit indicates the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. It becomes a display mode.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In the first random number counter C1, when the special symbol has a low probability, there are two random numbers that are the big hits of the special symbol, and the random number value “0, 1” is the first random number for the low probability. It is stored in a table (see 202a1 in FIG. 9B). As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 400 out of the total number of random numbers, and thus the total probability of the special symbol is 2/100. In addition, the random number value (counter value) which is a big hit is common to the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 20 random numbers that are the big hits of the special symbol, and the values “0 to 19” are stored in the first random number table for the high probability. (See 202a2 in FIG. 9B). As described above, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers is 400 out of 400, and the total number of jackpot random numbers is 20, so the probability of the special symbol jackpot is “1/20”.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in a range of 0 to 99. Then, as shown in FIG. 10A, a jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol, and the jackpot type when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 4” is “big hit A” ( 8 rounds jackpot). When the value is “5 to 64”, the jackpot type is “big hit B” (five round probability change jackpot), and when the value is “65 to 99”, the jackpot type is “big hit C”. (5 rounds regular jackpot).

  On the other hand, if the lottery of the second special symbol results in a big hit, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 4”, the big hit type is “big hit D” (16 rounds probability change big hit). When the value is “5 to 64”, the jackpot type is “big jackpot E” (10 rounds probability variable jackpot), and when the value is “65 to 99”, the jackpot type is “big jackpot F”. (10 rounds regular jackpot).

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that six types of hits (big hits A to F) are determined by the type of the special symbol and the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. Have been.

  The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. "Reach out of front and rear" (e.g., 98, 99), and "reach other than front and rear departure" (e.g., in a range of 90 to 97) in which the final stop symbol stops at positions other than the front and rear of the reach symbol after reaching. Three stop (effect) patterns of "completely out of range" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where no reach occurs are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment). When a game ball enters the first entrance 64, the value is stored in the RAM 203. Is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a (if the special symbol lottery is not being executed, the execution area 203c). When a game ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (the execution area 203c when the special symbol lottery is not being executed). You.

  The random number value for determining the special symbol stop type from the value of the stop type selection counter C3 (random number value) is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for the high probability case and a special symbol for the low probability case. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed according to whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high-probability state or the special symbol low-probability state.

  For example, in the high-probability state, the jackpot is likely to occur, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary. Is selected, and it becomes easier to select “completely off”. In this table, the “reach out of front and rear” is narrowed to 98, 99 and the “reach other than front and rear out” is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select “reach out of front and back” or “reach other than front and rear out”. In the low probability state, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is as narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the time for the game ball to enter the first entrance 64. The time table is selected, and it is difficult to select “completely out of place”.

  In the stop type selection table, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than out of front and rear” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than out of front and rear out” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low-probability state, since a lot of reach displays with a long rendering time can be performed, the ball entry time of the game ball into the first entrance 64 can be secured, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is continued. It is easier to do. Also in the latter table, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “out-of-reach reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough display mode such as a so-called normal reach and a super reach is determined by the variation type counter CS1. The determination of the display mode is, specifically, the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the fine symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. You. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 30) described below is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. Note that a variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 11A) storing a random value for determining one symbol variation time from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random value) is stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is provided in.

  Here, the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 11A, the variation pattern table 202d is a table for selecting a variation pattern based on a lottery of the first special symbol, and is a large hit variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 11B). At least a (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 11C) and a (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 11D) are defined.

  First, with reference to FIG. 11B, a description will be given of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. FIG. 11B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the big hit variation pattern table 202d1. The big hit variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the selected variation pattern is specified when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit. Various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are defined as the jackpot fluctuation patterns. In the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1, each variation pattern is associated with each value of the variation type counter CS1.

  Specifically, as the determination value of the value of the variation type counter CS1, a range of “0 to 50” is associated with a variation pattern of various normal reach (30 seconds), and a range of “51 to 179” is various super reach. A variation pattern of (60 seconds) is associated, and a variation pattern of various special reach (90 seconds) is associated with a range of “180 to 198”. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when selecting a variation pattern in which the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, determines the variation pattern in which the determination value corresponding to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 is set. It is selected from the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1.

  FIG. 11C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2. The outlier (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the special symbol lottery result is out of order in the special symbol low probability state. . If the special symbol lottery result is off, as described above, it is determined whether the stop type is completely off (non-reach) or out of reach (reach common) from a stop type selection table (not shown) as described above. It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, for example, in the low probability state of the special symbol, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete out is set, and if it is in the range of “80 to 99”, out of reach is reached. (Reach out of front and back, reach other than front and back out).

  Here, when the variation pattern type is completely off, one of a short deviation (7 seconds) with a relatively short fluctuation time and a long deviation (10 seconds) with a relatively long fluctuation time is set. "0-98" is set as the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for a short deviation (7 seconds), and "99-198" for a long deviation (10 seconds).

  For the outreach, various normal reach (30 seconds) are out of range when the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 149”, and out of super reach in the range of “150 to 197”. (60 seconds), but various special reach (90 seconds) are set in “198”.

  As described above, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 determines the stop type when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order in the normal game state, and obtains the fluctuation obtained from the out-of-office (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2. Based on the value of the type counter CS1, a variation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2.

  FIG. 11D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probable change) variation pattern table 202d3. The deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the lottery of the special symbol is lost in the special symbol variation state. In the deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3, the value of the variation type counter CS1 that is set is different from that of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 described above.

  As described above, when the game state is the probable change game state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89” by the stop type selection table (not shown), complete departure is determined. , "90-99", the out-of-reach (reach out of front and back, reach other than out of front and back) is determined.

  As described above, when the game state is the certain-variable game state than the normal game state, the probability of reaching when the game is off is set to be lower. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation time of the deviation from becoming longer at the time of the probability change and the period until the jackpot becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the game is prolonged in the probable change game state in which the big hit is likely to occur, and the player feels bored.

  Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. The second random number counter C4 is configured as, for example, a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt processing, and is acquired when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the through gate 67. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203d.

  Then, the value of the random number which is usually a hit of the symbol is set by the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 10B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set. Is equal to the value of the random number that is a win set by the second random number table, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol. In addition, the second random number table is used for a low probability of a normal symbol (a period in which the symbol is in a normal state) and a high probability of a normal symbol being hit than the low probability (a symbol of a normal symbol). And the number of jackpot random numbers included therein are set differently (see FIG. 10B). In this manner, by making the number of winning random numbers different, the winning probability is changed between a low probability of the ordinary symbol and a high probability of the ordinary symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 10B, at the time of the low probability of the ordinary symbol, there are 24 random numbers which are the hits of the ordinary symbol, and the values are "5 to 28". As described above, at the time of the low probability of the ordinary symbol, the total number of the random numbers is 240 out of the total number of the random numbers, and the total number of the random number of the jackpot is 24, so the probability of the jackpot of the special symbol is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the normal symbol, when the game ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained and the second symbol display device is obtained. At 83, the normal symbol change display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning is achieved, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (the second symbol) is displayed. As a symbol, a symbol “○” is illuminated and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the electric accessory 640a is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time” when the ordinary symbol hits, The time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when the ordinary symbol has a high probability, there are 200 random numbers which are the jackpot of the ordinary symbol, and the range is "5 to 204". These random numbers are stored in a second random number table for high probability. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random number values to be a big hit is 200 out of a total of 240 random number values, so that the probability of a special symbol to be a big hit is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol high-probability state and the game ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained, and the second symbol display device is displayed. At 83, the normal symbol change display is executed for 3 seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol. In this case, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, a symbol “O” is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol), and the electric accessory 640a is opened “1 second × 2 times”. Is done. In this way, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the time of the variable display becomes very short, such as “30 seconds → 3 seconds”, compared to the low probability of the normal symbol, and the opening period of the electric accessory 640a is further reduced. Since it is extremely long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the state is such that a game ball easily enters the second entrance 640. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, the electric accessory 64a is opened “1 second × 2 times” when the ordinary symbol hits, but the opening time and The number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 21). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 30).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 determines the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes, in addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. And the like, and a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (see FIG. 30), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 29). Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. , The NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 28) as a power failure processing is immediately executed.

  Next, the specific contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9A is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the present embodiment. The ROM 202 of the main control device 110 stores at least a first random number table 202a, a first random type selection table 202b, a second random number table 202c, and a variation pattern selection table 202d as a part of the fixed value data. ing.

  The first random number table 202a (see FIG. 9B) is a data table in which the correspondence between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the lottery result is defined. Specifically, in the low probability state of the special symbol, “0, 1” is defined as the range of the determination value determined to be a big hit (see 202a1 in FIG. 9B), and the high probability state of the special symbol (probable change). In the (state), “0 to 19” is defined as a range of the determination value determined to be a big hit (see 202a2 in FIG. 9B). When the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on the winning start matches one of the determination values corresponding to the big hit defined in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 9B). Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 10A) is a data table in which the determination value for determining the big hit type is stored for each special symbol type, and is determined by the first hit type counter C2. A value is defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the winning start is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, The big hit type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 10A, “big hit A” is defined in association with the first special symbol in a range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 4”. (See 202b1 in FIG. 10A). The "big hit A" is a big hit in which the number of rounds is eight, and after the big hit is completed, the "special change state of the special symbol" and the "time saving state of the normal symbol" which are continued until the next big hit are given. . Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are five counter values that are "big hit A", so "big hit A" is determined when a big hit occurs in the first special symbol lottery. Is 5% (5/100). Since the "big hit A" has the largest number of rounds among the big hits of the first special symbol, and the advantageous "special change state of the special symbol" and the "time saving state of the ordinary symbol" which are advantageous after the end of the big hit, are given. , Is the most advantageous jackpot type among the jackpots of the first special symbol.

  For the first special symbol, "big hit B" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "5 to 64" (see 202b2 in FIG. 10A). . The "big hit B" is a big hit in which the number of rounds is 5 rounds, and after the big hit is completed, the "special change state of the special symbol" and the "time saving state of the normal symbol" which are continued until the next big hit are given. . Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the counter value of "big hit B" is 60, so "big hit B" is determined when a big hit occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol. Is 60% (60/100). Although the number of rounds is small in the “big hit B”, similar to the “big hit A”, advantageous “special change state of special symbol” and “normal time saving state of normal symbol” are given after the end of the big hit. It is a type of jackpot that is relatively advantageous for people.

  For the first special symbol, "big hit C" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "65 to 99" (see 202b3 in FIG. 10A). . The "big hit C" is a big hit in which the number of rounds is 5 and a "normal symbol time-saving state" which is continued after the big hit is completed until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the counter value of "big hit C" is 35, so if a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, "big hit C" is determined. Is 35% (35/100). The "big hit C" has a small number of rounds, and the gaming state after the big hit is also disadvantageous compared to the "big hit A" and the "big hit B", so that the big hit type is disadvantageous for the player.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 10 (a), with respect to the second special symbol, the "big hit D" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 4". (See 202b4 in FIG. 10A). The "big hit D" is a big hit in which the number of rounds is 16 rounds, and after the big hit is completed, the "special change state of the special symbol" and the "time saving state of the normal symbol" which continue until the next big hit are given. . Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are five counter values that are "big hit D", so "big hit D" is determined when a big hit occurs in the second special symbol lottery. Is 5% (5/100). The "big hit D" has the largest number of rounds and also has an advantageous gaming state after the end of the big hit, so that it is the most advantageous big hit type for the player.

  For the second special symbol, “big hit E” is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “5 to 64” (see 202b5 in FIG. 10A). . The "big hit E" is a big hit in which the number of rounds is 10 rounds, and after the big hit is completed, the "special change state of the special symbol" which continues until the next big hit and the "time saving state of the normal symbol" are given. . Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the counter value of "big hit E" is 60, so "big hit E" is determined when a big hit occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol. Is 60% (60/100). Although the "big hit E" has a smaller number of rounds than the "big hit D", the gaming state after the end of the big hit is as advantageous as the "big hit A", "big hit B", and "big hit D". Is set, and this is a kind of jackpot type that is advantageous to the player.

  For the second special symbol, “big hit F” is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “65 to 99” (see 202b6 in FIG. 10A). . The “big hit F” is a big hit in which the number of rounds is 10 and a “normal symbol time-saving state” that continues until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times after the big hit is completed. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the counter value of "big hit F" is 35, so if a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit F" is determined. Is 35% (35/100). Although the number of rounds of the "big hit F" is larger than the number of rounds of the first special symbol ("big hit A" to "big hit C"), the game state after the end of the big hit is disadvantageous, and thus the player is disadvantageous. Jackpot type.

  In this way, if the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the type of jackpot is that the number of rounds is larger than that of the lottery of the first special symbol. Is advantageous for the player. The ratio of the probability jackpot and the normal jackpot is the same in both the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol (65% in the probability variable jackpot and 35% in the regular jackpot).

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 10B) is a data table in which the hit determination value of the ordinary symbol is defined (stored). Specifically, in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, “5 to 28” is defined as the determination value that is the hit of the ordinary symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 10B). In addition, in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, “5 to 204” is defined as the determination value to be the hit of the ordinary symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 10B). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, refer to the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained based on the game ball passing through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 and the second random number table 202c. Then, it is determined whether or not it is a normal symbol hit.

  The fluctuation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 11) is a data table in which the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the fluctuation pattern is defined for each display mode. Since the details of the variation pattern table 202d are as described above in the description of the variation type counter CS1, a detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

  Next, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing a configuration of RAM 203 of main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 13, the RAM 203 includes a first special symbol retaining ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol retaining ball storage area 203b, an execution area 203c, a normal symbol retaining ball storing area 203d, and a first special symbol retaining ball number counter. 203e, a second special symbol holding ball number counter 203f, a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g, a probable change flag 203h, a time reduction counter 203i, an incoming ball waiting flag 203j, a big hit start flag 203k, a big hit flag 203m, and other memory areas 203z. At least have.

  The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area), and each of these areas has a first random number counter C1 and a first hit type. Each value of the counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the game ball wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding). Of the vacant areas from the first area to the reserved fourth area, the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in an area having a smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are changed to the execution area 203c. (See FIG. 12), and a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is made based on each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area 203c, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process in which the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) is packed into the reserved area having the smaller area number (the reserved first area to the reserved third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for holding areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) in which winning data is stored.

  The second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b has four holding areas, like the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. In the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, each counter value obtained based on the winning start to the second entrance 640 is stored. The method of storing the counter value and the like are the same as those in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, and thus a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The execution area 203c is a storage area in which the values of the counters C1 to C3 used for executing the special symbol lottery are stored. The value of each of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area 203c is compared with the first random number table 202a, the first type selection table 202b, and the like, and a lottery of a special symbol is executed.

  The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203d has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). Each of these areas stores a second random number counter C4. More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the game ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to holding area). Among the vacant areas of the (fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control device 110, when a lottery for a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203d is shifted to the execution area ( Is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for a normal symbol is made based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that it is the same as the case of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. Then, a shift process is performed to pack the winning data stored in the other reserved areas into the reserved area having the smaller area number. The data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning). This is a counter for counting the number of retained balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed by the symbol display device 81 up to four times. The first special symbol holding ball number counter 203e has an initial value set to zero, and each time a game ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of changing display-holding balls increases, the maximum value increases. It is incremented by 1 up to 4 (see S404 in FIG. 24). On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by one each time a new special symbol change display is executed (see S210 in FIG. 22).

  The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times N1 of the variable display in the first special symbol is changed) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball number command (S211 in FIG. 22, FIG. 24). See S405). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is changed.

  Each time the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is changed, the sound ramp control device 113 displays the variable display retained in the main control device 110 by the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value of the number of retained balls can be obtained. As a result, the number of balls for variable display managed by the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the actual variable display reserved for main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number of balls is deviated, the deviation can be corrected by the next received ball number command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and displays the reserved display number for notifying the display control device 114 every time the reserved ball number changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball count symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball count notified by the display reserved ball count command.

  The second special symbol holding ball number counter 203f is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the second entrance 640 (start winning). This is a counter for counting the number of retained balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed by the symbol display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the second special symbol holding ball counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a game ball enters the second entrance 640 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value increases. It is incremented by 1 up to 4 (see S410 in FIG. 24). On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by one each time a new special symbol change display is executed (see S205 in FIG. 22). The value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is also notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball number command, similarly to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is configured to display the number of retained balls of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passing of the game ball at the ordinary entrance (through gate) 67. This is a counter for counting the number of times of waiting (up to four times). The initial value of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203g is set to zero, and each time a game ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases, one is added to the maximum value of 4. (See S704 in FIG. 27). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is decremented by one each time a new variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is executed (see S605 in FIG. 26).

  When the game ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained if the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203g (the number of times M of the variable display in the ordinary symbol is retained) is less than 4. Then, the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203d (S705 in FIG. 27). On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203g is 4, nothing is newly stored in the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203d (S703 in FIG. 27). No).

  The probable change flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change state of the special symbol. If the probable change flag 203h is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change state of the special symbol. If the flag 203h is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol low probability state. In addition, as described above, during the special symbol change state, the normal symbol is reduced in time. Therefore, when the probability change flag 203h is on, it indicates that the special symbol is in the probability variation state and the normal symbol is in the time saving state.

  The probability variable flag 203h is set to an initial value of OFF, and when a probability variation jackpot (any one of “big hit A”, “big hit B”, “big hit D”, and “big hit E”) is reached, It is set to ON at the time of termination (see S1215 in FIG. 32). The probability change flag 203h is reset to off when the big hit game is started (see S219 in FIG. 22).

  The probability change flag 203h is referred to in the special symbol change start process to determine whether or not the gaming state is the probability change state (see S302 in FIG. 23). Specifically, when the special symbol change start process (FIG. 23, S213) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol change start process (S213 in FIG. 23), the probable change flag 203h is referred to. A special symbol lottery is held. On the other hand, if the probability change flag 203h is off, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the first probability random number table 202a for low probability (see 202a1 in FIG. 9B).

  The probability change flag 203h is also referred to in the normal symbol change process to determine whether or not the gaming state is a time saving state (S608, S614, S620 in FIG. 26). Specifically, the probable change flag 203h and the time reduction counter 203i described later are referred to in the normal symbol fluctuation process, and if the probable change flag 203h is on or the value of the time reduction counter 203i is 1 or more, It is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state, and a normal symbol lottery is performed based on the second random number table for high probability 202c (see 202c2 in FIG. 10B) (see S609 in FIG. 26). . On the other hand, if the probable change flag 203h is off and the value of the time reduction counter 203i is 0, it is determined that the symbol is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, and the second random number table 202c for the low probability state (FIG. 10 ( The lottery of the ordinary symbols is performed based on 202c1 of b)) (see S610 of FIG. 26). Further, in the ordinary symbol variation process, the probable variation flag 203h is also referred to when determining the variation time of the ordinary symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when the ordinary symbol is hit (S614 in FIG. 26). See S620).

  The time reduction counter 203i is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the time reduction counter 203i is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the counter 203i during time saving is 0 and the probability change flag 203h is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of a normal symbol. The initial value of the time reduction counter 203i is set to zero, and a special symbol is drawn in the main controller 110, and every time a normal jackpot is reached, the value is set to 100 at the end of the normal jackpot. (See S1214 in FIG. 32). In addition, regardless of the jackpot type, when a jackpot is determined by a special symbol lottery, the value is set to 0 while setting the start of the jackpot (see S219 in FIG. 22).

  When a lottery for a normal symbol is performed, the value of the time reduction counter 203i and the state of the probability change flag 203h are referred to, and if the value of the time reduction counter 203i is 1 or more, or the probability change flag 203h is on. For example, it is usually determined that the symbol is during the working hours. In this case, a lottery of a normal symbol is performed based on the second random number table for the high probability (see S609 in FIG. 26). On the other hand, if the value of the time reduction counter 203i is 0 and the probability change flag 203h is off, it is determined that the symbol is in the normal state, and based on the second random number table for low probability, the symbol is determined. Is performed (see S610 in FIG. 26).

  The entering ball waiting flag 203j is a flag indicating whether or not a jackpot waiting state in which the start of the jackpot is waited until the game ball enters the activated winning opening 660. If the incoming ball waiting flag 203j is on, it means that the game is in the jackpot waiting state, and if it is off, it means that the game is not in the jackpot waiting state. The ball waiting flag 203j becomes a big hit by a special symbol lottery, and is set to ON when the change time of the change pattern corresponding to the big hit elapses (see S220 in FIG. 22). In addition, the entering ball waiting flag 203j is set to off when a gaming ball enters the activated winning opening 660 in the jackpot waiting state (see S1104 in FIG. 31). While the ball entry waiting flag 203j is ON, the ball entry into the activated winning opening 660 is treated as valid (a big hit is started when a ball entry is detected).

  The jackpot start flag 203k is a flag indicating whether or not to start a jackpot. If the big hit start flag 203k is on, it means that it is time to start a big hit (the game ball enters the activated winning opening 660 and the big hit standby state ends). If it is off, the big hit is started. It is not the timing to start. The jackpot start flag 203k is set to ON when a game ball enters the activated winning opening 660 during the jackpot standby state (see S1103 in FIG. 31). The jackpot start flag 203k is set to off when the start of the jackpot is set (see S1203 in FIG. 32).

  The big hit flag 203m is a flag indicating whether or not a big hit (special game state) is in progress. If the big hit flag 203m is on, it means that a big hit is being made, and if it is off, it means that there is no big hit. The big hit flag 203m becomes a big hit due to the lottery of the special symbol, and the big hit (special game state) is started and set to ON (see S1203 in FIG. 32). Also, it is set to off at the end of the big hit (special game state) (see S1217 in FIG. 32). In the special symbol change process (see FIG. 22), the big hit flag 203m is referred to determine whether or not a big hit is being made (see S201 in FIG. 22).

  The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

  As described above, the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 is provided with various counters and flags.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 including an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a right specific winning opening 65a, and an opening / closing door for closing or opening the left specific winning opening 650a. A solenoid 209 including a large-opening solenoid for opening and closing the 65f1 and a solenoid for driving the electric accessory, a rotating body motor 670c for rotating the rotating member 670a are connected, and the MPU 201 Various commands and control signals are transmitted to these via the output port 205.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch (122 in FIG. 3) circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Various processes are executed based on signals output from various switches 208 and a RAM erasure signal SG2 output from a RAM erasure switch (122 in FIG. 3) circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 28) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a such that when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to launch a game ball, the ball launch unit 112a has a launching strength of the game ball according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. is there. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the game ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the handle 51, and a game ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights in a lamp display device (lights 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and performs a fluctuation display effect ( The display control device 114 controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the variable display. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The sound ramp control device 113 monitors the outputs of the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f, and determines the approximate number of game balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 from the number of sensors whose outputs are H (high). It is configured to be able to grasp. Then, in the jackpot waiting state, the mode (gauge amount) of the chance meter CM to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed in accordance with the number of game balls grasped according to the number of sensors. This allows the player to see the amount of prize balls (the number of game balls entering when the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened) obtained when the player enters the game balls into the operation winning opening 660. Can be easily understood. Therefore, during the jackpot waiting state, the right-handed shot is performed with a firing intensity (a firing intensity of less than 95%) that does not reach the activated winning opening 660 more actively, and more game balls reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. It can be made to try. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game in the jackpot waiting state.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors an input from the frame button 22 and, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super reach. The sound output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content at the time, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and displays an error command including the type of the error. Transmit to device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  Next, details of the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 14A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. The ROM 222 has at least a fluctuation pattern selection table 222a.

  The variation pattern selection table 222a is based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110, and shows more detailed variation from the rough variation content (variation time, variation type (reach, deviation, etc.)) indicated by the variation pattern command. Used to determine content. As a result, various variations can be determined. Here, one variation mode among a plurality of types is determined by lottery with respect to the rough variation content instructed by main controller 110.

  Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14B is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. In the RAM 223, a winning information storage area 223a, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a variation start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, and a variation time counter 223f. , A standby state effect flag 223g, a level counter 223h, a game state storage area 223i, and another memory area 223z.

  The winning information storage area 223a has a storage area composed of four areas (first area to fourth area) for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In addition, it has one execution area. Winning information is stored in each area. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 detects a start winning, each of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the starting winning. From the value, various information (acceptance, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted (estimated) by the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is obtained. Is notified from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 by a winning information command.

  When the prize information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various information (acceptance, stop type, fluctuation pattern) notified by the prize information command as prize information, and the prize information is used as the prize information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in ascending order of the area numbers (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first to fourth areas). Is done. That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in an area having a smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the first area.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is a counter that counts up to four times the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol held in the main controller 110, and the second special symbol. The symbol holding ball number counter 223c is a counter that counts the number of holding balls corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol up to four times.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and stores the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 203e and the second special symbol reservation ball number stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. The value of the counter 203f cannot be obtained. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the retained ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and performs the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter. At 223c, the number of reserved balls is managed for each special symbol type.

  More specifically, the main controller 110 adds the number of balls to be displayed in the variable display due to the entry to the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, or a special symbol in the main controller 110. When the fluctuation display is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e or the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f after addition or subtraction is retained. The ball number command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  When receiving the reserved ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110, the sound ramp control device 113 determines the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203e of the main control device 110 or the second special symbol from the reserved ball count command. The value of the reserved ball number counter 203f is acquired and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (see S4308 in FIG. 36). As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. Therefore, the values can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f of the main control device 110.

  The values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball count command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball count indicated by the command in the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball count counter 223c. At the same time, in order to notify the display control device 114 of the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c after storage, the display reserved ball number command is sent to the display control device 114. Send to.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball count command, the value of the reserved ball count indicated by the command, that is, the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 and the second special ball count value Drawing of an image is controlled so that the number of symbols of the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the first special symbol retaining ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 223c are the first special symbol retaining ball number counter 203e and the second special symbol retaining ball number counter of the main controller 110. The value is changed in synchronization with 203f. Accordingly, the number of the reserved ball count symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also the value of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203e and the second special symbol reserved ball count counter 203f of the main controller 110. Can be changed while synchronizing with. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of the reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

  The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S4302 in FIG. 36), and turned off when the fluctuation display is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S4502 in FIG. 38). When the variation start flag 223d is turned on, a display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S4305 in FIG. 36), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S4507 in FIG. 38). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type (big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command.

  The fluctuation time counter 223f is a counter that counts the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the special symbol. When a fluctuation pattern command is received from main controller 110, the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern notified by the fluctuation pattern command is set in fluctuation time counter 223f.

  The standby state effect flag 223g is a flag indicating whether or not the standby state effect (see FIGS. 7A and 7B) is being executed. If the standby state effect flag 223g is on, it means that the standby state effect is being executed, and if it is off, it means that the standby state effect is not being executed. The standby state effect flag 223g is set to ON when the standby state command indicating that the jackpot standby state has been entered is received from the main control device 110 and the start of the standby state effect is set (FIG. 37). S4403). In addition, the standby state effect flag 223g is set to OFF when an opening command indicating the start of a jackpot is received from the main control device 110 (see S4406 in FIG. 37).

  The level counter 223h is a counter that indicates the gauge number (level) of the chance meter CM displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the standby state effect (see FIGS. 7A and 7B). The value of the level counter 223h is updated in conjunction with the number of sensors whose outputs are H (high) among the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f (see S4204 in FIG. 35). That is, the number of sensors whose output is H (high) is set as the counter value.

  The gaming state storage area 223i is a storage area for storing data corresponding to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The game state storage area 223i is updated each time a state command output from the main control device 110 is output each time the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed (see S4310 in FIG. 36). Note that the gaming state storage area 223i is formed of, for example, a 1-byte storage area, and is configured so that the gaming state can be specified by the state of the lower two bits. More specifically, for example, the least significant bit indicates whether the symbol is in the time saving state of a normal symbol, and the second least significant bit indicates whether the symbol is in a probable change state of the special symbol. Therefore, in the “low probability state of the special symbol” and the “normal state of the ordinary symbol”, the lower 2 bits are “00B”, and in the “low probability state of the special symbol” and the “time reduction state of the ordinary symbol”, Two bits are "01B", and in the "special symbol change state" and the "normal symbol time saving state", the lower two bits are "11B". The MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 can grasp the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10 on the audio ramp control device 113 side based on the data stored in the gaming status storage area 223i.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113.

  The RAM 223 further includes a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed, an elapse timer for measuring the production time, and the like. are doing. The command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 36) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process performs The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, displays a variation (variation) of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Direction) and a continuous announcement effect. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each of the NMI terminals of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 28).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model having a different special lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and a different number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce the cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to perform a system reset from the power supply unit 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231 a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided in a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. Instead, the character data is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a that can achieve a large capacity with a small area. Thereby, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in general, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is reduced particularly when random access is performed. For example, in a case where data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages is read, high-speed reading of data on the second and subsequent pages is possible, but an address is specified for reading data of the first page. It takes a long time from when the data is output. In addition, when data that is not continuous is read, a large amount of time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporarily storing various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at a high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to be described later to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240. The image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, The data is transferred to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as the images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. As described above, the control program and the fixed value data are provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on an address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory And outputs it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) occur during data writing, and a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes the data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs the data address translation of

  The ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, based on the erroneous data, Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, the bad data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b, and access to the bad data block is avoided. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even when the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of controlling access to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b operates for one page including data corresponding to the specified address (for example, 2 kilobytes). Is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or the NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. I do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one bank of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Accordingly, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or specifies the data from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is stored in the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the response in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first stores the program after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. After the system reset is released, the MPU 231 first executes the boot program. Thus, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, in a range of the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes)) are stored from the instructions. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set in accordance with the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and specifies the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is specified on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds one to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set from the NOR-type ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. , And reads the instruction code at the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234c and outputs it to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing the entire control program in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released from the NOR type ROM 234d in the boot program. Is stored for the following reason. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a requires a large amount of time from when an address is specified to when data is output in reading data of the first page, which is unique to the NAND flash memory. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a great amount of time from the reading to the setting to the buffer RAM 234c. Spend a lot of time waiting to receive the code. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions of the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. When the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  Now, the boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program is stored in a program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, one page capacity of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, and sets the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the setting, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is used. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 stores the instruction pointer 231a in the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined position in the program storage area 233a. The address is set.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, so that a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 include the remaining boot programs in the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The program is programmed so as to include the instruction pointer 231a with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thus, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Execute the remaining boot program included in the control program.

  In the remaining boot programs, all of the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. More specifically, an initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 39) executed after the boot process by the boot program (see S6001 in FIG. 39) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading a control program from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored, and for the remaining boot programs, Even when the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Can be.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 20) transmitted from the MPU 231 to be described later, and selects one of a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs this one-frame image drawing process and one-frame image display process for one frame of image display time on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment). In parallel.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects the V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 41B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing processing of the image for the next one frame, and executes the processing of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that a new image drawing is started during the image drawing, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in a frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in accordance with a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of an image is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, image data necessary for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory generally facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but has a lower read speed than other ROMs (such as a mask ROM and an EEPROM). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to be. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thereby, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data to be used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. The time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Particularly, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 are resident. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to perform drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image. It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of, and the time required for reading out the image data can be omitted. it can.

  Further, since the image data is also stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a constituted by a 132 kilobyte SRAM which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The image data transfer instruction issued by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating to which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and the beginning of the transfer destination (the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a in accordance with the various information of the transfer instruction, and temporarily stores the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction to the storage source end address is transferred.

  As a result, image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing processing. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

  Further, the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237. It is possible to easily determine a period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and to simplify the processing.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. The power-on main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. 235e, an error message image area 235f, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d.

  The power-on main image area 235a stores a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on to when all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. An area for storing corresponding data. The power-on fluctuation image area 235b indicates that the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance is provided. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on fluctuation image that displays a result of a lottery performed in the main control device 110 by a fluctuation effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 39).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 shows the power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the display control device 114 is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  The display controller 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a first and uses the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display control unit 114 receives the display change pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control unit 113 based on the change pattern command from the main control unit 110 which is the change start instruction command, the display control unit 114 starts the process shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 16 (c), on the display screen of the main image at power-on, a power-on fluctuation image of a symbol “○” is located at the lower right position toward the screen, and as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, a power-on variation image of an “X” symbol is alternately and repeatedly displayed during the variation period. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 are used to determine the lottery performed by the main control device 110. The result is judged, and when it is “special symbol jackpot”, the image shown in FIG. 16 (b) is displayed for a certain period after the fluctuation effect is stopped. The image shown is displayed for a certain period after the fluctuation effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs the main image to be drawn at power-on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall can check the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. In addition, the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the remaining images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are displayed. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary to wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped. Can be.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed for the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In addition, when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player starts the game, and a ball is detected at the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. In this case, the power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 16 (b) and (c) alternate. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  Also, at the stage when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When a ball is detected at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the main time image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variable effect is displayed on the third symbol. It can be displayed on the device 81 immediately.

  Returning to FIG. 15, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 17, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images will be described. FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram for explaining four types of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each of the back images. FIG. 17B shows a back surface A corresponding to the “sand beach stage”, and FIG. 17B shows a back surface B corresponding to the “deep sea stage”.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the character ROM 234 prepares an image that is longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the rear image corresponding to each of the rear surfaces A and B. The image controller 237 draws the image such that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

  The images prepared on each of the rear surfaces A and B (hereinafter, referred to as “scroll images”) are configured such that the rear images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and are images between the position c and the position d. Is displayed as a display area on the third symbol display device 81, and then an image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The back image is scrolled and displayed with a proper connection.

  When the change of the back type is determined and the stage is changed to the “sand beach stage” or the “deep sea stage”, the MPU 231 sets a position between the first position a and the position a ′ of the corresponding back image as an initial position of the display area. Then, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, as time passes, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the region reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display region is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

  Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 17A, the back surface A corresponding to the sandy beach stage which is the initial stage has the entire range of the back surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the positions a to d are the back surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often performed without changing the stage while the initial stage, "Sandy Beach Stage", is displayed. Therefore, the image data of the back surface A corresponding to the "Sandy Beach Stage" that is frequently displayed is displayed. By making them all resident in the back image area 235c, the number of times of data access to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 17B, the back surface B corresponding to the “deep sea stage” has only a part of the back surface, that is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b is resident. It is stored in the back image area 235c of the video RAM 235.

  Here, in order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data for all the rear images is resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from the position a to the position a '(or the range from FIG. 17A to FIG. 17B). ) And the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. 17A and 17B) is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, if the stage change is determined by the lottery at the start of the change, the character ROM 234 may be stored on the back of the resident video RAM 235. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial position of the back surface B can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, it is possible to display while changing the scrolling display or color over time. In addition, since only the image data corresponding to the image in the partial range is stored for the back surface B, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  After the image at the initial position is displayed, the rear surface B scrolls the range from position a to position b from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 during the operation. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from the position a to the position b using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b ′ to the position d is scrolled. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  On the rear surface B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the rear image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 15) of the normal video RAM 236. Thus, the rear image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the rear image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the rear image can be displayed reliably.

  On the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to the image corresponding to the image between the position b ′ and the position b. Data is stored redundantly. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scroll-displayed with a smooth connection to the third symbol display device 81. ing.

  Further, when the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so as to display the image between the position c and the position d as a display area on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data of the normal video RAM 236, The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed as a display area on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data of the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. I do. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c so as to flow leftward in a smooth connection.

  Returning to FIG. 15, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned nine types of main symbols (see FIG. 6 (b)) with numbers "1" to "9", which are the third symbols, are resident. You. Thus, when performing a fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 every time. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, A fluctuating effect can be started quickly. Therefore, even though the first symbol display device 37 starts the variable effect on the first symbol entrance device 64 or the second entrance port 640, the third symbol display device is started. In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the fluctuation effect is not immediately started.

  Also, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the main symbol without numbers “1” to “9” is also resident. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next fluctuation effect associated with the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one fluctuation effect. Can be Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Accordingly, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbol without a number from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "Youth" and "Women" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is resident in the character symbol area 235e. Accordingly, when changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but displays the character in the resident video RAM 235. By reading image data resident in the symbol area 235e in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the character pattern can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of the vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Also, when the occurrence of another error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to, when receiving the error command, display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error, from the viewpoint of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player from the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 determines the error message in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data necessary for drawing the subsequent image data among the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236. Then, it instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data specified by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. Thus, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing the image for one frame into the frame buffer. While the image is being developed, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame that has been previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. Then, by transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process of displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 simultaneously develops one frame of the image drawn in one frame buffer while developing the image. The image for one frame that has been developed first is read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame for displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81 are different from each other. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234 and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Be composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data determination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads out the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 , It is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table that describes display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in a second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after a system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from character ROM 234 to work RAM 233, and stored in data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114. By using 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, an opening effect A display data table corresponding to a round effect, an ending effect, and a demonstration effect is prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when the fluctuation effect is started, if the stop type of the fluctuation effect is out of range, a stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the fluctuation effect is one of the big hits A to F. In any case, the stop symbols indicating the respective jackpot types are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in the variable effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will be shifted to the special game state from now on, and the right specific winning opening 65a and the left specific winning opening 650a which are normally closed will be repeatedly opened. And the round effect is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special game state.

  Note that, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning prize is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one variable effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbol without numbers “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person related to the hall can recognize that the game is not performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. If there are 32 variation effect patterns to be set as the variation effect display data table for the variation effect, one table is prepared for each variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

  Here, the display data table will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is defined as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  In the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency, and the like are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, for drawing a sprite on the third symbol display device 81 is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying a sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 at which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying an enlargement factor for a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is enlarged and displayed in a size larger than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite is displayed. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for specifying a color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to a specified sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), And one light image For each sprite, drawing information for each sprite such as an effect that expresses insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters is defined. Note that one or more pieces of information on effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type is to display either back A or B corresponding to the stage (one of “sand beach stage” or “deep sea stage”) selected by the player, or a back different from back A or B. Information for specifying whether to display an image is described. In addition, in the case of specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A and B is to be displayed, the back type also includes information for specifying which back image is to be displayed.

  If it is specified by the back type that any of the back A or B is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back A and B as a drawing target, Further, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified that a back image different from the back surfaces A and B is to be displayed, the back image to be displayed is specified based on the back type.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back type is defined as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. Instead, the back type and the range of May be defined as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third symbol display device 81).

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and drawing of an image based on the display data table according to the rear type (or the third symbol display device 81). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. This is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating an address at which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of the information indicating the elapsed time.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers given to the respective third symbols. Rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and the offset information from the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is described in the symbol offset information from the start of the variation until a predetermined time has elapsed. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set in accordance with the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Provide information. Thus, the variable effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since each 3rd symbol is given a unique number, a variation symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect and a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110 are displayed in the 3rd symbol. , And the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols, whereby the third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

  In the symbol offset information, the predetermined time in which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed. It is set to be the time displayed. While the third symbol is being displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the stop effect of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the number of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made aware of the interruption of the continuity of the number. be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the head address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 18) of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of the process is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time the rendering process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and based on the rendering content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, An image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 20) described later is created. By transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is issued. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order specified in the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, and the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and the like. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

  Here, when a program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as in a conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. A large load is placed on the processing of starting and executing a complicated and enormous program, which may limit the processing capability of the display control device 114 and limit the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, a variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each of the rendering modes, a display data table buffer corresponding to the rendering mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display content cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the presentation mode. As described above, the display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, the display data table buffer is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and the drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, the resident one of the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table. The transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

  Note that if all image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thus, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and is transfer data information of image data of a sprite to be transferred at a time indicated by the address (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”). (Corresponding to addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 19). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (address “0002H” in FIG. 19 corresponds).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 where the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  Note that, as in the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address “0000H” of the transfer data table, and the last address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 19, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list described later (see FIG. 20) is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite at which the transfer is to be started at that time is obtained, and the transfer list is created in the drawing list in which the transfer data information is created. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 19, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, since null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the transfer data table is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays the display data in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110 or the like. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236. As described above, the transfer start timing can be instructed, so that even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c determines whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIGS. 16A to 16C on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. Is set to ON in the main processing (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 231 (see S6005 in FIG. 39). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image other than the power-on image. It is set to off (see S7705 in FIG. 51B).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 41B), and When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 41B) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 41B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 41 (b) (see S6309). On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 42 to 47) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 48 to 50) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S7601 in FIG. 51A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 51B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 52) for transferring image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. This is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, increments the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 20) described below, which describes the contents of an image drawing instruction for the image, is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, sends an image to the image controller 237 frame by frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 20) described below that describes the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e stores a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. The data is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the content by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f to the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. If this is the case (that is, if no Null data is described), the transfer data information is stored in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 20) that describes the contents of an image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw a predetermined sprite in accordance with the display data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. Is to be specified. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 at the same time that the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 41 (b) ), The pointer update process (see S7305 in FIG. 48) is performed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, 20 (see FIG. 20), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Accordingly, various effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing the image can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g stores an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. 237 is an area for storing a drawing list instructed by 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 20, a back image used for one frame image, ..., effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number design 1, reserved ball number design 2, ..., error) For each sprite such as a pattern, detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored. The image controller 237 obtains image data of the sprite from a memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to a scaling process according to a magnification ratio, a rotation process according to a rotation angle, and a translucent process according to a translucent value. Subject to alpha blending information, perform synthesis processing with other sprites, perform color tone correction processing according to color information, and perform filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to filter specification information. Then, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the rendered image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the rendering target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, Based on an image and a warning image notifying that an error has occurred, detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, in the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and the address of the data of the sprite (display object) correspond to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the content of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Also, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged from the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image of one frame, and obtains detailed drawing information for each sprite. (Detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, first, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described, and then, the third design (design 1, design 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes the drawing processing of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  Further, when the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transmits the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes the transfer data information, the image controller 237 reads the image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. The time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (see FIG. 41B Each time the display setting process of ()) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7307 of FIG. 48). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processings to be performed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i indicates that, for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is any.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “OFF” indicating that the storage states for all sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 231. Is In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprite to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprite is set to “off”.

  The MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite in which image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the transfer target sprite. It is determined whether or not the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7813 in FIG. 52). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S7814 in FIG. 52). The image controller 237 causes the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, since the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a “drawing target buffer”) that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). If the rendering target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the rendering target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is designated. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7902 in FIG. 53).

  Thus, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the rendered image information which has already been developed from a frame buffer different from the rendering target buffer in parallel with the rendering process, and sends the read image information to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated at the same time that the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done by Accordingly, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and the display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process (see S6306 in FIG. 41B) is executed.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

<Control process of main controller in first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process started upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer started periodically (at an interval of 2 ms in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process will be described, and then a start process will be described. And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switches are read (S101). That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (399 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (239 in this embodiment), the value is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are maximized (in this embodiment, When they reach 399, 99, 99, 239, respectively, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). A start winning process is executed in accordance with the winning (start winning) in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S105). The details of the special symbol change process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process accompanying the passing of the game ball in the through gate 67 is performed. Execute (S107). The details of the ordinary symbol change process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27. After the execution of the through gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a and fires the ball on condition that the hitting switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process for determining ON / OFF of the data. When the launch of the game ball is on, the main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the game ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (S104). This special symbol change process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and the special symbol (first symbol) change display performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device are performed. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed at 81.

  In the special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether the current time is in a jackpot waiting state or a special symbol jackpot (S201). Specifically, it is determined whether any of the incoming ball waiting flag 203j and the big hit flag 203m is on. If the result of determination is that the player is in the jackpot waiting state or the special symbol jackpot (S201: Yes), the present process ends.

  In the processing of S201, when it is determined that neither the jackpot standby state nor the special symbol jackpot is present (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202). If the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (S202: No), the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of times N2 of the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol) is changed. It is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S204). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the executed second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1001) of a later-described main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223c.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of S206, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. The data is shifted, and the process proceeds to S213.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S204: No), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (first The number of times the variable display is held based on the special symbol lottery N1) is acquired (S208), and it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S209). .

  In the process of S209, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S209: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S209 that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (that is, it is 1 or more) (S209: Yes), the first special symbol reserved ball number is set. The value (N1) of the counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S210), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S211). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1001) of a later-described main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223b.

  After setting the reserved ball count command by the processing of S211, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted by the same method as the processing of S207 (S212), and the processing proceeds to S213. Transition. In the process of S213 executed after the process of S207 or S212, a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S213), and this process is ended. The details of the special symbol change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), the change time counter for measuring the change time is updated (S214), and the updated change time counter is updated. It is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed based on the value (S215). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and the fluctuation time is determined. If has not elapsed (S215: No), the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S216), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S215, if the fluctuating time of the fluctuating display being executed has elapsed (S215: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S217). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol change start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol change start process (S213) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1. If the special symbol is a big hit, the special symbol is set according to the value of the first hit type counter C2. Any of the jackpots A to F is determined.

  In the present embodiment, when the big hit A occurs, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, when the big hit B is turned on, the red LED is turned on. When the jackpot D is turned on, the blue LED and the green LED are turned on. In this case, the blue LED, the red LED, and the green LED are turned on. If it is off, the blue LED and the red LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next change display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the change stops.

  After the process of S217 is completed, when the variation display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the special symbol variation start process (the current lottery result) is: It is determined whether it is a special symbol jackpot (S218). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S218: Yes), the probability change flag 203h is set to OFF, and the value of the time reduction counter 203i is reset to 0 (S219). Then, the entry standby flag 203j is set to ON, and a standby state command indicating the start of the jackpot standby state is set (S220), and the process shifts to S223. The standby state command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 30) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the standby state command, the sound lamp control device 113 issues a display standby state command for starting a standby state effect (see FIGS. 7A and 7B) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. This is set as a command to be output to the display control device 114. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, a standby state effect is started.

  On the other hand, in the process of S218, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S218: No), the value of the time reduction counter 203i is a value larger than 0 (that is, whether the symbol is in the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol). ) Is determined (S221), and when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203i is greater than 0 (S221: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203i is decremented by 1 (S222), and the process proceeds to S223. I do. On the other hand, in the process of S221, when it is determined that the value of the during-hours counter 203i is 0 (S221: No), the process of S222 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S223. Although illustration is omitted, when the value of the time saving counter 203i after the subtraction becomes 0 in the process of S222, the gaming state is changed from the time saving state of the ordinary symbol to the normal state of the ordinary symbol. Is set. The state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 30) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the status command, the sound ramp control device 113 acquires the game status included in the status command. Thereby, the state grasped by the sound lamp control device 113 can be made to coincide with the actual state of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the process of S223, a stop command indicating a stop type is set, and the process ends. The stop command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output in the external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 30) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the state command, the sound lamp control device 113 sets a stop symbol of the third symbol based on the stop type indicated by the stop command.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the special symbol change start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start process (S213). The special symbol change start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 22) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and includes the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and Based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a lottery (judgement) of “special symbol jackpot” or “special symbol loss” is performed, and the first symbol is determined. This is a process for determining an effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) of the fluctuation effect performed by the display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol change start process, first, the respective values of the first random number counter C1, first type counter C2, and stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area 203c are acquired (S301).

  Next, the probable change flag 203h is read, and it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change state of the special symbol (S302). In the process of S302, if the probable change flag 203h is on, it is determined that the special symbol is in the probable change state, and if the probable change flag 203h is off, it is determined that the special symbol is in the low probability state (not the probable change state). In the process of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol change state (S302: Yes), the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 and the special symbol for high probability are used. Based on the jackpot random number table, a lottery result of whether or not a special symbol is a jackpot is obtained (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with a first random number table for high probability (see 202a2 in FIG. 9B). As described above, 20 random numbers of “0 to 19” are set as the random numbers for the special symbol jackpot, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value of these wins. If so, it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot. When the special symbol lottery result is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol change state (the special symbol is in the low probability state) (S302: No), the first random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301. And a lottery result as to whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is acquired based on the value of and the first random number table for low probability (see 202a1 in FIG. 9B) (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with a special symbol big random number table for low probability. If the value of the first hit random number counter C1 matches the random number value (ie, “0, 1”) that is a hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. When the special symbol lottery result is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

  Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305), and when it is determined that the special symbol jackpot (S305: Yes), Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode at the time of the big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 10A) to determine what the big hit type is. I do. As described above, in the case of a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 4", it is determined that the jackpot is the jackpot A (8 rounds, the variable jackpot). It is determined that if it is in the range of "5 to 64", it is a jackpot B (5 rounds of probability change jackpot), and if it is in the range of "65 to 99", it is a jackpot C (5 rounds regular jackpot). The determination is made (see FIG. 10A). On the other hand, when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 4”, it is determined that the jackpot is the jackpot D (16 rounds, the variable jackpot), If it is in the range of "5 to 64", it is determined to be a jackpot E (10 rounds normal jackpot), and if it is in the range of "65 to 99", it is determined to be a jackpot F (10 rounds normal jackpot) ( FIG. 10A).

  In the process of S306, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined big hit type (big hit A to F). In order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit type on the third symbol display device 81, the big hit types (big hits A to F) are set as the stop types.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the big hit symbol until it stops. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 11A), and the variation pattern (corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1) is compared. Fluctuating time).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S305 that the special symbol has been removed (S305: No), a display mode at the time of removal is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the third symbol display is performed based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area 203c. The type of stop to be displayed in the device 81 is set to reach out of front / rear, reach other than front / rear out, or completely out of reach.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probable change state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the high probability stop type selection table. Then, the stop type is set. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete departure is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", reach other than departure before and after is set, and "98" , 99 ”, the out-of-order reach is set. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. I do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete departure is set, and if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “80 to 97”, reach other than departure is set. , 99 ”, the out-of-order reach is set.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of departure is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S307, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern table 202d, and the variation pattern (variation) corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is compared. Time).

  When the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is completed, next, a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern determined in the processing of S307 or S309 is set (S310). Next, a counter value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the current fluctuation pattern is set in the fluctuation time counter (S311). Then, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S306 or S308 is set (S312). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and are transmitted to the audio ramp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (see FIG. 30). When the processing of S312 ends, the process returns to the special symbol change processing (see FIG. 22).

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and determines whether or not there is a win (start win) in the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640. This is a process for executing a hold process of the values indicated by the various counters when a winning start is made.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. When it is determined that the game ball has won the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol is retained) is acquired. (S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203e is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  Then, whether the gaming ball has won the first entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if the gaming ball has won the first entrance 64, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e. If the value (N1) is not less than 4 (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the first special The value (N1) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball count command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1001) of a later-described main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223b.

  After setting the pending ball number command in the processing of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, first collision type counter C2, and fluctuation type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing are stored in the RAM 203. The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is stored in the first of the empty holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area) (S406), and the process proceeds to S407. In the process of S406, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  In the processing of S407, it is determined whether or not the gaming ball has won (starts winning) the second entrance 640 (S407). In this process, similarly to the process of S401, the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has won the second entrance 640 (S407: Yes), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times the variable display is retained in the special symbol N2) is acquired. (S408), it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S409).

  Then, whether or not there is a prize in the second entrance 640 (S407: No), or even if there is a prize in the second entrance 640, the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is changed. If it is determined that it is not less than 4 (that is, it is 4) (S409: No), the process proceeds to S413. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the second entrance 640 (S407: Yes) and the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S409: Yes), the second special One is added to the value (N2) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203f (S410). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f changed by the calculation is set (S411).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1001) of a later-described main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223c.

  After setting the pending ball number command by the processing of S411, the values of the first random number counter C1, first collision type counter C2, and fluctuation type counter CS1 updated in the processing of S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above are It is stored in the first area of the free reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (S412), and the process proceeds to S413. In the process of S412, similarly to the process of S406, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  In the process of S413, a pre-read process for pre-reading the success or failure is performed from various counter values acquired based on the winning start (S413), and this process ends. Details of the prefetching process will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the prefetching process (S413). In this pre-reading process (S413), first, it is determined whether or not a new ball entry to the first entry port 64 or the second entry port 640 has been detected in the current start winning process (see FIG. 24). (S501), if a new ball has not been detected (S501: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S501 that a new incoming ball has been detected (S501: Yes), then the number of reserved balls corresponding to the detected incoming ball is the upper limit value (ie, 4). It is determined whether or not the value is the upper limit (S502: Yes), and the process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S502, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is less than the upper limit value (S502: No), it is determined whether or not the timing of starting the variable display based on the incoming ball is a special symbol change state. Is determined (S503). In the process of S503, it is determined whether or not the game state is the probable change state according to the current game state and the result of the look-ahead of the reserved ball retained before the current ball entry. Specifically, if the jackpot is not included in the reserved ball, the current game state matches the timing of starting the fluctuation display based on the ball detected this time, so that the current game state is in a probable state. Is determined. In addition, when a jackpot is included in the reserved ball, the gaming state may be changed according to the type of the jackpot. Specifically, when the probability jackpot is suspended, the state shifts to the probability change state after the jackpot, and when the normal jackpot is suspended, the state transitions to the normal state after the jackpot. Taking these factors into consideration, it is determined whether or not the start timing of the variable display based on the ball that has been detected this time is in the positive change state.

  In the process of S503, when it is determined that the start of the variation based on the currently detected ball entry is the special symbol change state (S503: Yes), the type of the entrance that detected the ball entry and the high probability Based on the first random number table (see 202a2 in FIG. 9B), the lottery result based on the current ball entry is acquired (S504), and the process proceeds to S506. On the other hand, when it is determined that the start of the change is the low probability state of the special symbol (S503: No), the type of the entrance that has detected the entrance and the first random number table for the low probability state (FIG. 9) Based on (b) 202a1), a lottery result based on the current ball entry is acquired (S505), and the process proceeds to S506.

  In the processing of S506 executed after the processing of S504 or S505, a winning information command is set based on the type of the entrance that has detected the current ball entry and the lottery result obtained in the processing of S504 or S505. (S506), this process ends. The winning information command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 30) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the winning information command, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the type of the entrance notified by the winning information command and the lottery result in the winning information storage area 223a.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the ordinary symbol change process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol change processing (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and is performed by the second symbol display device 83 to display the variation of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) and the second entrance. This is a process for controlling the opening time and the like of the electric accessory 640a attached to the 640.

  In the ordinary symbol variation process (S106), first, it is determined whether or not the current moment is a winning of an ordinary symbol (second symbol) (S601). As the hit during the normal symbol (the second symbol), the control for opening and closing the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is performed while the display indicating the hit is made on the second symbol display device 83. In the middle of being included. If the result of the determination is that a normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is not hitting a normal symbol (second symbol) (S601: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (S602: No), the value of the ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203g (the number M of suspended display of the ordinary symbol in the ordinary symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203g is larger than 0 (S604). If the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203g is 0 (S604: S604). No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203g is not 0 (S604: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203g (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203d is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203d to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the ordinary symbol holding sphere storage area 203d is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in a time saving state (S608). As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, if the probable change flag 203h is on or the value of the time-saving medium counter 203i is 1 or more, it is determined that the time-saving state of the ordinary symbol is present. If the probable change flag 203h is off and the value of the time reduction counter 203i is 0, it is determined that the symbol is in the normal state.

  In the process of S608, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S608: Yes), the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S607 and the random number per normal symbol table for high probability On the basis of the result, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol is won is acquired (S609). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if the value is in the range of “0 to 4,205 to 239”, It is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (see 202c2 in FIG. 10B).

  In the process of S608, when it is determined that the time saving state of the ordinary symbol is not present (S608: No), the process proceeds to S610. In the process of S610, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S607 is Based on the random number table per common symbol for probability time, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol is won is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if the value is in the range of 0 to 4, 29 to 239 ”, It is determined that the symbol has been removed (see 202c1 in FIG. 10B).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S609 or S610 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S611). The display mode of the hit is set (S612). In the process of S612, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, a symbol "O" is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol), and the process proceeds to S614. . On the other hand, in the process of S611, when it is determined that it is not a hit of a normal symbol (it is a deviation of a normal symbol) (S611: No), a display mode at the time of deviation is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, it is set so that the symbol “x” is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol), and the process proceeds to S614. .

  In the processing of S614 executed after the processing of S612 or S613, it is determined whether or not the symbol is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol (whether the probability change flag 203h is on or the counter 203i during the time saving is 1 or more) (S614). If the symbol is in the time saving state (S614: Yes), the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S615), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time reduction state (that is, the probable change flag 203h is off and the value of the counter 203i during the time reduction is 0) (S614: No), the second symbol display device 83 The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display is set to 30 seconds (S616), and this processing ends.

  In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. Is determined (S617). Note that the fluctuation time here is a time set in advance by the processing of S615 or S616 before the fluctuation display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  In the processing of S617, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S617: No), the present processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S617, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S617: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S618). In the process of S618, the lottery of the normal symbol is a hit, and if the display mode is set by the process of S612, the symbol “○” as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lighting). Display). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S613, the “X” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S618, when the second symbol display updating process (see S1008) of the main process (see FIG. 30) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. After ending, the stopped symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S612 or S613.

  Next, when the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (the current lottery result) is a hit of the ordinary symbol. Is determined (S619). If the result of this lottery is a normal symbol hit (S619: Yes), then, whether the normal symbol is in the time reduction state (ie, whether the probability change flag 203h is on or the time reduction medium counter 203i is 1 or more) Is determined (S620), and if it is not during the time-saving state (S620: No), the opening time and the number of times of opening of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 are set to “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. After setting (S621), the process proceeds to S623. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S620 that the time of the ordinary symbol is reduced (S620: Yes), the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 are set to “1 second × "2 times" (S622), and the process proceeds to S623.

  In the processing of S623, the opening time and the opening / closing control start of the number of times of opening determined in the processing of S621 or S622 are set (S623), and this processing ends. When the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set to be started by the processing of S623, when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1006) of the main process (see FIG. 30) is executed next, the electric accessory 640a is opened. The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S621 or S622 end. On the other hand, in the process of S619, if the current lottery result is out of the ordinary symbol (S619: No), each process of S620 to S623 is skipped, and this process ends.

  Next, a through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 21), and it is determined whether or not the game ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, and the passage of the game ball is determined. If there is, this is a process for acquiring the value indicated by the second random number counter C4 and suspending it.

  In the through gate passage process, first, it is determined whether or not a game ball has passed the normal entrance 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the game ball at the normal entrance 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g (the number of times M of the variable display is held in the normal symbol) is acquired (S702). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203g is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  Whether the game ball has not passed through the normal entrance 67 (S701: No), or even if the game ball has passed through the normal entrance 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is 4 If it is not less than (S703: No), this processing is ended. On the other hand, if the game ball passes through the normal entrance 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203g is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number The value (M) of the counter 203g is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt processing is stored in the first one of the free reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203. (S705), and the process ends. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing (S801). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner by the payout and departure control device 111, and the power-off information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, a description will be given of a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (one second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) become operable. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S915. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905). If not, the RAM 203 is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off was not completed normally, the process also shifts to S915 in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also proceeds to S915 in such a case. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S1015 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S915, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S915). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game balls. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S916, S917).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed at the time of the start-up processing, the RAM initialization processing (S916, S917) is executed. Similarly, the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S916, S917) is executed also when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization processing (S916, S917), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S916), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S917). After the processing of S917 ends, the process moves to S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal (S904: Yes), S907: Yes), while keeping the data backed up in the RAM 203, the power-off occurrence information is cleared (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power cutoff is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 enters a state in which the payout control of the game balls can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the processing of S910, the effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. After the process of S910 is completed, the probability change flag 203h, the time reduction counter 203i, the incoming ball waiting flag 203j, and the big hit flag 203m are read out (S911), and the read probability variation flag 203h, the time reduction counter 203i, and the incoming ball waiting flag are read. 203j, a status command for notifying the gaming status indicated by the big hit flag 203m is set (S912). After the process of S912 is completed, the start of driving of the rotating body motor 670c is set (S913), an interrupt is permitted (S914), and the process proceeds to a main process described later. The setting for driving the rotating body motor 670c set in the process of S913 is not changed until the power is turned off. As a result, while the power is supplied to the gaming machine, the rotating member 670a can be continuously rotated at a constant speed. Therefore, in the jackpot waiting state, the player places the game ball at a timing at which the rotational position of the rotating member 670a is arranged so as not to hinder the flow (flying) of the game ball toward the operation winning opening 660 with respect to the player. Since it can be fired, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of firing the game ball with good timing. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the first embodiment, the rotating member 670a is configured to continue rotating at a constant speed while the game machine is powered on. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the jackpot standby state, the rotation position of the rotating member 670a may be configured to be variable between an arrangement that prevents the ball from entering the operation winning opening 660 and an arrangement that does not, for example, during the jackpot standby state. Only the rotation member 670a may be rotated at a constant speed, and the operation may be stopped in other states.

  In the first embodiment, the rotation speed of the rotating member 670a is configured to be constant. However, the rotation speed is not limited to this, and the rotation speed and the rotation direction are randomly or regularly changed. The configuration may be variable. By configuring in this manner, the difficulty level of causing the game ball to enter the operation winning opening 660 becomes higher. Therefore, when the game ball enters the operation winning opening 660 as intended, the player is more likely to enter. I can please you.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1008 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter updating process of S1011 and S1012 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), output data such as commands stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each of the sub-side control devices (peripheral devices). An external output process to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process in S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21) is determined. Send a prize ball command. In addition, a command for the number of retained balls set in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 22) and the start winning process (see FIG. 24) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Also, the winning information command set in the starting winning process is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, when the game state is changed, a state command for notifying the change of the game state is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a game ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormal signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, in the jackpot waiting state, the incoming ball to the activated winning opening 660 is monitored. If a ball is detected in the activated winning opening 660, a jackpot start process for starting a jackpot is executed (S1004). Details of the jackpot start process (S1004) will be described later with reference to FIG. When the process of S1004 is completed, the jackpot control for executing the jackpot effect and opening or closing the right specific winning opening 65a and the left specific winning opening 650a of the variable winning device 65 when the special symbol is in the jackpot state. The processing is executed (S1005). In the jackpot control process, the right specific winning opening 65a (opening / closing door 65f1) or the left specific winning opening 650a is opened for each round of the jackpot, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time has elapsed or whether a predetermined number of game balls have been won. I do. When any of these conditions is satisfied, the right specific winning opening 65a (opening / closing door 65f1) or the left specific winning opening 650a is closed. Here, in the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1005) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process. Details of the jackpot control process (S1005) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1005 ends, next, an electric auditors product opening / closing process for controlling the opening and closing of the electric auditors product 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is executed (S1006). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S623 in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 26), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S621 or the processing of S622 in the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 26) are completed.

  Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1007). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23), the variation display according to the variation pattern is performed by the first symbol display. Beginning at device 37. In the present embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED.If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And the red LED is turned on.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds. However, if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by one each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display updating process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23) is finished, the first symbol display device is updated. The variable display executed in 37 is ended, and the stopped symbol (first symbol) is displayed in the first symbol display in the display mode set by the process of S306 or the process of S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23). A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1008). In the second symbol display updating process, when the variation time of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is set by the process of S615 or the process of S616 of the ordinary symbol variation start process (see FIG. 26), the second symbol display device 83 is set. Starts the variable display. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the symbol “O” and the symbol “X” as the ordinary symbol (second symbol) are alternately lit. In the second symbol display updating process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S618 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 26), the process is executed by the second symbol display device 83. Is stopped, and the stopped symbol (the second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S612 or the process of S613 of the ordinary symbol variation start process (see FIG. 26). (Lit display).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009). If power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 sends a power failure signal. SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main process (S1010). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1010: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time (4 milliseconds) has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (S1010: No), until the predetermined time, that is, until the next main processing execution timing. Within the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1011 and S1012).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and are cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment). Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the update of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is executed by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1012).

  Here, the execution time of each processing of S1001 to S1008 changes according to the state of the game, so the remaining time until the next execution timing of the main processing is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4), and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In addition, in the process of S1009, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 28 has been executed, the processing at the time of power-off after S1013 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1013), and a power-off command indicating that the power is turned off is sent to another control device (a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113). (S1014). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1015), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1016), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  Note that the process of S1009 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1008 or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1011 and S1012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. The processing can be started from the processing of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the initialization process (see S901 in FIG. 29). By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1001. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without erroneous operation or runaway of main controller 110.

  Next, the details of the jackpot start process (S1004) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The jackpot start process (S1004) is, as described above, a process for monitoring the entry into the activated winning opening 660 and starting the jackpot when the entry is detected.

  In the big hit start process (see FIG. 31), first, it is determined whether or not the incoming ball waiting flag 203j is on (S1101). If it is determined that the incoming ball waiting flag 203j is off (S1101: No), Since this means that the current state is not the jackpot waiting state, this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1101 that the incoming ball waiting flag 203j is ON (S1101: Yes), it means that the current state is the jackpot waiting state. It is determined whether an incoming ball has been detected (S1102). In the process of S1102, when it is determined that the ball entry to the activated winning opening 660 has not been detected (S1102: No), the present process is terminated as it is not the start timing of the big hit. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1102 that a ball has been detected in the activated winning opening 660 (S1102: Yes), a jackpot start is set and the jackpot start flag 203k is turned on (S1103). ). Then, by setting the entry waiting flag 203j to off, the jackpot waiting state is ended (S1104), and the present processing is ended.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1005) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1005). The jackpot control process (S1005) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30). When the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot and a right specific winning opening are performed. This is a process for opening or closing the 65a and the left specific winning opening 650a.

  In the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start flag 203k is turned on (that is, whether the jackpot start is set) (S1201). In the process of S1201, when it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203k is ON (S1201: Yes), an opening command for notifying the start of the jackpot opening period is set (S1202). The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201, in the audio ramp control. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114. When a display opening command is received by the display control device 114, an opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. In the first embodiment, one round is started with almost no time lag after the opening period is set to 0.1 second and the entry of the game ball into the activated winning opening 660 is detected (the opening and closing door 65f1 is opened). Configuration). With this configuration, a game ball flowing down the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 can be made to enter the almost right specific winning opening 65a when the ball enters the activated winning opening 660. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the timing at which the player enters the game ball into the operation winning opening 660. After the processing of S1202, the big hit flag 203m is set to ON, and the big hit start flag 203k is set to OFF (S1203), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1201 that the big hit flag 203j is off (S1201: No), it is determined whether the big hit flag 203m is on (a special symbol big hit) (S1204). . In the process of S1204, if it is determined that the big hit flag 203m is off (not a special symbol big hit) (S1204: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1204, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203m is ON (S1204: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1205), and the start timing of the new round is determined. If it is (S1205: Yes), the opening of the specific winning opening corresponding to the number of rounds is set (S1206). More specifically, if this time is the start timing of the first round, the right specific winning opening 65a is set to the open state by opening the opening / closing door 65f1, and if not the first round, the left specific winning opening 650a is set. Set to open. When the processing of S1206 is completed, a round number command indicating a newly started round number is set (S1207), and the processing ends. The round number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used as an audio lamp in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When receiving the round number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1205, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1205: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (the right specific winning opening 65a or the left specific winning opening 650a) is satisfied. A determination is made (S1208). Specifically, if the current round period is one round, a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the right specific winning opening 65a, or a game is performed after opening the right specific winning opening 65a. When it is detected that two or more balls have won the right specific winning opening 65a, it is determined that the closing condition has been established. If the current time is a round period other than the first round, a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the left specific winning opening 650a, or after opening the left specific winning opening 650a. When it is detected that 10 or more game balls have won the left specific winning opening 650a, it is determined that the closing condition has been established.

  In the process of S1208, when it is determined that the closing condition of the specific winning opening (the right specific winning opening 65a or the left specific winning opening 650a) is satisfied (S1208: Yes), the specific winning opening set to the open state. The closing of the right specific winning opening 65a or the left specific winning opening 650a is set (S1209), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1208, when it is determined that the closing condition of the specific winning opening is not satisfied (S1208: No), it is determined whether it is the ending effect start timing (S1210). Specifically, when all rounds in the special game state in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual are completed, it is determined that it is time to start an ending effect.

  In the process of S1210, when it is determined that it is the timing to start the ending effect (S1210: Yes), the ending command is set (S1211), and the process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201, in the sound ramp control. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, an ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1210, if it is determined that it is not the timing to start the ending effect (S1210: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1212), and it is determined that it is not the timing to end the ending effect. If this has been done (S1212: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S1212, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1212: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a certain-variable jackpot (any of jackpots A, B, D, and E). It is determined (S1213).

  In the process of S1213, if it is determined that the jackpot is not a probability variable jackpot (ie, it is a normal jackpot) (S1213: No), 100 is overwritten on the value of the time reduction counter 203i, so that 100 times of the normal symbol after the jackpot is completed. It is set so that the time reduction period is given (S1214), and the process shifts to S1216. On the other hand, in the processing of S1213, when it is determined that the current jackpot is a probability change jackpot (S1213: Yes), the probability change flag 203h is turned on so that the probability change state of the special symbol is given after the end of the jackpot. Is set (S1215), and the process proceeds to S1216.

  In the processing of S1214 or the processing of S1216 executed after the processing of S1215, in the gaming state after the jackpot has been completed (special symbol change state and normal symbol time saving state, special symbol low probability state, special symbol low probability state, In addition, a status command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of whether the symbol is in a time saving state of a normal symbol) is set (S1216), the end of the big hit is set (S1217), and this processing is ended.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process started when the power is turned on, and a main process executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 33, a start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is ON, the current startup processing is caused by a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”), and the power-off processing in S4117 (see FIG. 34). ) Are determined to be started during execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 34, when receiving the power-off command from main controller 110 (see S4114 in FIG. 34), sound lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S4117. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S4117 is being performed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is OFF (S4002: No), this startup processing is started after the power supply is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure, and the power-off processing in S4117 is performed. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4003).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

  If the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off. ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the flow shifts to S4004. On the other hand, this startup process is started after an instantaneous power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process in S4117 is completed, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Is started, the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the process proceeds to S4008. .

  In the process of S4002, if the power-off process flag is on (S4002: Yes), the current startup process is performed after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off process of S4117, This is started by resetting the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, since control cannot be continued, the process proceeds to S4004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S4004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004), and it is determined whether or not each storage area of the RAM 223 is normal (S4005). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and read out for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of "55h", "0AAh", and "00h" after "0FFh". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  In the processing of S4005, if it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written to the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set ( (S4006), the process proceeds to S4008. By confirming the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S4005, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. . The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound may be output from the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. It may be.

  In the processing of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process is performed in S4117 (see S4117 in FIG. 34). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S4117 is executed, the process of S4008 in the state where the power-off flag is turned on is that the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after the occurrence of the power failure and in a state where the execution of the power-off process in S4117 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the audio ramp control device 113 (S4009), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010). The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

  After the processing of S4010, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 analyzes the notification contents of the state command set in the start-up processing (see FIG. 29) (S4011), and according to the analysis result, the gaming state storage area 223i. Is updated (S4012). Thereby, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately grasped from the time of power-on. After the processing in S4012, the interrupt permission is set (S4013), and the processing shifts to the main processing.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of step S4008 is reached in a state where the power-off flag is turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely shut off, for example, so that the process of steps S4004 to S4006 is performed via the process of S4008. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 has been reset only due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), the process of S4009, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the processes of S4010 to S4013 are executed, and the process proceeds to the main process.

  It should be noted that the reason why the clearing process in S4009 is skipped is that when the process proceeds from S4004 to S4006 via S4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S4004. If the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, thereby saving the sound lamp control device 113. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main processing was started or since the previous processing of S4101 was executed (S4101). If not (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S4112 without performing the processes in S4102 to S4111. In the process of S4101, it is determined whether or not 1 ms has elapsed. The process in S4102 to S4111 is mainly a process related to display (effect), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination processing in S4112 and the variable display setting processing in S4113 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S4112 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of a command transmitted from the main control device 110. By executing the process of S4113 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is Based on the above, it is possible to make settings relating to the variable effect without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S4103 to S4113 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S4102). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S4108 described later (S4103), and thereafter, the power-on notification processing is executed (S4104). The power-on notification processing is to provide notification that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is In addition, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S4105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S4105, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, a held number display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 has not been played by the player for a predetermined period of time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display updating process, a process of lighting a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is performed.

  After that, a frame button input monitoring / production process is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring / production process, an input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the production effect is monitored, and a case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is taken. This is a process for setting to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  When the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the fluctuation effect is not executed or during a high-speed fluctuation period, a process of changing the stage is performed, and a rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change in the rear image change command, the display controller 114 converts the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 into an image corresponding to the stage. Is performed. Also, when the notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, the frame button 22 is pressed to display the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation, or the frame button 22 is pressed during the reach effect to display the expectation of the jackpot. The effect may be changed to a holding effect, or the frame button 22 may be a decision button for selecting one of the plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the processing of S4107 is omitted.

  Upon completion of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing, lamp editing processing is executed (S4108), and then sound editing / output processing is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  When the process of S4109 ends, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S4110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management processing, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S4108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing in S4109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S4110 ends, next, an effect update process is executed (S4111), and the process proceeds to S4112. In the effect update process (S4111), the effect of the effect in the standby state executed in the jackpot standby state (the number of gauges in the chance meter CM (see FIGS. 7A and 7B)) is determined by the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f. Is performed in accordance with the detection result of. Details of the effect update processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S4112, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S4112). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. Then, after the command determination processing, the variable display setting processing is executed (S4113). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing in S4113 ends, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4114). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. In the process of S4114, if it is determined that the power-off occurrence information is stored (S4114: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are set to ON (S4116), and the power-off is performed. The processing is executed (S4117). After the execution of the power-off processing, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S4118), and thereafter, the processing is in an infinite loop. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. Further, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is also deleted.

  On the other hand, if the power-off information is not stored in the process of S4114 (S4114: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4115), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4115: No), the process returns to S4101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4115: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call the store clerk of the hall or the like and request the repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 has been destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the effect update process (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described in detail. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this effect update process (S4111). This effect update process (S4111) is a process for updating the effect mode in the standby effect as described above.

  In the effect update process (see FIG. 35), first, it is determined whether or not the standby state effect flag 223g is on (S4201). If it is determined that the standby state effect flag 223g is off (S4201: No), the current standby state effect is executed. Since it is not in the middle (there is no possibility of updating the effect mode), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4201 that the standby state effect flag 223g is on (S4201: Yes), the number of sensors whose output is H (high) among the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f is counted ( Counting) (S4202).

  When the process of S4202 ends, it is determined whether or not the count value (count value) obtained by the process of S4202 matches the counter value of the level counter 223h (S4203). As described above, the level counter 223h is a counter that indicates the number of gauges of the chance meter CM displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The gauge number of the chance meter CM is changed in conjunction with the number of sensors whose output is H (high) among the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f. Therefore, when it is determined in the process of S4203 that the count value of the level counter 223h is different from the count value in the process of S4202 (S4203: No), the number of game balls on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 has changed. This means that the display mode of the chance meter CM is different from the number of sensors whose output is H (high), so that the count value (count value) in the process of S4202 is overwritten by the value of the level counter 223g. Update (S4204). Then, the mode of the chance meter CM is updated to the mode of the gauge number corresponding to the value of the level counter 223g updated in the process of S4204 (S4205), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4203, when it is determined that the count value (count value) obtained by the process of S4202 matches the value of the level counter 223g (S4203: Yes), the current passage detection sensors 228a to 228f are determined. Since the output and the gauge number of the chance meter CM match, and it is not necessary to update the display mode of the chance meter CM (the effect mode of the standby state effect), each process of S4204 and S4205 is skipped and the process is skipped. This processing ends.

  By executing the effect update process (see FIG. 35), the mode of the chance meter CM can be updated in accordance with the number of game balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. Therefore, by referring to the mode of the chance meter CM, it is possible to cause the player to play a game while aiming for the game ball to enter the operation winning opening 660 while the number of gauges is larger. That is, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the timing at which the player should aim at the operation winning opening 660. Therefore, even a player who has little experience in playing the game with the pachinko machine 10 can easily intuitively understand the timing of aiming at the operation winning opening 660. Thereby, even the player who plays the game for the first time can easily play the game, so that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  In the first embodiment, during execution of the standby state effect, each time the effect update process (see FIG. 35) is executed, the output state of the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f and the output of the chance meter CM by the process of S4203. Although it is configured to determine whether there is any discrepancy with the gauge number (whether the mode of the chance meter CM should be updated), the frequency of updating the mode of the chance meter CM may be reduced. Specifically, for example, the configuration may be such that the process of S4203 is executed only once every 0.5 seconds during the execution of the standby state effect. With this configuration, the processing load on the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

  Next, the command determination process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S4112). This command determination processing (S4112) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. It is processing for.

  In the command determination process, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from main controller 110. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (S4301). In the process of S4301, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S4301: Yes), the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S4302), and the variation pattern type is determined from the received variation pattern command. Is extracted (S4303), and this process ends. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variation display setting process (see FIG. 38) is executed. It is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display controller 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4301 that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S4301: No), then it is determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4304). When the stop type command is received (S4304: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4305), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S4306). The process ends. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 38) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4304 that the stop type command has not been received (S4304: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball count command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4307). . Then, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has been received (S4307: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball number command, that is, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110 is provided. (The number of times N1 of the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol) or the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times N2 of the variable display based on the second special symbol is retained) is extracted. Is stored in the first special symbol retaining ball number counter 223b or the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 (S4308). In the process of S4308, a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball count counter 223c is set. . After the processing of S4308 ends, this processing ends.

  Here, the reserved ball number command is sent to the main controller 110 when a game ball wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, or when a special symbol is drawn. Is transmitted from the first special symbol holding ball counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 by the processing of S4308 each time a start winning is detected or every time a special symbol is drawn. The value of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 223c can be adjusted to the value of the first special symbol retaining ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110 and the value of the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 203f. Accordingly, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the first special symbol holding ball number counter of the main control device 110 by the influence of noise or the like. 203e and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 and the second The value of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 223c can be corrected to match the value of the first special symbol retaining ball number counter 203e and the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 203f of the main controller 110. When the process of S4308 is executed, the display reserved ball for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. Several commands are set. As a result, the display control device 114 displays the number-of-reserved-balls symbol corresponding to the number of retained balls on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S4307, if it is determined that the pending ball number command has not been received (S4307: No), then it is determined whether or not a status command has been received from main controller 110 (S4309). If it is determined that the status command has been received (S4309: Yes), the data in the gaming status storage area 223i is updated according to the received command (S4310). That is, based on the information according to the game state notified by the state command, when the certain symbol change state and the normal symbol time-saving state are notified, the lower two bits of the game state storage area 223i are set to “11B”. When the low probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the ordinary symbol are notified, the lower 2 bits of the gaming state storage area 223i are set to “01B”, and the low probability state of the special symbol and When the normal state of the normal symbol is notified, the lower two bits of the gaming state storage area 223i are set to "00B". Thereby, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the sound lamp control device 113 can easily grasp the change.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4309 that the status command has not been received (S4309: No), then it is determined whether or not a winning information command has been received (S4311). In the processing of S4311, if it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S4311: Yes), the information notified by the received winning information command (the type of the entrance where a new starting winning is detected, and the lottery result are displayed). Is stored in the storage area corresponding to the winning information storage area 223a (S4312), and the process ends.

  In the process of S4311, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S4311: No), then, a command related to winning (any one of a standby state command, an opening command, a round number command, and an ending command) is transmitted. It is determined whether or not it has been received (S4313). If it is determined that the command related to the hit has been received (S4313: Yes), a hit-related process for executing control corresponding to the type of the command related to the hit is executed (S4314). The process ends. Details of the hit-related processing (S4314) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4313, when it is determined that the command related to the jackpot has not been received (S4313: No), a process according to another command is executed (S4315), and this process ends. In the process of S4315, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the other command is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is executed. Is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the hit-related processing (S4314) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the hit-related processing (S4314).

  In the hit-related process, first, it is determined whether a standby state command has been received (S4401), and if a standby state command has been received (S4401: Yes), a display standby state for starting a standby state effect. A command is set (S4402). The display standby state command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When receiving the display standby state command, the display control device 114 starts a standby state effect for notifying the third symbol display device 81 of the jackpot standby state. When the process in S4402 ends, the standby state effect flag 223g is set to ON to indicate that the standby state effect is being executed (S4403), and the present process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4401, if it is determined that the standby state command has not been received (S4401: No), it is next determined whether an opening command has been received (S4404) and the opening command has been received. If (S4404: Yes), a display opening command for starting the opening effect is set (S4405), and the end of the standby state effect is set by turning off the standby state effect flag 223g (S4406). The process ends. The display opening command set in the process of S4405 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 221. , To the display control device 114. When receiving the opening command for display, the display control device 114 starts an opening effect for notifying the start of the jackpot in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4404 that the opening command has not been received (S4404: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4407). When it is determined that the round number command has been received (S4407: Yes), the number of rounds is extracted from the received round number command, and a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is set (S4408). ). The display round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect. After the process in S4408, the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4407 that the number-of-rounds command has not been received (S4407: No), then it is determined whether an ending command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4409). If it is determined that the ending command has been received (S4409: Yes), a display ending command for starting an ending effect is set (S4410), and the process ends. The display opening command set in the process of S4410 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 221. , To the display control device 114. Upon receiving the opening command for display, the display control device 114 starts an ending effect for notifying the end of the jackpot in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4409, when it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S4409: No), the process ends as it is. By executing the hit-related processing (see FIG. 37), appropriate control can be executed according to various commands related to the hit.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S4113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S4113). This variable display setting process (S4113) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. A variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S4501). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S4501: No), it means that the variation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, and the process proceeds to S4506. Transition. On the other hand, in the process of S4501, if it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is on (S4501: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned off (S4502), and then S4303 of the command determination process (see FIG. 36). In the processing of (1), the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S4503).

  Then, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the acquired variation pattern type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S4504). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S4505), and the process proceeds to S4506. In the process of S4505, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a toward the execution area is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area, and so on.

  In the process of S4506, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is ON (S4506). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S4506: No), the stop type command is not received from the main control device 110, so that the variable display is performed. The setting process (see FIG. 38) ends, and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S4506: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is set to off (S4507), and then the process of S4306 of the command determination process (see FIG. 36) , The stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S4508). Next, a display stop type command is set based on the stop type acquired in the process of S4508 (S4509), and this process ends. The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command and controls the third symbol display device 81 to perform the stop display of the third symbol in the stop type indicated by the display stop type command. Is done.

<Regarding the control processing of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly classified into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interruption processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and a one-frame processing performed by the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed simultaneously, the command reception processing is executed with priority. Thus, the V interrupt processing can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the main processing. The main process is to execute an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  The activation of the main processing is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the power is supplied from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” by the hardware configuration, and , The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When detecting that the address designated to the bus line 240 is “0000H”, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main processing by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting execution of the processing corresponding to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great deal of time is required from the reading to the setting to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program, which are to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, are stored in the NOR flash memory 234d. Is a memory from which data can be read at a high speed, and when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the first ROM of the NOR flash memory 234d. The boot program stored in the program storage area 234d1 can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, a boot process executed by a boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is set to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Start

  Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine but stored in the third symbol display device 81. The image data to be displayed is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the reading speed of the NAND flash memory 234a is low especially when random access is performed. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot processing, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table The processing of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operation of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, after the system reset is released, a boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c is set. Then, of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of the control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

  Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute a process for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S6102, the instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs not yet transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S6103). Specifically, the control program and a part of the fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. The data is transferred to the storage area 233b.

  After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 39) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power-up initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 39) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot process is completed.

  By executing the boot process (S6001) in this manner, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high readout speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect unit.

  On the other hand, the entire boot program is not stored in the NOR flash memory 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored. Even when the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR flash memory 234d having an extremely small capacity, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 40, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although the configuration is not limited to this, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S6102. It may be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and furthermore, sets the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer. 231a may be executed. Then, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  The boot program transferred by the process of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently transfers the part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount. Processing for setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S6101. After repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S6102, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. By using the boot program, the data can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed first by the MPU 231 at the time of system reset release is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. As a result, the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a becomes unnecessary, and the number of times of transferring the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started more quickly.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, the initialization process is performed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and an initial value is set for each flag. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after performing the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, first, an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thus, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can check whether or not an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, information of the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 transmits the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 to the main address at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving the transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the end of the transfer in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. You may write it. The MPU 231 reads out the information in the register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects that the image controller 237 has written the transfer end information, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. You may do so.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S6003, the power-on fluctuation image Is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to the image data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). The transfer instruction includes a start address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, a data size of the image data, information of a transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, and the image controller reads the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transmission instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the processing of S6004, the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 51A) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to perform the transfer is executed (see S7602 in FIG. 51A).

  Also, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It is kept on until it ends. Thereby, in the meantime, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 41 (b)), the simple command such that the power-on image (power-on main image or power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 16 is drawn. A determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 41B) and a simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 41B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a as the character ROM 234, all image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third video RAM 235. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall operates at the time of turning on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player stays in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on, the power-on main image is displayed in the third symbol. Since the player starts the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball (start winning prize) in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, and the start instruction of the variable effect is issued. When the main control unit 110 receives the display fluctuation pattern command via the audio lamp control unit 113, that is, when the display fluctuation pattern command is received, the power-on fluctuation image is immediately displayed during the fluctuation effect period, and the simple fluctuation is performed. You can make a production. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Is constituted by a NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, and it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on also becomes long. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Immediately after, for example, while the main image is being displayed at the time of power-on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing in S6005, interruption permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interruption permission is set by the processing of S6006, the command interruption processing and the V interruption processing are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interruption signal.

  Next, a command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41A is a flowchart showing the command interruption processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interruption process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are read out by a command determination processing or a simple command determination processing of a V interrupt processing described later, and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41B, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 41B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of the V interrupt processing is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal generated every 20 milliseconds in the image controller 237 when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed, and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that a new image drawing is started during the image drawing, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in a frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in accordance with a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then, details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 41B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. A command determination process (S6302) is executed to display the image on the display device 81, and then a display setting process (S6303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S6302), the contents of the command from the audio ramp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interruption process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the display data table for demonstration or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds at which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main controller 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the type of fluctuation effect and the type of stop selected by the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image according to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S6303), an image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) and the like. Specify the contents of In addition, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in accordance with a processing situation or the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is formed based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). The type of sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, when the rear image change command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is transmitted to the image controller 237. Is set to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing processing, the type of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting processing (S6305) are used. 20. The drawing list shown in FIG. 20 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list (S6306). The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an update process of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A to F, reach out of front and rear, reach other than front and rear out, reach out completely) is supported. The stop type table to be executed is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the flow shifts to the process of S6304.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 42 to 47, details of the above-described command determination processing (S6302), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 42, first, it is determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401). If there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command determination processing ends, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402). The type of each unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S6403).

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), a variation pattern command process is executed (S6405), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the variation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 43A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing (S6405). The fluctuation pattern command processing (S6405) executes processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the fluctuation in the main controller 110 is always made at least several seconds apart, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, part of the command changes due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is incorrectly displayed. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of step S6501, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is prepared for such a case. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, and there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, in fact, the fluctuation display data table longer than the set display data table is set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 returns to the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. You can keep watching the fluctuations of the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing the variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6504, the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501 is updated while updating the pointer 233f. , The drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 is specified. At the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S6502. The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the variable ROM display data table, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 from the normal video R. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect specified in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S6503, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S6404, when it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a display stop type command (S6406: Yes), stop type command processing is performed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. The stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (any of jackpots A to F, reach out of front and rear, reach other than front and rear out, complete out) indicated by the stop type command for display. Is determined (S6601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 41B) is executed. The stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on 81 is finally set (S6602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned on. (S6603), and returns to the command determination process.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602. In the above-described task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S6603, and the specified stop is determined. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information obtained by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  In addition, since the main control device 110 always determines the start of the change at a distance of several seconds or more, the main control device 110 does not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is erroneously stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S6601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, the stop type is assumed to be completely out of order and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. Thereby, a stop symbol corresponding to complete departure is set by the processing of S6602.

  If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if it is actually "missing the special symbol". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, and the player misunderstands that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol big hit", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection is set, and in fact, if the “special symbol jackpot” is reached, the stop of the complete disconnection is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Even if a symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "special symbol jackpot", so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 42, the description will be continued. In the process of S6406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display standby command among unprocessed commands (S6408). If there is a display standby state command (S6408: Yes), a standby state command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the standby state command processing (S6409) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the standby state command processing. This standby state command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the standby state command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the standby state command processing, first, the display data table for standby state effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Thereafter, the transfer data table corresponding to the standby state effect display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set standby state effect display data table. (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S6705), the standby state command ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 42, the description will be continued. In the process of S6408, if it is determined that there is no standby command (S6408: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6410), and the display opening is performed. If there is a command (S6410: Yes), an opening command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the opening command processing (S6411) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 45A is a flowchart showing an opening command process. The opening command process executes a process corresponding to the opening command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the opening command processing, first, an opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6801). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6802), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S6803). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6804). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S6805), the opening command ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 42, the description will be continued. In the process of S6410, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether there is a display round number command among unprocessed commands (S6412), and the display is performed. If there is a round number command for use (S6412: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the round number command processing (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. The round number command process executes a process corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S6901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6902).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, the time data representing the presentation time is set in the time counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6904). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S6905), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 42, the description will be continued. In the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not an unprocessed command includes a display ending command (S6414). If there is an ending command for use (S6414: Yes), ending command processing is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the ending command processing (S6415) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. The ending command process executes a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the ending command process, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read. It is set in the buffer 233d (S7001). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7002).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing in S7001, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S7003), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7003). S7004). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S7005), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 42, the description will be continued. In the process of S6414, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6414: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6416). If there is a change command (S6416: Yes), a back image change command process is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S6417) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47A is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. The rear image change command process executes a process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the rear image change command processing, first, the rear image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S7603) of the rear image change associated with the reception of the rear image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). . Then, among the bits of the back image discrimination flag provided for each back image type (back A, B), the bit corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is set to ON, and other bits are set. The bit corresponding to the rear image type is set to off (S7102), the rear image change command process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set in the process of S7101 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is identified from the rear image determination flag set in the process of S7102. .

  In the task processing (S6304), if it is specified to display either the back A or B according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set in S7102 From the RAM, the type of the rear image to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and the RAM storing the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image is stored. The type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for less than 20 milliseconds, the player does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, there should be no case where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the effects of noise or the like, and another command erroneously changes the rear image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7102, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, one arbitrary back image change command may be extracted, and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S6416, when it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S6416: No), it is then determined whether or not there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S6418). If (S6418: Yes), an error command process is executed (S6419), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S6419) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47B is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process executes a process corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7201). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S7202). The process ends, and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process (S6303), when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7201, the type of error that occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S7202, and the error is determined. The process is executed so that a warning image corresponding to the type is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S7202, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a person related to the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence state of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S6418, when it is determined that there is no error command (S6418: No), a process corresponding to another unprocessed command is executed (S6420), and the process returns to S6401.

  In the processing of S6401 executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes) ), And execute the processing of S6402 to S6420 again. Until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, the processing of S6401 to S6420 is repeatedly executed. If it is determined in the processing of S6401 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is performed. The process ends.

  The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 41B) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary for displaying the image at power-on, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. After extracting and executing the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 43 (a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 43 (b)) which are the processing corresponding to each command, A process for discarding the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 43A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on fluctuation image is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S6501. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image which are set and necessary in this case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, a process of writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, details of the above-described display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 48, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7301). If the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7301: No) ), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and the processing of S7302 to S7304 is skipped, and the flow shifts to the processing of S7305. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7301: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination process, the new command flag is set to off (S7302), and then S7303 to S7304. The processing corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S7303, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S7303). If the error occurrence flag is on (S7303: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S7304).

  Here, the warning image setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all error determinations for which ON is set are performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S7401).

  In the task processing (S6304), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and the like are specified for each sprite. Various parameters required for drawing are determined.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S7401, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S7304) or in the process of S7303, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7303: No), the process proceeds to S7305.

  In S7305, a pointer update process is performed (S7305). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to be set.

  In this pointer update processing, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7501). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in principle so that it is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt processing is executed. As described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the value stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer updating process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S7501, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is determined whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S7502). As a result, if it is End information (S7502: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7503). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S7503: Yes), the display data table is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S7504), and the flow shifts to the process of S7507.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7503 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S7503: No), the display data table is in the standby state effect display data table. Is determined (S7505), and if the display data table is for a standby state effect (S7505: Yes), the display time is set to the effect time of the standby state effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. The corresponding time data is set in the time counter 233h (S7506), and the flow shifts to the process of S7507.

  In the process of S7507, the pointer 233f is set to 1 for initialization (S7507), the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. Thus, in the display setting process, the drawing content can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7505 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the standby state effect display data table (S7505: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by one. (S7508), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. Accordingly, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address immediately before the End information is described. Is always developed, so that the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7502, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7502: No), the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 48, the description will be continued. After the pointer update processing, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing is acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7306). In the task processing (S6304), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S7306, together with the previously expanded warning image and the like. Various parameters required for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined.

  Next, the value of the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7307), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7308). Then, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S7308: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S7308: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the confirmed display flag is on. (S7309).

  As a result, if the confirmed display flag is OFF (S7309: No), the effect of the confirmed display has not been performed yet, and it is the timing to perform the effect of the confirmed display. First, the confirmed display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S7310), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7311). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the confirmed display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7312), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7313). Then, after the confirmed display flag indicating that the confirmed display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7314), the contents of the stopped symbol determination flag are directly copied to the previous stopped symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7315), and returns to the V interrupt processing.

  Thus, in the case where the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the confirmed display data table, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Compared with the case where the display contents are changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, so that no great load is applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The previously stopped symbol discrimination flag set by the process of S7315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before. In the variable display data table, the change based on the data table is not changed. Until a predetermined time elapses from the start, symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S6304), the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set in S7315 until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, and A third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stopped symbol. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S7309, if the confirmed display flag is on (S7309: Yes), it is determined whether the demonstration display flag is on (S7316). If the demonstration display flag is off (S7316: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the finalized display effect, and a certain time has elapsed since the end of the finalized display effect. Thereafter, processing for displaying the demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

  First, the display data table for demonstration is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7317), and the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7318). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7320), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7321), and the process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , The content of the drawing can be set.

  In the process of S7316, if the demonstration display flag is on (S7316: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect ends, and this means that the demonstration effect has ended, and the display setting process ends as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, as described above, various settings are performed by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process so that the demonstration effect is started again. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the same processing as the display setting processing is also performed in the simple display setting processing (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 41B). However, in the simple display setting process, after the production time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on fluctuation image ends, a predetermined time, one of the power-on fluctuation images according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command. A process of setting a display data table defining that the image is stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 51A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7601: Yes), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S7602), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S7601, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S7601: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. The data has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7603), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7602), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S7602).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been issued to the image controller 237 (S7701). If the transfer instruction has been transmitted (S7701: Yes) ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S7702). In the process of step S7702, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S7702 (S7702: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7702: Yes), the flow shifts to the process of S7703. Also, as a result of the process of S7701, if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7701: No), the process proceeds to S7703.

  In the process of S7703, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7703). A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the resident object image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7704), and the process ends.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer data described in the drawing list. The resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the data information. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the transfer is performed here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the read image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores the image data in the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. At the specified address of the resident video RAM 235. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the processing in S7703, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S7703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7705), and this processing ends. Thus, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 41B), the command is not used in the simple command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 41B) and the simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 41B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 42 to 47) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 48 to 50) are executed, the drawing of the normal image is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 52) (see S7601: No in FIG. 51A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all the resident operations to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be retained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 during power-on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. Can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. After the display is determined by, for example, the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed at an arbitrary timing by the player can be performed. In addition, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S7603), which is one process of the transfer setting process (see FIG. 51A, S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S7603).

  In the normal image transfer setting process, first, the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e is updated by the pointer update process (S7305) of the previously executed display setting process (see S6303 in FIG. 48). The information described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is acquired (S7801). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7802). If the obtained information is transfer data information (S7802: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data is determined from the transfer data information. (The storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( (S7803) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S7804), and the flow shifts to the processing of S7805.

  If the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S7802: No) in step S7802, the process skips steps S7803 and S7804 and shifts to step S7805. In the process of S7805, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S7805), and the transfer instruction is set. If the transfer has been performed (S7805: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S7806).

  In the process of S7806, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237 and receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S7806 (S7806: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7806: Yes), the process proceeds to S7807. Also, as a result of the processing in S7805, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer processing is completed (S7805: No), the processing shifts to S7807.

  In the process of S7807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7807). If the transfer start flag is on (S7807: Yes), there is image data to be transferred. Is turned off (S7808), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S7803 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the process proceeds to S7813. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7807: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S7809). If the back image change flag is not on but off (S7809: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S7809: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S7810), the back image provided for each back image type is set. Among the determination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S7811). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state, and the transfer destination (normal) The start address of the video RAM 236) is obtained (S7812), and the process moves to S7813.

  In the process of S7813, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7813). The determination in the process of S7813 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite set as the transfer target image data is read out from the storage image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video data. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is “off”, it is determined that the image data of the transfer target sprite is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  As a result of the processing in S7813, if the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7813: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S7813, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7813: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S7814). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing in S7814, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S7815), and the normal image transfer setting processing ends. As described above, the storage image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite in the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is performed by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, a process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and as a result, the process is indicated by the display stop type command. When it is determined that the stop type information is the jackpot stop type, image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. If the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the back image of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the back image is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process, and sends the image data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be.

  Here, by the time the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, and thus, the predetermined data is specified in accordance with the display data table. When rendering a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is necessary for rendering the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, details of the above-described drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this drawing processing.

  In the drawing processing, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information A drawing list (see FIG. 20) is generated from the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S6305) (S7901). That is, in the process of S7901, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of the various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304). The parameters required for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprite to be arranged on the rear side from the sprite to be arranged on the front side in the image of one frame, and details of the sprites are arranged in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement. The drawing list is generated by describing the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as detailed drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the leading address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7902). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information indicating that the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b is expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and expands the images by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  When the drawing list includes transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) is extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address is sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information, and stores the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to This allows the third symbol display device 81 to display the image developed in the frame buffer. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are simultaneously performed in parallel. be able to.

  After the processing of S7902, the drawing processing updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j (S7903). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to “1” when the value is “0” and by setting it to “0” when it is “1”. Done. Accordingly, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 41B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 ms after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the minute is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately designating, one frame of image display processing can be performed continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while one frame of image rendering processing is performed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the opening and closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 in which a prize ball is paid out when a game ball enters during a big hit is closed, and the right specific winning opening 65a is closed. In a state where it is impossible to enter the game ball, the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 is configured such that the game ball can flow down. And the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 is configured so that the number of game balls exceeding the number of entering balls (that is, two) as the end condition of the first round can simultaneously flow down. In other words, between the time when one game ball reaches the upper surface of the door 65f1 and the time when it passes over the upper surface of the door 65f1, It is configured so that a larger number of game balls can reach the upper surface of the door 65f1. Thereby, at the timing when the first round is started (when the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened), as the number of game balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 increases, the game balls flowing down on the opening / closing door 65f1 are increased. By entering the ball from the opened door 65f1 to the right specific winning opening 65a, more prize balls can be obtained. Therefore, at the start timing of the first round of the jackpot, the player can play the game by paying attention to the number of the game balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1, thereby improving the interest of the player at the start of the first round. Can be done.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when a jackpot is won by a special symbol lottery, a jackpot is started when a game ball enters the activated winning opening 660. Thus, by adjusting the timing at which the game ball is fired toward the operation winning opening 660, the player can adjust the timing at which the first round of the jackpot is started, which is more advantageous for the player. It is possible to realize a game property in which the game balls enter the operation winning opening 660 aiming at the timing (that is, the timing at which more game balls pass through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1). Therefore, the amount of prize balls (privileges) that can be obtained by the player during the predetermined period of the jackpot (until the end of one round) can be varied according to the skill of the player (the timing of aiming at the operation winning opening 660). The timing at which game balls enter the activated winning opening 660 can be made more serious. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

  Furthermore, in the first embodiment, in the jackpot waiting state between the time when the jackpot is determined and the time when the jackpot is started, the player may receive the game ball when the player enters the activated winning opening 660. It is configured such that an indication of the benefit (number of prize balls) that can be provided is suggested to the player by a presentation mode (the number of gauges of the chance meter CM). With this configuration, it is possible to more easily understand the timing at which the operation winning opening 660 should be aimed. Therefore, even a player who has little experience in playing a game with the pachinko machine 10 can realize easy-to-understand gaming properties, and can provide a gaming machine that is hardly shunned by the player. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment has a configuration in which three convex portions 65f1a to 65f1c are provided on the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 so that the game balls bypass the convex portions 65f1a to 65f1c. Although the passage period for passing through 65f1 is configured to be long, the invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to providing the convex portions 65f1a to 65f1c, the material of the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 is made to have a higher coefficient of friction than other portions (the surface of the game board 13 or the inner surface of the right variable winning device 65, etc.). May be made of a material having a large size (for example, an elastic body), or may be processed so that the game ball does not easily roll (for example, irregularities may be provided on the surface).

  In the first embodiment, the first round occurs when 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of the first round, or when two or more game balls entered the right specific winning opening 65a before the 30 seconds elapsed. Was terminated. In other words, the end condition is set so that if the right-handed game is performed, the upper limit number (two) of game balls is almost certainly made to enter the right specific winning opening 65a and the first round is completed. , But is not limited to this. For example, even if the player hits the right specific winning opening 65a right after the start of the first round, the first round may be completed in a period in which it is difficult to enter the game ball. . Specifically, for example, when 0.5 second has elapsed since the start of one round, or when 10 or more game balls have won the right specific winning opening 65a before 0.5 second has elapsed, one round is performed. The eye may be closed. In such a configuration, if no game ball is passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 at the timing when the game ball enters the operation winning port 660, no game ball enters the right specific winning port 65a. It is possible to provide a game with a high possibility that the first round will be completed without the ball being played. Therefore, a player who wants to obtain a prize ball in the first round hits the game ball toward the opening / closing door 65f1 before allowing the player to enter the activation winning opening 660 in the jackpot waiting state. It is possible to entertain the game of aiming at the operation winning opening 660 later. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game in the jackpot waiting state.

  In the first embodiment, in the jackpot waiting state, the guide of the number of game balls passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 is indicated by the gauge number of the chance meter CM, so that the game balls enter the operation winning opening 660. Although the configuration suggests the degree of advantage in the case of a ball, it is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the jackpot advantage degree is indicated by the gauge number of the chance meter CM. Specifically, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot type is indicated by the number of gauges of the chance meter CM, thereby indicating to the player the degree of advantage when a game ball is inserted into the activated winning opening 660. Further, for example, the number of rounds of the jackpot may be determined indefinitely when the jackpot is determined, and the number of rounds of the jackpot may be randomly selected at a timing when the jackpot is passed through the operation winning opening 660. The number of gauges indicates the number of rounds determined by a lottery executed when a game ball is thrown into the activated winning opening 660, thereby indicating that a game ball is thrown into the activated winning opening 660. It is good also as composition which suggests a degree of advantage to a player.

  In the first embodiment, the rotating member 670a is continuously rotated at a constant speed while the power is supplied to the gaming machine. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the jackpot standby state, the rotation position of the rotating member 670a may be configured to be variable between an arrangement that prevents the ball from entering the operation winning opening 660 and an arrangement that does not, for example, during the jackpot standby state. Only the rotation member 670a may be rotated at a constant speed, and the operation may be stopped in other states.

  In the first embodiment, the rotation speed of the rotating member 670a is configured to be constant. However, the rotation speed is not limited to this, and the rotation speed and the rotation direction can be changed randomly or regularly. It may be configured. By configuring in this manner, the difficulty level of causing the game ball to enter the operation winning opening 660 becomes higher. Therefore, when the game ball enters the operation winning opening 660 as intended, the player is more likely to enter. I can please you.

  In the first embodiment, a configuration in which the degree of advantage (the number of prize balls that can be acquired in the first round) is suggested when a jackpot is started by the standby state effect is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to the degree of advantage when the jackpot is started, an effect that indicates the advantage of the jackpot itself may be executed by a standby state effect. Specifically, for example, the game state after the big hit (whether or not the big change is a big hit) or an effect indicating the number of rounds may be executed. In addition, when an effect indicating the degree of advantage of the jackpot itself is executed, the effect need not be executed during the jackpot waiting state. For example, at the time of stop display of the third symbol, the type of the third symbol may indicate the degree of advantage of the jackpot itself during execution. In addition, the advantage degree of the jackpot itself may be suggested in an opening period, a round period, an ending period, and the like.

  In the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 of a type in which a big hit is won by a special symbol lottery and a big hit is started when a game ball enters the activated winning opening 660 has been described as an example. May be applied to the pachinko machine 10. For example, the present invention may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 in which a big hit is started when a game ball enters a specific area of the game board 13. That is, a pachinko machine 10 of a type not equipped with a function for performing a special symbol lottery itself (a so-called two-type) or a function for performing a special symbol lottery is provided, but the special symbol lottery result is Irrespective of this, the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine 10 of a type in which a big hit is started when a game ball enters a specific area (a so-called one-type and two-type mixed type). With this configuration, it is possible to vary the degree of advantage in the first round of the jackpot according to the number of game balls on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 at the time when the game balls enter the specific area.

<Second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, when a special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the game machine shifts to a jackpot waiting state, and during the jackpot waiting state, the game ball enters the activated winning opening 660. In the event that the jackpot is started. Further, the operation winning opening 660 is provided only at one place on the upper right side of the game board 13. In other words, in the jackpot waiting state, the jackpot is started, regardless of the jackpot type, unless the game ball is fired toward the upper right side of the game board 13 and the game ball is thrown into the operation winning opening 660. Was not configured.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the operation winning prize opening (right operation prize opening 661 and the left operation prize opening 662) on the upper right side and the lower left side of the gaming board 13 that trigger the start of the jackpot, respectively. And the winning prize opening that triggers the start of the jackpot differs according to the jackpot type. In addition, the left operation winning port 662 is configured such that, when the jackpot is in a standby state, a game ball enters almost automatically in a relatively short time (about 0.5 seconds). In other words, in the case of the jackpot type in which the left operation winning port 662 is a trigger for the start of the jackpot, the first round of the jackpot is started before the game ball reaches the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. . In other words, a jackpot type is provided in which the player cannot aim for an over-prize in the first round. As a result, it is possible to provide a jackpot type that can aim for an over-prize and a jackpot type that cannot aim for an over-prize. A difference can be provided.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in configuration in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 in the main control device 110 is different. , The configuration of the RAM 203 is partially changed, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the control executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed. The processing is partially changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the following. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 54, a right operation winning opening 661 through which a game ball can enter is provided on the upper right side of the game board 13 in a front view, instead of the operation winning opening 660 in the first embodiment. The right operation winning opening 661 is an operation winning that triggers the start of six types of jackpots A2, B2, D2, and F2 to H2 among the eight types of jackpots (jackpots A2 to H2) in the second embodiment. Mouth. The right operation winning opening 661 is used only when the jackpot is in the jackpot waiting state which is shifted when one of the above six types of jackpots (jackpots A2, B2, D2, F2 to H2) is obtained by a special symbol lottery. It is configured to be determined to be valid.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 54, a left-operation winning port 662 through which a game ball can enter is provided on the lower left side in front view of the first entrance port 64. The left operation winning opening 662 is an operation winning opening that triggers the start of two types of jackpots of the jackpots C2 and E2 among the eight jackpots (jackpots A2 to H2) in the second embodiment. That is, in the jackpot waiting state, which shifts when one of the jackpots C2 and E2 occurs in the special symbol lottery, the entry of the game ball is determined to be valid. As shown in FIG. 54, a storage device 675 is provided above the left operation winning opening 662 in a front view. This storage device 675 is configured to be able to store only one game ball that has flowed down from above vertically. The storage device 675 can receive and store the game balls that have entered the storage device 675 at the lower end of the flow path configured to have a width that allows one game ball to flow down (to prevent the game balls from flowing down). A variable storage valve 675a is provided between a possible closed position and an open position for discharging the game balls directly below the storage device 675 without obstructing the flow of the game balls into the storage device 675. I have.

  The storage valve 675a of the storage device 675 is changed to the open position when the jackpot standby state is set, and is changed to the closed position at the end of the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 54, since the left-operation winning port 662 is provided immediately below the storage device 675, when a gaming ball is stored in the storage device 675 and the jackpot standby state is reached, the storage valve 675a is activated. As a result of the release, the stored game balls flow down, and as a result, immediately after the jackpot waiting state (after about 0.5 seconds), the game balls enter the left operation winning opening 662. Here, at normal times (low probability state of special symbol and normal state of normal symbol), it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second entrance 640 (the electric accessory 640a is unlikely to be opened). Playing a game by aiming at the first entrance 64 by left-handing is the game method with the least loss for the player. When a game ball is fired aiming at the first ball entrance 64, the game ball also flows down toward the storage device 675 disposed on the lower left side of the first ball entrance 64. Thus, in a normal state, the game balls are almost stored in the storage device 675 before the big hit occurs. Therefore, when the jackpot is one of the jackpots C2 and E2 at the normal time, the jackpot is started almost immediately after the jackpot is in the standby state. For this reason, when the big hits are C2 and E2, the period of the big hit standby state is too short, and it is almost impossible to reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 during the big hit standby state. You will not be able to aim. For this reason, the possibility that the number of winnings in the first round of the jackpot is extremely low (two pieces) is extremely high, and as a result, the number of winning balls that can be obtained is disadvantageous compared to the other first round of the jackpot. Become.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, in the case of the jackpot types (jackpots A2, B2, D2, F2 to H2) in which the right operation winning opening 661 triggers the start of the jackpot, the first round is performed in the same manner as in the first embodiment. While it is possible to play a game with the gaming property of acquiring more prize balls for an over prize, on the other hand, in the big hit type (big hit C2, E2) in which the left-hand winning prize port 662 triggers the start of the big prize, over prize is almost completed. The jackpot was started shortly after aiming for. This makes it possible to make a difference in the degree of advantage in the first round of the jackpot according to the jackpot type, so that when a jackpot occurs, the player can be noticed by the jackpot type. Therefore, the interest of the player can be further improved. In the following, for the sake of simplicity, the jackpot type that is started upon entry of the ball into the right operation winning opening 661 is referred to as “right opportunity big hit” and is entered into the left operation winning opening 662. The jackpot type that is started with the ball as a trigger is referred to as “left trigger jackpot”.

<Electrical Configuration in Second Embodiment>
Next, the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The ROM 202 according to the second embodiment differs from the ROM 202 according to the first embodiment only in that the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b are partially changed. , Are the same as the first embodiment described above. Therefore, as the description of the ROM 202 in the second embodiment, only the details of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described.

  FIG. 55 is a diagram showing the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b specified in the ROM 202 according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 55, in the first hit type selection table 202b in the second embodiment, five types of big hit types (big hits A2 to E2) that can be determined in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol. And three types of jackpots (jackpots F2 to H2) that can be determined when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery.

  As the big hit of the first special symbol, “big hit A2” is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “0 to 4” (see 202b1 in FIG. 55). Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are five counter values that are "big hit A2", so "big hit A2" is determined when a big hit occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol. Is 5% (5/100). The "big hit A2" has eight rounds like the "big hit A" in the first embodiment, and a "special symbol change state" and a "normal pattern time saving state" are given after the end of the big hit. Jackpot type. The “big hit A2” is a type of right trigger big hit that is started when a ball is entered into the right operation winning port 661. For this reason, if it is possible to allow the game balls to enter the right-operation winning opening 660 in a state where more game balls reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 during the jackpot waiting state, the normal (one round is started) Prize balls can be obtained more than when the game ball is hit right), and the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the first round is likely to be more advantageous than in the case of a left trigger jackpot.

  As the big hit of the first special symbol, “big hit B2” is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “5 to 14” (see 202b2 in FIG. 55). Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are ten counter values that are "big hits B2". Therefore, if a big hit occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hits B2" is determined. Is 10% (10/100). The "big hit B2" has five rounds like the "big hit B" in the first embodiment, and a "special change state of a special symbol" and a "time saving state of a normal symbol" are given after the end of the big hit. Jackpot type. The "big hit B2" is a type of right trigger big hit that is started when a ball is entered into the right operation winning opening 661, like the "big hit A2". For this reason, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the first round is likely to be advantageous as compared with the left-hand-hit jackpot.

  As the big hit of the first special symbol, “big hit C2” is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “15 to 64” (see 202b3 in FIG. 55). Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the counter value of “big hit C2” is 50, so “big hit C2” is determined when a big hit occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol. Is 50% (50/100). The "big hit C2" has five rounds like the "big hit B" in the first embodiment, and a "special change state of a special symbol" and a "time saving state of a normal symbol" are given after the end of the big hit. Jackpot type. The “big hit C2” is a type of a left trigger big hit that is started when a ball is entered into the left operation winning port 662. For this reason, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the first round is likely to be disadvantageous compared to the right opportunity big hit.

  As the big hit of the first special symbol, “big hit D2” is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “65 to 74” (see 202b4 in FIG. 55). Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are ten counter values that are "big hit D2", so "big hit D2" is determined when a big hit occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol. Is 10% (10/100). The "big hit D2" has five rounds like the "big hit C" in the first embodiment, and a "low probability state of special symbol" and a "time saving state of ordinary symbol" are given after the end of the big hit. Jackpot type. The “big hit D2” is a type of right opportunity big hit that is started when a ball is entered into the right operation winning opening 661. For this reason, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the first round is likely to be advantageous as compared with the left-hand-hit jackpot.

  As the big hit of the first special symbol, “big hit E2” is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “75 to 99” (see 202b5 in FIG. 55). Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are 25 counter values that are "big hit E2", so "big hit E2" is determined when a big hit occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol. Is 25% (25/100). The "big hit E2" has five rounds like the "big hit C" in the first embodiment, and a "low probability state of special symbol" and a "time saving state of ordinary symbol" are given after the end of the big hit. The type of jackpot to be performed. The “big hit E2” is a type of a left trigger big hit that is started when the ball enters the left operation winning port 662. For this reason, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the first round is likely to be disadvantageous compared to the right opportunity big hit.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, a right chance jackpot (any of jackpots A2, B2, and D2) is obtained at a rate of 25%, and a rate of 75% To be a left-handed jackpot (either the jackpot C2 or E2). That is, it is possible to play the game with the gaming property of aiming at the right operation winning opening 661 in a timely manner after more game balls reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 during the jackpot waiting state. It is 25% of the case where the jackpot is won by lottery. Most (75%) are jackpots in which the jackpot starts immediately (in about 0.5 seconds) after the jackpot is in the standby state. Can make you more pleased.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 55, the jackpot of the second special symbol is constituted only by the right opportunity jackpot. Therefore, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, the big hit is always started when the game ball enters the right operation winning opening 661. With such a configuration, the lottery of the second special symbol is basically executed during the “normal time saving state of the ordinary symbol”, and the player continuously hits the game ball by right-handing. This is because it is during firing, and it is highly possible that no game balls are stored in the storage device 675 at the start of the jackpot waiting state. In other words, even if the left-hit jackpot is provided in the jackpot of the second special symbol, there is a high possibility that the jackpot cannot be started immediately after the jackpot standby state. Only the right opportunity jackpot is provided. As a result, the type of jackpot can be reduced, so that the storage capacity of the storage area for storing data for each type of jackpot can be reduced.

  The big hits (big hits F2 to H2) of the second special symbol in the second embodiment are the big hits (big hits D to F) of the second special symbol in the first embodiment, the number of rounds and the game state after the big hit, respectively. Exactly the same. Therefore, the detailed description is omitted.

  In the second embodiment, when the big hit of the second special symbol is made, the big hit is always made a right trigger big hit. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Even in the case of a second special symbol jackpot, a left trigger jackpot may be configured at a predetermined ratio (for example, 10%). As described above, when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the possibility that game balls are stored in the storage device 675 is low. In this case, the game ball does not immediately enter the left operation winning opening 662. Therefore, in the event of a left-hand-operated jackpot, it is possible to provide a game property that measures the timing at which game balls enter the left operation winning opening 662. That is, it is possible to vary the operation winning opening to be aimed during the jackpot waiting state depending on whether the jackpot is a right opportunity jackpot or a left opportunity jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the variation of the game during the jackpot waiting state.

  Next, the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. 56, the RAM 203 in the second embodiment differs from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the above-described first embodiment (see FIG. 13) in that a start opportunity storage area 203n is added. I have. The other configuration is the same as that of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The start opportunity storage area 203n is a storage area for storing data indicating the type of the activated winning opening that serves as a jackpot start opportunity. More specifically, when “01H” is stored as data in the start opportunity storage area 203n, the start opportunity of the jackpot is the right operation winning opening 661 (the current jackpot is the right opportunity jackpot). This means that when "02H" is stored, the start of the jackpot is the left operation winning opening 662 (the current jackpot is the left trigger jackpot). In the start opportunity storage area 203n, the initial value is set to “00H”, and a jackpot is won by a special symbol lottery, and when shifting to the jackpot waiting state, data according to the current jackpot type is overwritten ( (See S232 in FIG. 57). During the jackpot waiting state, the system monitors the activation winning opening corresponding to the data stored in the start opportunity storage area 203n for the activation winning opening, and detects the entrance to the monitored activation winning opening. It is configured to set the start of a jackpot (see S1113 and S1114 in FIG. 59). Thereby, according to the jackpot type, it is possible to start the jackpot triggered by the ball entry into the different operation winning opening. Therefore, when the right opportunity is a big hit, the same timing as in the first embodiment is activated with the same timing. While it is possible to realize the gaming ability aiming at the winning opening, it is possible to realize the gaming ability in which the jackpot is started without aiming at the activated winning opening in the case of the left-hand opportunity jackpot. Therefore, the playability in the jackpot waiting state can be diversified.

<Regarding the control processing of the main control device in the second embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the special symbol variation process 2 (S111) will be described with reference to FIG. This special symbol variation process 2 (S111) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment, and is similar to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22). This is a process for setting display on the symbol display device 37 and setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 57) in the second embodiment, the processes in S201 to S23 are performed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment. The same processing is performed.

  In the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 57) in the second embodiment, when the process of S220 is completed, the opening of the storage valve 675a is set (S231). By opening the storage valve 675a, when a game ball is stored in the storage device 675, the game ball can be made to enter the left-operation winning port 662 immediately after the start of the jackpot waiting state. Thereby, in the case of a left opportunity big hit, the big hit can be started soon after the game ball reaches the upper surface of the open door 65f1.

  When the process of S231 is completed, the data stored in the start opportunity storage area 203n is updated to the data according to the current jackpot type (S232), and the process proceeds to S223. In the process of S232, if the current jackpot is a right opportunity jackpot (any of the jackpots A2, B2, D2, F2 and H2), “01H” is stored as data, and the left opportunity jackpot (the jackpot C2, E2 In any case, “02H” is stored as data.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 58, start-up processing 2 in the second embodiment will be described. The start-up process 2 is a process executed in place of the start-up process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment, and is a process started when the power is turned on.

  In the start-up process 2 (see FIG. 58) in the second embodiment, the respective processes in S901 to S914 are the same as the respective processes in S901 to S914 in the start-up process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment. The processing is executed.

  In the start-up process 2 (see FIG. 58) in the second embodiment, when the process of S911 ends, it is next determined whether one of the incoming ball waiting flag 203j and the big hit flag 203m is on ( If it is determined that any of the flags is ON (S921: Yes), it means that the storage state of the storage device 675 should be released (during the jackpot standby state or the jackpot). Therefore, the storage valve 675a is set to be opened (S922), and the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S921 that both the incoming ball waiting flag 203j and the big hit flag 203m are off (S921: No), the period during which the storage device 675 should be set to the storage state (Normal game), the storage valve 675a is set to be closed (S923), and the process proceeds to S912.

  Next, the jackpot start process 2 (S1021) in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The jackpot start process 2 (S1021) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) instead of the jackpot start process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment, and is an operation corresponding to the jackpot type. This is a process for monitoring the incoming ball to the winning opening (right operating winning opening 661 or left operating winning opening 662), and starts a big hit when the incoming ball to the operating winning opening is detected.

  Of the big hit start processing 2 (see FIG. 59) in the second embodiment, in each of S1101, S1103, and S1104, S1101, S1103, and S1104 of the big hit start processing (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as the above processing is executed.

  In the big hit start process 2 (see FIG. 59) according to the second embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1101 that the incoming ball waiting flag 203j is ON (that is, the big hit standby state) (S1101: Yes) Then, the data in the start opportunity storage area 203n is read (S1111), and it is determined whether or not the read data is the data indicating the right operation winning opening 661 (that is, “01H”) (S1112). In the process of S1112, when it is determined that the data (that is, “01H”) corresponding to the right operation winning opening 661 is stored (S1112: Yes), then, a ball entering the right operating winning opening 661 is detected. It is determined whether it has been performed (S1113), and if a ball has not been detected (S1113: No), this processing ends as it is in order to continue the jackpot waiting state. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1113 that a ball has been detected in the right operation winning opening 661 (S1113: Yes), the processing shifts to S1103 to end the jackpot waiting state and start the jackpot. I do.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1112, when it is determined that the data stored in the start opportunity storage area 203n is the data indicating the left operation winning opening 662 (that is, “02H”) (S1112: No). It is determined whether a ball has been detected in the left-operation winning port 662 (S1114). If a ball has not been detected in the left-operation winning port 662 (S1114: No), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1114 that a ball has been detected in the left-operation winning opening 662 (S1114: Yes), the processing proceeds to S1103 to end the jackpot waiting state and start the jackpot. I do.

  By executing the jackpot start process 2 (see FIG. 59), the type of the activated winning opening that is a jackpot trigger is switched according to the jackpot type (whether the right jackpot or the left jackpot). Can be. Therefore, in the case of a right opportunity big hit, the profitability (the number of prize balls) that can be enjoyed by the player in one round of the big hit according to the timing of aiming at the right operation winning opening 661 is changed, and the big hit waiting state. It is possible to switch between game modes in which the game method does not affect the profit (the number of prize balls).

  Next, the jackpot control process 2 (S1022) in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The jackpot control process 2 (S1022) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment, and is a jackpot control process (see FIG. 32). As in the case of (1), this is a process for executing a jackpot effect and opening or closing the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65.

  In the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 60) in the second embodiment, the processes in S1201 to S1217 are the same as the respective processes in S1201 to S1217 in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment. The processing is executed. In the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 60) in the second embodiment, after the process of S1214 or S1215 is completed, the closing of the storage valve 675a of the storage device 675 is set (S1221), and the process is performed. The process moves to S1216. Thus, the period during which the storage state of the storage device 675 is released can be limited to the jackpot waiting state and the jackpot.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the hit-related process 2 (S4321) in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The hit-related process 2 (S4321) is a process executed in place of the hit-related process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment, and is similar to the hit-related process (see FIG. 37). This is a process for executing control corresponding to the type.

  Of the hit-related processes (see FIG. 61) in the second embodiment, S4401 and S4404-S4410 in the hit-related processes (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment respectively correspond to S4401 and S4404-S4410 in the first embodiment. The same processing as each processing is executed. In the hit-related process 2 (see FIG. 61) in the second embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4401 that there is a standby command among the commands received from the main controller 110 (S4401: Yes), A standby state command process for determining the content of the standby state effect is executed according to the received standby state command (S4421), and this process ends. Details of the standby state command processing (S4421) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the standby state command processing (S4421). In the standby state command processing (S4421), first, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a right opportunity jackpot (S4601). Similarly, a display standby state command for executing the standby state effect (see FIG. 7) is set (S4602), the standby state effect flag 223g is set to ON (S4603), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4601, if it is determined that the current jackpot is not a right opportunity jackpot (a left opportunity jackpot) (S4601: No), instead of executing the standby state effect, a fixed display is performed in the variable display effect. A standby state command for display for executing a standby state effect in a mode in which the third symbol is continuously displayed as determined (extended display is extended) is set (S4604), and this processing ends. In the case of a left-hand-hit jackpot, the standby state effect in which the confirmation display of the third symbol is simply extended is that the jackpot-waiting state when the left-hand hit is a very short period (about 0.5 seconds) And the jackpot starts. Therefore, when the left-hand-hit jackpot is executed, the standby state effect (see FIG. 7) similar to the right-hit jackpot is executed. Since the jackpot is started, there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable with the displayed content or confuse the player. Thus, in the second embodiment, in the jackpot standby state set based on the left-hand-operated jackpot, the jackpot is started in the display mode (fixed display of the third symbol) at the end of the variable display effect. Up to that point. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player feel as if the big hit has just started after the variable display has ended, so that the player may feel uncomfortable or confuse the player. This can be prevented (suppressed).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, two types of operation winning ports are provided on the upper right side and the lower left side of the game board 13, and the start timing of the jackpot according to the jackpot type. The winning prize opening is different. The right operation winning port 661 provided on the upper right side of the game board 13 is provided at a position where the player can enter the ball when the game ball is fired by right-handing, while provided at the lower left side of the game board 13. The left-operation winning port 662 is provided at a position where the player can enter the ball when the game ball is shot leftward. In addition, a storage device 675 that can store only one game ball is disposed above the left operation winning opening 662, and a game state in which a left hit is performed (a low probability state of a special symbol, and In the normal state of the normal symbol), when the player plays the game of aiming at the first entrance 64 and firing a game ball, the storage device 675 is almost turned to the jackpot of the first special symbol. On the other hand, the game balls are configured to be stored. Since the storage state of the storage device 675 is released when the jackpot enters the jackpot waiting state, the jackpot type (left trigger jackpot) started when the ball enters the left operation winning opening 662 is triggered. In this case, the game balls stored in the storage device 675 flow down and enter the left-operation winning opening 662, so that the jackpot is started immediately after the jackpot waiting state. Thereby, in the first round of the jackpot, there is a high possibility that the jackpot is started in a state in which the gaming ball has not reached the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. The number of obtained prize balls becomes almost the same every time. On the other hand, when the right opportunity big hit occurs, the jackpot does not start unless the game ball is fired aiming at the right operation winning opening 661. Therefore, similarly to the first embodiment, the game ball enters the right operating winning opening 661. In accordance with the timing at which the game is made, it is possible to realize a game property in which the number of prize balls obtained by the player in the first round of the jackpot can be made different. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the jackpot waiting state and the gaming properties in the first round of the jackpot can be made different depending on whether the jackpot is the left jackpot or the right jackpot. Attention can be given to playing games.

  In the second embodiment, the winning prize opening that triggers the start of the jackpot is made different according to the type of the jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in all the jackpot types, the jackpot is configured to start when a game ball enters either the left or right operating winning port, and the jackpot type in which the storage valve 675a is opened and the jackpot type are not opened. A configuration in which a jackpot type is provided may be adopted. In other words, in the case of a left-hit jackpot, the storage valve 675a is opened from the start of the jackpot standby state to the end of the jackpot, while in the case of a right-hit jackpot, the jackpot standby state is started. The storage valve 675a may be kept closed from the end of the game until the jackpot ends. With this configuration, in the case of a left-hand-operated jackpot, immediately after the jackpot is confirmed and displayed, the storage ball 675a is released and the stored game ball enters the left-operation winning port 662 (winning). Therefore, similar to the above-described second embodiment, the big hit can be started immediately before the gaming balls are stored on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 (in about 0.5 seconds after the big hit standby state). On the other hand, when the right-hit is a jackpot, the storage valve 675a is not opened, so that even if the jackpot is confirmed and displayed, the possibility that the game ball immediately enters the left-operation winning port 662 is reduced. Therefore, the possibility that the jackpot is started immediately after the jackpot determination display is reduced, so that the launch speed (the launch intensity) of the game ball is made different as in the above-described first and second embodiments. Thus, when the game balls reach the right operation winning opening 661 in a state where the game balls have reached (up) the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1, the number of winnings that is the end condition of the first round (that is, the winning number) It is possible to provide an epoch-making playability in which more than two game balls can win the right specific winning opening 65a. As a result, similar to the second embodiment, in accordance with the jackpot type, the first round finishes with a predetermined winning number, and the number of pieces exceeding the predetermined winning number depends on the skill of the player. Since it is possible to switch between game characteristics in which a game ball can be won, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the player in the game.

  In the second embodiment, two operation winning ports (a right operating winning port 661 and a left operating winning port 662) are provided, and the operating winning port that is a trigger for starting a big hit is made different depending on the big hit type. . That is, after the combination of the third symbols indicating the jackpot (ie, the double-eye pattern) is definitely displayed, the game ball enters the left-operation winning opening 662 where there is a high possibility that the game ball will immediately enter (prize). After the combination of the jackpot type started by doing so and the third symbol indicating the jackpot is confirmed and displayed, the game ball is inserted into the right operation winning opening 661 that is unlikely to enter the game ball unless the player aims at it. The jackpot type that is started by entering a ball (winning) is provided. On the other hand, only the right operation winning opening 661 is provided, and even if the game ball does not enter (win) the right operating winning opening 661 (that is, the combination of the third symbols indicating the big hit is definitely displayed. It is also possible to provide a jackpot type that is started (for example) and a jackpot type that does not start a jackpot unless a game ball does not enter (win) the right operation winning port 661. With this configuration, it is not necessary to provide the left-operation winning port 662 and the storage device 670, so that the number of components of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Therefore, the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In the second embodiment, the ease with which the game ball enters the first entrance 64 is constant irrespective of the state of the storage device 675, but the ease with which the game ball enters the first entrance 64. It may be configured to vary the degree according to the state of the storage device 675 (whether or not game balls are stored). Specifically, for example, the storage device 675 is configured to be provided on the upper left side of the first ball entrance 64, and when a game ball is stored in the storage device 675, the storage of the stored game ball is performed. The height of the storage device 675 is set so that the upper surface partly protrudes from the upper surface of the storage device 675. Then, when the game ball fired by the left strike collides with the game ball stored in the storage device 675, the ball is easily flipped in the direction in which the first ball entrance 64 is arranged. The position of the storage device 675 is set. With this configuration, when game balls are stored in the storage device 675, the game balls can easily enter the first entrance 64, so that the lottery of the first special symbol is easily executed. Become. That is, it is more advantageous for the player to store the game balls in the storage device 675, so that the player can positively store the game balls in the normal state. Therefore, the jackpot waiting state can be started in a state where the game balls are stored in the storage device 675 more reliably, and when the left trigger is a big hit, the game balls stored in the storage device 675 are immediately removed. The ball can be made to enter the left operation winning opening 662 to start a left-hand-hit jackpot.

  In the second embodiment, the period from when the jackpot is in the standby state until the jackpot is started is changed by switching the operation winning prize opening which is the trigger of the jackpot according to the jackpot type. It is not limited to. For example, the winning opening itself may be deleted (that is, the jackpot is started without going through the jackpot waiting state), and the opening period may be simply changed according to the jackpot type. With such a configuration, in the case of a jackpot having a long opening, a larger number of game balls can reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 by performing a right-hand during the opening, while in a jackpot having a short opening period. Since it is difficult for the game ball to reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1, the degree of advantage in the first round can be changed according to the type of big hit without using the operation winning opening.

  In the second embodiment, the configuration is such that the operation winning prize opening which is a trigger of the jackpot is switched according to the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the jackpot waiting state, a configuration may be adopted in which a jackpot is started regardless of which of the operation winning ports the game ball enters. And it is good also as a structure which changes the degree of advantage of a jackpot according to the classification of the winning operation winning opening. More specifically, for example, it is easier for the number of rounds of the jackpot to be increased when the jackpot is started by winning in the right operation winning port 661 than when the jackpot is started by winning the left activated winning port 662. The configuration may be as follows. With such a configuration, if a game ball can be immediately awarded (entered) to the right operation winning opening 661 when the jackpot is in a standby state, an advantageous result for the player is obtained. It is predicted from the execution of the variable display whether or not the game ball is in the process of being displayed, and immediately after the jackpot standby state (for about 0.5 seconds until the game ball enters the left-operation winning opening 662), the game ball is The game can be played by devising so as to enter the right operation winning opening 661. Further, in this case, instead of switching the degree of advantage in accordance with the type of the activated winning opening, the configuration may be such that the game property is switched. Specifically, for example, when a big hit is started by entering the left-hand winning prize port 662, the jackpot of 10 rounds is always started, while the big-hit jackpot 661 is entered. When the ball is hit and the jackpot is started, either the four rounds or the sixteenth round jackpot may be selected by lottery. With this configuration, it is possible to switch between the gaming ability in which the jackpot of 10 rounds is provided stably and the unstable (high gambling) gaming ability in which the number of rounds can be increased or decreased. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the second embodiment, the jackpot is started when the game ball enters the activated winning prize port corresponding to the jackpot type after the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, but is not limited thereto. Not something. For example, the winning prize mouth is not included in the configuration, and a jackpot (so-called one kind) which is started immediately when a jackpot is won by a special symbol lottery, and a game ball is provided in a specific area provided on the game board 13. The right variable winning device 65 of the present embodiment is applied to a pachinko machine 10 (a so-called one-type and two-type mixer) of a type having a big hit (so-called two-type) that is started when a ball is entered. However, the same operation can be realized. In other words, in the case of one type, a big hit is started immediately before the game ball is fired toward the right variable winning device 65, so that it is not possible to aim for an over-winning prize, but a specific area can enter. In the case where the game ball is in a proper state (a state where two hits can be aimed at), the game ball is first fired on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1, and then the game ball is fired aiming at a specific area, whereby the over-winning is intentionally performed. Can be generated.

<Third embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, when a special symbol is won by lottery and the jackpot is shifted to a jackpot waiting state, the pachinko machine 10 passes over the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 at the timing when the game ball enters the activated winning opening 660. The configuration is such that the more game balls in the middle, the more advantageous to the player (the larger the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the first round).

  On the other hand, in the third embodiment, even in the case other than the case of the jackpot, a scene is provided in which the degree of advantage of the player is changed according to the number of game balls passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. More specifically, a lottery result (small hit) in which the right specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined period (for example, 0.2 seconds) is provided in a part of the case where the lottery of the special symbol is missed. . With this, as the number of game balls passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 at the timing when the small hitting starts, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the small hitting increases, the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 is displayed every time the small hitting occurs. Attention can be given to playing games.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment is different in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 in the main control device 110 is different. , The configuration of the RAM 203 is partially changed, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the control executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed. The point is that the processing has been partially changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the following. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 63, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the third embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 63, in the third embodiment, the normal entrance (through gate) 67 and the second entrance 640 are provided in the flow path provided on the left side of the variable display unit 80. Configuration. In addition, this allows the game ball to be launched into the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the first entrance 64, and the second entrance 640 by firing the game ball leftward. Can be ball. For this reason, it is possible to cause the player to play a game by left-handing regardless of the gaming state during the jackpot waiting state and other than during the jackpot. When a big hit or a small hit occurs, a game ball is fired on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 by right-handing, so that more game balls are opened at the timing when the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened and the right specific winning opening 65a. Can be entertained.

  In the third embodiment, when a lottery of the second special symbol is lost, a small hit occurs and the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened for a predetermined period (0.2 seconds). In the pattern lottery, small wins are not won. With such a configuration, it is possible to further increase the degree of advantage while the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol is set. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the time saving state of the normal symbol.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 64, a display effect performed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 64 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in a case where a small win has occurred in the second special symbol lottery in the probability variable state (special symbol variation state and normal symbol time saving state). is there. In the present embodiment, when a small hit occurs, the third symbol display device 81 sets “3”, “4”, and “1” as a combination (so-called “chance eye”) of the third symbol indicating the small hit. A combination of the third symbols with numbers is displayed. FIG. 64 (a) shows a moment when a small hit occurs and all the symbol columns are stopped and displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 64 (a), in the probable change state, an image urging the player to make a left-hand shot is displayed in the small area Ds3 until the symbol combination corresponding to the small hit is confirmed and displayed. Thereby, in the certain change state, it is possible to make the player hit the left aiming at the second entrance 640 provided on the left side of the game board 13.

  FIG. 64B is a diagram showing a display mode during the small hit determination display. During the small hit determination display, a balloon is displayed in the small area Ds3 in the third symbol display device 81, in which the characters "From the right!" And a graphic of a rightward arrow are displayed. By performing a right-handed operation according to the displayed contents, the game ball can reach the upper surface of the door 65f1. Therefore, when the opening period of the small hits is started, the game ball arranged on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 can enter the right specific winning opening 65a. The small hit determination display (see FIG. 64B) continues to be displayed from the elapse of the fluctuation period of the variable display corresponding to the small hit until the end of the small hit. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplicity, the image (see FIG. 64B) that is displayed during the small hit and prompts the user to right-hand is referred to as a “right-hand notification image”.

  Note that the small hit in the third embodiment has a configuration in which an opening period of 4 seconds is set. That is, the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened for a predetermined period (0.2 seconds) four seconds after the start of the display of the right-handed notification image (see FIG. 64B) on the display screen. I have. Thereby, by allowing more game balls to reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 during the opening period of 4 seconds, the opening period of the small hit becomes an opening period. A ball can be made to enter the right specific winning opening 65a.

  Further, as described above, the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 is configured so that the game ball can pass in about 4 seconds. That is, the game ball that has reached the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 for substantially the same period as the small hit opening period. Therefore, when right-handed is started after the right-handed notification image (see FIG. 64B) is displayed, the game ball may pass over the upper surface of the door 65f1 before the opening period elapses. Can be suppressed. Also, as the right hit of the game ball is started earlier after the small hit is confirmed and displayed, more game balls can reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. In the normal symbol time reduction state) and the time reduction state (special symbol low-probability state and normal symbol time reduction state), a game can be played by paying more attention to the display contents of the third symbol display device 81. it can.

<Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment>
Next, the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The ROM 202 according to the third embodiment differs from the ROM 202 according to the first embodiment only in that the content of the first random number table 202a is partially changed. This is the same as the first embodiment described above. Therefore, as the description of the ROM 202 in the third embodiment, only the details of the first random number table 202a will be described.

  FIG. 65 (a) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the first random number table 202a according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 65 (a), the first random number table 202a in the third embodiment stores a random number value (counter value) determined to be a small hit in addition to a random number value (counter value) determined to be a big hit. ) Is specified.

  More specifically, regardless of whether the special symbol is in the low probability state or the special symbol high probability state, the value of the first random number counter C1 is set to “360” for the lottery of the second special symbol. A small hit is defined in association with the range of “-399” (see 202a2 and 202a4 in FIG. 65A). On the other hand, no value of the first random number counter C1 corresponding to the small hit is associated with the lottery of the first special symbol (see 202a2 and 202a4 in FIG. 65A). For this reason, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, there is no possibility of a small hit, but when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the small hit is generated with a probability of 1/10 (40/400). Becomes Therefore, in the probable change state or the time saving state, the game ball is likely to easily enter the second entrance 640 by increasing the probability of hitting the symbol, and the small prize ball is obtained with a relatively high probability. Is obtained, so that the game state becomes extremely advantageous for the player. Further, a great difference can be provided in the degree of advantage of the player depending on whether or not to play the game at the specific winning opening 65a when the small hit occurs. That is, in the present embodiment, after the small hit is notified, a large number (about six) of the game balls reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 by right-handing the game balls during the opening period of 4 seconds. be able to. In other words, at the point in time when the small hitting opening period is started, about six game balls can be in a state of passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. Each time one game ball wins the specific winning opening 65a, 10 prize balls are awarded. Therefore, a right strike is displayed in accordance with the right strike notification displayed in the small area Ds3 (see FIG. 64 (b)). By doing so, approximately 60 prize balls can be obtained each time a small hit occurs. Therefore, in the case of a small hit, the degree of advantage between the probable change state and the time saving state can be greatly changed depending on whether or not right-handing is performed according to the display content (right-handed notification image) of the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the player can play the game by paying attention to the display content of the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65B is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 according to the third embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 according to the first embodiment (see FIG. 13) in that a small hit flag 203p is added. The other configuration is the same as that of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The small hitting flag 203p is a flag indicating whether or not a small hit is made, and if on, it means that the small hit is being made. On the other hand, if it is off, it means that it is not during the small hit. Here, “small hit” indicates a period from the start of the small hit opening period to the end of the small hit ending period. The small hit flag 203p is set to ON at the start of the small hit opening period (see S1303 in FIG. 67), and is set to OFF at the end of the small hit (see S1311 in FIG. 67).

<Control Process of Main Control Device in Third Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. First, the main process 3 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The main process 3 is a process executed in place of the main process (see FIG. 30) in the first embodiment, and is a process for performing main control of a game, like the main process (see FIG. 30). is there.

  Of the main processing 3 (see FIG. 66) in the third embodiment, in S1001 to S1005 and S1006 to S1016, S1001 to S1005 and S1006 of the main processing (see FIG. 30) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as the processing from S1016 to S1016 is executed. In the main process 3 (see FIG. 66) in the third embodiment, when the process of S1005 is completed, a small hit control process for controlling the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a during the execution of the small hit is next performed. (S1021), and the process proceeds to S1006. Details of the small hit control process (S1021) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the small hit control process (S1021). In this small hit control process (S1021), it is first determined whether or not it is a small hit start timing (S1301). In the process of S1301, the variation pattern is executed based on the determination of the special symbol lottery result as a small hit in the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23), and the variation pattern corresponding to the small hit ends. When the timing comes, it is determined that the timing is a small hit start timing.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1301 that it is the start timing of the small hit (S1301: Yes), a small hit opening command indicating the start of the small hit opening period is set (S1302), and the small hit flag 203p is set. This is set to ON (S1303), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1301 that it is not the timing of starting the small hit (S1301: No), then it is determined whether the small hit flag 203p is ON (that is, whether the small hit is in progress). (S1304), when it is determined that the small hitting flag 203p is off (S1304: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the small hitting flag 203p is ON (S1304: Yes), it is next determined whether or not it is time to open the right specific winning opening 65a (S1305). That is, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the opening period (3 seconds).

  In the processing of S1305, when it is determined that it is the opening timing of the right specific winning opening 65a (S1305: Yes), the opening of the right specific winning opening 65a is set (S1306), and this processing ends. By setting the opening of the right specific winning opening 65a by the processing of S1306, the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened, and the game ball passing the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 wins (enters) the right specific winning opening 65a. . As a result, as more game balls reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1, the player can acquire a larger amount of prize balls. Therefore, during the opening period of the small hits, more game balls can be fired by the player, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  In the process of S1305, when it is determined that the timing is not the opening timing of the right specific winning opening 65a (that is, it is not the end timing of the opening period) (S1305: No), then, the closing condition of the right specific winning opening 65a is satisfied. It is determined whether or not (S1307). In the third embodiment, it is determined that the closing condition has been satisfied when 0.2 seconds have elapsed since the right specific winning opening 65a was opened or when two game balls were won.

  In the process of S1307, when it is determined that the closing condition of the right specific winning opening 65a is satisfied (S1307: Yes), the closing of the right specific winning opening 65a is set (S1308), indicating the start of the small hit ending period. The small-hit ending command is set (S1309), and the process ends. The small ending period is set to a period (for example, 0.5 seconds) sufficient to discharge all the game balls that have entered the right specific winning opening 65a.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1307, when it is determined that the timing is not the timing at which the closing condition of the right specific winning opening 65a is satisfied (S1307: No), then, it is the timing of the end of the small hit (that is, the timing of the ending period end) Is determined (S1310), and when it is determined that it is the timing of the end of the small hit (S1310: Yes), the end of the small hit is set by turning off the small hit flag 203p (S1311). ), End this processing. In addition, in the process of S1310, if it is determined that the timing is not the end timing of the small hit (S1310: No), the process ends as it is.

  By executing this small hit control process (see FIG. 66), the opening / closing operation of the same right specific winning opening 65a can be realized in each small hit.

<Regarding the control processing of the sound lamp control device in the third embodiment>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the hit-related process 3 (S4331) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the third embodiment. The hit-related process 3 (S4331) in the third embodiment is a process executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 36) instead of the hit-related process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. Similar to the hit-related process (see FIG. 37), this is a process for executing control corresponding to the type of a command related to a hit.

  Of the hit-related processes 3 (see FIG. 68) in the third embodiment, the processes in S4401 to S4410 are the same as the processes in S4401 to S4410 in the hit-related processes (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment, respectively. The processing is executed.

  In the hit-related process 3 (see FIG. 68) in the third embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4409 that the ending command has not been received (S4409: No), the main control device 110 It is determined whether the small hit opening command has been received (S4431). If it is determined that the small hit opening command has been received (S4431: Yes), a right-handed notification image (see FIG. 64B) is displayed. A display command for this is set in the display control device 114 (S4432), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4431 that the small hit opening command has not been received (S4431: No), then it is determined whether a small hit ending command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4433). ), When it is determined that the small hit ending command has been received (S4433: Yes), a display for canceling the right-handed notification image and returning to a normal left-handed notification image (see FIG. 64A). A command for setting is set (S4434), and the process ends. By releasing the right strike notification image at the start of the small hit ending period instead of the small hit end timing, the right specific winning opening 65a is closed, and the game ball can enter the right specific winning opening 65a. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from continuously showing and launching the game ball by right-handing despite the lack of sex. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being damaged. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4433 that the small hit ending command has not been received (S4433: No), the process ends.

  By the processing of S4431 to S4434 in the hit-related processing 3 (see FIG. 68) in the third embodiment, the display of the right strike notification image is set from the start of the small hit opening period to the end of the small hit. can do. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to make a right-hand before the small hit opening period is started (during the opening period of 4 seconds). A plurality of game balls can reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 at the start of the winning opening period. Therefore, a plurality of game balls can be made to enter the specific winning opening 65a, even though the opening period of the small hit is itself short (maximum 0.2 seconds), so that the game is performed according to the right-hit notification image. In this case, the degree of advantage can be increased. This allows the player to more seriously check the display contents of the third symbol display device 81, thereby improving the willingness of the player to participate in the game.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the lottery result (the small hit) in which the right specific winning opening 65a is opened for a maximum of 0.2 seconds in a part of the case where the special symbol is lost by the lottery. ) Is provided. When the small hit occurs, the right specific winning opening 65a is opened for 0.2 seconds after the opening period of 4 seconds is set. Therefore, by continuously firing game balls toward the upper surface of the door 65f1 during the four-second opening period, a plurality of game balls pass through the upper surface of the door 65f1 at the start of the opening period. Therefore, the plurality of game balls can be made to enter the opened right specific winning opening 65a. In addition, in the case where a small win has occurred in a special symbol lottery, a right-hit notification image is displayed from the start of the small win opening period to the end of the open period. With such a configuration, by right-handing only while the right-handed notification image is displayed in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81, a plurality of game balls can be easily set to 0. 0 in each small hit. It is possible to win the right specific winning opening 65a during the opening period of 2 seconds. Therefore, the player can play the game by paying more attention to the display content of the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, in the third embodiment, the right-handed player is advantageous only in the case of a big hit or a small hit, and the game is played by a left-handed shot in a normal state. With this configuration, it is possible to frequently switch between right-handed and left-handed during a time-saving state or a probable change state, so that the player can enjoy switching the direction in which the game ball is fired. You can make it. Also, if the right-handed is informed, it is a chance to obtain a prize ball, so that the player can be pleased when the right-handed is informed.

  Note that, in the third embodiment, in the case of a small hit during normal times, the effect of informing right-handing is executed, and in other cases, the effect of informing left-handing is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. is not. For example, when a small hit occurs, the opening period is set immediately (for example, 0.1 seconds after the end of the fluctuation). That is, it is configured such that it is difficult to enter the game ball during the opening period of the small hit if the right hit is not started during the execution of the variable display. Then, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which an effect indicating the degree of expectation to be a small hit is executed during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. Specifically, for example, during the execution of the variation display of the third symbol, the character “10%”, the character “30%”, and the character “60%” are displayed in the small area Ds3. , "100%" may be selected and displayed. When selecting, the character to be displayed may be determined with a selection probability according to the result of the lottery of the second special symbol. More specifically, the character “100%” is selected only in the case of a small hit, but is configured so that the probability of selection is lower than other characters. The character "10%" is more difficult to select than "30%" or "60%" when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, and is most likely to be selected when it is off. The configuration is as follows. In addition, the character “30%” is configured so that the probability of being selected in the case of a small hit is higher than “10%” and lower than “60%”, while it is selected in the case of a miss. It is configured so that the probability of being performed is lower than “10%” and higher than “60%”. The character “60%” is configured so that the probability of being selected in the case of a small hit is higher than “30%”, while the probability of being selected in the case of a departure is smaller than “30%”. It is configured to be low. By configuring in this way, most of the characters displayed when the small hit is "30%" or "60%" that can be displayed even in the case of a small hit. It is possible to make the player predict whether or not a small hit will occur. Then, a player who predicts a small hit can fire a game ball toward the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 by right-handing during execution of the variable display (before the small hit is started). With this, if a small hit is made as predicted by the player, the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened and a prize ball can be obtained. It is possible to make the player more seriously predict whether or not a small hit has occurred. In addition, when the character "100%" is displayed, a small hit is always made, so that the player can make a right-handed operation while the variable display is being executed with confidence. Therefore, the player's interest in the game in the probable change state and the time reduction state can be further improved.

  In the third embodiment, as the small hit type, only the small hit with the opening period of 4 seconds is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration in which a plurality of types having different opening periods may be provided. Specifically, for example, a configuration may be provided in which a type having an opening period of 1 second, a type of 2 seconds, a type of 4 seconds, and a type of 8 seconds are provided. With this configuration, when the opening period is short (1 second or 2 seconds) and the type of small hit is made, if the right hit is performed after the small hit opening period is started, the small hit is made. Since the number of game balls reaching the opening / closing door 65f1 before the opening period of the game starts is reduced, the number of prize balls tends to be smaller than that of the small hit type in which the opening period is 4 seconds. On the other hand, if the opening period is a type of small hit that is longer (8 seconds) than the time required for the game ball to pass over the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1, the right after the small hit opening period starts. If the player continues to hit, the game ball fired in the first half of the opening period will pass through the opening / closing door 65f1 before the start of the opening period. Therefore, since a useless ball is easily generated, the number of possessed balls tends to decrease more than the small hit type in which the opening period is 4 seconds. As a result, the degree of advantage of the player is changed depending on the type of the small hit, and when the small hit is notified (the right-hit notification image is displayed), the player makes a right-hand while hoping for an advantageous small hit. Can be done.

  In the third embodiment, a right-hit notification image is displayed when a small hit occurs. However, displaying a right-hit notification image is not limited to a small hit. For example, the right-handed notification image may be diverted to the display during the execution of the jackpot (for example, the display of the opening period). With such a configuration, it is not necessary to prepare different effects for the big hit and the small hit, and the number of data in the display data table can be reduced.

  In the third embodiment, it is configured that there is a possibility of winning a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the second special symbol lottery, when the first special symbol lottery is executed, a small hit may be won with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/50 probability). With such a configuration, in the low probability state of the special symbol that is the most disadvantageous for the player and in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, it is possible to obtain a certain number of balls in a small hit when a small hit occurs. In addition, the game can be prevented from being monotonous. Therefore, even if the most disadvantageous state continues for a long time (so-called addiction occurs), it is possible for the player to hardly get bored with the game. In this case, the ratio of displaying the right-handed notification image (the occurrence rate of right-handed navigation) when the small hit is won may be changed according to the number of consecutive misses. That is, right-handed navigating hardly occurs even when a small hit occurs until a specific number of times or a loss occurs without a big hit in the first special symbol lottery. The configuration may be such that the probability of occurrence is high (for example, 50%). This makes it difficult for the number of possessed balls to decrease when the number of times exceeds a specific number, so that the player can continue the game for a longer time. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  In the third embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the big hit is started when the game ball enters the activated winning opening 660, but the activated winning opening 660 is deleted and the small winning is eliminated. Only when it becomes, an over prize may be generated.

  In the third embodiment, the jackpot is started when the jackpot is won by the special symbol lottery. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively or additionally, a big hit may be started when a game ball enters a specific area inside the right variable winning device 65. That is, during the opening period of the right specific winning opening 65a based on the winning of the small hit, the game ball enters the right specific winning opening 65a, so that the game ball enters the specific area and the big hit. May be started. With this configuration, the merit of entering the right specific winning opening 65a at a small hit can be further increased, so that the game can be played by paying attention to whether or not the right-handed navigation occurs. . In this case, it may be configured such that the small hit is won even in the lottery of the first special symbol, and the occurrence rate of the right-handed navigation when the small hit is made for each gaming state is variable. In other words, a configuration may be adopted in which the navigation occurrence rate is reduced in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, and the navigation occurrence rate is increased in the normal symbol time reduction state. With this configuration, it is possible to further increase the degree of advantage of the normal symbol in the time saving state. Conversely, the navigation probability may be higher in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol. As a result, in addition to the case of winning a special design lottery, in addition to the case of small hits, there is a chance to win a big hit by entering a specific area even if it is a small hit, so there is a situation that the big hit will not be won for a long time Can be difficult. Therefore, the player can continue the game for a longer time. Furthermore, in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, when the number of times the lottery is lost in the special symbol lottery becomes a specific number or more, the occurrence rate of the right-handed navigation in the case of a small hit may be increased. . With such a configuration, when the number of times exceeds a specific number, it is possible to form a situation where it is easier to win a jackpot than before the number of times exceeds (a game ball can easily enter a specific area). Can be configured to be less likely to occur. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment, a jackpot is started by allowing the game ball to enter the operation winning opening 660 while the game ball is passing over the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1, thereby starting the big hit. Of the game ball passing through the upper surface of the right specific winning opening 65a. In other words, in the case of the jackpot waiting state, the first round advantageous degree (the right specific winning opening 65a in the first round) is changed according to the timing of starting the jackpot (making the ball enter the activated winning opening 660). (The number of game balls to be entered) is varied.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, the gaming property in which the degree of advantage in the first round (the number of prize balls that can be obtained) varies according to the timing of starting the big hit, the timing of starting the big hit, and one round It is configured such that the player can select a game property that is not related to the degree of eye advantage (the number of prize balls that can be acquired). More specifically, in the fourth embodiment, depending on the selection of the player in the jackpot waiting state, the right specific winning opening 65a of the right variable winning device 65 is opened in the first round of the jackpot, or the left variable winning device is set. The configuration is such that whether to open the left specific winning opening 650a of 650 is variable. This allows the player to select a desired game property, thereby providing a game property suited to the taste of each player.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the configuration in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed. The condition that the specific winning opening 650a is determined to be closed is “when 30 seconds have elapsed or four or more game balls have won”, and the configuration of the RAM 203 in the main control device 110 is partially changed. That the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed; that the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed; And that the configuration of the ROM 202 in the main control device 110 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the following. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 69, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the fourth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 69, in the fourth embodiment, a sorting device 680 is provided on the upper right side of the gaming board 13 in a front view in place of the operation winning opening 660 in the first embodiment. Inside the sorting device 680, there are provided two operation winning ports (a right operating winning port 681 and a left operating winning port 682) into which game balls can enter. As with the operation winning opening 660 in the first embodiment, it is determined that the entering of the game ball is valid only during the jackpot waiting state in each of these two operating winning openings. In the jackpot waiting state, when a game ball enters the right operation winning opening 681, a jackpot in which the right specific winning opening 65a is opened in one round of the jackpot is started, and the game ball enters the left operating winning opening 682. When the ball has entered, a big hit in which the left specific winning opening 650a is opened in one round of the big hit is started.

  In addition, a distribution member for distributing a game ball that has entered the distribution device 680 to one of the operation winning prize ports is provided above the two operation prize ports (right operation prize port 681 and left operation prize port 682). 683 are provided. The distribution member 683 is configured to be rotatable about a shaft 683a as a rotation axis. The distribution member 683 is tilted to the right (every two seconds) according to the elapsed time (see the solid line in FIG. 69) and tilted to the left. It is changed alternately with the arrangement (see the broken line in FIG. 69). When the distribution member 683 is tilted rightward, the upper part of the right operation winning opening 681 is closed by the distribution member 683 and the upper part of the left operation winning opening 682 is opened. For this reason, a game ball that has entered the sorting device 680 while the sorting member 683 is tilted to the right is inclined by the sorting member 683 from the upper right direction in front view to the lower left direction in front view. The ball flows down in the lower left direction and enters the left operation winning opening 682.

  When a game ball enters the left-operation winning port 682 in the jackpot waiting state, a jackpot in which the left specific winning port 650a is opened in all rounds of the jackpot is started. The left variable winning device 650 is different from the right variable winning device 65 in that while the left specific winning opening 650a is closed, the game ball is kept at a position where the game ball can enter the left specific winning opening 650a. It is configured to make it impossible. Therefore, in the first round of the jackpot, the number of game balls entered is unlikely to vary, and almost the same number of prize balls can be stably paid out each time. Therefore, a player or the like who is not confident in the game of launching the game ball at the same time can select the big hit at which the left specific winning opening 650a is opened.

  As described above, the jackpot that is started when a game ball enters the left activated winning opening 682 is 30 seconds after the start of each round, or the gaming ball is inserted into the left specific winning opening 650a. The round ends when more than one ball is entered. Therefore, in the first round of the jackpot (left opportunity jackpot) started when the game ball enters the left operation winning port 682, almost four game balls enter the left specific winning port 650a and the jackpot ends. I do.

  On the other hand, when the distribution member 683 is arranged to be inclined leftward, the upper part of the right operation winning opening 681 is opened and the upper part of the left operation winning opening 682 is closed by the distribution member 683. For this reason, a game ball that has entered the sorting device 680 while the sorting member 683 is tilted to the left is inclined from the upper left in front view to the lower right in front view formed by the sorting member 683. , And flows down to the lower right, and enters the right operating winning opening 681. When a game ball enters the right activated winning opening 681, the right specific winning opening 65a is opened in the first round of the jackpot, and the left specific winning opening 650a is opened in the second and subsequent rounds. Jackpot) is started. The first round of the right opportunity jackpot ends when 30 seconds elapse after the right specific winning opening 65a is opened, or when two or more game balls enter the right specific winning opening 65a. However, as described above, the winning number in the right specific winning opening 65a is approximately two to six in accordance with the number of game balls passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 at the time of opening the right specific winning opening 65a. Move up and down in range. Therefore, when a game ball enters the right-operation winning opening 681 in the jackpot waiting state, the number of prize balls that can be acquired is changed according to the timing of the entry of the game ball.

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, since the arrangement of the distribution member 683 is switched every two seconds in the jackpot waiting state, the arrangement of the distribution member 683 is checked for the player, and the player has the desired game performance. By entering a game ball at a timing when it becomes possible to enter the operation winning opening corresponding to the above, it is possible to provide a game property that matches the taste of each player.

  Between the right operating winning opening 681 and the left operating winning opening 682, if a game ball that has entered the sorting device 680 does not enter any of the operating winning openings, the game ball is sorted. An out port for discharging to the outside of the 680 is provided. By providing the out port, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a problem such as ball clogging inside the sorting device 680.

  Next, a display effect in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 70A and 70B are diagrams illustrating an example of a display mode during a standby state effect performed in the jackpot standby state according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 70 (a) shows a display mode while the sorting member 683 is tilted rightward in the jackpot waiting state.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (a), in the jackpot waiting state in the fourth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, a display area in which the character "Big hit is determined!" HR1 and a combination (final stop symbol) of the third symbol that is finally stopped and displayed (fixed display) in the variable display effect that was executed before the jackpot standby state is displayed. Also, as shown in FIG. 70A, while the sorting member 683 is tilted to the right, the display area HR2 formed on the display screen is displayed as "If you hit now, a safe mode !?" , And the characters “You can stably obtain a prize ball!” And the direction in which the game ball that has entered the sorting device 680 flows down (the direction in which the left-operation winning port 682 is arranged). Is displayed. Unlike the first embodiment, the chance meter CM is not displayed, and the right side of the display screen is empty. With these display contents, it is possible to make the player recognize that when the game ball is fired toward the sorting device 680, there is a high possibility that the game ball will enter the left-operation winning port 682. In other words, regardless of the timing at which game balls enter the left-operation winning opening 682, a gaming jackpot in which five game balls can stably enter the left specific winning opening 650a in the first round. Is started.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (b), while the sorting member 683 is tilted to the left, as in the first embodiment, the character “Big hit!” Is displayed at the top of the display screen when viewed from the front. The displayed display area HR1 and a combination (final stop symbol) of the third symbol finally stopped and displayed (fixed display) in the variable display effect that was executed before the jackpot waiting state is displayed. In addition, a chance meter CM is displayed on the right side of the display screen as in the first embodiment. Then, in the display area HR2 formed on the display screen, the characters "hit now and unstable mode !?" and the characters "If you are lucky, you will get a large amount! If you are unlucky, ..." And an image indicating the direction in which the game ball that has entered the sorting device 680 flows down (the direction in which the right-hand winning port 681 is arranged). Based on these display contents, it is possible to make the game balls recognize that when the game balls are fired toward the sorting device 680, there is a high possibility that the game balls will enter the right operation winning opening 681. That is, the number of game balls reaching the opening / closing door 65f1 is determined from the number of gauges of the chance meter CM, and the game balls are made to enter the right operation winning opening 681 with good timing (at a timing when the number of gauges is larger). By doing so, it is possible to recognize that a gaming jackpot in which more prize balls can be obtained is started.

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, in the jackpot waiting state, the type of the operation winning prize port to be entered when a game ball is fired aiming at the sorting device 680 and the outline of the jackpot started by entering (game ) Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. With such a configuration, it is possible to allow the player to select a jackpot of a playability that matches his / her taste. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of switching gaming characteristics according to the preference of each player.

<Electrical Configuration in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 according to the fourth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 according to the first embodiment (see FIG. 13) in that a specific winning opening type storage area 203q, a distribution state storage area 203r, and a distribution state timer 203s are provided. And that they have been added. The other configuration is the same as that of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The specific winning opening type storage area 203q is a storage area for storing data indicating the type of the specific winning opening to be opened in the first round of the jackpot. Specifically, when “01H” is stored in the specific winning opening type storage area 203q, the right specific winning opening 65a is opened in the first round of the jackpot, and the left specific winning opening 650a is opened in the second and subsequent rounds. It means that the jackpot type is open. On the other hand, when “02H” is stored, it means that the jackpot type is such that the left specific winning opening 650a is opened in each round of the jackpot. In the specific winning opening type storage area 203q, the initial value is set to “00H”, and “01H” is stored when a game ball enters the right-hand operating winning opening 681 in the jackpot waiting state, “02H” is stored when a game ball enters the left operation winning opening 682 (see S1131, S1133 in FIG. 72). When the start condition of the first round of the jackpot is satisfied, the type of the specific winning opening to be opened is determined based on the data in the specific winning opening type storage area 203q (S1232 in FIG. 73).

  The distribution state storage area 203r is a storage area in which data indicating the direction of the distribution member 683 is stored. Specifically, when “00H” is stored in the distribution state storage area 203r, the distribution member 683 is tilted to the left (a state in which a game ball can enter the right operation winning opening 681). If “01H” is stored, the sorting member 683 is tilted to the right (a state in which game balls can enter the left-operation winning port 682). Means The data in the distribution state storage area 203r is updated to data corresponding to the switched arrangement each time the arrangement of the distribution member 683 is switched in the jackpot waiting state (see S1125 and S1127 in FIG. 72). Note that the initial arrangement of the sorting member 683 is in a state of being tilted to the left. At the same time, the initial value of the distribution state storage area 203r also becomes “00H”. In the jackpot waiting state, every time the data in the distribution state storage area 203r is updated, a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the arrangement of the distribution member 683 corresponding to the updated data (the distribution state command). ) Is set. Based on this distribution state command, it is determined that the arrangement of the distribution member 683 has been switched, and the display state of the standby state effect is updated to a display form corresponding to the arrangement after the switching.

  The distribution state timer 203s is a timer for counting the remaining time until the state of the distribution member 683 is switched. In the distribution state timer 203s, the timer value is reset to “0” each time the state of the distribution member 683 is switched in the jackpot waiting state, and the timer value is incremented by 1 each time a large jackpot start process 4 (see FIG. 72) described later is executed. (S1121 in FIG. 72). That is, it is updated at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the main processing. Then, when the timer value becomes 500 or more, the state of the sorting member 683 is switched (see SS1124 and S1126 in FIG. 72).

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. First, the jackpot start process 4 (S1041) in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The jackpot start process 4 (S1041) is a process executed in place of the jackpot start process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment, and is an operation winning opening (right operating winning opening 681 and left operating winning opening 682). This is a process for starting a jackpot corresponding to the type of the activated winning opening when the entering of the activated winning opening is monitored and the entering of the activated winning opening is detected.

  Among the jackpot start processes 4 (see FIG. 72) in the fourth embodiment, in the respective processes of S1101, S1103, and S1104, S1101, S1103, and S1104 of the jackpot start process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as the above processing is executed.

  In the big hit start process 4 (see FIG. 72) in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1101 that the incoming ball waiting flag 203j is turned on (that is, in the big hit standby state) (S1101: Yes) Then, 1 is added to the value of the distribution state timer 203s (S1121), and it is determined whether the timer value after the addition is 500 or more (S1122). In the processing of S1122, if it is determined that the timer value of the distribution state timer 203s after the addition is 500 or more (S1122: Yes), it means that it is time to switch the state of the distribution member 683, and thus the distribution is performed. Each process of S1123 to S1129 for switching the state of the member 683 is executed.

  Specifically, it is determined whether the data stored in the distribution state storage area 203r is “00H” (whether the distribution member 683 is tilted to the left) (S1123). In the process of S1123, when it is determined that “00H” is stored (S1123: Yes), the sorting member 683 in a state of being tilted to the left is changed to a state of being tilted to the right (S1124), and the sorting state is set. “01H” is stored in the storage area 203r (S1125), and the process shifts to S1128.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1123, when it is determined that the data stored in the distribution state storage area 203r is “01H” (S1123: No), the distribution member 683 that is tilted to the right is tilted to the left. The state is changed to (S1126), "00H" is stored in the distribution state storage area 203r (S1127), and the process proceeds to S1128.

  In the processing of S1128 executed after the processing of S1125 or S1127, a distribution state command indicating the arrangement of the switching member 683 after the switching is set (S1128), and the value of the distribution state timer 203s is reset to 0 ( (S1129), the process proceeds to S1130.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1122, when it is determined that the value of the distribution state timer 203s after the update is less than 500 (S1122: No), it means that it is not the timing to switch the state of the distribution member 683. Therefore, the processes in S1123 to S1129 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S1130. In the processing of S1130, it is determined whether or not a ball has been detected in the right-operation winning port 681 (S1130). If it is determined that a ball has been detected (S1130: Yes), the specific winning port type storage area 203q is determined. Then, "01H" which is data indicating the right specific winning opening 650a is stored (S1131), and the process shifts to S1103. Thus, it is possible to set the start of the jackpot in which the right specific winning opening 65a is opened in the first round of the jackpot.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1130 that a ball has not been detected in the right activated winning opening 681 (S1130: No), then it is determined whether a ball has been detected in the left activated winning opening 682. (S1132). If it is determined in the processing of S1132 that a ball has been detected in the left-operation winning port 682 (S1132: Yes), the data "02H" indicating the left specific winning port 650a for the specific winning port type storage area 203q. Is stored (S1133), and the process proceeds to S1103. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1132 that a ball has not been detected in the left operation winning opening 682 (S1132: No), it means that it is not the end timing of the jackpot waiting state, The process ends.

  In the big hit start process 4 (S1041) in the fourth embodiment, when the process of S1104 ends, the distribution state timer 203s is reset to 0 (S1134), and the process ends. In the process of S1134, by resetting the distribution state timer 203s at the end of the jackpot waiting state, the timer value can be updated from the reset state of the distribution state timer 203s in the next jackpot waiting state. .

  Next, a jackpot control process 4 (S1042) in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 4 (S1042). The jackpot control process 4 (S1042) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment, and is a jackpot control process (see FIG. 32). As in the case of ()), this is a process for controlling the opening / closing operation of the right specific winning opening 65a and the left specific winning opening 650a.

  Among the jackpot control processes 4 (see FIG. 73) in the fourth embodiment, in the processes of S1201 to S1205 and S1207 to S1217, S1201 to S1205 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment, respectively. Also, the same processes as those in S1207 to S1217 are executed. In the jackpot control process 4 (see FIG. 73) according to the fourth embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S1205 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1205: Yes), the round started this time is one round. Is determined (S1231).

  If it is determined in the process of S1231 that the round is one round (S1231: Yes), the opening of the specific winning opening corresponding to the data stored in the specific winning opening type storage area 203q is set (S1232). To S1207. More specifically, if the data stored in the specific winning opening type storage area 203q is “01H”, the opening of the right specific winning opening 65a is set, and the stored data is “02H”. If there is, the opening of the left specific winning opening 650a is set.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1231, if it is determined that the round to be started this time is not the first round (S1232: No), the opening of the left specific winning opening 650a is set (S1233), and the process proceeds to S1207. I do.

  By executing the jackpot control process 4 (see FIG. 73), in the first round of the jackpot, the specific winning port corresponding to the type of the activated winning port that the player has passed (selected) in the jackpot standby state is opened. Can be done. Therefore, in the first round of the jackpot, it is possible to provide a gaming property according to the type of the activated winning opening selected by the player.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the hit-related process 4 (S4341) in the fourth embodiment. The hit-related process 4 (S4341) is a process executed in place of the hit-related process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment, and is similar to the hit-related process (see FIG. 37). This is a process for executing control corresponding to the type.

  Of the hit-related processes 4 (see FIG. 74) in the fourth embodiment, the respective processes of S4401 to S4410 are the same as the respective processes of S4401 to S4410 of the hit-related processes (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. The processing is executed. In the hit-related process 4 (see FIG. 74) in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4409 that the ending command is not included in the command received from the main control device 110 (S4409: No) Then, it is determined whether or not the distribution state command is included (S4441).

  In the process of S4441, if it is determined that the distribution status command is included in the command received from the main control device 110 (S4441: Yes), the command corresponds to the distribution status indicated by the received distribution status command. A display command for updating to the standby state effect mode is set (S4442), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4441, if it is determined that the distribution status command is not included in the command received from the main control device 110 (S4441: No), the process ends as it is.

  By the hit-related processing 4 (see FIG. 74), each time the state of the sorting member 683 switches, a display mode (see FIGS. 70 (a) and (b)) corresponding to the state after the switching can be set. Therefore, when the jackpot is in the standby state, the player simply checks the display content of the third symbol display device 81, and the current state of the sorting device 680 is changed when the player enters the game ball. It is possible to easily determine whether or not a state in which the jackpot of the gaming property that matches the taste is started.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, two types of specific prize ports (a right specific prize port 65a and a left specific prize port 650a) that allow a game ball to enter when a big hit occurs are provided. It is configured to be provided. More specifically, the right specific winning opening 65a has a relatively long game ball at a position (upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1) where the right specific winning opening 65a can be entered when the right specific winning opening 65a is opened while it is closed. While it is configured to be able to stay for a time, the left specific winning opening 650a keeps the game ball at a position where the game ball can enter the left specific winning opening 650a while being closed. It is configured to be impossible to keep. In addition, in the fourth embodiment, two types of operation winning openings (right operation winning opening 681 and left operating winning opening 682) are provided to start a jackpot, and the operation winning opening for entering a ball in the jackpot waiting state is provided. Is made to be selected by the user. If a game ball enters the right activated winning opening 681, a right opportunity big win in which the right specific winning opening 65 a is opened in each round of the jackpot starts, and if a gaming ball enters the left activated winning opening 682. , A left trigger jackpot in which the left specific winning opening 650a is opened in each round of the jackpot. Accordingly, the number of game balls passing through the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 at the timing when the game balls enter the right operation winning opening 681 greatly affects the number of game balls that can be obtained in the first round. , The player can select a game that does not affect the number of acquired prize balls in the state of the jackpot waiting state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game characteristic according to the taste of each player.

  In the fourth embodiment, if a left-hit jackpot occurs, it is impossible to keep the game ball at a position where the player can enter the left specific winning opening 650a in the jackpot waiting state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration in which a predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls can stay at a position where the game ball can enter the left specific winning opening 650a within a range smaller than the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 may be employed. With such a configuration, even when the player selects the left-operation winning port 682, it is possible to provide a gaming property in which the degree of advantage varies according to the timing at which the game ball is entered.

  In the fourth embodiment, the right specific winning opening 65a is opened in all rounds of the jackpot when a right opportunity big hit occurs, while the left specific winning opening 650a is opened in all rounds when a left opportunity big hit occurs. , But is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the specific winning opening corresponding to the activated winning opening is opened only in the first round, and a common specific winning opening is opened in the second and subsequent rounds. Even with such a configuration, the playability in the first round can be switched according to the type of the activated winning opening in which the game ball has entered.

  In the fourth embodiment, which one of the right opportunity jackpot and the left opportunity jackpot is started is made different depending on the type of the activated winning opening that has entered the ball. That is, although the type of the specific winning opening to be opened at the jackpot is made different depending on the type of the activated winning opening, the type made different depending on the type of the operating winning opening is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is varied according to the type of the activated winning opening. More specifically, for example, when a game ball enters the right operation winning opening 681, the number of rounds is 16 or 4 rounds, and the jackpot is drawn in half, while the left operating winning opening 682 is selected. When the game ball enters, the jackpot of 10 rounds may always be selected. In addition, when a game ball enters a specific area during a big hit, a gaming machine (so-called V certain machine) to which a certain change state is given after the big hit enters the specific area according to the type of the operation winning opening. It is good also as a structure which changes a sphere. More specifically, for example, when a game ball enters the right operation winning opening 681, the ball entry rate to the specific area is a lottery with a jackpot of 20% and a jackpot of 100%. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the left operation winning opening 682, a big hit with a ball entry rate of 60% in a specific area may be selected.

<Fifth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described first embodiment, the degree of advantage when the big hit is started (the number of award balls that can be obtained in the first round) according to the number of game balls fired toward the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 in the big hit standby state. Was variable.

  On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, when the variable display corresponding to the jackpot ends, the jackpot is started without going through the jackpot standby state. By changing the jackpot opening period and interval period according to the jackpot type, the number of game balls that can reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 during the opening period or the interval period is changed, and for each jackpot type. The degree of advantage is varied.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the configuration in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the end of each round of the jackpot. The conditions are unified to "when 30 seconds have elapsed or two or more game balls have won", the configuration of the ROM 202 in the main control device 110 has been partially changed, and The point is that the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of 110 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first section. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 75, the gaming board 13 in the fifth embodiment has the operational winning opening 660 provided on the upper right side in front view of the gaming board 13 (see FIG. 2) in the first embodiment deleted. . For this reason, in the fifth embodiment, when the variable display corresponding to the jackpot ends, the jackpot opening period starts immediately (without going through the jackpot waiting state).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 75, in the fifth embodiment, the left variable winning device 650a is deleted. For this reason, in the fifth embodiment, in all rounds of the jackpot, 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of the round, or a right specific winning opening that is closed by entering two or more game balls. 65a is opened.

<Electrical Configuration of Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76A is a block diagram showing a configuration of the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 76A, the ROM 202 according to the fifth embodiment differs from the RM 202 according to the first embodiment in that a period length selection table 202e is added and a first hit type selection table is provided. The difference is that the specified content of 202b is partially changed. The other configuration is the same as that of the ROM 202 in the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The period length selection table 202e is a data table that defines a jackpot opening period and an interval period for each jackpot type. When the start timing of the jackpot opening period and the start timing of the interval period come, the opening period and the interval period according to the jackpot type are set by referring to the period amount selection table 202e. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 70 (c), the period length selection table 202e has two types of opening periods: a relatively long period (5 seconds) and a relatively short period (1 second). Is stipulated. Similarly, two types of interval periods are defined: a relatively long period (3 seconds) and a relatively short period (0.5 seconds). With these, a closed period (opening period) from the start of the jackpot to the start of the first round, a large jackpot having a long closed period (interval period) between the second and subsequent rounds, and a short jackpot are provided. be able to.

  Next, a first hit type selection table 202b in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first hit type selection table 202b. As shown in FIG. 76 (b), in the first hit type selection table 202b in the fifth embodiment, five big hit types from "big hit A5" to "big hit E5" are set as the big hit types of the first special symbol. There are three types of jackpots defined as “big hit F5” to “big hit H5” as the jackpot types of the second special symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 76 (b), as the big hit of the first special symbol, “big hit A5” is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “0 to 4”. (See 202b1 in FIG. 76). Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are five counter values that are "big hit A5", so "big hit A5" is determined when a big hit occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol. Is 5% (5/100). The "big hit A2" has eight rounds like the "big hit A" in the first embodiment, and a "special symbol change state" and a "normal pattern time saving state" are given after the end of the big hit. Jackpot type. The “big hit A5” is one of the big hit types in which a relatively long period is set as the opening period and the ending period. As described above, in the fifth embodiment, in all rounds of the jackpot, 30 seconds have elapsed, or two or more game balls have entered the right specific winning opening 65a, so that the right specific winning opening 65a has been set. Is closed and the round ends. For this reason, if the opening period and the interval period are long, more game balls can reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 during the closing period, so that more game balls are opened and closed at the start of the next round. It can be in a state of being on the door 65f1. That is, when a new round is started and the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened, more game balls can be dropped from the opening / closing door 65f1 to enter the right specific winning opening 65a. This increases the possibility that the number of game balls exceeding the upper limit of the number of ball entry (two) specified in each round will enter the right specific winning opening 65a (exceed an over-prize). It becomes more advantageous in terms of the number of award balls. On the other hand, if the opening period and the interval period are short, it becomes difficult for the game balls to reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 during these closing periods. Therefore, in each round of the jackpot, the upper limit (specified) number (ie, (2) game balls are likely to enter and the round is likely to end (the probability of winning over is reduced). In other words, it tends to be disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls. In the following description, a jackpot in which the opening period and the interval period are long (a jackpot in which prize balls to be acquired in each round are likely to be increased) is referred to as “long interval jackpot”, and a jackpot in which the opening period and the interval period are short (each A jackpot in which the prize balls obtained in a round are unlikely to increase is referred to as a "short interval jackpot".

  As the big hit of the first special symbol, “big hit B5” is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “5 to 14” (see 202b2 in FIG. 76). Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the counter value of "big hit B2" is 10, so if a big hit occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit B5" is determined. Is 10% (10/100). The “big hit B5” has five rounds, like the “big hit B” in the first embodiment, and is given a “special change state of a special symbol” and a “time saving state of a normal symbol” after the end of the big hit. Jackpot type. The “big hit B5” is a kind of long interval big hit like the “big hit A5”. For this reason, the number of prize balls acquired in each round is likely to be larger than that in the case of the short interval jackpot.

  As the big hit of the first special symbol, “big hit C5” is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “15 to 64” (see 202b3 in FIG. 76). Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the counter value of "big hit C2" is 50, so if a big hit occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit C5" is determined. Is 50% (50/100). The "big hit C5" has five rounds like the "big hit B" in the first embodiment, and a "special symbol change state" and a "normal symbol time saving state" are given after the end of the big hit. Jackpot type. This "big hit C5" is a kind of short interval big hit. For this reason, the number of prize balls to be acquired in each round is less likely to be increased than in the long interval jackpot.

  As the big hit of the first special symbol, “big hit D5” is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “65 to 74” (see 202b4 in FIG. 76). Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are ten counter values that are "big hit D5", so if a big hit occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit D5" is determined. Is 10% (10/100). The "big hit D5" has five rounds like the "big hit C" in the first embodiment, and a "low probability state of a special symbol" and a "time saving state of a normal symbol" are given after the end of the big hit. Jackpot type. The “big hit D5” is a kind of long interval big hit. For this reason, the number of prize balls acquired in each round is likely to be larger than that in the case of the short interval jackpot.

  As the big hit of the first special symbol, “big hit E5” is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “75 to 99” (see 202b5 in FIG. 76). Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the counter value of "big hit E5" is 25, so if a big hit occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit E5" is determined. Is 25% (25/100). The "big hit E5" has five rounds like the "big hit C" in the first embodiment, and a "low probability state of a special symbol" and a "time saving state of a normal symbol" are given after the end of the big hit. The type of jackpot to be performed. This "big hit E5" is a kind of short interval big hit. For this reason, the number of prize balls to be acquired in each round is less likely to be increased than in the long interval jackpot.

  As the big hit of the second special symbol, “big hit F5” is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “0 to 4” (see 202b6 in FIG. 76). . Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are five counter values that are "big hit F5", so if a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit F5" is determined. Is 5% (5/100). The "big hit F5" has 16 rounds like the "big hit D" in the first embodiment, and after the big hit is completed, the "special symbol change state" and the "normal symbol time saving state" are given. Jackpot type. The “big hit F5” is a kind of long interval big hit. For this reason, the number of prize balls acquired in each round is likely to be larger than that in the case of the short interval jackpot.

  As the big hit of the second special symbol, "big hit G5" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "5 to 64" (see 202b7 in FIG. 76). Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the counter value of "big hit G5" is 60, so "big hit G5" is determined when a big hit occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol. Is 60% (60/100). The "big hit G5" has 10 rounds, like the "big hit E" in the first embodiment, and is given a "special change state of a special symbol" and a "time saving state of a normal symbol" after the end of the big hit. Jackpot type. The "big hit G5" is a kind of long interval big hit. For this reason, the number of prize balls acquired in each round is likely to be larger than that in the case of the short interval jackpot.

  As the big hit of the second special symbol, "big hit H5" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "65 to 99" (see 202b8 in FIG. 76). Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the counter value of "big hit H5" is 35, so "big hit H5" is determined when a big hit occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol. Is 35% (35/100). The "big hit H5" has 10 rounds like the "big hit D" in the first embodiment, and a "low probability state of special symbol" and a "time saving state of ordinary symbol" are given after the end of the big hit. The type of jackpot to be performed. The "big hit H5" is a kind of long interval big hit. For this reason, the number of prize balls acquired in each round is likely to be larger than that in the case of the short interval jackpot.

  As described above, the fifth embodiment has a configuration in which the long interval jackpot and the short interval jackpot are provided. In the long interval jackpot, since the closing period of the right specific winning opening 65a between rounds is long, more game balls can reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 by right-handing during the long closing period. Therefore, by closing the closing period and starting a new round, it is possible to cause the game balls passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 to enter the right specific winning opening 65a. Can be acquired. On the other hand, in the short interval jackpot, the period from when the right specific winning opening 65a is closed to when the right specific winning opening 65a is next opened is short, and in most cases, the game ball reaches the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 during the closing period. Since it is not possible, the possibility of over-winning in the next round is reduced. Therefore, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in each round is likely to be smaller than the long interval jackpot. Therefore, according to the fifth embodiment, separately from the number of rounds and the game state after the jackpot, the possibility of over-winning varies depending on the jackpot type, so that the degree of advantage for each jackpot can be changed. A game can be played by paying attention to the type.

  Next, the details of the period length selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 (c) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the period length selection table 202e. As shown in FIG. 76 (c), in the period length selection table 202e, the length of a period to be set as an opening period and an interval period is defined for each type of jackpot.

  Specifically, for the jackpot type of "jackpot A5", "jackpot B5", "jackpot D5", "jackpot F5" to "jackpot H5" (long interval jackpot), "5 seconds" is set as the opening period. In addition to being defined in association with each other, “3 seconds” is defined in association with the interval period (see 202e1 in FIG. 76 (c)). For the jackpot types “big jackpot C5” and “big jackpot E5” (short interval jackpot), “1 second” is defined in association with the opening period, and “0.5 seconds” as the interval period. Are defined in association with each other (see 202e2 in FIG. 76 (c)). By selecting the opening period and the interval period with reference to these rules, each closed period (opening period and interval period) becomes relatively long in the long interval jackpot. A relatively large amount can reach the upper surface of the door 65f1. On the other hand, in the short interval jackpot, each closed period is set to a short length such that whether one game ball reaches the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 even if the player hits right after the closing period starts. In each round of the jackpot, over-winning is unlikely to occur. Therefore, by setting the closing period with reference to the period length selection table 202e, it is possible to vary the possibility of occurrence of an over-winning prize according to the jackpot type. Therefore, a game can be played by paying attention to the jackpot type.

<Control Process of Main Control Device in Fifth Embodiment>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the special symbol variation process 5 (S121) in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This special symbol variation process 5 (S121) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21) instead of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment. Similar to (see FIG. 22), this is processing for setting display on the first symbol display device 37 and setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 77) in the fifth embodiment, in each of the processes S202 to S219 and S222 to S224, the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment is performed in each of S202 to S219. The same processes as those of S219 and S222 to S224 are executed.

  Also, when the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 77) in the fifth embodiment is started, it is determined whether or not a big hit is being made (S241), and if it is a big hit (S241: Yes), The process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S241 that the game is not in a big hit (S241: No), the process proceeds to S202.

  In the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 77) in the fifth embodiment, when the process of S219 ends, the big hit start flag 203k is set to ON (S242), and the process proceeds to S224.

  Next, the jackpot control process 5 (S1052) in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The jackpot control process 5 (S1052) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment, and opens and closes the right specific winning opening 65a. This is a process for controlling the operation.

  Of the jackpot control process 5 (see FIG. 78), in each of steps S1201, S1203 to S1209, and S1210 to S1217, S1201, S1203 to S1209, and S1201 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processes as those in S1210 to S1217 are executed.

  In the big hit control process 5 (see FIG. 78) in the fifth embodiment, if it is determined that the big hit start flag 203k is ON in the process of S1201 (S1201: Yes), the period length selection table 202e (FIG. 76) (See (c)) (S1241), an opening period having a length corresponding to the current jackpot type is specified from the read period length selection table 202e, and an opening command indicating the specified period is set (S1242). . In the process of S1242, an opening command indicating an opening period of 5 seconds is set for a long interval big hit, and an opening command indicating a 1 second opening period is set for a short interval big hit. Upon completion of the process in S1242, the process proceeds to S1203.

  In the big hit control process 5 (see FIG. 78) in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined that the closing condition of the right specific winning opening 65a is satisfied in the process of S1208 (S1208: Yes), the big hit type is determined. An interval setting process for setting an interval period is executed (S1243), and this process ends. Details of the interval setting process (S1243) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the interval setting process (S1243). In the interval setting process (S1243), first, it is determined whether the closing condition that has been satisfied this time is closing at the end of the last round (S1401). : Yes), there is no need to set an interval period, and thus this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1401 that the closing condition associated with the end of the round other than the last round is satisfied (S1401: No), the period length selection table 202e is read (S1402), and the current jackpot type is determined. The length of the interval period to be performed is selected (specified) from the read period length selection table 202e (S1403). Then, the start of the interval period of the length specified in the processing of S1403 is set (S1404), and this processing ends.

  By executing the interval setting process (see FIG. 79), the length of the interval period can be varied depending on whether the hit is a long hit or a short hit. Accordingly, in the long interval jackpot, a large number of game balls can reach the upper surface of the closed door 65f1 at each interval period, and thus a large number of game balls reach the right specific winning opening 65a at the start of the next round. Can be over won. On the other hand, when a short interval jackpot occurs, an extremely short period (0.5 seconds) is set as the interval period. It will be difficult. Therefore, over-winning is unlikely to occur in each round, and the number of prize balls that can be obtained in each round is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play a game in expectation of selecting the long interval jackpot as the jackpot type.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, a jackpot opening period and a long interval jackpot having a relatively long interval period and a jackpot opening period and a short interval jackpot having a relatively short interval period are provided. It has a configuration. If a long interval jackpot has been reached, the closing period (opening period) between the notification of the jackpot and the start of the first round, and the next round starting after one round ends In the closing period (interval period) before the above, a large amount of prize balls can reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 by performing right-handing. Therefore, when the closing period elapses and the right specific winning opening 65a is opened, the game balls on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 can be made to enter the right specific winning opening 65a at a stretch. The rate of occurrence of over winning can be increased. On the other hand, in the case of the short interval jackpot, even if the player hits right during the closing period, the closing period is too short and the next round is started without the game ball reaching the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 almost. . Therefore, over-winning is unlikely to occur, which is more disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls than a long-range jackpot. With these, in addition to the number of jackpot rounds and the game state after the end of the jackpot, the probability of occurrence of over-winning can be varied according to the jackpot type, so that the difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type is increased. be able to. Therefore, in the case of a big hit, a game can be played by paying attention to the big hit type.

  Note that, in the fifth embodiment, only two types are provided: a long interval jackpot in which all closed periods are long and a short interval jackpot in which all closed periods are short. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A configuration in which more types are provided may be employed. Specifically, for example, in addition to the long interval jackpot and the short interval jackpot, a long interval (for example, 3 seconds) is set as a closing period until a predetermined round (for example, the third round) of the jackpot, and the subsequent rounds In the jackpot type, a short interval (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set, and conversely, a short interval (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set as a closing period until a predetermined round (for example, the third round). In a subsequent round, a jackpot type in which a long interval (for example, 3 seconds) is set may be provided. Further, for example, a configuration in which a big hit type in which short intervals and long intervals are alternately repeated may be provided. By configuring in this way, even if the opening period is a short interval, the player is told that a big hit that becomes a long interval after a predetermined round has passed or a big hit where the short interval and the long interval are alternately repeated is given to the player. Can be expected. In addition, when the opening period is a long interval, it can be expected to be a jackpot in which a long interval is set in all the closing periods. Thereby, it is possible to give the player a pleasure of predicting the jackpot type.

  In the fifth embodiment, when a long interval big hit occurs, both the opening period and the interval period are set to a long interval, and when a short interval big hit occurs, both the opening period and the interval period are short. The interval was used, but it is not limited to this. For example, one may be a period of a common length, and only the length of the other period may be different depending on the jackpot type. Thereby, control can be simplified, so that the processing load on MPU 201 of main controller 110 can be reduced.

  In the fifth embodiment, the length of the opening period and the length of the interval period are made different according to the type of jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively or additionally, at least one of the opening period and the interval period may be made different depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Specifically, for example, in the low probability state of the special symbol disadvantageous to the player and in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, a short opening period (for example, 1 second) and an interval period (for example, 0.5 seconds) On the other hand, a long opening period (for example, 5 seconds) and an interval period (for example, 3 seconds) are set in the gaming state (probable change state, time saving state) in which the time saving state of the ordinary symbol is set. A configuration in which a jackpot type is provided may be adopted. As a result, it is possible to further improve the advantage degree of the probable change state and the time saving state that are advantageous to the player. Conversely, a configuration in which a long closing period is set in a gaming state disadvantageous to the player, and a short closing period is set in an advantageous gaming state. Thereby, when a big hit is made in a disadvantageous state for the player, more prize balls can be obtained, so that it is possible to suppress quitting the game in a disadvantageous state. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. Further, the control for changing the length of the closing period according to the game state or the jackpot type does not necessarily need to be combined with the right variable winning device 65 in the present embodiment. The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine 10 provided with only a variable winning device (for example, the left variable winning device 650 in each of the above embodiments) having a structure in which an over-win can not be intentionally generated. Thereby, the closing period can be changed according to the situation (the type of the winning jackpot, the gaming state at the time of the winning, etc.), so that the effect performed in the closing period can be made different. Therefore, the production mode can be diversified.

<Modification of Fifth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 80, a modified example of the above-described fifth embodiment will be described. In the above-described fifth embodiment, one variable winning device 65 is used, The technique of providing a jackpot type that is difficult to win has been described. On the other hand, in the present modification, a technique for using two types of variable prize apparatuses (lower variable prize apparatus 65 and upper variable prize apparatus 650) to change the possibility of occurrence of an over prize without changing the closing period. explain.

  FIG. 80 is a view showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to a modification of the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 80, in this modification, a lower variable winning device 65 having the same structure as the right variable winning device 65 in each of the above embodiments is arranged at the same position as the right variable winning device 65 in each of the above embodiments. Have been. Above the lower variable winning device 65, a variable winning device 650 having the same structure as the left variable winning device 650 in the first to fourth embodiments is disposed. In this modified example, according to the jackpot type, the jackpot type (alternative jackpot) in which the upper specific winning port 650a of the upper variable winning device 650 and the lower specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 are alternately opened for each round. ) And a jackpot type (one-side jackpot) in which the lower specific winning opening 65a is opened in each round of the jackpot. In addition, each closed period (opening period, interval period) is set to the same period as the short interval big hit in the fifth embodiment described above. In the case of such a configuration, the operation of one big hit is the same as that of the short-interval big hit in the above-described fifth embodiment, so that there is almost no over-winning, which is disadvantageous in the number of prize balls.

  On the other hand, in the case of an alternating jackpot, if a right-handed hit is made in a round in which the upper specific winning opening 650a is open, some game balls pass through the right side of the upper specific winning opening 650a (the upper specific winning opening). It may flow downward (without winning the opening 650a) and reach the upper surface of the door 65f1. That is, at the start of the next round (the round in which the lower specific winning opening 65a is opened), there is a possibility that one or more game balls are arranged on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. As a result, as the number of game balls reaching the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 increases, the rate of occurrence of over-winning in the next round (the round in which the lower specific winning opening 65a is opened) increases. Therefore, in the case of an alternate jackpot, the player is allowed to play the game by devising the firing intensity so as to easily pass through the right side of the upper specific winning opening 650a and reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. Can be. That is, during the maximum 30 seconds during which the upper specific winning opening 650a is open, more game balls reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1, and then the upper specific winning opening 650a has more than the upper limit number (two) of games. A game can be played with the aim of letting the ball enter. As a result, in the case of an alternating jackpot, the prize balls that can be obtained differ according to the player's playing method, so that a player who is confident in technology can play the game with the pachinko machine 10 positively. Can be done. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

<Sixth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described fifth embodiment, the opening period and the ending period (the length of the closing period) are made different depending on the type of the jackpot, so that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the right variable winning device 65 is reached in each closing period. The number of game balls that can be varied is configured to be different. Thereby, at the start of each round, the game ball passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 (ie, when the right specific winning opening 65a is opened, it is arranged at a position guided to the inside of the right specific winning opening 65a. (The number of game balls in the game). In a long interval jackpot in which a closing period of a length that allows more than two game balls to reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 is set, a game ball is continuously fired toward the opening / closing door 65f1 during the closing period. By simply continuing, it is possible to cause all the game balls passing on the open / close door 65f1 at the start of the next round to win the opened right specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, in each round of the jackpot which is completed by winning two or more game balls, the number of game balls exceeding the specified number (two) is thrown in simply by right-handing continuously during the closing period. be able to. On the other hand, in a short interval big hit where a closing period of a length that allows only two or less game balls to reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 is set, the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 is passed at the start of each round of the big hit. The number of game balls inside is reduced to substantially two or less. As a result, in each round of the jackpot, almost only the specified number (two) of game balls enter and the round ends. With these, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in each round of the jackpot can be made different according to the jackpot type, so that the difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type can be further increased.

  On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, the length of the opening period is fixed at 0.5 seconds regardless of the type of big hit. In other words, even if the player hits right after the start of the opening period, the opening period ends before the game ball reaches the opening / closing door 65f1, and the right specific winning opening 65a is opened. Then, based on the suggestion during the execution of the fluctuation display effect, whether it is better to fire the game ball during the fluctuation display (whether the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened in a state where a plurality of game balls reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1) Is determined by the player. In other words, during the execution of the variable display, it is possible to execute an effect that informs the player of the possibility of being advantageous when right-handed. This allows the player to predict whether it is better to make a right-hand from the contents of the effect, and if it is determined that it is better to make a right-hand, the right You can start beating. Therefore, when the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened as predicted, it is possible to give the player a sense of happiness that the over-winning prize has been generated on his own.

  The pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment in the configuration in that the arrangement and the number of the passage detection sensors 228 provided in the right variable winning device 65 are changed. The configuration of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main control device 110 is partially changed; the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the audio ramp control device 113 is partially changed; The control processing executed by the MPU 221 is partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the fifth section. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the arrangement of the passage detection sensor 228 provided in the right variable winning device 65 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a top view of the right variable winning device 65 according to the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 81, the right variable winning device 65 in the sixth embodiment is located on the entrance side (right side in front view) and the exit side (left side in front view) of the flow path provided on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. , And pass detection sensors 228g1 and 228g2 capable of detecting the passage of the game balls are provided. The passage detection sensor 228g1 can detect a game ball flowing into a flow path provided on the upper surface of the door 65f1. Further, the passage detection sensor 228g2 can detect a game ball that has completely passed through the flow path provided on the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 and has been discharged to the left side of the opening and closing door 65f1. In the sixth embodiment, the number of game balls flowing into the flow path provided on the upper surface of the door 65f1 (the number of game balls detected by the passage detection sensor 228g1) and the number of game balls provided on the upper surface of the door 65f1 By calculating the difference from the number of game balls discharged from the flow path (the number of game balls detected by the passage detection sensor 228g2), the number of game balls passing through the upper surface of the door 65f1 is calculated. , So that it can be grasped more accurately.

  As shown in FIG. 81, in the right variable winning device 65 in the sixth embodiment, the flow of the game ball is prevented (the period required for the game ball to decelerate and pass the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1). In addition to the convex portions 65f1a to 65f1c on the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1, convex portions 65f1d and 65f1e capable of preventing the flow of game balls are provided on the left and right sides of the opening and closing door 65f1. ing. The convex portion 65f1d allows the game ball flowing down from the right side of the right variable winning device 65 to flow into the flow path on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 from the front side of the upper surface of the right variable winning device 65 in front view. Further, by the convex portion 65f1e, when discharging from the flow path provided on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1, the discharging position can be limited to the near side in front view of the right variable winning device 65. The flow paths through which the game balls on the entrance side (right side in front view) and the exit side (left side in front view) of the flow path on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 can pass (the range not blocked by the convex portions 65f1d and 65f1e) are provided. The width is such that only one game ball can pass (the width of 1.5 game balls), and pass detection sensors 228g1 and 228g2 are disposed at the center thereof. Passage detection provided on one entrance side and one exit side is achieved by narrowing the flow path on the entrance side and the exit side (the width of 1.5 game balls) as compared with the above embodiments. By the sensors 228g1 and 228g2, a game ball flowing into the flow path on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 and a game ball flowing out of the flow path can be detected more reliably. Therefore, the number of game balls passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 can be grasped more accurately.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84, a description will be given of a right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect that may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the execution of the variable display effect in the sixth embodiment. Do. This right-handed expectation suggestion effect is an effect that may be executed as a part of the fluctuation display effect that evolves into super reach or special reach, and when a game ball is fired toward the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. This is a production to suggest the degree of expectation of whether or not it is advantageous to the player. That is, when more game balls reach the flow path on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 during the fluctuation display, the right specific winning opening 65a is opened to indicate the degree of expectation of whether or not an over-winning will occur. It is a production.

  FIG. 82A is a diagram illustrating a display mode during super reach in which a right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect is set. As described above, in the sixth embodiment, a right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect is executed in a part of the case where the game has developed into a super reach effect or a special reach effect. In this right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 82 (a), an image of an adventurer character holding a sword and a shield and an enemy monster glaring is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Displayed on the display screen. In addition, a display area HR4 in which the character “Defeat the enemy!” Is displayed on the upper side of the display screen, and a third symbol that is changing in the reach state is reduced and displayed on the right side of the display area HR4. Is done. With these display contents, it is possible to make the player understand that if the adventurer can defeat the enemy monster, it will be a big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 82A, the torso of the monster has a cross-shaped cross. Further, a decoration imitating a scratch on the torso of the monster is provided on the front side of the right variable winning device 65 in the sixth embodiment in a front view. Thereby, it is possible to give the player an impression that the wound of the monster is related to the right variable winning device 65. In addition, although the details will be described later, in the sixth embodiment, an effect is performed in which the adventurer performs an attack aiming at the wound of the monster. In accordance with this, as a player participation type effect, an effect of firing a game ball aiming at the right variable winning device 65 provided with a decoration imitating a scar of a monster is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 82 (b), in the right-handed expected degree suggestion effect, after the image in which the adventurer and the monster glare is displayed, the upper part of the abdomen of the monster is zoomed up and displayed, and the image of the monster is displayed. A display area HR5 displaying a physical strength gauge LG indicating the remaining physical strength of the monster is formed on the right side of. With these display contents, the remaining physical strength of the monster can be visually and easily understood by the player.

  On the left side of the monster, an image of an arrow pointing to the wound of the monster is displayed, and in the display area HR4, a character saying “Aim for the wound!” And an image imitating the scratch are displayed. Is displayed. Further, the vicinity of the decorative part simulating a flaw in the right variable winning device 65 emits a color in accordance with the degree of expectation of the present effect. It is suggested to the player that the game contents are fired by aiming at the right variable winning device 65 provided with a decoration imitating a scratch by the effect contents, thereby possibly causing an over-winning. Can be.

  The right variable winning device 65 according to the sixth embodiment incorporates light emitting diodes (LEDs) of a plurality of kinds of luminescent colors in order to emit light in the vicinity of a decorative part imitating a flaw. That is, a white LED, a blue LED, a green LED, and a red LED are built in. Although details will be described later, in the sixth embodiment, white light emission color has the lowest expectation, blue has higher expectation than white, green has higher expectation than blue, and red has the highest expectation. Is configured to be higher. Thereby, it becomes advantageous when the game ball is fired on the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 using the emission color of the right variable winning device 65 as a clue (whether the right specific winning opening 65a is opened and an over winning occurs). I can make you guess. Therefore, it is possible to play the game by paying more attention to the content of the right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect.

  FIG. 83 (a) shows a display mode in a case where the player fires a game ball aiming at the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 by right-handing in a right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect. As shown in FIG. 83 (a), after the display content (see FIG. 82 (b)) suggesting that an attack should be made aiming at a monster's wound in the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect, the game ball is displayed. Each time passes through the passage detection sensor 228g1, an effect is executed in which the adventurer attacks the wound of the monster, thereby reducing the monster's physical strength gauge LG by one gauge. By performing the effect of reducing this gauge, it is possible to make the player think that it is easier to beat the monster if right-handed, so that the game ball can be positively right-handed . Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect.

  In the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect according to the sixth embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the gauge number of the physical strength gauge LG can be reduced to 0, while the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order. In such a case, the configuration is such that only the remaining one gauge is reduced (the number of gauges does not become zero). This allows the player who wants to know the result of the special symbol lottery before the third symbol is stopped and displayed to more positively fire the game ball toward the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. Can be. Thereby, the player's willingness to participate in the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect can be further improved.

  FIG. 83 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the time of stoppage of fluctuation in a case where a fluctuation display in which a special symbol lottery results in a jackpot and a right-turning expectation degree suggestion effect is set and executed. As shown in FIG. 83 (b), when the big hit is notified, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the display area HR3 in a state where the same numerals are aligned. In addition to this, an effect is performed in which the monster falls down due to the attack of the adventurer and the gauge number of the physical strength gauge is reduced to zero. In addition, the word “WIN” is displayed in the display area HR4. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the big hit has occurred.

  Further, these display contents are continuously displayed during the opening period. As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the opening period is configured to be as short as 0.5 second. Therefore, by performing the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect until the opening period, the effect is prevented from becoming unnatural by performing the effect for only 0.5 seconds. At the end of the opening period, the right specific winning opening 65a is opened. Therefore, when the player makes a right-hand during the execution of the right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect and the game ball reaches the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. Enters the right specific winning opening 65a in which the game ball is opened.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 84, a temporal change in the display mode before and after the variable display effect in which the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect is set in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 84 (a) is a diagram showing a temporal change of a display mode when a right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect is executed in a variable display effect in a case where a jackpot has been won in a special symbol lottery. FIG. 84 (a) illustrates an example in which a super reach having a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is selected as a fluctuation type. As shown in FIG. 84 (a), when the variable display corresponding to the big hit is started, first, the normal variable display is started, and the variable display of the third symbol constituting each symbol row is started. Then, when 10 seconds have elapsed since the start of the fluctuation display of the third symbol, a reach state occurs. That is, the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed in the third symbol with the same number, and only the middle symbol row Z2 is variably displayed.

  When 20 seconds elapse after the occurrence of the reach state, the game develops into a super reach and a right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect (see FIG. 82 (a)) is started. Then, if 26 seconds have elapsed since the start of the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect (that is, when the remaining time is 4 seconds until the end of the change), the character "Aim for a wound !!" is displayed in the display area HR4. (See FIG. 82 (b)). In this effect, as described above, the emission color of the right variable winning device 65 indicates a degree of expectation as to whether or not it is advantageous when right-handed. Shooting about 7 game balls by right-handing for 4.5 seconds, the remaining 4 seconds before the fluctuation time ends and 0.5 seconds of the jackpot opening period Therefore, at the start of one round, about seven game balls can be entered almost simultaneously. In the following description, the effect of notifying the degree of expectation as to whether or not it is advantageous when right-handing is performed by the emission color of the right variable winning device 65 (the character "Aim at the scratch!" Is displayed as an “expectation degree notification effect”.

  Actually, in most cases, firing is started after confirming the emission color and judging whether or not the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened. The number decreases. If a game ball is fired in the off state, all the game balls fired are wasted (almost all game balls are ejected from the out port 66). This is because if a game is performed by the game method to be performed, the game is spoiled. Therefore, each time an effect (expected degree notification effect) in which the character "Aim for a wound!" Is displayed for the player, it is accurately determined whether or not the right specific winning opening 65a is opened. If it is determined that the game will be released, it is possible to promptly start a right-handed game and make the player play the game. Accordingly, the player's willingness to participate in the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect can be improved, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  After 0.5 seconds of the opening period of the jackpot, the first round of the jackpot is started, the right specific winning opening 65a is opened, and an effect indicating that the jackpot has been started (an effect equivalent to an opening effect). Is executed over a round period of one round and an interval period after one round is completed. Then, when the second round of the jackpot is started, a jackpot effect in a normal mode is executed. Compared to the case where the opening effect is performed during 0.5 seconds of the actual opening period, by configuring the effect corresponding to the opening effect over the period until the second round of the jackpot starts Then, it can be notified by the effect that the jackpot has been started for a sufficiently long time. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more surely recognize that the big hit has started.

  FIG. 84 (b) is a diagram showing the temporal change of the display mode when the fluctuation type of super-reach out of 60.5 seconds is determined as the fluctuation pattern and the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect is set. is there. As shown in FIG. 84 (b), the temporal change of the effect mode in the case of the departure is exactly the same as the case of the big hit at least until the expectation degree notification effect occurs. On the other hand, as described above, the selectivity of the luminescent color of the decorative portion of the right variable winning device 65 is different from that in the case of the big hit. Therefore, when the expected degree notification effect occurs, it is determined whether to start right-handing depending on whether the luminous color selected at the jackpot is a high luminous color or the luminous color selected at the outside is a high luminous color. The player can be judged.

  As shown in FIG. 84 (b), when 60 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, it is notified that the monster could not be defeated by the attack of the adventurer, and the combination of the third symbol corresponding to the departure is stopped. A message is displayed to inform the user of the disconnection. Thereby, the player can easily understand that the result of the lottery of the special symbol is out of this time. The notification of the detachment (stop display of the combination of the third symbols corresponding to the detachment) continues for 0.5 seconds. In the case of a big hit, the fluctuation time is longer by 0.5 seconds in the case of the deviation, as described above, the right-handed expectation degree is indicated by using the 0.5-second opening period of the big hit as described above. This is for performing the effect. In other words, even in the case of departure, by setting the same effect time as in the case of the big hit, the effect mode up to the lapse of 60 seconds at which the final result is notified can be shared. Therefore, the effect can be executed using the common data, so that it is possible to reduce the amount of data for executing the right-handed expectation degree indicating effect.

  As described above, in the sixth embodiment, when the right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect is set, the effect having the same aspect except for the selectivity of the luminescent color of the decorative portion of the right variable winning device 65 ends, and the effect ends. Continue until 0.5 seconds ago. This allows the player to determine whether it is better to make a right-handed shot based on the emission color of the right variable winning device 65.

  As described above, in the sixth embodiment, each time a game ball passes the passage detection sensor 228g1 after the occurrence of the expected degree notification effect, the gauge number of the physical strength gauge LG indicating the physical strength of the monster is increased by one. It is displayed decreasing. Then, when a big hit occurs (the right specific winning opening 65a is opened), the physical strength gauge LG decreases to 0, and when it is off, the physical strength gauge LG decreases only to 1. Therefore, if the player keeps right-handing, it may be possible to quickly detect whether or not a big hit will occur. Since the initial value of the gauge of the physical strength gauge LG is 5, by making five game balls reach the passage detection sensor 228g1, it is possible to detect whether or not it is a big hit. That is, if the number of gauges decreases to 0, it can be determined that there is a jackpot, while if the number of gauges does not decrease from 1, it can be determined that the number is out of range. However, it takes at least three seconds to fire five game balls. It takes about one second for the launched game ball to reach the passage detection sensor 228g1. Therefore, even if the game balls are fired after confirming the emission color of the right variable winning device 65, it becomes difficult to pass five game balls through the passage detection sensor 228g1. For this reason, it is possible to cause a player who wants to detect the jackpot as soon as possible to fire the game ball before the expected degree notification effect is generated. In other words, depending on the taste of each player, it is possible to determine whether or not a big hit is achieved as soon as possible, and to determine whether or not to make a right hit by estimating whether or not a big hit is from the emission color of the right variable winning device 65. The player can select the game property to be determined. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game characteristic adapted to the taste of each player, and it is possible to further enhance the interest of the player in the game.

  In the sixth embodiment, when the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect is set in the variable display effect corresponding to the jackpot, when five or more game balls pass through the passage detection sensor 228g1, the physical strength gauge LG Is always reduced to 0, but is not limited to this. For example, in the case of a big hit, the gauge number of the physical strength gauge LG can be reduced to 0 at a predetermined rate (for example, a rate of 50%), and in other cases, it is reduced only until the gauge number becomes 1. May be configured. With such a configuration, even if the number of gauges decreases only to 1, the expectation of the jackpot can be maintained.

<Electrical Configuration in Sixth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86, the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 according to the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 85A is a block diagram showing a configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. 85A, the ROM 222 in the sixth embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the fifth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. The difference is that 222b is added. The other configuration is the same as that of the above-described fifth embodiment, and thus the detailed description is omitted.

  The effect mode selection table 222b is a data table that is referred to when selecting an effect mode to be executed in the variable display effect. The effect mode selection table 222b defines a plurality of effect modes including the above-described right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect, and determines a mode corresponding to a value of an effect lottery counter 223j described later at the start of the variable display effect. Is done. Details of the effect mode selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 86 is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the effect mode selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 86, the effect mode selection table 222b defines, for each change type, an effect mode that can be selected and a range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223j in association with each other. Specifically, for the fluctuation type “hit special reach”, the normal effect is defined as the effect type in association with the value range of the effect lottery counter 223j “0 to 39” (222b1 in FIG. 86). reference). The normal effect is a general term for an effect mode in which it becomes difficult to understand whether or not it is advantageous when right-handed is performed until immediately before the fluctuation stop. More specifically, in the case of a jackpot and in the case of a jackpot, it is determined whether or not a jackpot is determined from the staging mode, except for whether or not a third symbol with the same number is provided at the end of the change. Is an effect of an aspect in which it becomes difficult. When this normal effect is executed, it cannot be determined whether or not a big hit has occurred until the stop of the third symbol. Therefore, even if the player senses a big hit and starts right-handing, the first round is started before more than two game balls reach the upper surface of the door 65f1. Therefore, when the normal effect is selected, it is difficult to make an over prize in the first round.

  Of the 100 possible values of “0-99” that can be taken by the value of the effect lottery counter 223j, the counter value associated with “normal effect” is 40, so when the variation type of the winning special reach is determined In addition, the ratio at which the normal effect is determined as the effect mode is 40% (40/100).

  On the other hand, for the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223j “40 to 99”, a right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect is defined as an effect mode (see 222b2 to 222b5 in FIG. 86). Of these, a right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect in which an expectation notification effect of an aspect in which “white” is set as the emission color of the right variable winning device 65 is defined in a range of “40 to 49”. (Refer to 222b2 in FIG. 86), the mode in which “blue” is set as the emission color is defined in association with the range of “50 to 74” (see 222b3 in FIG. 86), and the range of “75 to 90” Is associated with a mode in which “green” is set as the emission color (see 222 b 4 in FIG. 86), and an aspect in which “red” is set as the emission color in the range of “90 to 99”. It is defined in association (see 222b5 in FIG. 86).

  Of the 100 possible values of the effect lottery counter 223j, the counter values whose emission colors are associated with “white”, “blue”, “green”, and “red” are 10, 25, respectively. Since there are fifteen and ten, the proportions at which the respective emission colors are determined are 10% (10/100), 25% (25/100), 15% (15/100), and 10% (10/100), respectively. is there.

  Further, for the variation type “winning super reach”, the normal effect is defined as the effect type in association with the value range of the effect lottery counter 223j “0 to 74” (see 222b6 in FIG. 86). Of the 100 possible values of the effect lottery counter 223j, the counter value associated with “normal effect” is 75, so if the fluctuation type of the winning super reach is determined, the effect mode is usually The rate at which the effect is determined is 75% (75/100).

  On the other hand, for the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223j of “75 to 99”, a right-handing expectation degree suggesting effect is defined in association with the effect mode (see 222b7 and 222b8 in FIG. 86). Among them, “white” is defined as the emission color of the right variable prize device 65 in the expectation notification effect in the range of “75 to 94” (see 222 b 7 in FIG. 86), and “95 to 99” A mode in which “red” is set as the emission color is defined in association with the range (see 222b8 in FIG. 86). Out of the 100 possible values of the effect lottery counter 223j, the emission colors are determined to be “white” and “red”, respectively, and the counter values are respectively 20 and 5, so each emission color is determined. The proportions are 20% (20/100) and 5% (5/100), respectively.

  In addition, for the variation type “out of special reach”, the normal effect is defined as the effect type in association with the value range of the effect lottery counter 223j “0 to 89” (see 222b9 in FIG. 86). Of the 100 possible values of the effect lottery counter 223j, the counter value associated with the "normal effect" is 90, so if the variation type of the out-of-special reach is determined, the effect mode is normally The effect is determined at a rate of 90% (90/100).

  On the other hand, for the value range of the effect lottery counter 223j of “90 to 99”, a right-turning expectation degree suggesting effect is defined in association with the effect mode (see 222b10 to 222b12 in FIG. 86). Of these, “white” is defined as the emission color of the right variable winning device 65 in the expectation notification effect in the range of “90 to 96” (see 222b10 in FIG. 86), and “97, 98” A mode in which “blue” is set as the emission color is defined in association with the range (see 222b11 in FIG. 86), and a mode in which “green” is set as the emission color corresponds to “99”. (See 222b12 in FIG. 86). Of the 100 possible values of the effect lottery counter 223j, there are seven, two, and one counter values associated with the emission colors of "white", "blue", and "green", respectively. The ratio at which each emission color is determined is 7% (7/100), 2% (2/100), and 1% (1/100), respectively.

  That is, when the hit special reach is compared with the off-special reach, the hit special reach has a higher rate of selecting the right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect (the rate of selecting the normal effect is lower). Therefore, when the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the jackpot. In addition, in the hit special reach, the determination ratio of the “white” and “blue” emission colors in the case where the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect is determined is lower than that in the off-special reach, while the “green” The emission color determination ratio is increased. Also, only in the case of the hit special reach, the emission color of “red” may be determined. Therefore, when the emission color becomes “green”, it is possible to make the player think that right-handing is more likely to be advantageous. In addition, when it becomes “red”, the player can be notified that the right specific winning opening 65a is opened.

  Further, for the variation type “out of super reach”, the normal effect is defined as the effect type in association with the value range of the effect lottery counter 223j “0 to 94” (see 222b13 in FIG. 86). Of the 100 possible values of the effect lottery counter 223j, the counter value associated with the “normal effect” is 95, so when the variation type of the out-of-reach super reach is determined, the effect mode is usually The rate at which the effect is determined is 95% (95/100).

  On the other hand, for the value range of the effect lottery counter 223j of “95 to 99”, an expectation notification effect corresponding to the emission color of “white” is defined in association with the effect mode (222b14 in FIG. 86). reference). Of the 100 possible values of the effect lottery counter 223j, there are five counter values that are associated with the expected degree notification effect in which the luminescent color is “white”, so the expected value notification in which the luminescent color is “white” is provided. The rate at which the effect is determined is 5% (5/100).

  That is, when the hit superreach is compared with the out-of-range superreach, the hit superreach has a higher rate of selecting the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect (the rate of selecting the normal effect is lower). Therefore, when the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the jackpot. Further, in the hit superreach, the determination ratio of the “white” emission color in the case where the right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect is determined is lower than in the off-superreach. Also, only in the case of the hit special reach, the emission color of “red” may be determined. Therefore, when the emission color becomes “white”, it is possible to make the player guess whether right-handing is advantageous or not. In addition, when it becomes “red”, the player can be notified that the right specific winning opening 65a is opened.

  In addition, the fluctuation types other than the "Variation Special Reach", "Variation Super Reach", "Missing Special Reach", and "Missing Super Reach" ")," Normal effect "is defined in association with all possible value ranges of the effect lottery counter 223j (see 222b15 in FIG. 86). Therefore, when the variation type is “hit normal reach”, “outside normal reach”, “outside long”, or “outside short”, the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect is not executed.

  As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the ratio of determining the right-handed expectation suggestion effect and the ratio of selecting each emission color in the expectation notification effect in the right-handed expectation effect effect are determined according to the variation type. And make them different. This allows the player to determine whether it is better to perform right-handing based on the emission color of the right variable winning device 65 when the expected degree notification effect is executed. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, a configuration of the RAM 223 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 85 (b), the RAM 223 in the sixth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 14 (b)) in that an effect lottery counter 223j, a passing number counter 223k 223m, a physical strength gauge counter 223n, a notification standby flag 223p, and a notification type storage area 223q.

  The effect lottery counter 223j is a counter used to select the mode of the variable display effect from the above-described effect mode selection table 222b (see FIG. 86), and the value is updated in the range of “0 to 99”. At the start of the change, the effect mode corresponding to the value of the effect lottery counter 223j is selected from the effect mode selection table 222b.

  The passing number counter 223k is a counter for counting the number of game balls passing on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. The value of the passing number counter 223k is set to 1 each time the passing of the game ball is detected (the output becomes H) by the passing detecting sensor 228g1 provided on the upstream side among the passing detecting sensors 228g1 and 228g2. Is incremented by one. That is, one is added each time a game ball flows into the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. Further, the value of the passing number counter 223k is incremented by 1 each time the passing of the game ball is detected (the output becomes H) by the passing detection sensor 228g2 provided on the downstream side. That is, each time a game ball flows out of the flow path on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1, it is decremented by one.

  The notification effect flag 223m indicates whether or not an effect information notification effect (an effect for notifying the degree of expectation as to whether it is advantageous when right-handed by the emission color of the right variable prize device 65) is being performed. Is a flag that indicates If the notification effect flag 223m is on, it indicates that the expectation information effect is being executed. If it is off, it indicates that the expectation information effect is not being executed. The notification effect flag 223m is turned on when the start of the expectation notification effect is set (see S4708 in FIG. 88), and is set off when the big hit is started.

  The physical strength gauge counter 223n is a counter that indicates the number of physical strength gauges LG displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the execution of the expected degree notification effect. As the counter value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n, a value obtained by subtracting the value of the passing number counter 223k from the maximum value of the physical strength gauge number “5” is set as an initial value at the start of the expected degree notification effect (FIG. 88). S4706). Thus, if the game ball is hit right before the expectation notification effect is started, and a plurality of game balls are passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 at the start of the expectation notification effect, the expected During the execution of the degree notification effect, it is possible to shorten the period required until the number of gauges of the physical strength gauge counter LG is completely reduced. Therefore, it is possible for a player who wants to know whether or not a jackpot is to be obtained as soon as possible to hit the game ball right before the expectation degree notification effect is started. When the value of the passing number counter 223k is 4 or more at the start of the expected degree notification effect, the value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n is uniformly set to 1 regardless of the value of the passing number counter 223k (FIG. 88). S4705). That is, even in the case of the big hit, the gauge number of the physical strength gauge LG does not become 0 immediately after the start of the expected degree notification effect. Therefore, it is possible to make the player determine whether it is better to start right-handing based on the emission color of the right variable winning device 65 as a clue. The physical strength gauge counter 223n detects the passage of the game ball by the upstream passage detection sensor 228g1 until the lower limit value set for each special symbol lottery result (0 for a big hit, 1 for a loss). Each time it is performed, the value is updated by subtracting 1 (see S4217 in FIG. 87).

  The notification standby flag 223p is a flag indicating whether or not the variable display effect in which the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect is set is being executed and the start timing of the expectation degree notification effect has not been reached. This notification waiting flag 223p is set to ON when execution of the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect is determined (see S4805 in FIG. 90), and is set to OFF when start of the expectation degree notification effect is set. (See S4708 in FIG. 88).

  The notification type storage area 223q is a storage area for storing data indicating the type of the expectation notification effect (the light emission color of the right variable winning device 65) executed in the right-handed expectation effect suggestion effect. When the type of the expected degree notification effect is determined with reference to the effect mode selection table 222b at the start of the change, data corresponding to the determined type is stored in the notification type storage area 223q (FIG. 90). See S4804). Note that the notification type storage area 223q is formed of, for example, a 1-byte storage area. If “01H” is stored, the notification type storage area 223q indicates an expectation notification effect in which the emission color “white” is set, and “02H” is stored. If it is set, the expected color notification effect in which the luminescent color “blue” is set is indicated. If “03H” is stored, the expected color information effect in which the luminescent color “green” is set, and “04H” is stored. If so, an emission degree notification effect in which the emission color “red” is set is shown. On the other hand, when “00H” is stored, it indicates that the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect is not set.

<Control Processing of Voice Lamp Control Device in Sixth Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the effect update processing 6 (S4121) in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This effect update process 6 (S4121) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 34) instead of the effect update process (see FIG. 35), and is for updating the effect mode according to the game situation. This is the process.

  In the effect update processing 6 (see FIG. 87), first, the output of the passage detection sensor 228g1 arranged on the upstream side of the upper surface of the right variable winning device 65 (the inlet side of the flow path on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1) is set to H. (S4211), and if it is determined that the output is H (S4211: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the passing number counter 223k and updated (S4212). Next, it is determined whether the notification effect flag 223m is on (S4213). If it is determined that the notification effect flag 223m is on (S4213: Yes), the state of the physical strength gauge LG is updated. After performing the processing for performing the processing (S4214 to S4218), the processing proceeds to S4219. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S4211 that the output of the passage detection sensor 228g1 is L (S4211: No), and when it is determined that the notification effect flag 223m is off in the processing of S4213 (S4213: No). Since there is no possibility of changing the display mode of the physical strength gauge LG, the processing of S4214 to S4218 for updating the mode of the physical strength gauge LG is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4219.

  Here, a process for updating the state of the physical strength gauge LG will be described in detail. In the processing for updating the physical strength gauge LG, first, it is determined whether or not the current special symbol lottery is a big hit (S4214). If it is determined that the current special symbol lottery result is a big hit ( S4214: Yes) Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n is 1 or more (S4215). That is, it is determined whether or not the gauge number of the physical strength gauge LG has reached the lower limit (0) of the hit, and if the value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n is 1 or more (the gauge number has not reached the lower limit). When it is determined (S4215: Yes), the value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n is updated by subtracting 1 from the value (S4217), and the display mode of the physical strength gauge LG is changed to the gauge number corresponding to the updated value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n. (S4218), and the process moves to S4219. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4215 that the value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n is 0 (the gauge number has reached the lower limit) (S4215: No), it is not necessary to update the display mode of the physical strength gauge LG. , S4217, and S4218 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S4219.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S4214, when it is determined that the current lottery result of the special symbol is out of place (not a big hit) (S4214: No), the value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n is 2 or more. It is determined whether or not this is the case (S4216). In other words, it is determined whether or not the lower limit value (1) of the number of physical strength gauges LG in the case of deviation is reached (S4216), and the value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n is 2 or more (the number of gauges has reached the lower limit value). If it is determined that there is no (S4216: Yes), each processing of S4217 and S4218 for updating the value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n and the display mode of the physical strength gauge LG is executed, and the processing shifts to S4219. . On the other hand, in the process of S4216, when it is determined that the value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n is 1 (the lower limit of the number of gauges in the case of deviation) (S4216: No), the display mode of the physical strength gauge LG is updated. Since there is no need, each process of S4217 and S4218 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4219.

  In the processing of S4219, it is determined whether or not the output of the passage detection sensor 228g2 provided on the downstream side of the upper surface of the right variable winning device 65 (the outlet side of the flow path on the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1) is H (high). (S4219), if it is determined that the output is H (the game ball has passed) (S4219: Yes), the value of the passing number counter 223k is decremented by 1 and updated (S4220), and the process proceeds to S4221. Transition. On the other hand, in the process of S4219, when it is determined that the output of the passage detection sensor 228g2 is L (the passage of the game ball is not detected) (S4219: No), the process of S4220 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4221. Move to.

  In the process of S4221, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the expectation notification effect, and when the start timing is reached, a notification start determination process for executing the expectation notification effect is performed (S4221), and the present process is performed. To end. Details of the notification start determination processing (S4221) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the above-described notification start determination processing (S4221). In the notification start determination process (S4221), first, it is determined whether the notification standby flag 223p is on (S4701). If it is determined that the notification standby flag 223p is off (S4701: No), the right-turn expectation degree suggestion effect is executed. It is not in the middle, or the right-handed expectation suggestion effect is being executed, but it means that the expectation information effect has already been started, and there is no possibility of starting the execution of the expectation information effect. This processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4701, when it is determined that the notification standby flag 223p is on (S4701: Yes), it is then determined whether it is the start timing of the expectation notification effect (S4702), and the expectation notification effect is started. If it is determined that it is not the start timing (S4702: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4702 that the start timing of the expected degree notification effect has come (S4702: Yes), the value of the passing number counter 223k is read (S4703), and the read counter value is 4 or more. It is determined whether or not this is the case (S4704).

  In the process of S4704, when it is determined that the value of the passing number counter 223k is 4 or more, 1 is set to the value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n (S4705), and the process proceeds to S4707. On the other hand, in the process of S4704, when it is determined that the value of the passing number counter 223k is less than 4, the value obtained by subtracting the value of the passing number counter 223k from the maximum value of the gauge number of 5 is the value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n. (S4706), and the process moves to S4707. As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the initial value of the number of physical strength gauges LG at the start of the expected degree notification effect is set to the value of the passing number counter 223k (the number of game balls passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1). ). With this, for the player who wants to know whether or not the jackpot will be hit as soon as possible, right-handed more game balls are provided on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 before the expectation notification effect is started. You can make them think you want to reach them.

  In the processing of S4707, the start of the expected degree notification effect is set in a manner according to the data stored in the notification type storage area 223q and the value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n set in the processing of S4705 or S4706. (S4707). Specifically, the right variable winning device 65 is caused to emit light with a light emission color corresponding to the data stored in the notification type storage area 223q, and the gauge number corresponding to the counter value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n is determined by the physical strength gauge LG. Set as display mode. Next, the notification standby flag 223p is set to off, and the notification effect flag 223m is set to on (S4708), and the process ends.

  By executing the notification start determination process (see FIG. 88), it is possible to accurately execute the expected degree notification effect of the mode selected from the effect mode selection table 222b.

  Next, the variable display setting process 6 (S4122) in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This variable display setting process 6 (S4122) is a process executed in place of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 38). In the variable display setting processing 6 (S4122) in the sixth embodiment, in each of the processing of S4501 to S4509, the same processing as each of the processing of S4501 to S4509 in the variable display setting processing (see FIG. 38) is executed. .

  Further, in the variation display setting process 6 (see FIG. 89) in the sixth embodiment, when the process of S4503 is completed, the production mode of the mode corresponding to the variation pattern (variation type) extracted in the process of S4503 is selected. An effect mode selection process for determining from the table 222b is executed (S4511), and the process shifts to S4504. Details of the effect mode selection process (S4511) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the rendering mode selection process (S4511). In the effect mode selection process (S4511), first, the effect mode selection table 222b and the value of the effect lottery counter 223j are read (S4801), and the main control device 110 is read from the read effect mode selection table 222b by a variation pattern command. An effect mode corresponding to the variation type notified from and the value of the effect lottery counter 223j is specified (S4802).

  Next, it is determined whether the specified presentation mode is a presentation mode corresponding to the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect (S4803). : No), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4803, when a mode accompanied by a right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect is specified, data corresponding to the current effect mode (light emission color of the right variable winning device 65) is stored in the notification type storage area 223q. Then, the notification standby flag 223p is set to ON (S4805), and the process ends.

  By executing the effect mode selection process (see FIG. 89), it is possible to select the effect mode of the expected degree notification effect from the effect mode selection table 222b at a rate corresponding to the variation type. Is executed, it can be inferred from the emission color of the right variable winning device 65 whether or not it is advantageous to perform right-handing, and the player can determine whether to start right-handing.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment has a configuration in which 0.5 seconds is set as the jackpot opening period regardless of the jackpot type. That is, as long as the game balls are not fired toward the right variable winning device 65 before the jackpot is started, at the start of the first round of the jackpot, the number of the game balls exceeding the specified number (two) is increased. The configuration is such that it is impossible to make the passage on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 pass through. Then, in a part of the variable display effect for notifying the jackpot and a part of the variable display effect for notifying the departure, an expected degree notification effect for notifying the expected degree of opening the right specific winning opening 65a. Is configured to be executable. This allows the player to determine whether or not to start right-handing during the execution of the variable display effect (prior to the notification of the special symbol lottery result) from the content of the expected degree notification effect. If a right-handed start is started during the execution of the fluctuation display and the right specific winning opening 65a is opened as intended by the player, an over-winning can be generated, so that the player can be satisfied. In addition, if the right specific winning opening 65a is kept closed as intended by the player without performing the right-handing during the execution of the fluctuation display (if the special winning pattern is removed by lottery of special symbols), the right useless This gives a sense of relief that the player has avoided hitting and consuming the ball. On the other hand, when a result contrary to the player's aim is obtained (when the right specific winning opening 65a is not opened after right-handed, and when the right specific winning opening 65a is opened without right-handed). ), It is possible to give a sense of purpose that the next expectation degree information production will want to predict whether right-handing is better. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Further, in the sixth embodiment, the opening period is made common regardless of the type of the jackpot, and the control of the sound lamp control device 113 informs the player whether it is better to make a right-hand during the execution of the variable display. By making a configuration to make a determination, the degree of advantage in the first round (the number of gaming balls that win the right specific winning opening 65a) differs for each big hit. Thus, unlike the above-described fifth embodiment, the main controller 110 does not need to provide the period length selection table 202e (see FIG. 76 (c)) that defines the correspondence between the jackpot type and the closing period. , The capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced. Also, the control processing for selecting the opening period is simply processing for setting a common period, so that the processing load on the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 needs to perform main control related to the game, such as a jackpot lottery and a change display of the first symbol, so that various main controls can be performed by reducing the processing load. It can be executed reliably.

  Note that, in the sixth embodiment, as the expected degree notification effect, the expected degree of whether or not it is more advantageous to perform right-handing based on the emission color of the right variable winning device 65 is described. It is not something that can be done. Alternatively or additionally, the degree of expectation may be indicated by, for example, changing the color or aspect of the monster displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or the degree of expectation may be determined depending on the content of the attack by the adventurer. May be notified. Further, instead of or in addition to the emission color of the right variable winning device 65 and the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, the configuration may be such that the degree of expectation is notified by changing the music and the sound effect.

  In the sixth embodiment, the opening periods of all jackpot types are unified to 0.5 seconds, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, similarly to the above-described fifth embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the opening period is changed according to the type of jackpot, and a part of a case where the opening period becomes a short jackpot (and a case where the jackpot is removed by a special symbol lottery). Thus, the configuration may be such that the expected degree notification effect is executed during the execution of the variable display. Thereby, when the jackpot type becomes a long one during the opening period, it is possible to make a right-handed operation with a sense of security after the jackpot is notified. In addition, when the expected degree notification effect is executed, the player determines whether it is better to start right-handing during the execution of the variable display based on the notification content (the emission color of the right variable winning device 65). It is possible to provide a playability.

  In the sixth embodiment, in the expectation degree informing effect, a decoration that imitates a flaw is given to the right variable winning device 65, and then a display that prompts the user to aim for the flaw is performed on the third symbol display device 81. Although the configuration has been indirectly suggested to the player as right-handed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the expectation degree notification effect, it may be configured to clearly notify right-handed. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily understand that there is a possibility that performing a right-hand operation on the player may be advantageous (over-winning may occur).

  In the sixth embodiment, the right-handed operation is performed during the execution of the variable display by executing the expected-information notification effect of notifying the expected degree of whether or not it is advantageous to the player when the right-hand operation is performed. Although it is configured to judge whether or not it is better, the expected degree informing effect is not necessarily limited to the right variable prize device 65 (a plurality of games at a position where a prize is possible when the right specific prize port 65a is opened) in the present embodiment. It does not need to be combined with a variable winning device having a structure capable of holding a ball. For example, the expected degree notification effect is applied to a pachinko machine 10 provided with only a variable winning device capable of winning only a game ball launched after being opened, such as a left variable winning device 650. Is also good. In other words, the expectation degree notification effect may be configured to be executed simply as an effect of notifying the degree of expectation as to whether or not a big hit will occur after the end of the change.

  In the sixth embodiment, the expected degree notification effect is configured to be executable even when the special symbol lottery is lost. May be executed. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the timing of starting the expectation notification effect is varied. That is, in the sixth embodiment, the expectation degree notification effect is generated four seconds before the end of the fluctuation time. However, for example, the lottery is performed four seconds before, two seconds before, or one second before the lottery. It is good also as composition which an expectation degree information production produces. Further, in this case, for example, as the number of continuous variable displays corresponding to the departure increases, the rate of occurrence of the expected degree notification effect four or two seconds ago may be increased. In other words, as the number of consecutive misses increases, a right hit may be executed for a longer period of time during execution of the variable display, when a right hit expectation degree suggestion effect is selected. . With this configuration, the more times the variable display has been executed since the previous jackpot, the greater the number of prize balls in the first round when the jackpot is won. Then, the player can be made to think that the game is to be continued until the jackpot is reached. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. Further, for example, a configuration may be provided in which a device capable of measuring the time, such as RTC (Real-Time-Clock), is provided, and the timing at which the expected degree notification effect is likely to occur differs depending on the time zone. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player feel that he / she wants to play a game in a time zone where the expected degree notification effect is likely to occur 4 seconds or 2 seconds before the end of the fluctuation.

<Seventh embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described second embodiment, the operation winning prize opening (right operation prize opening 661 and the left operation prize opening 662) that triggers the start of the big hit is provided on the upper right side and the lower left side of the game board 13, respectively, according to the big hit type. Therefore, the winning prize opening that triggers the start of the jackpot is different. Further, when the jackpot is in the jackpot waiting state, the game ball enters the left operation winning port 662 almost automatically in a relatively short time (about 0.5 second). In other words, when the left operation winning port 662 becomes a left opportunity jackpot that triggers the start of the jackpot, the first round of the jackpot is started before the game ball reaches the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. On the other hand, when the right operation winning opening 661 becomes a right opportunity jackpot which triggers the start of the jackpot, a plurality of game balls reach the flow path on the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 during the jackpot waiting state, and then the right It was configured such that a player could aim for an over prize by causing a game ball to enter the activated prize port 661.

  On the other hand, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, even if the player wins the left-hand-hit jackpot, the game ball goes to the left-operation winning opening 662 unless the player makes a left-hand hit after the jackpot is in the jackpot waiting state. It is configured so that there is no possibility of entering the ball. Then, in the jackpot waiting state, the third symbol display device 81 performs an effect as if it were a normal gaming state. In other words, during the jackpot waiting state, the third symbol fluctuating display effect or the like is executed in a simulated manner, and it is as if the player has not shifted to the jackpot waiting state (whether or not the player is in the normal gaming state). It is configured so that left-handing can be continued by making a mistake. In other words, in the event of a left-hand-hit jackpot, by performing an effect that is difficult for the player to recognize that the player has entered the jackpot waiting state, the player can keep left-handed, and As soon as the player is conscious of trying to reach the game ball, the game ball is made to enter the left operation winning opening 662. Thus, in the case of a left opportunity big hit, the big hit can be started after the number of game balls exceeding the specified number (the upper limit number of the first round is two) reaches the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1. On the other hand, when it is difficult to hit the right opportunity big hit, the game ball is easily entered into the right operation winning opening 661 at the timing when more game balls reach the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1. Over winning can be generated. Therefore, similarly to the above-described second embodiment, the degree of advantage (the number of prize balls that can be obtained) in the first round can be made different between the left-hand-hit jackpot and the right-hand-hit jackpot. Can be done.

  The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment is different from the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed. The configuration of the RAM 223 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations and various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the second section. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 91, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment is different from the game board 13 in the second embodiment (see FIG. 54) in that the storage device 675 is omitted. ing. When the storage device 675 is deleted and the player wins the left-hand-hit jackpot and enters the jackpot-standby state, the game ball immediately enters the left-operation winning port 662 as in the above-described second embodiment. I will not do it. In other words, even in the case of a left-hit big hit, the big hit is not started unless the gaming ball is made to enter the operation winning opening 662 by left-handing in the big hit standby state. In the seventh embodiment, when a left-hand-operated jackpot occurs, the third symbol of the out-of-combination is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the normal game state is maintained even after shifting to the jackpot waiting state. In the same way as described above, the variable display is executed. Thereby, it is configured that it is difficult for the player to recognize that the jackpot is in the jackpot standby state, and the game ball enters the left activated winning opening 662 by continuing left hitting even after entering the jackpot standby state. It is configured as follows. Therefore, similar to the second embodiment, it is possible to generate an over prize at a right opportunity jackpot and to generate an over prize at the left opportunity jackpot. Can be provided. In addition, of the game balls fired by the left hit, the ratio of the game balls winning the left activated winning opening 662 is configured to be higher than the ratio of the game balls entering the first ball opening 64. . Thus, when the jackpot is in a jackpot waiting state with a left trigger jackpot, a game ball can be made to enter (win) the left-operation winning port 662 in a shorter period of time. Although illustration is omitted, the control processing for opening and closing the storage valve 675a of the storage device 675 is also deleted due to the deletion of the storage device 675.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 92, a description will be given of a temporal change in the effect mode from the start of the variable display to the start of the big hit in the case of a left opportunity big hit. FIG. 92 is a diagram exemplifying a case in which a change display effect corresponding to a left trigger jackpot (super-reach with a change time of 60 seconds) is executed in a state where two balls are reserved at the start of the change. . As shown in FIG. 92, when the change display corresponding to the left-hand-hit big hit is executed, it is simulated that the change has ended at the end of the change. That is, in the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a disengaged combination. At this time, the first symbol display device 37 stops and displays the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit. However, the third symbol display device 81 is larger than the first symbol display device 37 and is arranged at a position that is easy to see. Accordingly, since most players do not notice that the first symbol display device 37 has a winning stop symbol, a special symbol is displayed to the player who has confirmed the display content of the third symbol display device 81. It can be made to think that the lottery result has come off (it has not shifted to the jackpot waiting state).

  As shown in FIG. 92, when the variable display corresponding to the left opportunity big hit ends, the big hit standby state is started, and the pseudo symbol display is started on the third symbol display device 81. In other words, the fluctuating display corresponding to the two reserved balls held during the execution of the fluctuating display corresponding to the left trigger jackpot is simulated. In the pseudo fluctuation display, a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is set, and a stop symbol corresponding to complete departure is stopped and displayed at the end of the fluctuation. In order to execute the pseudo variable display, the display control device 114 prepares a display data table for the pseudo variable display. Further, when the pseudo fluctuation display is executed in the jackpot waiting state, the number of the retained ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also artificially reduced. As a result, it is possible to make the player feel as if the number of reserved balls is decreasing every two seconds, so that additional game balls are entered into the first entrance 64 and a lottery of a special symbol is executed. You can make them think. When the pseudo fluctuation display ends and there are no pseudo holding balls, a pseudo fluctuation stop state is set. This pseudo fluctuation stop state has exactly the same display mode as when the number of reserved balls has become 0 in the normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that the special symbol lottery will not be executed unless the player enters the game ball into the first entrance hole 64, so that the player can more positively perform the left hit. .

  Note that, in the present embodiment, similarly to the above-described second embodiment, only the first special symbol lottery is selected to win the left trigger jackpot. In other words, the situation of winning the left-hand-hit big hit is limited to a gaming state (a low probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol) in which a game is aimed at the first entrance 64. In this way, in the case of a pseudo fluctuation display effect or a pseudo fluctuation stop state, the direction in which the player fires the game ball in order to continue the game (to perform a special symbol lottery) is determined by the game board. 13 to the left. Therefore, in the simulated normal state, a player who attempts to continue the game can more reliably enter the game ball into the left-operation winning opening 662.

  In the jackpot waiting state, when the player continues to make a left hit, when a game ball enters the left-operation winning opening 662, an effect (blackout effect) in a special mode is executed. Although details will be described later, by executing the blackout effect that does not occur during the normal gaming state, the player can immediately understand that the jackpot is in the standby state and the jackpot is started. be able to. This blackout effect is executed for 0.1 second during the opening period, and after the effect ends, a normal jackpot effect is started.

  Note that if no winning in the left-hand operation winning opening 662 is detected even after three seconds have elapsed in the pseudo fluctuation stop state, the pseudo fluctuation stop state is ended and a standby state effect is produced (FIG. 7). See). The configuration in which the pseudo fluctuation stop state is ended in three seconds is that when the player decides to quit the game at the timing when the fluctuation stop state is reached, before the player leaves the platform, In fact, this is to make the player aware that the game is in the jackpot waiting state. That is, this is to prevent the player from leaving the seat in a state where the big hit has been determined, and to prevent another player from starting the game from the big hit standby state. This can prevent the player from quitting the game without noticing, despite having won the jackpot, and causing the player to be dissatisfied with the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 93, a description will be given of an effect state during a left opportunity big hit in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 93 (a) is a diagram showing a blackout effect performed in the opening period of the left momentary jackpot. As described above, in the seventh embodiment, when the player has won the jackpot at the left opportunity and transitioned to the jackpot standby state, the pseudo variation display and the pseudo variation stop state effect are executed, whereby the jackpot standby is performed. This makes it difficult for the player to recognize the state. During the execution of these simulated effects, the game ball wins to the left-operation winning opening 662, and when the big hit is started, the opening period is extremely short (0.1 second). There is no period for notifying the big hit by the effect such as stopping and displaying with. Therefore, in the seventh embodiment, the player can understand at a glance that a special effect has been performed, and the blackout effect shown in FIG. It is configured to execute. That is, when the game ball wins to the left operation winning opening 662 and the opening period of the left trigger jackpot is reached, the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81 suddenly darkens (blacks out). It is configured to be executed. The appearance of the pseudo fluctuation display or pseudo fluctuation stop state production that had been executed up to that point is a very different appearance, so that the player can instantly understand that the special production was performed. it can.

  After the blackout effect ends, the effect shown in FIG. 93 (b) indicating that the big hit has started is executed. That is, in the main display area Dm, the character “Big hit!” Is displayed, and the three symbols with the same number are stopped and displayed in a state where they are aligned. Further, in the small area Ds1, a display indicating the number of rounds (character "1 round") and a display indicating the number of paid out prize balls (character "0000 GET") are displayed. In addition, in the small area Ds3, a character “RIGHT RIGHT !!” and a figure of a right-pointing arrow for firing a game ball toward the right specific winning opening 65a are displayed. These display contents allow the player to immediately understand that the jackpot has already been started.

<Electrical Configuration in Seventh Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 according to the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 94 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 94, the RAM 223 of the seventh embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 of the second embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 14B) in that , A pseudo normal state flag 223s, a pseudo fluctuation state timer 223t, and a pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223u.

  The pseudo reserved ball number counter 223r is a counter that indicates the number of pseudo variable display reservations after winning in the left-hand-side big hit and entering the jackpot waiting state. In the jackpot waiting state, the pseudo fluctuation display is repeatedly executed while the value of the pseudo reserved ball number counter 223r is 1 or more (see S4907 in FIG. 96), and the value of the pseudo reserved ball number counter 223r becomes 0. When the pseudo fluctuation display ends in the state, a pseudo fluctuation stop state is set (see S4906 in FIG. 96). The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are set in the pseudo reserved ball number counter 223r at the time of transition to the jackpot waiting state corresponding to the left trigger jackpot. See S4614 in FIG. 98). That is, the pseudo reserved ball number counter 223r includes at least a counter for counting the number of reserved balls of the pseudo first special symbol and a counter for counting the reserved ball number of the pseudo second special symbol. Have been. Further, the value of the pseudo reserved ball number counter 223r is decremented by one each time the start of pseudo variable display is set (see S4908 in FIG. 96).

  The pseudo normal state flag 223s is set in the jackpot waiting state, in which an effect (pseudo normal state effect) is being performed in a manner as if it were a normal gaming state (when a left-hit jackpot is won). Is a big hit standby state). When the pseudo normal state flag 223s is on, it indicates that the pseudo normal state effect is being executed, and when it is off, it indicates that the pseudo normal state effect is not being executed. This pseudo normal state flag 223s is set to ON when the jackpot is won at the left opportunity and the jackpot waiting state is started (see S4617 in FIG. 98). On the other hand, the pseudo normal state flag 223s indicates that the pseudo normal state effect has been completed (when the game ball enters the left-operation winning opening 662 and the game shifts to the jackpot opening period, or when the pseudo fluctuation stop state is set). It is set to OFF when the standby state effect is started for three seconds (see S4912 in FIG. 96 and S4617 in FIG. 98).

  The pseudo fluctuation timer 223t is a timer that measures the fluctuation time of the pseudo fluctuation display. The timer value corresponding to 2 seconds (that is, 2000) is set to the pseudo fluctuation timer 223t every time the start of the pseudo fluctuation display is set (see S4907 in FIG. 96). It is determined whether or not the pseudo fluctuation display is being executed based on whether the value of the pseudo fluctuation timer 223t is 0 or not.

  The pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223u is a timer that measures the duration of the pseudo fluctuation stop state. A timer value corresponding to 3 seconds (that is, 3000) is set in the pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223u at the timing when the pseudo fluctuation stop state is set (see S4906 in FIG. 96). When the pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223u becomes 0, it means that three seconds have elapsed since the start of the pseudo fluctuation stop state, so that the start of the standby state effect is set. By setting the pseudo fluctuation stop state to end in three seconds, even if the player wants to quit the game, the jackpot wait state was set before the player left the table. This can make the player aware of this. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game without noticing, despite having won the jackpot at the left opportunity, and causing the player to be dissatisfied with the game.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the seventh embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, with reference to FIG. 95, main processing 7 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. The main process 7 is a process executed in place of the main process (see FIG. 34) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment).

  Of the main processing 7 (see FIG. 95) in the seventh embodiment, in each processing of S4101 to S4118, the same processing as the processing of each of S4101 to S4118 of the main processing (see FIG. 34) in the second embodiment is respectively performed. Be executed. Further, in the main process 7 (see FIG. 95) in the seventh embodiment, after the effect update process (S4111) is completed, the pseudo process for setting the effect mode while the pseudo normal state is set is performed. A normal state effect process is performed (S4311), and the process proceeds to S4112. Details of the pseudo normal state effect processing (S4131) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the above-described pseudo normal state effect processing (S4131). In the pseudo normal state effect processing (S 4131), first, it is determined whether the pseudo normal state flag 223 s is on (S 4901). If it is determined that the pseudo normal state flag 223 s is off (S 4901: No), This means that the pseudo normal game state is not set (the state is not the jackpot waiting state based on the left trigger jackpot), and thus this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4901 that the pseudo normal state flag 223s is ON (S4901: Yes), it is next determined whether or not a pseudo variable display effect is being executed (S4902). . More specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer 223t during pseudo fluctuation is 1 or more. In the process of S4902, when it is determined that the pseudo fluctuation display effect is being executed (the value of the pseudo fluctuation timer 223t is 1 or more) (S4902: Yes), the value of the pseudo fluctuation timer 223t is set to 1 It is updated by subtraction (S4903), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timer 223t during pseudo fluctuation after subtraction has become 0 (S4904). That is, it is determined whether the fluctuation time of the pseudo fluctuation display has ended.

  In the process of S4904, if it is determined that the value of the pseudo-fluctuation timer 223t is not 0 (S4904: No), the process is directly terminated to continue the pseudo-fluctuation display. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the pseudo-changing timer 223t has become 0 (S4904: Yes), then the value of the pseudo-reserved ball count counter 223r is 0 (the pseudo-corresponding pseudo-ball corresponding to the first special symbol). It is determined whether both the number of reserved balls and the number of pseudo reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol are 0) (S4905), and when it is determined that the value of the pseudo reserved ball number counter 223r is 0, (S4905: Yes), since pseudo fluctuation display cannot be started, the value of the pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223u is set to 3000 in order to shift to the pseudo fluctuation stop state (S4906), and this processing is performed. To end. Note that the pseudo normal state effect processing (see FIG. 96) is a processing executed every millisecond in the main processing 7 (see FIG. 95), so that 3000 is set as the timer value of the pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223u. By setting, the timer value becomes 0 after 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds). Thus, it is possible to accurately measure three seconds after the pseudo fluctuation stop state.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4905 that the value of the pseudo reserved ball number counter 223r is not 0 (S4905: No), the start of pseudo fluctuation display is newly set, and the pseudo fluctuation timer is set. The value of 223t is set to 2000 (timer value corresponding to 2 seconds) (S4907). Next, the value of the pseudo reserved ball number counter 223r is decremented by one, and the display mode is updated to a display mode corresponding to the pseudo reserved ball number after the subtraction (S4908), and this processing ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S4902 that the pseudo fluctuation display is not being executed (S4902: No), it means that the current state is the pseudo fluctuation stop state, and thus the pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223u. Is subtracted by 1 (S4909), and it is determined whether the value of the pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223u after the subtraction has become 0 (S4910). In the process of S4910, if it is determined that the value of the pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223u is not 0 (it is a value of 1 or more) (S4910: No), in order to continue the pseudo fluctuation stop state, This processing ends as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4910, when it is determined that the value of the pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223u after the subtraction has become 0 (S4910: Yes), the standby state effect is set by setting the display standby state command (FIG. 7). (See S4911). Next, the standby state effect flag 223g is set to ON, and the pseudo normal state flag 223s is set to OFF (S4912), and the process ends.

  By executing the pseudo normal state effect processing (see FIG. 96), it is as if the normal gaming state has continued for the player in the jackpot waiting state which has been shifted based on winning at the left opportunity jackpot. The effect of the aspect reminiscent of can be performed. This allows the player to continue left-handing when the game machine enters the jackpot waiting state with a left-hand opportunity, so that the player can immediately reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 with the left-hand opportunity. The first round of the jackpot can be started.

  In the seventh embodiment, the pseudo variable display is configured to be executed by the number of the retained balls at the start of the jackpot waiting state (at the end of the change) at the start of the jackpot waiting state. In this case, when a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected, the number of pseudo reserved balls corresponding to the ball entry is not increased. This is because, as described above, the game board 13 is configured such that when the player hits left, the game ball easily enters the left-operation winning port 662 rather than the first ball entry port 64. If the player hits the ball continuously during the jackpot waiting state, there is a very high possibility that the game ball will not enter the left activated winning opening 662 and will continuously enter the first entrance 64 without winning. Because it is low. Therefore, the processing for increasing the pseudo reserved ball count can be omitted, and the processing load on the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced. Further, if the processing for increasing the number of reserved balls is also performed, if the main controller 110 detects a ball entering the first entrance port 64 during the jackpot waiting state, the number of reserved balls is already determined. Has reached the upper limit, the sound lamp control device 113 must be notified of the entry. When the number of reserved balls reaches the upper limit, the game shifts to the jackpot waiting state, and if a ball entry to the first entrance 64 is detected after the pseudo variable display effect has been executed at least once, the pseudo This is because it is necessary to increase the number of reserved balls. Therefore, the number of commands to be output in main controller 110 increases, and the processing load on main controller 110 also increases. On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, the number of pseudo reserved balls is not increased, so that there is no need to increase the number of commands in the main controller 110, and the processing load on the main controller 110 is reduced. be able to. Further, if the player luckily enters the first ball entrance 64 first and recognizes that the number of retained balls does not increase, the player is informed that the player has actually entered the jackpot waiting state. Can understand. Therefore, the player who has fortunately detected the jackpot standby state is allowed to reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 and then play the game by devising to enter the left operation winning opening 662. Can be. This allows the player to make a more positive left-handing to determine whether the player is in the normal game state or the jackpot waiting state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the hit-related process 7 (S4341) in the seventh embodiment will be described. The hit-related process 7 (S4341) is a process executed in place of the hit-related process 2 (see FIG. 61) in the second embodiment, and is similar to the hit-related process 2 (see FIG. 61). This is a process for performing control according to the command when a command to be performed is received.

  Of the hit-related processing 7 (see FIG. 97) in the seventh embodiment, S4401, S4404, and S4407 to S4410 respectively perform S4401 and S4404 of the hit-related processing 2 (see FIG. 61) in the second embodiment. , And S4407 to S4410 are executed. In the hit-related processing 7 (see FIG. 97) in the seventh embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S4401 that the standby state command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4401: Yes), the standby state command processing is performed. Instead of (see FIG. 62), a standby state command process 7 is executed (S4441), and this process ends. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 98, this standby state command processing 7 (S4441) is processing for setting an effect mode according to the big hit type as the big hit standby state.

  In the hit-related process 7 (see FIG. 97) in the seventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4404 that an opening command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4404: Yes), a big hit is started. An opening command process for executing an opening effect in a mode according to the situation is executed (S4442), and this process ends. Details of the opening command processing (S4442) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the standby state command processing 7 (S4441) will be described in detail. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the standby state command processing 7 (S4441). In this standby state command processing 7 (S4441), in each processing of S4601 to S4603, the same processing as each processing of S4601 to S4603 of the standby state command processing (see FIG. 62) in the second embodiment is executed. .

  In the standby state command process 7 (see FIG. 98) in the seventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4601 that the current jackpot is not a right-hand-side jackpot (a left-hand-side jackpot) (S4601: No) ), The values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are read (S4611), and it is determined whether or not each of the read counter values is 0 (S4612). .

  In the processing of S4612, when it is determined that the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are both 0 (S4612: Yes), the reserved symbol number of the special symbol is increased. Since the start of the pseudo fluctuation display causes the player to feel uncomfortable, the pseudo fluctuation stop state is set. That is, 3000 (timer value corresponding to 3 seconds) is set as the value of the pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223u (S4613), and the process shifts to S4617.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4612 that at least one of the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is not 0 (S4612: No), the reading is performed. The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are stored as the value of the pseudo reserved ball number counter 223r (S4614), and the start of the pseudo variation display is set. Then, 2000 (timer value corresponding to 2 seconds) is set as the value of the pseudo-changing timer 223t (S4615). Then, the value of the pseudo reserved ball number counter 223r is decremented by one and updated, and at the same time, the reserved ball number symbol is reduced by one and displayed (S4616), and the process proceeds to S4617. In the processing of S4617, the pseudo normal state flag 223s is set to ON (S4617), and this processing ends.

  By executing the standby state command processing 7 (see FIG. 98), in the jackpot waiting state of the left trigger big hit, an effect as if the normal gaming state is continued can be executed in a pseudo manner. In the case of a right opportunity jackpot, a standby state effect can be executed. In this way, when a left-hand-hit jackpot occurs, the player can continue left-handing without noticing that the player has entered the jackpot waiting state, so that the game ball reaches the upper surface of the door 65f1. Shortly after, a winning operation can be started by winning the left operation winning opening 662. On the other hand, in the case of the right opportunity big hit, the player can easily understand that the big hit standby state has been set. (The number of gaming balls that can enter the right specific winning opening 65a) can be provided. Therefore, the pleasure of firing the game ball with good timing can be given to the player.

  Next, the details of the above-described opening command processing (S4442) will be described with reference to FIG. In this opening command processing (S4442), first, it is determined whether the pseudo normal state flag 223s is on (S5001). In the processing of S5001, when it is determined that the pseudo normal state flag 223s is ON (S5001: Yes), the left-hand winning port is displayed while the pseudo fluctuation display effect or the pseudo fluctuation stop state is displayed. Since this means that the ball has entered 662 and the jackpot opening period has started, a display opening command corresponding to the blackout effect (see FIG. 93A) is set (S5002).

  Next, the value of the pseudo pending ball number counter 223r, the value of the pseudo fluctuation timer 223t, and the value of the pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223u are all reset to 0 (S5003), and the pseudo normal state flag 223s is set to off. (S5004), and ends this process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5001 that the pseudo normal state flag 223s is off (S5001: No), a display opening command corresponding to the normal opening effect is set (S5005), and the standby state effect flag 223g is set. Is set to off (S5006), and this process ends.

  By executing the opening command process (see FIG. 99), in a jackpot waiting state in which the winning has been won at the left trigger jackpot and the game has shifted to the jackpot, the opening period is started when the game ball wins to the left activated winning opening 662. Suddenly, a blackout effect in which the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81 darkens (blacks out) can be executed. That is, it can be set to a mode that is significantly different from the pseudo fluctuation display or the pseudo fluctuation stop state effect that has been executed until then. This makes it possible for the player to instantly understand that the special effect has been executed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, a position where a part of the game ball fired aiming at the first ball entrance 64 can enter the left side is a left trigger which is a start trigger of a left trigger jackpot. The operation winning opening 662 is arranged. Then, in the case of a left-hand-operated jackpot, an effect is displayed in which the third symbol of the combination of the missed symbols is stopped and displayed as the effect of the third symbol display device 81 during the change display of the special symbol. Furthermore, in the jackpot waiting state which shifts after the end of the fluctuation, the effect is performed in a manner as if the normal gaming state is continuing. That is, even during the jackpot waiting state, a pseudo normal state effect such as a pseudo-variable display effect is executed, and the player is erroneously recognized as in a normal game state and left-handed to be continued. Is configured to be possible. This allows the player to continue left-handing when the player is in the jackpot-waiting state after winning at the left-hand opportunity jackpot (suppressing the player from right-handing). The game ball can be entered into the left-operation winning opening 662 immediately before the player is conscious of reaching the upper surface of the game ball. Therefore, in the case of a left trigger jackpot, it is difficult to start the jackpot after the number of game balls exceeding the specified number (the upper limit number of the first round is two) reaches the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1. On the other hand, in the case of a right-hit jackpot, the game ball is easily entered into the right operation winning opening 661 at the timing when more game balls reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1, so that the ball can easily be over. A prize can be generated. Therefore, the degree of advantage (the number of prize balls that can be obtained) in the first round can be made different between the left-hand hit jackpot and the right-hand hit jackpot, so that a game can be played by paying attention to the big hit type.

  In the seventh embodiment, the pseudo normal state effect is always executed when the jackpot is in the jackpot waiting state with the left trigger jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a left opportunity big hit occurs, it may be configured to determine by lottery whether to execute the pseudo normal state effect or the standby state effect.

  In the seventh embodiment, the pseudo variable display is configured to be executed for the number of retained balls held at the start of the jackpot waiting state (at the end of the change), and the pseudo change display is performed after the big hit standby state is entered. The configuration is such that, when a ball entering the one entrance 64 is detected, the number of pseudo reserved balls corresponding to the ball entry is not increased, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, each time a start winning is detected, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of reserved balls is increased in a pseudo manner. This makes it more difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the pseudo normal state effect is being performed.

  In the seventh embodiment, the execution start timing of the expected degree notification effect is fixed for each variation type. That is, in the case of a hit or out-of-reach special reach, the execution of the expectation notification effect is started at the time when 86 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, and in the case of a hit or out-of-reach super reach, the timing at which 56 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation. Although it was configured to start the execution of the expected degree notification effect, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even with the same variation type, the execution start timing of the expected degree notification effect may be changed by lottery or the like.

  In the seventh embodiment, as a pseudo-variable display, a special effect for two seconds different from the normal effect is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a fluctuating display effect of the same fluctuating time and display mode as in a normal fluctuating display is executed in a pseudo manner. More specifically, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the variable display that has been executed immediately before the jackpot waiting state is repeated is repeated. With this configuration, the data of the variable display used immediately before can be diverted as it is, so that the processing load when executing the pseudo variable display can be reduced.

  In the seventh embodiment, when the state shifts to the jackpot waiting state with a left-hand hit, a pseudo-variable display is performed a number of times corresponding to the number of held balls at that time, and then a pseudo stop display state is set. Although it was configured to shift, it is not limited to this. For example, when shifting to the jackpot waiting state, it may be configured to immediately shift to the stop display state regardless of the number of reserved balls. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of reserved balls is changed to zero when the state shifts to the jackpot waiting state or during the variable display. With this configuration, it is possible to give the player an impression as if there are no pending balls in the case of shifting to the jackpot waiting state, so that a special symbol lottery is started from the start of the jackpot waiting state. Can be performed by the player to perform left-handed.

  In the seventh embodiment, when the pseudo variable display is executed, the variable display is executed using the same large three-symbol image as the normal variable display. However, the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, a design different from the normal third design may be prepared as a special design for pseudo-variable display.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example applicable to the pachinko machine 10 in each of the above embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 to 117. In the first control example, the player selects a music (sound effect) to be output (reproduced) during a predetermined period during a normal game (for example, a period in which a probable change state is set) as part of an entertaining effect. It is configured to be possible. More specifically, when an operation on the operation button 230 provided on the front frame 14 is detected during a predetermined period (a period during which the probable change state is set), the third symbol display device 81 selects a song (selection). ) A list of possible songs (tune selection menu screen) is displayed. Then, while the music selection menu screen is displayed, the player selects an arbitrary music (voice effect) and performs a determination operation (an operation of pressing the center button CB of the operation button 230) to thereby select the music (the selected music). The output (reproduction) of the sound effect is started. Note that, in the first control example, at the timing when the predetermined period is started (transition to the probable change state), first, one piece of music (production style) is randomly selected and played. The reproduction of the music selected at random is continued until the reproduction of the music selected by the player is started or until the certain change state (predetermined period) ends. Thereby, the music can be reproduced from the transition to the probable change state until the music is selected by the player (while the music is not selected), which is advantageous for the player. The player's satisfaction with the probable change can be increased.

  In the first control example, the initial arrangement of the music selection menu screen is selected by the player in the game up to that point regardless of the type of the music (producing mode) randomly selected at the start of the probable change state. The configuration is such that the more frequently (the more frequently) the music, the easier to select a menu position. Here, the “menu position that is easy to select” means a menu position in which the number of operations performed on the operation buttons 230 before selecting a music piece is small (can be selected with three or less operations). I do.

  First, the appearance of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. As shown in FIG. 100, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first control example, an operation button 230 is provided on the left side in the front view with respect to the ball lending operation unit 40. The operation buttons 230 include an upper button UB arranged on the upper side in front view, a lower button DB arranged on the lower side in front view, a right button RB arranged on the right side in front view, and a left button LB arranged on the left side in front view. , And a center button CB arranged at the center of the operation button 230. Although details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 101 and 102, the operation button 230 is set in advance in the pachinko machine 10 during the period in which the probable change state is set and displayed on the music selection menu screen as described above. It is provided to allow the player to select an arbitrary song from a plurality of songs (26 songs A to Z).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 101 and FIG. 102, a display mode in the probable change state in the first control example will be described. FIG. 101 (a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the probable change state. As shown in FIG. 101 (a), in the probable change state, a music area for displaying information of the music being reproduced is displayed on the left side of the main display area Dm in front view (left side of the variably displayed third symbol). An MR is formed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 101 (a), the character "Music A" indicating the music currently being played back (outputting) (Music A in the example of FIG. 101 (a)) and "button operation" Is displayed on the music area MR. These display contents allow the player to easily understand what the currently playing music is. By operating the operation button 230, the player can easily understand that any music can be selected.

  FIG. 101 (b) shows a state where the player has operated the operation button 230 while the image shown in FIG. 101 (a) is being displayed (one of the buttons UB, DB, RB, LB, CB is pressed). FIG. 14 is a diagram showing display contents that are switched in the case of (YES). FIG. 101 (b) illustrates a case where the display content (display mode) is switched based on (in conjunction with) the player pressing down button DB. As shown in FIG. 101 (b), when the operation button 230 is operated (pressed), a plurality of horizontally long rectangular display areas to which the title (music name) of the music is attached are provided inside the music area MR. Is displayed. Also, below the plurality of display areas, the characters "select with the up and down buttons" and the character "determine with the center button" are displayed. By operating the operation buttons 230 based on these display contents (music selection menu screen), it is possible for the player to easily understand that any music can be selected and reproduced. Hereinafter, for simplification of description, a state in which the music selection menu screen is displayed (a state in which an arbitrary music can be selected in accordance with the operation content of the operation button 230) is referred to as a “music selection mode”. The display contents in the music selection mode will be described in more detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 102 (a) is a diagram showing an arrangement of each item (an image indicating a music type (music name)) on a music selection menu screen displayed first when the mode is shifted to the music selection mode. As shown in FIG. 102 (a), on the music selection menu screen, at least five display areas in which different items (images indicating the types of music) are arranged (a number of displays smaller than the total number of music, 26 music). Area) is displayed. When the center button CB is pressed while the music selection menu screen is displayed, the reproduction of the item (song) arranged in the display area displayed at the center among the five display areas is determined.

  Of the five display areas displayed on the music selection menu screen, the upper two display areas show the types of music that the player has frequently selected in the probable change state so far (the music that the player frequently selects). Corresponding items PA1 and PA2 (images indicating music Y and music Z) are arranged. It should be noted that the item PA1 (the image indicating the music piece Z) that is arranged relatively close to the center display area is the item P2 (the music piece Y indicating the music piece Y) that is relatively far from the center display area. The selection frequency of the player is higher than that of the image).

  In the item RA1 (image indicating the music A) displayed at the center of the music selection menu screen, an item indicating a music selected at random (the music reproduced first after shifting to the probable change state) is arranged. Then, below the center, two items are displayed side by side in a predetermined order (in the first control example, in alphabetical order) based on the music selected first. That is, based on the item RA1 (song A) displayed at the center, items RA2 and RA3 of "song B" and "song C" in alphabetical order are displayed side by side below the item RA1. In the following description, for the sake of simplicity, in the first arrangement on the music selection menu screen, two items PA1 and PA2 displayed above the center item RA1 (the frequency of selection by the player so far is high). The display area in which the items are arranged is referred to as a “history area”. Further, a display area in which three items displayed below the history area are displayed (a display area in which randomly selected items are arranged) is referred to as a “random selection area”. In addition, a display area in which items to be reproduced when the player presses the center button CB is referred to as a “music selection area”.

  As shown in FIG. 102 (a), the item PA1 arranged in the music selection area (the center of the music selection menu screen) is displayed in a lit state, and the other items PA1, PA2, RA2, and RA3 are turned off. Is displayed. As a result, when the center button CB is pressed, an item displayed in a mode (an illuminated appearance mode) different from other items (image indicating the type of music) is determined as the music to be reproduced this time. This can be made easier for the player to understand. In addition, an upper image UG of a substantially upward triangle shape is displayed above the music selection area and to the right of the item PA1, and a downward substantially triangle shape is displayed below the music selection area and to the right of the item RA2. The lower image DG of the shape is displayed. When the upper button UB is pressed based on these display contents, the display contents (songs) displayed in the music selection area are displayed one level higher than the current state (in the example of FIG. 102A, When the down button DB is pressed, the display content (song) displayed in the music selection area is displayed one level lower than the current state when the down button DB is pressed. It is possible for the player to intuitively understand that the content can be shifted to the content (in the example of FIG. 102A, the image indicating the music B).

  FIG. 102 (b) shows an example of a display mode when the player presses (operates) the upper button UB of the operation buttons 230 while the music selection menu screen shown in FIG. 101 (a) is displayed. FIG. As shown in FIG. 102 (b), when the player presses the upper button UB, all display contents are moved downward by one display area in a visual display mode in conjunction with the press. Variable. As a result, the item PA1 (song Z), which is located immediately above the music selection area in FIG. 102 (a), is changed to the appearance display mode moved to the music selection area in conjunction with the depression of the upper button UB. Is done. The item PA1 that has been moved to the music selection area is set to a lighted appearance, and the other items are set to a lighted off appearance. In addition, an item PA3 indicating “song X” is displayed one upper side of the item PA2. In the item PA3, the item (the song X in the example of FIG. 102B) next to the item PA2 (the song Y) is displayed as the number of times the player has selected so far. Further, as each item is shifted downward by one display area, the upper image, which is the image corresponding to the upper button UB, has a lit appearance. As a result, the arrangement of the items on the music selection menu screen is changed in conjunction with the pressing of the up button UB (the item PA1 arranged one immediately above the music selection area could be moved to the music selection area. ) Can be easily understood by the player.

  When the upper button UB is pressed a plurality of times, the item is shifted downward according to the number of times the button UB is pressed. For example, in the arrangement of the music selection menu screen shown in FIG. 102 (a), when the player presses the upper button DB three times, each item is shifted downward by three display areas, An item PA3 (an image indicating music X) is arranged in the music selection area. Note that the menu items are arranged in a loop, and all the songs can be sequentially shifted to the song selection area by continuously pressing the upper button. When the upper button UB is further pressed while the item corresponding to the last song is arranged in the song selection area, the item indicating the first song (song A in the example of FIG. 102A). Returns to the music selection area.

  Although illustration is omitted, when the player operates (presses) the lower button DB, an operation opposite to that performed when the upper button UB is pressed is performed. That is, by shifting each item display area upward by one by one, the items arranged in the display area immediately below the music selection area at the time of operation are moved to the music selection area in the appearance of the appearance. Variable. For example, when the lower button DB is pressed in the arrangement shown in FIG. 102 (a), the item RA2 is changed to a visual display mode in which the item RA2 is moved to the music selection area in conjunction with the pressing. In addition, the appearance is set so that the lower image DG corresponding to the lower button DB is turned on. Accordingly, even when the player presses the down button DB, the player can easily understand that the item has been shifted in conjunction with the press.

  In the first control example, in the initial arrangement of the music selection menu screen, three items (items PA1 to PA3) are arranged above the music selection area in descending order of the number of times the player has selected. I have. That is, an item (song) with a high selection frequency of the player is arranged at a position where the number of presses of the upper button UB can be selected (shifted to the music selection area) within a range of three or less. This is because it is considered that the higher the frequency of the item selected so far, the higher the possibility that the player will select the item even in the current probable state. In deciding the initial arrangement of the music selection menu screen, items corresponding to randomly selected items (music) are arranged in the music selection area, and other items are simply determined based on the items arranged in the music selection area. If the music pieces are arranged in alphabetical order (predetermined order), it may be difficult for the player to select a favorite music piece. That is, when the item (song) that the player wants to select and the randomly selected item (song) are separated in order, the number of operations on the operation button 230 for shifting the item that the player wants to select to the song selection area And the player may feel annoying. Further, as a method of making it difficult to feel annoyance, a method of setting an item to be initially arranged in the music selection area in the case of a probable change state to an item frequently selected by the player may be considered. According to the method, the player is satisfied with the music reproduced (output) first in the probable change state in the first place, and the possibility of not changing the music (not displaying the music selection menu screen) is increased. As the opportunity for the player to display the music selection menu screen decreases, the opportunity to know the type of another music set in the pachinko machine 10 also decreases. For this reason, the possibility that the player intends to select another music is reduced. Therefore, even if a large number of music pieces are set to be selectable for the pachinko machine 10, most of the music pieces may not be selected and may be wasted.

  Further, as a method of making it easy for the player to select a favorite music, all the items are displayed collectively on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (the items are arranged in a matrix), so that any music ( It is also conceivable to make it possible to understand at a glance where the items are located. However, in this method, the display area for displaying the items (the area of the music selection menu screen) becomes large, and the display area for displaying other display contents (the third symbol, the number of retained balls symbol, etc.) is displayed. May become too narrow.

  On the other hand, in the first control example, the items displayed on the music selection menu screen so that the player has a high possibility of selecting items (items frequently selected in the game up to now). The initial arrangement of is set. More specifically, an image showing three items (songs) that the player has frequently selected (the number of selections is high) in the game so far is selected with a small number of operations (the number of times the operation button 230 is pressed). It is configured to be arranged at a position where it is possible (display area for three upper parts of the music selection area). With such a configuration, regardless of which item (image indicating the song name) is first placed in the song selection area of the song selection menu screen, it can be selected with a small number of operations (operations within three times). Items that are frequently selected by the player can be arranged at positions. Therefore, in each probable state, the item that the player has repeatedly selected so far (that is, the item that the player is likely to select even in the probable state this time) can be selected with little effort. This can make it difficult for the player to feel troublesome when selecting music (items). If the number of items (played songs) selected at least once is less than three (that is, the number of items frequently selected by the player is less than three), the item selected at least once is selected. Only (less than three items) are arranged in the history area, and the other items are arranged in a predetermined order (music alphabetical order) based on the items arranged in the music selection area. For this reason, when the player has not selected a piece of music even once, such as immediately after turning on the power to the pachinko machine 10, the items determined to be arranged in the music selection area by random lottery are simply determined. As a reference, all items are arranged in a predetermined order (the alphabetical order of music).

  In the first control example, after shifting to the probable change state, an image indicating the music name of one music piece selected at random is arranged in the music selection area on the music selection menu screen displayed first, and the music selection is performed. The history area is arranged above the area. With this configuration, at least immediately after the transition to the probable change state, the randomly selected music can be reproduced, so that the player can be given an opportunity to listen to music other than the music that is frequently selected. . Therefore, a plurality of music pieces set in the pachinko machine 10 can be reproduced without waste. In addition, while listening to a song selected at random, the player may like the song and want to play it even in a probable state after the next time. Therefore, since the number of music pieces that the player likes can be increased, the interest of the game in the probable change state can be improved. Further, by continuing to select only the same music, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the game from becoming monotonous.

  Further, in the first control example, the number of items (images indicating music names) to be displayed on the music selection menu screen is limited to five (the number is less than 26, which is the total number of music pieces). By changing the type of the items displayed on the music selection menu screen according to the content, all the items set in the pachinko machine 10 can be selected. With this configuration, the display area of the music selection menu screen can be reduced as compared with a case where all items are displayed collectively. Accordingly, display contents other than the music selection menu screen, such as the third symbol and the number of retained balls symbol, can be displayed with a larger display area.

  In the first control example, display areas corresponding to music pieces (items) having a high frequency (number of times) selected by the player in the game up to now are arranged in the three display areas above the music selection area. Although the remaining display areas are arranged in a predetermined order (alphabet order) based on one randomly selected display area, the present invention is not limited to this. The number of items having a high frequency (number of times) selected by the player in the game so far may be set to be less than three or more.

  In the first control example, in the initial arrangement of the music selection menu screen, as an item to be arranged in the history area, an item frequently selected by the player in the game up to now is arranged, but the present invention is limited to this. is not. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which items selected by the player in the probable change state set before the current probable change state are arranged in the history area in the order in which the selected timings are newer (closer). With this configuration, it is possible to arrange images (items) indicating music pieces that are likely to be selected by a player who has a tendency to continuously select favorite music pieces in the history area. The convenience of the person can be improved.

  In the first control example, the music selection menu screen is not displayed unless the operation button 230 is operated after the probable change state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The screen may be displayed. With such a configuration, the trouble of a player who wants to select a music can be reduced, so that the convenience of the player can be improved.

  In the first control example, the first item displayed in the music selection area is selected by random lottery. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which, as the first item displayed in the music selection area on the music selection menu screen, the item selected by the player last in the probability change state set before the current probability change state.

  In the first control example, up to three items are selected with a relatively small number of operations in the initial arrangement on the music selection menu screen (shifted to the music selection area) in the initial arrangement on the music selection menu screen in the order of the number of times the player has selected in the game so far. Although it was configured to be arranged at a position where it is possible, the present invention is not limited to this. It suffices if the player can easily understand where the music that is likely to be selected by the player (the music whose frequency has been selected so far) is located on the music selection menu screen. The arrangement may be such that it is displayed somewhere in the music area MR. With such a configuration, for example, even when the number of items to be displayed in the music area MR is increased beyond five, items that are highly likely to be selected by the player are displayed from the beginning. Can be kept. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to select an item, so that the convenience for the player can be improved.

  In the first control example, the display mode is different between the item displayed in the music selection area and the item displayed in the other display area. In addition to this, the player makes a selection. The display mode may be varied depending on whether or not the music has a high possibility (items arranged in the history area in the initial arrangement of the music selection menu screen). With this configuration, the player can more easily find items that are highly likely to be selected by the player, so that the convenience of the player can be improved.

<Electrical Configuration in First Control Example>
Next, an electrical configuration in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 103 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in each of the above embodiments is such that the operation button 230 is electrically connected to the input / output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113. (See FIG. 8). Further, the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations are the same as those of the above-described embodiments, and thus the details thereof are omitted. In the following description of the first control example, the first embodiment will be described as a comparison target, focusing on differences from the first embodiment.

  When any of the buttons (UB, DB, RB, LB, CB) constituting the operation button 230 is pressed (operated), an ON signal (a signal whose output is H) is sent to a signal line corresponding to the operated button. ) Is output. The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the output from the operation button 230, and when the output of the signal corresponding to any of the buttons is H, performs control according to the type of the button. Specifically, for example, when it is detected that the output of the signal corresponding to any one of the buttons has become H in a state in which the music selection menu screen is not displayed in the probable change state, the music selection menu screen is displayed. Perform control. Further, when it is detected that the output of the signal corresponding to the up button UB has become H while the music selection menu screen is displayed, each item on the music selection menu screen is shifted downward by one. Control.

  Next, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104A is a block diagram showing a configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example. As shown in FIG. 104A, the ROM 222 in the first control example is different from the ROM 222 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 14A) in that an item order storage area 222aa is added. Is different. Other configurations are the same as those of the above-described first embodiment, and thus the details thereof are omitted.

  The item order storage area 222aa is a data table in which the order of items on the music selection menu screen is defined, and is referred to when setting the initial arrangement of the music selection menu screen. More specifically, when shifting to the probable change state, the initial arrangement of the music selection menu screen is determined. When the initial arrangement is determined, first, three items (songs) to be arranged in the history area are determined, and then one item to be arranged in the music selection area is selected from among other items not arranged in the history area. It is determined randomly (for example, by lottery using random numbers). Then, based on the items arranged in the music selection area, the arrangement of other items (items not arranged in any of the music selection area and the history area) is arranged in the arrangement order specified in the item order storage area 222aa. Set. As described above, in the first control example, the item order storage area 222aa is set so that the items are arranged in alphabetical order of music.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104B is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 104B, the RAM 223 in the first control example is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 14B) in that the item arrangement storage area 223aa and the menu position pointer 223ab are provided. And a music selection number storage area 223ac, a music selection permission flag 223ad, and a menu display flag 223ae. Other configurations are the same as those of the above-described first embodiment, and thus the details thereof are omitted.

  The item arrangement storage area 223aa is a storage area for storing the arrangement of each item (an image indicating the type of each music) on the music selection menu screen. When the state shifts to the probable change state, the initial arrangement of each item is set in the item arrangement storage area 223aa (see S5204, S5208, and S5212 in FIG. 113). The music selection menu screen is displayed with the arrangement set in the arrangement storage area 223aa. Details of the item arrangement storage area 223aa will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 105 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the item arrangement storage area 223aa. In FIG. 105 (a), it is set that “Song N”, “Song O”, and “Song P” are arranged in the history area, and “Song A” is arranged in the music selection area. 2 illustrates the contents of the item arrangement storage area 223aa. As shown in FIG. 105 (a), in the item arrangement storage area 223aa, data indicating a menu item is stored in association with each value ("00H" to "19H") that the menu position pointer 223ab can take. Storage area is provided. In the example of FIG. 105A, data corresponding to the menu item “Song A” is stored in the storage area corresponding to the value “00H” of the menu position pointer 223ab, and the value “01H” of the menu position pointer 223ab is stored. The data corresponding to the menu item "Song B" is stored in the storage area corresponding to. Thereafter, data is stored in alphabetical order of the music pieces up to the value “0BH” of the menu position pointer 223ab. In the storage area corresponding to “0CH” next to “0BH”, data corresponding to “song Q” is stored. That is, it is possible to prevent data corresponding to “Song N”, “Song O”, and “Song P” already stored in the history area from being redundantly stored in the random selection area.

  From the storage area corresponding to the value “0CH” of the menu position pointer 223ab to the storage area corresponding to “16H”, the data is stored in the alphabetical order of the music pieces as in the range of “00H” to “0BH”. . Further, the range of the menu position pointer 223ab from “17H” to “19H” corresponds to the history area, and in the example of FIG. 105A, “Song N”, “Song O”, and “Song O” P "is stored. The storage area corresponding to the value “19H” of the menu position pointer 223ab stores the data corresponding to the music with the highest selection frequency, and the storage area corresponding to the value “18H” is selected secondly. The data corresponding to the song with the highest frequency is stored, and the data corresponding to the song with the third highest frequency of selection is stored in the storage area corresponding to “17H”.

  In the first control example, when the music selection menu screen is displayed, the data stored in the item arrangement storage area 223aa (the relationship between the value of the menu position pointer 223ab and the menu item) and the menu position pointer 223ab are displayed. The current value is compared with the current value, and the menu item stored in the storage area corresponding to the current value of the menu position pointer 223ab is arranged in the music selection area. In addition, the menu items stored in the storage areas corresponding to two values before and after the value of the menu position pointer 223ab are arranged above and below the music selection area, respectively. For example, in the example of FIG. 105A, if the value of the menu position pointer 223ab is “19H”, an item indicating “Song P” is displayed in the song selection area. Further, “Song O” stored in the storage area corresponding to the value one above (ie, “18H”) above the value “19H” of the menu position pointer 223ab is located above the song selection area. Is done. Similarly, “song N” corresponding to the value “17H” of the menu position pointer 223ab is arranged two upper sides of the song selection area. Conversely, below the music selection area, an item corresponding to a value one lower than the value “19H” of the menu position pointer 223ab is arranged. Here, in the present control example, the next value of “19H”, which is the maximum value of the menu position pointer 223ab, is set to be determined to be “00H” (similarly, the value of “00H” which is the minimum value is “00H”). The next (one lower) value is determined to be “19H”. Therefore, the storage areas corresponding to “00H” and “01H” are respectively located one lower side and two lower sides of the music selection area. "Music A" and "Music B" are stored.

  Returning to FIG. 104 (b), the description will be continued. The menu position pointer 223ab is a pointer used to determine a range of items to be displayed on the music selection menu screen in the above-described item arrangement storage area 223aa. As described above, when displaying the music selection menu screen, the data stored in the five storage areas is read out centering on the storage area corresponding to the value of the menu position pointer 223ab, and the five items corresponding to each data are read out. Is arranged on the music selection menu screen. The initial value of the menu position pointer 223ab is set to “00H”, and the value is decremented by one each time a press on the upper button UB is detected during the display of the music selection menu screen. In addition, when the pressing of the upper button UB is detected in the state of “00H”, the value is updated to the maximum value “19H”. Further, each time a press on the down button DB is detected while the music selection menu screen is being displayed, the value is incremented by one. Note that, when the pressing of the lower button UB is detected in a state where the value is the maximum value “19H”, the value is updated to the minimum value “00H” (see S5110 in FIG. 111). Further, the value of the menu position pointer 223ab is reset to the initial value “00H” every time a big hit occurs (see S4452 in FIG. 114). The probability change state always shifts after the end of the jackpot, so that the value of the menu position pointer 223ab is always set to “00H” at the start of the probability change state by resetting to the initial value when the jackpot is reached. be able to.

  The music selection frequency storage area 223ac is a storage area for storing the number of times each music (item) is selected. When setting the arrangement of the menu items in the item arrangement storage area 223aa, the music selection number storage area 223ac is referred to and the value of the menu position pointer 223ab is set to “19H” in descending order of the selected music. , "18H", and "17H" are stored in storage areas (that is, history areas). Details of the music selection frequency storage area 223ac will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 105 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the music selection count storage area 223ac. As shown in FIG. 105 (b), the music selection frequency storage area 223ac is configured to be able to store the type of music and the number of times of selection (music selection) so far in association with each other. For example, in the example of FIG. 105 (b), 0 times is stored in association with “Song A” as the number of selections, 1 time is stored as the number of selections with B, and On the other hand, 0 is stored in association with the number of selections. Similarly, the number of selections is stored in association with other music types. Each time the player decides to play one music by pressing the center button CB while the music selection menu screen is displayed, the music selection count storage area 223ac stores the number of selections corresponding to the determined music. Is updated by adding 1 (see S5108 in FIG. 111). Since the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is not backed up, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, all data indicating the number of times of selection of each music is cleared.

  Returning to FIG. 104 (b), the description will be continued. The music selection permission flag 223ad is a flag indicating whether or not the music can be selected by the player. If the music selection permission flag 223ad is on, it indicates that any music can be selected, and if it is off, it indicates that music cannot be selected. The music selection permission flag 223ad has an initial value set to off, and is set to on when notified by a state command output from the main control device 110 that the state has shifted to the probable change state (see FIG. 113). See S5213). In addition, each time an opening command indicating the start of a jackpot is received, it is reset to off (see S4451 in FIG. 114). While the music selection permission flag 223ad is on, it is determined that the music selection period is possible, and pressing of the operation button 230 is treated as valid.

  The menu display flag 223ae is a flag indicating whether or not the music selection menu screen (see FIG. 102A) is displayed. If the menu display flag 223ae is on, it indicates that the music selection menu screen is being displayed, and if it is off, it indicates that the music selection menu screen is not being displayed. The menu display flag 223ae has an initial value set to off, and is set to on when the display of the music selection menu screen is set (see S5105 in FIG. 111). Further, when a press on the center button CB is detected while the music selection menu screen is displayed, the music selection menu screen is closed and the menu display flag 223ae is set to off (see S5109 in FIG. 111). Also, when an opening command indicating the start of a jackpot is received, the opening is reset (see S4451 in FIG. 114). While the menu display flag 223ae is on, each time a press on the up button UB or the down button DB is detected, each item on the music selection menu screen is shifted in the corresponding direction. By detecting pressing of the center button CB, the reproduction of the items arranged in the music selection area is set, and the music selection menu screen is closed.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 106 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the audio output device 226. As shown in FIG. 106, the audio output device 226 is connected to be able to receive data output from the audio lamp control device 113.

  As shown in FIG. 106, the audio output device 226 has an MPU 301 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 301 includes a ROM 302 storing various control programs executed by the MPU 301 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 302. A certain RAM 303 is built in.

  The MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 is electrically connected to the input port 305 and the audio synthesis unit 306. When a command specifying audio data is received from the audio ramp control device 113 to the audio output device 226, the command is input to the MPU 301 via the input port 305 and the bus line 304. The audio data specified by the audio ramp control device 113 is read from the ROM 302 and output to the channel of the audio synthesis unit 306 corresponding to the audio type. For example, audio data corresponding to a song is output to CN1, audio data corresponding to a sound effect is output to CN2, and audio data corresponding to a warning sound is output to CN3.

  The voice synthesis unit 306 is configured by a known voice synthesis LSI that synthesizes voice data input to each channel and outputs the synthesized voice data to the amplifier unit 307. The synthesized voice data is amplified by the amplifier unit 307 and input to the speaker unit 308. Accordingly, various sounds specified by the sound lamp control device 113 can be output from the speaker unit 308.

  Next, the configuration of the ROM 302 provided in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 107A, the ROM 302 has at least an audio file storage area 302a.

  The audio file storage area 302a is a storage area in which audio files (audio data) used to output music, sound effects, and the like are stored. In the probable change state, an audio file for reproducing a music piece (music piece A to music piece Z) that can be selected by the player is also stored in the audio file storage area 302a. When the output of various audio data is instructed by the audio ramp control device 113, an audio file corresponding to the effect is read from the audio file storage area 302a and output to a corresponding channel of the audio synthesis unit 306.

  Details of the audio file storage area 302a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the audio file storage area 302a. As shown in FIG. 108, in the audio file storage area 302a, a music data group (a music A data group 302a1 to a music Z data group 302a26) composed of a plurality of data used for reproducing each music. In addition, all audio files (audio data) that can be reproduced by the audio output device 226, such as data used to output each sound effect (for example, data 302a27 for sound effect A), are stored.

  As described above, the audio files (song A data group 302a1 to song Z data group 302a26) corresponding to each of the songs (song A to song Z) that can be reproduced during the probable change state are each composed of a plurality of data. Have been. The configuration of the music data groups 302a1 to 302a26 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 109 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a music data group. As shown in FIG. 109, the music data group is composed of a plurality of pieces of data in units (parts) of the music. More specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 109, for example, intro data corresponding to the prelude (so-called intro) portion of the music and A-melody 1 corresponding to the first melody (so-called A-melody portion) of the music Data, B melody 1 data corresponding to the second (next to A melody) melody (so-called B melody part), and rust 1 corresponding to the most exciting part (so-called rust part) in the music. Data, interlude data corresponding to the interlude portion of the song, A melody 2 data corresponding to the second A melody portion of the song, and B melody 2 data corresponding to the second B melody portion of the song. , And data for chorus 2 corresponding to the second chorus portion of the music, and outro data corresponding to the outro portion of the music. By reproducing (outputting) these part-unit audio data in an order determined for each music, one music is reproduced. With such a configuration, audio data can be diverted when a part of a music piece is used in another effect or the like (for example, when a chorus portion of a predetermined music piece is reproduced during a variable display effect). . In other words, since it is not necessary to separately store the audio data of one music piece and the audio data of a part of the music piece, the storage capacity of the audio file storage area 302a can be reduced. In addition, data corresponding to a pointer value of a music pointer 303b described later set in the RAM 303 and a reproduction time when each data is reproduced are defined in association with each data constituting the music data group. ing. In the first control example, the music is played back in the order of the value of the music pointer 303b. That is, when the reproduction time of the music data being reproduced has elapsed, the value of the music pointer 303b is updated by 1, and the music data corresponding to the updated pointer value is reproduced. Thereby, each music data can be reproduced in the same order every time.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 303 provided in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 107B is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the RAM 303. As shown in FIG. 107 (b), the RAM 303 is provided with at least a music data group storage area 303a, a music pointer 303b, a maximum value storage area 303c, and a music timer 303d.

  The music data group storage area 303a is a storage area for storing an audio file (music data group) corresponding to the music to be reproduced during the probable change state. During the probable change state, one music piece is played by playing back the music piece data group stored in the music piece data group storage area 303a in the order of the value of the music pointer 303b. . In the music data group storage area 303a, a command (voice lottery music command) output from the sound lamp control device 113 to instruct reproduction of the music determined by lottery at the start of the probable change state, or a game. When a command (audio selection music command) output to instruct reproduction of the music selected by the user is received, a music data group corresponding to the music specified by the command is read from the audio file storage area 302a. It is output and stored (see S9205 and S9210 in FIG. 116).

  In the first control example, when the reproduction of the music is started based on the music data group stored in the music data group storage area 303a, the reproduction position is made different depending on how the music was determined. And Specifically, when starting the reproduction of the music determined by the lottery at the start of the probable change state, the reproduction is started from the climax part (the reproduction of the climax 1 data is set), while the player selects it. When the reproduction of the determined music is started, the reproduction is started from the beginning (intro part) of the music (the reproduction of the intro data is set). For the music selected by the player, it is highly likely that the player wants to listen carefully from the beginning of the music, whereas for the music selected at random, if the player does not like it at all, the player This is because the music may be changed immediately. Therefore, for a song selected at random, by starting playback from the chorus part, which is the most exciting part of the song, at least let the player listen to the most characteristic part of the song, A decision can be made as to whether to change. As a result, the goodness (characteristics) of the randomly selected music can be transmitted (understood) to the player as much as possible, so that the player's favorite music can be easily increased (the randomly selected music). To make it easier to find new songs you like). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the probable change state.

  The music pointer 303b is a pointer for indicating which data in the music data group stored in the music data group storage area 303a is being reproduced. The value of the music pointer 303b is set to “00H” when the reproduction of the music selected by the player is instructed (the music is notified by the selected music command for voice) (see S9206 in FIG. 116). ). Accordingly, reproduction of intro data corresponding to the pointer value “00H” is set. On the other hand, when the reproduction of the music selected at random at the start of the probable change state is instructed (the music is notified by the audio lottery music command), the value corresponding to the rust 1 portion is set (FIG. 116). See S9211). The value of the music pointer 303b is updated by one each time the reproduction of one music data set in the music data group storage area 303a ends. Further, in a state where the value of the music pointer 303b is the maximum value set for each music type (in this first control example, the pointer value corresponding to one immediately before the outro portion), the pointer is further changed. When the value is updated, the value is updated to “01H”.

  Here, when the reproduction is completed up to one immediately before the outro portion, the value of the music pointer 303b is updated to “01H” corresponding to the A melody 1 portion without reproducing the outro portion and the intro portion. This is to make it difficult for the player to recognize a break in the music when the music is repeatedly reproduced. If the music is repeatedly reproduced by reproducing the music from the intro part after the music is reproduced up to the outro part, the player can easily recognize the break of the music. In this case, there is a possibility that the user may be worried about the breaks in the music and may not be able to concentrate on the game during the probable change state. On the other hand, in the present control example, when the music is repeatedly played, the music is looped with a more natural connection because the outro part and the intro part of the music are skipped and the music returns to the A melody 1 part. it can. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to notice a break in the music, so that the player can concentrate on the game in the probable change state.

  The maximum value storage area 303c is a storage area for temporarily storing the maximum value of the music pointer 303b. As described above, in the first control example, the A melody 1 portion and the portion immediately before the outro portion are repeatedly reproduced. However, the pointer value corresponding to the portion immediately before the outro portion is: May vary by song. Depending on the music, the C melody may be set next to the B melody, a plurality of types of chorus may be set, or the interlude may not be set, which is different from the data configuration shown in FIG. 109. There are cases. Therefore, when the music data group is stored in the music data group storage area 303a and the reproduction of the music is set, the music value pointer 303b corresponding to the music to be reproduced is stored in the maximum value storage area 303c. Is set in advance (see S9207 and S9212 in FIG. 116). Each time the reproduction of one music data set in the music data group storage area 303a ends, the value of the music pointer 303b is compared with the maximum value stored in the maximum value storage area 303c. , It is possible to determine whether or not the reproduction up to the part immediately before the outro part has been completed (whether or not the music pointer 303b should be returned to “01H”). As a result, even if the data configuration differs for each music piece, the intro part and the outro part can be reliably skipped and loop-reproduced.

  The music timer 303d is a timer for measuring the reproduction time of the music data being reproduced. The timer value corresponding to the reproduction time of the music data is set in the music timer 303d every time the reproduction of the new music data is set. The reproduction time of each music data is defined in the music data group storage area 303a in association with the type of the music data. During the reproduction of the music, it is determined whether or not the reproduction time has elapsed based on the value of the music timer 303d. Although not shown, the music timer 303d is updated periodically (for example, every 1 millisecond).

<Control processing of voice lamp control device in first control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the main processing 8 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first control example.

  Of the main processing 8 (see FIG. 110) in the first control example, in the processing of S4101 to S4111 and S4113 to S4118, S4101 to S4111 and S4113 of the main processing (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as the processing from S4118 to S4118 is executed. Further, in the main processing 8 (see FIG. 110) in the first control example, after the effect update processing in S4111 is completed, the operation (pressing) on the operation button 230 is monitored, and the operation is detected. An operation detection process for executing control is executed (S4141), and the process proceeds to S4142. Details of this operation detection processing (S4141) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the process of S4141 is completed, or if it is determined in the process of S4101 that 1 millisecond has not elapsed from the previous process (S4101: No), the command determination process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 36, the command determination process 8 is executed (S4142), and the process proceeds to S4113. Details of the command determination processing 8 (S4142) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 111, details of the above-described operation detection processing (S4141) will be described. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the operation detection processing (S4141). In the operation detection process (S4141), first, it is determined whether an operation (press) on the operation button 230 has been detected (S5101). In the process of S5101, the output of the signal line connected to each of the operation buttons 230 is detected, and if any output is H, it is determined that the operation on the operation button 230 has been detected.

  In the process of S5101, if it is determined that the operation on the operation button 230 has not been detected (that is, the output of the signals corresponding to all the buttons is L) (S5101: No), the process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the operation on the operation button 230 has been detected (that is, the output of the signal corresponding to any one of the buttons is H) (S5101: Yes), then the music selection permission flag 223ad is on. If the music selection permission flag 223ad is off (S5102: No), it means that the music cannot be selected, and the operation on the operation button 230 is invalidated. This processing ends as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5102, when it is determined that the music selection permission flag 223ad is on (S5102: Yes), it is determined whether the menu display flag 223ae is on (S5103). In the process of S5103, when it is determined that the menu display flag 223ae is off (S5103: No), the display of the music selection menu screen is set (S5104), and the menu display flag 223ae is set on (S5105). This processing ends. According to these processes, when the music selection menu screen is not displayed in the probable change state, the music selection menu screen can be displayed regardless of the type of the pressed button.

  On the other hand, if the menu display flag 223ae is determined to be on in the process of S5103 (S5103: Yes), different control is executed according to the type of button operated (pressed) by the player. More specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the operation detected in S5101 is an operation on the center button CB (S5106). If it is determined that the operation detected this time is an operation on the center button CB. (S5106: Yes) sets the audio selection music command for notifying the audio output device 226 of the reproduction of the music corresponding to the current value of the menu position pointer 223ab (S5107).

  When the processing of S5107 is completed, then, one is added to the number of music selections of the music set to be reproduced (selected) by the processing of S5107, and updated in each of the storage areas set in the music selection number storage area 223ac. Then, the music selection menu screen is closed, and the menu display flag 223ae is set to off (S5109), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5106 that an operation on the center button CB has not been detected (S5106: No), the value of the menu position pointer 223ab is updated according to the type of the button whose operation has been detected (S5110). ). In the process of S5110, when the press of the upper button UB is detected, 1 is subtracted from the value of the menu position pointer 223ab, and when the press of the lower button DB is detected, the menu position pointer 223ab is detected. Is added to the value of. Note that, when the depression of the upper button UB is detected in a state where the menu position pointer 223ab is “00H”, the pointer value is updated to the maximum value “19H”. Further, when the depression of the down button DB is detected in a state where the menu position pointer 223ab is at the maximum value “19H”, the pointer value is updated to “00H”.

  When the processing of S5110 ends, the display mode of the music selection menu screen is updated according to the value of the menu position pointer 223ab updated by the processing of S5110 (S5111), and this processing ends. In the process of S5111, the item (image indicating the type of music) corresponding to the value of the menu position pointer 223ab is arranged in the music selection area, and the item (music) corresponding to the two values before and after the current value of the menu position pointer 223ab is set. Are displayed above and below the music selection area.

  By executing the operation detection processing (see FIG. 111), the update of the music selection menu screen and the determination of the music according to the operation content (the type of the button whose press is detected) of the operation button 230 can be performed as desired by the player. Can be performed.

  Next, the command determination process 8 (S4142) of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIG. This command determination process 8 (S4142) is a process executed in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment, as described above.

  In the command determination process 8 (see FIG. 112), in each of the processes of S4301 to S4309, S4311 to S4313, and S4315, S4301 to S4309, S4311 to S4313 of the command determination process (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment, respectively. , And S4315 are executed. In the command determination process 8 (see FIG. 112) in the first control example, when it is determined that the status command has been received in the process of S4309 (S4309: Yes), the command is notified by the received status command. A state command process for executing control according to the game state is executed (S4351), and this process ends. Details of this state command processing (S4351) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the command determination process 8 (see FIG. 112) in the first control example, when it is determined in the process of S4313 that a hit-related command has been received (S4313: Yes), the hit-related process in the first embodiment is performed. Instead of (see FIG. 37), the hit-related process 8 is executed (S4352), and this process ends. The details of the hit-related process 8 (S4352) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, details of the above-described state command processing (S4351) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing this status command processing (S4351). This state command processing (S4351) is processing for performing control according to the gaming state notified by the state command, as described above.

  In this state command processing (see FIG. 113), first, the data in the game state storage area 223i is updated according to the game state notified by the state command received from the main control device 110 (S5201). That is, based on the information according to the game state notified by the state command, when the certain symbol change state and the normal symbol time-saving state are notified, the lower two bits of the game state storage area 223i are set to “11B”. When the low probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the ordinary symbol are notified, the lower 2 bits of the gaming state storage area 223i are set to “01B”, and the low probability state of the special symbol and When the normal state of the normal symbol is notified, the lower two bits of the gaming state storage area 223i are set to "00B". Thereby, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the sound lamp control device 113 can easily grasp the change.

  When the process of S5201 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the status command indicates a transition to a probable change state (a probable change state of a special symbol and a time saving state of a normal symbol) (S5202), and a transition to the probable change state is made. If it is determined that the status command is not a status command indicating No. (S5202: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5202 that the status command indicating the transition to the probable change status has been received (S5202: Yes), then the reproduction count is determined from the music selection count storage area 223ac (see FIG. 105 (b)). Up to three data are read in the descending order (S5203). If the number of songs selected by the player is less than three after the power is turned on, only the selected songs (that is, data of less than three) are read. If no music has been selected once after power-on (that is, the number of music selections corresponding to all music types in the music selection number storage area 223ac is 0), data is read out in the process of S5203. Never.

  When the processing of S5203 is completed, up to three data read in the processing of S5203 are stored in the history area (storage area corresponding to the values “17H” to “19H” of the menu position pointer 223ab) in the item arrangement storage area 223aa. The item (song) to be stored in the song selection area on the song selection menu screen is determined by lottery (S5205). Next, it is determined whether the item determined by the lottery in the process of S5205 is an item (song) already stored in the history area (S5206), and if the item is already stored in the history area (S5206: Yes). Then, in order to prevent the same item (song) from being arranged in the song selection area and the history area in duplicate, the process returns to the process of S5205 and the lottery is performed again.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5206, if it is determined that the item (song) determined by the lottery in the process of S5205 is not an item already stored in the history area (S5206: No), the item determined by the lottery in the process of S5205 is determined. An audio lottery music command for notifying the reproduction of the corresponding music is set (S5207). The audio lottery song command set here is output to the audio output device 226 by the command output process (S4102) of the main process 8 (see FIG. 110). When the audio output device 226 receives the audio lottery music command, the audio output device 226 sets the music specified by the command to be reproduced from the chorus 1 portion. Here, the reason why the music selected by random lottery is reproduced from the chorus 1 portion is that if the player does not like it at all, the player may change the music immediately. Therefore, for a song selected at random, by starting playback from the chorus part, which is the most exciting part of the song, at least let the player listen to the most characteristic part of the song, A decision can be made as to whether to change. As a result, the goodness of the randomly selected music can be transmitted to the player as much as possible, so that it is easy to increase the favorite music of the player (the music that is newly liked from the randomly selected music) Can be easily found). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the probable change state.

  When the processing in S5207 is completed, the item determined by the lottery in the processing in S5205 is stored in the storage area corresponding to the value “00H” of the menu position pointer 223ab in the item arrangement storage area 223aa (S5208), and is stored immediately before. The item in the order to be arranged following the selected item is specified with reference to the arrangement order (that is, the alphabetical order of music pieces) specified in the item order storage area 222aa (S5209). Then, it is determined whether the item (song) specified in the processing of S5209 is data (item) stored in the storage area corresponding to the value “00H” of the menu position pointer 223ab in the item arrangement storage area 223aa (S5210). If it is determined that an item other than the item stored in the storage area corresponding to the value “00H” of the menu position pointer 223ab in the item arrangement storage area 223aa has been specified (S5210: No), it is already stored in the history area. It is determined whether the item has been specified (S5211).

  In the process of S5211, if it is determined that the data not stored in the history area has been identified in the process of S5209 (S5211: No), the item identified in the process of S5209 is replaced with the process of S5208 or the previous process of S5212. Is stored in the storage area next to the storage area stored in (S5212), and the process returns to S5209. On the other hand, in the process of S5211, if it is determined that the item specified in the process of S5209 is already stored in the history area (S5211: Yes), the specified item is stored in the item arrangement storage area 223aa. Instead, the process returns to S5209 without skipping the process of S5212. The migration is performed in the process of S5209, in which the items stored in the storage area corresponding to “00H” are specified in the order specified in the item order storage area 222aa until the item stored in the storage area corresponding to “00H” is specified. The processing of S5212 stored in the item arrangement storage area 223aa is repeated.

  In the process of S5210, when it is determined that the item specified by the process of S5209 is an item stored in the storage area corresponding to the value “00H” of the menu position pointer 223ab in the item arrangement storage area 223aa (S5210: Yes), which means that the item is stored in the storage area corresponding to all of the values “00H” to “19H” of the menu position pointer 223ab in the item arrangement storage area 223aa, and has returned to “00H” after making a round. , S5209 to S5212, end the processing loop, and shift the processing to S5213. In the processing of S5213, the music selection permission flag 223ad is set to ON (S5213), and this processing ends.

  By executing this state command processing (see FIG. 113), the initial arrangement of the configuration of the music selection menu screen can be set. In addition, up to three items (music pieces) can be arranged in the history area on the music selection menu screen in descending order of the number of times selected by the player. That is, for the upper three arrangements of the music selection area, it is possible to arrange an item having a large number of selections by the player in the past game (an item having a high possibility of being selected by the player). Therefore, in each probable state, the item that the player has repeatedly selected so far (that is, the item that the player is likely to select even in the probable state this time) can be selected with little effort. This can make it difficult for the player to feel troublesome when selecting music (items).

  Also, each time the state changes, the music to be played first can be determined by random lottery. Thereby, at least immediately after the transition to the probable change state, the music selected at random can be reproduced, so that the player can be given an opportunity to listen to music other than the music frequently selected. Therefore, a plurality of music pieces set in the pachinko machine 10 can be reproduced without waste. In addition, while listening to a song selected at random, the player may like the song and want to play it even in a probable state after the next time. Therefore, since the number of music pieces that the player likes can be increased, the interest of the game in the probable change state can be improved. Further, by continuing to select only the same music, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the game from becoming monotonous.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 114, the details of the hit-related process 8 (S4352) will be described. FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the hit-related process 8 (S4352). Of the hit-related processes 8 (S4352) in the first control example, in each of the processes of S4401 to S4410, the same processes as the hit-related processes (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment are respectively executed.

  In the hit-related process 8 (see FIG. 114) in the first control example, when the process of S4406 ends, both the music selection permission flag 223ad and the menu display flag 223ae are reset to off (S4451), and the menu position is set. The value of the pointer 223ab is reset to “00H” (S4452), and this processing ends. By executing each process of S4451 and S4452, the flag and the pointer related to the music selection menu screen can be reset every time the opening command is received (that is, every time a big hit is won).

  In the first control example, the flag and the pointer related to the music selection menu screen are reset every time a jackpot is won. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that the reset process is executed only when a jackpot is won in the probability change state. Further, the configuration may be such that the reset process is executed at the start of the probable change state.

<Control processing of audio output device in first control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the main process executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 115A is a flowchart showing the contents of the main processing.

  When the main process of the audio output device 226 is executed, first, a command determination process for performing a process according to a command received from the audio lamp control device 113 is executed (S9001). Details of this command determination processing (S9001) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the processing of S9001, the audio setting processing for setting the reproduction of the audio data and the switching of the data is executed (S9002). Details of the audio setting process (S9002) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S9002 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 303 (S9003). If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S9003 (S9003: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S9005), and the power-off processing is executed (S9006). After the execution of the power-off processing, the power-off processing-in-progress flag is turned off (S9007), and thereafter, the processing is in an infinite loop.

  On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S9003 (S9003: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 303 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 303 (S9004), and the RAM 303 is destroyed. If not (S9004: No), the process returns to S9001, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 303 has been destroyed (S9004: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing.

  Next, a command interruption process executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 115 (b) is a flowchart showing the contents of the command interruption processing.

  This command interruption process (see FIG. 115B) is a process executed each time a command is received from the audio ramp control device 113.

  In this command interruption processing, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in a command buffer area provided in the RAM 303 (S9101), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are read out by a command determination processing described later, and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, the command determination process (S9001), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 115A), executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. In this command determination process (S9001), control is performed according to the types of various commands received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination processing (S9001).

  In the command determination process (see FIG. 116), first, it is determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S9201). If there is no unprocessed new command (S9201: No), the command determination process is performed. And returns to the main processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S9201: Yes), a new command flag indicating that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S9202), and then the new command flag stored in the command buffer area is set. The command type is analyzed for all the commands in the processing (S9203).

  First, it is determined whether or not the unprocessed command includes an audio selection music command for notifying a music selected by the player by operating the operation button 230 (S9204). When it is determined that there is a music command (S9204: Yes), an audio file (music data group) corresponding to the music notified by the command is read from the audio file storage area 302a of the ROM 302, and the read music file is read. The data group is stored in the music data group storage area 303a (S9205). Next, “00H” is set as the value of the music pointer 303b, and a timer value corresponding to the reproduction time of the intro data is set in the music timer 303d (S9206). As a result, the music selected by the player operating the operation button 230 can be played back from the beginning, so that the music selected by the player can be carefully read (complete from the beginning of the music) to the player. ) I can listen.

  When the processing of S9206 is completed, the maximum value of the music pointer 303b corresponding to the music data group stored in the music data group storage area 303a this time is stored in the maximum value storage area 303c (S9207). The data reproduction is set (S9208), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S9204, if it is determined that the command received from the audio ramp control device 113 does not include the selected music command for audio (S9204: No), then the command is received from the audio ramp control device 113. It is determined whether or not there is a voice lottery music command for notifying the music selected at random based on the fact that the command has changed to the probable change state (S9209). In the process of S9209, if it is determined that there is an audio lottery music command (S9209: Yes), the audio file (music data group) corresponding to the music indicated by the received audio lottery music command is stored in the audio file storage area 302a. Then, the read music data group is stored in the music data group storage area 303a (S9210).

  When the process of S9210 ends, next, a pointer value corresponding to the rust 1 portion is set to the value of the music pointer 303b, and a timer value corresponding to the reproduction time of the rust 1 data is stored in the music timer 303d. It is set (S9211). Then, the maximum value of the music pointer 303b corresponding to the music data group stored in the music data group storage area 303a this time is stored in the maximum value storage area 303c (S9212), and the reproduction of the chorus 1 data is set. (S9213), and terminates this process.

  On the other hand, in the process of S9209, if it is determined that the selected music command for audio has not been received from the audio ramp control device 113 (S9209: No), the process responds to other commands received from the audio ramp control device 113. The process is executed (S9214), and the process returns to S9201. In the process of S9214, if the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 is, for example, a command instructing reproduction of a sound effect, the reproduction of the type of sound effect specified by the command is set. If the command is a command for instructing reproduction of a warning sound, reproduction of a warning sound of a type specified by the command is set.

  Next, the details of the audio setting processing (S9002) executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in the main processing (see FIG. 115A) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the voice setting process (S9002).

  In the audio setting process (see FIG. 117), first, it is determined whether or not the music in the probable change state is being reproduced (S9301). : No), meaning that a single sound effect, a warning sound, or the like is being reproduced, or that no sound has been output, and there is no possibility of switching to another sound data during the reproduction of the sound. This processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S9301, if it is determined that the music in the probable change state is being played (S9301: Yes), it is next determined whether or not it is the end timing of the music data being played (S9302). In other words, it is determined whether or not the value of the music timer 303d has become 0, and when it is determined that the timing of the reproduction of the music data has not come (that is, the value of the music timer 303d has not become 0) (S9302: No), this process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S9302, when it is determined that the end timing of the music data being reproduced has come (that is, the value of the music timer 303d has become 0) (S9302: Yes), In the data group storage area 303a, a process for setting reproduction of the music data next to the music data whose reproduction has been completed this time is executed. Specifically, the data stored in the maximum value storage area 303c (the maximum value corresponding to the music data group currently being reproduced) is compared with the current value of the music pointer 303b (S9303). ), It is determined whether or not the value of the music pointer 303b matches the maximum value (data stored in the maximum value storage area 303c) corresponding to the current music data group (S9304).

  In the process of S9304, when it is determined that the value of the music pointer 303b does not match the maximum value corresponding to the current music data group (S9304: No), 1 is added to the value of the music pointer 303b. Then, the process is updated (S9305), and the process proceeds to S9307. On the other hand, in the process of S9304, when it is determined that the value of the music pointer 303b matches the maximum value corresponding to the current music data group (S9304: Yes), the value of the music pointer 303b is changed to “ 01H ”(S9306), and the process moves to S9307. By updating the value of the music pointer 303b to “01H” by the process of S9306, loop reproduction can be performed by returning to the A melody 1 portion of the set music. That is, the loop reproduction can be performed by skipping the intro part and the outro part.

  Here, if the music is played in a loop, if the music is played back to the outro portion and then played back from the intro portion, the loop is played back, so that the player can easily recognize a break in the music. Would. In this case, there is a possibility that the player may be worried about a break in the music, and the player may not be able to concentrate on the game during the probable change state. On the other hand, in the first control example, when the music is repeatedly played, the music is looped with a more natural connection because the outro part and the intro part of the music are skipped and the music returns to the A melody 1 part. be able to. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to notice a break in the music, so that the player can concentrate on the game in the probable change state.

  In the processing of S9307 executed after the processing of S9305 or S9306 ends, one music data corresponding to the updated value of the music pointer 303b is read from the music data group storage area 303a (S9307). Then, the reproduction of the read music data is set (S9308), and the process ends.

  By executing the audio setting process (see FIG. 117), the loop playback can be performed while skipping the intro portion and the outro portion of the set music in the probable change state.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first control example, the player's operation is performed on the third symbol display device 81 during the predetermined period during the normal game (for example, the period during which the probable change state is set). A configuration is provided in which a music selection menu screen is displayed in which the display mode (items displayed in the appearance mode illuminated in the music selection area) is changed in conjunction with the operation on the button 230. When the center button 230 is pressed, the music (voice effect) corresponding to the display mode of the music selection menu screen (the item displayed in the music selection area) is reproduced (executed). In addition, after a predetermined period, the configuration of the music selection menu screen displayed first is changed based on the type of music (the type of sound effect) selected by the player so far (at least last time). I have.

  More specifically, when the state shifts to the probable change state, first, one song (one sound effect type) is randomly selected from a plurality of songs (songs A to Z) and arranged in the song selection area. The item is determined, and playback of the selected music is started. In addition, during the probable change state, the player operates the operation button 230 so that the player can select an arbitrary music (arbitrary effect). At the time of transition to the probable change state, one song is randomly selected and played, so that the song can be played until the player selects the song (while the song is not selected). Since the reproduction can be performed, the player's satisfaction with the probable change state that is advantageous to the player can be further increased. In addition, as an initial arrangement of a screen for selecting music by operating the operation button 230 (music selection menu screen), there is a possibility that a player may select a music regardless of the type of music randomly selected at the start of the probable change state. (A music that has been frequently selected by a player in a game up to now) is arranged at a position that can be selected with a small number of operations (the number of operations within three) on the operation button 230. I have. Here, if the initial arrangement of the music selection menu screen is determined, randomly selected items (songs) are arranged in the music selection area, and the other items are simply determined with reference to the items arranged in the music selection area. With a configuration in which the music pieces are arranged in alphabetical order (predetermined order), it may be difficult for the player to select a favorite music piece. In other words, if the item (song) the player wants to select and the item (song) selected at random are separated in order, the item to be selected (image indicating the type of the song to be selected) is shifted to the song selection area. There is a possibility that the number of operations on the operation button 230 for causing the player to increase the number of times, which may cause the player to feel troublesome. Also, as a method of making it difficult to feel annoying, it is also conceivable to set an item to be initially arranged in the music selection area in the case of a probable change state as an item frequently selected by the player. According to the method, the player is satisfied with the music reproduced (output) first in the probable change state in the first place, and the possibility of not changing the music (not displaying the music selection menu screen) is increased. The fewer opportunities for the player to display the music selection menu, the fewer opportunities to know the type of music set in the pachinko machine 10. For this reason, the possibility that the player intends to select another music is reduced. Therefore, even if a large number of music pieces are set to be selectable for the pachinko machine 10, most of the music pieces may not be selected and may be wasted. Therefore, it is less likely that the player will consider selecting another song. Even if a large number of songs are set to be selectable for the pachinko machine 10, most of them are selected. Can be wasted.

  On the other hand, in the first control example, the initial arrangement of the music selection menu screen is set so that the item that is likely to be selected by the player (the item that has been frequently selected in the game so far) is easily selected. are doing. More specifically, it is possible to select three items (songs) that the player has frequently selected (the number of selections is high) in the game so far with a small number of operations (the number of times the operation button 230 is pressed). It is configured to be arranged at the position (display area for three upper parts of the music selection area). With this configuration, even if the first item (image indicating the type of music) arranged in the music selection area of the music selection menu screen becomes an item corresponding to any music, a small number of operations (up button Items that are frequently selected by the player can be arranged at positions that can be selected when the number of times the UB is pressed is within three times. Therefore, in each probable state, the item that the player has repeatedly selected so far (that is, the item that the player is likely to select even in the probable state this time) can be selected with little effort. This can make it difficult for the player to feel troublesome when selecting music (items).

  In the first control example, the playback position (execution start position) of the music (sound effect) is made variable in accordance with the setting of the playback of the music (sound effect). More specifically, the music selected by the player operating the operation button 230 starts playback from the beginning of the music (that is, the intro part) (from the second start position). On the other hand, at the start of the probable change state, the music determined (selected) by random lottery is configured to start playing from the chorus 1 portion of the music (from the second start position). As a result, the music selected by the player on his / her own will can be played in a complete form from the beginning of the music. On the other hand, the reason why the music selected by the random lottery is reproduced from the chorus 1 portion is that if the player does not like it at all, the player may change the music immediately. Therefore, for a song selected at random, by starting playback from the chorus part, which is the most exciting part of the song, at least let the player listen to the most characteristic part of the song, A decision can be made as to whether to change. As a result, the goodness of the randomly selected music can be transmitted to the player as much as possible, so that it is easy to increase the favorite music of the player (the music that is newly liked from the randomly selected music) Can be easily found). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the probable change state.

  In the first control example, the number of items displayed on the music selection menu screen is limited to five (a number smaller than the total number of items), and the operation buttons 230 are operated to change the items displayed on the music selection menu screen. By doing so, all items can be selected in conjunction with the operation of the player. Here, on the music selection menu screen, as a method of making it easy for a player to select a favorite music, all items are displayed collectively on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (items are arranged in a matrix). In this way, a method of making it possible to understand at a glance which music (item) is arranged at which position is also conceivable. However, in this method, the display area (the area of the music selection menu screen) for displaying each item becomes large, and the display for displaying other display contents (the third symbol, the number of retained balls symbol, etc.) is performed. The area may be too narrow. On the other hand, in the first control example, the number of items displayed on the music selection menu screen is limited to five (a number smaller than the total number of items). With this configuration, the display area of the music selection menu screen can be reduced as compared with a case where all items are displayed collectively. Accordingly, display contents other than the music selection menu screen, such as the third symbol and the number of retained balls symbol, can be displayed with a larger display area.

  In the first control example, for the music determined by random lottery at the start of the probable change state, the reproduction from the chorus 1 portion is set, and the operation is performed on the operation button 230 during the probable change state. Although the composition has been configured to be reproduced from the intro part, the composition is not limited to this. Conversely, for a song determined by random lottery, playback from the intro portion is set, while a song voluntarily selected by the player operating the operation button 230 is played from the chorus 1 portion. It is good also as a structure which does. Most of the players who voluntarily select a song want to listen to the chorus portion of the selected song, so by playing the voluntarily selected song from the chorus portion, it is possible to meet the player's request. It can be granted instantly. Also, by playing the music whose reproduction is determined by random lottery at the start (transition) of the probable change state from the intro part, the player can calmly select the music. More specifically, the intro part of the music generally has a relatively calm melody, whereas the chorus part of the music generally has a relatively intense melody. Therefore, by setting the reproduction from the intro part, it is possible to set so that a relatively calm melody flows first. Therefore, while the relatively calm melody is playing, the player can select the music in a calm mood. In addition, it is not always necessary to make the reproduction position different depending on how the reproduction is set. For example, regardless of the circumstances, the playback may be started from the chorus 1 part (that is, from the most exciting part of the music), or the playback may be started from the intro part. With this configuration, it is possible to omit the control of determining the details and changing the reproduction position, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  In the first control example, the history area is arranged above the music selection area on the music selection menu screen. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set to an arbitrary arrangement. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a history area is arranged below the music selection area. That is, a configuration may be adopted in which three items (songs) frequently selected by the player in the game so far are arranged below the music selection area.

  In the first control example, an area in which items with a large number of times (high frequency) selected by the player are arranged is provided as the history area, but the configuration of the history area is not limited to this. For example, in place of or in addition to the configuration of the first control example, an area in which items that are unlikely to be selected by the player based on the past tendency of the player are placed as the second history area, A configuration may be provided in a range where it is difficult for the user to select (the number of operations on the operation button 230 for selecting a song is relatively large). More specifically, for example, in a state where a randomly selected song is being played, if the song is changed to another song before the predetermined period elapses (for example, within 5 seconds), The music is set as an item that is unlikely to be selected by the player from the next time on, in a range that is relatively difficult for the player to select (for example, a range that cannot be selected without performing at least 10 operations or more). It is good also as a structure to make it. The fact that the music has been changed within the predetermined time period means that the music that the player does not want to listen to has been played, and that the player may have changed the music in a hurry. The possibility that the user does not want to listen (the possibility that the music is immediately changed when the music is reproduced) increases. That is, there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable by being reproduced. Therefore, by arranging music changed at a relatively early stage (within a predetermined period) during reproduction in the second history area, it is possible to eliminate the possibility of being selected at random lottery in the next and subsequent probable changes. At the same time, it is relatively easy to select other items (items that are more likely to be selected by the player than items arranged in the second history area) (can be selected with a relatively small number of operations). ) Position. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the music reproduced at the start of the probable change state will cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  In the first control example, the number of selections of each music piece after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 is counted for each music piece, and three items (music pieces) are arranged in the history area in descending order of the number of times. However, the method of estimating music pieces that are likely to be selected by the player is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the tendency of music selection for each player can be stored in an external server owned by the manufacturer that developed the pachinko machine 10. More specifically, the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 can display URL information for connecting to an external server in a format (for example, a two-dimensional barcode format) readable by a portable terminal. Constitute. The URL information is read by the mobile terminal, the external server is accessed from the mobile terminal, and the ID and the password registered in advance or newly registered this time are input, and the personal data (pachinko) of the player are input. The number of jackpots won by the machine 10 and the number of special symbol lotteries can be checked. In this item, the history and the number of times of the selected music are also set. Then, when the game using the pachinko machine 10 is started while logging in to the server, the selection history stored in the server is reflected on the pachinko machine 10, and the items to be stored in the selection area based on the selection history are determined. The configuration may be determined. As a method of reflecting the data of the server on the pachinko machine 10, for example, the data set in the server is converted into a password (encoded) and displayed on the portable terminal of the player, and the password is operated on the portable terminal. The pachinko machine 10 can be input by the user. That is, on the pachinko machine 10 side, the correspondence between the password and the history is specified in advance, and when the password is input, the history (the number of selections for each music) corresponding to the password is stored in the music selection frequency storage area 223ac. May be set in advance. With this configuration, it is possible to display a music selection menu screen in accordance with the tendency of each player, and thus provide the pachinko machine 10 that allows the player to more easily select his or her favorite music. be able to.

  In the first control example, the initial arrangement of the items on the music selection menu screen is varied according to the type and the number of music pieces selected by the player (the selection history of the player). It is not limited. When performing a player participation type effect, such as an effect prompting an operation on a predetermined operation button, the initial mode of the effect may be varied according to the player's participation status. For example, for a player who tends to participate actively, control is performed so that a production mode that prompts a greater number of operations is easily selected, while a player who participates in a production less frequently is selected. Alternatively, a configuration may be made in which control is performed so that an effect mode that prompts an operation with a relatively small number of operations is easily selected. Further, for example, in the case of a player who participates in the effect at a low frequency, it may be configured such that an effect in which an advantageous result for the player is notified by pressing the button with a high degree of expectation is easily executed. With this configuration, a player with a low participation frequency is more likely to want to participate in the press-down effect, so that an appropriate mode can be set according to the tendency of the player. Further, in this case, instead of determining the presentation mode according to the player's participation status (history), the presentation mode such as the number of operations may be randomly determined by lottery. With this configuration, it is not necessary to memorize the player's participation status, so that control can be simplified.

  In the first control example, when the player decides one music piece from the music selection menu screen, the playback is started from the head of the music piece regardless of the situation. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in a case where the remaining time until the end of the probable change state is short (for example, a case where a big hit is started when the currently-executing fluctuation display ends), the reproduction may be started from the rust portion.

  In the first control example, for a song randomly selected at the start of the probable change state, reproduction is started from the chorus portion of the song, while for a song selected by the player from the song selection menu screen, the song is selected from the beginning of the song. Although the playback is configured to be performed, the control for changing the playback position of the music (the type of music data to be used first) in accordance with the circumstances in which the playback of the music is determined is not limited to this. For example, when setting the playback of a song based on the start of the first round of the jackpot as the song to be played during the jackpot, the playback is started from the beginning (intro part) of the song, while the ending of the jackpot is performed. When the reproduction of the music is set based on the start of the period, the reproduction may be started from the outro portion of the music.

  In the first control example, the reproduction position of the music (sound production) is determined according to how the type of the music (sound production) was determined (whether the selection was made by random lottery or the player voluntarily selected). Although the effect execution position) is configured to be variable, this control is not limited to sound effects. For example, the present control may be applied to a display effect performed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, the circumstances in which the type of the effect is determined are not limited to those exemplified in the first control example (whether selected by random lottery or selected voluntarily by the player). For example, when the execution of a specific effect is determined under the condition that the variable display corresponding to the departure is being executed, the specific effect is configured to be executed from the beginning, while the variable display corresponding to the jackpot is performed. When the execution of a specific effect is determined under the situation that the is being executed, the execution may be started from the middle of the specific effect. With this configuration, it is possible to play a game while paying more attention to the contents of the effect.

  In the first control example, the initial arrangement of the music selection menu screen is changed according to the history of selection of music by the player (the number of times each music is selected). Although the control is arranged at a position that can be selected by the number of times, this control is not limited to the case of selecting a music piece. For example, a game composed of items corresponding to the volume of the sound output from the sound output device 226, items corresponding to the brightness of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, items corresponding to the game history, and the like. The menu screen is configured to be displayed by operating the operation button 230. Then, according to the history of the items selected by the player in the past, the items that are more likely to be selected by the player may be arranged at positions that can be selected with a smaller number of operations.

  In the first control example, the music selection menu screen is not displayed unless the operation button 230 is operated after the probable change state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The screen may be displayed. With such a configuration, the trouble of a player who wants to select a music can be reduced, so that the convenience of the player can be improved.

  In the first control example, the first item displayed in the music selection area is selected by random lottery. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which, as the first item displayed in the music selection area on the music selection menu screen, the item selected by the player last in the probability change state set before the current probability change state.

  In the first control example, up to three items are selected with a relatively small number of operations in the initial arrangement on the music selection menu screen (shifted to the music selection area) in the initial arrangement on the music selection menu screen in the order of the number of times the player has selected in the game so far. Although it was configured to be arranged at a position where it is possible, the present invention is not limited to this. It suffices if the player can easily understand where the music that is likely to be selected by the player (the music whose frequency has been selected so far) is located on the music selection menu screen. The arrangement may be such that it is displayed somewhere in the music area MR. With such a configuration, for example, even when the number of items to be displayed in the music area MR is increased beyond five, items that are highly likely to be selected by the player are displayed from the beginning. Can be kept. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to select an item, so that the convenience for the player can be improved.

  In the first control example, the display mode is different between the item displayed in the music selection area and the item displayed in the other display area. In addition to this, the player makes a selection. The display mode may be varied depending on whether or not the music has a high possibility (items arranged in the history area in the initial arrangement of the music selection menu screen). With this configuration, the player can more easily find items that are highly likely to be selected by the player, so that the convenience of the player can be improved.

  In the first control example, when the music determined by random lottery is reproduced at the start of the probable change state, the reproduction is started from the rust part which is the most characteristic part of the music. The playback position is not limited, and may be any playback position where the player's attention can be easily directed (the player can easily think of listening to a randomly selected music piece). For example, a piece of music that is partially used for another effect (for example, a variable display effect or the like) (for example, a song that starts playing from the A melody portion as back music of the effect at the start of the super reach reach effect). With regard to, the configuration may be such that music playback is started from the same playback start position as the playback start position set in the effect. With such a configuration, the reproduction can be started from the reproduction position that has been reproduced during the normal game (that is, the reproduction position relatively familiar to the player). Therefore, by playing from a melody that can be played during a normal game (a melody that is likely to have already been heard by the player), it is possible to draw the player's attention. Can be made.

  In the first control example, the music selection menu screen is configured to be displayed in the probable change state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that a song selection menu screen can be displayed during a jackpot, or may be displayed during a time saving state. Further, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, super reach effect) is selected as the effect mode during the execution of the fluctuation display, the music selection menu screen is displayed during the execution of the specific effect mode, and the fluctuation mode is displayed. A configuration may be made so that the player can freely select a music piece during execution of the display.

<Second control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 to 139. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above, at the start of the probable change state, the configuration is such that the reproduction of the music (voice effect) selected at random is started, and by operating the operation button 230, an arbitrary music ( Audio production). In addition, for a song selected at random, reproduction is started from the chorus part (the most exciting part in the song) of the song, whereas for a song voluntarily selected by the player, the beginning of the song (intro part) The playback was started from the beginning.

  On the other hand, in the second control example, the music (the type of the sound effect) during the jackpot is configured to be selectable by the player. The playback order of the music data is dynamically changed in accordance with the progress of the jackpot so that the rust portion is played as much as possible before the end of the final round. That is, at a predetermined timing during the execution of the jackpot (for example, at the start of the interval period immediately before the last round or at the start of the last round), the type (A melody 1, B melody 1, rust 1 and the like are discriminated, and when a part far from the rust portion is reproduced, the reproduction order of each music data constituting the music data group is rearranged, and the next reproduction is performed. The part is changed so that it is a part close to the rust part. By this means, by the end of the jackpot, the player can more reliably hear the chorus portion, which is the most exciting (most characteristic) portion of the music.

  Also, in the second control example, at the end of the final round of the jackpot, if the climax part (specific range) is being reproduced, the start timing of the ending effect is delayed so that the climax part is reproduced longer. It is configured to continue. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the climax part (most characteristic) of the music that is most exciting (most characteristic) from being forcibly terminated by the end of the jackpot. As a result, the rust portion can be more enjoyed for the player, so that the player's interest in the game during the jackpot can be improved.

  The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example is different from that of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in that the configuration of the audio output device 226 is partially changed. The configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 is partially changed, the configuration of the RAM 303 of the audio output device 226 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 is partially changed. This is a point that has been changed, and that the control processing executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 has been partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, an audio output device 226 Other processes executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example are the same as those in the first control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the jackpot configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 118, when the jackpot opening period is started, music dedicated to the opening period (opening music) is reproduced. When the opening period ends and the first round starts, a period during which music can be selected (song selection period) is set. In the music selection period, a music area MR (see FIGS. 101 (a) and 101 (b)) is formed on the left side of the third symbol display device 81, similarly to the probability change state in the first control example. The display contents for the music area MR are the same as those in the above-described first control example, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the second control example, even if the player selects the music by displaying the music selection menu screen (see FIG. 101B) during the music selection period, the reproduction is not immediately started (the reproduction is delayed). The playback of the music is set at the timing when the first round is completed. Also, during the first round in which the music selection period is set, music dedicated to the music selection period (music for selection) is reproduced. With such a configuration, during the round period of one round, the playback start timing of the music can be set whether the player has immediately selected the music or has selected the music immediately before the end of the round. Since it is possible to make them the same, it is possible to allow the user to carefully select the desired music during the music selection period. The initial arrangement of the items on the music selection menu screen is set by the same control as in the above-described first control example. That is, in the music selection area, music (items) selected by random lottery are arranged, and in the upper three display areas of the music selection area, the music (items) having a large number of selections by the player in the game up to now is displayed. ) Is placed.

  As shown in FIG. 118, when the round period ends and the interval period starts, the music selected by the player (if the player does not select a music on the music selection menu screen, the lottery at the start of the big hit is performed). , The reproduction of the music arranged in the music selection area) is started. The reproduction of the music continues at least until the final round of the jackpot ends. Then, when the final round ends and the ending period starts, the ending effect is basically started and the ending effect music is reproduced. As described above, when the chorus portion is being reproduced at the end timing of the final round, the reproduction of the chorus portion of the music is continued for a longer time by delaying the start timing of the ending effect. Since the climax part of the music that is the most exciting part can be heard by the player for a longer time, the interest in the game during the jackpot can be improved.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 118, in the big hit in the second control example, there are two reordering determination timings for determining whether to rearrange the reproduction order of the music data group (the interval period immediately before the last round in the big hit). At the start of the game and at the beginning of the last round of jackpots). At these reordering determination timings, based on the music reproduction position (the type of the currently reproduced music data), whether to rearrange the music data to be reproduced next (whether to change from the normal reproduction order) Is determined. In this determination, if it is determined that the music is to be rearranged, the number of parts (the number of music data to be reproduced) until the next chorus is reproduced is reduced (for the music currently set to be reproduced). The playback order of the music data is rearranged so that the playback of the chorus part is set next to the data group). As a result, the time until the next rust is reproduced can be shortened, so that the rust portion can be reproduced more reliably until the big hit ends. Note that whether or not the music data is of a type that is determined to be rearranged in the music reproduction order is set (defined) in a rearrangement determination table 222bb (see FIG. 123) described later.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 119 and 120, a description will be given of a specific example in the case where the reproduction order of music pieces is changed. FIG. 119 shows the change of the jackpot state when the reordering determination timing 1 (at the start of the interval period immediately before the last round) is determined during the reproduction of the music A, and the reproduction order is determined to be rearranged. An example of a correspondence relationship with a transition is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 119, during one round of the jackpot, a song selection song dedicated to the song selection period is reproduced as a song. If the music piece A is selected by the player during this time, the reproduction of the music piece A is started from the beginning (that is, from the intro portion of the music piece A) when one round of the jackpot is completed. Thereafter, in the order of arrangement of the music data group corresponding to the music A (the order of the value of the music pointer 303b associated with each data), from the A melody 1 part to the part immediately before the outro part Is played back in a loop.

  When the reordering determination timing 1 is reached while the loop reproduction is continued, it is determined whether or not the reproduction order of the music data is to be reconfigured. FIG. 119 illustrates a case where the A melody 1 portion is being reproduced at the time of the change determination timing 1. As shown in the middle part of FIG. 119 (transition of music before recomposition), if the A melody 1 part is being reproduced at the recomposition determination timing 1, the B melody 1 part is not reproduced until the final round of the jackpot. The last round is likely to end during playback. In other words, there is a high possibility that the reproduction of the music A will end before the player reaches the chorus 1 part, which is the part (the part) most likely to be heard by the player. Therefore, in this case, when the reordering determination timing 1 is reached, the replay order of the music data group is reordered, and the replay order is set so that the chorus 1 portion is easily reproduced by the end of the final round.

  More specifically, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 119 (transition of music after rearrangement), when the reproduction of the A melody 1 portion that was being reproduced at the time when the rearrangement is determined ends, the original (see FIG. 119) The control is performed such that the B melody 1 portion, which is the order of the transition before the rearrangement shown in the middle row, is skipped and the rust 1 portion is reproduced. More specifically, the pointer value of the music pointer 303b is updated to a value corresponding to the climax part 1 (data for climax 1) of the music A, and the reproduction of the climax data is set. In this way, in the final round, the climax part of the song, which is the most exciting part, can be made to be heard by the player. Can be.

  After the playback order is changed and the playback of the climax 1 is set, the playback is continued in the order of the value of the music pointer 303b. That is, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 119, if the jackpot end timing is not reached during the reproduction of the rust 1 portion, the interlude portion (interlude data) is reproduced as usual.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 120, a specific example will be described in which it is determined that the music playback order is to be rearranged at the rearrangement determination timing 2 (that is, the start timing of the last round of the jackpot). In the example of FIG. 120, the B melody 1 portion is being reproduced at the time of the rearrangement determination timing 1, and the reproduction of the B melody 1 portion is completed before the rearrangement determination timing 2 is reached, and the rust 1 portion is reproduced. It illustrates a case where a transition is made to reproduction.

  In the example of FIG. 120, at the rearrangement determination timing 1, the B melody 1 part is being reproduced, and the next part to be reproduced is the rust 1 part. There is a high possibility that one part will be in a reproduced state. Therefore, at the rearrangement determination timing 1, the rearrangement of the reproduction order is avoided. In the example of FIG. 120, at the rearrangement determination timing 2, the rust 1 portion is being reproduced. In this case, as shown in the middle part of FIG. 120, if the reproduction is continued without changing the reproduction order, the reproduction of the rust 1 part ends in the middle of the final round, and the next part of the rust 1 part is performed for a relatively long period. Is reproduced. Since the interlude portion has a relatively gentle melody, the interlude portion may be played for a long time in the final round, which may impair the player's interest in the jackpot game. Therefore, if the rust 1 portion is already being reproduced at the reordering determination timing 2, the music is reproduced in the order of reproduction, and as shown in the lower part of FIG. 120, after the rust 1 portion is reproduced, the rust 2 portion (the rust 1 portion) is reproduced. Set so that the next chorus is played. With such a configuration, in the final round of the jackpot, the climax part, which is the most exciting part of the music, can be continuously reproduced for a longer period. Therefore, the player's interest in the game in the final round of the jackpot can be improved.

  As described above, in the second control example, at a predetermined timing in the jackpot (at the start of the interval period immediately before the last round and at the start of the last round), the progress of the music (the current playback position in the music) is changed. Accordingly, a determination is made as to whether or not the playback order of the music should be changed. Then, in the final round of the jackpot, if the rust portion is not reproduced at all or the reproduction time may be shortened, the rust portion (the rust 1 portion, the rust 2 portion, etc.) is reproduced longer during the final round. Thus, the playback order of the music data is rearranged (at least the music data to be reproduced next is changed from a predetermined order (order of the value of the music pointer 303b)). In other words, the playback order of the music data is dynamically changed based on the progress status of the jackpot and the playback position of the music so that the chorus portion is played longer during a predetermined period (final round) of the jackpot. The configuration is such that With such a configuration, in the final round of the jackpot, the player can hear the climax portion of the music that is most prominent for a longer time. Therefore, the player can have a greater sense of excitement immediately before the end of the jackpot, thereby increasing the motivation of the player for the game.

  If the number of rounds is a jackpot with a relatively small number of rounds (eg, five rounds of jackpot B), there is a possibility that all rounds will end without reaching the rust portion in the first place. In particular, if the player ends the jackpot without listening to the rust portion (the rust 1 portion, the rust 2 portion, etc.) despite the fact that the player is displaying the song selection menu screen and playing the song that he voluntarily selected, There is a possibility that the player will be greatly discouraged. This is because when the player voluntarily selects a song, it is highly likely that he / she is looking forward to listening to the chorus portion of the selected song. On the other hand, in the second control example, the rust portion can be reproduced at least once before the final round of the jackpot ends. Therefore, the player who has selected the music can be satisfied.

  Here, as a method for reproducing the chorus portion in the final round of the jackpot, a method of setting reproduction of the music data corresponding to the chorus portion at the start of the final round regardless of the progress of the music may be considered. . However, according to this method, there is a possibility that the connection of the music may become unnatural before and after the start of the final round (that is, before and after switching to the reproduction of the rust portion). That is, there is a high possibility that the reproduction of the rust portion is suddenly started in the middle of another part. Therefore, according to this method, the player may have a sense of incongruity with the music being played, and may suspect that the pachinko machine 10 is out of order. That is, it is doubtful whether the pachinko machine 10 is operating normally, and there is a possibility that the player may have anxiety about the game. On the other hand, in the second control example, the playback order of the music data is rearranged (variable) in units of parts (units of melody (tune)). The music can be reproduced with a small voice mode. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game during the jackpot with ease.

  In the second control example, at the start of the interval period immediately before the last round in the jackpot, and at the start of the last round, a determination is made as to whether or not to change the reproduction order of the music data. It is not limited to this. The number of times and timing for determining whether to rearrange the reproduction order can be arbitrarily determined.

  Further, in the second control example, the playback order of the music data is rearranged so that the chorus portion is reproduced longer during the last round. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the chorus portion is reproduced. The round can be set arbitrarily.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 121, a description will be given of the correspondence between the transition of the jackpot state and the transition of the music part when the start timing of the ending effect is delayed. FIG. 121 is a diagram exemplifying a case where the reproduction of the music data is rearranged, and as a result, the chorus 2 part is being reproduced at the end of the final round.

  The top row of FIG. 121 shows the transition of the state at the jackpot, the second row from the top shows the transition of the music when it is assumed that the start of the ending effect has not been delayed, and the second row from the bottom shows the rust portion. Shows the transition of the music when the start timing of the ending effect is delayed in order to play back longer, and the lowermost portion shows the transition of the effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the big hit. I have.

  As shown in the second diagram from the top in FIG. 121, if the delay control of the ending effect is not performed, the reproduction of the music is stopped during the reproduction of the chorus 2 portion, and the music for the ending is reproduced. In this case, even though the player has listened to the most exciting part, it may give the impression that a different melody has started suddenly, and the player may be dissatisfied. Therefore, in the second control example, when the rust portion (the rust 1 portion, the rust 2 portion, and the like) is being reproduced at the end timing of the final round of the jackpot, a diagram shown in the second row from the bottom in FIG. 121 is shown. As described above, the timing at which the ending music is reproduced is delayed, and the rust portion is continuously reproduced for a longer time. Along with this, the effect mode displayed during the big hit is continued as it is. In other words, even though the ending period has actually started, the effect is as if the big hit has continued from the end of the final round until a predetermined period (for example, a maximum of 4 seconds) has elapsed. The mode (display mode, audio mode) is set.

  With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the music is terminated during the reproduction of the rust portion, and to increase the climax portion of the tune, which is longer than the climax part of the music, before the ending effect of the jackpot starts. The part can be heard by the player. Therefore, it is possible to give a greater satisfaction to the player who has selected the music.

<Electrical configuration in second control example>
Next, an electrical configuration in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 122A is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the ROM 222 according to the second embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 122 (a), the configuration of the ROM 222 in the second control example is different from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the above-described first control example (see FIG. 104 (a)) in the music data group type storage area. 222ba, a rearrangement determination table 222bb, and an ending effect selection table 222bc are added.

  The music data group type storage area 222ba is a data table that stores the configuration of a music data group corresponding to each music. In the music data group type storage area 222ba, at least information indicating a reproduction order and a reproduction time of each music data constituting the music data group is defined for each music type. In the above-described first control example, the type of the music to be reproduced and the circumstances in which the music is determined (whether the music is selected by random lottery or the music selected by the player) in the sound lamp control device 113. ) Is notified to the audio output device 226, and thereafter, the music output data is loop-reproduced in the audio output device 226 in a predetermined order. That is, it is not necessary for the sound lamp control device 113 to grasp the progress of the music being reproduced. On the other hand, in the second control example, the reproduction order of the music data is changed according to the progress status of the jackpot and the music reproduction position (the type of the music data being reproduced), and the ending effect start timing It is necessary to execute the delay control. For this reason, it is necessary for the audio lamp control device 113 to also know the playback position of the music (the type of music data currently being reproduced) and the like. Therefore, in the second control example, the configuration is such that the music data group storage area 222ba is defined, and the configuration of the music data group set in the audio output device 226 and the music data being used (reproduced). The type of data, the type of music data to be reproduced next, and the like can be grasped.

  The rearrangement determination table 222bb is a data table that is referred to to determine whether or not the reproduction order of the music data is rearranged when one of the rearrangement determination timings 1 and 2 at the jackpot. The rearrangement determination table 222bb includes, in accordance with the type of the music data currently set to be reproduced, a determination result as to whether or not to rearrange the music data, and the music data to be set next to be reproduced when the rearrangement is determined. The type is specified. Details of the rearrangement determination table 222bb will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 123 is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the rearrangement determination table 222bb. As shown in FIG. 123, the rearrangement determination table 222bb includes, for each music type, the type of the music data that is being reproduced at the time of the rearrangement determination timing and the determination result (the reproduction order is Whether or not it is determined to be rearranged) is defined in association with each other.

  More specifically, for example, for the A melody 1 portion of the music A, “OK” is defined in association with the discrimination result, and the type of the music data to be reproduced next is “Rust”. "1" is defined in association with this. For this reason, if the reordering determination timing comes during the reproduction of the A melody 1 part, the rust 1 part is reproduced after the reproduction of the A melody 1 part is completed (the reproduction of the B melody 1 part is skipped). Thus, the reproduction order of the music data is rearranged. In addition, “impossible” is defined in association with the B melody 1 as a determination result. For this reason, even if the reordering determination timing is reached during the reproduction of the B melody portion, the reproduction order of the music data cannot be changed. Therefore, after the reproduction of the B melody 1 part is completed, the rust 1 part is reproduced as usual.

  Similarly, as shown in FIG. 123, “OK” is associated with the chorus 1 portion, the interlude portion, and the A melody 2 portion of the music A as the determination result, and As the type of the music data to be reproduced, “rust 2” is associated and defined. For this reason, in the case where the rearrangement determination timing is reached during the reproduction of the chorus 1 portion, the interlude portion, or the A melody 2 portion, after the reproduction of the chorus 1 portion, the interlude portion, or the A melody 2 portion is completed, the chorus 2 is completed. The reproduction order of the music data is rearranged so that the part is reproduced. In addition, “impossible” is defined in association with the B melody 2 portion of the music A as the determination result. Therefore, after the reproduction of the B melody 2 portion is completed, the rust 2 portion is reproduced as usual. Furthermore, “OK” is associated and defined as the determination result for the rust 2 portion in the music A, and “Rust 1” is associated and defined as the type of music data to be reproduced next. Have been. For this reason, if the reordering determination timing is reached while the climax part 2 is being reproduced, the reproduction order of the music data is rearranged so that the climax part 2 is reproduced after the reproduction of the climax part 2 ends.

  Similarly, with respect to the music B and thereafter, the combination determination is performed in a state where a relatively distant reproduction position (a reproduction position where one or more parts are separated) is being reproduced with respect to the climax part set in the music a plurality of times. When the timing comes, the data of the rearrangement determination table 222bb is defined so that the latest rust portion is reproduced after the currently reproduced part ends. With this configuration, the rust portion can be more reliably reproduced in the final round, so that the most exciting portion of the music can be reproduced and then the big hit can be ended. Therefore, the player's interest in the jackpot game can be improved.

  Returning to FIG. 122 (a), the description will be continued. The ending effect selection table 222bc is a data table that defines an ending effect mode for each timing when the ending effect is started. As described above, in the second control example, when the end timing of the last round is reached during the reproduction of the rust portion (the rust 1 portion, the rust 2 portion, and the like), the reproduction of the rust portion is continued, and the ending effect. The start is delayed. Here, even if the start timing of the ending effect is delayed, the ending effect execution period is shortened by the delay because the jackpot ending period is constant. In the second control example, a plurality of ending effects that can be selected in accordance with the ending effect execution period are defined in the ending effect selection table 222bc. Details of the ending effect selection table 222bc will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 124 is a diagram showing the stipulated contents of the ending effect selection table 222bc. As shown in FIG. 124, in the ending effect selection table 222bc, the selection is made for each range of the remaining time (the value of the remaining reproduction time timer 223bb) until the end of the rust portion reproduction at the end of the final round of the jackpot. The type of the ending effect to be performed is defined in association with each other. The timer value corresponding to the reproduction time of the data is set in the remaining reproduction time timer 223bb at the timing when the reproduction of the music data is set, and the value is periodically decremented by one (every millisecond). It is configured to be.

  As shown in FIG. 124, for the range where the value (T) of the remaining reproduction time timer 223bb is 1000 or less (that is, the remaining reproduction time of the rust portion at the end of the last round is 1 second or less), the normal An ending effect (normal ending) of the mode is defined in association with the ending effect. This normal ending effect has an effect time of 4 seconds. That is, the period from the start of the ending period to the end of the ending effect (the sum of the remaining playback time of the rust portion and the normal ending effect period) is longer than 4 seconds and not more than 5 seconds. Is set to On the other hand, the jackpot ending period is set to 5 seconds. In other words, between the end of the normal ending effect and the end of the ending period, a maximum of about 1 second is provided. In the present control example, during the ending effect, an image (result image) for notifying the number of prize balls acquired by the player during the big hit is displayed, and a difference from the end of the ending effect to the end of the ending period is displayed. During the period, the result image is continuously displayed as a still image. This can prevent (suppress) the player from having the impression that the effect has been interrupted during the period from the end of the ending effect to the actual end of the ending period. .

  The value (T) of the remaining playback time timer 223bb is greater than 1000 and less than or equal to 2000 (that is, the remaining playback time of the rust portion at the end of the final round is greater than 1 second and less than or equal to 2 seconds). On the other hand, as the type of the ending effect, a shortened ending 1 in which the effect time is 3 seconds is defined in association with the ending effect. That is, the sum of the remaining reproduction time of the rust portion and the effect time of the ending effect is set to be longer than 4 seconds and equal to or less than 5 seconds. Therefore, also in this case, the period from the end of the ending effect to the actual end of the ending period can be set to 1 second or less. Therefore, the period during which the result image is continuously displayed as a still image can be shortened, so that it is possible to prevent a player from feeling uncomfortable with the display content of the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, the value (T) of the remaining reproduction time timer 223bb is larger than 2000 and equal to or less than 3000 (that is, the remaining reproduction time of the rust portion at the end of the last round is longer than 2 seconds and equal to or less than 3 seconds). For the range, a shortened ending 2 in which the production time is 2 seconds is associated and defined as the type of the ending production. That is, similarly to the case where the normal ending or the shortened ending 1 is set, the sum of the remaining playback time of the rust portion and the rendering time of the ending effect is longer than 4 seconds and not more than 5 seconds. Is set. For the range in which the value (T) of the remaining reproduction time timer 223bb is larger than 3000, the shortening ending 3 in which the rendering time is 1 second is defined as the type of the ending rendering. Here, in the second control example, in order to secure the ending effect production time, the start timing of the ending effect is not delayed by more than 4 seconds. That is, if the chorus portion continues to be reproduced even after 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the ending period, the reproduction of the music (big hit effect) is terminated and the ending effect is executed. Therefore, when the shortened ending 3 is set, the reproduction time of the rust portion can be limited to between 3 seconds and 4 seconds. Therefore, as in the case where the normal ending and the shortened endings 1 and 2 are set, the sum of the playback time of the rust portion and the production time of the ending effect is set to be longer than 4 seconds and 5 seconds or less. Is set.

  As described above, in the second control example, at the time when the end timing of the last round is reached, if the climax part is being reproduced, the start timing of the ending effect is delayed. Then, according to the length of the period from the start of the ending period to the end of the reproduction of the rust portion (or the termination of the reproduction), the mode of the ending effect is changed, and the remaining time of the rust portion is set. Regardless of this, the ending effect can be ended before the ending period ends. With this configuration, it is possible to allow the player to listen to the chorus portion, which is the most exciting portion of the music, for a longer time, and to execute an ending effect without a sense of incongruity.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 122B is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 122 (b), the configuration of the RAM 223 in the second control example is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example (see FIG. 104 (b)) by the reproduction data type storage area 223ba and the remaining The difference is that a playback time timer 223bb, an ending delay flag 223bc, a music type storage area 223bd, an ending type storage area 223be, and a delay period timer 223bf are added. The other configuration is the same as that of the RAM 223 in the above-described first control example, and a detailed description thereof will not be repeated.

  The reproduction data type storage area 223ba is a storage area for storing data indicating the type of music data being reproduced by the audio output device 226. During the song playback period at the jackpot, the playback position of the song is specified based on the data stored in the playback data type storage area 223ba, and the playback order of the song data is changed when the combination determination timing comes. It can be determined whether or not to rearrange. Each time a music command is received from the audio output device 226, the reproduction data type storage area 223ba is updated to a value corresponding to music data of the type indicated by the command (see S5701 in FIG. 135). Here, in the sound output device 226, when the reproduction time of one music data ends and the reproduction of the next music data is set, the audio output device 226 sets the type of the music data to be set to the sound lamp control device. This is a command for notifying 113. With the music command, the type of the music data reproduced by the audio output device 113 can be accurately grasped on the audio lamp control device 113 side.

  The remaining playback time timer 223bb is a timer for measuring the remaining playback time of the music data. The remaining playback time timer 223bb is updated periodically (for example, every 1 millisecond). If the climax part is being reproduced at the end timing of the jackpot final round, the remaining reproduction time of the climax part is specified with reference to the timer value of the remaining reproduction time timer 223bb. The effect type of the ending effect is determined according to the remaining playback time and the contents of the ending effect selection table 222bc described above (see S5603 in FIG. 134).

  The ending delay flag 223bc is a flag indicating whether or not it is a period during which the execution start of the ending effect is delayed. If the ending delay flag 223bc is on, it indicates a period (ending delay period) from when the delay of the start of the ending effect is determined to when the ending effect is started. On the other hand, if the ending delay flag 223bc is off, it indicates that the ending is not in the ending delay period. The ending delay flag 223bc is set to ON when the chorus portion is being reproduced at the time when the ending command is received (S5605 in FIG. 134). In addition, when the ending delay period has elapsed and the start of the ending effect is set, the setting is turned off (see S5306 in FIG. 129).

  The music type storage area 223bd is a storage area for storing data corresponding to the type of music selected by the player during the music selection period set in the first round of the jackpot. In the music type storage area 223bd, data corresponding to one music (item) determined by random lottery at the start of the music selection period (that is, the first round of the jackpot) is stored (S5221 in FIG. 132). reference). When a music is selected by the player during the music selection period, data corresponding to the selected music is overwritten (see S5121 in FIG. 128). At the end of the music selection period (the first round of the jackpot), a voice selection music command for notifying the reproduction of the music corresponding to the data stored in the music type storage area 223bd is set (S5507 in FIG. 133). reference).

  The ending type storage area 223be stores the ending effect type determined according to the ending effect selection table 222bc and the timer value of the remaining playback time timer 223bb when the ending effect start timing is delayed. This is a storage area for storing during the period. The ending portion is stored in the ending type storage area 223be at the time when the ending command is received, and when the delay of the start of the ending effect is determined and the effect type of the ending effect is determined, the determination is made. The data corresponding to the rendered effect type is stored (see S5604 in FIG. 134). When the ending delay period has elapsed, the start of the ending effect corresponding to the data stored in the ending type storage area 223be is set (see S5305 in FIG. 129).

  The delay period timer 223bf is a timer for measuring an elapsed time (length of the ending delay period) after the start delay of the ending effect is determined. The delay period timer 223bf is updated periodically (for example, every 1 millisecond) during the ending delay period. If it is determined based on the value of the delay period timer 223bf that the length of the ending delay period has reached 4 seconds before the reproduction of the rust portion ends, the ending delay period is terminated. An ending effect is started (see S5303 in FIG. 129).

  Next, the configuration of the audio output device 226 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 125 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the audio output device 226 in the second control example. As shown in FIG. 125, the configuration of the audio output device 226 in the second control example is different from the configuration of the audio output device 226 in the first control example (see FIG. 106) in that an input / output port is used instead of the input port 305. The present embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that a 311 is provided, a bus line 312 is provided in place of the bus line 304, and the configuration of the RAM 303 is partially changed.

  The reason why the input / output port 311 and the bus line 312 are changed is that a command can be output from the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 to the audio ramp control device 113. That is, the input / output port 311 and the bus line 312 are configured to be able to communicate in both directions, that is, the direction from the sound lamp control device 113 to the MPU 301 and the direction from the MPU 301 to the sound lamp control device 113.

  Next, a configuration of the RAM 303 of the audio output device 226 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 126 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 303. As shown in FIG. 126, the RAM 303 in the second control example is different from the configuration of the RAM 303 in the first control example (see FIG. 107B) in that a rearrangement waiting flag 303e and a rearrangement type storage area 303f are added. It is different in that it is. Other configurations are the same as those in the first control example described above, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The rearrangement waiting flag 303e is a flag indicating a period from when the voice lamp controller 113 notifies the user of the change of the reproduction order of the music data to when the rearrangement of the order is actually set. The type storage area 303f is a storage area for storing data corresponding to the type notified from the audio lamp control device 113 as the type of music data to be set for reproduction first after rearrangement of the reproduction order. . When a voice recombination command for notifying the rearrangement of the reproduction order of the music data is received from the audio ramp control device 113, the data corresponding to the type of the music data notified by the command is stored in the rearrangement type storage area 303f. And the rearrangement waiting flag 303e is set to ON (see S9402 and S9403 in FIG. 138). If the reproduction time of the music data being reproduced elapses while the rearrangement waiting flag 303e is on, the music data corresponding to the data stored in the rearrangement type storage area 303f is the next music data to be reproduced. This is set (see S9313 in FIG. 139).

<Regarding control processing of voice lamp control device in second control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 to 135. First, the main process 9 executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. The main process 9 is a process executed in place of the main process 8 (see FIG. 110) in the first control example.

  Of the main processing 9 (see FIG. 127) in the second control example, in the processing of S4101 to S4111 and S4113 to S4118, respectively, S4101 to S4111 of the main processing 8 (see FIG. 110) in the first control example, and The same processes as those in S4113 to S4118 are executed.

  In the main process 9 (see FIG. 127) in the second control example, when the effect update process in S4111 ends, the operation detection process 9 is executed instead of the operation detection process (see FIG. 111) in the first control example. (S4151). In the operation detection process 9 (S4151), similarly to the operation detection process (see FIG. 111) in the first control example, the operation (press) of the operation button 230 is monitored, and the control corresponding to the detection of the operation is performed. This is the process to be executed. This operation detection processing 9 (S4151) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the operation detection process 9 (S4151) is completed, an ending effect for determining whether or not to start the ending effect in a period (ending delay period) while the delay of the start of the ending effect is set is next. A start determination process is performed (S4152). Details of the ending effect start determination processing (S4152) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the ending effect start determination process (S4152) is completed, a command determination process 9 is executed instead of the command determination process 8 (see FIG. 112) in the first control example (S4153), and the process proceeds to S4113. In this command determination process 9 (S4153), a hit-related process 9 (S4361) is executed instead of the hit-related process 8 (see FIG. 114) in the command determination process 8 (see FIG. 112) in the first control example. Since they are the same except for the point described above, their illustration is omitted.

  Next, the details of the above-described operation detection processing 9 (S4151) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the operation detection process 9 (S4151) in the second control example. As described above, this operation detection process 9 (S4151) is a process executed in place of the operation detection process (see FIG. 111) in the first control example. This is a process for monitoring an operation (pressing) on the button 230 and executing control corresponding to the detection of the operation.

  Of the operation detection processing 9 (see FIG. 128) in the second control example, in steps S5101 to S5106 and S5109 to S5111, the processings S5101 to S5106 in the operation detection processing (see FIG. 111) in the first control example are respectively performed. And the same processing as the processing of each of S5109 to S5111 is executed. In the operation detection process 9 in the second control example, if it is determined in the process of S5106 that an operation on the center button CB has been detected (S5106: Yes), the music corresponding to the current value of the menu position pointer 223ab is determined. Data indicating (currently arranged in the music selection area of the music selection menu screen) is stored in the music type storage area 223bd (S5121), and the process proceeds to S5109.

  By this operation detection processing 9 (see FIG. 128), the arrangement of items on the music selection menu screen can be changed according to the operation contents of the player's operation buttons 230, and a decision operation by the player during the music selection period. When (the operation of pressing the center button CB while the music selection menu screen is displayed) is set, the music (music) arranged in the music selection area is set to be loop-reproduced during the music reproduction period. be able to.

  Next, the details of the above-described ending effect start determination processing (S4152) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 129. The ending effect start determination process (S4152) is a process for determining whether to start an ending effect during the ending delay period, as described above.

  In the ending effect start determination process (see FIG. 129), first, it is determined whether the ending delay flag 223bc is on (S5301). If it is determined that the ending delay flag 223bc is off (S5301: No), the ending is performed. This means that it is not a delay period, and there is no possibility to set the start of the ending effect, so this processing ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5301 that the ending delay flag 223bc is on (S5301: Yes), it means that the ending delay period is in effect, and the ending effect is started after the ending delay period ends. A process is performed to determine whether or not it is not.

  Specifically, first, it is determined whether the value of the remaining reproduction time timer 223bb is 0 (S5302). In the process of S5302, if it is determined that the value of the remaining playback time timer 223bb is not 0 (that is, it is 1 or more) (S5302: No), it means that the playback of the chorus portion of the music has not been completed. Therefore, it is determined whether the value of the delay period timer 223bf is 4000 or more (S5303). That is, it is determined whether four seconds or more have elapsed since the start of the ending effect was delayed. In the process of S5303, when it is determined that the value of the delay period timer 223bf is not equal to or greater than 4000 (less than 4000) (S5303: No), the ending delay period is continued (the reproduction of the chorus portion of the music is continued). Therefore, the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5303, when it is determined that the value of the delay period timer 223bf is 4000 or more (S5303: Yes), the processes of S5304 to S5306 for setting the start of the ending effect are executed. Also, in the process of S5302, when it is determined that the value of the remaining playback time timer 223bb is 0 (that is, the playback time of the rust portion has ended) (S5302: Yes), the process proceeds to S5304, and the ending effect is produced. Set the start of

  In the processing of S5304, the effect type (one of normal ending and shortened ending 1 to 3) of the ending effect corresponding to the data stored in the ending type storage area 223be is specified (S5304), and the specified effect type is determined. A display ending command and a voice ending command for executing an ending effect are set (S5305). Then, by setting the ending delay flag 223bc to off, the end of the ending delay period is set (S5306), and this processing ends.

  By this ending effect start determination processing (see FIG. 129), while the ending delay period is set, the reproduction status of the music (whether or not the reproduction of the chorus portion has ended) and the length of the ending delay period are determined. Then, the ending production start can be set at an appropriate timing.

  Next, the details of the hit-related process 9 (S4361) will be described with reference to FIG. The hit-related process 9 (S4361) is a process executed in place of the hit-related process 8 (see FIG. 114) in the first control example, and is the same as the hit-related process 8 (see FIG. 114). This is a process for executing control corresponding to the type of the command related to the hit received from 110.

  Among the hit-related processes 9 (S4361), the processes of S4401 to S4407 and S4409 are the same as the processes of S4401 to S4407 and S4409 of the hit-related process 8 (see FIG. 114) in the first control example, respectively. The processing is executed. In the hit-related process 9 (S4361) in the second control example, when it is determined in the process of S4407 that the command received from the main control device 110 includes the round number command (S4407: Yes) ), A round number command process for performing control according to the round number indicated by the round number command is executed (S4461), and this process ends. Details of the round number command processing (S4461) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the hit-related process 9 (see FIG. 130) in the second control example, when it is determined in the process of S4407 that the command received from the main control device 110 does not include the round number command ( (S4407: No) Next, it is determined whether or not an interval command indicating the start of the interval period has been received from the main control device 110 (S4462). In the process of S4462, when it is determined that an interval command has been received (S4462: Yes), an interval command process for performing control in accordance with the type of interval (what round interval is) is executed ( (S4463), this process ends. Details of this interval command processing (S4463) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S4462, if it is determined that the interval command is not included in the command received from main controller 110 (S4462: No), the process proceeds to S4409.

  In the hit-related process 9 (see FIG. 130) in the second control example, when it is determined in the process of S4409 that the ending command is included in the command received from the main control device 110 (S4409: Yes), an ending command process for determining whether or not to delay the start of the ending effect according to the reproduction state of the music is executed (S4464), and this process ends. The details of the ending command process (S4464) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4409, when it is determined that the ending command is not included in the command received from the main control device 110 (S4409: No), then, the music command output from the voice control device 226 is received. It is determined whether the music command is received (S4465). If it is determined that the music command is received (S4465: Yes), the reproduction data type storage area 223ba and the reproduction time are set according to the type of the music data indicated by the music command. Music command processing for updating the timer 223bb is executed (S4466), and this processing ends. Details of the music command processing (S4466) will be described later with reference to FIG. 135. If it is determined in the processing of S4465 that the music command has not been received (S4465: No), the present processing is terminated.

  Next, the details of the round number command processing (S4461) will be described with reference to FIG. In the round number command processing (S4461), first, a display round number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the round number indicated by the round number command is set (S5401), and then the round indicated by the round number command is set. It is determined whether the number is the round number corresponding to the last round in the current jackpot (S5402).

  In the process of S5402, when it is determined that the round to be started this time is the last round (S5402: Yes), it is determined that the reordering determination timing 2 (the timing for determining whether or not the reordering of the music pieces is to be reordered) has come. This means that the respective processes of S5403 to S5405 for determining whether to change the reproduction order are executed. Specifically, the contents of the rearrangement determination table 222bb are compared with the data stored in the reproduction data type storage area 223ba (S5403), and the type of the music data currently being reproduced (the part being reproduced) is determined. Then, it is determined whether or not the playback order is of a type to be rearranged (S5404).

  In the process of S5404, when it is determined that the type of the music data being reproduced is the type in which the reproduction order should be rearranged (S5404: Yes), the result of the rearrangement of the reproduction order (for the currently reproduced music An audio rearrangement command for notifying of the type of music data to be set for reproduction next to the data is set (S5405), and the process ends. The voice rearrangement command set here is output to the voice output device 226 in the command output process of the main process 9 (see S4102 in FIG. 127). When the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 receives the audio rearrangement command, the MPU 301 stores data indicating the rearrangement result (the type of audio data to be reproduced next) notified by the command in the rearrangement type storage area 303f. Then, when the reproduction period of the currently reproduced music data has elapsed, reproduction of the rearranged music data is started. This makes it possible to more reliably reproduce the climax portion of the song that is the most exciting before the final round ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5404 that the data reproduction order is not the type to be rearranged (S5404: No), the rust portion is reproduced before the end of the final round, even if the reproduction order is not rearranged. Since there is a high possibility, the process of S5405 is skipped, and the process ends.

  In the process of S5402, if it is determined that the number of rounds notified by the round number command is not the last round (S5402: No), then it is determined whether the notified number of rounds is the first round. It is determined (S5406). In the process of S5406, when it is determined that the notified number of rounds is the first round (S5406: Yes), a music selection period setting process for setting the start of the music selection period is executed (S5407), and this process is performed. To end. Details of the music selection period setting processing (S5407) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S5406, when it is determined that the notification is not of the first round (S5406: No), the process of S5407 is skipped, and the process ends.

  Next, details of the above-described music selection period setting processing (S5407) will be described with reference to FIG. This music selection period setting processing is for determining an initial arrangement of a music selection menu screen in order to set a music selection period in which a player can select a music (a music selection menu screen can be displayed). This is the process. That is, the processing corresponds to the state command processing (see FIG. 113) in the first control example. Since the music selection period setting process (S5407) and the status command process (see FIG. 113) in the first control example have many common points in the processing content, the process is different from the status command process (see FIG. 113) in the first control example. The description will focus on the differences.

  In the respective processes of S5203 to S5206 and S5208 to S5213 in the music selection period setting process (see FIG. 132), the respective processes of S5203 to S5206 and S5208 to S5213 of the status command process (see FIG. 113) in the first control example are respectively performed. Is executed.

  In the song selection period setting process (see FIG. 132) in the second control example, when the process of S5208 ends, the data corresponding to the item (song) determined by the random lottery in the process of S5205 is then assigned to the song type. The data is stored in the storage area 223bd (S5221), and the process shifts to S5209. As described above, in the second control example, at the start of the music selection period (that is, the first round of the jackpot), the music determined by the random lottery is not played, but the music dedicated to the music selection period is played. Since the configuration is adopted, the process of immediately reproducing the music determined by the lottery (the process of S5207) as in the status command process in the first control example is not performed.

  In the music selection period setting process (see FIG. 132) in the second control example, in the process of S5210, the music is already stored in the storage area corresponding to the value “00H” of the menu position pointer 223ab in the item arrangement storage area 223aa. Is determined again (S5210: Yes), an audio command for instructing (notifying) the audio output device 226 to reproduce the music for the music selection period is set (S5222). The processing shifts to S5213.

  Next, the details of the above-described interval command processing (S4463) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing this interval command processing (S4463). In the interval command processing (S4463), first, a display interval command for setting an interval effect in a mode according to the finished round is set (S5501). It is determined whether or not the command indicates the interval immediately before the round (S5502).

  In the processing of S5502, when it is determined that the command is the command indicating the interval immediately before the last round (S5502: Yes), the reordering determination timing 1 (the timing for determining whether or not to reorder the reproduction order of the music) has come. Therefore, each processing of S5503 to S5505 for determining whether or not the reproduction order of the music data is rearranged is executed. More specifically, the contents of the rearrangement determination table 222bb are compared with the data stored in the reproduction data type storage area 223ba (S5503), and the type of the music data currently being reproduced (the part being reproduced) is determined. Then, it is determined whether or not the playback order is of a type to be rearranged (S5504).

  In the process of S5504, if it is determined that the type of the music data being reproduced is the type in which the reproduction order should be re-arranged (S5504: Yes), the result of the rearrangement of the reproduction order (for the currently reproduced music An audio rearrangement command for notifying the type of music data to be set to be reproduced next to the data is set (S5505), and the process ends. The voice rearrangement command set here is output to the voice output device 226 in the command output process of the main process 9 (see S4102 in FIG. 127). When the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 receives the audio rearrangement command, the MPU 301 stores data indicating the rearrangement result (the type of audio data to be reproduced next) notified by the command in the rearrangement type storage area 303f. Then, when the reproduction period of the currently reproduced music data has elapsed, reproduction of the rearranged music data is started. This makes it possible to more reliably reproduce the climax portion of the song that is the most exciting before the final round ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5504 that the data reproduction order is not the type to be rearranged (S5504: No), the rust portion is reproduced by the time the final round ends without rearranging the reproduction order. Since the possibility is high, the process of S5505 is skipped, and the present process is terminated as it is.

  If it is determined in the processing of S5502 that the current interval command is not the command indicating the interval immediately before the last round (S5502: No), then the command indicating the interval set after the end of one round is used. It is determined whether there is (S5506). In the process of S5506, when it is determined that the command indicates the interval after the end of one round (S5506: Yes), the instruction to reproduce the music corresponding to the data stored in the music type storage area 223bd (notification). A music selection command for audio to be performed is set (S5507), and 1 is added to the data corresponding to the music selection frequency of the music set to be reproduced this time among the data in the music selection frequency storage area 223ac (S5508). Then, non-display of the music selection menu screen is set, and both the menu display flag 223ae and the music selection permission flag 223ad are set to off (S5509), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5506, if it is determined that the current interval command is not a command indicating the interval after the end of the first round (S5506: No), the processes of S5507 to S5509 are skipped, and This processing ends as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 134, the details of the above-mentioned ending command processing (S4464) will be described. The ending command process (S4264) is a process for determining whether or not to delay the start of the ending effect according to the music reproduction status, as described above.

  In the ending command process (see FIG. 134), first, data stored in the reproduction data type storage area 223ba (that is, data corresponding to the type of music data currently being reproduced) is read (S5601) and read. It is determined whether the data is data corresponding to the rust part (that is, whether the rust part is being reproduced) (S5602). In the process of S5602, when it is determined that the data corresponding to the rust portion has been read (S5602: Yes), the respective processes of S5603 to S5605 for delaying the start of the ending effect and making the reproduction time of the rust portion longer. Execute Specifically, from the ending effect selection table 222bc (see FIG. 124), the effect type of the ending effect corresponding to the range to which the value of the remaining playback time timer 223bb belongs is selected (S5603).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 124, when the value of the remaining playback time timer 223bb is within the range of 1000 or less (that is, the remaining playback time of the rust portion at the end of the last round is 1 second or less) As the type of the ending production, the normal ending with the production time of 4 seconds is selected, and the value of the remaining reproduction time timer 223bb is larger than 1000 and equal to or smaller than 2000 (that is, the remaining reproduction of the rust portion at the end of the final round). If the time is longer than 1 second and is within 2 seconds), a shortened ending 1 in which the rendering time is 3 seconds is selected as the ending rendering type, and the value of the remaining playback time timer 223bb is greater than 2000. And 3000 or less (that is, the remaining playback time of the rust portion at the end of the final round is longer than 2 seconds and 3 seconds If it is in the range of (lower), as the type of the ending effect, the shortened ending 2 in which the effect time is 2 seconds is selected, and the value of the remaining reproduction time timer 223bb is larger than 3000 (that is, the rust portion at the end of the last round). If the remaining reproduction time is longer than 3 seconds), a shortened ending 3 in which the production time is 1 second is selected as the ending production type (see FIG. 124).

  When the processing of S5603 is completed, data corresponding to the ending effect selected in the processing of S5603 is stored in the ending type storage area 223be (S5604), and the ending delay flag 223bc is set to ON (S5605). The process ends.

  By executing each of the processes of S5603 to S5605, the start timing of the ending effect can be delayed, and the type of the ending effect to be executed after the ending delay period is set in advance in the ending type storage area 223be. Can be. Accordingly, an ending effect of an appropriate effect time (effect mode) is set according to the length of the period from the start of the ending period to the end of the reproduction of the rust portion (or the termination of the reproduction). be able to. In addition, the climax part, which is the most exciting part in the music, can be heard by the player for a longer time.

  In the processing of S5602, if it is determined that the data read from the reproduction data type storage area 223ba is data corresponding to a part other than the rust part (S5602: No), there is no need to delay the start timing of the ending effect. Then, a display ending command corresponding to the normal ending effect is set (S5606), and an audio ending command indicating a music corresponding to the normal ending effect is set (S5607), and the process ends. Thus, when a part other than the chorus portion is being reproduced at the start of the ending period (at the end of the last round), a normal ending effect can be performed simultaneously with the start of the ending period.

  Next, the music command processing (S4466) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 135. In the music command processing (S4466), first, data indicating the type of music data (music data set to be reproduced in the audio output device 226) indicated by the music command output from the audio output device 226 is set to the reproduction data type. It is stored in the storage area 223ba (S5701). Then, the timer value corresponding to the notified music data type is set in the remaining playback time timer 223bb (S5702), and the process ends.

  By executing the music command processing (S4466), the type of the music data (the part being reproduced) and the reproduction time being reproduced by the audio output device 226 can be easily grasped on the audio lamp control device 113 side. be able to.

<Control processing of audio output device in second control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 139. First, with reference to FIG. 136, a description will be given of a main process 9 executed in the second control example in place of the main process (see FIG. 115A) in the first control example. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the main processing 9.

  Of the main processing 9 (see FIG. 136) in the second control example, the processing of 9003 to S9007 is the same as the processing of S9003 to S9007 of the main processing (see FIG. 115A) in the first control example. The processing is executed. In the main process 9 (see FIG. 136) in the second control example, when the process is started, first, various commands to the sound lamp control device 113 set by the processes of S9012 and S9013 are sent to the sound controller. A command output process for transmitting to the lamp control device 113 is executed (S9011).

  Next, a command determination process 9 is executed instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 116) in the first control example (S9012). This command determination process 9 (S9012) is a process for executing control according to the type of various commands received from the sound lamp control device 113, similarly to the command determination process (see FIG. 116) in the first control example. is there. Details of the command determination process 9 (S9012) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S9012 ends, the voice setting process 9 is executed instead of the voice setting process (see FIG. 117) in the first control example (S9013), and the process proceeds to S9003. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 139, this audio setting processing 9 (S9013) is similar to the audio setting processing (see FIG. 117) in the first control example, in which reproduction of audio data such as music data is performed. And a process for setting switching of music data.

  Next, the details of the above-described command determination processing 9 (S9012) will be described with reference to FIG. This command determination process 9 (S9012) is a process executed in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 116) in the first control example, as described above.

  In the command determination processing 9 (see FIG. 137) in the second control example, the processing in S9201 to SS9214 is the same as the processing in S9201 to SS9214 in the command determination processing (see FIG. 116) in the first control example. The processing is executed. In the command determination process 9 (see FIG. 137) in the second control example, in the process of S9209, it is determined that the command received from the sound ramp control device 113 does not include the lottery music command for sound. In this case (S9209: No), it is then determined whether or not the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 includes a command related to the song that is hitting the jackpot (S9221).

  If it is determined in the process of S9221 that a command related to the song being hit is included (S9221: Yes), a jackpot song-related process for executing control according to the command type is executed ( (S9222), this process ends. Details of the jackpot song-related processing (S9222) will be described later with reference to FIG. Also, in the process of S9221, if it is determined that the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 does not include a command related to the song being hit (S9221: No), the process proceeds to S9214. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 138, details of the above-described jackpot song-related processing (S9222) will be described. In the jackpot song-related processing (S9222), first, it is determined whether or not a command received from the sound ramp control device 113 includes a sound changing command (S9401), and the sound changing command is included. If it is determined (S9401: Yes), the data of the rearrangement type storage area 303f is updated in accordance with the rearrangement content notified by the command (the type of music data to be set to be reproduced next) (S9402). Next, by setting the rearrangement waiting flag 303e to ON, it is shown that the music data to be reproduced next to the music data currently being reproduced is rearranged (variable from the reproduction order of the value order of the music pointer 303b). (S9403), this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S9401, if it is determined that the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 does not include the sound rearrangement command (S9401: No), then the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. It is determined whether the command includes an audio ending command (S9404).

  In the process of S9404, if it is determined that the audio ending command is included (S9404: Yes), the reproduction of the music currently being reproduced is terminated (S9405), and the ending of the type notified by the audio ending command is performed. The reproduction of the music for use is set (S9406), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S9404, when it is determined that the command received from the audio ramp control device 113 does not include the ending command for audio (S9404: No), the process ends as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 139, details of the above-described audio setting process 9 (S9013) will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the audio setting process 9 (S9013). As described above, the voice setting process 9 (S9013) is a process executed in place of the voice setting process (see FIG. 117) in the first control example.

  Of the sound setting processing 9 (see FIG. 139) in the second control example, the processing in S9302 to S9308 is the same as the processing in S9302 to S9308 in the sound setting processing (see FIG. 117) in the first control example, respectively. The processing is executed. When the audio setting process 9 (see FIG. 139) in the second control example is started, first, it is determined whether or not a song (any one of the songs A to Z) that is being hit is being played. (S9311), if the hit song is being reproduced (S9311: Yes), the process proceeds to S9302. On the other hand, in the process of S9311, when it is determined that the song with the big hit is not being reproduced (S9311: No), the process ends as it is.

  In the audio setting process 9 (see FIG. 139) in the second control example, when it is determined in the process of S9302 that it is the end timing of the reproduction of the music data being reproduced (S9302: Yes), then the rearrangement is performed. It is determined whether the standby flag 303e is on (S9312). In the process of S9312, when it is determined that the rearrangement waiting flag 303e is ON (S9312: Yes), the reproduction order different from the reproduction order predetermined for each music (the order specified by the audio lamp control device 113). ), It is necessary to set the reproduction of the music data, so that the value corresponding to the data stored in the rearrangement type storage area 303f is updated by overwriting the value of the music pointer 303b (S9313), and the processing is performed. To S9307. Thereby, reproduction of the music data after the rearrangement can be set.

  On the other hand, in the process of S9312, when it is determined that the rearrangement waiting flag 303e is off (S9312: No), the process proceeds to S9303, and the reproduction in the order of the value of the music pointer 303b is set.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example is configured so that the player can select a song that is in a big hit. Then, until the final round is completed, the reproduction order of the music data is dynamically rearranged in accordance with the progress of the jackpot so that the rust portion is reproduced as much as possible. That is, at a predetermined timing during the execution of the jackpot (for example, at the start of the interval period immediately before the last round or at the start of the last round), the type (A melody 1, B melody 1, rust 1 and the like are discriminated, and when a part far from the rust portion is reproduced, the reproduction order of each music data constituting the music data group is rearranged, and the next reproduction is performed. The part is changed so that it is a part close to the rust part. This allows the player to more reliably hear the rust portion, which is the most exciting portion of the music, by the end of the jackpot.

  Here, as a method for reproducing the chorus portion in the final round of the jackpot, a method of setting reproduction of the music data corresponding to the chorus portion at the start of the final round regardless of the progress of the music may be considered. . However, according to this method, there is a possibility that the connection of the music may become unnatural before and after the start of the final round (that is, before and after switching to the reproduction of the rust portion). That is, there is a high possibility that the reproduction of the rust portion is suddenly started in the middle of another part. Therefore, according to this method, the player may have a sense of incongruity with the music being played, and may suspect that the pachinko machine 10 is out of order. That is, it is doubtful whether the pachinko machine 10 is operating normally, and there is a possibility that the player may have anxiety about the game. On the other hand, in the second control example, the playback order of the music data is rearranged (variable) in units of parts (units of melody (tune)). The music can be reproduced with a small voice mode. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game during the jackpot with ease.

  Further, in the second control example, at the end of the final round of the jackpot, if the climax part (the climax 1, the climax 2, etc.) is being reproduced, the start timing of the ending effect is delayed so that the climax part is extended. Is configured to be continued. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the climax part of the music that is most prominent from being forcibly terminated by the end of the jackpot as much as possible. As a result, the rust portion can be more enjoyed for the player, so that the player's interest in the game during the jackpot can be improved.

  Note that, in the second control example, when the chorus portion ends in the middle of the final round of the jackpot, the music is reproduced in the order of the music data without changing the reproduction order. It is not something that can be done. For example, when the reproduction of the chorus portion is completed in the last round, the reproduction order of the music data may be changed again so that the chorus portion is repeatedly reproduced. In this case, the configuration may be such that the music data whose reproduction has been completed is reproduced again, or a climax part different from the climax part whose reproduction has been completed is reproduced (for example, when the reproduction of the climax part 1 is completed, Subsequently, the reproduction of the rust 2 part is set, and when the reproduction of the rust 2 part is completed, the reproduction of the rust 1 part is set). With this configuration, the climax part of the music that is longer and most prominent in the final round can be reproduced for a longer time, so that the player's interest in the final round can be further improved. In addition, instead of simply playing back the rust portion, the end timing of the rust portion in the case where the playback of the rust portion is repeated is predicted in advance from the progress status of the last round, etc., and falls within the round period of the last round. The configuration may be such that the rust portion is repeated only when the prediction result that the possibility is high is obtained. With such a configuration, the ending period is started immediately after the repetition of the climax portion is set, and it is possible to prevent the reproduction of the climax portion from being discontinued due to insufficient listening of the climax portion.

  In the second control example, at the start of the interval period immediately before the last round in the jackpot and at the start of the last round, it is configured to determine whether or not the reproduction order of the music data is to be rearranged. It is not limited. The number of times and timing for determining whether to rearrange the reproduction order can be arbitrarily determined.

  In the second control example, the reproduction order of the music data is rearranged so that the chorus portion is reproduced longer during the final round. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It can be set arbitrarily.

  In the second control example, the reordering of the reproduction order of the music data is performed on a part-by-part basis. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The reordering may be performed on an arbitrary unit. By performing the rearrangement in units smaller than the part units, the rearrangement can be set more finely. Further, the configuration of the music data group can be simplified by adopting a configuration that is rearranged in a unit coarser than a part.

  In the second control example, when the rearrangement of the music data is determined, the parts in the order different from the original reproduction order are reproduced after the reproduction time of the part being reproduced (the music data) elapses. But it is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that, when the rearrangement is determined, the music data after the rearrangement is immediately reproduced. With this configuration, it is necessary to provide the audio output device 226 with a configuration for retaining the type of the music data after rearrangement (ie, the rearrangement type storage area 303f) until the rearrangement timing. Since the storage capacity is lost, the storage capacity can be reduced. Further, more simply, at the start of the final round of the jackpot, the reproduction of the chorus portion may be started regardless of the reproduction position of the music. With this configuration, the processing can be further simplified, so that the processing load on the audio ramp control device 113 and the audio output device 226 can be reduced.

  In the second control example, the configuration in which the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 determines whether or not the music data can be rearranged is not limited to this. The MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 may perform the configuration. In this case, the audio lamp control device 113 may be configured to notify the audio output device 226 only of the timing of determining the re-arrangement. Then, the rearrangement determination table 222bb provided in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 is transferred to the audio output device 226, and the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the audio output device 226 that the timing of the rearrangement determination has come. Based on this, the configuration may be such that the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 determines whether or not the reproduction order of the music data is rearranged.

  In the second control example, the playback order of the music data can be changed according to the progress of the jackpot game and the playback position of the music. The method for increasing the possibility of being performed is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that the playback speed of the music is varied according to the progress of the game and the playback position of the music. That is, for example, if the current playback position and the climax part are far (at least two parts apart) at the rearrangement determination timing 1, the music is played at a higher speed than normal until the climax part is reproduced (for example, (1.5 times speed), and in the case of closeness (less than one part), the music may be played back at a lower speed than normal (for example, 0.5 times speed) until the rust portion is played. Good.

  In the second control example, both the progress status of the jackpot and the progress status of the music are determined to determine whether the reproduction order of the music data is changed (rearranged) or not. It is also possible to determine only whether or not to start the reproduction of the music data corresponding to the specific part (the chorus portion) by determining only the progress status of the music piece (whether or not the start timing of the last round has come). This control is not limited to the last round. For example, in the pachinko machine 10 configured to play one music in a loop during a big hit and play the outro portion of the music as an ending effect sound during the ending period, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the first round of the big hit. However, at the start timing of the first round, the data corresponding to the intro portion may be reproduced (reproduced from the beginning of the music) regardless of the state of the music. It is also possible to determine whether or not it is the start timing of the ending period, and if it is the start timing of the ending period, the data to be reproduced may be changed to the data for the music corresponding to the outro portion regardless of the state of the music. By configuring in this way, the ending production music can be set as the music of the outro part corresponding to the music that was playing during the big hit, so the music played during the big hit and during the ending production is unified A feeling can be given. This control can also be applied to a case where a song dedicated to ending is provided. That is, in the jackpot, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the ending period, and if it is the start timing of the ending period, the reproduction of the music data corresponding to the music for the ending effect is performed regardless of the music situation. It may be configured to start.

  In the second control example, at the start timing of the ending period, the progress status (reproduction position) of the music is determined, and when the specific reproduction range (the chorus portion) is being reproduced, the start of the ending effect is delayed. Thus, the specific playback range is configured to be able to be played back for a longer time. However, the control can be applied not only at the start of the ending period. If a condition for playing another song is satisfied while the song is being played, this can be applied.For example, a configuration is adopted in which the song is loop-played during the above-described probable change state, and the end timing of the probable change state In such a case, if the rust portion is being played back, the start of the effect indicating that the probable change state has ended may be delayed so that the rust portion is played back longer. In addition, a known timing device such as an RTC (Real Time Clock) is included in the configuration, and when the time measured by the timing device reaches a predetermined time, a specific effect different from normal (so-called island-linked effect) can be executed. In a gaming machine with various specifications, the control in the second control example may be applied at the start of the island-linked effect. Specifically, when the climax part (specific reproduction range) of the music is being reproduced at the start timing of the specific production, the climax part (specific reproduction range) is delayed by delaying the start timing of the specific production. A longer playback configuration may be used. The target to which this control can be applied is not limited to an effect accompanied by a sound (an effect of reproducing music). The present invention can also be applied to a display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, for example, when the time counted by the timepiece reaches a predetermined time during the execution of the fluctuation display, the start of the island-linked production is performed in accordance with the progress status of the fluctuation production being performed (producing mode). May be determined to determine whether or not to delay. Specifically, for example, during the execution of the super-reach effect with a relatively high jackpot expectation degree, the island-linked effect is suppressed (delayed) until the super-reach effect ends. Good. With this configuration, the result of the variable display effect can be appropriately notified to the player. In addition, for example, as a variable display effect or an effect during a jackpot, an effect that prompts the user to operate a predetermined operation button is executed, and an operation is detected or a press that switches to a different effect mode when the operation validity period elapses. You may apply to the game machine which can perform an effect. That is, during the operation valid period, even if an operation on the operation button is detected, the switching of the effect mode is delayed until the effect during the operation valid period ends (the effect mode is switched until the operation valid period ends). May be varied).

  In the second control example, if the climax portion is being reproduced at the start of the ending period, the ending effect start timing is delayed to reproduce the climax portion longer, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the climax part is being reproduced at the start timing of the ending period, the climax part may be reproduced while the display mode for the ending effect is started as the display mode. With this configuration, it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of display modes according to the remaining ending period as the ending effect, so that the number of display data tables for executing the ending effect can be reduced. Can be. Therefore, the storage capacity of the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  In the second control example, when the chorus portion is being reproduced at the start of the ending period, the start of the ending effect is delayed for a maximum of 4 seconds, and after the delay period has elapsed, the ending effect ends within the remaining ending period. Although the ending effect having a length of the ending effect is performed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the ending effect started after the delay period has elapsed may have the same content (normal ending effect) as the ending effect started without delay. That is, the length until the ending period ends may be extended according to the delay period. With this configuration, it is not necessary to provide a plurality of types having different effect periods as the effect mode of the ending effect, so that the number of display data tables for executing the ending effect can be reduced. Therefore, the storage capacity of the display control device 114 can be reduced. Further, instead of extending the ending period, only the ending effect may be continued even after the ending period ends. In this case, a configuration in which the variable display based on the retained balls retained at the end of the big hit is executed in a mode that is less noticeable than the ending effect (for example, reduced to the lower right of the third symbol display device 81). It may be. Also in the case of such a configuration, the number of display data tables for executing the ending effect can be reduced, so that the storage capacity of the display control device 114 can be reduced.

<Third control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachinko machine 10 in the above-described second control example is configured so that the player can select an arbitrary music (speech mode) as the music (sound effect type) to be reproduced (executed) during the big hit. Then, at a predetermined timing in the jackpot, it is determined whether or not to switch the playback position of the music (reorder the playback order of the music data) so as to increase the possibility of the rust portion being played in the final round of the jackpot. Was executed.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third control example, a menu item “random song selection” in which a song (sound production mode) is randomly selected on the song selection menu screen is added, and “random song selection” is performed by the player. In this case, the music to be reproduced after the first round (music selection period) is determined by a predetermined lottery. In the “random song selection”, a song (voice effect) that is not displayed as an item on the song selection menu screen can be determined. More specifically, when “random song selection” is determined in the probability change jackpot, “song a” is added to “song A” to “song Z” displayed on the song selection menu screen by lottery. The music to be played during the jackpot is determined. As a result, it is possible to select “random music selection” in expectation of determining “music a” that cannot be normally heard.

  In the third control example, as one type of effect performed during the jackpot, the number of rounds of the jackpot for a predetermined period (for example, until the fifth round or the tenth round is completed) from the start of the jackpot. Is reported less than the original number of rounds, and after a predetermined period has elapsed, an effect of notifying the original number of rounds can be selected. By configuring such an effect that the number of rounds is pseudo-reported less than the original number of rounds (pseudo-small round production), a relatively small number of rounds is reported at the start of the jackpot (ie, In the case where five rounds are announced in one special symbol jackpot or ten rounds are announced in the second special symbol jackpot, see FIG. 10 (a)). Expecting that a number (8 rounds or 16 rounds) will be announced, a game can be played until a predetermined period elapses. Accordingly, in the third control example, even in the pseudo final round during the execution of the pseudo small round effect, the rust portion is reproduced by rearranging the music reproduction order in the same manner as the original final round. It is configured so that: As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to discriminate a pseudo final round or an original final round from a part of the music reproduced during the pseudo final round. Thus, until the pseudo small round effect ends (until the predetermined period elapses), it is possible to keep the expectation that a larger number of rounds will be notified.

  The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example is different from the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example in that the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed. Also, the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, an audio output device 226 Are executed in the same manner as in the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the second control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the configuration of a music selection menu screen in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 140 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the music area MR when the music selection menu screen is displayed first after the jackpot music selection period starts. As shown in FIG. 140 (a), a plurality of display areas (items RA1 to RA3, PA1 and PA2) in which a music name that can be selected by the player are displayed are arranged on the music selection menu screen in the third control example. In addition to the display area, a display area in which an item OA of “random music selection” is displayed is displayed on the right side in front view of the plurality of images displaying the music titles. The item “OA” of “random song selection” is an item in which one song is randomly selected by lottery from the songs (songs A to Z and song a) set in the pachinko machine 10.

  The item OA of “random song selection” is set to a turned-off appearance (similar to the items arranged in the display area other than the song selection area) when the song selection menu screen is first displayed. Further, a right image RG having a substantially triangular shape facing right is displayed between the plurality of images displaying the song titles and the item OA. Based on these display contents, the player can easily understand that "random music selection" can be selected by pressing (operating) the right button RB of the operation buttons 230.

  FIG. 140 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode of the music area MR when the player operates (presses) the right button RB while the music selection menu screen is displayed. As shown in FIG. 140 (b), when the player presses the right button RB (detects that the output of the signal corresponding to the right button RB has become H), the item RA1 ( The image in which the character “Music A” is displayed) is switched to the turned-off appearance mode, and the item OA is turned to the turned-on appearance mode. That is, the appearance of the item PA1 and the appearance of the item OA arranged in the music selection area are switched. In addition, the right image RG has a light-emitting appearance. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that "random music selection" has been determined when the center button CB is pressed.

  When “random music selection” is determined, the most significant bit of the menu position pointer 223ab composed of 1 byte (8 bits) is set to ON (1). As described above, in the first control example and the second control example, when determining the initial layout of the menu, the menu position pointer 223ab is set to the value range “00H” (00000000B) to “19H” (00011001B). "Song A" to "Song Z" are associated one by one, and the correspondence is stored in the item arrangement storage area 223aa. In other words, the lower 5 bits of the menu position pointer 223ab can specify an item arranged in the music selection area, and the upper 3 bits are empty bits. In the third control example, one of the empty bits (for example, the most significant bit) is defined as a bit corresponding to “random music selection”. With this configuration, even if “random song selection” is selected, the item (song) arranged in the song selection area immediately before “random song selection” is selected is replaced by the menu position pointer 223ab. Can be easily determined from the lower 5 bits of That is, even if the player presses the right button RB to select “random music selection” and then presses the left button LB again, the state immediately before selecting “random music selection” (display mode of the music selection menu screen) ). Further, when the center button CB is pressed by the player while the music selection menu screen is displayed (the menu display flag 223ae is on), “random” can be easily performed simply by checking the state of the most significant bit. It is possible to identify whether or not “music selection” has been determined.

  Although details will be described later, in the third control example, the player selects “random music selection” (an operation on the center button CB is detected in a state where the item OA is in the appearance of being lit). In this case, if a specific condition is satisfied (for example, if the jackpot being executed is a probable jackpot), a special song that is not displayed as an item in the song selection menu screen (cannot be selected by the player) In other words, one song is determined by lottery from a plurality of songs (song A to song Z and song a) including (song a). This allows a player who wants to listen to a special music to positively select “random music selection”.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 141 (a) and (b), a jackpot in which the above-described pseudo small round effect (an effect that makes it appear as if the round number is smaller than the actual round number corresponding to the jackpot type) is set. An example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 will be described. In FIGS. 141 (a) and (b), when the number of rounds is won as the jackpot A of eight rounds, and the number of rounds smaller than the actual number (five rounds) is notified due to the setting of the pseudo small round effect. Will be described as an example.

  FIG. 141 (a) is a diagram showing a display mode of a pseudo final round display mode (fifth round) during execution of the pseudo small round effect. As shown in FIG. 141 (a), in the third control example, during the big hit, the progress status of the big hit (the current round number, the maximum round number, and the small round area Ds1 in the third symbol display device 81) is displayed. Is displayed (a character “5/5 round”). In addition, below the character indicating the progress status of the jackpot, a character indicating the prize ball acquisition status (a comparison between the number of prize balls paid up to now and the maximum number of prize balls paid out in the current jackpot). (That is, the characters “500/500 GET”) are displayed. FIG. 141 (a) shows a point in time when it is detected that a specified number (10) of game balls have entered the left specific winning opening 650 in the pseudo final round (5th round). (When the number of paid out prize balls reaches 500), the display of the number of prize balls in the small area Ds1 is updated from “490/500 GET” to “500/500 GET”. The moment it was done.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 141A, an image imitating a treasure chest is displayed in the main display area Dm. This suggests that the player is in a state where he can obtain a large amount of prize balls (profits). Further, in the music area MR, an image is displayed which shows the music name of the music currently selected and played by the player during the music selection period. FIG. 141 (a) illustrates a case where the player selects “Song Z” during the song selection period, and an item (image) with the character “Song Z” is added to the song area MR. Is displayed.

  FIG. 141 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode immediately after the pseudo final round is completed (that is, immediately after the display mode of FIG. 141 (a)) in the jackpot in which the pseudo small round effect is set. It is. When the pseudo final round in the pseudo small round production ends, a production to notify the original number of rounds is executed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 141 (b), the character displayed in the small area Ds1 is updated to a character indicating the original maximum round number and the original maximum prize ball number. That is, the character “5/5 round” displayed on the upper side of the small area Ds1 is updated to the character “5/8 round”, and the character “500 / round” displayed on the lower side of the small area Ds1 is displayed. The character “500 GET” is updated to the character “500/800 GET”. In addition, an effect is performed in which the boy character 710 displayed in the small area Ds2 emits the words “Yamada!”. According to these effect modes, the player can easily recognize that the jackpot does not end in 5 rounds but continues up to 8 rounds (the pseudo small round effect was executed). Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that more prize balls can be obtained, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player. Hereinafter, for simplicity of description, an effect that is performed based on the end of the pseudo final round in the pseudo small round and that informs that the big hit will continue without being ended (see FIG. 141 (b)) This is referred to as “continuous production”.

  Although the details will be described later, in the third control example, as in the second control example, the predetermined round during the jackpot is increased so that the possibility that the rust portion of the music is reproduced in the final round of the jackpot is increased. At the timing (at the start of the interval immediately before the last round and at the start of the last round), it is configured to determine whether or not the reproduction order of the music data is to be changed. In addition, in the third control example, even in the pseudo final round during the execution of the pseudo small round effect, there is a possibility that the chorus portion is reproduced by rearranging the music reproduction order, as in the original final round. It is configured to control to be higher. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to discriminate a pseudo final round or an original final round from a part of the music reproduced during the pseudo final round. Thus, until the pseudo small round effect ends (until the predetermined period elapses), it is possible to keep the expectation that a larger number of rounds will be notified.

<Electrical Configuration in Third Control Example>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 142A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. 142A, the ROM 222 in the third embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the second control example (see FIG. 122A) in that a random music selection table 222ca and a pseudo small round lottery table 222cb. Other configurations are the same as those of the above-described second control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The random music selection table 222ca is a data table that is referred to in order to determine one music when the player selects “random music selection”. Details of the random music selection table 222ca will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 143 is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the random music selection table 222ca. As shown in FIG. 143, in the random music selection table 222ca, the correspondence between the music type and the value of the music lottery counter 223ca indicates the situation (the type of the winning jackpot and the jackpot) at the time of executing the lottery. (Symbol type). Here, the music lottery counter 223ca is provided to select one music from the random music selection table 222ca, and is a random number counter whose value is updated in a range of “0 to 259”.

  As shown in FIG. 143, in the variation pattern effect, the third symbol with an odd number is notified in an effect mode (that is, an effect mode selected at a rate of 40% only in the case of a probable big hit). In the case of a probability change jackpot (odd symbol notification probability change jackpot), the value of the song lottery counter 223ca is in the range of “0 to 8” (the range of nine pieces of the music lottery counter 223ca) and “Song A”. Are defined in association with each other (see 222ca1 in FIG. 143). In addition, “Song B” is defined in association with the range of the song lottery counter 223ca of “9 to 17” (see 222ca2 in FIG. 143), and the value of the song lottery counter 223ca is “18 to 26”. “Music C” is defined in association with the range (see 222ca3 in FIG. 143). Although illustration is omitted, each of the song types “Song D” to “Song Z” is defined in association with the range of nine values of the song lottery counter 223ca. Of the 260 values that can be taken by the song lottery counter 223ca, nine song lottery counters 223ca are defined in association with each of the song types “Song A” to “Song Z”. In the case where the odd symbol notification is a probability change jackpot and “random song selection” is selected during the song selection period, the ratio of “song A” to “song Z” to be determined is about 3.5% (9/260), respectively. ).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 143, in a situation where the probability of change of the probability of change symbol notification is a jackpot, a special song not displayed on the song selection menu screen is displayed for the value of the song lottery counter 223ca in the range of “234 to 259”. "Song a" is defined in association with each other. Of the 260 values that can be taken by the song lottery counter 223ca, the value associated with “song a” is 26 of “234 to 259”. When “random music selection” is selected by the user, the ratio (probability) at which “music a” is determined is 10% (26/260) (see 222ca27 in FIG. 143).

  On the other hand, in the variation pattern effect, the effect mode in which the third symbols to which even numbers are attached is selected (that is, it is selected at a rate of 60% in the case of the probability change jackpot, while it is 100% in the case of the normal jackpot) 143, the value of the music lottery counter 223ca is in the range of “0 to 6” (music lottery), as shown in FIG. 143. “Song A” is defined in association with the range of seven counters 223ca (see 222ca1 in FIG. 143). Also, “Song B” is defined in association with the range of the song lottery counter 223ca of “7 to 13” (see 222ca2 in FIG. 143), and the value of the song lottery counter 223ca is “14 to 20”. “Music C” is defined in association with the range (see 222ca3 in FIG. 143). Although illustration is omitted, the song types “Song D” to “Song Z” are defined in association with a range of seven values of the song lottery counter 223ca. Of the 260 values that the song lottery counter 223ca can take, the values of the seven song lottery counters 223ca are defined in association with each of the song types “Song A” to “Song Z”. When the "random song selection" is selected during the song selection period, the ratio of "Song A" to "Song Z" determined is approximately 2.7% (7/260). ).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 143, in a situation in which the even number symbol notification has a probability of a large change, a special song not displayed on the song selection menu screen is displayed for the value of the song lottery counter 223ca in the range of “182 to 259”. "Song a" is defined in association with each other. Of the 260 values that can be taken by the song lottery counter 223ca, the value associated with “song a” is 78 of “182 to 259”. When "random music selection" is selected by the user, the ratio (probability) at which "song a" is determined is 30% (78/260) (see 222ca27 in FIG. 143). In other words, the probability of the "song a" being selected when "random music selection" is selected is higher in the odd-variable jackpot of the even symbol notification than in the odd-variable jackpot of the odd symbol notification. Therefore, when the player who wants to listen to (reproduce) “song a” performs the variable display in which the third symbols with even numbers are aligned and is notified of the jackpot, the player is more positive. "Random song selection" can be selected.

  As shown in FIG. 143, for the normal jackpot, “Song A” corresponds to the range of the song lottery counter 223ca of “0 to 9” (the range of 10 values of the song lottery counter 223ca). Stipulated (see 222ca1 in FIG. 143). Also, “Song B” is defined in association with the range of the song lottery counter 223ca of “10 to 19” (see 222ca2 in FIG. 143), and the value of the song lottery counter 223ca is “20 to 29”. “Song C” is defined in association with the range (see 222ca3 in FIG. 143). Although illustration is omitted, the song types “Song D” to “Song Z” are defined in association with the range of ten values of the song lottery counter 223ca. Of the 260 values that can be taken by the song lottery counter 223ca, ten song lottery counters 223ca are defined in association with each of the song types "Song A" to "Song Z". In the case where "Random Song Selection" is selected during the song selection period, the rate at which "Song A" to "Song Z" is determined is about 3.8% (10/260), respectively. On the other hand, in the case of a normal jackpot, the value of the song lottery counter 223ca is not associated with the special song “song a” (see 222ca27 in FIG. 143). That is, in the case of a normal jackpot, there is no possibility that “song a” is determined (reproduced) even if “random song selection” is selected. In other words, when “random song selection” is selected and “song a” is reproduced, the probability change jackpot is determined. Therefore, in particular, when the variable display (variable effect) in which the third symbols with the even numbers are aligned makes a jackpot (when it is unknown whether it is a probability variable jackpot or a normal jackpot), even a little A player who wants to know whether or not to shift to the probable change state early (ie, before confirming the result of the effect that informs whether or not to transit to the probable change state) is proactively given a “random music selection”. "Can be selected. Also, when “song a” is reproduced as expected by the player, the player can be pleased. Further, even when “song a” is not reproduced, it is possible to keep giving a sense of expectation to the probable change state until an effect to notify whether or not to shift to the probable change state during the jackpot is executed. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 142 (a), the description will be continued. The pseudo small round lottery table 222cb is a data table that is referred to to determine (lottery) whether or not to execute a pseudo small round effect. The lottery to determine whether to execute the pseudo small round effect using the pseudo small round lottery table 222cb is executed when the opening command corresponding to the jackpot A or the jackpot D is received (see S5833 in FIG. 147). . Although illustration is omitted, the pseudo small round lottery table 222cb is set so that the execution of the pseudo small round effect is determined at a rate of 50% when the jackpot A or the jackpot D is obtained.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 142 (b). FIG. 142B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 142 (b), the RAM 223 in the third control example is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the above-described second control example (see FIG. 122 (b)) in that the music lottery counter 223ca and the big hit status storage The difference is that an area 223cb and a pseudo final R storage area 223cc are added.

  The music lottery counter 223ca is a counter used to select (determine) one music piece from the above-mentioned random music selection table 222ca, and its value is updated in the range of “0 to 259”. When "random music selection" is determined by the player during the music selection period, the music corresponding to the value of the music lottery counter 223ca is selected from the random music selection table 222ca.

  The jackpot situation storage area 223cb is a storage area in which data corresponding to the type of the jackpot and the symbols arranged in the variable effect executed when the jackpot is won is stored. The big hit situation storage area 223cb is formed of, for example, a 1-byte storage area, and if "01H" is stored as data, it indicates that the odd symbol information is a positive change big hit. Also, if "02H" is stored, it indicates that the odd symbol information is a jackpot, and if "03H" is stored, it is that the even symbol information is a normal jackpot. On the other hand, if “00H” is stored, it indicates that the jackpot has not been won. In the jackpot situation storage area 223cb, when the execution of the variable effect for notifying the jackpot is set, the type of the jackpot that has been won and the type of the symbol that notifies the jackpot (the third symbol with an odd number) are aligned. Or the third symbol to which even numbers are attached), and the corresponding data is stored (see S4522 in FIG. 150). When the player selects (determines) “random music selection” during the music selection period, the contents of the random music selection table 222ca corresponding to the data stored in the jackpot situation storage area 223cb and the music lottery counter 223ca Are compared with each other to determine one piece of music to be played during the jackpot.

  The pseudo final R storage area 223 cc is a storage area for storing data indicating a pseudo final round when a pseudo small round effect is determined. In the pseudo final R storage area 223 cc, when the round is a large jackpot (jackpot A) and a pseudo small round effect is determined, five rounds (that is, a relatively large number of rounds among the jackpots of the first special symbol) are provided. While the data corresponding to the small jackpots B and C rounds is set (see S5836 in FIG. 147), if the pseudo-small round effect is determined as 16 rounds jackpot (jackpot D), 10 rounds are set. Data (that is, the number of rounds of the jackpots E and F having a relatively small number of rounds among the jackpots of the second special symbol) is set (see S5837 in FIG. 147). In a jackpot, at the start of a new interval period or the start of a new round, it is the start timing of the interval period immediately before the pseudo final round according to the data stored in the pseudo final R storage area 223cc. And whether it is the pseudo final round start timing. That is, it is determined whether or not it is the music composition change determination timing.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the third control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 144 to 150. First, the details of the operation detection processing 10 (S4161) in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. This operation detection process 10 (S4161) is a process that is executed instead of the operation detection process 9 (see FIG. 128) in the second control example. This is a process for monitoring an operation (pressing) on the button 230 and executing control according to the operation content when the operation is detected.

  Of the operation detection processing 10 (see FIG. 144) in the third control example, in the processing of S5101 to S5106, S5109, and S5110, S5101 to S5106 of the operation detection processing 9 (see FIG. 128) in the second control example, respectively. , S5109, and S5110 are executed. In the operation detection process 10 (see FIG. 144) in the third control example, when it is determined in the process of S5106 that an operation (pressing) on the center button CB has been detected (S5106: Yes), the selected item A music determination process for determining the music to be played after the end of the music selection period according to the type is performed (S5121), and the process ends. Details of the music determination processing (S5121) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing details of the above-described music determination processing (S5121). In this music determination processing (S5121), it is first determined whether or not a random music selection has been determined by the player (whether the most significant bit of the menu position pointer 223ab is on (1)) (S5801). If it is determined in the processing of S5801 that an item other than the random music selection has been determined (the most significant bit of the menu position pointer 223ab is off (0) when the pressing of the center button CB is detected) (S5801: No) ), The data indicating the music corresponding to the value of the lower 5 bits of the menu position pointer 223ab is specified from the item arrangement storage area 223aa, stored in the music type storage area 223bd (S5802), and the process proceeds to S5806.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5801 that the random music selection has been determined (the most significant bit of the menu position pointer 223ab is ON (1)) (S5801: Yes), the random music selection table 222ca (see FIG. 143). Is read out (S5803), and the value of the music lottery counter 223ca is compared with the specified content corresponding to the data stored in the jackpot situation storage area 223cb in the read-out table and the value of the music lottery counter 223ca. Is determined (S5804). Then, the data corresponding to the music determined in the processing of S5804 is stored in the music type storage area 223bd (S5805), and the processing shifts to S5806.

  In the processing of S5806 performed after the processing of S5802 or S5805, the music selection menu screen is closed, the menu display flag 223ae is set to off (S5806), and this processing ends. By executing the music determination process (see FIG. 145), when a random music selection is determined, one music can be randomly selected from a plurality of music.

  As described above, when random song selection is determined, a song that is not displayed as an item on the song selection menu screen (that is, “song a”) may be determined. This “song a” may be determined only in the case of a probability change jackpot, and may be determined in the case of a probability change jackpot in the even-numbered symbol notification (if it is unknown whether it is a probability change jackpot or a normal jackpot) ) Is determined at a higher rate than when the odd symbol notification has a probability of being a jackpot (when it is determined that the symbol is a variable jackpot). With this configuration, in the event of an even symbol information jackpot, the probability is changed to the probability change state as soon as possible (that is, before confirming the result of the effect of notifying whether or not to shift to the probability change state). A player who wants to know whether or not to shift can positively select “random music selection”. Also, when “song a” is reproduced as expected by the player, the player can be pleased. Further, even when “song a” is not reproduced, it is possible to keep giving a sense of expectation to the probable change state until an effect to notify whether or not to shift to the probable change state during the jackpot is executed. it can.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 146, details of the hit-related processing 10 (S4371) in the third control example will be described. The hit-related process 10 (S 4371) is a process executed in place of the hit-related process 9 (see FIG. 130) in the second control example. Of the hit-related processing 10 (S 4371) in the third control example, in each of the processing of S 4401 to S 4404, S 4406, S 4407, S 4409, S 4462, and S 4464 to S 4466, the hit-related processing 9 in the second control example (FIG. 130) The same processes as those of S4401 to S4404, S4406, S4407, S4409, S4462, and S4464 to S4466 of the same are executed.

  In the hit-related process 10 (see FIG. 146) in the third control example, when it is determined in the process of S4404 that the opening command is included in the command received from the main control device 110 (S4404: Yes) Then, a pseudo small round lottery process for performing a lottery (judgment) as to whether or not to execute a pseudo small round effect, which is an effect to make it appear as if the number of rounds is smaller than the original number of rounds, is executed (S4471). ) And the process moves to S4406. Details of the pseudo small round lottery process (S4471) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the hit-related process 10 (see FIG. 146) in the third control example, when it is determined in the process of S4407 that the command received from the main control device 110 includes the round number command (S4407). : Yes) Then, instead of the round number command process (see FIG. 131) in the second control example, a round number command process 10 is executed (S4472), and this process ends. Details of the round number command processing 10 (S4472) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the hit-related process 10 (see FIG. 146) in the third control example, when it is determined in the process of S4462 that the command received from the main control device 110 includes an interval command (S4462: Yes) Then, instead of the interval command processing (see FIG. 133) in the second control example, an interval command processing 10 is executed (S4473), and this processing ends. Details of this interval command processing 10 (S4473) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 147, the details of the pseudo small round lottery process (S4471), which is one of the hit-related processes 10 (see FIG. 146) in the third control example, will be described. The pseudo small round lottery process (S4471) is a process for selecting whether or not to set the execution of the pseudo small round effect as described above.

  In the pseudo small round lottery process (see FIG. 147), first, the type of the jackpot notified of the start of the opening period by the current opening command is the jackpot A (the number of rounds among the jackpots of the first special symbol, which is relatively large, is 8). It is determined whether it is one of the jackpot (round jackpot) and the jackpot D (16 jackpots with a relatively large number of rounds among the jackpots of the second special symbol) (S5831). In the processing of S5831, if it is determined that the current jackpot is neither the jackpot A nor the jackpot D (S5831: No), the current jackpot is a jackpot B, C (a relatively large jackpot of the first special symbol). It means any one of five rounds with a small number of rounds, and E and F (10 rounds with a relatively small number of rounds of the second special symbol). Therefore, in this case, since the original number of rounds is small and there is no possibility of executing the pseudo small round effect, each process of S5832 to S5837 for randomly selecting (determining) whether or not to execute the pseudo small round effect is skipped. Then, the process proceeds to S5838.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5831, if it is determined that the current jackpot is either the jackpot A or the jackpot D (S5831: Yes), it is determined whether or not the pseudo small round effect can be executed by lottery (determination). S5832 to S5837 are executed. Specifically, the pseudo small round lottery table 222cb is read out (S5832), and the execution of the pseudo small round effect is determined (determined) (S5833). In addition, as described above, the pseudo small round lottery table 222cb is set so that the result of the lottery corresponding to the execution of the pseudo small round effect is 50%.

  When the processing of S5833 ends, it is then determined whether or not the lottery (judgment) result of the processing of S5833 is a lottery result corresponding to the execution of the pseudo small round effect (S5834). If it is determined that the result is not the corresponding lottery result (S5834: No), each process of S5835 to S5837 for setting execution of the pseudo small round effect is skipped, and the process proceeds to S5838.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5834 that the result is a lottery result corresponding to the execution of the pseudo small round effect (S5834: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the current big hit is the big hit A (S5835). . In the process of S5835, if it is determined that the current jackpot is the jackpot A (eight round jackpot of the first special symbol) (S5835: Yes), the current jackpot is determined to be the number of rounds in the jackpot of the first special symbol. Is stored in the pseudo final R storage area 223cc to store the value (data) corresponding to 5 rounds (S5836), and the process proceeds to S5838. I do.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5835 that the current jackpot is not the jackpot A (that is, the jackpot D) (S5835: No), the current jackpot is determined as one of the jackpots of the second special symbol. A value (data) corresponding to 10 rounds is stored in the pseudo final R storage area 223 cc in order to make it appear as if the number of rounds is a relatively small jackpot (10 rounds jackpot) (S5837), and the process proceeds to S5838. Transition.

  In the process of S5838, a display opening command corresponding to the opening effect to be executed is set, and the process ends. By executing the pseudo small round lottery process, when a relatively small number of rounds is announced at the start of the big hit (that is, when five rounds are notified in the first special symbol big hit, or in the case of the second special symbol, Even if 10 rounds are announced at the jackpot), it is possible to perform the game during the jackpot in expectation that a larger number of rounds will be announced (the pseudo small round effect is being executed). it can. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, referring to FIG. 148, this is one of the hit-related processes 10 (see FIG. 146) in the third control example, and is replaced with the round number command process (see FIG. 131) in the second control example. The details of the executed round number command processing 10 (S4472) will be described. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the round number command processing 10 (S4472).

  Of the round number command processing 10 (see FIG. 148) in the third control example, each processing of S5401 to S5407 includes the round number command processing (see FIG. 131) of each processing of S5401 to S5407 in the second control example. The same processing is performed. Further, in the round number command processing 10 in the third control example, when the processing of S5401 ends, the round notified by the current round number command is the pseudo round set in the pseudo final R storage area 223cc. It is determined whether the current round matches the final round (S5411). If it is determined that the current round is a pseudo final round (S5411: Yes), the process proceeds to S5403 and the reproduction order of the music data type is determined. It is determined whether or not to rearrange. On the other hand, in the process of S5411, if it is determined that the current round is not the pseudo final round (S5411: No), the process proceeds to S5402.

  By executing the round number command processing 10 (see FIG. 148), at the start of the pseudo final round when the pseudo small round effect is executed (at the start of 5 rounds at the jackpot A and at 10 at the jackpot D) At the start of the round), the rearrangement of the reproduction order of the music data is determined in the same manner as in the original final round, so that the possibility that the chorus portion of the music is reproduced during the pseudo final round is increased. Can be configured. That is, since the audio mode in the pseudo final round and the audio usage in the original final round can be made equal, the pseudo final round or the original final round is determined from the audio mode of the music. This can be prevented (suppressed) from being detected by the player before the continuous effect (see FIG. 141 (b)) is executed. Therefore, when the pseudo small round effect is set, whether the continuous effect is executed until the start timing of the continuous effect (see FIG. 141 (b)) (that is, the end timing of the pseudo final round), Since it can be difficult to identify whether the big hit ends as it is, it is possible to increase the player's expectation during the pseudo final round.

  Next, referring to FIG. 149, this is one of the hit-related processing 10 (see FIG. 146) in the third control example, and is executed instead of the interval command processing (see FIG. 133) in the second control example. The details of the executed interval number command processing 10 (S4473) will be described. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the interval number command processing 10 (S4473).

  Of the interval command processing 10 (see FIG. 149) in the third control example, each processing of S5501 to S5509 is the same as each processing of S5501 to S5509 of the interval command processing (see FIG. 133) in the second control example, respectively. The processing is executed. In the interval command processing 10 (see FIG. 149) in the third control example, when the processing of S5501 ends, the interval period notified by the current interval command is changed to the pseudo last round (pseudo last R storage area). It is determined whether or not it is an interval period set immediately before (a round set to 223 cc) (S5511). If it is determined that the current interval period is an interval period immediately before a pseudo final round (S5511). : Yes), the process moves to S5503, and it is determined whether or not the reproduction order of the music data type is rearranged. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5511 that the current round is not the pseudo final round (S5511: No), the process proceeds to S5502.

  By executing the process of S5511, at the start of the interval period immediately before the pseudo final round in the case where the pseudo small round effect is being executed, similarly to the start of the interval period immediately before the original final round. In addition, it is possible to determine the rearrangement of the reproduction order of the music data so as to increase the possibility that the chorus portion of the music is reproduced during the pseudo final round. That is, since the audio mode in the pseudo final round and the audio usage in the original final round can be made equal, the pseudo final round or the original final round is determined from the audio mode of the music. This can be prevented (suppressed) from being detected by the player before the continuous effect (see FIG. 141 (b)) is executed. Therefore, when the pseudo small round effect is set, whether the continuous effect is executed until the start timing of the continuous effect (see FIG. 141 (b)) (that is, the end timing of the pseudo final round), Since it can be difficult to identify whether the big hit ends as it is, it is possible to increase the player's expectation during the pseudo final round.

  In the interval command process 10 (see FIG. 149) in the third control example, in the process of S5506, the interval period notified by the current interval command is not the interval period after the end of the first round of the jackpot. If it is determined (S5506: No), then it is determined whether or not the current interval is an interval period after the pseudo last round (the round set in the pseudo final R storage area 223cc) is completed (S5506: No). S5512). If it is determined in the processing of S5512 that the interval period is after the pseudo last round is completed (S5512: Yes), execution of the continuous effect (see FIG. 141 (b)) is set (S5513). Then, the data stored in the pseudo final R storage area 223cc is reset (S5514), and this processing ends.

  Next, the details of the variable display setting process 10 (S4162) in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 10 (S4162). The variable display setting process 10 (S4162) in the third control example is similar to the variable display setting process (see FIG. 38) in the second control example (and the first embodiment), and is a variable effect on the third symbol display device 81. Is a process for generating and setting a display variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

  In the variable display setting process 10 (see FIG. 150) in the third control example (see FIG. 150), in each of the processes of S4501 to S4509, S4501 of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 38) in the second control example (the first embodiment) is performed. To S4509 are executed. Further, in the variation display setting process 10 (see FIG. 150) in the third control example, when the process of S4504 is completed, next, it is determined whether or not the current variation pattern is a variation pattern for reporting a jackpot. (S4521), when it is determined that the variation pattern is for notifying the jackpot (S4521: Yes), the type of the jackpot and the type of the third symbol (odd symbol or even symbol) aligned in the variation pattern set this time are determined. Is stored in the jackpot situation storage area 223cb (S4522), and the process moves to S4505. In the process of S4522, "01H" is stored in the jackpot situation storage area 223cb when the odd symbol notification is a probability change jackpot, and "02H" is stored when the odd symbol notification is a probability change hit. If it is a normal jackpot of the even symbol notification, “03H” is stored.

  The data stored in the jackpot situation storage area 223cb by the processing of S4522 is referred to when the player selects (determines) “random song selection” during the song selection period, and the jackpot situation storage area 223cb of the random song selection table 222ca. Is compared with the music lottery counter 223ca to determine one music to be played during the big hit.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4521 that the variation pattern set this time is not the variation pattern corresponding to the jackpot (that is, the variation pattern corresponding to the deviation) (S4521: No), the process of S4522 is skipped. Then, the process shifts to S4505.

  As described above, in the third control example, when “random music selection” is determined by the player on the music selection menu screen, the music to be played back after the end of the first round (music selection period) is randomly selected. It is configured to be determined. Further, when the “random song selection” is determined, if a specific condition is satisfied (that is, if the current jackpot is a probable change jackpot), a special song that is not displayed as an item on the song selection menu screen (ie, , “Song a”) can be selected. As a result, it is possible to select “random music selection” in expectation of determining “music a” that cannot be normally heard. In particular, when a variable display (fluctuating effect) in which the third symbol with an even number is attached becomes a big hit (when it is not clear whether it is a probability variable hit or a normal big hit), In other words, before confirming the result of the effect that informs whether or not to shift to the probable change state, a “random music selection” is actively performed for a player who wants to know whether or not to transit to the probable change state. Can be selected. Furthermore, the rate at which “song a” is determined by lottery is configured so that the odd-numbered jackpot of the even-numbered symbol notification is higher than that of the odd-numbered symbol notification. This makes it possible to more positively select “random music selection” when the jackpot of the even symbol notification is won. By increasing the possibility that “random song selection” is determined by the player, a plurality of songs (songs A to Z) set in the pachinko machine 10 can be reproduced evenly. This allows a plurality of songs to be heard without waste.

  In the third control example, as one type of effect performed during the jackpot, the number of rounds of the jackpot for a predetermined period (for example, until the fifth round or the tenth round is completed) from the start of the jackpot. Is reported to be less than the original number of rounds, and after a predetermined period elapses, a pseudo small round effect for notifying the original number of rounds can be selected. By configuring this pseudo small round effect to be executable, if a relatively small number of rounds is announced at the start of a jackpot, after a predetermined period has elapsed, a larger number of rounds (8 rounds or 16 rounds) Is expected to be notified, a game can be played until a predetermined period elapses. Accordingly, in the third control example, even in the pseudo final round during the execution of the pseudo small round effect, the rust portion is reproduced by rearranging the music reproduction order in the same manner as the original final round. It is configured so that: As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to discriminate a pseudo final round or an original final round from a part of the music reproduced during the pseudo final round. Thus, until the pseudo small round effect ends (until the predetermined period elapses), it is possible to keep the expectation that a larger number of rounds will be notified.

  In the third control example, when the player decides on “random song selection” only in the case of the probability change jackpot, the configuration is such that “song a” may be reproduced, and the odd symbol information notification probability change jackpot. The probability that the "song a" is selected is higher in the probability of winning the even symbol information than in the case of the even symbol notification, but when the "random song selection" is determined, the rate at which each song is determined is , Can be arbitrarily determined. Specifically, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which “song a” is determined with a low probability (for example, a rate of 0.1%) even when a normal jackpot is hit. That is, the rate at which "song a" is selected is higher when "random song selection" is selected during the execution of the probability change jackpot than when "random song selection" is selected during the normal jackpot execution. You may comprise. With this configuration, even if “song a” is reproduced, the probability change jackpot is not fixed, so that the game can be performed with a sense of tension until the probability change state is notified. . Further, the rate at which the “song a” is determined may be configured such that the odd-numbered symbol notification has a higher probability of being changed than the even-numbered symbol notification has.

  In the third control example, among the entertainment effects executed during the jackpot (predetermined period), the effect mode (the type of music to be played) of the entertainment effect by sound is determined by the content of the operation performed on the operation button 230 by the player ( Although the configuration is determined according to the selection result on the music selection menu screen), the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the effect of the display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the predetermined period is changed according to the player's selection result (operation content on the operation button 230). More specifically, when a specific effect execution condition is satisfied, a plurality of items corresponding to a plurality of effect modes (corresponding to the items corresponding to each of “Song A” to “Song Z” in the third control example) ) And an item for which the effect mode is selected at random (corresponding to an item corresponding to “random music selection” in the third control example) are configured to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, the effect mode of the effect to be executed is determined according to the item selected by operating the operation button 230 by the player. That is, when the item corresponding to the effect mode is selected, the effect is performed in the effect mode corresponding to the selected item, while when the item selected at random is selected, the effect is selected at a predetermined timing. A configuration in which one effect mode is determined from a plurality of possible effect modes may be adopted. By configuring in this way, the player selects a gaming ability that selects a desired presentation mode of the player and a game mode that allows the user to randomly select the presentation mode and focus on which of the presentation modes is selected. Can be done. Further, in this case, similarly to the third control example, a special effect that can be determined only when the player selects an item for which the effect mode is selected at random (in the special music in the third control example). A display effect corresponding to a certain “song a” may be set. With this configuration, it is possible to visually determine whether or not a special effect has been performed. Therefore, whether or not a special effect is performed (that is, whether or not to shift to the positive change state after the jackpot) is determined. You can make it easier to understand.

  In the third control example, the special song “song a” can be selected only when the player selects “random song selection” on the song selection menu screen. However, the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, when the probability change jackpot is determined (that is, when the odd symbol notification is a probability change jackpot, and the player is already convinced that the probability change jackpot is, the “song a” is displayed on the music selection menu screen. May be displayed. With such a configuration, in a situation where the probable change state is determined, a player who wants to listen to “music a” is more likely to select another music than “random music selection”. ", But an item" music a "can be selected. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved. Also, in this case, a predetermined ratio of “song a” to the song selection menu screen displayed in the probability change jackpot of the even symbol notification (a situation in which the player cannot know whether or not to be in the probability change state). May be displayed. With such a configuration, the method of early detecting whether or not a probable change state is detected (variation (whether or not “music a” is included in the item, and “random music selection”) (Whether or not “song a” is reproduced) can be provided, so that the interest of the player can be further improved during the song selection period of the jackpot of the even symbol notification.

  In the third control example, the special song “song a” can be selected only when the player selects “random song selection” on the song selection menu screen. However, the player does not necessarily select the song. It does not need to be configured so that it can be performed. For example, the configuration may be such that the operation button 230 is abolished and the music played during the execution of the jackpot is randomly selected each time by referring to the random music selection table 222ca. That is, when the probability change state is reached after the end of the jackpot, “song a” can be reproduced. However, when the probability is low after the end of the jackpot, “song a” is not likely to be reproduced. You may. Even in the case of such a configuration, in the event of a big hit of the even number symbol notification, it is possible to play a game during the big hit by paying attention to whether or not “song a” is reproduced. Further, the present invention is not limited to the case where “song a” is used to indicate whether or not the music piece is in the probable change state. During a predetermined period of time during the game, the state after the predetermined period elapses becomes an advantageous state for the player (for example, a big hit, a time saving state, a small hit RUSH, a slot BIG BONUS, an ART, an AT, or the like). It is determined whether or not the music is in a disadvantageous state, and if it is in an advantageous state, a special song can be played.On the other hand, if it is in an unfavorable state, a special song is played. What is necessary is just to comprise so that there is no possibility of being performed.

  In the third control example, the music that can be selected when "random music selection" is selected is made different depending on whether or not the jackpot is a probability change jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that the music that can be selected when “random music selection” is selected differs depending on whether or not the pseudo small round production is being performed. Specifically, when the “random song selection” is determined during the execution of the pseudo small round effect, one song is selected from a plurality of songs including “song a”, and the pseudo small round effect is executed. In the case where there is no song, one song may be selected from a plurality of songs excluding “song a”.

  In the third control example, the control when setting a song with a big hit has been described as an example. However, this control is not limited to the big hit. If the state becomes relatively advantageous for the player after the end of the predetermined music reproduction period, a special music (that is, “music a”) can be selected when “random music selection” is selected. On the other hand, if the state becomes relatively disadvantageous after the end of the reproduction period, at least a special song (that is, “song a”) is excluded (that is, “song A” to “song Z”). Any situation can be used as long as it can be configured to select one piece of music from. For example, similarly to the first control example, a configuration used for control for selecting a music piece in the probable change state may be adopted. In this case, if "Random tune selection" is selected in a state where the jackpot is included in the holding ball, a special song can be selected, while the jackpot is included in the holding ball. If not, a configuration may be adopted in which one music piece is selected from among the special music pieces excluded. In addition, the music selection menu screen can be displayed during the execution of the variable display effect, and when "random music selection" is selected (determined) during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the jackpot, a special On the other hand, if "random music selection" is selected (determined) during execution of the variable display corresponding to the departure, one music is selected from among those excluding special music. It may be configured.

  In the third control example, when "random music selection" is selected, the probable change state is determined when "music a" is selected. However, when the player selects items other than "random music selection" on the music selection menu screen, In the case where is selected, there may be provided a case where the probability change state is determined at a predetermined rate. Specifically, for example, when the player selects one piece of music during the execution of the probability change jackpot, the reproduction position of the music piece is reproduced from a reproduction position different from the normal position with a predetermined probability (for example, a rust portion). , Or from the second song, etc.). Alternatively, or in addition, at a predetermined probability, a song different from the selected song (for example, “song a”) is played, the tone of the song is changed from normal, and the version is changed from normal. The configuration may be different. With this configuration, it is possible to meet the desire of a player who has both the idea of selecting his or her favorite music piece and the idea of early detection of whether or not the music is in a probable state. Further, in this case, the configuration may be such that the music selected by the player is reproduced in an audio mode different from normal only when the same music is continuously selected for a predetermined number of jackpots.

  In the third control example, the music selected during the music selection period is reproduced from the beginning (intro part) when the first round of the jackpot ends, regardless of the number of rounds of the jackpot. It is not limited. For example, for a jackpot with a large number of rounds (for example, an 8-round jackpot or a 16-round jackpot), while the reproduction is started from the beginning of the music, a jackpot with a small number of rounds (for example, 5 rounds) and a pseudo small round effect are produced. May be configured to start playback from the chorus part of the music. With such a configuration, even if the jackpot type has a small number of rounds, the player can more reliably hear the chorus portion of the music at one jackpot. Also, in this case, if the pseudo-small round effect is set, it may be determined by lottery whether to start the reproduction from the chorus part of the music or to start the reproduction from the intro part of the music. More specifically, for example, when a pseudo small round effect is set, the reproduction is started from the chorus part of the music at a rate of 90%, and the reproduction is started from the head part of the music at a rate of 10%. Is also good. With this configuration, if the reproduction is started from the beginning of the song even though a small number of rounds (for example, five rounds) is notified, a pseudo small round effect is executed at that time. Therefore, the player can be satisfied with the fact that the number of rounds is a jackpot before confirming the continuous production.

  In the above-described second and third control examples, in the music selection period (first round), the music dedicated to the music selection period is played, and from the end of the first round, the music selected by the player is played. , But is not limited to this. For example, each time the player operates (presses) the upper button UB or the lower button DB on the music selection menu screen (every time the item that changes to a lighted appearance display mode is switched), a rust of an item newly arranged in the music selection area is displayed. It may be configured to reproduce a part. With this configuration, it is possible to determine the music to be played during the jackpot, taking into account not only the title of the music (music name) but also the sound characteristic of the most characteristic rust portion of the music. Music can be more easily selected. Also, in this case, if the current jackpot is a jackpot with a small number of rounds (for example, five round jackpots), the music is played as it is from the continuation of the playback position when the player pressed down and selected the center button CB. May be continued. With this configuration, music can be more effectively reproduced using the remaining period of the jackpot with a small number of rounds.

  In each of the above control examples, a configuration in which a player can select an effect mode (a type of music to be reproduced) of a sound effect among entertainment effects performed during a predetermined period (during a probable change state or during a jackpot). But it is not limited to this. For example, an arrangement may be made in which it is possible to select an effect mode of a display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In each of the above control examples, a configuration is adopted in which a music data group is provided for each type of music to be reproduced, and each piece of data constituting the music data group is reproduced in a predetermined order to reproduce one music. , But is not limited to this. A configuration in which only one piece of data capable of reproducing one piece of music from the start to the end as many as the number of pieces of music may be provided. In this case, the playback position may be configured to have a data structure in a format that can be identified, and the playback position may be changed at least in part units. With such a configuration, as in the above-described first control example, the reproduction of the music can be started from a different reproduction position in accordance with the history of the selection of the music. Further, as in the above-described second control example, the reproduction position can be changed so that the possibility that the rust portion is reproduced during the round period of the final round of the jackpot is increased.

  In each of the above control examples, only items to be arranged in the music selection area are determined by random lottery, and other items (items to be arranged at menu positions other than the history area) are determined in advance based on the items arranged in the music selection area. Although the arrangement is made in the specified order (alphabetical order), the arrangement is not limited to this. For example, other items may be determined by random lottery.

  In each of the above control examples, in the initial arrangement of the music selection menu screen, items with a high selection frequency of the player are arranged in a range that can be selected with a small number of operations, and one item selected by random lottery in the music selection area is selected. Although the arrangement is made such that the other items are arranged in a predetermined order based on the items arranged in the music selection area, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that the player can freely customize the arrangement of items on the music selection menu screen by operating the operation buttons 230 or the like. With such a configuration, the music piece that the player wants to select can be previously arranged at a selectable position within a range where the number of operations is small, so that the convenience for the player can be improved.

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is easily inferred that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. You can do it.

  For example, in the above-described first to fourth embodiments and the seventh embodiment, one or a plurality of operation winning prize openings which are a start of a jackpot when a game ball enters are provided. However, the start of the jackpot is It is not limited to this. For example, a configuration in which an operating means such as a switch is provided in a range that can be reached by a player, and a specific jackpot is started when a specific operation is performed on the operating means after a jackpot has been won by a special symbol lottery. It may be. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily start the jackpot, so that despite having fired a game ball aiming at the activated winning opening, did not enter the activated winning opening and discouraged the player, etc. Can be prevented.

  In each of the above embodiments, in the case of a big hit or a small hit, the right variable winning device 65 is provided as a configuration for providing a prize ball by allowing a game ball to enter, but is not limited thereto. Not something. For example, a configuration may be used for a gaming machine of a type in which a big hit is started when a gaming ball enters a specific area inside the right variable winning device 65 (so-called two types and one type and two types). With such a configuration, as the number of the game balls passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 increases, the number of the game balls entering the right specific winning opening 65a increases, so that the game balls enter the specific area. You can make it seem easy. Therefore, the player can determine the degree of expectation to be a big hit from the number of game balls on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1.

  In the above-described first to fourth embodiments and the seventh embodiment, two types of specific winning ports (right specific winning port 65a and left specific winning port 650a) having different closing conditions are provided, and depending on the number of rounds and the like. Although the type of the specific winning opening to be opened is switched, the present invention is not limited to this. Only the right specific winning opening 65a may be provided, and the closing condition (maximum winning number) may be switched by determining the number of rounds. With such a configuration, the left variable winning device 650 can be eliminated, so that the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by reducing the number of components.

  In the above-described first to fourth embodiments and the seventh embodiment, the operation winning prize hole (the operation prize opening 660 in the first to third embodiments, In the fourth embodiment, it is configured such that the game ball can always enter the right operation winning opening 661 and the left operation winning opening 662), and it is determined that entering the operation winning opening only during the jackpot waiting state is valid. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in a state other than the jackpot waiting state, the ball may not be physically allowed to enter the activated winning opening. Specifically, for example, the electric winning combination that can close the flow path for the operation winning opening is provided, and only when the game ball enters the operating winning opening after entering the jackpot waiting state, the electric winning combination is formed. It is good also as composition which opens an object. Also in the case of such a configuration, the jackpot can be started based on the detection of a ball entering the activated winning opening in the jackpot waiting state.

  In the above-described embodiments, the sound lamp control device 113 controls the start timing and the update process of the effect mode such as the standby state effect and the right-turning expectation effect suggestive effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, the main control device 110 and the display control device 114 may be configured to perform control relating to the effect mode. As a result, the processing load on the sound lamp control device 114 can be reduced. In this case, the passage detection sensor 228 may be electrically connected to the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Thereby, even if the control relating to the production mode is ported to another control device, the update of the mode of the chance meter CM, the update of the mode of the physical strength gauge LG, and the like can be executed accurately.

  In the first to fourth embodiments and the seventh embodiment, the passage detection sensor 228 for detecting the number of game balls passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 during the execution of the standby state effect is provided. Although the mode of the chance meter CM is changed according to the detection result, the player is made to grasp the number of game balls on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a known photographing means (for example, a video camera or the like) for photographing the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 is provided, and at least a part of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is photographed during the jackpot waiting state. It may be configured to display an image or video taken by the means. This allows the player to more accurately grasp the situation on the upper surface of the door 65f1.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, by forming a zigzag flow path in which the advancing direction of the game ball can be changed a plurality of times on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1, when the game ball is continuously struck to the right, a big hit of 1 Although the number of game balls exceeding the upper limit winning number in the round is configured to be able to flow simultaneously on the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1, it is not limited to this. For example, instead of forming a serpentine flow path on the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1, the width of the opening and closing door 65f1 (and the right specific winning opening 65a) may be simply increased to allow the game ball to pass over the opening and closing door 65f1. By increasing the distance, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of game balls exceeding the upper limit winning number in the first round can simultaneously flow down. In this case, the number of gaming balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 at the same time when the right-handed player keeps hitting continuously may not be configured to exceed the upper limit winning number in the first round. For example, the width (path length) of the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 may be configured to be longer than the length obtained by multiplying the diameter of the game ball by the upper limit winning number in the first round. With this configuration, for example, when a ball is clogged or the like and the game ball on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 cannot flow down below the game board 13, the first round on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 by right-handing. Only the game balls equal to or more than the upper limit number are reached in advance, and in the case of the next big hit, the game balls equal to or larger than the upper limit number can be simultaneously entered in the first round. It should be noted that a shield member or the like for preventing a game ball reaching the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 from flowing down below the game board 13 in a normal state may be provided. That is, the game ball that has reached the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 may be configured to stop on the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 until a big hit occurs. In such a configuration, it is possible to easily make an over-prize in the next big hit only by hitting the game ball right before the big hit.

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a game ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine which has a special winning state having a special area such as a V zone and has a special game state in which a special game state is required to win a game ball. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as areache, sparrow ball, slot machine, so-called game machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating an operation lever in a state where a symbol is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and a symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows: "a display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one ". In this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative game media. As an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of game balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, a symbol change starts due to an operation of an operation lever, for example, due to an operation of a stop button, or By the elapse of the predetermined time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and a player is generated. , A large amount of game balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only gaming balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so that the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is present. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of the barrel medal and the gaming ball and the restriction on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  Each of the above-described embodiments and each control example may be configured by combining all or a part thereof. For example, the configuration of the passage detection sensor 228 of the right variable winning device 65 in the sixth embodiment may be applied to another embodiment. For example, when applied to the first embodiment, the gauge number of the chance meter CM during execution of the standby state effect can be accurately linked to the number of game balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. More specifically, the passage number counter 223k in the sixth embodiment is also provided in the RAM 223 in the first embodiment, and the value of the passage number counter 223k is updated in the same manner as in the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 87). See S4211, S4212, S4219, and S4220). Then, during the execution of the standby state effect, each time the value of the passing number counter 223k is updated, the mode of the chance meter CM is updated so that the gauge number corresponds to the updated counter value. Thereby, the mode of the chance meter CM can be set to a mode according to the situation of the actual upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. In other embodiments, the configuration of the sixth embodiment can be diverted by a similar method.

  Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Characteristic A group> (a configuration that easily causes over-winning)
A specific area in which a game ball can enter, a privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering the specific area, a specific flow path in which the game ball can flow, The first position where the game ball flowing down at least the predetermined section of the flow path is more easily guided to the specific area than passing the predetermined section, and passes through the predetermined section than is guided to the specific area. A variable means that can be changed to a second position that is easy to operate, an operation means that can be operated by a player, and a game ball that moves to the specific flow path when the operation content of the operation means becomes the first operation content. A game ball is fired at a first firing speed that makes it easier to reach, and a second firing that is different from the first firing speed is performed when a second operation that differs from the first operation is performed. A launching means capable of launching a game ball at a speed, and Determining means for determining whether a specific condition that is more easily satisfied when the game ball is fired at the second firing speed by the firing means than when the game ball is fired at the first firing speed; Variable control means for controlling the variable means to change from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied by the means. Gaming machine A1.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a hit state when a result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball to a starting winning opening is a hit. Some of such gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types having different numbers of rounds, and some of them aim to improve the interest in winning by making different game values obtainable (for example, And Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the game value that can be acquired is almost constant for each hit type, and thus it is like an operation for obtaining the game value according to the hit type, and the game during the hit state is performed. Was sometimes monotonous. That is, there is a problem that it is difficult to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, some conventional gaming machines allow a player to determine the start timing of a winning state when a winning is won, but the game value that can be obtained during the winning is almost constant for each winning type. Since this is the same as other conventional gaming machines, it has been difficult to improve the interest of the player in the game during the hit state.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, a predetermined privilege is provided by the privilege provision means based on the fact that the game ball has entered a specific area where the game ball can enter. A first position at which game balls flowing down at least a predetermined section of the specific flow path in which the game balls can flow are more easily guided to a specific area than passing through the predetermined section; and a predetermined section than being guided to the specific area. The variable means is configured to be variably set to a second position where it is easy to pass through. When the operation content of the operation means operable by the player becomes the first operation content, the launch means launches the game ball at the first launch speed at which the game ball easily reaches the specific flow path. . On the other hand, when the second operation content is different from the first operation content, a game ball is fired by the firing means at a second firing speed different from the first firing speed. When the shooting ball is fired at the second firing speed by the firing device, the determination device determines whether a specific condition that is more easily satisfied than when the game ball is fired at the first firing speed is satisfied. Based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied, the variable control unit controls the variable unit to change from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period.

  Thereby, the operating means can be operated in expectation of the specific condition being satisfied while the game ball is passing through the predetermined section, and thus there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A1, the variable control means may change the variable means from the first position to the second position based on a first number of game balls having entered the specific area. The predetermined section is configured to have a path length that allows a second number of game balls larger than the first number to flow at the same time in a state where the variable means is changed to the second position. Gaming machine A2, characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1. That is, based on the first number of game balls having entered the specific area, the variable control means controls the variable means to change from the first position to the second position. The predetermined section is configured with a path length that allows a second number of game balls, which is larger than the first number, to flow simultaneously at a time when the variable means is changed to the second position.

  This allows the operating means to be operated by devising the specific condition to be satisfied after the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section exceeds the first number, thereby allowing the player to enjoy the game. There is an effect that can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A2, the launching means is capable of launching a game ball at a time interval equal to or longer than a predetermined interval, and in the predetermined section, the game ball is continuously fired at the predetermined interval in the second direction. In this state, the second number of game balls reach the predetermined section after one game ball reaches the predetermined section and before the game ball passes through the predetermined section. A gaming machine A3 characterized by allowing game balls to pass through the game machine A3.

  According to the gaming machine A3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A2. That is, the launching means is configured to be able to launch the game balls at time intervals longer than a predetermined interval. The predetermined section is a state in which game balls are continuously fired at predetermined intervals in the second direction, from when one game ball reaches the predetermined section until the game ball passes through the predetermined section. During this period, the game balls are configured to pass so that the second number of game balls can reach the predetermined section.

  As a result, there is an effect that a player who wants to increase the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section to a number exceeding the first number can fire game balls continuously at predetermined intervals.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the variable means is configured to be able to guide all game balls flowing down the predetermined section to the specific area when the variable is changed to the first position. A gaming machine A4, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, when the first position is changed, all the gaming balls flowing down the predetermined section are guided to the specific area. Since the number of game balls passing through a predetermined section is confirmed, the number of game balls guided to a specific area when a specific condition is satisfied can be known. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily understand the degree of advantage when the specific condition is satisfied.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the game machine includes a ball-entering unit into which a game ball can enter, and the discriminating unit determines that the specific condition is satisfied when the game ball enters the ball-entering unit. A gaming machine A5 characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, when the game ball enters the ball entry means capable of entering the game ball, the specific condition is satisfied by the determination means. Therefore, by firing the game ball aiming at the ball entry means, there is an effect that the specific condition can be easily established at the timing desired by the player.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, a gaming machine A6 including a deceleration means for reducing a flowing speed of a gaming ball flowing down the predetermined section.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the falling speed of the gaming ball flowing down the predetermined section is reduced by the speed reduction means, so that the gaming ball is directed toward the specific flow path. When fired continuously, the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section can be increased. Therefore, there is an effect that more game balls can be guided to the specific area when the specific condition is satisfied.

  Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, a display unit capable of displaying an effect mode, and an advantage determination unit that determines an advantage degree when the specific condition is satisfied until the specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine A7 comprising: a suggestion effect execution unit that executes a suggestion effect indicating the degree of advantage determined by the advantage determination unit on the display unit.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the degree of advantage in the case where the specific condition is satisfied is determined by the advantage determination means until the specific condition is satisfied. The suggestion effect indicating the degree of advantage determined by the determination unit is executed on the display unit by the suggestion effect execution unit. By checking the suggestion effect displayed on the display unit, the degree of advantage when the specific condition is satisfied is confirmed. There is an effect that can be understood more easily.

  In the gaming machine A7, the advantage determination means determines the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section, and the suggestion effect execution means determines the number of game balls determined by the advantage determination means. A gaming machine A8 that performs a suggested effect as the suggested effect.

  According to the gaming machine A8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A7. That is, the number of gaming balls passing through the predetermined section is determined by the advantage determining means. An effect indicating the number of game balls determined by the advantage determining means is executed as a suggestion effect by the suggestion effect execution means.

  Thereby, by confirming the suggested effect, there is an effect that the player can easily know the number of game balls entering the specific area when the specific condition is satisfied.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, a specific lottery result is obtained by a ball-entering means capable of entering a game ball, a lottery means for executing a lottery based on establishment of a lottery condition, and a lottery by the lottery means. And valid state setting means for setting a valid state in which the entering ball is valid for the entering ball means, based on which, the discriminating means determines whether or not the game ball enters the entering ball means during the valid state. When the ball is entered, it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied, and the variable control means is configured to determine that the specific condition is satisfied by the determination means. A gaming machine A9 for executing a variable game in which a predetermined number of times is changed from a position to the first position.

  According to the gaming machine A9, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines A1 to A8. That is, the lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and based on the specific lottery result obtained by the lottery by the lottery means, the entry of the ball into the ball entry means capable of entering the game ball is enabled. Is set by the effective state setting means. When the ball enters the ball entry means during the valid state, the discrimination means determines that the specific condition is satisfied. A variable game in which the variable means is changed a predetermined number of times from the second position to the first position is executed by the variable control means based on the determination means determining that the specific condition is satisfied.

  Thereby, there is an effect that a game can be played in expectation of a specific lottery result by the lottery means.

  In the gaming machine A9, a plurality of game machines including at least a first operation position at which a game ball easily enters the ball entry means and a second operation position at which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the first operation position. A gaming machine A10 comprising: an operation means operable at an operation position; and an operation control means for operating the operation position of the operation means to a corresponding operation position according to an elapsed time.

  According to the gaming machine A10, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A9. That is, the operation is performed in a plurality of operation positions including at least a first operation position in which the game ball easily enters the ball entry means and a second operation position in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the first operation position. The means is operable. The operation position of the operation means is moved to an operation position corresponding to the elapsed time by the operation control means.

  Accordingly, in order to satisfy the specific condition, it is necessary to fire the game ball toward the ball entry means aiming at a timing at which the operation position of the operation means becomes the first operation position. There is an effect that it is possible to give the player a pleasure to be made.

<Feature B group> (providing big hits that can aim for over-winning and big hits that cannot be aimed at)
A variable ball-in means which can be changed between a first state in which game balls can enter and a second state in which game balls are more difficult to enter than in the first state, and game balls into the variable ball-in means. A bonus granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the entry of a ball, a discriminating means for executing a discrimination based on the satisfaction of a discriminating condition, and a A variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable ball entry means is changed a predetermined number of times from the second state to the first state; an operation means operable by a player; Condition determining means for determining whether a specific condition that is likely to be satisfied when a specific operation is performed is satisfied, and the type of the variable game executed by the variable game execution means is determined by the determination by the determining means. After a certain judgment result, A first variable game in which the variable game is started when the specific condition is determined to be satisfied by the condition determining means, and a second variable game in which the variable game is started regardless of whether the specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine B1 comprising: a game; and a type determining unit that determines one type from among a plurality of types including at least a game.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a hit state when a result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball to a starting winning opening is a hit. Some of such gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types in which the number of open times (number of rounds) of a large open opening to which a prize ball is awarded when a game ball is won is different, and a game that can be obtained. There is a method of increasing the value of interest by making the value different (for example, Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

  Also, in such conventional gaming machines, even if the number of rounds is the same, by changing the opening pattern of the large opening in each round, the number of game balls that can be won in each round is changed, Some have different degrees of advantage.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the number of prize balls that can be acquired is almost constant for each hit type, so that it is like an operation for obtaining a game value according to the hit type, and during the hit state, In some cases, the game became monotonous. In addition, since it is necessary to change the control according to the hit type during the hit state, there is a problem that the processing load during the hit state increases.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the variable ball-in means is changed between a first state in which game balls can enter and a second state in which game balls are more difficult to enter than in the first state. Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the variable ball-in means, a predetermined privilege is provided by the privilege-providing means. The discriminating means executes the discrimination based on the satisfaction of the discriminating condition, and the variable ball-in means changes the predetermined number of times from the second state to the first state based on the specific discrimination result obtained by the discriminating means. The variable game to be performed is executed by the variable game execution means. The condition determination unit determines whether a specific condition that is easily satisfied when a specific operation is performed on the operation unit that can be operated by the player is satisfied. As a type of the variable game executed by the variable game execution means, after a specific judgment result is obtained by the judgment by the judgment means, the variable game is started when the condition judgment means judges that the specific condition is satisfied. The type determining means determines one type from a plurality of types including at least a first variable game and a second variable game in which the variable game is started regardless of whether a specific condition is satisfied.

  Thus, there is an effect that the timing at which the variable game is started can be changed according to the type of the variable game.

  In the gaming machine B1, a launching means capable of launching a game ball in a direction corresponding to an operation on the operating means, and a first means disposed at a position where a game ball fired in a first direction by the launching means can enter the ball. Ball entry means, second ball entry means arranged at a position at which game balls fired in a second direction different from the first direction can enter, and game balls enter the second ball entry means Ball entry discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the ball has been hit, wherein the condition discriminating means discriminates that the specific condition has been satisfied when a game ball has entered the first ball entry means, The second variable game is based on a determination that a game ball has entered the second ball entry means by the entry ball discrimination means after the specific discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means. Gaming machine B2, characterized in that the gaming machine B2 is started.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B1, a game ball is fired by the firing means in a direction corresponding to the operation of the operating means, and the game ball fired in the first direction by the firing means enters the ball. The first ball entry means is arranged at a possible position. The second ball entry means is arranged at a position where a game ball fired in a second direction different from the first direction can enter the ball. Whether the game ball has entered the second ball entry means is determined by the ball entry determination means. When a game ball enters the first ball entry device, the condition determination device determines that the specific condition is satisfied. After a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination unit, the second variable game is started based on the determination that the game ball has entered the second ball entry unit by the ball entry determination unit.

  Thus, since the ball entry means serving as the start condition differs depending on the type of the variable game, the game ball can be fired in a different direction according to the type of the variable game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to give the player a pleasure of changing the direction in which the game ball is fired.

  In the gaming machine B2, a third ball entry means provided at a position where game balls fired in the second direction can enter, and a first flow path through which game balls fired in the second direction can flow down A variable means capable of holding a first position at which at least one game ball flowing into the first flow path can be held, and a second position at which game balls are less likely to be held than the first position; Switching means for switching the variable means from the first position to the second position based on a specific result of the determination by the determination means, wherein the determination means comprises The second ball entry means is disposed at a position where the game ball passing through the first flow path can enter the ball, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the means. A gaming machine B3, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine B3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B2. That is, the third ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball fired in the second direction can enter. A first position at which at least one game ball that has flowed into the first flow path through which the game ball fired in the second direction can flow, and a second position at which the game ball is less likely to be held than the first position The variable means is changed to the position. The variable means is switched from the first position to the second position by the switching means based on a specific result of the determination by the determination means. A determination is performed by the determination unit based on the fact that the game ball has entered the third ball entry unit. The second ball entry means is arranged at a position where game balls having passed through the first flow path can enter the ball.

  Accordingly, to execute the determination by the determination means, it is necessary to fire the game ball in the second direction, so that the game ball is caused to flow into the first flow path until a specific determination result is obtained. Can be. Therefore, when the second variable game is determined by the type determination means, the game ball held in the first flow path can be immediately made to enter the second ball entry means. Therefore, when the second variable game is determined, there is an effect that the second variable game can be started without the player firing the game ball.

  In the gaming machine B3, the second ball entry means may include a game ball fired in the first direction during a period until a game ball flowing down the first flow path enters the second ball entry means. Is disposed at a position shorter than a period until the ball enters the variable ball-in means.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B3, the period until the game ball flowing down the first flow path enters the second ball entry means is a game ball fired in the first direction. Since the second ball entry means is arranged at a position shorter than the period until the ball enters the variable ball entry means, if the second variable game is determined, the variable game is started immediately. There is an effect that can be.

  In any of the gaming machines B2 to B4, a specific flow path through which a game ball fired in the first direction can flow is provided, and the first state is a game ball flowing down at least a predetermined section in the specific flow path. However, it is a state where it is easier to be guided to the variable ball entry means than passing through the predetermined section, and the second state is that a game ball flowing down the predetermined section is guided to the variable ball entry means. The gaming machine B5 is characterized by being in a state where it is easier to pass through the predetermined section than to go through the predetermined section.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines B2 to B4, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the first state, a game ball flowing down at least a predetermined section of the specific flow path in which the game ball fired in the first direction can flow is guided to the variable ball-in means rather than passing the predetermined section. On the other hand, in the second state, game balls flowing down the predetermined section are more likely to pass through the predetermined section than are guided to the variable milk ball means.

  With this, as the number of the game balls passing through the predetermined section at the time of entering the first ball entry means is increased, more game balls can be guided to the variable entry means. There is an effect that it is possible to provide a game property of launching a game ball in a direction.

  In the gaming machine B5, the variable game execution means is configured to provide a first number of games to the variable ball entry means when at least first the variable ball entry means is changed to the first state in one of the variable games. And controlling the variable ball entry means to be changed to the second position based on the fact that the ball has entered the ball. In the predetermined section, the variable ball entry means is changed to the second position. The gaming machine B6, wherein a second length of the game balls greater than the first number is configured to have a path length that can simultaneously flow in the closed state.

  According to the gaming machine B6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B5. That is, in at least the first state in which the variable ball entry means is changed to the first state in one variable game, based on the fact that the first number of game balls have entered the variable ball entry means, the variable ball entry means Is controlled by the variable game execution means so as to change to the second position. The predetermined section is configured with a path length that allows a second number of game balls, which is larger than the first number, to simultaneously flow down in a state where the variable ball entry means is changed to the second position.

  This allows the operating means to be operated by devising the specific condition to be satisfied after the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section exceeds the first number, thereby allowing the player to enjoy the game. There is an effect that can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B6, the launching means can launch game balls at a time interval equal to or longer than a predetermined interval, and in the predetermined section, game balls are continuously fired at the predetermined interval in the second direction. In this state, the second number of game balls reach the predetermined section after one game ball reaches the predetermined section and before the game ball passes through the predetermined section. A gaming machine B7 characterized by allowing a game ball to pass through as possible.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine B6, the launching means is configured to be able to launch the game balls at a predetermined time interval or more. In a state in which game balls are continuously fired at predetermined intervals in the second direction, a period from when one game ball reaches a predetermined section to when the game ball passes through the predetermined section, The predetermined section is configured such that the game balls pass so that two game balls can reach the predetermined section.

  As a result, there is an effect that a player who wants to increase the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section to a number exceeding the first number can fire game balls continuously at predetermined intervals.

  In any of the gaming machines B5 to B7, a gaming machine B8 is provided with a speed-reducing means for reducing a flowing speed of a gaming ball flowing down the predetermined section.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B5 to B7, the falling speed of the gaming ball flowing down the predetermined section is reduced by the speed reduction means, so that the gaming ball is directed toward the specific flow path. When fired continuously, the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section can be increased. Therefore, when a game ball enters the first ball entry means, the number of game balls guided to the variable ball entry means can be increased.

  Any one of the gaming machines B5 to B8, a display means capable of displaying an effect mode, a number discriminating means for discriminating the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section, and a game ball discriminated by the number discriminating means. A gaming machine B9 comprising: a suggestion effect execution unit that executes a suggestion effect indicating the number of items on the display unit.

  According to the gaming machine B9, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines B5 to B8. That is, the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section is determined by the number determination means, and a suggestion effect indicating the number of game balls determined by the number determination means is executed on the display means by the suggestion effect execution means. .

  Thus, the effect that the player can easily know the number of game balls guided to the variable ball entry means when the game ball enters the first ball entry means by confirming the suggested effect. There is.

  In the gaming machine B9, during the execution of the suggestion effect, it is determined at predetermined intervals whether or not the number of game balls suggested by the suggestion effect is different from the number of game balls determined by the number determination means. The difference discriminating means for discriminating, and the difference discriminating means determines that the number of game balls suggested by the suggested effect is different from the number of game balls discriminated by the number discriminating means. A game machine B10 comprising: a suggestion effect update unit that updates the mode of the suggestion effect based on the number of game balls determined by the number determination unit based on the number of game balls.

  According to the gaming machine B10, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B9. That is, during the execution of the suggestion effect, it is determined by the difference determination device at predetermined intervals whether or not the number of game balls suggested by the suggestion performance is different from the number of game balls determined by the number determination device. You. Based on the difference discriminating means, based on the fact that the number of game balls suggested by the suggested effect and the number of game balls determined by the number discriminating means are different, the mode of the suggested effect is The suggestion effect updating means updates the number of game balls determined by the number determining means to a mode suggesting the number of game balls.

  Thus, the mode of the suggested effect can be updated at predetermined intervals corresponding to the number determined by the number determining means, so that when the ball is entered into the first entering means, it is guided to the variable entering means. This has the effect that the player can more easily know the number of game balls played.

  In the gaming machine B2, a third ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball fired in the second direction can enter the ball, and the determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball being entered, and an effect mode. Display means capable of displaying, the display means, a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect based on the execution of the determination by the determination means, and the specific effect execution by the specific effect execution means As the effect mode, when the specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination unit, and the first variable game is determined by the type determination unit, the first mode is determined, and the determination is performed by the determination unit. If the result of the discrimination is different from the result of the specific discrimination and the discrimination by the discriminating means, the specific discrimination result is obtained, and the second variable game is determined by the type determining means. Gaming machine B11 that if it is, and said the first aspect in which and a demonstration mode determining means capable of determining a different second aspect.

  According to the gaming machine B11, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B2. That is, a third ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball fired in the second direction can enter the ball, the discriminating condition being satisfied based on the game ball having entered. The specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means based on the execution of the determination by the determination means in the display means capable of displaying the effect mode. As an effect mode of the specific effect executed by the specific effect execution means, the first mode is determined by the effect mode determining means when the determination by the determining means results in a specific determination and the first variable game is determined by the type determining means. Is determined. On the other hand, when the discrimination by the discriminator results in a different discrimination result from the specific discrimination result, and when the discrimination by the discriminator results in a specific discrimination and the second variable game is determined by the type determination means. The second aspect different from the first aspect is determined by the rendering mode determining means as the rendering mode of the specific rendering.

  Thereby, when the second variable game is determined, it is possible to make the player feel as if the specific determination result has not been obtained. Therefore, even after the specific effect of the second aspect is executed, the game ball can be continuously fired in the second direction in order to perform the determination by the determination means, so that it is noticed that the specific determination result is obtained. The game ball can be made to enter the second entering means before the game ball is entered. Therefore, since the player can have an impression as if the second variable game was suddenly started, there is an effect that the player can be surprised and delighted.

  In the gaming machine B11, the specific effect of the second mode executed based on the result of the specific determination being determined by the determination means and the second variable game being determined by the type determination means is provided. A pseudo specific effect capable of executing a pseudo specific effect of a mode that is difficult to distinguish from the specific mode of the second mode during a period from the end to a time when a game ball enters the second ball entry means. A gaming machine B12 comprising execution means.

  According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B11, the determination by the determining means results in a specific determination, and the second determination is performed based on the second variable game being determined by the type determining means. During the period from the end of the specific effect of the mode to the time when the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the pseudo specific effect of the mode that is difficult to distinguish from the specific effect of the second mode executes the pseudo specific effect. Since the second variable game is determined by the type determining means, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to be aware of a specific determination result.

  In the gaming machine B12, based on that a game ball has entered the ball entry means, based on the acquisition means for acquiring the discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means, the discrimination information acquired by the acquisition means, Discrimination information storage means capable of storing a predetermined number of information as an upper limit, erasing means for erasing the discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means from the discrimination information storage means, An information count image display means for displaying on the display means an information count image indicating the information count of the discrimination information, and the discrimination by the discrimination means results in the specific discrimination; A period from the end of the specific effect of the second aspect, which is executed based on the determination of the variable game, until a game ball enters the second ball entry means. Oite, the pseudo each time specific effect is executed, the information number of images, a game machine B13 number information is characterized by comprising an image updating means for updating the image corresponding to the number of one less information.

  According to the gaming machine B13, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B12. That is, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry means, the acquisition information to be used for the determination by the determination means is acquired by the acquisition means. The discrimination information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the discrimination information storage means with a predetermined number of information as an upper limit. The discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means is deleted from the discrimination information storage means by the deletion means. An information number image indicating the number of pieces of discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means is displayed on the display means by the information number image display means. After the specific effect is obtained by the determination by the determination means and the specific effect of the second aspect executed based on the determination of the second variable game by the type determination means is completed, the flow proceeds to the second ball entry means. Each time the pseudo specific effect is executed during the period until the game ball enters the game, the information count image is updated by the image update means to an image corresponding to the information count of which the information count is one less.

  This allows the image updating means to update the information count image, thereby making the player feel as if the number of pieces of discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means is decreasing. Therefore, when the second variable game is determined by the type determining means, the player who wishes to execute the determination by the determining means without interruption is kept in the second state even after a specific determination result is obtained. There is an effect that firing can be continued in the direction.

<Feature C>
A specific area in which a game ball can enter, a privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering the specific area, a specific flow path in which the game ball can flow, The first position where the game ball flowing down at least the predetermined section of the flow path is more easily guided to the specific area than passing the predetermined section, and passes through the predetermined section than is guided to the specific area. A variable means that can be changed to a second position that facilitates the determination, a determination means that performs a determination based on satisfaction of a determination condition, and the variable means based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means. Is a variable game executing means for executing a variable game that is variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time, and when the specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determining means, the variable means Possible to first position Gaming machine C1, characterized in that it comprises a specific effect execution unit capable of executing the specific effect before being.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, a symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a winning game advantageous to the player is given. In addition, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed on the display device in addition to the design, and a variety of entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, JP-A-2003-325886). Gazette).

  Also, among the conventional gaming machines, an effect displayed on the display device is capable of executing an effect indicating a degree of expectation as to whether or not an advantageous hit game is given to the player thereafter. Some are being done.

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not it is advantageous to the player when the effect indicating the degree of expectation is started, so that the content of the effect itself is the degree of the player's advantage. Does not affect Therefore, there is a problem in that it is difficult for the player to play the game while paying attention to the display device.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, a predetermined privilege is provided by the privilege provision means based on the fact that the game ball has entered a specific area where the game ball can enter. A first position at which game balls flowing down at least a predetermined section of the specific flow path in which the game balls can flow are more easily guided to a specific area than passing through the predetermined section; and a predetermined section than being guided to the specific area. The variable means is changed to a second position at which the vehicle easily passes through. The determination is performed by the determination unit based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, and the variable unit is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination unit. The variable game is executed by the variable game execution means. When a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination unit, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution unit before the variable unit is changed to the first position.

  Thus, by confirming whether or not the specific effect has been executed, it is possible to determine whether or not the position is changed to the first position.

  In the gaming machine C1, the specific effect execution means includes, as the specific effect, an effect indicating a firing timing at which the variable means may be changed to the first position while the game ball passes through the predetermined section. A gaming machine C2 characterized by executing the following.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C1, as a specific effect, an effect suggesting a firing timing at which the variable means may be changed to the first position while the game ball is passing through the predetermined section. Is executed by the specific effect execution means, so that it is possible to pay more attention to the specific effect.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the predetermined period is a period from when a game ball is fired in a direction in which the specific flow path is arranged to when the fired game ball reaches the specific flow path. A gaming machine C3 characterized by being shorter than the period.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1 or C2, a predetermined period of time after the game ball is fired in the direction in which the specific flow path is arranged, the emitted game ball is placed in the specific flow path. Since it is configured to be shorter than the period until the game reaches, it is possible to make it difficult to obtain a predetermined privilege unless the game ball is fired when the specific effect is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play a game while paying attention to whether or not the specific effect is executed.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, based on a result of the determination by the determination means being a second determination result different from the specific determination result, the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position. A second variable game execution means for executing a second variable game that is changed a specific number of times, and a period during which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position in the second variable game, A gaming machine C4, which is likely to be longer than the predetermined period.

  According to the gaming machine C4, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C1 to C3. That is, the second variable game in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position by a specific number of times based on the second determination result different from the specific determination result being determined by the determination means is the second variable game. It is executed by two variable game execution means. The period during which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position in the second variable game is configured to be longer than a predetermined period.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the game can be performed in expectation of the second variable game being executed.

  In the gaming machine C4, dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of identification information indicating a result of the determination by the determination means, and dynamic display execution of the identification information by the dynamic display execution means as a type of the variable game. A first variable game in which the period from the completion of the dynamic display to the change of the variable means to the first position is set to the first period, and the variable game after the dynamic display of the identification information is completed. A second variable game in which a period until the means is changed to the first position is set to a second period shorter than the first period, and at least one type of variable game is determined. Type determination means, and the suggestion effect execution means is provided after the dynamic display of the identification information is completed by the dynamic display execution means and before the variable means is changed to the first position. To perform the suggestion effect Game machine C5 characterized by Rukoto.

  According to the gaming machine C5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C4. That is, the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination means is executed by the dynamic display execution means. A first variable game in which the period from the end of the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display execution unit to the time when the variable unit is changed to the first position is set as a first period, A second variable game in which a period from the end of the dynamic display of the identification information until the variable means is changed to the first position is set to a second period shorter than the first period. Is determined by the type determining means. The suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution unit after the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display execution unit is completed and before the variable unit is changed to the first position.

  In this way, the one in which the first variable game is determined allows more game balls to reach the predetermined section than the second variable game, so that the game is expected with the expectation that the first variable game is determined. There is an effect that it can be performed.

  In the gaming machine C5, the first period is a period from when a game ball is fired in the direction in which the specific flow path is arranged to when the fired game ball reaches the specific flow path. The second period is a period from when the game ball is fired in the direction in which the specific flow path is arranged, to when the fired game ball reaches the specific flow path. A gaming machine C6, wherein the period is shorter than the period.

  According to the gaming machine C6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C5. That is, after the game ball is fired in the direction in which the specific flow path is arranged, the first period is constituted by a period longer than the period until the fired game ball reaches the specific flow path. Have been. On the other hand, the second period is constituted by a period shorter than the period from when the game ball is fired in the direction in which the specific flow path is arranged to when the fired game ball reaches the specific flow path. Have been.

  This makes it difficult to cause the game ball to reach the specific flow path when the second variable game is established, so that it is possible to more strongly expect that the first variable game is determined. There is.

  In the gaming machine C1, dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of identification information indicating a result of the determination by the determination means, and performing the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result. A first type determination that determines one specific effect from among a plurality of types including at least a first effect and a second effect different from the first effect as the type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means. Means for executing the specific effect during the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information based on the result of the discrimination determined by the determination means being different from the specific determination result. Means, and a second type for determining one specific effect from among a plurality of types including at least the first effect and the second effect as the type of the specific effect executed by the second specific effect executing means. Decision And wherein the first effect is such that the ratio determined by the first type determining means is higher than the ratio determined by the second type determining means, and the second effect is The gaming machine C7, wherein the ratio determined by the first type determining unit is lower than the ratio determined by the second type determining unit.

  According to the gaming machine C7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C1. That is, the dynamic display execution means executes dynamic display of the identification information indicating the result of the judgment by the judgment means. The type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means during the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result includes at least a first effect and a second effect different from the first effect. One specific effect from the plurality is determined by the first type determining means. The specific effect is executed by the second specific effect executing means during the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information, based on the determination result different from the specific judgment result by the judgment means. As the type of the specific effect executed by the second specific effect executing means, one specific effect is determined by the second type determining means from among a plurality of types including at least the first effect and the second effect. The first effect is configured such that the ratio determined by the first type determining unit is higher than the ratio determined by the second type determining unit. On the other hand, the second effect is configured such that the ratio determined by the second type determining unit is higher than the ratio determined by the second type determining unit.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the degree of expectation that the variable game is executed can be changed according to the content of the specific effect.

  In the gaming machine C7, during the period from when the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result ends to when the variable means is changed to the first position, the specific flow path is arranged. Is shorter than the period from when the game ball is fired in the direction in which the game ball is fired reaches the specific flow path, and in the predetermined period, the specific flow path is A gaming machine C8, wherein a period of time from when the game ball is fired in the direction in which the game ball is arranged to when the fired game ball reaches the specific flow path is shorter.

  According to the gaming machine C8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C7. That is, during the period from the end of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result to the time when the variable means is changed to the first position, the game ball is moved in the direction in which the specific flow path is arranged. It is configured to be shorter than the period from when the game ball is fired to when the game ball reaches the specific channel. The predetermined period is configured to be shorter than a period from when a game ball is fired in the direction in which the specific flow path is arranged to when the fired game ball reaches the specific flow path. I have.

  Thereby, the game ball cannot reach the predetermined section unless the game ball is fired toward the specific channel during the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information, so that a specific determination result is obtained from the content of the specific effect. This has the effect of making it possible to more seriously predict whether or not this is the case.

  In the gaming machine C7 or C8, the first type determining means is configured to be able to determine a third effect different from the first effect and the second effect at a predetermined ratio, and The gaming machine C9, wherein the determining means is configured to be unable to determine the third effect.

  According to the gaming machine C9, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C7 or C8. That is, a third effect different from both the first effect and the second effect is determined by the first type determining means at a predetermined ratio. The second type determining means is configured to be unable to determine the third effect.

  With this, when the third effect is executed, it is determined that the specific determination result has been obtained at that time, so that there is an effect that the player can be pleased.

<Characteristic D group> (variable the length of the closing period during the jackpot to vary the likelihood of over-winning)
A specific area in which a game ball can enter, a privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering the specific area, a specific flow path in which the game ball can flow, The first position where the game ball flowing down at least the predetermined section of the flow path is more easily guided to the specific area than passing the predetermined section, and passes through the predetermined section than is guided to the specific area. A variable means that can be changed to a second position that facilitates the determination, a determination means that performs a determination based on satisfaction of a determination condition, and the variable means based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination means. A variable game execution means for executing a variable game that is changed from the second position to the first position by a predetermined number of times; a first control; a variable means for controlling the variable means during execution of the variable game; Is the first And a second control in which the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section at the timing changed to the second control is more likely to be larger than the first control. And a determining means.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a hit state when a result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball to a starting winning opening is a hit. Some of such gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types in which the number of open times (number of rounds) of a large open opening to which a prize ball is awarded when a game ball is won is different, and a game that can be obtained. There is a method of increasing the value of interest by making the value different (for example, Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

  Also, in such conventional gaming machines, even if the number of rounds is the same, by changing the opening pattern of the large opening in each round, the number of game balls that can be won in each round is changed, Some have different degrees of advantage.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the number of prize balls that can be acquired is almost constant for each hit type, so that it is like an operation for obtaining a game value according to the hit type, and during the hit state, In some cases, the game became monotonous. That is, there is a problem that it is difficult to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, a predetermined privilege is provided by the privilege providing means based on the fact that the game ball has entered a specific area where the game ball can enter. A first position at which game balls flowing down at least a predetermined section of the specific flow path through which the game balls can flow are more easily guided to the specific flow path than passing through the predetermined section; The variable means is changed to the second position where the vehicle easily passes through the section. The determination is performed by the determination unit based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, and the variable unit is changed from the second position to the first position by a predetermined number of times based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination unit. The variable game is executed by the variable game execution means. As a control method of the variable means during execution of the variable game, a first control and a second control in which the number of game balls passing through a predetermined section at a timing when the variable means is changed to the first position are more likely to be larger than the first control. The control method determining means determines one control method from among a plurality of control methods including at least the following.

  Accordingly, when a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination unit, the game can be performed in expectation that the variable unit will be controlled by the second control. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine D1, the second control is performed when at least one of a plurality of periods during which the variable means is changed to the second position in one of the variable games is controlled by the first control. A gaming machine D2 characterized in that it is controlled to be longer.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1, the second control is that at least one of a plurality of periods in which the variable means is changed to the second position in one variable game is the first position. Since the second control is configured to be longer than the case where the control is performed by the control, the second control can make the game balls reach the predetermined section more. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed with a stronger expectation that the variable means is controlled by the second control.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, there is provided dynamic display executing means for executing dynamic display of identification information indicating a result of the discrimination by the discriminating means, wherein the first control is performed by the identification information indicating the specific discrimination result. Is controlled so that the period from the end of the dynamic display to the time when the variable means is changed to the first position is the first period, and the second control is the specific determination. And controlling the period from the end of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the result until the variable unit is changed to the first position to be a second period longer than the first period. A gaming machine D3, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the dynamic display execution means executes dynamic display of the identification information indicating the result of the judgment by the judgment means. In the first control, the period from when the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result ends to when the variable means is changed to the first position is controlled to be the first period. In the second control, the period from when the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result ends to when the variable unit is changed to the first position is a second period longer than the first period. Is controlled.

  Thereby, when the game balls continue to be fired toward the specific flow path after the dynamic display of the identification information ends, the second control can cause more game balls to reach the predetermined section. Therefore, there is an effect that more game balls can enter the specific area when the variable means is changed to the first position.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, based on the fact that at least a first number of game balls have entered the specific area while the variable means is being changed to the first position, the variable means Has variable control means for controlling the variable section to be changed to the second position, and the predetermined section has a second number larger than the first number in a state where the variable section is changed to the second position. A gaming machine D4 characterized in that the gaming balls are configured to have a path length that can simultaneously flow down.

  According to the gaming machine D4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3. That is, while the variable means is being changed to the first position, the variable means is changed to the second position by the variable control means based on the fact that at least the first number of game balls have entered the specific area. Is controlled as follows. The predetermined section is configured with a path length that allows at least a second number of game balls greater than the first number to flow simultaneously in a state where the variable means is changed to the second position.

  Thereby, it is possible to cause a player to play a game in expectation that the variable means is changed to the first position after the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section exceeds the first number. is there.

  The gaming machine D4 includes operating means operable by a player, and launching means capable of firing game balls into the game area at a time interval equal to or longer than a predetermined interval at a firing speed according to the operation content of the operating means. In the state where the game balls are continuously fired at the predetermined interval in the second direction in the predetermined section, after one game ball reaches the predetermined section, the game ball is The gaming machine D5, wherein the game balls D5 pass the game balls so that the second number of game balls can reach the predetermined section before passing through the predetermined section.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D4, the launching means sends the game balls to the game area at a time interval equal to or longer than a predetermined interval at a firing speed according to the operation content of the operating means operable by the player. Fired by The predetermined section is a state in which game balls are continuously fired at predetermined intervals in the second direction, from when one game ball reaches the predetermined section until the game ball passes through the predetermined section. During the period, the game balls are passed so that the second number of the game balls can reach the predetermined section.

  As a result, there is an effect that a player who wants to increase the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section to a number exceeding the first number can fire game balls continuously at predetermined intervals.

  In the gaming machine D5, the second control is such that at least one of a plurality of periods in which the variable means is changed to the second position in one of the variable games is fired by the firing means. And controlling the at least the first number or more of the game balls to be in a period that allows the game ball to reach the predetermined section. The gaming machine D6, wherein the length of time is such that it is difficult to make the number of game balls fired to reach the predetermined section equal to or more than the first number.

  According to the gaming machine D6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D5. That is, in the second control, at least one specific period, which is at least one of the plurality of periods in which the variable means is changed to the second position in one variable game, has at least a first number or more fired by the firing means. The length is controlled so that the game ball can reach the predetermined section. In the first control, the specific period is controlled such that it is difficult for the game balls fired by the firing means to reach the predetermined section in the first number or more.

  Thereby, when the variable means is controlled by the second control, there is an effect that the first number or more game balls can enter the specific area by continuously firing the game balls during the specific period. .

  A gaming machine D7 comprising a speed reducing means for reducing the velocity of a gaming ball flowing down the predetermined section in any one of the gaming machines D1 to D6.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machines D1 to D6, the speed of the game balls flowing down the predetermined section is reduced by the speed reduction means, so that the game balls are continuously directed toward the specific flow path. When fired, the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section can be increased. Therefore, there is an effect that more game balls can be guided to the specific area when the variable means is changed to the first position.

  In the gaming machine D7, the deceleration means is constituted by a serpentine flow path.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine D7, since the deceleration means is formed by the serpentine flow path, the direction in which the gaming ball flows down in a predetermined section can be changed a plurality of times. Therefore, there is an effect that the speed of the game ball can be more reliably reduced.

  In the gaming machine D7, the deceleration means makes the dynamic frictional force between the gaming ball and the predetermined section higher than other portions in the specific flow path.

  According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D7, the dynamic friction force between the gaming ball and the predetermined section is made higher than the other portion in the specific flow path by the speed reduction means, so that the game ball flows down in the predetermined section. There is an effect that the speed can be more reliably reduced.

<Feature E group> (Direction indicating the degree of advantage when the jackpot is started)
Display means capable of displaying an effect mode, determination means for performing a determination based on the satisfaction of a determination condition, and, based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied after a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination means. A bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player; and a case where the execution of the bonus game is started for a predetermined period from when the specific determination result is obtained until the specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine E1 comprising: a suggestion effect execution unit that executes a suggestion effect indicating a degree of advantage to a player on the display unit.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, a symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a winning game advantageous to the player is given. In addition, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed on the display device in addition to the design, and a variety of entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, JP-A-2003-325886). Gazette).

  Also, among the conventional gaming machines, an effect displayed on the display device is capable of executing an effect indicating a degree of expectation as to whether or not an advantageous hit game is given to the player thereafter. Some are being done.

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not it is advantageous to the player when the effect indicating the degree of expectation is started, so that the content of the effect itself is the degree of the player's advantage. Does not affect Therefore, there is a problem in that it is difficult for the player to play the game while paying attention to the display device.

  According to the gaming machine E1, the effect mode is displayed on the display means. The determination is performed by the determination means based on the satisfaction of the determination condition. After a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination unit, a bonus game advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution unit based on the satisfaction of the specific condition. In a predetermined period from when a specific determination result is obtained to when a specific condition is satisfied, a suggestion effect that suggests to the player the degree of advantage when the execution of the bonus game is started is displayed by the suggestion effect execution means. Executed in

  Thereby, there is an effect that the game can be performed while paying attention to the suggested effect.

  In the gaming machine E1, an operating means operable by the player, a firing means capable of firing a game ball at a firing speed according to the operation content of the operating means, and a game ball fired by the firing means can enter. Game machine E2, wherein the specific condition is satisfied when a game ball enters the ball entry means.

  According to the gaming machine E2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E1. That is, a game ball is fired by the firing means at a firing speed corresponding to the operation content of the operation means that can be operated by the player. The specific condition is satisfied when the game ball enters the ball entry device into which the game ball launched by the launch device can enter.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the timing of firing the game ball can be adjusted according to the content suggested by the suggested effect.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, a specific area in which a game ball can enter, a privilege providing means for giving a predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering the specific area, and a game ball capable of flowing down A specific flow path, a first position at which a game ball flowing down at least a predetermined section in the specific flow path is more easily guided to the specific area than passing through the predetermined section, Variable means that can also be changed to a second position that makes it easier to pass through the predetermined section. The privilege game execution means sets the variable means to the second position based on the satisfaction of the specific condition. A game machine E3 characterized in that the predetermined position is varied from the predetermined position to the first position.

  According to the gaming machine E3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1 or E2. That is, based on the fact that the game ball has entered a specific area where the game ball can enter, a predetermined benefit is provided by the benefit providing means. A first position at which game balls flowing down at least a predetermined section of the specific flow path through which the game balls can flow are more easily guided to the specific flow path than passing through the predetermined section; The variable means is changed to the second position where the vehicle easily passes through the section. The variable means is changed from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times by the privilege game execution means based on the satisfaction of the specific condition.

  As a result, there is an effect that the game can be played while paying attention to the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section at the timing when the specific condition is satisfied.

  In the gaming machine E3, during the execution of the privilege game, the variable means is changed to the first position, and then based on the fact that a first number of game balls have entered the specific area, A variable control unit that controls the variable position to change from the first position to the second position, wherein the predetermined section is larger than the first number in a state where the variable unit is changed to the second position. A gaming machine E4 characterized in that the second number of gaming balls has a path length that can simultaneously flow down.

  According to the gaming machine E4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E3. That is, during execution of the bonus game, the variable means is changed from the first position to the second position based on the fact that the variable means has been changed to the first position and the first number of game balls have entered the specific area. And is controlled by the variable control means. The predetermined section is configured with a path length that allows a second number of game balls larger than the first number to flow down in a state where the variable means is changed to the second position.

  This makes it possible to expect that the specific condition is satisfied after the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section exceeds the first number, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved. This has the effect.

  The gaming machine E4, comprising: operating means operable by a player; and firing means capable of firing game balls at a predetermined time interval or more at a firing speed according to the operation content of the operating means, wherein the predetermined section In a state where the game balls are continuously fired at the predetermined interval toward the specific flow path, after one game ball reaches the predetermined section, the game ball A gaming machine E5 wherein the game balls are passed so that the second number of the game balls can reach the predetermined section before passing.

  According to the gaming machine E5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E4. That is, a game ball is fired at a time interval equal to or longer than a predetermined interval by the firing means at a firing speed corresponding to the operation content of the operation means operable by the player. The predetermined section is a state in which game balls are continuously fired at predetermined intervals toward a specific flow path, and after one game ball reaches the predetermined section, the game ball passes through the predetermined section. In the meantime, the game balls are caused to flow down so that the second number of game balls can reach the predetermined section.

  As a result, there is an effect that a player who wants to increase the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section to a number exceeding the first number can fire game balls continuously at predetermined intervals.

  In any of the gaming machines E3 to E5, the game machine further includes a number discriminating means for discriminating the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section, and the suggestion effect executing means determines the number of game balls discriminated by the number discriminating means. A gaming machine E6 that performs a suggested effect as the suggested effect.

  According to the gaming machine E6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines E3 to E5. That is, the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section is determined by the number determining means. An effect indicating the number of game balls determined by the number determination means is executed as a suggestion effect by the suggestion effect execution means.

  This allows the player to easily understand the number of game balls guided to the specific area when the specific condition is satisfied, depending on the content of the suggestion effect, so that while the larger number is suggested, There is an effect that a game can be played with expectation that the condition is satisfied.

  In the gaming machine E6, during the execution of the suggestion effect, at predetermined time intervals, an effect mode updating means for updating the effect mode of the suggestion effect according to the number of game balls determined by the number determination means, and the effect When updating the production mode of the suggested effect by the mode updating means, it is determined whether the number of game balls suggested by the suggested effect matches the number of game balls determined by the number determining means. Coincidence determination means for each period, and the number of game balls suggested by the suggestion effect is determined by the coincidence determination means to be equal to the number of game balls determined by the number determination means. A gaming machine E7 comprising: update avoidance means for avoiding updating of the effect mode by the effect mode updating means when the effect mode is updated.

  According to the gaming machine E7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E6. In other words, during the execution of the suggestion effect, the effect mode of the suggestion effect is updated by the effect mode updating means in accordance with the number of game balls determined by the number determination means at predetermined time intervals. When the effect mode of the suggested effect is updated by the effect mode updating means, it is determined whether the number of game balls suggested by the suggestion effect matches the number of game balls determined by the number determining means. The determination is made at predetermined intervals by the means. When the coincidence determination means determines that the number of game balls suggested by the suggestion effect matches the number of game balls determined by the number determination means, the effect update mode is updated by the effect update means. Is avoided by the update avoiding means.

  This can reduce the frequency at which the presentation mode is updated, so that the processing load required for updating the presentation mode can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine E6 or E7, in the predetermined section, a plurality of passage detection units capable of detecting the passage of a game ball are arranged at a plurality of locations, and the number discrimination unit includes the plurality of passage detection units. A game machine E8 characterized in that, among the above, the number of the passage detecting means for detecting the passage of the game ball is determined as the number of the game balls passing through the predetermined section.

  According to the gaming machine E8, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine E6 or E7. That is, a plurality of passage detection means capable of detecting the passage of the game ball are arranged at a plurality of locations in a predetermined section. The number of the passage detecting means detecting the passage of the game ball among the plurality of passage detecting means is determined by the number determining means as the number of the game balls passing through the predetermined section.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section can be accurately determined.

<Feature F>
Ball entry means arranged at a position where a game ball fired in the first direction can enter the ball, discrimination means for executing a discrimination based on that the game ball has entered the ball entry means, and the discrimination Advantageous state setting means for setting an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player when a game ball is fired in a second direction different from the first direction based on a specific determination result obtained by the means. Display means capable of displaying identification information; dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of the identification information indicating a result of the judgment by the judgment means on the display means; A specific effect capable of executing a specific effect indicating a degree of expectation as to whether or not an advantageous game state occurs when a game ball is fired in the second direction while the dynamic display of information is being performed. Execution means. Game machine F1.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, a symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a winning game advantageous to the player is given. In addition, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed on the display device in addition to the design, and a variety of entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, JP-A-2003-325886). Gazette).

  Also, among the conventional gaming machines, an effect displayed on the display device is capable of executing an effect indicating a degree of expectation as to whether or not an advantageous hit game is given to the player thereafter. Some are being done.

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not it is advantageous to the player when the effect indicating the degree of expectation is started, so that the content of the effect itself is the degree of the player's advantage. Does not affect Therefore, there is a problem in that it is difficult for the player to play the game while paying attention to the display device.

  According to the gaming machine F1, discrimination is executed by the discriminating means based on the fact that the game ball has been launched into the ball entry means arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction can enter the ball. . Based on the specific determination result obtained by the determination unit, when the game ball is fired in the second direction different from the first direction, the advantageous state that is advantageous to the player is determined by the advantageous state setting unit. Is set. The dynamic display of the identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination means is executed by the display means by the dynamic display execution means. While the dynamic display execution means is performing the dynamic display of the identification information, a specific effect indicating the degree of expectation as to whether or not an advantageous game state occurs when the game ball is fired in the second direction. Is executed by the specific effect execution means.

  This allows the player to determine whether it is better to fire the game ball in the second direction based on the suggestion content of the specific effect, so that the player can play the game by paying attention to the specific effect. There is.

  In the gaming machine F1, the advantageous state is such that, in a specific period during the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result, the firing of the gaming ball in the second direction is started, After the dynamic display of the identification information indicating a specific determination result is completed, it is easier for the player to start firing the game ball in the second direction than before, and the specific effect execution means includes: When performing the specific effect during execution of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result, the specific effect is to be performed in an effect period including at least a part of the specific period. A gaming machine F2 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine F2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F1. In other words, in the advantageous state, it is better to start firing game balls in the second direction during a specific period during execution of dynamic display of identification information indicating a specific determination result. It becomes more advantageous to the player than to start firing game balls in the second direction after the dynamic display of information ends. When the specific effect is executed during the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution unit during an effect period including at least a part of the specific period.

  This allows the player to determine whether or not to start firing game balls in the second direction during the effect period of the specific effect from the suggestion contents of the specific effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed with more attention given to the suggestion contents of the specific effect.

  In the gaming machine F2, the advantageous state is characterized in that, in the specific period, it is easier for the player to start firing the game ball in the second direction earlier, which becomes more advantageous for the player. Gaming machine F3.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine F2, in the advantageous state, it is easier for the player to start firing the game ball in the second direction earlier during the specific period. Therefore, when the specific effect is executed, it is possible to remind the player to determine whether to fire the game ball in the second direction as soon as possible. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can make the player feel more nervous during the execution of the specific effect.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect execution means is determined when the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result is executed. A first specific effect in which the ratio is higher, and a second specific effect in which the ratio determined when dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result is being performed is lower than the first specific effect. A game machine F4 comprising: an effect type determining unit that determines one type from among a plurality of types including at least one.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, when the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result is executed as the type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means. A first specific effect in which the determined ratio is higher, and a second specific effect in which the ratio determined when dynamic display of identification information indicating a specific determination result is being executed is lower than the first specific effect. Is determined by the effect type determining means from among a plurality of types including at least, and it is determined from the effect type of the specific effect whether or not the identification information is a dynamic display of identification information indicating a specific determination result. The player can be guessed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game by paying attention to the type of the specific effect.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, a special area in which a game ball can enter, a privilege providing means for giving a predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering the specific area, A specific flow path provided at a position into which a game ball fired in the direction can flow, and a game ball flowing down at least a predetermined section of the specific flow path is located in the specific area rather than passing through the predetermined section. A variable portion that can be changed to a first position where the vehicle is easily guided and a second position where the vehicle easily passes through the predetermined section than the vehicle is guided to the specific area, wherein the advantageous state setting device includes the advantageous state setting device. As a state, the control unit performs one or more times of performing control to change the variable unit from the second position to the first position until a specific condition is satisfied. Game ball in the second direction It is more preferable to start firing than to start firing game balls in the second direction after the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result is completed, before the specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine F5 wherein the number of gaming balls guided to the specific area is likely to increase.

  According to the gaming machine F5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines F1 to F4. That is, based on the fact that the game ball has entered a specific area where the game ball can enter, a predetermined benefit is provided by the benefit providing means. A first configuration in which game balls flowing down at least a predetermined section of a specific flow path provided at a position into which game balls fired in the second direction can flow are more easily guided to a specific area than passing through the predetermined section. The variable means is changed to a position and a second position at which the vehicle easily passes through a predetermined section rather than being guided to a specific area. As the advantageous state, control for varying the variable means from the second position to the first position until a specific condition is satisfied is executed one or more times by the advantageous state setting means. In the advantageous state, it is better to start launching the game ball in the second direction during the specific period, and then launch the game ball in the second direction after the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result ends. , The number of game balls guided to the specific area before the specific condition is satisfied is likely to increase.

  This allows a player who wants to obtain more predetermined benefits to more seriously determine whether or not to start firing game balls in the second direction based on the suggestion of the specific effect. effective.

  In the gaming machine F5, the specific condition is satisfied when the number of gaming balls entering the specific area after the variable means is changed to the first position becomes the first number, The predetermined section is configured to have a path length at which a second number of game balls larger than the first number can flow at least simultaneously in a state where the variable means is changed to the second position. A gaming machine F6 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine F6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F5. That is, the specific condition is satisfied when the number of game balls entering the specific area after the variable means is changed to the first position reaches the first number. The predetermined section is configured with a path length that allows a second number of game balls greater than the second number to flow at least simultaneously in a state where the variable means is changed to the second position.

  Thereby, it is possible to cause a player to play a game while expecting the predetermined section to be changed to the first position in a state where the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section exceeds the first number. There is.

  In the gaming machine F6, a launching means capable of launching a game ball at a time interval equal to or longer than a predetermined interval is provided. , So that the second number of game balls can reach the predetermined section after one game ball reaches the predetermined section and before the game ball passes through the predetermined section. A gaming machine F7 characterized by passing game balls.

  According to the gaming machine F7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F6. That is, game balls are fired by the firing means at time intervals longer than a predetermined interval. The predetermined section is a game in which a second number of game balls can reach the predetermined section after one game ball reaches the predetermined section and before the game ball passes through the predetermined section. The sphere is configured to pass.

  This allows the player, who has determined that the identification information is a dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result from the suggestion content of the specific effect, to launch the game ball in the second direction at a predetermined interval that is the shortest interval. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine F7, the specific period is configured to have a length that allows at least the second number of game balls to be fired when the game balls are continuously fired at the predetermined interval in the second direction. A gaming machine F8, characterized in that it is a game machine F8.

  According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F7, at least a second number of gaming balls can be fired when the game balls are continuously fired at predetermined intervals in the second direction in the second period. Because it is configured with a period of an appropriate length, by firing game balls in the second direction during a specific period, there is a possibility that the second number of game balls can reach a predetermined section. Thus, it is possible to more seriously determine whether or not to fire the game ball in the second direction.

  In the gaming machine F7 or F8, as the advantageous state set by the advantageous state setting means, a first advantageous state, and after the state shifts from the first advantageous state to the advantageous state, the variable means moves to the second position. A gaming machine F9 comprising state determining means for determining one state from among a plurality of states including at least a second advantageous state having a long period until being changed.

  According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F7 or F8, the first advantageous state is set as the advantageous state set by the advantageous state setting means, and the state is shifted to the more advantageous state than the first advantageous state. One state is determined by the state determination means from among a plurality of states including at least a second advantageous state in which a period until the variable means is changed to the second position is long.

  Thus, in the second advantageous state, the number of game balls that can be fired before the variable means is changed to the second position increases, so that more game balls are easily guided to the specific area. Therefore, there is an effect that a game can be played in expectation of the second advantageous state being determined.

  In the gaming machine F9, the first advantageous state is continuous at the predetermined interval in the second direction as a period from a transition to the advantageous state to a time when the variable means is changed to the second position. A gaming machine F10 characterized in that when a game ball is fired, a period of time is set in which the number of game balls exceeding the first number cannot be fired.

  According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F9, in the first advantageous state, the period from the transition to the advantageous state to the time when the variable means is changed to the second position, in the twenty-third direction. When the game balls are successively fired with a predetermined sense, a period of time in which the number of game balls exceeding the first number cannot be fired is set, so that the first advantageous state is determined. In this case, there is an effect that a player who wants to obtain more predetermined benefits can fire a game ball in the second direction during a specific period.

<Feature G Group> (Let the player select a jackpot that can aim for over-winning and a jackpot that cannot aim for over-winning)
A first area through which a game ball can pass, a second area different from the first area, first detection means capable of detecting the passage of a game ball to the first area, and a game to the second area A second detecting means capable of detecting the passage of a ball, a determining means for performing a determination based on the satisfaction of a determining condition, and a first determining means after a specific determination result is obtained by the determining means; Or a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the second detection means. A predetermined privilege is provided based on a first specific area, a second specific area different from the first specific area, and a game ball entering the first specific area or the second specific area. Privilege granting means, a specific flow path through which the game ball can flow, and the specific flow The first position where the game ball flowing down at least the predetermined section in the first specific area is more likely to be guided to the first specific area than passing the predetermined section, and the predetermined area than the first specific area is guided to the first specific area. A first variable means that can be changed to a second position at which the game ball can easily pass, a third position at which the game ball can enter the second specific area, and the entry of the game ball more than the third position. A second variable means that can be changed to a fourth position that becomes difficult, and a type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, after the specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination means, When the passing of the game ball is detected by the first detecting means, the first variable means determines a first privilege game to be changed from the second position to the first position by a predetermined number of times, and When the passage of the game ball is detected by the detection means The game machine and the second varying means is characterized by comprising: a type determination means for determining a second award game that is a predetermined number of times the variable to the third position from the fourth position G1.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a hit state when a result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball to a starting winning opening is a hit. Some of such gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types in which the number of open times (number of rounds) of a large open opening to which a prize ball is awarded when a game ball is won is different, and a game that can be obtained. There is a method of increasing the value of interest by making the value different (for example, Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

  In addition, in such conventional gaming machines, a winning state is not started only when a lottery result is won, and when one of a plurality of operating winning holes provided on the gaming board is won, the winning state is changed. Some are getting started. In this conventional gaming machine, different types of hit games are started in accordance with the type of the winning opening that a player has won.

  However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, when the hit type is determined, the amount of game value obtained during the hit is a substantially constant amount according to the hit type. In some cases, the game during the hit state becomes monotonous. That is, there is a problem that it is difficult to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, a first specific area in which a game ball can enter and a second specific area different from the first specific area are provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first specific area or the second specific area, a predetermined privilege is provided by the privilege providing means. The first position where the game ball flowing down at least the predetermined section in the specific flow path in which the game ball can flow is more easily guided to the first specific area than passing through the predetermined section, is guided to the first specific area. The first variable means is configured to be variable at a second position at which the vehicle easily passes through a predetermined section. The second variable means is configured to be variable between a third position at which a game ball can enter the second specific area and a fourth position at which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the third position. ing. As a type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, after the specific detection result is obtained by the determination by the determination means, when the passing of the game ball is detected by the first detection means, the first variable means is turned on. The first privilege game that is changed from the second position to the first position by a predetermined number of times is determined by the type determining means. On the other hand, when the passing of the game ball is detected by the second detection means, the second privilege game in which the second variable means is changed a predetermined number of times from the fourth position to the third position is determined by the type determination means. You.

  Thereby, the type of the privilege game can be made different depending on whether the game ball passes through the first area or the game ball passes through the second area, so that the area where the game ball passes can be noticed. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine G1, there are provided passing means through which a game ball can pass, and sorting means capable of sorting a game ball passing through the passing means to one of the first area and the second area. A gaming machine G2.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G1, the game ball that has passed through the passing means through which the game ball can pass is sorted by the sorting means into either the first area or the second area. Therefore, the type of the bonus game is changed according to the area allocated by the distribution means. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played while paying attention to the area to be sorted.

  In the gaming machine G2, the state of the distributing means is changed to the first area between at least a specific result of the discrimination by the discriminating means and before the execution of the bonus game is started. A gaming machine G3 comprising: a distribution state switching unit that switches at a predetermined cycle between a first distribution state in which game balls are distributed and a second distribution state in which game balls are distributed to the second area.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G2, the state of the sorting means is changed at least between the time when a specific determination result is obtained by the determination means and the execution of the bonus game is started. The state switching means switches between the first distribution state in which the game balls are distributed to the first area and the second distribution state in which the game balls are distributed to the second area at a predetermined cycle. By confirming the distribution state of the game and passing through the passage means, there is an effect that the type of the privilege game desired by the player can be determined.

  In the gaming machine G3, the game machine G3 is provided with display means capable of displaying an effect mode, and effect execution means for executing, on the display means, a distribution state suggestion effect indicating the distribution state of the distribution means. Gaming machine G4.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G3, a distribution state suggestion effect indicating the distribution state of the distribution unit is executed by the effect execution unit on the display unit. Only with this, there is an effect that the timing at which the player's favorite privilege game is determined can be easily recognized.

  In the gaming machine G4, the effect execution means performs a first distribution state suggestion effect indicating the first distribution state based on the switching to the first distribution state by the distribution state switching means. A first suggestion effect execution means for executing, and a second distribution state suggestion effect for suggesting the second distribution state based on being switched to the second distribution state by the distribution state switching means. Wherein the gaming machine further comprises: advantage determination means for determining a degree of advantage when the game ball passes through the first area, wherein the first suggestion effect execution means comprises: A gaming machine G5 capable of indicating the degree of advantage determined by the advantage determination means in the first distribution state suggestion effect.

  According to the gaming machine G5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G4. That is, in the effect execution means, based on the switching to the first distribution state by the distribution state switching means, a first distribution state suggestion effect suggesting the first distribution state by the first suggestion effect execution means. On the other hand, based on being switched to the second distribution state, a second distribution state suggestion effect that indicates the second distribution state is executed. The advantage degree when the game ball passes through the first area is determined by the advantage determination means. In the first distribution state suggestion effect, the degree of advantage determined by the advantage determination unit is suggested by the first suggestion effect execution unit.

  Thus, there is an effect that the timing of passing through the first region can be measured according to the degree of advantage suggested in the first suggestion effect.

  In the gaming machine G5, the advantage determination means determines the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section, and the first suggestion effect execution means determines the number of game balls determined by the advantage determination means. A gaming machine G6, wherein an effect indicating the number can be indicated in the first distribution state indicating effect.

  According to the gaming machine G6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G5. That is, the number of gaming balls passing through the predetermined section is determined by the advantage determining means. An effect suggesting the number of game balls determined by the advantage determination means is suggested by the first suggestion effect execution means in the first distribution state suggestion effect.

  Thus, by confirming the first suggestion effect, there is an effect that the number of game balls guided to the first specific region when passing through the first region can be easily understood.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G6, the privilege game executing means may include a game which enters the first specific area after the first variable means is first changed to the first position in the first privilege game. The first variable means is changed to the second position based on the number of the balls being equal to or more than the first number. In the predetermined section, the first variable means is changed to the second position. A gaming machine G7 characterized in that, in the state, a second number of game balls larger than the first number has a path length that can simultaneously flow down.

  According to the gaming machine G7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines G1 to G6. That is, in the first privilege game, based on that the first variable means is first changed to the first position and then the number of game balls which have entered the first specific area becomes equal to or more than the first number, It is changed to the second position by the bonus game execution means. The predetermined section is configured with a path length that allows a second number of game balls, which is larger than the first number, to flow simultaneously at a time when the first variable means is changed to the second position.

  This allows the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section to be greater than the first number before the game balls can be fired by devising to pass through the first area. There is an effect that the interest can be improved.

  In the gaming machine G7, the award game execution means may include a game ball that has entered the second specific area after the second variable means is first changed to the third position in the second award game. A gaming machine for changing the second variable means to the fourth position on the basis of a third number or more that is greater than one and less than the second number. G8.

  According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G7, in the second privilege game, the game ball that first enters the second specific area after the second variable means is changed to the third position is changed to the first ball. Since the second variable means is changed to the fourth position by the privilege game executing means based on the third number being larger than the number and being smaller than the second number, the second area is passed through the second area. Thus, a third number of game balls greater than the first number can be stably entered into the second specific area. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed with confidence during the execution of the second privilege game.

<Characteristic H group> (rearrange the order of the selection menu according to the history operated by the player)
Display means capable of displaying an image, operation means operable by a player, and an interlocking image whose mode is changed in accordance with the operation content of the operation means on the display means based on the satisfaction of the first condition A linked image display unit to be displayed, and based on the second condition being satisfied in a state where the linked image is displayed by the linked image display unit, according to a mode of the linked image displayed on the display unit. One of a plurality of modes is determined as a mode of the linked image to be displayed first by the linked image display unit when the first condition is satisfied. And a mode determining means.

  Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are known gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, a symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a big hit game advantageous to the player is given. Some of such conventional gaming machines are provided with a sound output device such as a speaker, so that not only a visual effect but also an auditory effect can be executed to change the mode of the effect. By diversifying, interest was improved (for example, JP-A-2003-325886).

  However, further diversification of production is required.

  Some of such conventional gaming machines are configured to be able to reproduce music as a kind of auditory effect during a predetermined period during a normal game, and the music reproduced during the predetermined period is Some types are configured so that a player can select the type.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, as the number of music pieces set in the gaming machine becomes more diversified, it becomes more difficult for the player to search for a favorite music piece from a list of music pieces that can be selected. There was a problem that would.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, based on the establishment of the first condition, the linked image in which the mode is changed in accordance with the operation content of the operating means operable by the player is displayed on the display means by the linked image display means. Is displayed. Based on the second condition being satisfied while the linked image is being displayed by the linked image display means, an effect of a type corresponding to the mode of the linked image displayed on the display means is executed by the effect executing means. . One of a plurality of aspects is determined by the aspect determining means as the aspect of the linked image displayed first by the linked image display means when the first condition is satisfied.

  Thus, when the first condition is satisfied, the mode of the linked image that is displayed first can be diversified, so that there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine H2 of the gaming machine H1, wherein the aspect determining means determines one aspect at least according to a type of the effect previously executed by the effect executing means.

  According to the gaming machine H2, since one aspect is determined by the aspect determining means by the aspect determining means at least according to the type of the effect previously executed by the effect executing means, the aspect of the linked image can be diversified. This has the effect.

  In the gaming machine H1 or H2, there is provided audio data reproducing means capable of reproducing audio data, and audio output means for outputting audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the audio data reproducing means, and may be set as the linked image. The plurality of aspects are configured by images of aspects showing different music pieces, and the effect executing means uses, as the effect, audio data of music pieces corresponding to the aspect of the linked image as the audio data reproducing means. A game machine H3 characterized by being reproduced.

  According to the gaming machine H3, the following effects are exerted in addition to the effects exerted by the gaming machines H1 and H2. That is, a sound corresponding to the sound data whose sound data is reproduced by the sound data reproducing means is output by the sound output means. The plurality of modes that can be set as the linked image are configured by images of modes showing different music pieces. The sound data of the music piece corresponding to the linked image mode is reproduced by the sound data reproducing means as the effect by the effect executing means.

  Thereby, a visual effect and an auditory effect can be combined, and thus there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the aspect determining means may determine that one of the effect-corresponding images is a specific one of a plurality of effect-corresponding images indicating information corresponding to the type of effect as the aspect of the linked image. Determining an aspect displayed in an aspect, wherein the interlocked image display means displays an effect displayed in the specific aspect in a predetermined order each time the operation content of the operation means becomes the first operation content. The effect image is made variable, and the effect execution means sets an effect of a type corresponding to the information shown in the effect effect image displayed in the specific mode, and the second condition is satisfied. A game machine H4 that is executed based on the following.

  According to the gaming machine H4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines H1 to H3. In other words, as a mode of the linked image, a mode in which one effect corresponding image is displayed in a specific mode among a plurality of effect corresponding images indicating information corresponding to the type of effect is determined by the mode determining means. Each time the operation content on the operation means becomes the first operation content, the effect corresponding image displayed in a specific mode is changed in a predetermined order by the linked image display means. The effect of the type corresponding to the information shown in the effect corresponding image displayed in the specific mode is executed by the effect executing means based on the satisfaction of the second condition.

  This allows the player to easily understand the type of the effect performed by the effect executing means simply by checking the information shown in the effect corresponding image displayed in a specific mode. There is an effect that the operation means can be operated so that the effect corresponding image corresponding to the effect of the user's favorite type is displayed in a specific mode.

  In the gaming machine H4, the aspect determination means may include one of the effect corresponding images to be displayed in a specific mode, and the effect corresponding to the specific mode changed when the operation of the first operation content is repeated. A gaming machine H5 for determining at least the order of images.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H4, one effect-corresponding image to be displayed in a specific mode, and an effect changed to a specific mode when the operation of the first operation content is repeated. Since the order of the corresponding images is determined at least by the mode determining means, it is possible to determine in advance the order of the effect corresponding images that can be changed to a specific mode. Therefore, when the operation means is actually operated, the effect corresponding image to be displayed in a specific mode can be specified earlier.

  In the gaming machine H5, counting means for counting the number of executions of the effect performed by the effect executing means for each type of effect is provided, and the mode determining means determines the number of executions counted by the counting means in advance. The order of the effect-corresponding images corresponding to the type of effect that satisfies the number of times satisfying the specific condition is determined to be the order that can be changed to the specific mode by the operation of the first operation content that is equal to or less than the specific number of times. A gaming machine H6, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine H6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine H5. That is, the number of executions of the effect performed by the effect executing means is counted by the counting means for each effect type. The first operation content in which the order of the effect-corresponding images corresponding to the effect of the type in which the number of executions counted by the counting means satisfies the predetermined specific condition is equal to or less than the specific number of times by the mode determining means Is determined in an order that can be changed to a specific mode.

  Thereby, the effect of the type of the number of executions satisfying the specific condition can be changed to a specific mode with the number of operations equal to or less than the specific number of times. Can be. Therefore, there is an effect that the convenience of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine H6, the mode determining means may change the order of the effect corresponding images corresponding to the first number of effects in descending order of the number of executions counted by the counting means, to the first operation of the specific number or less. A gaming machine H7 characterized in that the order is determined to be changed to the specific mode by operating the content.

  According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H6, the order of the effect-corresponding images corresponding to each of the first number of effects in descending order of the number of executions counted by the counting means is determined by the mode determining means. Since the order of change to the specific mode is determined by the operation of the following first operation content, the number of changes to the specific mode has been relatively large so far, and the player has also changed to the specific mode this time. The effect-corresponding image that is highly likely to be desired can be changed to a specific mode with a small number of operations. Therefore, there is an effect that the convenience of the player can be further improved.

  In the gaming machine H7, the mode determining unit changes the order of the effect-corresponding images corresponding to each of the first number of effects to the specific mode as the number of executions counted by the counting unit increases. A gaming machine H8 characterized in that the number of operations of the first operation content is determined so as to be reduced.

  According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H7, the order of the effect-corresponding images corresponding to each of the first number of effects can be changed to a specific mode as the number of executions counted by the counting means increases. Since the mode determining means determines the number of operations of the first operation content until the operation is performed, the effect corresponding image which is more likely to be changed by the player to the specific mode is determined. Since it is possible to change to a specific mode with a smaller number of operations, there is an effect that the convenience for the player can be further improved.

  In any of the gaming machines H6 to H8, if the operation of the first operation content is executed within a predetermined period after the first condition is satisfied, the first operation is performed after the first condition is satisfied. The order of the effect-corresponding images displayed in a specific mode in the displayed linked image is determined at least by the mode determining unit at least next time by a second mode or more of the first mode operation. A gaming machine H9 comprising setting means for setting so as to be determined in an order that can be changed.

  According to the gaming machine H9, in any of the gaming machines H6 to H8, when the operation of the first operation content is performed within a predetermined period after the first condition is satisfied, the first condition is satisfied. The order of the effect-corresponding images displayed in the specific mode in the linked image displayed first from the first is determined by at least the second number of operations of the first operation content at least by the next mode determining means. Are set by the setting means so as to be determined in the order in which the values are changed. Regarding the effect corresponding image changed from the specific mode within the predetermined period, next time, even when the linked image is displayed, it is considered that there is a low possibility that the player wants to change to the specific mode, By setting such an effect-corresponding image in an order in which it is changed to a specific mode by a relatively large number of operation times equal to or more than the second number of times, it is highly likely that a player wants to change to a specific mode. The images can be set in an order that can be changed to a specific mode with a relatively small number of operations. Therefore, there is an effect that the convenience of the player can be further improved.

  The gaming machine H10 according to any one of the gaming machines H1 to H9, wherein the second condition is satisfied when an operation content of the operation means becomes a specific operation content.

  According to the gaming machine H10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H9, the second condition is satisfied when the operation content for the operation means is a specific operation content, so that the player On the other hand, by performing an operation with a specific operation content, it is possible to execute an effect of a type corresponding to the mode of the linked image displayed at that time. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can select a desired effect of the player himself.

<Characteristic I group> (variable playback position of music according to how music was determined)
Based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition, an effect executing means for executing any one of a plurality of predetermined effects, and an effect to be executed by the effect executing means, based on establishment of a first condition, A first selecting means for selecting one of the effects from the plurality of effects; and an effect to be executed by the effect executing means, based on establishment of a second condition different from the first condition. A second selecting means for selecting one of the effects from the first effect, a first start position set for each of the plurality of effects, and a second start position different from the first start position. The first start position is set as a start position of the effect selected by the first selecting means among the plurality of start positions including at least the second start position of the effect selected by the second selecting means. Starting position Characterized in that it and a start position setting means for setting a game machine I1.

  Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are known gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, a symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a big hit game advantageous to the player is given. Some of such conventional gaming machines are provided with a sound output device such as a speaker, so that not only a visual effect but also an auditory effect can be executed to change the mode of the effect. By diversifying, interest was improved (for example, JP-A-2003-325886).

  Also, among such conventional gaming machines, one music is randomly selected from a plurality of music preset in the gaming machine as a kind of auditory effect during a predetermined period during a normal game. Some can be played back. In addition, there is a configuration in which a player can select a type of music to be reproduced within the predetermined period in addition to reproducing a music selected at random in the predetermined period.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, the player may change to a favorite music of the player without listening to the music selected at random for a predetermined period of time, and may be set in the gaming machine. There was a problem that most of the songs that were played might not be played at all.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, one of a plurality of predetermined effects is executed by the effect executing means based on the establishment of the predetermined execution condition, and the effect to be executed by the effect executing means is performed. Based on the establishment of the first condition, one effect is selected from the plurality of effects by the first selecting means. On the other hand, based on the establishment of the second condition different from the first condition, one effect is selected from the plurality of effects by the second selecting unit as the effect to be executed by the effect execution unit. Among a plurality of start positions including at least a first start position set for each of the plurality of effects and a second start position different from the first start position, the first selection means The first start position is set by the start position setting means as the start position of the selected effect. On the other hand, the second start position is set by the start position setting unit as the start position of the effect selected by the second selection unit.

  Thus, the effect can be started from a different start position depending on whether the effect is selected by the first selecting means or the effect selected by the second selecting means. There is an effect that can be improved.

  In the gaming machine I1, operation means operable by a player, operation detection means for detecting an operation on the operation means, and selection period setting for setting a selection period for selecting an effect executed by the effect execution means Means, and wherein the first selection means selects an effect in an aspect according to the operation content on the operation means detected by the operation detection means during the selection period, and wherein the second selection means The gaming machine I2, wherein the means selects one effect from the plurality of effects based on the setting of the selection period by the selection period setting means.

  According to the gaming machine I2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I1. That is, the operation on the operation means operable by the player is detected by the operation detection means. A selection period for selecting an effect to be executed by the effect executing means is set by the selection period setting means. The effect of the mode according to the operation content on the operation means detected by the operation detection means during the selection period is selected by the first selection means. Based on the selection period selected by the selection period setting means, one effect is selected from the plurality of effects by the second selection means.

  With this, the start position of the effect can be made different depending on whether or not the effect is selected by the player performing an operation on the operation means, so that there is an effect that the effect mode can be diversified.

  In the gaming machine I1 or I2, there is provided a sound data reproducing means capable of reproducing sound data, and a sound output means for outputting sound corresponding to the sound data reproduced by the sound data reproducing means, wherein the effect executing means is A gaming machine I3 wherein the sound data reproducing means reproduces sound data corresponding to any one of a plurality of different music pieces as the effect.

  According to the gaming machine I3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I1 or I2. That is, the audio data is reproduced by the audio data reproducing means, and the audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the audio data reproducing means is output by the audio output means. The audio data corresponding to any one of the plurality of different music pieces is reproduced by the audio data reproducing means as an effect by the effect executing means.

  This makes it possible to change the reproduction start position of the music according to whether the music is selected by the first selection means or the music selected by the second selection means. There is an effect that can be improved.

  In the gaming machine I3, the audio data is constituted by a data group that becomes one music piece by reproducing a plurality of data in a predetermined specific order, and the start position setting means includes: When music is selected by the first selecting means, setting is made such that reproduction is started from the first data among the plurality of data constituting the data group corresponding to the selected music, and A gaming machine I4 characterized in that, when a music piece is selected by the selection means, reproduction is started from second data different from the first data.

  According to the gaming machine I4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I3. That is, the audio data is composed of a data group that becomes one music piece by reproducing a plurality of data in a predetermined specific order. When a music piece is selected by the first selection means, the start position setting means sets the start of reproduction from the first data among a plurality of data constituting a data group corresponding to the selected music piece. You. On the other hand, when a music piece is selected by the second selection means, the start position setting means sets the reproduction to be started from the second data different from the first data.

  Thereby, the reproduction start position of the music can be made different only by selecting one data corresponding to the type of the selecting means from the data group as the data to start reproduction, so that the reproduction start position is set. There is an effect that the processing load at the time can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine I4, operation means operable by a player, operation detection means for detecting an operation on the operation means, and selection period setting for setting a selection period for selecting a music piece executed by the effect execution means Means, and wherein the first selection means selects one music piece according to the operation content on the operation means detected by the operation detection means during the selection period, and the second selection means Means for selecting one music piece from the plurality of music pieces based on that the selection time period is selected by the selection time period setting means, and wherein the first data is in the specific order A gaming machine I5 characterized in that the data is set in the first order.

  According to the gaming machine I5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I4. That is, the operation on the operation means operable by the player is detected by the operation detection means. A selection period for selecting a music piece to be executed by the effect execution unit is set by the selection period setting unit. One piece of music corresponding to the operation content on the operation means detected by the operation detection means during the selection period is selected by the first selection means. Based on the selection period being selected by the selection period setting means, one music piece is selected from the plurality of music pieces by the second selection means. The first data is composed of data set in the first order in a specific order.

  With this, for the music selected by the player operating the operation means, the reproduction can be started from the beginning of the music, so that the player voluntarily listens to the music selected voluntarily from the beginning. it can. Therefore, there is an effect that a greater satisfaction can be given to the player who has listened to the music.

  The gaming machine I6 according to the gaming machine I5, wherein the second selecting means randomly selects one music piece from the plurality of music pieces.

  According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine I5, one music piece is randomly selected by the second selecting means from a plurality of music pieces, so that the music piece set in the gaming machine is reproduced without waste. There is an effect that can be made.

  The gaming machine I7 according to the gaming machine I5 or I6, wherein the second data is constituted by data including at least the most characteristic melody in the music.

  According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I5 or I6, since the second data is constituted by data including at least the most characteristic melody in the music, the selection period is started. In addition, there is an effect that the player can determine whether or not to play another music by operating the operation means after listening to at least the most characteristic melody of the music selected by the second selecting means.

  In the gaming machine I3, the audio data is composed of one piece of data that becomes one piece of music when reproduced, and the plurality of start positions correspond to the sound data corresponding to each piece of music. A gaming machine I8 comprising a plurality of preset reproduction positions.

  According to the gaming machine I8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I3. That is, the audio data is composed of one piece of data that becomes one piece of music when reproduced. The plurality of start positions are constituted by a plurality of reproduction positions set in advance for audio data corresponding to each music piece.

  This has the effect that the audio data can be in the simplest form.

<Characteristic J group> (Data of the music being played is rearranged according to the progress of the game)
Based on establishment of a predetermined execution condition, an effect executing means for executing any of a plurality of predetermined effects and one effect to be executed by the effect executing means are determined from the plurality of effects. Effect determination means, and effect data group storage means, which is used for executing one effect by the effect execution means, and stores effect data groups composed of a plurality of data for each of the plurality of effect types. Effect data group selecting means for selecting an effect data group corresponding to the type of effect determined by the effect determining means from the effect data group storing means, and the effect data group selected by the effect data group selecting means Data setting means for setting the plurality of data constituting the data to be used by the effect execution means in a predetermined specific order; and The gaming machine is characterized in that it comprises a sequence changing means capable of variably in different order from said particular order the sequence in which the plurality of data is used J1.

  Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are known gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, a symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a big hit game advantageous to the player is given. Some of such conventional gaming machines are provided with a sound output device such as a speaker, so that not only a visual effect but also an auditory effect can be executed to change the mode of the effect. By diversifying, interest was improved (for example, JP-A-2003-325886).

  Some of such conventional gaming machines are configured to be able to reproduce music as a kind of auditory effect during a predetermined period during a normal game.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, there is a possibility that the predetermined period of time ends before the part of the chorus part, which is the most characteristic part of the music, is reproduced, and the reproduction of the music is ended. there were. For this reason, there was a problem that a player who could not listen to the rust portion may be dissatisfied.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J1, one of a plurality of predetermined effects is executed by the effect executing means based on the establishment of the predetermined execution condition. One effect to be executed by the effect executing means is determined from the plurality of effects by the effect determining means. An effect data group, which is used for executing one effect by the effect executing means and is composed of a plurality of data, is stored by the effect data storage means for each of a plurality of effect types. An effect data group corresponding to the type of effect determined by the effect determining means is selected from the effect data group storage means by the effect data group selecting means. A plurality of data constituting the effect data group selected by the effect data group selecting means are set by the data setting means so as to be used by the effect executing means in a predetermined specific order. In accordance with the progress of the game, the order in which the plurality of data is used is changed to a different order from the specific order by the order changing means.

  Thus, there is an effect that the effect can be suitably executed.

  In the gaming machine J1, the data setting means may determine that the data in the first order in the specific order is based on the completion of the performance using the data in the last order in the specific order. A gaming machine J2, which is set so as to be used by a gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1, the data of the first order in the specific order is rendered based on the completion of the effect using the data of the last order in the specific order. Since the setting is performed by the data setting unit so as to be used by the execution unit, when the execution of one effect is completed by the effect execution unit, the effect can be executed again from the beginning of the effect. Therefore, even if the performance using the data in the last order is completed, it is possible to prevent the period of no performance from being effected, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

  In the gaming machine J1 or J2, a discriminating means for executing a discrimination based on the satisfaction of a predetermined discriminating condition, and executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a specific discrimination result obtained by discrimination by the discriminating means. A gaming machine J3, wherein the effect executing means executes one of the plurality of effects during the execution of the bonus game.

  According to the gaming machine J3, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine J1 or J2. That is, the discrimination is performed by the discriminating means based on the satisfaction of the predetermined discriminating condition, and the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means based on the specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discriminating means. Is done. During the execution of the bonus game, one of the plurality of effects is executed by the effect executing means.

  Thereby, during execution of the bonus game, there is an effect that the effect can be suitably executed.

  In the gaming machine J3, the effect data group provided for each of the plurality of effect types includes first data corresponding to a specific effect mode set for each effect type, and first data thereof. And the second data is different from the first data, and the order changing means uses the first data at least once by the effect executing means until the bonus game ends. Thus, the gaming machine J4 is characterized in that the order in which the plurality of data is used is varied.

  According to the gaming machine J4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine J3. That is, the effect data group provided for each of the plurality of effect types includes first data corresponding to a specific effect mode set for each effect type, and a second data different from the first data. And at least data. The order in which the plurality of data are used is changed by the order changing means so that the first data is used at least once by the effect executing means until the bonus game ends.

  Thereby, there is an effect that a specific effect mode can be executed at least once during execution of the bonus game.

  In the gaming machine J4, the order varying means may be configured to store the plurality of data in such a manner that the first data is used by the effect executing means in a predetermined specific period of the privilege game. A gaming machine J5 wherein the order of use is variable.

  According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J4, a plurality of data are set so that the first data is used by the effect executing means in a predetermined specific period in the bonus game. Since the order in which are used is changed by the order changing means, there is an effect that a game during execution of the privilege game can be performed as one of the pleasures of being in a specific period.

  In any of the gaming machines J1 to J5, there is provided audio data reproduction means capable of reproducing audio data, and audio output means capable of outputting audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the audio data reproduction means, The effect executing means is for causing the audio data reproducing means to reproduce any one of a plurality of predetermined songs, and the effect data group includes a plurality of sounds for reproducing one music. A gaming machine J6 comprising data.

  According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines J1 to J5, audio data is reproduced by the audio data reproducing means, and a sound corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the audio data reproducing means is outputted. Output by means. One of a plurality of predetermined music pieces is reproduced by the sound data reproducing means by the effect executing means. The effect data group is composed of a plurality of audio data for reproducing one music piece.

  Accordingly, an auditory effect by playing the music can be performed, and thus there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine J6, the effect data group is composed of audio data in units of parts constituting one music piece.

  According to the gaming machine J7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J6, the effect data group is composed of audio data in units of parts constituting one music, so that the plurality of data are used by the variable order means. Even if the order is changed, there is an effect that it is possible to make the transition of the voice mode with less discomfort.

  In the gaming machine J7, a discriminating means for executing a discrimination based on satisfaction of a predetermined discriminating condition, and a privilege for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on a specific discrimination result obtained by discrimination by the discriminating means. Game execution means, wherein the effect execution means reproduces any of the plurality of music pieces to the audio data reproduction means during execution of the privilege game, and the type of the plurality of music pieces The effect data group provided for each music piece includes first data for playing a specific part set for each music type, and second data for playing a part different from the specific part. Wherein the first data is used by the effect executing means at least once before the end of the privilege game. As such, the gaming machine wherein the one in which a plurality of data varying the order used J8.

  According to the gaming machine J8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine J7. That is, the discrimination is executed by the discriminating means based on the satisfaction of the predetermined discriminating condition, and based on the specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discriminating means, a bonus game advantageous to the player is provided by the bonus game executing means. Be executed. During execution of the bonus game, any one of the plurality of music pieces is reproduced by the effect data executing means on the sound data reproducing means. The effect data group provided for each of a plurality of music types is composed of first data for reproducing a specific part set for each music type, and for reproducing a part different from the specific part. At least the second data. The order in which the plurality of data are used is changed by the order changing means so that the first data is used at least once by the effect executing means until the bonus game ends.

  This allows the specific part to be reproduced at least once before the bonus game ends, so that the player who has enjoyed listening to the music while enjoying the specific part can be satisfied. .

  In the gaming machine J8, an operation means operable by a player is provided, and the effect deciding means decides one music piece from the plurality of music pieces according to an operation content on the operation means. Gaming machine J9.

  According to the gaming machine J9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J8, one music piece is determined by the effect determination means from a plurality of music pieces in accordance with the operation contents of the operation means operable by the player. There is an effect that a specific part of a music piece which the player voluntarily selects can be reproduced at least once before the end of the bonus game.

<Characteristic K group> (When the reproduction of the music is ended, the reproduction is performed up to the reproduction position of the break and then the reproduction is ended.)
First effect execution means for executing a first effect based on establishment of a predetermined execution condition, and a first condition predetermined while the first effect is being executed by the first effect execution means. Is established, the progress status determining means for determining the progress status of the first performance being executed by the performance performing means, and the progress status determined by the progress status determining means are predetermined. A second effect executing means for executing a second effect different from the first effect when the second condition is satisfied, and wherein the progress status determined by the progress status determining means is the second condition. A gaming machine K1 comprising: a suppression unit that suppresses execution of the second effect by the second effect execution unit when the condition is not satisfied.

  Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are known gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, a symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a big hit game advantageous to the player is given. Some of such conventional gaming machines are provided with a sound output device such as a speaker, so that not only a visual effect but also an auditory effect can be executed to change the mode of the effect. By diversifying, interest was improved (for example, JP-A-2003-325886).

  Some of such conventional gaming machines are configured to be able to reproduce music as a kind of auditory effect during a predetermined period during a normal game.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, there is a possibility that the predetermined period ends during the reproduction of the rust part, which is the most characteristic part of the music, and the rust part is cut off halfway. . For this reason, there was a problem that a player who could not sufficiently listen to the rust portion may be dissatisfied.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, the first effect is executed by the first effect execution means based on the establishment of the predetermined execution condition, and the first effect is executed by the first effect execution means. The progress state of the first effect executed by the effect executing means is determined by the progress state determining means based on the fact that the first condition predetermined in the meantime is satisfied. When the progress status determined by the progress status determination means satisfies a predetermined second condition, a second performance different from the first performance is executed by the second performance execution means. When the progress status determined by the progress status determination means does not satisfy the second condition, the execution of the second effect by the second effect execution means is suppressed by the suppression means.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the first effect can be suitably executed.

  In the gaming machine K1, the gaming machine K2 is characterized in that the suppression means suppresses at least the execution of the second effect until the progress condition satisfies the second condition.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K1, the execution of at least the second effect until the progress condition satisfies the second condition is suppressed by the suppressing means. There is an effect that it can be more suitably executed.

  In the gaming machine K2, based on the fact that the period during which the execution of the second effect is suppressed by the suppression means is equal to or longer than a predetermined first period, whether the progress satisfies the second condition. A game machine K3 comprising execution control means for controlling the second effect execution means to start execution of the second effect regardless of whether or not the second effect is executed.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K2, based on the fact that the period during which the execution of the second effect is suppressed by the suppressing means is equal to or longer than the predetermined first period, the progress status is changed. Regardless of whether or not the second condition is satisfied, the second production means controls the execution of the second production by the execution control means so that the execution of the second production is suppressed. Has an effect that the period for executing the second effect can be suppressed from being excessively short due to excessively long time.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, a variable ball-in means that can be changed to a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state, Discriminating means for executing a discrimination based on the satisfaction of a discriminating condition; and determining that the variable ball-in means has changed from the second state to the first state based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discriminating means. A variable game execution unit that executes a variable game that is variable in number of times, wherein the first effect execution unit executes the first effect based on the start of the variable game, The second effect execution means executes the second effect in a period from when the last change to the first state in one of the variable games is completed to when a predetermined second period elapses. A gaming machine K4 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine K4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines K1 to K3. That is, the variable ball-in means is configured to be variable between a first state in which game balls can enter and a second state in which game balls are more difficult to enter than in the first state. The discrimination is executed by the discriminating means based on the satisfaction of the discriminating condition, and the variable ball-in means is changed from the second state to the first state a predetermined number of times based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discriminating means. The variable game is executed by the variable game execution means. The first effect is executed by the first effect executing means based on the start of the variable game. The second effect is executed by the second effect executing means in a period between the end of the change to the last first state in the one variable game and the elapse of the predetermined second period.

  Thereby, the effect that the first effect performed while the variable to the first state is being performed the predetermined number of times can be suppressed from being interrupted halfway by the start of the second effect. is there.

  In the gaming machine K4, the first effect is configured to include at least a specific effect period in which a specific effect mode is executed in the effect period, and the suppression unit determines the progress state determination. A gaming machine K5 for suppressing execution of the second effect by the second effect execution means when it is determined by the means that the specific effect period is present.

  According to the gaming machine K5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine K4. That is, the effect period of the first effect includes at least the specific effect period in which the specific effect mode is executed. When the progress state determination means determines that it is the specific effect period, the execution of the second effect by the second effect execution means is suppressed by the suppression means.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the specific effect mode can be executed for a longer time.

  In the gaming machine K4 or K5, based on the period determined by the suppression unit and a period determined by the period determination unit to suppress the execution of the second effect, the second effect is determined based on the period determined by the period determination unit. A gaming machine K6, comprising: a second production mode selection unit that selects one production mode that ends before the second period elapses from a plurality of executable production modes.

  According to the gaming machine K6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine K4 or K5. That is, the period in which the execution of the second effect is suppressed by the suppression unit is determined by the period determination unit. Based on the period determined by the period determining means, one of the plurality of performance modes executable as the second performance is terminated by the second performance mode selection means until the second period elapses. Selected by.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the second effect can be surely ended before the second period elapses.

  In any of the gaming machines K1 to K6, there is provided audio data reproduction means capable of reproducing audio data, and audio output means capable of outputting audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the audio data reproduction means, The first effect execution means executes the first effect by causing a predetermined music to be reproduced by the audio data reproducing means, and the suppressing means includes a means for executing the predetermined music by the progress status determination means. A game machine K7 for suppressing execution of the second effect by the second effect execution means when it is determined that a specific reproduction range is being reproduced.

  According to the gaming machine K7, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines K1 to K6. That is, audio data is reproduced by the audio data reproducing means, and a sound corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the audio data reproducing means is output by the audio output means. The first effect is executed by the first effect executing means by causing the audio data reproducing means to reproduce the predetermined music. When the progress state determination means determines that the specific reproduction range of the predetermined music piece is being reproduced, the execution of the second effect by the second effect execution means is suppressed by the suppression means.

  As a result, the second effect is executed during the reproduction of the specific reproduction range of the music, and the termination of the reproduction of the specific reproduction range can be suppressed, so that the player who wants to listen to the specific reproduction range is satisfied. There is an effect that can be made.

  In the gaming machine K7, an operation means operable by a player is provided, and the first effect execution means selects one music piece corresponding to the operation content of the operation means from a plurality of predetermined music pieces. A gaming machine K8 characterized by being reproduced by an audio data reproducing means.

  According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K7, one musical piece corresponding to the operation content of the operating means operable by the player is executed in the first effect from a plurality of predetermined musical pieces. Since the audio data is reproduced by the audio data reproducing means by the means, the specific reproduction range of the music piece which the player voluntarily selected can be reproduced for a longer time. Therefore, there is an effect that a greater satisfaction can be given to the player who has selected the music.

  The gaming machine K9, wherein in the gaming machine K7 or K8, the specific reproduction range includes at least a part of a rust portion in a music piece.

  According to the gaming machine K9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K7 or K8, since the specific reproduction range is configured to include at least a part of the rust portion in the music, the music is generally the most exciting part in the music. A certain rust portion can be played for a longer time. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be satisfied.

<Characteristic L group> (Providing music that can be selected only by random selection)
Based on the establishment of the predetermined execution condition, an effect executing means for executing any of a plurality of predetermined effects, and an effect to be executed by the effect executing means, a predetermined specific condition is satisfied. The first condition is selected as an effect to be executed by the effect executing means, based on the fact that the execution condition is satisfied in a state in which the one effect is selected from the plurality of effects. And a second selection unit capable of selecting one of the plurality of effects, excluding at least a specific effect, based on the execution condition being satisfied in a state where the execution condition is not satisfied. Gaming machine L1.

  Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are known gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, a symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a big hit game advantageous to the player is given. Some of such conventional gaming machines are provided with a sound output device such as a speaker, so that not only a visual effect but also an auditory effect can be executed to change the mode of the effect. By diversifying, interest was improved (for example, JP-A-2003-325886).

  Some of such conventional gaming machines allow a player to select one song from among a plurality of songs set in advance in the gaming machine during a predetermined period during a normal game, and the player selects the song. There is a music composition that is configured to be able to reproduce a music that has been played as a kind of auditory production. Some of the options that can be selected by the player include, in addition to the item indicating the name of the music to be reproduced, an item indicating that the music is determined at random. It has a configuration that can meet the maximum requirements.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, there is little merit that the music is determined at random, so that most players select their favorite music, and the selection frequency of the item whose music is determined at random is low. There was a problem that it became low.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, any one of a plurality of predetermined effects is executed by the effect executing means based on the establishment of the predetermined execution condition. As an effect to be executed by the effect executing means, one effect is selected from a plurality of effects by the first selecting means based on the fact that the execution condition is satisfied in a state where the predetermined specific condition is satisfied. . On the other hand, as an effect to be executed by the effect executing means, based on the execution condition being satisfied in a state where the specific condition is not satisfied, the second selecting means selects from among a plurality of effects at least a specific effect is excluded. 1 effect is selected.

  Thereby, it is possible to vary whether or not a specific effect is executed according to whether or not the specific condition is satisfied, so that attention can be paid to whether or not the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine L1, a display means capable of displaying an image, an operation means operable by a player, and an interlocking image in which a mode is changed in accordance with the operation content of the operation means based on establishment of a predetermined display condition And an interlocking image displaying means for displaying the interlocking image in a specific mode on the display means as the specific condition. Based on the establishment, one effect is selected from the plurality of effects, and the second selecting means displays the linked image in a mode different from the specific mode on the display means. A gaming machine L2 for selecting an effect corresponding to the mode of the linked image based on the fact that the execution condition is satisfied in a state in which the game machine L2 is in the game state.

  According to the gaming machine L2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine L1. That is, based on the establishment of the predetermined display condition, a linked image whose mode is changed in conjunction with the operation content of the operation means is displayed on the display means by the linked image display means. As the specific condition, one of the plurality of effects is selected by the first selecting unit based on the fact that the execution condition is satisfied in a state where the linked image in a specific mode is displayed on the display unit. The effect corresponding to the mode of the linked image is selected by the second selecting unit based on the execution condition being satisfied while the linked image in a mode different from the specific mode is displayed on the display unit.

  This allows the player to select whether the first selection means selects an effect or the second selection means to select an effect by operating the operation means. There is an effect that the player can select the effect selection method.

  The gaming machine L2 includes audio data reproducing means capable of reproducing audio data, and audio output means capable of outputting audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the audio data reproducing means, and is set as the linked image. The plurality of modes to be obtained are constituted by images of modes showing different songs, and the second selecting means selects a song corresponding to the mode of the linked image. Gaming machine L3.

  According to the gaming machine L3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine L1 or L2. That is, the audio data is reproduced by the audio data reproducing means, and the audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the audio data reproducing means is output by the audio output means. The plurality of modes that can be set as the linked image are configured by images of modes showing different music pieces. The music corresponding to the mode of the linked image is selected by the second selecting means.

  Thereby, by operating the operation means and selecting the linked image of the mode indicating the favorite music, the music desired by the player can be reproduced. There is an effect that it can be provided.

  In any of the gaming machines L1 to L3, a discriminating means for executing a discrimination based on the satisfaction of the discriminating condition, and an advantage advantageous to the player based on the fact that the discriminating means makes the first discrimination result Advantage setting means for setting a gaming state, wherein the effect execution means executes any of the plurality of effects based on the execution of the determination by the determination means, When the first determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination unit, the one selection unit selects one of the effects from the plurality of effects, and determines the first determination result by the determination by the determination unit. A game machine L4 wherein, when a different second determination result is obtained, at least one effect is selected from among the plurality of effects excluding at least a specific effect.

  According to the gaming machine L4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines L1 to L3. That is, the discrimination is executed by the discriminating means based on the satisfaction of the discriminating condition, and based on the result of the discrimination by the discriminating means being the first discrimination result, the profitable gaming state advantageous to the player is set by the advantageous setting means. Is done. One of the plurality of effects is executed by the effect executing means based on the execution of the judgment by the judging means. When the first determination result is obtained by the determination means, one effect is selected from the plurality of effects by the first selection means, while the first determination result differs from the first determination result by the determination means. When the second determination result is obtained, one of the plurality of effects excluding at least a specific effect is selected by the first selecting unit.

  Thereby, when a specific effect is selected by the first selecting means, it is possible to make the player recognize that the advantageous game state is set, so that attention is paid to the type of the effect selected by the first selecting means. There is an effect that can be made.

  In the gaming machine L4, there is provided notification effect execution means for executing an information effect for notifying whether or not the advantageous game state is set, and the execution condition is satisfied at least before the notification effect is executed. A gaming machine L5.

  According to the gaming machine L5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine L4. That is, a notification effect for notifying whether or not the gaming state is set is executed by the notification effect execution means. The execution condition is satisfied at least before the notification effect is executed.

  With this, if the specific effect is selected by the first selecting means, it is determined that the advantageous game state is set before confirming the notification effect, so that it is quickly determined whether or not the advantageous game state is set. There is an effect that a player who wants to know can play a game expecting that the effect is selected by the first selecting means.

  In the gaming machine L5, when the first determination result or the second determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination unit, a bonus game execution unit that executes a bonus game advantageous to the player; And a disadvantage setting means for setting a disadvantageous game state which is more disadvantageous than the advantageous game state as a game state after the privilege game executed based on the result of the determination. The means is for setting the advantageous gaming state as a gaming state after the award game executed based on the result of the first determination is completed, and the effect executing means is A gaming machine L6 for performing an effect during execution of a game.

  According to the gaming machine L6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine L5. That is, when the first determination result or the second determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination unit, the bonus game execution unit executes a bonus game advantageous to the player. As a game state after the bonus game executed based on the second determination result being completed, a disadvantage game state which is more disadvantageous than the advantageous game state is set by the disadvantage setting means. The advantageous setting state is set by the advantageous setting means as the gaming state after the privilege game executed based on the first determination result is completed. An effect is executed by the effect executing means during execution of the bonus game.

  As a result, when a specific effect is executed, it is advantageous for the player that the privilege game is executed, and further, the gaming state after the privilege game ends is changed to the advantageous gaming state. Is also determined, so that the player can have a greater sense of satisfaction.

  In the gaming machine L6, there is provided display means capable of displaying identification information, and dynamic display execution means executing dynamic display of identification information indicating a result of the determination by the determination means on the display means. As a dynamic display mode of the identification information executed based on the result of the first determination in the determination, a first mode in which the first identification information is stopped and displayed, and a second mode in which the first identification information is stopped and displayed. A first mode determining means for determining one of a second mode and a mode in which information is stopped and displayed; and the identification information to be executed based on the second determination result obtained by the determination by the determining means. A gaming machine L7, comprising: a second mode determining means for determining the first mode as a dynamic display mode.

  According to the gaming machine L7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine L6. That is, the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means is executed by the display means by the dynamic display execution means. As a dynamic display mode of the identification information executed based on the first determination result obtained by the determination unit, a first mode in which the first identification information is stopped and displayed, and a second mode in which the first identification information is stopped and displayed. Either the second mode of the mode in which the identification information is stopped and displayed is determined by the first mode determining means. The first mode is determined by the second mode determining unit as the mode of the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the second determination result obtained by the determining unit.

  Accordingly, when the dynamic display of the identification information is performed in the first mode, it is difficult for the player to determine whether the result is the first determination result or the second determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that a game can be played by paying attention to whether or not a specific effect is selected by the first selecting means.

  In the gaming machine L7, the first selection means determines the first determination result by the determination by the determination means, and performs the determination by the determination means rather than performing the dynamic display of the identification information in the second mode. The first determination result is obtained, and when the dynamic display of the identification information is executed in the first mode, the ratio of selecting the specific effect is configured to be higher. A gaming machine L8 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine L8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L7, the first determination result is obtained by the determination by the determining unit, and the determination by the determining unit is more effective than the dynamic display of the identification information is performed in the second mode. In the case where the first determination result is obtained and the dynamic display of the identification information is executed in the first mode, the ratio of selection of the specific effect by the first selecting means is higher. When the dynamic display of is performed, there is an effect that the game can be performed with a stronger expectation that the specific effect is selected by the first selecting means.

  A1 to A10, B1 to B13, C1 to C9, D1 to D9, E1 to E8, F1 to F10, G1 to G8, H1 to H10, I1 to I8, J1 to J9, K1 to K9, L1 to L8 In any one of the above embodiments, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in response to operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided in an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is a case where the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable the ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

  A1 to A10, B1 to B13, C1 to C9, D1 to D9, E1 to E8, F1 to F10, G1 to G8, H1 to H10, I1 to I8, J1 to J9, K1 to K9, L1 to L8 The gaming machine Z2, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information is provided, which is used to operate a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

A1 to A10, B1 to B13, C1 to C9, D1 to D9, E1 to E8, F1 to F10, G1 to G8, H1 to H10, I1 to I8, J1 to J9, K1 to K9, L1 to L8 In any one of the above embodiments, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
<Others>
As a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device is known. In this conventional gaming machine, a symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a big hit game advantageous to the player is given. In addition, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed on the display device in addition to the design, and various types of entertainment effects can be executed. Further, in such conventional gaming machines, there are also those provided with an audio output device such as a speaker, and not only a visual effect but also an auditory effect can be executed, so that the effect of the effect mode can be achieved. Diversification has been attempted (for example, Patent Document 1: JP-A-2003-325886).
However, there is a possibility that it becomes more difficult to suitably perform the effect as the effect mode is diversified.
The present technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably executing an effect.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 comprises: an effect executing means for executing any one of a plurality of predetermined effects based on establishment of a predetermined execution condition; The effect determining means for determining one effect to be executed from among the plurality of effects, and an effect data group formed of a plurality of data, which is used to execute one effect by the effect executing means, Effect data group storage means for each of the plurality of effect types, and effect data group selecting means for selecting an effect data group corresponding to the effect type determined by the effect determining means from the effect data group storage means And the plurality of data forming the effect data group selected by the effect data group selecting means are used by the effect executing means in a predetermined specific order. Comprises a data setting means for setting, based on the progress status of the game, and a sequence changing means capable of variably in different order from said particular order the sequence in which the plurality of data is used.
The gaming machine of the technical concept 2 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, wherein the data setting unit is configured to execute the effect using the data of the last order in the specific order based on the completion of the effect. The setting is such that the data of the first order in a specific order is used by the effect executing means.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is a game machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the discriminating means for executing the discrimination based on the satisfaction of a predetermined discriminating condition, and a specific discrimination result by the discriminating means. Bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the bonus game has been performed, wherein the effect execution means executes any of the plurality of effects during execution of the bonus game. It is.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 3, wherein the effect data group provided for each of the plurality of effect types is a specific effect set for each effect type. The first data corresponding to the aspect and the second data different from the first data, and the order changing means is configured to execute the privilege game until the privilege game ends. The order in which the plurality of data is used is changed so that the first data is used at least once by the effect executing means.
The gaming machine according to the technical concept 5 is the gaming machine according to the technical concept 4, wherein the order changing unit is configured to execute the first data by the effect executing unit during a predetermined specific period in the bonus game. The order in which the plurality of data are used is changed so that the data is used.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, on the basis of establishment of a predetermined execution condition, an effect executing means for executing any one of a plurality of predetermined effects, and 1 for causing the effect executing means to execute the effect. Effect determination means for deciding the effect from among the plurality of effects, and an effect data group composed of a plurality of data used for executing one effect by the effect execution means. Effect data group storage means stored for each type of effect data, effect data group selection means for selecting an effect data group corresponding to the effect type determined by the effect determination means from the effect data group memory means, Data set so that the plurality of data constituting the effect data group selected by the data group selecting means is used by the effect executing means in a predetermined specific order. Comprising a setting unit, based on the progress status of the game, and a sequence changing means capable of variably in different order from said particular order the sequence in which the plurality of data is used.
Thereby, there is an effect that the effect can be suitably executed.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, the data setting means terminates the execution of the effect using the data in the last order in the specific order. Based on the result, the data of the first order in the specific order is set so as to be used by the effect executing means.
Thereby, when the execution of one effect is completed by the effect executing means, the effect can be executed again from the beginning of the effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the execution of the effect can be continued even if the execution of the effect using the data in the last order ends.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the discriminating means for executing the discrimination based on the satisfaction of a predetermined discriminating condition, and the discriminating means A bonus game execution unit that executes a bonus game advantageous to the player based on a specific determination result in the determination, wherein the effect execution unit performs the plurality of effects during execution of the bonus game. One of them is executed.
Thereby, during execution of the bonus game, there is an effect that the effect can be suitably executed.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3, the effect data group provided for each of the plurality of effect types includes, for each effect type, It is at least composed of first data corresponding to a specific effect mode that has been set, and second data different from the first data. The order in which the plurality of data is used is varied so that the first data is used at least once by the effect execution unit until the process is completed.
Thereby, there is an effect that a specific effect mode can be executed at least once during execution of the bonus game.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, the order changing means may perform the first game in the predetermined specific period in the privilege game. The order in which the plurality of data is used is varied so that the data is used by the effect executing means.
As a result, there is an effect that a game can be performed during execution of the privilege game, with the specific period being one of the pleasures.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
81 third symbol display device (display means)
230 operation buttons (operation means)
308 speaker unit (audio output means)
S4351 Order determining means, setting means
S5104 image group display means S5107 demonstration execution hand stage
S5111 image changing unit S9208, S9213 part of some S9308 voice data reproduction means of the voice data reproduction means

Claims (5)

Effect execution means for executing any one of a plurality of predetermined effects based on the satisfaction of a predetermined execution condition;
Effect determination means for determining one effect to be performed by the effect execution means from the plurality of effects;
Effect data group storage means, which is used for executing one effect by the effect execution means, and stores effect data groups composed of a plurality of data for each of the plurality of effect types;
Effect data group selecting means for selecting an effect data group corresponding to the type of effect determined by the effect determining means from the effect data group storage means,
Data setting means for setting the plurality of data constituting the effect data group selected by the effect data group selecting means to be used by the effect executing means in a predetermined specific order;
A gaming machine comprising: an order changing unit that can change an order in which the plurality of data is used to an order different from the specific order according to a progress of a game.   The data setting unit is configured such that the first order data in the specific order is used by the effect execution unit based on the completion of execution of the effect using the last order data in the specific order. 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is set. Determining means for performing a determination based on satisfaction of a predetermined determination condition;
Bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on a specific result of the determination by the determination means,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the effect executing means executes one of the plurality of effects during execution of the privilege game. The effect data group provided for each of the plurality of effect types includes first data corresponding to a specific effect mode set for each effect type, and a second data different from the first data. And at least the data of
The order changing means changes an order in which the plurality of data is used so that the first data is used at least once by the effect executing means until the bonus game is completed. The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein:   The order changing means changes an order in which the plurality of data is used such that the first data is used by the effect executing means in a predetermined specific period of the privilege game. The gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein the gaming machine is operated.

Images